PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.

3)

Wecon PLC LX5V

Series Programming
Manual
(V2.3)

Website: http://www.we-con.com.cn/en
Phone: 86-591-8786886
Time: 21 October 2022
 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

Content summary

This manual has a comprehensive introduction to the basic functions of WECON PLC Editor and the
actual use. This book is completely aimed at zero-based readers, is an essential reference book for
entry-level readers to quickly and fully grasp WECON PLC and WECON PLC Editor.

This book starts from the basic product of WECON PLC and the basic concept and operation of
WECON PLC Editor. It combines with a large number of cases and graphic analysis to
comprehensively and deeply explain the use of WECON PLC Editor Software, as well as PLC
program.

WECON technology Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.

1 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

✎Safety Note
Before the installation, operation, maintenance and repair of the micro programmable control, please read this manual and other
related manuals to ensure correct use. Please use it after you have mastered the operation method, safety information and all
✎Note:
(1) Design considerations
In the event of an abnormality in the external power supply or failure of the programmable controller, to ensure the safe operation of
the entire system, be sure to install a safety circuit outside the programmable controller.
1) Be sure to install an emergency brake circuit, a protection circuit, an interlock circuit for reverse operation, such as an
emergency brake circuit, a protection circuit, a forward and reverse circuit, and an interlock circuit for the upper and lower
positioning limits to prevent machine damage, in the external circuit of the programmable controller.
2) When the programmable controller CPU detects abnormal conditions such as WDT errors through self-diagnosis, all
outputs are shut off. In addition, when the programmable controller CPU cannot detect abnormalities in the input/output
control part, etc., it cannot control the output. At this time, in order to make the machine operate safely, please design the
external circuit and mechanism.
3) Due to the failure of the relay and transistor of the output unit, it is impossible to control the state of the output to ON or
OFF. In order to ensure the safe operation of the machine, please design external circuits and mechanisms for output signals
related to major accidents.
(2) Installation Precautions
1) Please use it in the general specification environment described in the manual.
Do not use in the following places: places with dust, oily smoke, conductive dust, corrosive gas, flammable gas; places
exposed to high temperature, condensation, wind and rain; places with vibration or impact. Electric shock, fire, and
misoperation can also cause product damage.
2) When processing screw holes and wiring, do not let iron filings or wire ends fall into the ventilation window of the
programmable controller. It may cause fire, malfunction, or misoperation.
3) Please insert the connecting cable and display module accurately into the specified sockets. Poor contact may cause
misoperation.

 ● To prevent the temperature from rising, do not install at the bottom, top or vertical direction.Be
Note

sure to install it horizontally on the wall as shown on the right.

 ● Please leave a space of more than 50mm between the host and other equipment or structures.
 Try to avoid high-voltage lines, high-voltage equipment, and power equipment.
(3) Wiring considerations
The signal input and output lines of the programmable controller cannot pass through the same cable.
In addition, signal input lines and output lines cannot pass through the same pipeline with other power lines and output lines, and
cannot be bundled together.
If implemented according to the above precautions, even if the input and output wiring is as long as 50 to 100m, there is almost no
noise problem. But generally for safety, the wiring length should be within 20m.

 ● The installation and wiring must be performed when the external power supply is cut off. Otherwise, it may cause electric
Note

shock or product damage.

 ● After installation and wiring, etc., the terminal cover must be installed before power-on operation to avoid electric shock.

2 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

It is very dangerous to close the positive and

! negative contactors at the same time. For loads

Danger like this, in addition to the interlock set by the

internal program of the programmable
controller, the interlock shown above must also
be set outside the programmable controller.

! Do not connect the empty terminal to the outside, otherwise the product will be damaged.
Attention
● Please connect the AC power supply to the dedicated terminal according to the content in the manual.
If the AC power supply is connected to the DC input/output terminal or the DC power supply terminal, the programmable controller
will be burnt out.
● Please do not supply power to the 24+ terminal of the basic unit from the external power supply, and to the empty terminal .
Do not wire from the outside, otherwise the product will be damaged.
Please ground the ground terminal of the basic unit according to the third method. But please do not share the ground with the
strong current system.
● The programmable controller will continue to work if there is an instantaneous power failure of less than 10ms.
Rememb
Attached

● When the power is cut for a long time or the voltage is low, the programmable controller will stop working and the
output will turn OFF, but once the power supply is restored, it will automatically restart.

(4) Precautions for startup and maintenance

Danger
● Please do not touch the terminals when the power is on, otherwise it may cause electric shock or misoperation.
● Please clean and disassemble the terminal after the power is turned off. Performing it while the power is on may cause electric
shock.
● Please read the manual thoroughly and fully confirm the safety before proceeding with program changes, forced output,
RUN/STOP, etc. during machine operation.
Operation errors can damage the machine and cause accidents.

Caution
● Please do not disassemble or modify, otherwise it may cause malfunction, malfunction, fire.
※For repair matters, please contact Fuzhou Wecon Electronic Technology Co., Ltd.
● After the power is turned off, perform the installation and disassembly of the extension cables and other connecting cables,
otherwise it may cause malfunctions and malfunctions.
(5) Maintenance
● Regular inspection: Whether the programmable controller is equipped with consumables with a shorter life.
● For relay output type, if the output relay works abnormally at a high frequency or drives a large-capacity load, you must pay
attention to its impact on the service life.
● Check with other equipment, please pay attention to the following points:
Whether there is an abnormal increase in the temperature inside the machine due to other heating elements or direct sunlight.
Whether dust or conductive dust has penetrated into the machine.
Whether there are loose wiring and terminals or other abnormalities

3 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

Contents
1 Execution of the program ................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 The composition of the scan ..................................................................................................... 1
Initialization ............................................................................................................................... 1
Input and output point refresh ..................................................................................................1
Operation of the program ......................................................................................................... 1
END processing .......................................................................................................................... 1
1.2 Scan time ................................................................................................................................... 2
Initial scan time ..........................................................................................................................2
1.3 The flow of each procedure .......................................................................................................2
1.4 Types of program execution ......................................................................................................3
2 Description of devices .......................................................................................................................19
2.1 User device .............................................................................................................................. 19
Input relay (X) .......................................................................................................................... 19
Output relay (Y) ....................................................................................................................... 19
Internal relay (M) .....................................................................................................................20
Status relay (S) ......................................................................................................................... 20
Timer (T) ...................................................................................................................................20
Counter (C) ...............................................................................................................................21
Long counter (LC) .....................................................................................................................22
High-speed counter (HSC) ....................................................................................................... 22
Data register (D & R) ................................................................................................................22
2.2 System device .......................................................................................................................... 23
Special Relay (SM) ....................................................................................................................23
Special Register (SD) ................................................................................................................ 23
2.3 Index Register .......................................................................................................................... 23
Index register ([D]) ...................................................................................................................23
2.4 Nesting .....................................................................................................................................24
Nesting (N) ............................................................................................................................... 24
2.5 Pointer ..................................................................................................................................... 24
Pointer (P) ................................................................................................................................ 24
2.6 Constant ...................................................................................................................................24
Decimal constant (K) ................................................................................................................24
Hexadecimal constant (H) ........................................................................................................24
Real number constant (E) ........................................................................................................ 24
String constant .........................................................................................................................25
2.7 Power-down retention setting ................................................................................................ 25
2.8 Special use of device ................................................................................................................25
3 Sequence control program instructions ........................................................................................... 26
3.1 Contact instructions .................................................................................................................26
Operation start, series connection, parallel connection .........................................................26
3.2 Combining instructions ............................................................................................................33

1 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Series connection and parallel connection of Circuit program blocks ....................................33
Push, read, and pop of calculation results .............................................................................. 34
Invert the result of operation .................................................................................................. 35
Pulse operation result ..............................................................................................................36
3.3 Output instructions ..................................................................................................................37
OUT instruction (except timers and counters) ........................................................................ 37
SET instruction ......................................................................................................................... 38
RST instruction .........................................................................................................................40
PLF/Falling edge output ...........................................................................................................42
PLS/Rising edge output ............................................................................................................43
3.4 END/Sequence control program end instruction ....................................................................43
4 Program flow instructions ................................................................................................................ 44
4.1 Program jump .......................................................................................................................... 44
CJ/Conditional jump ................................................................................................................ 44
4.2 Subroutine jump ...................................................................................................................... 48
CALL/Subroutine call ................................................................................................................48
4.3 Interrupt disable, interrupt enable ..........................................................................................50
DI and EI/Interrupt prohibited and allowed ............................................................................50
SIMASK/Interrupt mask ........................................................................................................... 54
4.4 Cycle instructions .....................................................................................................................55
FOR to NEXT/Cycle ...................................................................................................................55
BREAK/Break cycle ...................................................................................................................57
4.5 Master Control Instructions .....................................................................................................58
MC and MCR instructions ........................................................................................................ 58
4.6 Watchdog reset ....................................................................................................................... 61
WDT/watchdog timer .............................................................................................................. 61
5 Timer and counter output instructions ............................................................................................ 62
5.1 Timer output instruction ......................................................................................................... 62
OUT T/Timer output ................................................................................................................ 62
5.2 Counter output instructions .................................................................................................... 63
OUT C/Counter output ............................................................................................................ 63
OUT LC instruction/Long counter output ................................................................................ 64
6 High-speed input counter .................................................................................................................65
6.1 Specifications of high-speed counter ...................................................................................... 65
Types of high-speed counters ..................................................................................................65
Highest frequency ....................................................................................................................66
High-speed counter allocation ................................................................................................ 66
High-speed counter use steps ................................................................................................. 67
6.2 High-speed counter instructions ............................................................................................. 69
OUT HSC/High-speed counter switch ......................................................................................69
DHSCS/High-speed comparison set .........................................................................................70
DHSCR/High-speed comparison reset ..................................................................................... 72
DHSZ/High-speed zone comparison ........................................................................................ 73

2 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
7 Basic instructions .............................................................................................................................. 76
7.1 Transfer comparison instruction ............................................................................................. 76
MOV/16-bit transmission ........................................................................................................ 76
DMOV/32-bit transmission ......................................................................................................77
BMOV/Batch transmission ...................................................................................................... 78
FMOV/16-bit multicast ............................................................................................................ 79
DFMOV/ 32-bit multicast .........................................................................................................80
SMOV/Bit shift ......................................................................................................................... 81
CML/16-bit invert transmission ...............................................................................................83
DCML/32-bit invert transmission ............................................................................................ 84
CMP/16-bit data comparison output ...................................................................................... 85
DCMP/32-bit data comparison output ....................................................................................86
XCH/16-bit data exchange .......................................................................................................87
DXCH/32-bit data exchange .................................................................................................... 88
ZCP/16-bit data interval comparison .......................................................................................89
DZCP/32-bit data interval comparison .................................................................................... 90
7.2 Cycle shift instruction .............................................................................................................. 92
ROR/16-bit cycle shift right ......................................................................................................92
DROR/32-bit cycle shift right ................................................................................................... 93
RCR/16-bit cycle shift right with carry .....................................................................................94
DRCR/32-bit cycle shift right with carry .................................................................................. 96
ROL/16-bit cycle shift left ........................................................................................................ 97
DROL/32-bit cycle shift left ......................................................................................................98
RCL/16-bit cycle shift left with carry ....................................................................................... 99
DRCL/32-bit cycle shift left with carry ................................................................................... 100
SFTR/n-bit shift right of n-bit data .........................................................................................101
SFTL/n-bit shift left of n-bit data ........................................................................................... 102
WSFR/n-word shift right of n-word data ...............................................................................103
WSFL/n-word shift left of n-word data ................................................................................. 104
SFR/n-bit shift right of 16-bit data .........................................................................................105
DSFR/n word data shift right by 1 word ................................................................................ 106
SFL/n-bit shift left of 16-bit data ........................................................................................... 107
DSFL/one word shift left of n word data ............................................................................... 108
7.3 Arithmetic operation instructions ......................................................................................... 109
ADD/16-bit addition operation ..............................................................................................109
DADD/32-bit addition operation ........................................................................................... 110
SUB/16-bit subtraction operation ......................................................................................... 112
DSUB/32-bit subtraction operation .......................................................................................113
MUL/16-bit multiplication ..................................................................................................... 115
DMUL/32-bit multiplication ...................................................................................................116
DIV/16-bit division operation ................................................................................................ 117
DDIV/32-bit division operation ..............................................................................................118
INC/16-bit data increment .....................................................................................................119

3 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DINC/32-bit data increment .................................................................................................. 120
DEC/16 bit data decrement ................................................................................................... 121
DDEC/32-bit data decrement ................................................................................................ 122
7.4 Logic Operation Instructions ................................................................................................. 123
NEG/16-bit complement ....................................................................................................... 123
DNEG/32-bit complement ..................................................................................................... 124
WOR/16-bit data logical OR ...................................................................................................125
DOR/32-bit data logical OR ....................................................................................................126
WAND/16-bit data logic AND ................................................................................................ 127
DAND/32-bit data logic AND ................................................................................................. 128
WXOR/16-bit data logic exclusive OR ....................................................................................129
DXOR/32-bit data logic exclusive OR .....................................................................................130
PRUN/8 digit transmission (16-bit data) ............................................................................... 131
7.5 Data processing instructions ................................................................................................. 133
BCC/BIN16 and BIN8 bit data addition, subtraction and exclusive check .............................133
MAX/BIN16 bit the maximum value of 16-bit data ...............................................................136
DMAX/BIN32 bit the maximum value of 32-bit data ............................................................ 137
MIN/BIN16 bit the minimum value of 16-bit data ................................................................ 138
DMIN/BIN32 bit the minimum value of 32-bit data ..............................................................139
ANS/alarm settings ................................................................................................................ 140
ANR/Alarm reset ....................................................................................................................142
BON/16-bit data bit judgment ...............................................................................................143
DBON/32-bit data bit judgment ............................................................................................ 144
ENCO/Encode ........................................................................................................................ 145
DECO/Decode ........................................................................................................................ 146
SUM/The ON bits of 16-bit data ............................................................................................147
DSUM/The ON bits of 32-bit data ......................................................................................... 148
MEAN/Mean value of 16-bit data ......................................................................................... 149
DMEAN/Mean value of 16-bit data ....................................................................................... 150
SQR/16-bit square root ..........................................................................................................151
DSQR/32-bit square root ....................................................................................................... 152
WSUM/The sum value of 16-bit data ....................................................................................153
DWSUM/The sum value of 32-bit data ................................................................................. 154
SORT/16-bit data sorting ....................................................................................................... 155
SORT2/16-bit data sorting ..................................................................................................... 158
DSORT2/32-bit data sorting ...................................................................................................161
SWAP/16-bit data high and low byte swap ...........................................................................164
DSWAP/32-bit data high and low byte swap ........................................................................ 165
BTOW/Byte unit data merge ................................................................................................. 166
WTOB/Byte unit data separation .......................................................................................... 168
DIS/4-bit separation of 16-bit data ........................................................................................170
UNI/4-bit combination of 16-bit data ....................................................................................171
ZRST/Data batch reset ........................................................................................................... 172

4 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
ZSET/Data batch set ...............................................................................................................174
CRC/cyclic redundancy check instruction ..............................................................................175
CRC-XMODEM/cyclic redundancy check instruction ............................................................ 178
LRC/longitudinal redundancy check ...................................................................................... 181
STDEV/BIN 16-bit sample standard deviation .......................................................................184
DSTDEV/BIN 32-bit sample standard deviation .................................................................... 185
7.6 Matrix input instructions ....................................................................................................... 186
MTR/Matrix input .................................................................................................................. 186
7.7 Convenient instructions .........................................................................................................188
ABSD/BIN 16-bit data absolute method ................................................................................188
DABSD/BIN 32-bit data absolute method ............................................................................. 190
SER/16-bit data search .......................................................................................................... 192
DSER/32-bit data search ........................................................................................................193
ALT/Bit device output inversion ............................................................................................ 195
INCD/BIN 16-bit data relative method .................................................................................. 197
RAMP/Control ramp signal ....................................................................................................199
ROTC/Rotary table proximity control ....................................................................................201
STMR/Special function timer .................................................................................................204
TTMR/Demonstration timer ..................................................................................................206
TRH/Conversion of wet and dry bulb temperature and humidity ........................................ 208
MOVAVG/BIN 32-bit moving average filtering instructions ..................................................210
FOLAG/BIN 32-bit first order lag filter instruction ................................................................ 212
RCD/BIN 16-bit data logging instruction ............................................................................... 214
7.8 External IO instructions ......................................................................................................... 216
ARWS/Arrow switch .............................................................................................................. 216
DSW/Numeric key input ........................................................................................................ 219
HKY/Hexadecimal numeric key input .................................................................................... 221
DHKY/32 system numeric key input ...................................................................................... 224
Error code .............................................................................................................................. 225
PR/ASCII code printing ...........................................................................................................226
SEGD/Numeric key input ....................................................................................................... 228
SEGL/7SEG code hour and minute display ............................................................................ 229
TKY/Numeric key input ..........................................................................................................232
DTKY/Numeric key input ....................................................................................................... 234
7.9 Data conversion instruction .................................................................................................. 236
BCD/BIN → BCD ..................................................................................................................... 236
BIN/4-bit BCD → BIN ............................................................................................................. 237
DBIN/8-bit BCD → BIN ........................................................................................................... 239
FLT/BIN integer → binary floating point number ..................................................................240
DFLT/BIN integer → binary floating point number ............................................................... 242
VAL/ String → BIN 16-bit data conversion ............................................................................ 243
DVAL/String → BIN32-bit data conversion ............................................................................244
ASCI/HEX code data →ASCII conversion ............................................................................... 246

5 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
HEX/ASCII → HEX code data conversion ............................................................................... 249
CCD/Check code .................................................................................................................... 251
GBIN/Gray code → BIN 16-bit data conversion .................................................................... 254
DGBIN/Gray code → BIN32-bit data conversion ...................................................................255
GRY/BIN 16-bit data → Gray code conversion ...................................................................... 256
DGRY/BIN 32-bit data → Gray code conversion ....................................................................257
DPRUN/Otal digit transmission (32-bit data) ........................................................................ 258
7.10 Floating point instructions ...................................................................................................259
CHKFLT/Single precision real number check command ........................................................259
DACOS/Single precision real number COS-1 operation ........................................................ 262
DASIN/Single precision real number SIN-1 operation ............................................................263
DATAN/Single precision real number TAN-1 operation ......................................................... 264
DCOS/Single precision real number COS operation .............................................................. 265
DCOSH/Single precision real number COSH operation ......................................................... 266
DSIN/Single precision real number SIN operation ................................................................ 267
DSINH/Single precision real number SINH operation ........................................................... 268
DTAN/Single precision real number TAN operation ..............................................................269
DATANH/Single precision real number TANH operation ...................................................... 270
DDEG/Single precision real number radian → angle conversion ..........................................271
DRAD/Single precision real number conversion angle → radian conversion ....................... 272
DEADD/Single precision real number addition operation .....................................................273
DESUB/Single precision real number subtraction operation ................................................ 275
DEMUL/Single precision real number multiplication operation ........................................... 277
DEDIV/Single precision real number division operation ....................................................... 279
DEMOD/Single precision real number remainder operation ................................................281
DEMOV/Single precision real data transmission ...................................................................282
DEBCD/Binary floating point → decimal floating point conversion ......................................283
DEBIN/Decimal floating point → binary floating point conversion .......................................284
DENEG/Single precision real number sign inversion .............................................................285
DECMP/Single precision real number comparison ............................................................... 286
DEZCP/Binary floating point bandwidth comparison ............................................................287
DESQR/Single precision real square root .............................................................................. 289
DESTR/Single precision real number → string conversion ....................................................290
DEVAL/String → single precision real number conversion ................................................... 295
DEXP/Single precision real number exponential operation ..................................................299
INT/Single precision real number → signed BIN 16-bit data .................................................300
DINT/Single precision real number→ signed BIN 32-bit data ............................................... 301
DLOG10/Single precision real number common logarithmic operation ...............................302
DLOGE/Single precision real number natural logarithm operation ...................................... 303
7.11 Contact comparison instruction .......................................................................................... 304
Signed 16-bit contact comparison instruction ...................................................................... 304
Signed 32-bit contact comparison instruction ...................................................................... 306
Single precision real number contact comparison instruction ............................................. 308

6 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
String comparison ..................................................................................................................310
7.12 Clock operation instruction ................................................................................................. 312
TADD/The addition of clock data ...........................................................................................312
TSUB/The subtraction of clock data ...................................................................................... 314
TRD/Clock data reading ......................................................................................................... 316
TWR/Clock data writing .........................................................................................................317
HTOS/16-bit data conversion of time data (hour, minute, second → second) .................... 319
DHTOS/32-bit data conversion of time data (hour, minute, second → second) .................. 320
HOUR/Hour measuring 16-bit ............................................................................................... 321
DHOUR/Hour measuring 32 bits ............................................................................................323
STOH/16-bit data conversion of time data (second → hour, minute, second) .................... 325
DSTOH/32-bit data conversion of time data (second → hour, minute, second) .................. 326
TCMP/Clock data comparison ............................................................................................... 327
TZCP/Clock data bandwidth comparison .............................................................................. 329
TON/BIN 16-bit Turn-on delay timer ..................................................................................... 331
TONR/BIN 16-bit Hold-type turn-on delay timer .................................................................. 333
TOF/BIN 16-bit Turn-off delay timer ..................................................................................... 335
TP/BIN 16-bit Start pulse timer ............................................................................................. 337
7.13 Data control instructions ..................................................................................................... 339
BAND/BIN 16-bit data dead zone control ............................................................................. 339
DBAND/BIN 32-bit data dead zone control ........................................................................... 340
BINDA/BIN 16-bit data → Decimal ASCII conversion ............................................................ 342
DBINDA/BIN 32-bit data → Decimal ASCII conversion ..........................................................343
DABIN/Decimal ASCII → BIN conversion ............................................................................... 344
DDABIN/Decimal ASCII → BIN32-bit data conversion ...........................................................345
LIMIT/ BIN 16-bit data high and low limit control .................................................................347
DLIMIT/BIN 32-bit data high and low limit control ............................................................... 348
SCL/BIN 16-bit unit scale (coordinate data of each point) ....................................................349
DSCL/32-bit unit scale (coordinate data of each point) ........................................................ 352
SCL2/BIN 16-bit unit scale (X/Y coordinate data) ..................................................................355
DSCL2/BIN 32-bit unit scale (X/Y coordinate data) ............................................................... 358
ZONE/BIN 16-bit data zone control .......................................................................................361
DZONE/BIN 32-bit data zone control .................................................................................... 362
7.14 Data block instructions ........................................................................................................ 363
BK+/BIN 16-bit block data addition operation ...................................................................... 363
DBK+/BIN 32-bit block data addition operation ....................................................................365
BK-/BIN 16-bit block data subtraction operation ..................................................................367
DBK-/BIN 32-bit block data subtraction operation ............................................................... 369
BKCMP=/BIN 16-bit block data comparison ..........................................................................371
DBKCMP=/BIN32-bit block data comparison ........................................................................ 372
BKCMP<>/BIN 16-bit block data comparison ........................................................................373
DBKCMP<>/BIN32-bit block data comparison ...................................................................... 375
BKCMP>/BIN 16-bit block data comparison ..........................................................................376

7 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DBKCMP>/BIN32-bit block data comparison ........................................................................ 377
BKCMP>=/BIN 16-bit block data comparison ........................................................................379
DBKCMP>=/BIN32-bit block data comparison ...................................................................... 380
BKCMP</BIN 16-bit block data comparison ..........................................................................381
DBKCMP</BIN 32-bit block data ........................................................................................... 383
BKCMP<=/BIN16-bit block data comparison .........................................................................384
DBKCMP<=/BIN32-bit block data comparison ...................................................................... 385
7.15 Data table operation instructions ........................................................................................387
SFRD/shift read ...................................................................................................................... 387
POP/Read from the back of the data table ........................................................................... 389
SFWR/Shift write ................................................................................................................... 391
FINS/Data table data insertion .............................................................................................. 393
FDEL/Data deletion of data sheet ......................................................................................... 394
7.16 IO refresh instruction ...........................................................................................................396
REF/IO refresh ........................................................................................................................396
REFF/Input refresh (with filter setting) ................................................................................. 398
7.17 Timing measure instruction .................................................................................................399
DUTY/Clock pulse generation instruction ............................................................................. 399
7.18 Random number instruction ............................................................................................... 401
RND/Random number instruction .........................................................................................401
7.19 Preferred instruction ........................................................................................................... 402
DEXMN/Preferred instruction ............................................................................................... 402
8 High-speed pulse output ................................................................................................................ 407
8.1 High-speed pulse output instruction .....................................................................................407
ZRN/DZRN/Origin return ....................................................................................................... 407
DSZR/DDSZR/Origin return ....................................................................................................409
DVIT/DDVIT/16-bit data relative positioning ........................................................................ 411
DRVI/DDRVI/Relative positioning ..........................................................................................413
DRVA/DDRVA/Absolute positioning ......................................................................................415
PLSR/DPLSR/Pulse output with acceleration and deceleration ............................................ 417
PLSR2/Multi-speed positioning ............................................................................................. 419
PLSV/DPLSV/Variable speed operation ................................................................................. 425
PLSY/DPLSY/Pulse output ...................................................................................................... 427
PWM/BIN 16-bit pulse output ...............................................................................................429
PWM/PWM permil mode ......................................................................................................430
G90G01 Absolute position line interpolation instruction ..................................................... 432
G91G01 Relative position line interpolation instruction .......................................................434
G90G02 Absolute position clockwise circular interpolation instruction ...............................436
G91G02 Relative position clockwise circular interpolation instruction ................................ 439
G90G03 Absolute position counterclockwise circular interpolation instruction ..................442
G91G03 Relative position counterclockwise circular interpolation instruction ................... 445
G90G02H Absolute position clockwise circular helical interpolation instruction .................448
G91G02H Relative position clockwise circular helical interpolation instruction .................. 451

8 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
G90G03H Absolute position counterclockwise circular helical interpolation instruction .... 454
G91G03H Relative position counterclockwise circular helical interpolation instruction ..... 457
8.2 General matters of high-speed pulse output instruction ......................................................460
Related bit devices .................................................................................................................460
Related word devices ............................................................................................................ 463
9 Electronic cam .................................................................................................................................481
9.1 Electronic CAM (ECAM) instruction .......................................................................................470
DEGEAR/Electronic gear/32 bit hand wheel instruction .......................................................470
DECAM/32-bit electronic cam instruction ...........................................................................4743
ECAMCUT/Electronic cam table switching instruction ......................................................... 477
ECAMTBX/Electronic cam table generation instruction ........................................................480
9.2 Instruction manual of Electronic CAM (ECAM ) .....................................................................482
Principle of ECAM .................................................................................................................. 482
Description of ECAM function ............................................................................................... 482
The application of ECAM ....................................................................................................... 499
Special address ...................................................................................................................... 519
Appendix ................................................................................................................................520
10 Communication instruction .......................................................................................................... 525
10.1 Communication port protocol setting .................................................................................525
PROTOCOL/communication port protocol setting ................................................................525
10.2 Modbus serial port parameter setting ................................................................................ 527
PORTPARA/Modbus serial port parameter setting ............................................................... 527
10.3 Modbus station number setting ..........................................................................................529
STATION/Modbus station number setting ............................................................................ 529
10.4 RS instruction .......................................................................................................................531
RS/External communication instruction ................................................................................531
10.5 RS2 instruction .....................................................................................................................535
RS2/External communication instruction ..............................................................................535
10.6 Expansion module communication ..................................................................................... 540
Single word data writing from TO/PLC to the module (16-bit specification) ........................540
Double word data write from DTO/PLC to the module (32-bit specification) ...................... 542
FROM/Read single word data from the module (16-bit specification) .................................544
DFROM/single word data read from the module (32-bit specification) ............................... 546
10.7 RS and RS2 instructions corresponding protocol description ............................................. 548
10.7.1 Custom protocol description ...................................................................................... 548
10.7.2 Modbus protocol description ..................................................................................... 557
10.8 PLCLINK/Fast interconnect function ....................................................................................567
Create a table ........................................................................................................................ 567
10.9 Wecon Modbus protocol description ..................................................................................579
11 Special instructions .......................................................................................................................580
PID/PID calculation ................................................................................................................ 580
CCPID/CCPID calculation ........................................................................................................583
FPID/FPID calculation ............................................................................................................ 584
9 WECON technology Co., Ltd.
 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
CCPID instruction introduction manual .................................................................................588
CCPIN_SHT operation ............................................................................................................ 598
LAGCDL Large time-delay temperature control instruction ..................................................601
12 String instructions .........................................................................................................................604
LEN/string length detection ...................................................................................................604
LEFT/Extract from the left side of the string ......................................................................... 605
RIGHT/Extract from the right side of the string .................................................................... 607
Any extraction from MIDR/string .......................................................................................... 609
$MOV/ string transfer ........................................................................................................... 611
Arbitrary replacement in MIDW/string ................................................................................. 613
STR/BIN 16-bit data → character string conversion ..............................................................616
DSTR/BIN 32-bit data → string conversion ........................................................................... 618
$+/ Combination of strings .................................................................................................... 621
INSTR/string search ............................................................................................................... 623
ASC/ASCII data input ............................................................................................................. 625
13 step ladder diagram instruction ................................................................................................... 627
13.1 STL/RET step ladder diagram instruction ...................................................................... 627
13.2 IST/Initialization state ....................................................................................................631
14 Ethernet communication ..............................................................................................................639
14.1 Ethernet overview ............................................................................................................... 639
IP address ...............................................................................................................................639
Set PC network address .........................................................................................................639
Test the network connection status ......................................................................................640
PLC Editor2 connect to PLC with Ethernet ............................................................................ 642
PLC Editor2 Ethernet search funtion ..................................................................................... 643
14.2 Ethernet configuration ........................................................................................................ 644
Hardware interface ................................................................................................................644
Total numbers of links supported ......................................................................................... 644
IP address settings ................................................................................................................. 644
TCP protocol .......................................................................................................................... 646
UDP protocol ......................................................................................................................... 646
Socket .................................................................................................................................... 646
Establish an Ethernet link by socket ...................................................................................... 646
LX5V-N socket configuration instructions ............................................................................. 647
14.3 Ethernet instruction .............................................................................................................649
SOCOPEN/Create a socket link .............................................................................................. 649
SOCCLOSE/Close socket link .................................................................................................. 651
SOCSEND/Ethernet free-form communication sending ........................................................652
SOCRECV/Ethernet free-form communication reveiving ......................................................653
SOCMTCP/Ethernet ModbusTCP communication .................................................................654
14.4 Ethernet applications ...........................................................................................................655
Data exchange between two PLCs through ModbusTCP ...................................................... 655
Data exchange between two PLCs through Free TCP ........................................................... 656

10 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Data exchange between two PLCs through Free UDP .......................................................... 659
14.5 List of special device related to Ethernet ............................................................................ 662
14.6 Ethernet error codes table .................................................................................................. 667
Operational error ...................................................................................................................667
Appendix ............................................................................................................................................671
Attachment 1 Special Relay (SM) ................................................................................................ 671
Error message ........................................................................................................................ 671
System message .....................................................................................................................671
Clock information .................................................................................................................. 671
Scan information ................................................................................................................... 672
Instruction related ................................................................................................................. 672
Interrupt prohibited .............................................................................................................. 674
High-speed input and output ................................................................................................ 674
Pulse output (positioning axis) .............................................................................................. 676
BD module ............................................................................................................................. 681
Communication ..................................................................................................................... 682
List of Special devices related to Ethernet ............................................................................ 683
Appendix 2 Special Register (SD) .................................................................................................684
Error message ........................................................................................................................ 684
System message .....................................................................................................................685
Clock information .................................................................................................................. 685
Scan information ................................................................................................................... 686
Instruction related ................................................................................................................. 687
Interrupt prohibited .............................................................................................................. 687
High-speed input and output ................................................................................................ 688
Pulse output (positioning axis) .............................................................................................. 691
BD module ............................................................................................................................. 698
Right expansion module ........................................................................................................ 699
Input filtering ......................................................................................................................... 699
Communication ..................................................................................................................... 699
List of special devices related to Ethernet .............................................................................701
Log information ..................................................................................................................... 703
Appendix 3 Error code Sorting .....................................................................................................704
PLC hardware error ................................................................................................................704
Circuit program execution error ............................................................................................704
PLC parameter error .............................................................................................................. 704
PLC communication error ......................................................................................................706
PLC operation error ............................................................................................................... 708
Right expansion module error (communication error reported) ..........................................712
Appendix 4 ASCII code comparison table ....................................................................................712
ASCII code comparison table ................................................................................................. 712
Appendix 5 Instruction list ...........................................................................................................715
Application instruction (by instruction type) ........................................................................ 715

11 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Application instruction (by alphabetical order) .................................................................... 725

12 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

1 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

1 Execution of the program

1.1 The composition of the scan
The scan configuration of the CPU module is as follows.

Initialization
c

The initialization based on the status of the CPU module is as follows.

√: execute. ×: not execute
Status of the CPU module
Processing item
When the power is ON STOP When STOP RUN
Initialization of input and output modules √ × ×
CPU parameter check √ × ×
Check of system parameters √ × ×
Device initialization √ × √
Error clear √ × √

Input and output point refresh

Perform the following before starting program calculation.
Update the actual input point of the PLC to the input relay X.
The following is executed after the END instruction is executed.
Update the PLC output relay Y to the actual output point.
Key points
When performing a constant scan, the I/O refresh is performed after the waiting time of the constant scan.

Operation of the program

According to the program setting, the execution starts from step 0 of each program to the END instruction. This program is called the
main program.
END processing
Perform the following processing.
1 Completion processing of partial instructions
2 Watchdog timer reset
3 Communication processing
4 Setting the value of special relay/special register (when the setting timing is END processing)

1 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
1.2 Scan time
The CPU module repeats the following processing, and the scan time is the total of the following processing and execution time.

The initial scan time indicates the time including this processing.
Initial scan time
It is the first scan time of the CPU module in RUN.
Process as the following way:
The value stored in SD134 (initial scan time (ms unit)) and SD135 (initial scan time (s unit)).

1.3 The flow of each procedure

When the CPU module changes to the RUN state, the programs are executed in sequence according to the program execution type
and execution sequence settings.

Key points
When the execution types of the programs are the same, they are executed in the order set in the execution order.
✎Note:
When executing instructions that can be completed with multiple cycles (such as OUT T, RAMP, RS, etc.), they should be programmed
in the scan program. If it is used in event execution type programs and mid-stage execution type programs, these instructions may
not be executed in multiple scan cycles, causing actual results to be different from the ideal results. Therefore, unless events,
interrupts and subroutines can be executed in each scan cycle. It is not recommended to use multi-cycle execution instructions in
other situations.

2 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
1.4 Types of program execution
Scan execution program
Each scan is executed only once from the next scan of the initial execution type program.

When multiple scan execution type programs are executed, the execution time of the scan execution type program is the time until
all scan execution type programs are executed. In addition, before the execution of the scan execution type program is completed, if
an interrupt program/event execution type program/subroutine is executed, the execution time will also be included.
Creation of multiple scanners
"Project Management"→ "Program"→ "Scan"→ Right click to create

1 Scan the program name: the program name requires to match case, and the program name cannot use the same name
with device name (the device name does not match case).
2 The input of /%$@&=~`^<>?:{}[],;!*.\\'" is not supported. It cannot exceed 64 characters. The default name is MAINx.
3 The number of scan programs that can be built is limited to 100.
4 Each scan program has been END ended, but only the last END instruction is completed to calculate a scan cycle.
5 The execution sequence runs from top to bottom in the order of creation.

3 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Event execution program
It uses the event specified by the user as a condition to trigger the program to start execution.

Trigger type
The trigger of event execution type program is as follows.
(1) ON event of bit data (TRUE)
1 After the ON event is specified, if the contact that sets the trigger condition in the ON event is turned ON during the scan
program, the ON event program will be executed in the scan program page*1 or before the END instruction is executed.
2 The ON event program will only be executed once in a single scan cycle.
3 After the ON event is executed, you can set whether to clear the current value of the output (Y) and timer (T) used in the
program.
*1: Scan program paging: multiple scan programs are established, and each scan program is called a paging. After scan program A is
executed, before scan program B is executed, it will be judged whether an event program needs to be executed.

When it is the turn of the execution sequence of event execution type program C and Y50 is ON, the program is executed.
The devices that can be specified are as follows.
Project Content
Bit Device X, Y, M, SM
Device *1
Bit specification of word device D.b
*1 The indexed device cannot be specified.

4 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
(2) TIME event
After the program is to RUN state and the specified time has elapsed, event is executed one time when it comes to the execution
sequence of the first corresponding program. For the second and subsequent executions, the time is re-measured from the start of
the last event execution type program. After the specified time has elapsed, the program is executed repeatedly when it comes to
the execution sequence of the first corresponding program. In addition, in the next scan after the corresponding program is executed,
the current value of the output (Y) and timer (T) used in the corresponding program can be cleared. It can be used for programs that
do not need to respond in a fixed period of time.

After the specified time has elapsed, when it comes to the first execution sequence, the event execution type program C is executed.
Key points
When set to clear the current value of output and timer, and the scan time is longer than the set value of elapsed time, the current
value of output and timer will not be cleared.
Operational steps
(1) New event
Project management→ Program→ Event → Right click to create.

Event program name:

1 The program name requires to match case, and the program name with the same name as the device cannot be used (the
device name does not match case).
2 The program name does not support /%$@&=~`^<>?:{}[],;!*.\\'" character input.
3 The length of the program name cannot exceed 64 characters. The default name is EVENTx.
A maximum of 100 new event programs could be created.

5 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
(2) Execution type
There are two ways to configure the event execution type:
1) Configure when creating a new event program, as shown in the figure above.w
2) Project management→ Program→ Parameter → Program parameter→Configuration

Configuration instructions:
1) Configuration interface:

2) Parameter content:

Project Content Setting range Default

Not set/ON
Execution type Select event type Not set
event/TIME event
The event type can be set when ON event is selected. Set the bit device as
Contact X/Y/M/SM/D.b
the trigger condition.
ON
When the bit device of the trigger condition set by the ON event is turned
event Whether True
OFF, whether to clear the current value of the output (Y) and timer (T) False
to clear False
used in the execution program of the ON event in the next cycle.
1 to 2147483647
Time Set how long to execute the event program once.
(100us unit)
TIME
When the TIME event is executed, if the event is not executed in the next
event Whether True
scan cycle, select whether to clear the output (Y) used in the TIME event False
to clear False
execution program and the current value of the timer (T).
Key points
When "ON event" or "TIME event" is specified, if "Clear or not" is set to "Clear", the event program will not be executed in one scan
cycle, and all the internal outputs (Y) and current value of timer (T) will all be cleared (except for the cumulative type and subroutine
type T). If the time set by the TIME event is less than the scan period, it is equivalent to executing the TIME event every scan period.

6 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Even if the clear output is set, the output and timer data in the event program will not be cleared.
Interrupt execution program
In the process of executing the scan program, the program that can interrupt the priority execution of the scan program is called an
interrupt execution program.
 When an interrupt cause occurs, the interrupt program corresponding to the interrupt pointer number will be executed.
However, the execution needs to be set to the interrupt enabled state by the EI instruction.

 An interrupt name corresponds to an interrupt program, and the interrupt name cannot be repeated. Each interrupt has its
own trigger condition and execution program, and each interrupt program ends with END.
 Interrupt has the characteristic of interrupting the original execution program and executing the interrupt first, but it cannot
interrupt the interrupt program being executed.
 The interrupt program has the concept of priority. The smaller the priority value, the more priority the response. The priority
setting range is 0 to 2.
The actions when an interruption cause occurs are as follows:
1) Interrupt prohibition (DI) when an interruption cause occurs.
If the interrupt execution condition is triggered in a program that is forbidden by DI, the interrupt will not be executed. Even if the
subsequent program uses the EI instruction to allow interruption, the previously shielded interrupt program will not be executed.
Only the interrupt execution condition is triggered again. The interrupt program will be executed.
2) When multiple interrupt causes occur simultaneously in the interrupt enabled state.
The interrupt program with higher priority will be executed sequentially. In addition, when multiple interrupts with the same priority
occur at the same time, the actions are executed in the order of interrupt priority.
If three interrupt programs I0, I10, I16 are created, the priority of I0 is 1, the priority of I10 is 0, and the priority of I16 is 1. The
execution logic is shown in the figure below: I10 has the smallest priority and is executed first; I0 and I16 have the same priority and
are executed in the order of program establishment.

7 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
3) When an interrupt occurs during the waiting time when performing constant scan.
Execute the interrupt program for this interrupt.
4) When other interrupts occur during the execution of the interrupt program.
In the interrupt program (including the specification when the interrupt occurs in the event execution program), when other
interrupts occur, the original interrupt execution program will not be interrupted. After the original interrupt execution program is
completed, the new interrupt program is executed. After the execution is completed Then return to the scanning procedure.
5) During the execution of the interrupt program, when an interrupt cause with a low priority or the same priority occurs.
The interruption cause that occurred is stored, and after the interrupt program in execution ends, the interrupt program
corresponding to the stored interruption cause is executed. Even if the same interruption cause occurs multiple times, the
interruption cause is stored only once.

6) When the same interruption cause occurs during the execution of the interrupt program;
The interruption cause that occurred is stored, and after the interrupt program in execution ends, the interrupt program
corresponding to the stored interruption cause is executed. Even if the same interruption cause occurs multiple times, the
interruption cause is stored only once.
Interrupt trigger condition classification
(1) External input (X) interrupt
1) Description of external input interrupt
 The external input interrupt is triggered by the rising or falling edge of the fixed X point input.
 Supports the rising and falling edge interrupts of a total of 8 input points of X0 to X7, and supports a total of 16 external
input interrupts.
 The same interrupt trigger condition cannot create multiple interrupt programs.
 External input interrupt and high-speed counter cannot use the same X point.
 You must use EI in the scan program to allow interrupts before the interrupt execution program will be executed.

8 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
2) External input interrupt steps.
Project management→ Program→ Interrupt→ right click to create

 The interrupt program name requires to match case, and the program name with the same name as the device cannot be
used (the device name does not match case),
 The interrupt program name does not support the input of /%$@&=~`^<>?:{}[],;!*.\\'" characters,
 The length of the interrupt program name cannot exceed 64 characters and cannot be typed. The default name is INTx.
Click Configure, and select external interrupt for execution type, as shown in the figure below (it can also be configured in "program
parameters" in "parameters" in project management):

Project Content Setting range Default

Not set, External input
Execution type Select the type of interrupt interrupt, Timer event, Not set
high-speed counter interrupt
channel Select the channel for external input interrupt X0 to X7 X0
External Trigger edge
Choose to trigger on rising edge or falling edge Rising edge; Falling edge Rising edge
input type
interrupt When multiple interrupts arrive at the same time, the order
priority 0 to 2 0
of priority execution, the smallest value is executed first

9 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Set the filter time of X point, the unit is 0.01us.
Note: X rising edge interrupt and X falling edge interrupt use
the same X filter, so after the filter setting is changed in the X
Filter time
rising edge configuration, the X falling edge will also change. 0 to 1700 1
(0.01us)
If the filter time is set to 1000, you must ensure that the high
level and low level of the input signal are maintained for
more than 10 us before the interrupt can be triggered.
3) Write interrupt execution program

Double-click the newly created interrupt program in the project management to start writing the interrupt execution program. As
shown in the figure above, a newly created interrupt program is INT_X0_UP, and the trigger condition is configured to execute the
interrupt program when the X0 rising edge is configured. If the EI instruction is used in the main program to allow interrupts, all
programs in INT_X0_UP will be executed whenever X0 changes from OFF to ON , That is, D0 will increment once.

(2) Timer interrupt

1) Timer interrupt description
 Timer interrupt is based on the set time, execute the interrupt program every this time, the minimum time interval can
reach 100us.
 Up to 100 timer interrupt execution programs can be created.
 Each timer interrupt program is independent of each other and does not affect each other.
 Each timer interrupt program should be configured with priority. When triggered at the same time, it is executed in the
order of priority, but when the priority is the same, it is executed in the order of the established program.
 The interrupt execution program is executed only after EI is used in the scanner to allow the interrupt
2) Timer interrupt step
Project management ProgramInterrupt Right click to create. Enter the program name. The program name only supports the
combination of English letters, numbers, and underscores, and must start with an English letter. The default is INTx. Click Configure
and select Timer Interrupt as the execution type, as shown in the figure below (it can also be configured in "program parameters" in
"parameters" in project management).

10 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

Project Content Setting range Default

Not set/External input interrupt/Timer
Execution type Select the type of interrupt Not set
event/high-speed counter interrupt
Time Set the interval time for interrupt triggering 1 to 2147483647 (100us unit)
Timer When multiple interrupts arrive at the same time,
interrupt priority the order of priority execution, the smallest value 0 to 2 0
is executed first
3) Write interrupt execution program

Double-click the newly created timer interrupt program in the project management to start writing the interrupt execution program.
As shown in the figure above, a newly created timer interrupt program is INT0, and the trigger condition is configured to execute the
interrupt program every 10ms. If the main program uses EI to enable interrupts, all instruction programs in INT0 will be executed
every 10ms, namely D0 It will add 1 to 10ms.

(3) High-speed counter interrupt

1) Description of high-speed counter interrupt
 The high-speed counter interrupt triggers an interrupt condition after the set value of the high-speed counter HSC0 to HSC7
provided by the PLC and executes the interrupt program.
11 WECON technology Co., Ltd.
 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
 It can support up to 100 high-speed counter interrupt programs, but the number that can be supported by each channel does
not need to be fixed.
 When using the high-speed counter interrupt, project must configure the high-speed counter and use the OUT HSC instruction
to enable the corresponding counting channel to count before it can be used (see the high-speed counter description section
for the specific configuration method).
 Each high-speed counter interrupt program should be configured with priority. When triggered at the same time, it will be
executed in the order of priority. When the priority is the same, it will be executed in the order of channels HSC0-HSC7. When
the channel is also the same, it is executed in order according to the creation promise.
 Project must use EI in the scan program to allow interrupts before the interrupt execution program will be executed.
✎Note: Both the HSC channel and the external input interrupt channel must use the PLC input point X. It should be noted that it
cannot be reused during configuration. For details, please refer to the configuration chapter of the high-speed counter.
2) high-speed counter interrupt steps
“Project management”“Program“Interrupt”Right click to create. Enter the program name. The program name only supports
the combination of English letters, numbers, and underscores, and must start with an English letter. The default is INTx. Click
Configure, select high-speed interrupt for execution type, as shown in the figure below (it can also be configured in "program
parameters" in "parameters" in project management).

Project Content Setting range Default

Not set, External input
Execution type Select the type of interrupt interrupt, Timer event, Not set
high-speed counter interrupt
Select the type of high-speed counter interrupt:
(1) High-speed comparison interrupt: The interrupt
program is executed after the trigger condition is High-speed compare interrupt
High-speed
High reached. High-speed comparison set
Mode compare
count (2) High-speed comparison setting: After reaching the High-speed comparison reset
interrupt
interrupt trigger condition, the set contact is set. Not set
(3) High-speed comparison reset: reset the set
contact after reaching the trigger condition.
Channel Select the high-speed counter channel used HSC0 to HSC7 HSC0

12 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Set the comparison value of the high-speed counter.
Comparison When the high-speed counter value of the set
-2147483648 to 2147483647
value channel passes this value, the trigger condition is
reached.
When multiple interrupts arrive at the same time, the
Priority order of priority execution, the smallest value is 0 to 2 0
executed first
It is available when selecting high-speed comparison
set and high-speed comparison reset. The contact is
Contact Y/M/D.b
set or reset immediately after the trigger condition is
reached.
3) Description of triggering rules
Mode Configuration The current value Action
High-speed compare 9999 → 10000 Execute all programs in interrupt INT0
Comparison value: 10000
interrupt (INT0) 10001 → 10000 Execute all programs in interrupt INT0
Y10 is immediately set and mapped to the actual
-50001 → -50000 output (not affected by the scan period)
High-speed comparison Comparison value: -50,000 The program in INT1 will not be executed
set (INT1) Contact: Y10 Y10 is immediately set and mapped to the actual
-49999 → -50000 output (not affected by the scan period)
The program in INT1 will not be executed
Y10 is reset immediately and mapped to the actual
399999 → 400000 output (not affected by the scan period)
High-speed comparison Comparison value: 400000 The program in INT2 will not be executed
reset (INT2) Contact: Y10 Y10 is reset immediately and mapped to the actual
400001 → 400000 output (not affected by the scan period)
The program in INT2 will not be executed
✎Note: Both HSC channel and external input interrupt channel need to use the INPUT point X, so it should be noted that it cannot
be reused in configuration. For details, please refer to the configuration section of high-speed counter.
4) Write interrupt execution program
1 New interrupt program
Create three new interrupt programs under the interrupt of project management, namely HSC0_20000, HSC0_30000, HSC0_40000.
Configure the interrupt program in the "program parameters", as shown in the figure below.

13 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
2 High-speed counter configuration
Configure HSC0 for use in the high-speed counter configuration. After selecting the working mode, click the "Check” button. After the
correct configuration box pops up, click Enter.

Call the high-speed counter in the main program and enable interrupts:

Program operation:
Assuming that the High-speed counter channel 0 has been receiving pulses:
When the count value of HSC0 accumulates from 0 to 20000, all procedures of HSC0_20000 are executed.
When the count value of HSC0 is accumulated from 20000 to 30000, all procedures of HSC0_30000 are executed.
When the count value of HSC0 is accumulated from 30000 to 40000, all procedures of HSC0_40000 are executed.
Mask interrupt
(1) Mask through application instructions
The PLC interrupt is in the shielded state by default when it is powered on, and can only be used after the interrupt is allowed
through the EI instruction.
The interrupt mask instruction DI masks all interrupts without parameters, and masks some priority interrupts with parameters (refer
to the program flow instruction DI/EI for details).
(2) Mask through special registers SM and SD
1) External input interrupt mask register
External input interrupt mask register
Special register number Type of interrupt Instruction Defaults
SM352 X0 rising edge interrupt ON: shield interrupts; OFF: interrupt allowed OFF
SM353 X0 falling edge interrupt ON: shield interrupts; OFF: interrupt allowed OFF
SM354 X1 rising edge interrupt ON: shield interrupts; OFF: interrupt allowed OFF
SM355 X1 falling edge interrupt ON: shield interrupts; OFF: interrupt allowed OFF
SM356 X2 rising edge interrupt ON: shield interrupts; OFF: interrupt allowed OFF
SM357 X2 falling edge interrupt ON: shield interrupts; OFF: interrupt allowed OFF
SM358 X3 rising edge interrupt ON: shield interrupts; OFF: interrupt allowed OFF
SM359 X3 falling edge interrupt ON: shield interrupts; OFF: interrupt allowed OFF
SM360 X4 rising edge interrupt ON: shield interrupts; OFF: interrupt allowed OFF

14 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
SM361 X4 falling edge interrupt ON: shield interrupts; OFF: interrupt allowed OFF
SM362 X5 rising edge interrupt ON: shield interrupts; OFF: interrupt allowed OFF
SM363 X5 falling edge interrupt ON: shield interrupts; OFF: interrupt allowed OFF
SM364 X6 rising edge interrupt ON: shield interrupts; OFF: interrupt allowed OFF
SM365 X6 falling edge interrupt ON: shield interrupts; OFF: interrupt allowed OFF
SM366 X7 rising edge interrupt ON: shield interrupts; OFF: interrupt allowed OFF
SM367 X7 falling edge interrupt ON: shield interrupts; OFF: interrupt allowed OFF
2) Timer interrupt mask register
Timer interrupt mask register
Special register number Type of interrupt Instruction Default
Each bit can control the mask of an interrupt.
SD350 1st to 16th timer interrupt 0
ON: shield interrupts; OFF: interrupt allowed
Each bit can control the mask of an interrupt.
SD351 17th to 32th timer interrupt 0
ON: shield interrupts; OFF: interrupt allowed
Each bit can control the mask of an interrupt.
SD352 33th to 48th timer interrupt 0
ON: shield interrupts; OFF: interrupt allowed
Each bit can control the mask of an interrupt.
SD353 49th to 64th timer interrupt 0
ON: shield interrupts; OFF: interrupt allowed
Each bit can control the mask of an interrupt.
SD354 65th to 80th timer interrupt 0
ON: shield interrupts; OFF: interrupt allowed
Each bit can control the mask of an interrupt.
SD355 81st to 96th timer interrupt 0
ON: shield interrupts; OFF: interrupt allowed
Each bit can control the mask of an interrupt.
SD356 97th to 100th timer interrupt 0
ON: shield interrupts; OFF: interrupt allowed
3) high-speed counter interrupt mask register
High-speed counter interrupt mask register
Special register number Type of interrupt Instruction Default
Each bit can control the mask of an interrupt.
SD382 1st to 16th high-speed counter interrupt 0
ON: shield interrupts; OFF: interrupt allowed
Each bit can control the mask of an interrupt.
SD383 17th to 32nd high-speed counter interrupt 0
ON: shield interrupts; OFF: interrupt allowed
Each bit can control the mask of an interrupt.
SD384 33th to 48th high-speed counter interrupt 0
ON: shield interrupts; OFF: interrupt allowed
Each bit can control the mask of an interrupt.
SD385 49th to 64th high-speed counter interrupt 0
ON: shield interrupts; OFF: interrupt allowed
Each bit can control the mask of an interrupt.
SD386 65th to 80th high-speed counter interrupt 0
ON: shield interrupts; OFF: interrupt allowed
Each bit can control the mask of an interrupt.
SD387 81st to 96th high-speed counter interrupt 0
ON: shield interrupts; OFF: interrupt allowed
Each bit can control the mask of an interrupt.
SD388 97th to 100th high-speed counter interrupt 0
ON: shield interrupts; OFF: interrupt allowed

15 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Subroutine
During the execution of the scan program, the executed program can be called by the CALL instruction. You can create up to 100 new
subprograms.
A subroutine is to split a certain module in the main program for the main program to call, which is conducive to the modularization
of the program. Such as other high-level language functions, but this function has no parameters and no return value.

(1) Instructions for calling subroutines

After a new subroutine is created, the content of the program is not executed. It is executed only when the CALL(P) instruction is
used to call the subroutine in the scan, event, and interrupt programs, and the call is executed once. Three new subroutines SUB0,
SUB1, SUB2 are created as shown in the figure below. In the main program MAIN, the subprogram can be called by using the CALL(P)
subprogram program name.
Through this programming method, the use of the same logic program for different conditions can reduce the number of Circuit
program steps and improve the readability of the Circuit program.

(2) ✎Note:
1) When using the timer (OUT T), note that the output will not be reset when the subroutine is not called, and a specific
subroutine register must be used.
2) It is not allowed to call recursively between subprograms, that is, call SUB1 in SUB0, and then call SUB0 in SUB1. This is not
allowed.
3) The subroutine can be nested up to 32 levels. If the level exceeds 32 levels, a serious error will be reported and the Circuit
program operation will be forcibly stopped.
4) Unlike the LX3V series mainframe, the subroutine in the LX5V series mainframe ends with the END instruction instead of SRET.

16 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Positioning instructions
(1) Event
1) ON event
If the high-speed pulse instruction is turned on during the ON event, the high-speed pulse instruction will be sent as normal. If the
ON contact of the trigger event in the scan period is turned OFF during the pulse sending, select whether to continue sending the
pulse or stop the pulse according to the unscanned processing flag bit.
Output shaft Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7
Not scanned flag bit SM899 SM959 SM1019 SM1079 SM1139 SM1199 SM1259 SM1319
When the flag bit is 0 (continue to send pulse), if the instruction is not scanned in the current scan cycle, continue to send pulses until
it stops. At this time, it should be noted that if the trigger event OFF contact turns ON after the pulse is sent, the pulse will be sent
again.
When the flag bit is 1 (stop sending pulses), if the trigger event ON contact turns OFF in a certain scan period, it will decelerate and
stop.
2) TIME event
If the high-speed pulse instruction is turned on in the TIME event, the high-speed pulse instruction will be sent as normal. If the
instruction is not scanned in a certain scan period during the pulse transmission, select whether to continue sending the pulse or
stop the pulse according to the unscanned processing flag bit.
Output shaft Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7
Not scanned flag bit SM899 SM959 SM1019 SM1079 SM1139 SM1199 SM1259 SM1319
When the flag bit is 0 (continue to send pulse), if the instruction is not scanned in the current scan cycle, the pulse will continue to be
sent until it stops. In the TIME event, it is impossible to ensure that the instruction is scanned in every scan cycle, so you should avoid
using high-speed pulse instructions in the TIME time, otherwise the pulse will be sent again after the pulse is sent.
When the flag bit is 1 (stop sending pulses), if the instruction is not scanned in the current scan cycle, it will decelerate and stop. In
the TIME event, if the flag bit is set to 1 (stop sending pulses), there will be no pulse sending.
(2) Subroutine
If the high-speed pulse instruction is turned on in the subroutine, the high-speed pulse instruction will be sent as normal. If the
scanning period is closed during pulse sending, select whether to continue sending or stop the pulse according to the unscanned
processing flag.
Output shaft Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7
Not scanned flag bit SM899 SM959 SM1019 SM1079 SM1139 SM1199 SM1259 SM1319
When the flag bit is 0 (continue to send pulse), if the instruction is not scanned in the current scan cycle, the pulse will continue to be
sent until it stops. At this time, it should be noted that if the subroutine is called again after the pulse is sent, the pulse will be sent
again.
When the flag bit is 1 (stop sending pulses), if the subroutine is closed during high-speed pulse sending, the speed will decelerate and
stop. If the subroutine is closed before sending the pulse, then no pulse is sent.
(3) Interrupt
1) External interrupt
If the high-speed pulse instruction is enabled in the external interrupt, the high-speed pulse instruction selects whether the pulse
continues to be sent or the pulse stops according to the unscanned processing flag bit.
Output shaft Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7
Not scanned flag bit SM899 SM959 SM1019 SM1079 SM1139 SM1199 SM1259 SM1319
When the flag bit is 0 (continue to send pulse), continue to send high-speed pulses until it stops.
When the flag bit is 1 (stop sending pulse), the high-speed pulse decelerates and stops.
17 WECON technology Co., Ltd.
 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
2) Timer interrupt
If the high-speed pulse instruction is turned on in the timer interruption, the high-speed pulse instruction is sent as normal. If the
instruction is not scanned in a certain scan period in the pulse transmission, the pulse continues to be sent or the pulse stops is
selected according to the unscanned processing flag.
Output axis Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7
Not scanned flag bit SM899 SM959 SM1019 SM1079 SM1139 SM1199 SM1259 SM1319
When the flag bit is 0 (continue to send pulse), if the instruction is not scanned in the current scan cycle, continue to send pulses until
it stops. In the timer interrupt, it is impossible to ensure that the instruction is scanned in every scan cycle, so it is necessary to avoid
using high-speed pulse instructions in the T timer interrupt. Otherwise, after the pulse transmission is completed, the pulse will be
sent again.
When the flag bit is 1 (stop sending pulses), if the instruction is not scanned in the current scan cycle, it will decelerate and stop. In
the TIME event, if the flag bit is set to 1 (stop sending pulses), there will be no pulse sending.
3) High-speed comparison interrupt
If the high-speed pulse instruction is enabled in the high-speed comparison interrupt, the high-speed pulse instruction selects
whether the pulse continues to be sent or the pulse stops according to the unscanned processing flag.
Output axis Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7
Not scanned flag bit SM899 SM959 SM1019 SM1079 SM1139 SM1199 SM1259 SM1319
When the flag bit is 0 (continue to send pulse), continue to send high-speed pulses until it stops.
When the flag bit is 1 (stop sending pulse), the high-speed pulse decelerates and stops.

18 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

2 Description of devices
Device list
Classification Type Device name Sign Range Mark
Bit Input X 0 to 1777 Octal number
Bit Output Y 0 to 1777 Octal number
Bit Internal relay M 0 to 7999 Decimal number
Bit Step relay S 0 to 4095 Decimal number
Bit/word Timer T 0 to 511 Decimal number
User device
Bit/word Counter C 0 to 255 Decimal number
Bit/double word Long counter LC 0 to 255 Decimal number
Bit/double word High-speed counter HSC 0 to 15 Decimal number
Word Data Register D 0 to 7999 Decimal number
Word Data Register R 0 to 29999 Decimal number
Bit Special SM 0 to 4095 Decimal number
System software
Word Special register SD 0 to 4095 Decimal number
Word Index register [D] 0 to 7999 Decimal number
Index register Word Index register V 0 to 7 Decimal number
Double word Long index register Z 0 to 7 Decimal number
Nested Bit Nested N 0 to 7 Decimal number
Pointer - Pointer P 0 to 4095 Decimal number
- Decimal constant K - Decimal number
Constant - Hexadecimal constant H - Hexadecimal number
Single precision floating point Real constant E - -

2.1 User device

Input relay (X)
CV

The input relay represents the original PLC external input signal status, and the external signal status is detected through the input X
port. 0 represents the external signal is open, and 1 represents the external signal is closed.
Using the program instruction method, the state of the input relay cannot be modified, and its node signals (normally open, normally
closed) can be used indefinitely in the user program.
The relay signal is identified by Signs such as X0, X1,......X7, X10, X11...... and its serial number is numbered in octal.
When an expansion module is connected, the extended X point will also use the X point as the component of the input signal state,
and the occupied X point is the starting position of the X point used by the PLC with 0 as the end of the X point, such as PLC Occupy
17 to 24 X points (X0 to X21, X0 to X27), at this time the X points of the expansion module will be stored starting from X30.
Output relay (Y)
The output relay is a Devices directly connected to the hardware port of the external user control device, and logically corresponds to
the physical output port of the PLC. After the PLC scans the user program each time, the component status of the Y relay will be
transmitted to the hardware port of the PLC. 0 means the output port is open; 1 means the output port is closed.
Y relay numbers are identified by Signs such as Y0, Y1,...Y7, Y10, Y11, etc., and their serial numbers are numbered in octal format. Y
relay components can be used indefinitely as promised by users .
In terms of hardware, according to the different output components, it can be divided into relay type, transistor type, solid state relay
type, etc. If there are output expansion module ports, they are numbered in sequence starting from the main module.

19 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Internal relay (M)
The auxiliary relay M element is used as an intermediate variable in the execution of the user program, just like the auxiliary relay in
the actual electronic control system, used for the transmission of status information, and multiple M variables can also be combined
into word variables. M variables and external ports There is no direct connection, but you can copy X to M through program
statements, or copy M to Y to connect with the outside world. An M variable can be used unlimited times.
The auxiliary relay M is identified by Signs such as M0, M1........., M7999, and its serial number is numbered in decimal system.
Status relay (S)
The state relay S is used for the design and execution of the step program. The STL step instruction is used to control the transfer of
the step state S, simplifying the programming design. If STL programming is not used, S can be used as an M variable. State S
variables are identified by Signs such as S0, S1...S4095, and their serial numbers are numbered in decimal system.
Timer (T)
The timer T is equivalent to the time relay in the relay system and is used to complete the timing function. The timer is an addition
expression. When the timer expires, the current value and the set value are the same value.
The measurement starts when the timer coil turns ON. When the current value of the timer is consistent with the set value, it will
become the time limit, and the timer contact will turn ON. When the timer coil is turned OFF, the current value will become 0, and
the timer contact will also become OFF.
The T value range of the timer is 0 to 32767.
When the timer coil (OUT T instruction) is executed, the timer coil is turned on/off, the current value is updated, and the contact is
turned on/off.

Device number Timer Device number Timer

T0 to T191 100ms timer T246 to T249 1ms accumulative timer

T250 to T255 10ms cumulative timer

100ms subroutine timer (used in the subroutine, even if
T192 to T199
the subroutine is not called, it will still be updated) T256 to T383 1ms timer

T200 to T245 10ms timer T384 to T511 0.1ms timer

(1) General-purpose timer (T0 to T245)

As shown in the figure above: when the normally open contact of X0 is turned on, the current value counter of T200 starts timing
from zero and counts up the 10ms clock pulse. When the current value is equal to the set value 223, the timer's normally open
contact is turned on and the normally closed contact is turned off, that is, the output contact of T200 will act after its coil is driven for
2.23s. After the normally open contact of X0 is disconnected, T200 is reset because the coil is de-energized. After reset, its normally
open contact is disconnected, and the normally closed contact is connected, and the current value returns to zero.
(2) Accumulative timer (T246 to T255)

20 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

When the X1 normally open contact in Figure b is turned on, the current value counter of T250 accumulates the 10ms clock pulse.
When the normally open contact of X1 is disconnected or stopped, the counting stops, and the current value remains unchanged.
When the normally open contact of X1 is turned on again, counting continues. When the accumulated time t1+t2 is 4.2s, the current
value is equal to the set value of 420, the normally open contact of T250 is turned on and the normally closed contact is turned off.
When the normally open contact of X2 is turned on, T250 will reset (because the coil of the accumulative timer will not reset when
the power is off, you need to use the normally open contact of X2 and the reset instruction to force T250 to reset).
(3) Setting value
The timer time can use the constants (K, H) in the program memory as the set value, or can be specified indirectly by the content of
the data register (D).

After PLC is powered on, multiplication is performed, D3=D0*2. Use the data of D3 as the timing time value of T10.
Counter (C)
The counter is used to complete the counting function. Each counter contains a coil, a contact, and a timer value register. Whenever
the driving signal of the counter coil changes from OFF to ON, the counter reading value increases by 1. If the timer value reaches the
preset time value, its contact action, a contact (NO contact) is closed, b contact (NC contact) is opened; If the timing value is cleared,
the output a contact will be opened, and b contact (NC contact) will be closed. Some timers have features such as power-down
retention, accumulation, etc., and maintain the value before power-down after power-on again.
The counters are identified by C0, C1,..., C255, and the order is numbered in decimal.
The counter (C) is a 16-bit counter.

The setting value of the 16-bit up counter is 1 to 32767. As shown in the working process of the up counter in Figure c, after the
normally open contact of X1 in the figure is turned on, C0 is reset, its corresponding bit storage unit is set to 0, the normally open
contact of C0 is disconnected, and the normally closed contact Point is turned on, and its current counter value is set to 0 at the same
time. X2 provides a counting input signal. When the reset input circuit of the counter is disconnected and the counting input circuit
changes from disconnected to connected (that is, the rising edge of the counting pulse), the current value of counter C0 is increased
by 1. After 10 count pulses, the current value of C0 is equal to the set value of 10, and its corresponding bit storage unit is set to 1,
and the Y0 contact is turned on at this time. When counting pulses again, the current value does not change until the reset input
signal is turned on, and the current value of the counter is set to 0.

21 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Long counter (LC)
The long counter (LC) is basically the same as the counter (C), but compared to the counter (C), the long counter (LC) is a 32-bit
register, and the range of values that can be counted is larger.
The long counter is identified by LC0, LC1,...,LC255, and the sequence is numbered in decimal.
High-speed counter (HSC)
High-speed counter (HSC) is a device used for counting through external input of high-speed pulse signals. HSC is a 32-bit register.
The corresponding parameter configuration can be configured through: “project management” -> “parameters” -> “high-speed
counter configuration”:

Data register (D & R)

Registers are used for data calculation and storage, such as the calculation and calculation of timers, counters, and analog parameters.
The width of each register is 16 bits. If 32bit instructions are used, the adjacent registers are automatically formed into 32bit registers
for use, the lower address is the low byte, and the higher address is the high byte.
The address range of D register: D0 to D7999; the address range of R register: R0 to R29999.
The data involved in operations in most of our series PLC instructions are processed as signed numbers. For 16-bit registers, bit15 is
the sign bit (0 represents a positive number, 1 represents a negative number); for a 32-bit register, the high byte bit15 It is the sign bit,
and the value range is -32768 to 32767.
When 32-bit data needs to be processed, the two adjacent D registers can be formed into a 32-bit double word. For example, when
accessing D100 in 32-bit format, use the high address D101 register as the high word and the high byte bit 15 as The sign bit of a
double word can handle values from -2147483648 to 2147483647.

22 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
2.2 System device
Special Relay (SM)
The special relay SM is an internal relay with a certain specification inside the programmable controller, so it cannot be used in the
program like ordinary internal relays. It can be turned ON/OFF as needed to control the PLC.
For details, please refer to Special relays (SM) list.
Special Register (SD)
The special register SD is an internal register whose specifications are determined within the programmable controller, so it cannot
be used in the program like a normal internal register, and the corresponding data can be written as needed to control the PLC.
For details, please refer to Special register (SD) list.

2.3 Index Register

Index register ([D])
The index register is used to modify the index of the Devices. [D] The index register is actually the same as the data register D, ranging
from D0 to D7999. The input method is as follows, just add [D] directly after the Devices:

The supported soft components for index modification are as follows:

 Constant K, H plus index modification, such as D0 = 10, K10[D0] result = 10 + 10 = 20.
 Constant E and character strings do not support index modification.
 Add index modification to the data device, such as D0 = 10, the result of D10[D0] is the value of D20. Even if D10[D0] is used in
a double word instruction, the double word value is the value of D20 (low word) and D21 (high word).
 Bit device plus index modification, such as D0 = 10, the result of M0[D0] is the value of M10.
 Bits are combined into words with index modification. For example, D0 = 10, K4M10[D0] first takes M10 offset by 10 addresses,
and then combines them. The result is equivalent to K4M10.
Whether the index modification can be used depends on whether each instruction supports the format, you can check the "offset
modification" in the description of the available device for each instruction.

23 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
2.4 Nesting
Nesting (N)
Nesting is a device used in master station control instructions (MC/MCR instructions)*1 to program operating conditions through a
nested structure. Specify with a small number (order from N0 to N7) from the outside of the nested structure.

*1 is an instruction used to create an efficient ladder switching program by opening and closing the common bus of the Circuit
program.

2.5 pointer
Pointer (P)
The pointer is the device used in the jump instruction (CJ instruction).
At present, the CALL instruction directly uses the subroutine name to call, and no longer uses the P pointer.

2.6 Constant
The constants are explained below.
Decimal constant (K)
“K” is a Sign that represents a decimal integer and is specified by K (for example: K123). It is mainly used to designate the set value
of a timer or counter or the value in the operand of an application instruction. In 16bit instructions, the value range of constant K is
-32768 to 32767; in 32bit instructions, the value range of constant K is -2147483648 to 2147483647.
Hexadecimal constant (H)
“H” is the Sign of hexadecimal number, specified by H□ (example: H123), mainly used to designate the value of the operand of the
application instruction. The value range of the constant H is 0000 to FFFF; in the 32-bit instruction, the value range of the constant K
is 0000, 0000 to FFFF, FFFF.
Real number constant (E)
“E” is the single-precision floating-point number representation Sign, specified by E□ (example: E1.23), mainly used to specify the

24 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
value of the operand of the application instruction, the value range of the single-precision floating-point number E is ±1.175495*10
-38 to ±3.402823*10+38 (±1.175495 E-38 to ±3.402823 E+38) and 0 (7 effective digits).

(The address occupies D1 and D0)

String constant
The character string constant is the device that specifies the character string, and only supports the ASCII code character set, and any
character string ends with a NULL character (00H). To use string devices, you must use double quotation marks to modify the
characters, as follows to convert the string to ASCII characters and fill in the device starting with D0:

2.7 Power-down retention setting

The user can freely configure the power-off storage range within the range of the Devices. The constant configuration is located in:
“Project Management”→”Parameters”→”PLC Parameters”→”Device Latch”.

✎Note: The X and Y registers do not support the power-down save function.

2.8 Special use of device

(1) Use bits to form words
Format: KnB
K is a fixed character.
The value of n is 1 to 8, which means that (n * 4) bits are combined into a word, such as K4M0 is a combination of M0 to M15.
B is the bit device number.
Example: Set a total of 32 bits M0 to M31 at the same time.

✎Note: KnB type can also support index modification.

(2) Take the bit in the word
Format: D.b
D is the number of data device D (R is not available).
b is the bit number that needs to be taken, hexadecimal, and the value range is 0 to F.
Example: bit14 in D2000 is set and Y0 is output

✎Note: D.b type can also support index modification.

25 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

3 Sequence control program instructions

3.1 Contact instructions
Operation start, series connection, parallel connection
LD, LDI, AND, ANI, OR, ORI
• LD: Normally open contact instruction. LDI: Normally closed contact instruction.
Extract the ON/OFF information of the device specified in (s) as the result of the calculation.
• AND: Normally open contact series connection instruction. ANI: Normally closed contact series connection instruction.
Extract the ON/OFF information of the device specified in (s), and perform an AND operation with the calculation result so far as the
calculation result.
• OR: Parallel connection instruction of 1 normally open contact. ORI: Parallel connection instruction of 1 normally closed contact
Extract the ON/OFF information of the device specified in (s), and perform an OR operation with the result of the operation so far as
the result of the operation.

Content, range and data type

Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (tag)
(s) Device used as contact --- Bit ANY_BOOL
Device used
Devices Offset modification
Instruction Parameter
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D]
LD Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
LDI Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
AND Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
ANI Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
OR Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
ORI Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
 LD, LDI
• The LD instruction is a normally open contact instruction, and the LDI instruction is a normally closed contact instruction. The
ON/OFF information *1 of the specified device is extracted as the operation result.
*1: When the bit of the word device is specified, it is turned on/off according to 1/0 of the specified bit.

26 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
 AND, ANI
• The AND instruction is a normally open contact serial connection instruction, and the ANI instruction is a normally closed contact
serial connection instruction. It extracts the ON/OFF information*1 of the specified bit device and performs an AND operation with
the result of the operation so far. This value is used as the result of the operation.
*1: When the bit of the word device is specified, it is turned on/off according to 1/0 of the specified bit.
• There is no limit to the number of serial contacts, and this instruction can be used any time continuously.
• After the OUT instruction, it is called cascade output through the contact OUT to other coils. As long as the sequence is good, it can
be repeated any number of times.
 OR, ORI
• The OR instruction is a parallel connection instruction for a normally open contact, and the ORI instruction is a parallel connection
instruction for a normally closed contact. It extracts the ON/OFF information*1 of the specified device and compares it with the
calculation result so far. Perform an OR operation and use the value as the result of the operation.
*1: When the bit of the word device is specified, it is turned on/off according to 1/0 of the specified bit.
• OR and ORI instructions start from the step where the instruction is located, and connect in parallel to the step where the previous
LD and LDI instructions are located.
• There is no limit to the number of parallel connections.
Key point
When specifying the bit of a word device, the bit is specified with a hexadecimal number. (For example, b11 of D0 will become
"D0.B")
Error code
Error code Content
4085H (S) read address exceeds the device range
Example
1) LD instruction (the logic operation of a contact starts)

2) LDI instruction (the logic operation of contact b starts)

27 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
3) AND instruction (a contact in series)

4) ANI instruction (series b contact)

5) OR instruction (a contact in parallel)

28 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
6) ORI instruction (a contact in parallel)

7) Offset modification
The devices used in the LD, LDI, AND, ANI, OR, ORI instructions can all be indexed with D data devices (the status register S cannot be
modified).
D0 to D7999 can be used in index modification.
When the devices are input (X) and output (Y), the value of the index register is converted into an octal number and then added.
Example

When the value of D0 is 10, X012 determines LD contact ON (conduction)/OFF (non-conduction).

8) Bit specification in the data register
Among the devices used in the LD, LDI, AND, ANI, OR, and ORI instructions, the bits of the data register (D) can be specified.
When executing the bit specification of the data register, enter "." after the number of the data register (D), and then enter the bit
number (0 to F). The usable data registers are specified in bits, but only 16-bit data registers are valid.
Please specify the bit number in the order of 0,1,2,…9,A,B,…F starting from the lower bit.
Example

The third bit of D0 determines the LD contact ON (conduction)/OFF (non-conduction).

29 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Pulse calculation starts, pulse series connection, pulse parallel connection
LDP, LDF, ANDP, ANDF, ORP, ORF
• LDP: Rising edge pulse operation start instruction.
Turns on only at the rising edge (OFF→ON) of the bit device specified in (s).
• LDF: Falling edge pulse operation start instruction.
Turns on only at the falling edge (ON→OFF) of the bit device specified in (s).
• ANDP: Rising edge pulse series connection instruction, ANDF: Falling edge pulse series connection instruction. The previous
operation result up to that time is ANDed with the bit device specified in (s) as the operation result.
• ORP: Parallel connection instruction for rising edge pulse/ORF: Parallel connection instruction for falling edge pulse. The operation
result up to that time is ORed with the bit device specified in (s) as the operation result.

Content, range and data type

Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s) Devices used as contacts - Bit ANY_BOOL
Device used
Devices Offset modification
Instruction Parameter
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D]
LD Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
LDI Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
AND Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
ANI Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
OR Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
ORI Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
 LDP, LDF
• The LDP instruction is a rising edge pulse operation start instruction, which turns on only at the rising edge (OFF→ON) of the
specified bit device. When the bit of the word device is specified, it turns on only when the specified bit changes from 0→1. In the
case of only the LDP instruction, it is the same as the pulsed instruction(P) of the instruction executed while ON.
When the circuit that uses the LDP instruction is replaced with a circuit that does not use the LDP instruction, the situation is as
follows.
30 WECON technology Co., Ltd.
 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

• The LDF instruction is a falling edge pulse instruction, which turns on at the falling edge (ON→OFF) of the specified bit device.
When the bit of the word device is specified, it turns on only when the specified bit changes from 1→0.
 ANDP, ANDF
• The ANDP instruction is a series connection instruction for rising edge pulses, and the ANDF instruction is a series connection
instruction for falling edge pulses. The AND operation is performed with the operation result up to that time as the operation result.
The ON/OFF information used in ANDP instructions and ANDF instructions is shown in the table below.
Device specified in ANDP, ANDF
ANDP status ANDF status
Bit device Bit specification of word device
OFF→ON 0→1 ON OFF
OFF 0 OFF OFF
ON 1 OFF OFF
ON→OFF 1→0 OFF ON
 ORP, ORF
• The ORP instruction is a parallel connection instruction for rising edge pulses, and an ORF instruction is a parallel connection
instruction for falling edge pulses. The OR operation is performed with the operation result up to that time as the operation result.
The ON/OFF information used in ORP instructions and ORF instructions is shown in the table below.
Device specified in ORP, ORF
ORP status ORF status
Bit device Bit specification of word device
OFF→ON 0→1 ON OFF
OFF 0 OFF OFF
ON 1 OFF OFF
ON→OFF 1→0 OFF ON
Error code
There is no operation error.
Example
1) LDP, ANDP, ORP instructions (calculation starts when a rising edge is detected, serial connection, parallel connection)

31 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

In the above figure, when X000 to X002 changes from OFF to ON, M0 or M1 only maintains ON for 1 operation cycle.
2) LDF, ANDF, ORF instructions (calculation starts when a falling edge is detected, serial connection, parallel connection)

In the above figure, when X000 to X002 changes from ON to OFF, M0 or M1 only maintains ON for 1 operation cycle.
3) Bit specification of data register (D)
In the devices used for LDP, LDF, ANDP, ANDF, ORP, ORF instructions, the bits of the data register (D) can be specified.
To specify the bit of the data register, enter "." after the number of the data register (D), and then enter the bit number (0 to F). The
usable data registers are specified in bits, but only 16-bit data registers are valid.
Please specify the bit number in the order of 0,1,2,...9,A,B,...F starting from the low order.
Example:

The third bit of D0 determines the LDP contact ON (conduction)/OFF (non-conduction) when it changes from OFF to ON.

32 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
3.2 Combining instructions
Series connection and parallel connection of Circuit program blocks
ANB, ORB
Perform AND operation or OR operation between block A and block B, and use it as the result of the operation.
Circuit program

Features
 ANB
• Perform AND operation of block A and block B and use it as the result of the operation.
• The Sign of the ANB instruction is not a contact Sign, but a connection Sign.
 ORB
• Perform OR operation of block A and block B, and use it as the result of the operation.
• The ORB instruction connects circuit blocks with 2 or more contacts in parallel. The parallel connection of only 1 contact uses OR
instruction and ORI instruction, without ORB instruction.
• The Sign of the ORB instruction is not a contact Sign, but a connection Sign.
Error code
There is no operation error.
Example

33 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Push, read, and pop of calculation results
MPS, MRD, MPP
• MPS: Store the calculation result (ON/OFF) before the MPS instruction.
• MRD, MPP: Read the operation result stored by the MPS instruction, and start the operation from the next step with the operation
result.
Circuit program

Features
 MPS
• Store the operation result (ON/OFF) before the MPS instruction.
• The MPS instruction can be used continuously up to 11 times. If the MPP instruction is used in the middle, the number of uses of
the MPS instruction will be -1.
 MRD
• Read the operation result stored by the MPS instruction, and start the operation from the next step with the operation result.
 MPP
• Read the operation result stored by the MPS instruction, and start the operation from the next step with the operation result.
• Clear the operation result stored by the MPS instruction.
• The used number of MPS instructions will be -1.
Error code
There is no operation error.
Example
MPS, MRD, MPP instructions (push stack, read stack, pop stack)

• After using the MPS instruction to store the intermediate result of the operation, it drives the output Y002.
• After reading the storage content using MRD instruction, drive output Y003.
The MRD instruction can be programmed multiple times.
• Use the MPP instruction to replace the MRD instruction in the final output loop, so as to reset it while reading the
above-mentioned stored content.

34 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Invert the result of operation
INV
Invert the results of operations up to the INV instruction.
Circuit program

Features
Invert the results of operations up to the INV instruction.

Operation result before INV instruction Operation result after INV instruction is executed
OFF ON
ON OFF
Error code
There is no operation error.
Point
• The INV instruction executes the operation as a result of the previous operation, so it should be used in the same position as the
AND instruction. INV instruction cannot be used in the position of LD and OR instructions.
• When the INV instruction and ANB instruction are used together for ladder operation, pay attention to the inverted range.

Example
INV instruction (reverse operation result)

35 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Pulse operation result
MEP, MEF
• MEP: Turns on when the operation result before the MEP instruction is a rising edge, and turns off when it is not a rising edge.
• MEF: Turns on when the operation result before MEF instruction is a falling edge, and turns off when it is not a falling edge.
Circuit program

Features
 MEP
• When the operation result before the MEP instruction is a rising edge (OFF→ON), it becomes ON (conduction state). When the
operation result before the MEP instruction is other than the rising edge, it turns off (non-conduction state).
• When using the MEP instruction, if multiple contacts are connected in series, pulse processing will be easier.
 MEF
• When the operation result before the MEF instruction is a falling edge (ON→OFF), it becomes ON (conduction state). When the
operation result before the MEF instruction is other than the falling edge, it turns OFF (non-conduction state).
• When using the MEF instruction, if multiple contacts are connected in series, pulse processing will be easier.
Error code
There is no operation error.
Point
• For MEP instructions and MEF instructions, if the indexed contacts are pulsed by subroutines, FOR to NEXT
instructions, etc., they may not operate normally.
• The MEP instruction and MEF instruction perform actions based on the previous calculation results, so they should
be used in the same position as the AND instruction. The MEP instruction and MEF instruction cannot be used in the
position of LD instruction and OR instruction.
Example
1) MEP instruction (ON at the rising edge of the operation result)

2) MEF instruction (ON at the falling edge of the operation result)

36 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
3.3 Output instructions
OUT instruction (except timers and counters)
Output the results of the previous OUT instruction to the specified device.
Circuit program

Content, range and data type

Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(d) ON/OFF device number - Bit ANY_BOOL
Device used
Devices Offset modification
Instruction Parameter
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D]
OUT Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●● ● ● ●
 Refer to OUT T instruction when using T;
 Refer to OUT C instruction when using C, LC, HSC;
 Offset modification cannot be used when using S device.
Features
Outputs the results of the previous OUT instruction to the specified device.
Condition Calculation result Coil / specified position
OFF OFF
When using bit devices
ON ON
OFF 0
When using word devices
ON 1
Error code
Error code Content
4086H (D) write address exceeds the device range
Example
1) When using bit devices
The device programmed with the OUT instruction executes ON/OFF according to the state of the drive contact, and the parallel OUT
instruction can be used continuously for many times.
In the following program example, OUT M101 followed by OUT M100 means this.
However, if multiple OUT instructions are used for the same device number, it will become a dual output (double coil). Please be
careful.

37 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
2) Offset modification
All the devices used in the OUT instruction can be indexed with the D data device (the status register S cannot be modified).
D0 to D7999 can be used in index modification.
When the devices used are input (X) and output (Y), the value of the index register is converted to an octal number and then added.
Example:

When the value of D0 is 10, when X0 is ON (conducting), the Y12 contact is ON (conducting).
3) Bit specification in the data register
Among the devices used in the OUT instruction, the bit of the data register (D) can be specified.To specify the bit of the data register,
enter "." after the number of the data register (D), and then enter the bit number (0 to F). The usable data registers are specified in
bits, but only 16-bit data registers are valid.
Please indicate the positioning number in the order of 0,1,2,...9,A,B,...F starting from the low order.
Example:

In the example on the left, the state of X1 determines the ON (conduction)/OFF (non-conduction) of the third bit in D0.

SET instruction
When the execution instruction turns ON, the device specified in (d) will be in the following state.
• Bit device: Turn on the coil and contact.
• Bit specification of word device: Set the specified position to 1.

Content, range and data type

Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(d) Set (ON) bit device number/bit specification of word device - Bit ANY_BOOL
Device used
Devices Offset modification
Instruction Parameter
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D]
SET Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

*1: Offset modification cannot be used when using S devices.

Features
When the execution instruction turns ON, the device specified in (d) will be in the following state.
Devices Device status
Bit Device Turn on the coil and contact
Bit specification of word device Set the specified position to 1
The device that is turned on will remain on even if the execution instruction turns off. The device that is turned ON by the SET
instruction can be turned OFF by the RST instruction.

38 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

✎Note:
For the output relay (Y), if the SET instruction and the RST instruction are executed in the same operation, the instruction result close
to the END instruction (end of program) will be output.
Error code
Error code Content
4086H (d) In the case of using offset, the offset address exceeds the device range
Example
1) When using bit devices
The parallel SET instruction could be used multiple times in succession. In the following program example, this is the case for the
program with SET Y000 followed by RST Y000.

2) Offset modification
All the devices used in the SET instruction can be indexed with D data devices (the status register S cannot be modified).
D0 to D7999 can be used in index modification.
When the devices used are input (X) and output (Y), the value of the index register is converted into octal number and then added.
Example:

When the value of D0 is 10, when X0 is ON (conduction), the Y12 contact is ON (conduction), X0 is OFF (non-conduction), and the Y12
contact remains unchanged.
3) Bit specification in the data register
Among the devices used in the SET instruction, the bits of the data register (D) can be specified.
To specify the bit of the data register, enter "." after the number of the data register (D), and then enter the bit number (0 to F). The
usable data registers are specified in bits, but only 16-bit data registers are valid.
Please specify the bit number in the order of 0,1,2,…9,A,B,…F starting from the lower bit.
Example:

In the example on the left, the state of X1 is ON (conduction), and the third bit in D0 is ON (conduction). The state of X1 is OFF
(non-conduction), and the state of the third bit in D0 remains unchanged.

39 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
RST instruction
When the RST input turns ON, the device specified in (d) will change to the following state.
• Bit device: Turn off the coil and contact.
• Timers and counters: Set the current value to 0, and set the coil and contact to OFF.
• Bit specification of word device: Set the specified position to 0.
• Word device, module access device, index register: Set the content to 0.

Content, range and data type

Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
Reset bit device number/bit specification of word device
(d) - Bit/word/double word ANY_ELEMENTARY
or reset word device number
Device used
Devices Offset modification
Instruction Parameter
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D]
RST Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

*1: Offset modification cannot be used when using S devices.

Features
When the execution Instruction is ON, the specified device will be in the following state.
Devices Device status
Bit Device Turn on the coil and contact
Timer, counter Set the current value to 0, set the coil and contact to OFF
Bit specification of word device Set the specified position to 0
Word device Set the content to 0
When the execution instruction is OFF, the device status does not change.
The function when specifying a word device with the RST instruction is the same as the following Circuit program.

✎Note:
For timers and counters, when the RST instruction is executed in the program, subroutine, and interrupt program where the RST
instruction is jumped, the timer and counter may remain unchanged after reset, and the timer and counter will not operate.
Error code
Error code Content
4086H (d) write address exceeds the device range
Example
1) Use bit device

When X0 is ON (conducting), Y0 is set to OFF, R10 is set to 0, the word

device of T10 is set to 0, the bit device is set to OFF, and the word
device of C100 is set to 0. The device is turned off.
When X0 is OFF (non-conduction), all states remain unchanged.

40 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
2) Offset modification
All the devices used in the RST instruction can be indexed with D data devices. (The status register S could not be modified)
D0 to D7999 can be used in index modification.
When the devices used are input (X) and output (Y), the value of the index register is converted into an octal number and then
added.
Example

When the value of D0 is 10, when X0 is ON (conduction), the Y12 contact is OFF (conduction), X0 is OFF (non-conduction), and the
Y12 contact remains unchanged.
3) Bit specification in the data register
Among the devices used in the RST instruction, the bits of the data register (D) can be specified.
To specify the bit of the data register, enter "." after the number of the data register (D), and then enter the bit number (0 to F). The
usable data registers are specified in bits, but only 16-bit data registers are valid.
Please specify the bit number in the order of 0,1,2,…9,A,B,…F starting from the lower bit.
Example

In the example on the left, the state of X1 is ON (conduction), and the third bit in D0 is OFF (conduction). The state of X1 is OFF
(non-conduction), and the state of the third bit in D0 remains unchanged.

41 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
PLF/Falling edge output
When the PLF instruction is ON→OFF, one scan of the device specified in (d) is ON, and when it is other than ON→OFF, it is OFF.

Content, range and data type

Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(d) Pulsed device - Bit ANY_BOOL
Device used
Devices Offset modification
Instruction Parameter
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D]
PLF Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ● ●

Features
When the execution instruction is ON→OFF, the specified device is turned ON, and when the execution instruction is other than
ON→OFF, it is turned OFF. When there is one PLF instruction for the device specified in (d) in one scan, the specified device will turn
on one scan.

✎Note:
If the PLF instruction is jumped by the CJ instruction, or the executed subroutine is not called by the CALL(P) instruction, the device
specified in (d) may be turned on for more than one scan. Be careful.
Error code
No Error code
Example
PLF instruction (differential output of falling edge)

In the above figure, when X000 changes from ON to OFF, only one operation cycle of M1 is ON.

42 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
PLS/Rising edge output
When the PLS instruction is OFF→ON, one scan of the device specified in (d) is turned ON, and when it is other than OFF→ON, it is
turned OFF.

Content, range and data type

Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(d) Pulsed device - Bit ANY_BOOL
Device used
Devices Offset modification
Instruction Parameter
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D]
PLS Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ● ●

Features
When the PLS instruction is OFF→ON, one scan of the specified device is turned on, and when it is other than OFF→ON, it is turned
off. When there is one PLS instruction for the device specified in (d) in one scan, the specified device turns on one scan.

✎Note:
If the PLS instruction is jumped by the CJ instruction, or the executed subroutine is not called by the CALL(P) instruction, the device
specified in (d) may be turned on for more than one scan. Be careful.
Error code
No Error code
Example
PLS instruction (differential output on rising edge)

In the above figure, when X000 changes from OFF to ON, only one operation cycle of M0 is ON.

3.4 END/Sequence control program end instruction

Indicates the final end of the program.

Features
Indicates the end of the program including the main program, subprogram, interrupt program, and event. When the END instruction
is executed, the CPU module will end the program being executed.

43 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

4 Program flow instructions

4.1 Program jump
CJ/Conditional jump
When the jump instruction is ON, the program with the specified pointer number in the same program file is executed.
-[CJ (P) (P)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(P) The pointer number of the jump target P0 to P4095 Device name POINTER
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices other
Instruction Parameter modification extension

X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP P

CJ Parameter 1 ● ●

Features
 CJ(P)
When the execution instruction is ON, the program with the specified pointer number is executed.
When the execution instruction is OFF, execute the next program.

1) Execute instructions.
2) Each scan is executed.
3) One scan is executed.
✎Note:
After turning ON the coil of the timer, if the timer whose coil is ON is jumped by the CJ(P) instruction, the measurement will not be
performed normally.
When the OUT instruction is jumped by the CJ(P) instruction, the scan time will be shorter.
When the CJ(P) instruction is used to jump backward, the scan time will be longer.
For the CJ(P) instruction, you can jump to a step smaller than the step number being executed. However, in order to avoid the time
limit of the watchdog timer, a method of jumping out of the loop during this period should be considered.

(1) While X3 is ON, the loop is executed.

(2) When X7 is set to ON, it jumps out of the loop.

44 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
• The device skipped by the CJ(P) instruction does not change.

When X2 is ON, jump to the label of P19.

Even if X2 and X4 turn ON/OFF during CJ instruction
execution, Y4 and Y5 will not change.

• The label (P□) occupies 1 step.

The jump instruction can only specify the pointer number in the same program file.
When jumping to the pointer number within the jump range during jump operation, the program after the jump destination pointer
number is executed.
The label procedure is shown below. When creating a loop program, move the cursor to the left of the bus bar of the Circuit program,
and enter the label (P) at the beginning of the loop block.

It is also possible to program the label at the position where the step number is less than the CJ instruction, but if the scan time
becomes more than 200ms (default setting), a watchdog timer error will occur, which requires attention.

When the pointer number in the operand is the same and the label is one, the operation is as follows.

(1) When X20 is ON, jump from the CJ instruction of X20 to label P9.
(2) When X20 is OFF and X21 is ON, jump from the CJ instruction of
X21 to label P9.

45 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
If the tag number is reused, it will become an error state.

SM100 is always ON during the operation of the CPU module, so the usage method shown below will jump unconditionally.

The pointer number P63 of LX3V represents the jump to the END instruction. The P63 pointer of LX5V no longer provides this
function. If you need to use this function, please use the GOEND instruction.
Error code
No error message
Example
1) The situation to jump after OFF processing
After one operation cycle when X023 changes from OFF to ON, the CJ P7 instruction is valid.
With this method, the output between CJ P7 instruction and mark P7 can be turned off before jumping.

2) CJ instruction and action of contact coil

In the following program example, when X000 is ON, jump from the CJ instruction of the first loop to the mark P8. When X000 is OFF,
no jump is performed, but the program is executed in order from step 1, and the CJ instruction in the 11th loop jumps to mark P9.
The jumped instruction is not executed.

46 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

Double-coil action of Y001 output:

When X000=OFF, it will act through X001.
When X000=ON, it will act through X012.
Even if the program is distinguished by conditional jump, if the same
coil (Y000) is programmed twice or more within or outside the jump, it
will be treated as normal double coil processing.

The action of the subroutine timer (T192 to T199):

After the coil is driven, the action continues even if it jumps, and the
output contact also operates.

If using the high-speed counter (HSC0 to HSC7) operation

After the coil is driven, the action continues even if it jumps, and the
output contact also operates.

In the above program, if each input changes during the jump, the action of each coil is shown in the following table.
Content Contact state before jump Coil action in jump
Y,M,S X1, X2, X3 OFF Y1, M1, S1 OFF
(Y1, M1, S1) X1, X2, X3 ON Y1, M1, S1 ON
1ms, 10ms, 100ms timer X4 OFF Timer not working
(T0) X4 ON Timer interrupt (continue after X0 OFF)
Program timer X5 OFF, X6 OFF Timer not working, but the timer is reset when X13 is ON
(T192) X5 OFF, X6 ON Timing continues (contact action after X0 OFF)
Counter X7 OFF, X10 OFF Counting interrupt, but it is reset when X13 is ON
(C0) X7 OFF, X10 ON Count interruption (continue after X0 OFF)
X11 OFF Single-cycle application instructions are not executed in the jump
Application instructions
Multi-cycle application instructions are partially executable (such as
(MOV) X11 ON
high-speed pulse instructions)
3) The relationship between CJ instruction and MC to MCR jump
The relationship between the main control instruction and the jump instruction and the action content are as follows.
However, since the operation of ②, ④, and ⑤ will become complicated, please avoid using them.

47 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
4.2 Subroutine jump
CALL/Subroutine call
When the jump instruction is ON, the program with the specified pointer number in the same program file is executed.
-[CALL (P) (P)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(P) Subroutine name - Pointer POINTER
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices other
modification extension
Instruction Parameter
Subroutine
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
name

CALL Parameter 1 ● ●

Parameter 1 can only use the subroutine name.

Features
When the CALL(P) instruction is executed, the subroutine of the pointer (P) will be executed. (P) can only write the name of the newly
created subprogram, if the program name does not exist, the Circuit program compilation fails.

CALL(P) instructions can be nested up to 32 levels.

✎Note:
• Multiple CALL(P) instructions can call the same subprogram, but subprograms with the same program name are not allowed.
• Use program timers in subroutines (the same applies to interrupt programs). This timer counts when the coil instruction or the END
instruction is executed. If it reaches the timer setting value, the output contact will act when the coil instruction or END instruction is

48 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
executed. Generally, the timer only counts when the coil instruction is executed, so if it is used in a subroutine that executes the coil
instruction under certain conditions, it will not count.
• If the 1ms accumulative timer is used in a subroutine (the same in an interrupt program), when it reaches the set value, the output
contact will act when the first coil instruction is executed (when the subroutine is executed), so be careful.
• The devices that are turned on in the subprogram (the same in the interrupt program) will be retained after the program ends.
Therefore, these devices should be reset in the main program after the end of the program.
Error code
Error code Content
4102H CALL(P) instruction exceeds 32 levels of nesting structure
Example
1) New subroutine
Project management→Subroutine→ Scan→Right click to create

2) Subroutine call

In the scan program, turn on M10 to call the subroutine SUB0, execute the Circuit program in the subroutine SUB0, until the END
instruction of the subroutine is executed, return to the scan program MAIN to execute LD M11.
3) Subroutine nesting

In the above figure, the subroutine SUB0 is called in the scan program, and the subroutine SUB1 is called in SUB0. So when the scan
program M10 is turned on, after the CALL instruction is executed, the subroutine SUB0 will be executed first.And after the CALL
instruction of SUB0 is executed, SUB1 will be executed first. After executing the END instruction of SUB1, return to SUB0 for
execution. After executing the END instruction of SUB0, return to the scan program MAIN. The program has only 2 levels of nesting,
and the number of nesting levels cannot be greater than 32.

49 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
4.3 Interrupt disable, interrupt enable
DI and EI/Interrupt prohibited and allowed
The CPU module is usually interrupt disabled. This instruction can make the CPU module into the interrupt enabled state (EI
instruction), and then become disabled again (DI instruction).
• DI: It is forbidden to interrupt program execution.
• EI: Release the interrupt prohibition state.
-[DI (s)]
-[EI]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(P) Subroutine name - Pointer POINTER

Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
DI Parameter 1 ●
Features
 DI
• Even if the execution interrupt condition is triggered in the program, prohibit the interrupt program execution before executing the
EI instruction.
• When the PLC is powered on or after STOP, it will become the state after DI instruction is executed, and the interrupt program
cannot be executed.
• The DI instruction can choose whether to use parameters. When there is no parameter, it means that all interrupt programs are
prohibited. With parameters, according to the value in parameter s1, interrupt programs with this priority and lower priority are
prohibited.
• The priority of the interrupt ranges from 0 to 2. The smaller the value, the higher the response priority of the interrupt. That is, the
interrupt with priority 0 is the fastest to be responded.
• If there is no EI instruction before the DI instruction, the DI instruction is invalid.
 EI
• Release the interrupt prohibition state when DI instruction is executed, and allow interrupt program to run.
• When the EI and DI instructions are not enabled, they all maintain the original enabled or forbidden interrupt program execution
status. The currently disabled interrupt priority can be viewed in SD151.
According to the interrupt prohibition instruction (DI instruction), the interrupt prohibition
instruction (DI instruction) below the specified priority, and the interrupt enable
Currently
instruction (EI instruction), the priority of the interrupt prohibition will be stored.
disabled
SD151 0: All priority interrupts are disabled (default); R(read only)
interrupt
1: Priority 1 and 2 interrupts are prohibited;
priority
2: Priority 2 interrupt is prohibited;
3: All priority interrupts are allowed

50 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
 DI, EI nested structure
A: Sequence control program

(1) Interrupt allowable intervals of all priority levels;

(2) Interrupt forbidden zone below priority 2 (interrupt
allowable zone above priority 1);
(3) Interrupt forbidden interval below priority 1 (interrupt
allowable interval above priority 0);
(4) Interrupt prohibition zone below priority 2 (interrupt
enable zone above priority 1);
(5) Interrupt allowable intervals of all priority levels;
(6) EI paired with [DI K1];
(7) EI paired with [DI K2].
• Interrupts (requests) that occur after the DI instruction are processed after the EI instruction is executed.
• When the DI instruction is executed multiple times and the priority of the argument is specified to be higher than the priority
currently being prohibited, interrupts below the priority of the argument are disabled.
• When the DI instruction is executed multiple times and the priority of the argument is specified to be lower than the priority
currently being disabled, the interrupt disable status will not be changed.
• The nesting of DI instructions can be up to 16 levels.
• The interrupt priority of the interrupt pointer can be set by the properties of the interrupt program. Refer to the description of the
interrupt program for details.
• The interrupt prohibition interval when DI instruction and EI instruction are executed is as follows.
1) When the DI instruction is executed multiple times (when the interrupt with priority higher than the currently prohibited
interrupt priority is prohibited and specified)

Scan execution type program

1 Interrupt allowable intervals of all priority levels;
2 Interrupt prohibition interval below priority 2 (interrupt allowable interval above priority 1);
3 Interrupt prohibition section below priority 1 (interrupt enable section above priority 0).
2) When the DI instruction is executed multiple times (when the interrupt priority is lower than the currently prohibited interrupt
priority is prohibited and specified)

Scan execution type program

1 Interrupt allowable intervals of all priority levels;
2 Interrupt prohibited interval below priority 1 (interrupt allowable interval above priority 0);
3 The interrupts below priority 1 are already in the disabled state, so the interrupt disable priority will not be changed.
3) When DI instruction is executed through interrupt program

51 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

A: Scan execution type program

B: interrupt program
1 Interrupt allowable intervals of all priority levels;
2 Interrupt prohibited interval below priority 3 (interrupt allowable interval above priority 1);
3 Interrupt prohibition section below priority 2 (interrupt enable section above priority 0).
4) When only DI instructions without arguments are executed

A: Scan execution type program

1 Interrupt allowable intervals of all priority levels;
2 Interrupt prohibition interval below priority 1 (all interrupt prohibition intervals);
3 Because the DI instruction with no argument is set to interrupt prohibition, by executing the EI instruction once, all priority
interrupts are set to allow.
5) In the case of executing DI instructions with arguments and DI instructions without arguments (when executing in the order of
DI instructions with arguments → DI instructions without arguments)

A: Scan execution type program

1 Interrupt allowable intervals of all priority levels;
2 Interrupt prohibition interval below priority 2 (interrupt allowable interval above priority 1);
3 Interrupt prohibition section below priority 1 (all interrupt prohibition sections).
6) In the case of executing DI instructions with arguments and DI instructions without arguments (in the case of execution in the
order of DI instructions with no arguments → DI instructions with arguments)

A: Scan execution type program

1 Interrupt allowable intervals of all priority levels;
2 Interrupt prohibition section below priority 1 (all interrupt prohibition sections).

52 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Error code
Error code Content
4085H (S) read address exceeds the device range
4084H The data set in (S) exceeds 0 to 2
4185H When the nesting of DI instructions exceeds 16 levels
Example

All interrupt programs can be triggered

Can trigger interrupt programs of priority 0 and priority 1

Can trigger interrupts with priority 0

Cannot trigger any interrupts

Can trigger an interrupt program with a priority of 0

Can trigger interrupt programs with priority 0 and priority 1

53 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
SIMASK/Interrupt mask
Set interrupt pointer No. specified in (I) to the execution permission state/execution prohibition state according to the value of (s).
-[SIMASK (I) (s)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(I) Interrupt program name - Program name POINTER
(s) Specify the enable/disable of interrupt 0: Allow. 1: Prohibited Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 Only support interrupt program name
SIMASK
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●●● ●
Features
• The interrupt program of the interrupt program name specified in (I) is set to the execution permission state/execution prohibited
state according to the data specified in (s).
• When (s) is 0: Interrupt program execution permission status
• When (s) is 1, the execution of the interrupt program is prohibited
• Regarding the interrupt program when the power is turned on or after STOP→RUN, all interrupt programs will be executed.
• After setting interrupt prohibition, the prohibition state will be saved even if the instruction is disconnected. To restore it, write 0 to
(S), turn on the instruction again, or execute STOP→RUN.
• The interrupted execution permission status/execution prohibition status will be stored in SM or SD, details as following:
(1) External interrupt
Register Content Register Content Register Content Register Content
SM352 X0 rising edge interrupt SM356 X2 rising edge interrupt SM360 X4 rising edge interrupt SM364 X6 rising edge interrupt
SM353 X0 falling edge interrupt SM357 X2 falling edge interrupt SM361 X4 falling edge interrupt SM365 X6 falling edge interrupt
SM354 X1 rising edge interrupt SM358 X3 rising edge interrupt SM362 X5 rising edge interrupt SM366 X7 rising edge interrupt
SM355 X1 falling edge interrupt SM359 X3 falling edge interrupt SM363 X5 falling edge interrupt SM367 X7 falling edge interrupt
(2) Timer interrupt
Register Content
SD350 to SD356 Timer interrupt mask, each bit represents an interrupt, a total of 100
(3) High-speed counter interrupt
Register Content
SD382 to SD388 high-speed counter interrupt mask, each bit represents an interrupt, a total of 100
Error code
Error code Content
4084H Data beyond 0 and 1 is input in the application instruction(s)
4085H (S) in the read application instruction exceeds the device range
4189H The SIMASK instruction specifies an interrupt program name that is not set

54 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Example

As shown in the figure: when M10 is turned on,

the three interrupt programs of INT10, INT91 and
INT70 are prohibited from running.

4.4 Cycle instructions

FOR to NEXT/Cycle
When the processing between the FOR to NEXT instruction is executed unconditionally (n) times, the next processing of the NEXT
instruction will be performed.

Content, range and data type

Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(n) Number of repetitions between FOR to NEXT instructions 1 to 32767 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16

Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
FOR Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●●● ●
Features
• When the processing between the FOR to NEXT instruction is executed unconditionally (n) times, the next processing of the NEXT
instruction will be performed.
• (n) can be specified in the range of 1 to 32767. When specifying -32768 to 0, the same processing as (n)=1 will be performed.
• If you do not want to execute the processing between the FOR and NEXT instructions, use the CJ instruction to jump.
• The FOR instruction can be nested up to 5 levels.
✎Note:
• In the case of FOR to NEXT instruction programming with nesting between FOR to NEXT instructions, up to 5 levels can be achieved.

• Do not use IRET, SRET, RET, FEND, END and other instructions to block between FOR to NEXT instructions.
55 WECON technology Co., Ltd.
 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
• If the number of repetitions is too large, the cycle time (operation cycle) becomes longer and the watchdog timer error occurs, you
need to change the watchdog timer time or reset the watchdog timer.
• The following program will become an error.

• If the FOR to NEXT instruction is repeatedly executed and ends midway, use the BREAK instruction.
Error code
Error code Content
4085H (s) read address exceeds the device range
4100H When the nesting of FOR to NEXT instructions exceeds 5 levels or the number of FOR to NEXT does not correspond
Example

The program INC D0 will be executed 10 times, and INC D1 will be executed 100 times.
After execution, D0 will be equal to 10 and D1 will be equal to 100.

56 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
BREAK/Break cycle
When the processing between the FOR to NEXT instruction is executed unconditionally (n) times, the next processing of the NEXT
instruction will be performed.
-[BREAK]
Features
• Forcibly end the repeated processing by FOR to NEXT instructions.
• This instruction can only be between FOR to NEXT, otherwise an operation error will be reported.
• The BREAK instruction can only jump out of the loop nesting structure where the instruction itself is located.
• When the contact is connected, the loop structure of the FOR to NEXT instruction where it is located is forced to end, as shown in
the figure below.

M0 turns ON, no matter how many cycles are left to execute,

jump directly to step 35 to execute the program.

M4 turns ON, no matter how many loops are left to execute,

jump directly to step 50 to execute the program.

Error code
Error code Content
4186H BREAK instruction is not used between FOR to NEXT instructions
Example

The program INC D0 will be executed 10 times, and INC D1 will be executed 100 times.
When M0 is OFF, D0 will be equal to 10 and D1 will be equal to 100 after execution.
When M0 is ON, the BREAK instruction is executed, and the current loop is exited. The INC D1 instruction will not be executed, and
the result D1=0.

57 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
4.5 Master Control Instructions
MC and MCR instructions
• MC: Start main control.
• MCR: End the main control.

Content, range and data type

Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(N) Nested ID N 0 to 7 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(d) Device number that is turned ON - Bit ANY_BOOL

Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter1 Only use N0 to N7
MC
Parameter2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●●●
MCR Parameter1 Only use N0 to N7
Features
The main control instruction is used to create an efficient circuit program switching program by opening and closing the common bus
of the circuit program.
The transition of ordinary Circuit program and master control Circuit program is as follows:

MC to MCR internal program, X0 must

be open to execute

■MC
• When the execution instruction of the MC instruction is turned on by the start of main control, the operation result from the start
of the MC instruction to the MCR instruction is the execution result of the instruction (loop). When the MC execution instruction is
OFF, the calculation results from the MC instruction to the MCR instruction are as follows.

58 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Devices Device status
Timer The count value becomes 0, and the coil and contact are all turned off.
Counter, cumulative timer The coil turns off, but the count value and contact remain in the current state.
Devices in the OUT instruction Forced to be OFF.
Devices in SET and RST instruction
Keep the current state
Devices in basic and application instructions
• For MC instructions, the same nesting (N) number can be used multiple times by changing the device of (d).
• When the MC instruction is ON, the coil of the device specified in (d) will turn ON. In addition, when the same device is used in an
OUT instruction, etc., it becomes a double coil. Therefore, the device specified in (d) must not be used in other instructions.
Key points:
If there are instructions that do not require contact (such as, FOR to NEXT instructions).If the instruction after MC can not affect the
main CPU module, the instruction will execute.
■MCR
• The release instruction of the main control indicates the end of the main control range.
• Do not add a contact instruction before the MCR instruction.
• When using, MC instruction and MCR instruction of the same nesting number should be used. However, when the MCR instruction
has a nested structure concentrated in one position, all main controls can be terminated by the smallest number (N) number. (Refer
to notes)
■Nested structure
The main control instruction can be used through a nested structure. Each main control section is distinguished by nesting (N). N0 to
N7 can be used for nesting.
By using the nested structure, it is possible to create a Circuit program that sequentially restricts the execution conditions of the
program. The Circuit program using the nested structure is shown below.
(Left: Display of engineering tools, Right: Actual action loop)

1 Execute when A is ON;

2 Execute when A and B are ON;
3 Execute when A, B, C are ON;
4 It has nothing to do with A, B,
C.

✎Note:
• If there is no instruction (LD, LDI, etc.) connected to the bus after the MC instruction, a program structure error occurs.
• MC to MCR instructions cannot be used in FOR to NEXT, STL to RET, subroutines, events, and interrupts. In addition, there cannot be
instructions such as IRET, FEND, END, RET (SRET) inside MC to MCR to block.
• There can be up to 8 nests (N0 to N7). In the case of nesting, the MC instruction is used from the small number of nesting (N), while

59 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
the MCR instruction is used from the old number. If the order is reversed, it does not become a nested structure, so the CPU module
cannot operate normally.
• When the MCR instruction is a nested structure concentrated in one location, all main control can be ended by the smallest number
(N) number.
Error code
No operation error
Example
1) No nested structure

Main control program 1

Main control program 2

The main control program 1 and the main control program 2 do not belong to the nested structure, so you can use N0 programming.
There is no limit to the number of times N0 can be used in this case.
2) Nested structure
When using the MC instruction, the number of nesting level N increases sequentially.(N0→ N1→ N2→ N3→ N4→ N5→ N6→ N7).
When returning, use the MCR instruction to release from the larger nesting level. (N7→ N6→ N5→ N4→ N3→ N2→ N1 → N0).
For example, when MCR N6 and MCR N7 are not programmed, if MCR N5 is programmed, the nesting level will return to 5 at
once.The nesting level can be programmed up to 8 levels (N7).

N2 N1 N0

As shown above:
87 Walk: Level N0, Y0 will follow X1 state only when X0 is ON.
95 Walk: Level N1, Y1 will follow X3 state only when X0 and X2 are both ON.
103 Walk: Level N2, Y2 will follow X5 state only when X0, X2, and X4 are ON at the same time.
109 Walk: Level N1, use MCR N2 to return to level N1. Y3 will follow the state of X6 only when X0 and X2 are both ON.
115 walk: level N0, use MCR N1 to return to level N0. Y4 will follow the state of X7 only when X0 is ON.
121 Walk: Does not belong to the main control structure, has nothing to do with X0, X2, X4, Y5 follows the state change of X10.

60 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
4.6 Watchdog reset
WDT/watchdog timer
The watchdog timer is reset by the program.
-[WDT]
Features
• Reset the watchdog timer through the program.
• Use when the scan time exceeds the set value of the watchdog timer depending on conditions.
• For t1 from step 0 to WDT instruction, and from WDT instruction to END instruction, do not exceed the set value of the watchdog
timer.

• The WDT instruction can be used more than twice in one scan.
✎Note:
• The watchdog timeout time can be set in the special register SD122. The default is 200ms.
• Use the special relay SM122 to control whether to turn on the watchdog timer function. The WDT instruction will be invalid after
closing.

1 The watchdog timer time is set to 300ms;

2 Refresh the watchdog timer.
Error code
There is no operation error.
Example

The FOR to NXET instruction loop takes a long scan period for many times, which may exceed the set watchdog timer 300ms, causing
the PLC to report an error and cannot continue to run. After turning on M0, the WDT instruction will run, and the watchdog timer is
updated every cycle , So that it will not report an error to execute the program normally.

61 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

5 Timer and counter output instructions

5.1 Timer output instruction
OUT T/Timer output
When the calculation result before the OUT instruction is ON, the coil of the timer/retentive timer specified in (d) will be ON and
measurement will be performed until the set value is reached. If the time limit expires, the normally open contact will conduct and
the normally closed contact will become non-conductive.
-[OUT (d) (value)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(d) Timer device number - Counter ANY
(value) Timer setting value 0 to 32767 Unsigned BIN 16 bit ANY16
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●
OUT T
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ●●● ● ●●
Features
When the operation result before the OUT instruction is ON, the coil of the timer specified in (d) will be ON and measurement will be
performed until the set value is reached. If the count reaches (current value ≥ set value), the normally open contact will be
conductive, and the normally closed contact will become non-conductive.
When the operation result before the OUT instruction changes from ON to OFF, the situation is as follows.
Before the time limit After the time limit
Timer The current value
Timer type Normally open Normally closed Normally open Normally closed
coil of the timer
contact contact contact contact
Timer OFF 0 Non-conductive Conduction Non-conductive Conduction
Cumulative timer OFF Keep current value Non-conductive Conduction Conduction Non-conductive
• After the time limit expires, clear the current value of the accumulative timer and turn off the contact with the RST instruction.
• When the setting value is 0, the time limit will expire when the OUT instruction is executed.
• While the OUT T instruction is ON, if the OUT T instruction is skipped by the CJ instruction, etc., the current value update and
contact ON/OFF will not be performed.
• If the same OUT T instruction is executed more than twice in the same scan, the current value will be updated according to the
number of executions.
• Description of each timer:
Device number Timer specifications Device number Timer specifications
T0 to T191 100ms timer T246 to T249 1ms accumulative timer

100ms subroutine timer (used in the subroutine, even if the T250 to T255 10ms cumulative timer
T192 to T199
subroutine is not called, it will still be updated) T256 to T383 1ms timer

T200 to T245 10ms timer T384 to T511 0.1ms timer

Error code
Error code Content
4084H The parameter setting in (value) is out of range

62 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Example
Using timing, D0 increases by 1 after every 1S:

5.2 Counter output instructions

OUT C/Counter output
16-bit counter instruction: When the operation result before the OUT instruction changes from OFF to ON, the current value of the
counter specified in (d) will be +1. If the count reaches, the normally open contact will be turned on and the normally closed contact
will become Non-conductive.
-[OUT (d) (value)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(d) Counter device number - Counter ANY
(value) Counter setting value 0 to 32767 Unsigned BIN 16 bit ANY_INT
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●
OUT C
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ● ●● ● ●●●
Features
• When the calculation result before the OUT instruction changes from OFF to ON, the current value (count value) of the counter
specified in (d) will be +1. If the count reaches (current value ≥ set value), the normally open contact will be turned on , The normally
closed contact becomes non-conductive.
• If the calculation result is ON, no counting is performed. (Counting input does not need to be pulsed.)
• After the count is reached, the count value and the state of the contact do not change before the RST instruction is executed.
• When the setting value is 0, the processing is the same as when it is 1.
Error code
Error code Content
4084H The parameter setting in (value) is out of range
4085H The (value) parameter exceeds the device range
Example

Every time M0 changes from OFF→ON, C0 will increase by 1. When the value of C0 is added to K10, the normally open contact of C0
is closed and Y0 is output. At this time, M0 continues from OFF→ON, and the value of C0 will not change anymore.
The contact of C0 can only be turned OFF by RST/ZRST instruction and communication.
63 WECON technology Co., Ltd.
 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
OUT LC instruction/Long counter output
32-bit counter instruction: When the operation result before the OUT instruction changes from OFF to ON, the current value of the
long counter specified in (d) will be +1. If counted, the normally open contact will be turned on and the normally closed contact will
change It is non-conductive.
-[OUT (d) (value)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(d) Long counter device number - Counter ANY
(value) Long counter setting value 0 to 4294967295 Unsigned BIN 32 bit ANY_INT
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●
OUT LC
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ● ●● ● ●●●
Features
• When the calculation result before the OUT instruction changes from OFF to ON, the current value (count value) of the long
counter specified in (d) will be +1. If the count reaches (current value ≥ set value), the normally open contact will turn on On, the
normally closed contact becomes non-conductive.
• If the calculation result is ON, no counting is performed. (Counting input does not need to be pulsed.)
• After the count is reached, the count value and contact status will not change before the RST instruction or ZRST instruction is
executed.
• When the setting value is 0, the processing is the same as when it is 1.
Error code
Error code Content
4085H The (value) parameter exceeds the device range
Example

Each time M0 changes from OFF to ON, LC0 will increase by 1. When the value of LC0 is added to K10, the normally open contact of
LC0 is closed and Y0 is output. At this time, M0 continues from OFF→ON, and the value of LC0 will not change anymore.
The contact of LC0 can only be turned OFF by RST/ZRST instruction and communication.

64 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

6 High-speed input counter

6.1 Specifications of high-speed counter
Types of high-speed counters
(1) Single-phase input counter (S/W)
The counting method of single-phase input counter (S/W) is as follows:

(2) AB phase input counter [1 times frequency]

The counting method of AB phase input counter [1 times frequency] is as follows:
Increase/decrease action Timing
When counting up Phase A input is ON and phase B input is OFF→ON, the count will increase by 1
When counting down When the A phase input is ON and the B phase input is ON→OFF, the count will decrease by 1
When counting up When counting down

(3) AB phase input counter [2 times frequency]

The counting method of 2-phase 2-input counter [2 times frequency] is as follows:
Increase/decrease action Timing
When the A phase input is ON and the B phase input is OFF→ON, the count will increase by 1;
When counting up
The count will increase by 1 when the phase A input is OFF and the phase B input is ON→OFF.
When A phase input is ON and B phase input is ON→OFF, the count will decrease by 1;
When counting down
When phase A input is OFF and phase B input changes from OFF→ON, the count will decrement by 1.
When counting up When counting down

65 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
(4) AB phase input counter [4 times frequency]
The counting method of 2-phase 2-input counter [4 times frequency] is as follows:
Increase/decrease action Timing
When B phase input is OFF and A phase input is OFF→ON, the count will increase by 1;
When the A phase input is ON and the B phase input is OFF→ON, the count will increase by 1;
When counting up
When B phase input is ON and A phase input is ON→OFF, the count will increase by 1;
The count will increase by 1 when the phase A input is OFF and the phase B input is ON→OFF.
When A phase input is OFF and B phase input is OFF→ON, the count will decrease by 1;
When B phase input is ON and A phase input is OFF→ON, the count will decrease by 1;
When counting down
When A phase input is ON and B phase input is ON→OFF, the count will decrease by 1;
When Phase B input is OFF and Phase A input is ON→OFF, the count will decrement by 1.
When counting up When counting down

Highest frequency
The maximum countable frequency of various high-speed counters is as follows:
Counter type Highest frequency
Single phase input counter (S/W) 150KHz
AB phase input counter [1 times frequency] 100KHz
AB phase input counter [2 times frequency] 100KHz
AB phase input counter [4 times frequency] 100KHz
Counting range: -2147483648 to 2147483647, which is a signed 32-bit ring counter.

High-speed counter allocation

The input soft components of various types of high-speed counters are fixedly allocated, including 8 channels HSC0 to HSC7.
Each channel can be changed to single-phase input or AB-phase input according to the high-speed counter configuration, but it
should be noted that the occupied X point cannot be repeated.

Channel High-speed counter type X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X10 X11 X12 X13 X14 X15 X16 X17
Single phase input (S/W) A
HSC0
AB phase input A B
Single phase input (S/W) A
HSC1
AB phase input A B
Single phase input (S/W) A
HSC2
AB phase input A B
Single phase input (S/W) A
HSC3
AB phase input A B
Single phase input (S/W) A
HSC4
AB phase input A B

66 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Single phase input (S/W) A
HSC5
AB phase input A B
Single phase input (S/W) A
HSC6
AB phase input A B
Single phase input (S/W) A
HSC7
AB phase input A B
A: Phase A input B: Phase B input
✎Note: After HSC0 uses the AB phase input, HSC1 can no longer use single-phase input, because HSC0 occupies two points X0 and
X1, and if HSC1 wants to use single-phase input, X1 needs to be occupied and conflicts occur. The same is true for other channels.

High-speed counter use steps

The following describes the steps to use the high-speed counter.
“Project management” → “Parameter” → “High-speed counter configuration”
(1) Screen display

(2) Display content

Parameter Range Instruction Defaults
Use or not Use/not use Set whether to use the counter. Unused
Pulse input Single phase input
Choose to use single phase input or AB phase input Single phase input
mode AB phase input
Up counting mode down Select up/down counting mode, valid only when single-phase
Counting direction Up counting mode
counting mode input
One times frequency
Frequency One times
two times frequency Select input count multiplier, only valid when AB phase input
multiplication frequency
four times frequency
Set how often the input frequency is measured at the interval. The
shorter the set time, the less accurate the frequency. The
Input frequency
1 to 32767(ms) frequency measurement result is output in the special register SD. 1000ms
test time (ms)
For details, see the description of the SD high-speed counter in
the special register.
Set the X point of this channel as the filter time for high-speed
input. The smaller the filter setting, the more accurate the
Filter time 0 to 1700(0.01us) 1
theoretical count, but the anti-interference ability will be reduced
(the filter time is only valid for unidirectional input).

67 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
When the input is 0, it is the lowest filter time supported by the
system.
Single phase input: 150K Display the highest input frequency that each channel can reach,
Highest frequency
AB phase input: 100K read only
Show which X points are occupied after using the channel, read
Occupy X points -
only
Check whether the configured X input point is reused, it is
Check button recommended to click check when setting is completed, and then
confirm the input
Restore to default Restore to the same default settings as above
Input (X) Pop up the description table of all modes of each channel
description occupying X
After the configuration is complete, click to confirm the input to
Confirm input
save the configuration and take effect
(3) Configuration example
HSC0 to HSC3 are configured as 4 single-phase inputs, and HSC4 to HSC7 are configured as 4 AB phase inputs.

Use the OUT HSC instruction in the main program to enable High-speed counter. At this time, as long as there is an external pulse
input, the pulse value can be observed in HSC0 to HSC7.

In the double word composed of special soft components SD403 and SD402, the current input pulse frequency of HSC0 can be
monitored. Other channels also have corresponding registers, please refer to the description of special registers for details.
If the counter need to be stopped, just turn off the OUT HSC instruction.

68 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
6.2 High-speed counter instructions
OUT HSC/High-speed counter switch
When the operation result before the OUT HSC instruction is ON, the high-speed counter is turned on. At this time, the value of the
HSC register records the number of high-speed pulses currently received. If the count value is reached, the corresponding HSC bit
register becomes on.
-[OUT (d) (value)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(d) High-speed counter channel HSC0 to HSC7 Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32
(value) High-speed counter setting value -2147483648 to 2147483647 Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●
OUT HSC
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ●● ● ●
Features
To enable or disable high-speed counter counting, please configure the high-speed input channel to use the high-speed counter. For
details, refer to the high-speed counter description.
Operation result
Action HSC data register status HSC bit register status
before instruction
The value is accumulated Turn ON when the value reaches the set
ON Turn on High-speed counter
according to the input pulse value, otherwise OFF
OFF Stop High-speed counter The value remains the same State remains unchanged
Error code
Error code Content
4085H (value) The read address exceeds the device range
2580H After the high-speed counter is turned on, but the axis high-speed counter enable is not configured
Example
HSC0 to HSC3 are configured as 4 single-phase inputs, and HSC4 to HSC7 are configured as 4 AB phase inputs.

Use the OUT HSC instruction in the main program to enable High-speed counter. At this time, as long as there is an external pulse
input, the pulse value can be observed in HSC0 to HSC7.

69 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

In the double word composed of special soft components SD403 and SD402, the current input pulse frequency of HSC0 can be
monitored. Other channels also have corresponding registers, please refer to the description of special registers for details.
When the value of HSC0 is greater than 0, the contact of HSC0 will be set, and the other channels are the same. As shown in the
circuit program below, Y0 will be turned on.

DHSCS/High-speed comparison set

Comparing the counted value in the high-speed counter with the specified value each time it counts, and then immediately set the
bit device instruction.
-[DHSCS (s1) (s2) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
The data compared with the current value of the
-2147483648 to
(s1) high-speed counter, or the word device number Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32
+2147483647
where the data to be compared is stored
(s2) High-speed counter device HSC0 to HSC7 Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32
(d) Bit device number set (ON) when they match Bit ANY_BOOL
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●● ● ● ● ●● ●
DHSCS Parameter 2 ●
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ●
Features
• When the current value of the high-speed counter of the channel specified in (s2) becomes the comparison value (s1) (in the case
of the comparison value K200, 199→200 and 201→200), regardless of the scan time, the bit device (d) Both will be set (ON). This
instruction performs comparison processing after the counting processing of the high-speed counter.

• If the device specified in (d) is Y0 to Y20, when (d) is set, Y will be directly mapped to the actual hardware output, regardless of the

70 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
scan cycle.
• DHSCS parameter 3 can also use the interrupt function name as a parameter. As shown in the figure below, the interrupt program
INT0 will be executed when HSC0 is from (19999→20000) or (20001→20000).

✎Note:
The high-speed counter interrupt only supports a total of 100 programs, and each DHSCS is also counted in these 100. If it exceeds,
an operation error will be reported.
Error code
Error code Content
4084H The input device in (s2) exceeds the range of HSC0 to HSC7
4085H (s1) and (s2) read addresses exceed the device range
4086H (d) write address exceeds the device range
2406H The number of high-speed counter interrupts exceeds 100
4F81H DHSCS,SHSCR and DHSZ runs,but OUT HSC does not program
Example
To configure the high-speed counter, take HSC0 as an example.

In scanning MAIN, use the EI instruction to enable the interrupt, and then use the OUT HSC instruction to turn on the high-speed
counter.
After M0 is turned on, when the value of HSC0 changes from 19999→20000, the INT0 program is executed once, that is, D0 is
increased by 1.
When the value of HSC0 changes from 20000→20001, the INT0 program is not executed, that is, D0 remains at 1.
When the value of HSC0 changes from 20001→20000, the INT0 program is executed once, that is, D0 is increased by 1, and D0 is 2.

71 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DHSCR/High-speed comparison reset
Each time it counts, compare the counted value in the high-speed counter with the specified value, and then immediately reset the
bit device instruction.
-[DHSCR (s1) (s2) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
The data compared with the current value of the
-2147483648 to
(s1) high-speed counter, or the word device number Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32
2147483647
where the data to be compared is stored
(s2) High-speed counter device HSC0 to HSC7 Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32
(d) Bit device number reset (OFF) when they match Bit ANY_BOOL
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●● ● ● ● ●● ●
DHSCR Parameter 2 ●
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ●
Features
• When the current value of the high-speed counter of the channel specified in (s2) becomes the comparison value (s1) (in the case
of the comparison value K200, 199→200 and 201→200), regardless of the scan time, the bit device (d) Both will be reset (OFF). This
instruction performs comparison processing after the counting processing of the high-speed counter.

• If the device specified in (d) is Y0 to Y20, when (d) is set, Y will be directly mapped to the actual hardware output, regardless of the
scan cycle.
✎Note:
The high-speed counter interrupt only supports a total of 100 programs, and each DHSCR is also counted in these 100. If it exceeds,
an operation error will be reported.
Error code
Error code Content
4084H The input device in (s2) exceeds the range of HSC0 to HSC7
4085H The (s1) and (s2) read addresses exceed the device range
4086H The (d) write address exceeds the device range
2406H The number of high-speed counter interrupts exceeds 100
4F81H DHSCS,SHSCR and DHSZ runs,but OUT HSC does not program.
Example
To configure the high-speed counter, use HSC0 as an example.

72 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

Use the OUT HSC instruction to turn on the high-speed counter while scanning MAIN.
After M0 is turned on, when the value of HSC0 changes from 99→100, reset Y0 and D0 will increase by 1.

DHSZ/High-speed zone comparison

The current value of the high-speed counter is compared with two values (bandwidth), and the comparison result is output.
-[DHSZ (s1) (s2) (s3) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
The data compared with the current value of the high-speed
-2147483648 Signed BIN
(s1) counter, or the word device number (comparison value 1) ANY32
to 2147483647 32 bit
where the data to be compared is stored
The data compared with the current value of the high-speed
-2147483648 Signed BIN
(s2) counter, or the word device number (comparison value 2) ANY32
to 2147483647 32 bit
where the data to be compared is stored
Signed BIN
(s2) High-speed counter device HSC0 to HSC7 ANY32
32 bit
ANYBIT_ARRAY
The device number of the start bit of the comparison result
(d) Bit (number of
output in comparison value 1 and comparison value 2
elements: 3)
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●● ● ● ● ●● ●
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ●● ● ● ● ●● ●
DHSCZ
Parameter 3 ●
Parameter 4 ● ● ● ● ●

73 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Features
• Compare the current value of the high-speed counter specified in (s3) with two comparison values (comparison value 1,
comparison value 2), regardless of the scan time, (d), (d)+1, (d)+2 One item in will turn ON according to the comparison result (lower,
in area, upper).

• If the device specified in (d) is Y0 to Y15, when (d), (d+1), (d+2) are set, Y will be directly mapped to the actual hardware output, not
affected by the scan cycle .
• When setting [Comparison Value 1] and [Comparison Value 2], please ensure that [Comparison Value 1]<[Comparison Value 2]. If
the settings are different, an operation error will occur, and the DHSZ instruction will not execute the action.
✎Note:
The high-speed counter interrupt only supports a total of 100 programs, and each DHSZ is also counted in these 100, and the DHSZ
instruction will occupy the space of 2 interrupt programs. If it exceeds, an operation error will be reported.
The comparison result occupies the unit of 3 consecutive addresses starting with (d). Please be careful not to overlap with other
controlled devices. In addition, when specifying the Y device, please set it not to exceed the actual number of Y point outputs.
Error code
Error code Content
4084H (s2) The input device exceeds the range of HSC0 to HSC7
4085H (s1)(s2) The read address exceeds the device range
4086H (d) The write address exceeds the device range
2406H The number of high-speed counter interrupts exceeds 100
4F81H DHSCS,SHSCR and DHSZ runs,but OUT HSC does not program
Example
To configure the high-speed counter, use HSC0 as an example.

Scanner

Execution results

74 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Change of output contact (Y)
Comparison mode Current value of channel 1 (s3)
Y0 Y1 Y3
1000>(s3) ON OFF OFF
(S1)>(s3) 999→1000 ON→OFF OFF→ON OFF
1000→999 OFF→ON ON→OFF OFF
999→1000 ON→OFF OFF→ON OFF
1000→999 OFF→ON ON→OFF OFF
(S1)≤(s3)≤(s2) 1000≤(s3)≤2000 OFF ON OFF
2000→2001 OFF ON→OFF OFF→ON
2001→2000 OFF OFF→ON ON→OFF
2000→2001 OFF ON→OFF OFF→ON
(S3)>(s2) 2001→2000 OFF OFF→ON ON→OFF
(S3)>2000 OFF OFF ON

75 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

7 Basic instructions
7.1 Transfer comparison instruction
MOV/16-bit transmission
MOV(P)
Transfer the BIN 16-bit data of the device specified in (s) to the device specified in (d).
-[MOV (s) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s) Transmit source data or the device number stored data -32768 to 32767 Signed BIN16 ANY16_S
(d) Transmit destination device number - Signed BIN16 ANY16_S
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
MOV
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
Features
• Transfer the BIN 16-bit data specified in (s) to the device specified in (d).

Error code
Error code Content
4085H The output result of (s) in read application instruction exceeds the device range
4086H The output result of (d) in write application instruction exceeds the device range
Example

When M0 is set, the value of D0 is transferred to the value of D2: (D0)→(D2).

76 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DMOV/32-bit transmission
DMOV(P)
Transfer the BIN 32-bit data of the device specified in (s) to the device specified in (d).
-[DMOV (s) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
Transmit source data or the device number
(s) -2147483648 to 2147483647 Signed BIN32 ANY32_S
stored data
(d) Transmit destination device number - Signed BIN32 ANY32_S
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
DMOV
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
Transfer the BIN 16-bit data specified in (s) to the device specified in (d).

Error code
Error code Content
4085H The output result of (s) in read application instruction exceeds the device range
4086H The output result of (d) in write application instruction exceeds the device range
Example

When M0 is set, the value of (D1, D0) is transferred to the value of (D3, D2): (D1, D0) → (D3, D2).

77 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
BMOV/Batch transmission
BMOV(P)
The (n) point BIN 16-bit data starting from the device specified in (s) is sequentially transmitted to the device specified in (d).
-[BMOV (s) (d) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s) The start device that stores the transmission data - Signed BIN16 ANY16_S
(d) The start device that transmit target - Signed BIN16 ANY16_S
(n) Number of transmission 1 ≤ n ≤ 512 Signed BIN16 ANY16_S
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
BMOV Parameter 2 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
Features
Batch transfer the BIN 16-bit data of point (n) starting from the device specified in (s) to the device specified in (d).

When the device number exceeds the range, it will be transferred within the allowable range.
By controlling the direction reversal flag (SM224) of the BMOV instruction, the BIN 16-bit data at point (n) starting from the device
specified in (d) can be batch transferred to the device specified in (s).
Error code
Error code Content
4084H In application instruction (n) input the data exceeds the specified range
4085H The output results of (s) and (n) in read application instruction exceed the device range
4086H The output result of (d) in write application instruction exceeds the device range
Example

When M0 is set, set M1, then (D5)→(D10); (D6)→(D11); (D7)→(D12);

When M0 is reset, set M1, then (D10)→(D5); (D11)→(D6); (D12)→(D7).

78 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
FMOV/16-bit multicast
FMOV(P)
Transfer the BIN 16-bit data of the device specified in (s1) to the device specified in (d) at (n) points (that is, transfer the same data to
multiple addresses).
-[FMOV (s) (d) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s) The start device that stores the transmission data -32768 to 32767 Signed BIN16 ANY16_S
(d) The start device that transmit target - Signed BIN16 ANY16_S
(n) Number of transmission [K1 ≤ n ≤ 512] Signed BIN16 ANY16_S
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
FMOV Parameter 2 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
Features
The same data as the BIN 16-bit data of the device specified in (s) is transferred to the device specified in (d) at (n) points.

When the number specified in (n) exceeds the device number range, transfer is performed within the allowable range.
When a constant (K) is specified for the transmission source (s), it will be automatically converted to BIN.
Error code
Error code Content
4084H (s) and(n) input the data In application instruction exceed the specified range
4085H The output results of (s) and (n) in read application instruction exceed the device range
4086H The output result of (d) in write application instruction exceeds the device range
Example

When M0 is set, the value of D0 to D4 is set to 0.

79 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DFMOV/ 32-bit multicast
DFMOV(P)
Transfer the BIN 32-bit data of the device specified in (s1) to the device specified in (d) at (n) points (that is, transfer the same data to
multiple addresses).
-[FMOV (s) (d) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Data type
Parameter Content Range Data type
(label)
(s) Transfer data or start device storing transfer data -2147483648 to 2147483647 Signed BIN32 ANY32_S
(d) Start device of transfer destination - Signed BIN32 ANY32_S
(n) Number of transfers [1≤n≤512] Signed BIN32 ANY32_S
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ●● ● ●
DFMOV Parameter 2 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
Features
The same data as the BIN 32-bit data of the device specified in (s) is transferred to the device specified in (d) at (n) points.

When the number specified in (n) exceeds the device number range, transfer is performed within the allowable range.
When a constant (K) is specified for the transmission source (s), it will be automatically converted to BIN.
Error code
Error code Content
4084H (s) and (n) input the data In application instruction exceed the specified range
4085H The output results of (s) and (n) in read application instruction exceed the device range
4086H The output result of (d) in write application instruction exceeds the device range

Example

When M0 is set, the value of (D1, D0), (D3, D2), (D5, D4), (D7, D6), (D9, D8) is set to 0.

80 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
SMOV/Bit shift
SMOV(P)
A instruction for distributing and synthesizing data in units of digits (4 bits).
-[SMOV (s) (n1) (n2) (d) (n3)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s) The word device number that stores the data whose bit is to be moved Signed BIN16 ANY16_S
(n1) Transfer destination device number 1 to 4 Signed BIN16 ANY16_S
(n2) The number of digits to move 1 to 4 Signed BIN16 ANY16_S
(d) The word device number that stores data for bit shifting Signed BIN16 ANY16_S
(n3) The starting position of the moving target 1 to 4 Signed BIN16 ANY16_S
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
SMOV Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
Parameter 4 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
Parameter 5 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
Features
The data is distributed/combined in units of digits (4 bits). The contents of the transmission source (s) and the transmission
destination (d) are converted into 4-digit BCD (0000 to 9999), and the (n1) bits are transferred to the lower (n2) bits and the (n3) bits
of the transmission destination (d) (combined ) After reaching the starting position, it is converted to BIN and stored in the transfer
destination (d).
When the instruction input is OFF, the transfer destination (d) does not change.
When the instruction input is ON, the data of the transmission source (s) and the number of digits other than the transmission
specification of the transmission destination (d) do not change.

(1) Perform BIN→BCD conversion on

(s).
(2) Transfer (synthesize) the (n1)th bit
to the lower (n2), (d), (n3)th bit to
the (n2)th bit counted from the
previous. (D), the first and fourth
digits start from (s), and the
transmission will not be affected.

(3) Convert the synthesized data

(BCD) into BIN and store it in (d).

Extended function
If the SMOV instruction is executed after SM168 is turned ON, the BIN→BCD conversion will not be performed. The bit shift is
performed in 4-bit units.

81 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Error code
Error code Content
(n1), (n2) and (n3) input data that exceed the specified range in the application instruction or does not satisfy the
4084H
relationship of n2≤n1 and n2≤n3.
4085H The output result of (s), (n1) (n2), (d) and (n3) in the read application instruction exceeds the device range
4086H The output result of (d) in write application instructions exceeds the device range
Example
After synthesizing the data of the 3-digit digital switch, it is stored in D2 in binary.

Combine data of 3 digital switches connected to non-continuous input terminals.

When M0 is set,
(X020 to X027) BCD 2 digits → D 2 (binary);
(X000 to X003) BCD 1 digit → D 1 (binary);
Store the 1 digit of D1 into the 3 digit of D2, and synthesize a 3-digit value.

82 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
CML/16-bit invert transmission
CML(P)
After the BIN 16-bit data specified in (s) is inverted bit by bit, the result is transferred to the device specified in (d).
-[CML (s) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s) Inverted data or the device number that stores data -32768 to 32767 Signed BIN16 ANY16_S
(d) The device number that stores the inversion result - Signed BIN16 ANY16_S
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
CML
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
Features
After inverting the BIN 16-bit data specified in (s) bit by bit, the result is transferred to the device specified in (d).

When the number of digits of the device with the specified digit is 4 points, other digits are not affected.
Error code
Error code Content
4085H The output result of (s) in read application instruction exceeds the device range
4086H The output result of (d) in write application instruction exceeds the device range

Example
Example 1:

When M0 is set, the value of D0 is inverted and transferred to the value of D2.
Example 2:
invert input acquisition:

83 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DCML/32-bit invert transmission
DCML(P)
After the BIN 32-bit data specified in (s) is inverted bit by bit, the result is transferred to the device specified in (d).
-[CML (s) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Data type
Parameter Content Range Data type
(label)
(s) Inverted data or the device number that stores data -2147483648 to 2147483647 Signed BIN32 ANY32_S
(d) The device number that stores the inversion result - Signed BIN32 ANY32_S
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ●● ● ●
DCML
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
After inverting the BIN 32-bit data specified in (s) bit by bit, the result is transferred to the device specified in (d).

When the number of digits of the device with the specified digit is 4 points, other digits are not affected.
Error code
Error code Content
4085H The output result of (s) in read application instruction exceeds the device range
4086H The output result of (d) in write application instruction exceeds the device range

Example

When M0 is set, the value of (D1, D0) is reversed and transferred to the value of (D3, D2).

84 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
CMP/16-bit data comparison output
CMP(P)
Compare the BIN 16-bit data of the device specified in (s1) and (s2).
-[CML (s1) (s2) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
Comparison value data or the device storing the -32768 to
(s1) Signed BIN16 ANY16_S
comparison value data +32767
Comparison source data or the device storing the
(s2) -32768 to 32767 Signed BIN16 ANY16_S
comparison source data
(d) Start bit device for output comparison result Bit ANYBIT_ARRAY
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
CMP Parameter 2 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
Compare the BIN 16-bit data of the device specified in (s1) with the BIN 16-bit data of the device specified in (s2). According to the
result (less than, consistent, greater than), (d), (d)+1, (d) One of )+2 will turn ON.
(s1) and (s2) are handled as BIN values within the above setting data range.
Use algebraic methods for size comparison.

(1): Even if the instruction input is OFF and the CMP instruction is not executed, (d) to (d)+2 will keep the state before the instruction
input changed from ON to OFF.
✎Note:
Occupy the device specified in 3 points (d) at the beginning, please be careful not to overlap with the device used for other control.
Error code
Error code Content
4085H The output results of (s1) and (s2) in read application instruction exceed the device range
4086H The output result of (d) in write application instruction exceeds the device range
Example
When M0 is set, compare the values of D0 and D2:
If (D0)> (D2) then Y0 is ON.
If (D0) = (D2) then Y1 is ON. If (D0) <(D2) then Y2 is ON.
85 WECON technology Co., Ltd.
 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DCMP/32-bit data comparison output
DCMP(P)
Compare the BIN 32-bit data of the device specified in (s1) and (s2).
-[DCML (s1) (s2) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
Comparison value data or the device storing Signed
(s1) -2147483648 to 2147483647 ANY32_S
the comparison value data BIN32
Comparison source data or the device storing Signed
(s2) -2147483648 to 2147483647 ANY32_S
the comparison source data BIN32
(d) Start bit device for output comparison result Bit ANYBIT_ARRAY
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ●● ● ●
DCMP Parameter 2 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
• Compare the BIN 16-bit data of the device specified in (s1) with the BIN 16-bit data of the device specified in (s2). According to the
result (less than, consistent, greater than), (d), (d)+1, (d) One of )+2 will turn ON.
• (s1) and (s2) are handled as BIN values within the above setting data range.
• Use algebraic methods for size comparison.

(1): Even if the instruction input is OFF, the DCMP instruction is not executed, (d) to (d)+2 will keep the state before the instruction
input changed from ON to OFF.
✎Note:
Occupy the device specified in 3 points (d) at the beginning. Please be careful not to overlap with other control devices.
Error code
Error code Content

4085H The output results of (s1) and (s2) in read application instruction exceed the device range
4086H The output result of (d) in write application instruction exceeds the device range
Example
When M0 is set, compare the values of (D1, D0) and (D3, D2):
If (D1, D0)> (D3, D2) then Y0 is ON.
If (D1, D0) = (D3, D2) then Y1 is ON.
If (D1, D0) <(D3, D2) then Y2 is ON.
86 WECON technology Co., Ltd.
 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
XCH/16-bit data exchange
XCH(P)
Exchange the BIN 16-bit data of (d1) and (d2).
-[XCH (d1) (d2)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(d1) The start device that stores the exchange data -32768 to 32767 Signed BIN16 ANY16_S
(d2) The start device that stores the exchange data -32768 to 32767 Signed BIN16 ANY16_S
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
XCH
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
Features
• Exchange the BIN 16-bit data of (d1) and (d2).

• When executing instructions with SM160 ON, if the device numbers of (d1) and (d2) are the same. Exchange the upper 8 bits (byte)
and lower 8 bits (byte) of the word device.

✎Note: If continuous execution instructions are used, conversion will be performed every operation cycle.
Error code
Error code Content
4084H In exchange mode, the devices in (d1) and (d2) are different
4085H The output results of (d1) and (d2) in the read application instruction exceed the device range
4086H The output results of (d1) and (d2) in the writing application instruction exceed the device range
Example
When M0 is reset, set M1: the value of D0 and the value of D2 are exchanged.

87 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
When M0 is set, M1 is set: the upper 8 bits (bytes) and lower 8 bits (bytes) of D0 are exchanged with each other.

DXCH/32-bit data exchange

DXCH(P)
Exchange (d1) and (d2) BIN 32-bit data.
-[DXCH (d1) (d2)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(d1) The start device that stores the exchange data -2147483647 to 2147483647 Signed BIN32 ANY32_S
(d2) The start device that stores the exchange data -2147483647 to 2147483647 Signed BIN32 ANY32_S
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
DXCH
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
• Exchange the BIN 32-bit data of (d1), (d1)+1 and (d2), (d2)+1.

• When executing instructions with SM160 ON, if the device numbers of (d1) and (d2) are the same. Exchange the upper 8 bits (byte)
and lower 8 bits (byte) of the word device (d1) and (d1+1).

✎Note: If continuous execution instructions are used, conversion will be performed every operation cycle.
Error code
Error code Content
4084H In exchange mode, the devices in (d1) and (d2) are different
4085H The output results of (d1) and (d2) in the read application instruction exceed the device range
4086H The output results of (d1) and (d2) in the writing application instruction exceed the device range
Example :

88 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
When M0 is set, M1 is set: the high 8 bits (byte) and low 8 bits (byte) of the D0 Devices are exchanged, and the high 8 bits (byte) and
low 8 bits (byte) of the D1 Devices ) Exchange each other.

When M0 is reset, set M1: the value of (D1, D0) and the value of (D3, D2) are exchanged.

ZCP/16-bit data interval comparison

ZCP(P)
Compare the BIN 16-bit data of the device specified in (s1) and the value (bandwidth) of the BIN 16-bit data of the device specified in
(s2) with the BIN 16-bit data of the device specified in the comparison source (s3), Output the result (bottom, area, top) to the device
specified in (d) and later.
-[ZCP (s1) (s2) (s3) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
The comparison value data of low limit or the device that
(s1) -32768 to 32767 Signed BIN16 ANY16_S
stores the comparison value data
The comparison value data of high limit or the device
(s2) -32768 to 32767 Signed BIN16 ANY16_S
that stores the comparison value data
Comparison source data or the device that stores the
(s3) -32768 to 32767 Signed BIN16 ANY16_S
comparison source data
(d) The start bit device of output comparison result Bit ANYBIT_ARRAY
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●●● ● ●
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●●● ● ●
ZCP
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●●● ● ●
Parameter 4 ● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
• Compare the BIN 16-bit data of the device specified in (s1) and the value (bandwidth) of the BIN 16-bit data of the device specified
in (s2) with the BIN 16-bit data of the device specified in the comparison source (s3) , According to the result (bottom, area, top), one
of (d), (d)+1, (d)+2 will be turned ON. (s1), (s2), (s3) are treated as BIN values within the above-mentioned setting data range. Use
algebraic methods for size comparison.
• Use algebraic methods for size comparison.

89 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

(1): Even if the instruction input is OFF and the ZCP instruction is not executed, (d) to (d)+2 will keep the state before the instruction
input turns from ON to OFF.
✎Note:
• Please set the lower comparison value (s1) to a value smaller than the upper comparison value (s2).
• When (s1) is greater than (s2), it will be processed as (s2)=(s1).
• The device specified in 3 points (d) is occupied at the beginning. Please be careful not to overlap with other control devices.

Error code
Error code Content
4085H The output results of (s1), (s2) and (s3) in the read application instruction exceed the device range
4086H The output result of (d) in write application instructions exceeds the device range
Example

When M0 is set, compare whether D0 is between 0 and 1000:

If (D0)> (1000), then Y0 is ON.
If (0) ≤ (D0) ≤ (1000), then Y1 is ON.
If (D0) <(0), then Y2 is ON.

DZCP/32-bit data interval comparison

DZCP(P)
Compare the BIN 32-bit data of the device specified in (s1) and the value (bandwidth) of the BIN 32-bit data of the device specified in
(s2) with the BIN 32-bit data of the device specified in the comparison source (s3), Output the result (bottom, area, top) to the device
specified in (d) and later.
-[DZCP (s1) (s2) (s3) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
The comparison value data of low limit or the -2147483648 to
(s1) Signed BIN32 ANY32_S
device that stores the comparison value data 2147483647
The comparison value data of high limit or the -2147483648 to
(s2) Signed BIN32 ANY32_S
device that stores the comparison value data 2147483647
Comparison source data or the device that -2147483648 to
(s3) Signed BIN32 ANY32_S
stores the comparison source data 2147483647

90 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
(d) The start bit device of output comparison result Bit ANYBIT_ARRAY
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ●●● ● ●
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ●●● ● ●
DZCP
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ●●● ● ●
Parameter 4 ● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
• Compare the BIN 32-bit data of the device specified in (s1) and the value (bandwidth) of the BIN 32-bit data of the device specified
in (s2) with the BIN 32-bit data of the device specified in the comparison source (s3) , According to the result (bottom, area, top), one
of (d), (d)+1, (d)+2 will be turned ON. (s1), (s2), (s3) are treated as BIN values within the above-mentioned setting data range. Use
algebraic methods for size comparison.
• Use algebraic methods for size comparison.

(1): Even if the instruction input is OFF and the ZCP instruction is not executed, (d) to (d)+2 will keep the state before the instruction
input turns from ON to OFF.
✎Note:
• Please set the lower comparison value (s1) to a value smaller than the upper comparison value (s2).
• When (s1) is greater than (s2), it will be processed as (s2)=(s1).
• The device specified in 3 points (d) is occupied at the beginning. Please be careful not to overlap with other control devices.
Error code
Error code Content

4085H The output results of (s1), (s2) and (s3) in the read application instruction exceed the device range
4086H The output results of (d) in the write application instruction exceeds the device range

Example

When M0 is set, compare D0 with whether it is between 0 and 100000:

If (D0)> (100000), then Y0 is ON.
If (0) ≤ (D0) ≤ (100000), then Y1 is ON.
If (D0) <(0), then Y2 is ON.

91 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
7.2 Cycle shift instruction
ROR/16-bit cycle shift right
ROR(P)
Shift the 16-bit data of the device specified in (d) to the right by (n) bits without including the carry flag.
-[ROR (d) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(d) The device start number for cycle shift right - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(n) The number of times to cycle shift right 0 to 15 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
ROR
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
Features
・The 16-bit data of the device specified in (d) is shifted right by (n) bits without including the carry flag. The carry flag is in the ON or
OFF state according to the state before the ROR(P) is executed.

(n) Specifies 0 to 15. When a value of 16 or more is specified in (n), the remainder value of (n)÷16 is shifted to the right. For example,
when (n)=18, 18÷16=1 and the remainder is 2, so a 2-bit right shift is performed.
Related device
Device Name Content
SM151 Carry It turns ON when the last bit shifted from the lowest is 1.
✎Note:
Do not set the number of digits (n) shifted right to a negative value.
In the case of continuous execution type instructions (ROR, RCR), the right shift will be executed every scan time (operation cycle), so
be careful.
When specifying the number of digits to specify the device in (d), only K4 (16-bit instruction) or K8 (32-bit instruction) is valid. (For
example, K4Y10, K8M0).

92 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Error code
Error code Content
4084H A negative value is specified in (n).
4085H The output results of (d) and (n) in the read application instruction exceed the device range

4086H The output result of (d) in the write application instruction exceeds the device range

Example

Shift the 1 in the D0 device by 3 bits to the right to get 8192.

DROR/32-bit cycle shift right

DROR(P)
Shift the 32-bit data of the device specified in (d) to the right by (n) bits without including the carry flag.
-[DROR (d) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(d) The device start number for cycle shift right - Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32
(n) The number of times to cycle shift right 0 to 31 Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
DROR
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ●● ● ●
Features
・The 32-bit data of the device specified in (d) is shifted right by (n) bits without including the carry flag. The carry flag is on or off
according to the state before DROR(P) is executed.

(n) Specifies 0 to 31. When a value of 32 or more is specified in (n), the remainder of (n)÷32 is shifted to the right. For example, when
(n)=34, 34÷32=1 and the remainder is 2, so a 2-bit right shift is performed.
Related device
Device Name Content
SM151 Carry It turns ON when the last bit shifted from the lowest is 1.
✎Note:

93 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Do not set the number of digits (n) shifted right to a negative value.
In the case of continuous execution type instructions (ROR, RCR), the right shift will be executed every scan time (operation cycle), so
be careful. When specifying the number of digits to specify the device in (d), only K4 (16-bit instruction) or K8 (32-bit instruction) is
valid. (For example, K4Y10, K8M0).
Error code
Error code Content
4084H A negative value is specified in (n).
4085H The output results of (d) and (n) in the read application instruction exceed the device range
4086H The output result of (d) in the write application instruction exceeds the device range
Example
After the rising edge of M1 is triggered, the value 32 of the D0 device is shifted right
by 3 bits to get 4.

RCR/16-bit cycle shift right with carry

RCR(P)
Shift the 16-bit data of the device specified in (d) to the right by (n) bits with the carry flag included.
-[RCR (d) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(d) The device start number for cycle shift right - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(n) The number of times to cycle shift right 0 to 15 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
RCR
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
Features
Shift the BIN 16-bit data of the device specified in (d) to the right by (n) bits with the carry flag included. The carry flag is on or off
according to the state before the RCR(P) is executed.

(n) Specifies 0 to 15. When a value of 16 or more is specified in (n), the remainder value of (n)÷16 is shifted to the right. For

94 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
example, when (n)=18, 18÷16=1 and the remainder is 2, so a 2-bit right shift is performed.
Related device
Device Name Content

SM151 Carry It turns ON when the last bit shifted from the lowest is 1.
✎Note:
Do not set the number of digits (n) shifted right to a negative value.
In the case of continuous execution type instructions (ROR, RCR), the right shift will be executed every scan time (operation cycle), so
be careful.
When specifying the number of digits to specify the device in (d), only K4 (16-bit instruction) or K8 (32-bit instruction) is valid. (For
example, K4Y10, K8M0).
Error code
Error code Content
4084H A negative value is specified in (n)
4085H The output results of (d) and (n) in the read application instruction exceed the device range
4086H The output result of (d) in the write application instruction exceeds the device range
Example

After the rising edge of M0 is triggered, the carry flag SM151 turns ON, and D0 is assigned the value 1. When M1=ON, the value in
the D0 device is shifted right by 4 bits to get 12288.

95 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DRCR/32-bit cycle shift right with carry
DRCR(P)
Shift the 32-bit data of the device specified in (d) to the right by (n) bits with the carry flag included.
-[DRCR (d) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(d) The device start number for cycle shift right - Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32
(n) The number of times to cycle shift right 0 to 31 Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
DRCR
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ●● ● ●
Features
・The BIN 32-bit data of the device specified in (d) is shifted right by (n) bits with the carry flag included. The carry flag is in the ON or
OFF state according to the state before DRCR(P) is executed.

(n) Specifies 0 to 31. When a value of 32 or more is specified in (n), the remainder value of (n)÷32 is shifted to the right. For example,
when (n)=34, 34÷32=1 and the remainder is 2, so a 2-bit right shift is performed.
Related device
Devices Name Content
SM151 Carry It turns ON when the last bit shifted from the lowest is 1.
✎Note:
Do not set the number of bits (n) to turn right to a negative value.
In the case of continuous execution type instructions (DROR, DRCR), the right shift will be executed every scan time (operation cycle),
so be careful. When specifying the number of digits to specify the device in (d), only K4 (16-bit instruction) or K8 (32-bit instruction)
is valid. (For example, K4Y10, K8M0).
Error code
Error code Content
4084H A negative value is specified in (n).
4085H The output results of (d) and (n) in the read application instruction exceed the device range
4086H The output result of (d) in the write application instruction exceeds the device range
Example

After the rising edge of M0 is triggered, the carry flag SM151 turns ON, and D0
is assigned the value 1. When M1=ON, the value in the D0 device is shifted
right by 20 bits to get 12288.
96 WECON technology Co., Ltd.
 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
ROL/16-bit cycle shift left
ROL(P)
Shift the 16-bit data of the device specified in (d) to the left by (n) bits without including the carry flag.
-[ROL (d) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(d) The device start number for cycle shift left - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(n) The number of times to cycle shift left 0 to 15 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
ROL
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
Features
・The 16-bit data of the device specified in (d) is shifted to the left by (n) bits without including the carry flag. The carry flag is in the
ON or OFF state according to the state before ROL(P) is executed.

(n) Specify 0 to 15. When a value of 16 or more is specified in (n), the remainder value of (n)÷16 is shifted to the left. For example,
when (n)=18, 18÷16=1 and the remainder is 2, so a 2-bit left shift is performed.
Related device
Device Name Content
SM151 Carry It turns ON when the last bit shifted from the highest is 1.
✎Note:
Do not set the number of digits (n) shifted to the left to a negative value. In the case of continuous execution type instructions (ROL,
RCL), the shift to the left will be executed every scan time (operation cycle), so be careful. When specifying the number of digits to
specify the device in (d), only K4 (16-bit instruction) or K8 (32-bit instruction) is valid. (For example, K4Y10, K8M0).
Error code
Error code Content
4084H A negative value is specified in (n).
4085H The output results of (d) and (n) in the read application instruction exceed the device range
4086H The output result of (d) in the write application instruction exceeds the device range
Example

Shift 1 in the D0 device to the left by 3 bits to get 8.

97 WECON technology Co., Ltd.
 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DROL/32-bit cycle shift left
DROL(P)
Shift the 32-bit data of the device specified in (d) to the left by (n) bits without including the carry flag.
-[DROL (d) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(d) The device start number for cycle shift left - Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32
(n) The number of times to cycle shift left 0 to 31 Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
DROL
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ●● ● ●
Features
・The 32-bit data of the device specified in (d) is shifted left by (n) bits without including the carry flag. The carry flag is on or off
according to the state before DROL(P) is executed.

(n) Specifies 0 to 31. When a value of 32 or more is specified in (n), the remainder of (n)÷32 is shifted to the left. For example, when
(n)=34, 34÷32=1 and the remainder is 2, so a 2-bit left shift is performed.
Related device
Device Name Content
SM151 Carry It turns ON when the last bit shifted from the highest is 1.
✎Note:
Do not set the number of digits (n) shifted to the left to a negative value.
In the case of continuous execution type instructions (ROL, RCL), the shift to the left will be executed every scan time (operation
cycle), so be careful. When specifying the number of digits to specify the device in (d), only K4 (16-bit instruction) or K8 (32-bit
instruction) is valid. (For example, K4Y10, K8M0).
Error code
Error code Content
4084H A negative value is specified in (n).
4085H The output results of (d) and (n) in the read application instruction exceed the device range
4086H The output result of (d) in the write application instruction exceeds the device range
Example

Shift 1 in the D0 device to the left by 3 bits to get 8.

98 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
RCL/16-bit cycle shift left with carry
RCL(P)
Shift the 16-bit data of the device specified in (d) to the left by (n) bits with the carry flag included.
-[RCL (d) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(d) The device start number for cycle shift left - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(n) The number of times to cycle shift left 0 to 15 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
RCL
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
Features
・The 16-bit data of the device specified in (d) is shifted (n) to the left with the carry flag included. The carry flag is on or off according
to the state before RCL(P) is executed.

(n) Specifies 0 to 15. When a value of 16 or more is specified in (n), the remainder value of (n)÷16 is shifted to the left. For example,
when (n)=18, 18÷16=1 and the remainder is 2, so a 2-bit left shift is performed.
Related device
Device Name Content
SM151 Carry It turns ON when the last bit shifted from the highest is 1.
✎Note:
Do not set the number of digits (n) shifted to the left to a negative value. In the case of continuous execution type instructions (ROL,
RCL), the shift to the left will be executed every scan time (operation cycle), so be careful. When specifying the number of digits to
specify the device in (d), only K4 (16-bit instruction) or K8 (32-bit instruction) is valid. (For example, K4Y10, K8M0).
Error code
Error code Content
4084H A negative value is specified in (n).
4085H The output results of (d) and (n) in the read application instruction exceed the device range
4086H The output result of (d) in the write application instruction exceeds the device range
Example

After the rising edge of M0 is triggered, the carry flag SM151

turns ON, and D0 is assigned the value 1.
When M1=ON, move the value in the D0 device with carry to
99 WECON technology Co., Ltd.
 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DRCL/32-bit cycle shift left with carry
DRCL(P)
Move the 32-bit data of the device specified in (d) to the left by (n) bits with the carry flag included.
-[DRCL (d) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(d) The device start number for cycle shift left - Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32
(n) The number of times to cycle shift left 0 to 31 Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
DRCL
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ●● ● ●
Features
The 32-bit data of the device specified in (d) is shifted (n) to the left with the carry flag included. The carry flag is on or off according
to the state before RCL(P) is executed.

(n) Specifies 0 to 31. When a value of 32 or more is specified in (n), the remainder of (n)÷32 is shifted to the left. For example, when
(n)=34, 34÷32=1 and the remainder is 2, so a 2-bit left shift is performed.
Related device
Devices Name Content
SM151 Carry Turns ON when the last bit shifted from the highest is 1.
✎Note:
Do not set the number of digits (n) shifted to the left to a negative value. In the case of continuous execution type instructions (ROL,
RCL), the shift to the left will be executed every scan time (operation cycle), so be careful. When specifying the number of digits to
specify the device in (d), only K4 (16-bit instruction) or K8 (32-bit instruction) is valid. (For example, K4Y10, K8M0).
Error code
Error code Content
4084H A negative value is specified in (n).
4085H The output results of (d) and (n) in the read application instruction exceed the device range
4086H The output result of (d) in the write application instruction exceeds the device range
Example
After the rising edge of M0 is triggered, the carry flag SM151 turns ON, and D0 is assigned
the value 1. When M1=ON, carry the value in the D0 device to the left by 4 bits to get 24.
100 WECON technology Co., Ltd.
 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
SFTR/n-bit shift right of n-bit data
SFTR(P)
Shift (n2) the data of the start (n1) bits of the device specified in (d) to the right.
-[SFTR (s) (d) (n1) (n2)]
Content, range and data type
Data type
Parameter Content Range Data type
(label)
(s) The start number of the device storing the shifted data after shifting - Bit ANY_BOOL
(d) The shifted device start number - Bit ANY_BOOL
(n1) The length of shifted data 0 to 32767 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(n2) Number of shifts 0 to 32767 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
SFTR Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
Parameter 4 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
Features
Shift (n2) the data of the start (n1) bits of the device specified in (d) to the right. After shifting, the point (n2) starting from (s) is
transferred to the point (n2) starting from (d) + (n1 to n2).
When K0 is specified in (s), the bit of the (d) + (n1 to n2) starting point (n2) after the shift is set to 0.
When K1 is specified in (s), the bit of the (d) + (n1 to n2) starting point (n2) after the shift is set to 1.

(1): When (s)=K0, it becomes 0.

Error code
Error
Content
code
When the value specified in (n1) and (n2) exceeds the range of 0 to 32767
4084H
When the value specified in (n1) and (n2) is (n1)<(n2)
4085H When the device specified in read application instructions (s), (d), (n1) and (n2) exceeds the corresponding device range
4086H When the device specified in the write application instruction (d) exceeds the corresponding device range
Example
For n1=9 bits (the length of the shift register) data starting with M0, right shift n2=3 bits. After shifting, transfer n2=3 bits from Y0 to
n2=3 bits from M6.

101 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
SFTL/n-bit shift left of n-bit data
SFTL(P)
Shift the start (n1) bit data of the device specified in (d) to the left by (n2) bits.
-[SFTL (s) (d) (n1) (n2)]
Content, range and data type
Data type
Parameter Content Range Data type
(label)
(s) The start number of the device storing shifted data after shifting - Bit ANY_BOOL
(d) The shifted device start number - Bit ANY_BOOL
(n1) The length of shifted data 0 to 32767 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(n2) Number of shifts 0 to 32767 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
SFTL Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
Parameter 4 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
Features
Shift (n2) bits of the data at the beginning (n1) bits of the device specified in (d). After shifting, the point (n2) starting from (s) is
transferred to the point (n2) starting from (d) + (n1 to n2).
When K0 is specified in (s), the bit of the (d) + (n1 to n2) starting point (n2) after the shift is set to 0.
When K1 is specified in (s), the bit of the (d) + (n1 to n2) starting point (n2) after the shift is set to 1.

(1): When (s)=K0, it becomes 0.

Error code
Error
Content
code
When the value specified in (n1) and (n2) exceeds the range of 0 to 32767
4084H
When the value specified in (n1) and (n2) is (n1)<(n2)
4085H When the device specified in read application instructions (s), (d), (n1) and (n2) exceeds the corresponding device range
4086H When the device specified in the write application instruction (d) exceeds the corresponding device range
Example

102 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
WSFR/n-word shift right of n-word data
WSFR(P)
Shift (n2) the data of the start (n1) bits of the device specified in (d) to the right.
-[WSFR (s) (d) (n1) (n2)]
Content, range and data type
Data type
Parameter Content Range Data type
(label)
(s) The start number of the device storing shifted data after shifting - word ANY_BOOL
(d) The shifted device start number - word ANY_BOOL
(n1) The length of shifted data 0 to 32767 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(n2) Number of shifts 0 to 32767 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
SFTR Parameter 2 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
Parameter 4 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
Features
Shift (n2) the data of the beginning (n1) word of the device specified in (d) to the right. After shifting, the point (n2) starting from (s)
is transferred to the point (n2) starting from (d) + (n1 to n2).
When K is specified in (s), the device at (d) + (n1 to n2) starting (n2) point after shifting is set to the specified value.
If the value specified in (n1) or (n2) is 0, it will be no processing.

Error code
Error
Content
code
When the value specified in (n1) and (n2) exceeds the range of 0 to 32767
4084H When the value specified in (n1) and (n2) is (n1)<(n2)
When (s) and (d) both specify KnM, KnX, and KnS, the value of n varies.
4085H When the device specified in read application instructions (s), (d), (n1) and (n2) exceeds the corresponding device range
4086H When the device specified in the write application instruction (d) exceeds the corresponding device range
Example

(S) and (d) specify the same multiple in the

digit specified device. This program realizes to
shift Y0 to Y7 bits right, shift Y10 to Y17 right to
Y0 to Y7, and then store X0 to X7 to Y10 to Y17.

103 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
WSFL/n-word shift left of n-word data
WSFL(P)
Shift the start (n1) bit data of the device specified in (d) to the left by (n2) bits.
-[WSFL (s) (d) (n1) (n2)]
Content, range and data type
Data type
Parameter Content Range Data type
(label)
(s) The start number of the device storing shifted data after shifting - Word ANY_BOOL
(d) The shifted device start number - Word ANY_BOOL
(n1) The length of shifted data 0 to 32767 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(n2) Number of shifts 0 to 32767 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
SFTR Parameter 2 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
Parameter 4 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
Features
Shift (n2) the data of the beginning (n1) word of the device specified in (d) to the left. After shifting, transfer the point (n2) starting
from (s) to the point (n2) starting from (d).
When K is specified in (s), the device at (d) + (n1 to n2) starting (n2) point after shifting is set to the specified value.
If the value specified in (n1) or (n2) is 0, it will be no processing.

Error Code
Error
Content
code
When the value specified in (n1) and (n2) exceeds the range of 0 to 32767
4084H When the value specified in (n1) and (n2) is (n1)<(n2)
When (s) and (d) both specify KnM, KnX, and KnS, the value of n varies.
4085H When the device specified in read application instructions (s), (d), (n1) and (n2) exceeds the corresponding device range
4086H When the device specified in the write application instruction (d) exceeds the corresponding device range
Example

(S), (d) Do the same multiple specification in

the digit specification device. This program
realizes to remove the high bits of Y10 to
Y17 left, move Y0 to Y7 left to Y10 to Y17,
and then store X0 to X7 to Y0 to Y7.

104 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
SFR/n-bit shift right of 16-bit data
SFR(P)
Shift the 16-bit data of the device specified in (d) right by (n) bits.
-[SFR (d) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(d) The start number of the device storing the shifted data - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(n) Number of shifts 0-15 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
SFR
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
Features

When (N)=6
Shift the 16-bit data of the device specified in (d) to the
right (n) bits from the highest bit. The (n) bit from the
most significant bit will become 0.

When (N)=6
When a bit device is specified in (d), the device range
specified in the digit specification is shifted to the right.

(n) Specifies 0 to 15. When a value of 16 or more is specified in (n), the remainder of (n)÷16 is shifted to the left. For example, when
(n)=18, 18÷16=1 and the remainder 2, so it is shifted by 2 bits to the right.
Related device
Device Name Content
SM151 Carry Set to ON/OFF according to the state of n-1 bit (1/0)
Error code
Error code Content
4084H A negative value is specified in (n).
4085H The output results of (d) and (n) in the read application instruction exceed the device range
4086H The output result of (d) in the write application instruction exceeds the device range
Example
When M1 is ON, the contents of Y10 to Y23 are shifted to the right by the number of digits specified in D0.

105 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DSFR/n word data shift right by 1 word
DSFR(P)
Shift the data at the start (n) point of the device specified in (d) to the right by 1 word.
-[DSFR (d) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(d) The start number of the device storing the shifted data - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(n) Number of shifts 0 to 32767 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
DSFR
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
Features
• Shift the data at the start (n) point of the device specified in (d) by 1 word to the right.

• The device specified in (d)+(n-1) will become 0.

✎Note:
In (d), when specifying the device number by specifying the number of bits of the bit device, the device number should be a multiple
of 16 (0, 16, 32, 64...), and only K4 should be specified for the number of bits. When the number of bits is not K4, K4 is used for
processing.
Error code
Error code Content
4084H When the value specified in (n) exceeds the range of 0 to 32767
4085H The output results of (d) and (n) in the read application instruction exceed the device range
4086H The output result of (d) in the write application instruction exceeds the device range
Example
When M1 is ON, shift the contents of D0 to D4 to the right by 1 word (D1→D0, D2→D1, D3→D2, D4→D3, D4 is set to 0).

Before execution:

After execution:

106 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
SFL/n-bit shift left of 16-bit data
SFL(P)
Shift the 16-bit data of the device specified in (d) to the left by (n) bits.
-[SFL (d) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(d) The start number of the device storing the shifted data - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(n) Number of shifts 0 to 15 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
SFL
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
Features
Shift the 16-bit data of the device specified in (d) to the left (n) bits from the lowest bit. The (n) bit from the lowest bit will become 0.

When (n)=8, it is as follows.

When a bit device is specified in (d), the left shift is performed in the device range specified in the digit specification.

When (n)=3, it is as follows.

(n) Specify 0 to 15. When a value of 16 or more is specified in (n), the remainder of (n)÷16 is shifted to the left. For example, when
(n)=18, 18÷16=1 remainder 2, so it is shifted by 2 bits to the left.
Related device
Device Name Content
SM151 Carry Turn ON/OFF according to the state of n+1 bit (1/0)
Error code
Error code Content
4084H A negative value is specified in (n).
4085H The output results of (d) and (n) in the read application instruction exceed the device range
4086H The output result of (d) in the write application instruction exceeds the device range
Example: When M1 is ON, the contents of Y10 to Y17 are shifted to the left by the number of digits specified in D0.

107 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DSFL/one word shift left of n word data
DSFL(P)
Move the data at the beginning (n) point of the device specified in (d) by 1 word to the left.
-[DSFL (d) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(d) The start number of the device storing the shifted data - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(n) Number of shifts 0 to 32,767 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
DSFL
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
Features
Shift the data at the start (n) point of the device specified in (d) to the left by 1 word.

The device specified in (d) will become 0.

✎Note:
In (d), when specifying the device number by specifying the number of bits of the bit device, the device number should be a multiple
of 16 (0, 16, 32, 64...), and only K4 should be specified for the number of bits. When the number of bits is not K4, K4 is used for
processing.
Error code
Error code Content
4084H When the value specified in (n) exceeds the range of 0 to 32,767
4085H The output results of (d) and (n) in the read application instruction exceed the device range
4086H The output result of (d) in the write application instruction exceeds the device range
Example
When M1 is ON, shift the contents of D0 to D4 to the left by 1 word (D3→D4, D2→D3, D1→D2, D0→D1, D0 is set to 0).

Before execution:

After execution:

108 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
7.3 Arithmetic operation instructions
ADD/16-bit addition operation
ADD(P)
Add the BIN 16-bit data specified in (s1) and the BIN 16-bit data specified in (s2), and store the result in the device specified in (d).
-[ADD (s1) (s2) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Data type
Parameter Content Range Data type
(label)
(s1) Addition operation data or the device storing the addition data -32768 to 32767 Signed BIN16 ANY16_S
(s2) Addition operation data or the device storing the addition data -32768 to 32767 Signed BIN16 ANY16_S
(d) Device for storing operation results Signed BIN16 ANY16_S
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
ADD Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
Features
Add the BIN 16-bit data specified in (s1) and the BIN 16-bit data specified in (s2), and store the result of the addition in the device
specified in (d).

Related device
Devices Name Content

SM151 Carry When the operation result exceeds 32,767, the carry flag will be (ON).

SM152 Borrow When the operation result is less than -32,768, the borrow flag will be (ON).

SM153 Zero point When the operation result is 0, the zero flag will be (ON).

✎Note:
1 When the source operand and destination operand are specified as the same device:
The source operand and destination operand can also be specified as the same device number.
In this case, if you use continuous execution instructions (ADD, DADD), the result of the addition operation will change every
operation cycle.
2 The difference between the ADD instruction and the INC instruction using the +1 addition operation program:
ADD[P] means that every time X001 changes from OFF to ON, the content of D0 is added by one operation.
Although this instruction is very similar to the INCP instruction described later, there are some differences in the following content.

109 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

ADD/ADDP/DADD/DADDP
INC/INCP/DINC/DINCP instructions
instructions
Flag bit (zero, borrow, carry) Action No action
16-bit (S) + (+1) = (d) 32767 → 0 → +1 → +2 → 32767→-32768→-32767
operation
Calculation result (S) + (-1) = (d) ← -2 ← -1 ← 0 ← -32768 ——

result 32-bit (S) + (+1) = (d) 2147483647 → 0 → +1 → +2 → 2147483647 → -2147483648→ -2147483647

operation
result (S) + (-1) = (d) ← -2 ← -1 ← 0 ← -2147483648 ——

Error code
Error code Content
4085H The output results of (s1) and (s2) in the read application instruction exceed the device range
4086H The output result of (d) in the write application instruction exceeds the device range
Example

Add 10 to the data in (D0), and store the operation result in (D2), that is, (D0) + 10 → (D2).

DADD/32-bit addition operation

DADD(P)
Add the BIN32-bit data specified in (s1) and the BIN32-bit data specified in (s2), and store the result in the device specified in (d).
-[DADD (s1) (s2) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Data type
Parameter Content Range Data type
(label)
(s1) Addition data or the device storing the addition data -2147483648 to 2147483647 Signed BIN32 ANY32_S
(s2) Addition data or the device storing the addition data -2147483648 to 2147483647 Signed BIN32 ANY32_S
(d) Device for storing operation results Signed BIN32 ANY32_S
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ●● ● ●
DADD Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ●● ● ●
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
Features
Add the BIN32-bit data specified in (s1) and the BIN32-bit data specified in (s2), and store the result of the addition in the device
specified in (d).

Related device

110 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Devices Name Content

SM151 Carry When the operation result exceeds 32,767, the carry flag will be (ON).

SM152 Borrow When the operation result is less than -32,768, the borrow flag will be (ON).

SM153 Zero point When the operation result is 0, the zero flag will be (ON).

✎Note:
1 When the source operand and destination operand are specified as the same device:
The source operand and destination operand can also be specified as the same device number.
In this case, if you use continuous execution instructions (ADD, DADD), the result of the addition operation will change every
operation cycle. Please note.
2 The difference between the ADD instruction and the INC instruction using the +1 addition operation program:
ADD[P] means that every time X001 changes from OFF to ON, the content of D0 is added by one operation.
Although this instruction is very similar to the INCP instruction described later, there are some differences in the following content.
ADD/ADDP/DADD/DADDP
INC/INCP/DINC/DINCP instructions
instructions
Flag bit (zero, borrow, carry) Action No action

16-bit (S) + (+1) = (d) 32767→0→+1→+2→ 32767→-32768→-32767

Operation result (S) + (-1) = (d) ←-2←-1←0←-32768 ——

Calculation
result (S) + (+1) = (d) 2147483647→0→+1→+2→ 2147483647→-2147483648→-2147483647
33-Bit
operation result (S) + (-1) = (d) ←-2←-1←0←-2147483648 ——

Error code
Error code Content

4085H The output results of (s1) and (s2) in the read application instruction exceed the device range
4086H The output result of (d) in the write application instruction exceeds the device range
Example

Add 100000 to the data in (D1, D0), and store the result of the operation in (D3, D2), that is, (D1, D0) + 100000 → (D3, D2).

111 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
SUB/16-bit subtraction operation
SUB(P)
Subtract the BIN 16-bit data specified in (s1) and the BIN 16-bit data specified in (s2), and store the result in the device specified in
(d).
-[SUB (s1) (s2) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s1) The subtraction data or the device storing the subtraction data -32768 to 32767 Signed BIN16 ANY16_S
(s2) The subtraction data or the device storing the subtraction data -32768 to 32767 Signed BIN16 ANY16_S
(d) Device for storing calculation results Signed BIN16 ANY16_S
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
SUB Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
Features
Subtract the BIN 16-bit data specified in (s1) and the BIN 16-bit data specified in (s2), and store the result of the operation in the
device specified in (d).

Related device
Devices Name Content

SM151 Carry When the operation result exceeds 32,767, the carry flag will be (ON).

SM152 Borrow When the operation result is less than -32,768, the borrow flag will be (ON).

SM153 Zero point When the operation result is 0, the zero flag will be (ON).

✎Note:
1 When the source operand and destination operand are specified as the same device:
The source operand and destination operand can also be specified as the same device number.
In this case, if continuous execution type instructions (SUB, DSUB) are used, the result of the subtraction operation will change every
operation cycle. Please be careful.
2 The difference between the SUB(P) instruction and the -(P) instruction and DEC(P) instruction executed by the -1 subtraction
program
SUB(P) instruction every time X1 changes from OFF to ON, the program of D0 content -1 is similar to -(P) instruction and DEC(P)
instruction described later, but the following contents are different.
112 WECON technology Co., Ltd.
 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
SUB/SUBP/DSUB/DSUBP
DEC/DECP/DDEC/DDECP instructions
instructions
Flag bit (zero, borrow, carry) Action No action
16-bit operation (S)-(+1)=(d) ←-2←-1←0←-32768 -32768→+32767→32766
Calculation result (S)-(-1)=(d) +32767→0→+1→+2→ ——
result 32-bit operation (S)-(+1)=(d) ←-2←-1←0←-2147483648 -2147483648→2147483647→2147483646
result (S)-(-1)=(d) 2147483647→0→+1→+2→ ——
Error code
Error code Content

4085H The output results of (s1) and (s2) in the read application instruction exceed the device range
4086H The output result of (d) in the write application instruction exceeds the device range
Example

Subtract 10 from the data in D0, and store the calculation result in D2, that is, (D0)-10 → (D2).

DSUB/32-bit subtraction operation

DSUB(P)
Subtract the BIN32-bit data specified in (s1) and the BIN32-bit data specified in (s2), and store the result in the device specified in (d).
-[DSUB (s1) (s2) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
The subtraction data or the device storing
(s1) -2147483648 to 2147483647 Signed BIN32 ANY32_S
the subtraction data
The subtraction data or the device storing
(s2) -2147483648 to 2147483647 Signed BIN32 ANY32_S
the subtraction data
(d) Device for storing calculation results Signed BIN32 ANY32_S
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ●● ● ●
DSUB Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ●● ● ●
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
Subtract the BIN32-bit data specified in (s1) and the BIN32-bit data specified in (s2), and store the result of the operation in the
device specified in (d).

113 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Related device
Devices Name Content

SM151 Carry When the operation result exceeds 2,147,483,647, the carry flag will be ON.

SM152 Borrow When the operation result is less than -2,147,483,648, the borrow flag will be ON.

SM153 Zero point When the operation result is 0, the zero flag will be ON.

✎Note:
1 When the source operand and destination operand are specified as the same device:
The source operand and destination operand can also be specified as the same device number.
In this case, if continuous execution type instructions (SUB, DSUB) are used, the result of the subtraction operation will change every
operation cycle. Please be careful.
2 The difference between the SUB(P) instruction and the -(P) instruction and DEC(P) instruction executed by the -1 subtraction
program
SUB(P) instruction every time X1 changes from OFF to ON, the program of D0 content -1 is similar to -(P) instruction and DEC(P)
instruction described later, but the following contents are different.
SUB/SUBP/DSUB/DSUBP
DEC/DECP/DDEC/DDECP instructions
instructions
Flag bit (zero, borrow, carry) Action No action
16-bit (S)-(+1)=(d) ←-2←-1←0←-32768 -32768→32767→32766
Calculation operation result (S)-(-1)=(d) +32767→0→+1→+2→ ——
result 32-bit (S)-(+1)=(d) ←-2←-1←0←-2147483648 -2147483648→2147483647→2147483646
operation result (S)-(-1)=(d) +2147483647→0→+1→+2→ ——
Error code
Error code Content
4085H The output results of (s1) and (s2) in the read application instruction exceed the device range
4086H The output result of (d) in the write application instruction exceeds the device range
Example

Subtract 100000 from the data in (D1,D0), and store the result of the operation in (D3,D2), that is, (D1,D0)-10000 → (D3,D2).

114 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
MUL/16-bit multiplication
MUL(P)
Multiply the BIN16 bits specified in (s1) with the BIN16 bits specified in (s2), and store the result in the device specified in (d).
-[MUL (s1) (s2) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
Multiplication operation data or the device storing
(s1) -32768 to 32767 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16_S
multiplication operation data
Multiplication operation data or the device storing
(s2) -32768 to 32767 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16_S
multiplication operation data
(d) Device for storing calculation results Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32_S
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
MUL Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
Multiply the BIN 16-bit data specified in (s1) with the BIN 16-bit data specified in (s2), and store the result of the operation in the
device specified in (d).

(d) is the multiplication result in the case of bit device

• K1: lower 4 bits (b0 to b3)
• K4: Lower 16 bits (b0 to b15)
• K8: Lower 32 bits (b0 to b31)
Error code
Error code Content

4085H The output results of (s1) and (s2) in the read application instruction exceed the device range
4086H The output result of (d) in the write application instruction exceeds the device range
Example

Multiply the data in (D0) by (D2), and store the operation result in (D5, D4), that is, (D0) × (D2) → (D5, D4).

115 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DMUL/32-bit multiplication
DMUL(P)
Multiply the 32-bit BIN specified in (s1) and the 32-bit BIN specified in (s2), and store the result in the device specified in (d).
-[DMUL (s1) (s2) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Data type
Parameter Content Range Data type
(label)
Multiplication operation data or device storing
(s1) -2147483648 to 2147483647 Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32_S
multiplication operation data
Multiplication operation data or device storing
(s2) -2147483648 to 2147483647 Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32_S
multiplication operation data
(d) Device for storing calculation results Signed BIN64 bit ANY64_S
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ●● ● ●
DMUL Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ●● ● ●
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
Multiply the BIN32-bit data specified in (s1) and the BIN32-bit data specified in (s2), and store the result of the operation in the
device specified in (d).

(d) is the multiplication result in the case of bit device

• K1: lower 4 bits (b0 to b3)
• K4: Lower 16 bits (b0 to b15)
• K8: Lower 32 bits (b0 to b31)
Error code
Error code Content

4085H The output results of (s1) and (s2) in the read application instruction exceed the device range
4086H The output result of (d) in the write application instruction exceeds the device range
Example

Multiply the data in (D1, D0) by (D3, D2), and store the result of the operation in ((D7, D6), (D5, D4)), ie (D1, D0) × (D3, D2) → ((D7,
D6), (D5, D4)).

116 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DIV/16-bit division operation
DIV(P)
Divide the BIN 16-bit data specified in (s1) with the BIN 16-bit data specified in (s2), and store the result in the device specified in (d).
-[DIV (s1) (s2) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Data type
Parameter Content Range Data type
(label)
(s1) Division operation data or device storing division operation data -32768 to 32767 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16_S
(s2) Division operation data or device storing division operation data -32768 to 32767 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16_S
(d) Device for storing calculation results Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32_S
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
DIV Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
Divide the BIN 16-bit data specified in (s1) with the BIN 16-bit data specified in (s2), and store the result of the operation in the
device specified in (d).

In the case of a word device, the division result uses a 32-bit storage quotient and remainder, and in the case of a bit device, only a
16-bit storage quotient is used.
• Quotient is stored in the lower 16 bits.
• The remainder is stored in the upper 16 bits. (Can only be stored in the case of word devices.)
✎Note
1 About the opearation result
• The highest bit of the quotient and remainder represents the sign of positive (0) and negative (1).
• When one of (s1) or (s2) is negative, the quotient becomes negative. When (s1) is negative, the remainder becomes negative.
2 The device specified by (d)
• With the digit specification function, when specifying a bit device, the remainder cannot be obtained.
Error code
Error code Content
4080H The input of divisor (s2) is 0
4085H The output results of (s1) and (s2) in the read application instruction exceed the device range
4086H The output result of (d) in the write application instruction exceeds the device range
Example

Divide the data in (D0) by (D2), and store the result of the calculation: the quotient is stored in (D4), and the remainder is stored in
(D5), ie (D0)/ (D2) → (D4(quotient)) (D5( remainder)).

117 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DDIV/32-bit division operation
DDIV(P)
Divide the BIN32-bit data specified in (s1) with the BIN32-bit data specified in (s2), and store the result in the device specified in (d).
-[DDIV (s1) (s2) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
Division operation data or device storing
(s1) -2147483648 to 2147483647 Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32_S
division operation data
Division operation data or device storing
(s2) -2147483648 to 2147483647 Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32_S
division operation data
(d) Device for storing calculation results Signed BIN64 bit ANY64_S
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ●● ● ●
DDIV Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ●● ● ●
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
Divide the BIN32-bit data specified in (s1) with the BIN32-bit data specified in (s2), and store the result of the operation in the device
specified in (d).

In the case of word devices, the division result uses BIN64 bits to store the quotient and remainder. In the case of bit devices, only
the BIN 32-bit storage quotient is used.
✎Note:
1 About the operation result
• The highest bit of the quotient and remainder represents the sign of positive (0) and negative (1).
• When one of (s1) or (s2) is negative, the quotient becomes negative. When (s1) is negative, the remainder becomes negative.
2 The specified device of (d)
• With the digit specification function, when a bit device is specified, the remainder cannot be obtained.
Error code
Error code Content

4080H The input of divisor (s2) is 0

4085H The output results of (s1) and (s2) in the read application instruction exceed the device range
4086H The output result of (d) in the write application instruction exceeds the device range
Example

Divide the data in (D1, D0) by (D3, D2), and store the result of the calculation: the quotient is stored in (D5, D4), and the remainder is
stored in (D7, D6), that is (D1, D0)/ (D3, D2) → (D5, D4) (quotient) (D7, D6) (remainder).

118 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
INC/16-bit data increment
INC(P)
Add one to the device (BIN 16-bit data) specified in (d).
-[INC (d)]
Content, range and data type
Data type
Parameter Content Range Data type
(label)
(d) The word device number that stores the data added by one -32768 to 32767 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16_S
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
INC Parameter 1 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
Features
Add one to the device (BIN 16-bit data) specified in (d).

• If the INC(P) instruction is executed when the content of the device specified in (d) is 32767, -32768 will be stored in the device
specified in (d).
• Flags (zero, borrow, carry) do not perform actions.
✎Note:
If the continuous execution (INC) instruction is used, the addition operation will be performed every operation cycle, so care should
be taken.
Error code
Error code Content
4085H The output results of (d) in the read application instruction exceed the device range

4086H The output result of (d) in the write application instruction exceeds the device range
Example

Add one to the device value specified in D0, that is, (D0) + 1 → (D0).

119 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DINC/32-bit data increment
DINC(P)
Add one to the device (BIN 32-bit data) specified in (d).
-[DINC (d)]
Content, range and data type

Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)

The word device number that stores the

(d) -2147483648 to 2147493647 Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32_S
data added by one
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
DINC Parameter 1 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
Add one to the device (BIN 32-bit data) specified in (d).

• When the DINC(P) instruction is executed when the content of the device specified in (d) is 2147483647, -2147483648 will be
stored in the device specified in (d).
• Flags (zero, borrow, carry) do not perform actions.
✎Note:
If the continuous execution (INC) instruction is used, the addition operation will be performed every operation cycle, so care should
be taken.
Error code
Error code Content
4085H The output results of (d) in the read application instruction exceed the device range
4086H The output result of (d) in the write application instruction exceeds the device range
Example

Add one to the device value specified in (D1, D0), that is, (D1, D0) + 1 → (D1, D0).

120 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DEC/16 bit data decrement
DEC(P)
Minus one for the device (BIN 16-bit data) specified in (d).
-[DEC (d)]
Content, range and data type
Data type
Parameter Content Range Data type
(label)
(d) The word device number that stores the data minus by one -32768 to 32767 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16_S
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
DEC Parameter 1 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
Features
Minus one for the device (BIN 16-bit data) specified in (d).

• If the DEC(P) instruction is executed when the content of the device specified in (d) is -32768, 32767 will be stored in the device
specified in (d).
• Flags (zero, borrow, carry) do not perform actions.
✎Note:
If using continuous execution (DEC) instructions, subtraction will be performed every operation cycle, so care should be taken.
Error code
Error code Content
4085H The output results of (d) in the read application instruction exceed the device range
4086H The output result of (d) in the write application instruction exceeds the device range
Example

Each time M0 is set, the value of the device specified in D0 will be -1, (D0)-1 → (D0).

121 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DDEC/32-bit data decrement
DDEC(P)
Minus one for the device (BIN 32-bit data) specified in (d).
-[DDEC (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
The word device number that stores the
(d) -2147483648 to 2147483647 Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32_S
data minus by one
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
DDEC Parameter 1 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
Minus one for the device (BIN 32-bit data) specified in (d).

If the DDEC(P) instruction is executed when the content of the device specified in (d) is 0, minus one will be stored in the device
specified in (d).
• Flags (zero, borrow, carry) do not perform actions.
✎Note:
If using continuous execution (DEC) instructions, subtraction will be performed every operation cycle.
Error code
Error code Content
4085H The output results of (d) in the read application instruction exceed the device range
4086H The output result of (d) in the write application instruction exceeds the device range
Example

Minus one on the device value specified in (D1, D0), that is, (D1, D0)-1 → (D0).

122 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
7.4 Logic Operation Instructions
NEG/16-bit complement
NEG(P)
After inverting the sign of the BIN 16-bit device specified in (d), store it in the device specified in (d).
-[NEG (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(d) The start device that stores the data complement of 2 -32768 to 32767 Signed BIN16 ANY16_S
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
NEG Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
Features
• Invert the sign of the BIN 16-bit device specified in (d), and store it in the device specified in (d).
• Used when inverting positive and negative signs.

✎Note: If the continuous execution (NEG) instruction is used, every operation cycle will be inverted, so care should be taken.
Error code
Error code Content
4085H The output results of (d) in the read application instruction exceed the device range
4086H The output result of (d) in the write application instruction exceeds the device range
Example
In the two examples below, if D2=K4 and D4=K8, or D2=K8 and D10 is always K4.
Each time M0 is set, the device value specified in D0 is reversed.

Take the absolute value of the difference of the subtraction operation.

If D2>D4, M10=On. If D2=D4, M11=On. If D2 <D4, M12=On. This ensures that D10 is positive.
It can also be represented by the following program:

123 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
When bit15 of D10 is "1" (indicating that D10 is a negative number), M10 = On, use NEG instruction to complement D10 to obtain the
absolute value of D10.
In the above two examples, if D2=K4, D4=K8; or D2=K8, D4=K4, the result of D10 is K4.

DNEG/32-bit complement
DNEG(P)
After inverting the sign of the BIN 32-bit device specified in (d), store it in the device specified in (d).
-[DNEG (d)]
Content, range and data type
Data type
Parameter Content Range Data type
(label)
(d) The start device that stores the data complement of 2 -2147483648 to 2147483647 Signed BIN16 ANY16_S
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
DNEG Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
• Invert the sign of the BIN 32-bit device specified in (d) and store it in the device specified in (d).
• Used when inverting positive and negative signs.

✎Note:
If you use continuous execution (DNEG) instructions, every operation cycle will be inverted, so care should be taken.
Error code
Error code Content

4085H The output results of (d) in the read application instruction exceed the device range
4086H The output result of (d) in the write application instruction exceeds the device range
Example

Each time M0 is set, the device value specified in (D1, D0) is reversed.

124 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
WOR/16-bit data logical OR
WOR(P)
Perform a logical OR operation on the BIN 16-bit data of the device specified in (s1) and the BIN 16-bit data of the device specified in
(s2), and store the result in the device specified in (d).
-[WOR (s1) (s2) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Data type
Parameter Content Range Data type
(label)
(s1) Stores data for logical OR operation or a device that stores data -32768 to 32767 Signed BIN16 ANY16_S
(s2) Stores data for logical OR operation or a device that stores data -32768to 32767 Signed BIN16 ANY16_S
(d) Device for storing logic or result Signed BIN16 ANY16_S
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
WOR Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
Features
• Perform a logical OR operation on the BIN 16-bit data of the device specified in (s1) and the BIN 16-bit data of the device specified
in (s2), and store the result in the device specified in (d).

In the case of bit devices, bit devices after the number of points specified by the number of digits will be calculated as 0.
Error code
Error code Content
4085H The output results of (s1) and (s2) in the read application instruction exceed the device range
4086H The output result of (d) in the write application instruction exceeds the device range
Example

When M0 is set, (D0) and (D2) are logically performed, and the value is stored in (D4), that is (D0)∨(D2) → (D4)

125 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DOR/32-bit data logical OR
DOR(P)
After inverting the sign of the BIN 32-bit device specified in (d), store it in the device specified in (d).
-[DOR (s1) (s2) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
Stores data for logical OR operation or a device
(s1) -2147483648 to 2147483647 Signed BIN32 ANY32_S
that stores data
Stores data for logical OR operation or a device
(s2) -2147483648 to 2147483647 Signed BIN32 ANY32_S
that stores data
(d) Device for storing logic or result Signed BIN32 ANY32_S
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ●● ● ●
DOR Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ●● ● ●
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
Perform a logical OR operation on the BIN 32-bit data of the device specified in (s1) and the BIN 32-bit data of the device specified in
(s2), and store the result in the device specified in (d).

In the case of bit devices, bit devices after the number of points specified by the number of digits will be calculated as 0.
Error code
Error code Content
4085H The output results of (s1) and (s2) in the read application instruction exceed the device range
4086H The output result of (d) in the write application instruction exceeds the device range
Example

When M0 is set, (D1, D0) and (D3, D2) are logically performed, and the value is stored in (D5, D4), that is, (D1, D0)∨(D3, D2) → (D5,
D4) ).

126 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
WAND/16-bit data logic AND
WAND(P)
Perform a logical AND operation on each bit of the BIN 16-bit data of the device specified in (s1) and the BIN 16-bit data of the device
specified in (s2), and store the result in the device specified in (d).
-[WAND (s1) (s2) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Data type
Parameter Content Range Data type
(label)
(s1) Store the data for logical AND operation or the device storing the data -32768to 32767 Signed BIN16 ANY16_S
(s2) Store the data for logical AND operation or the device storing the data -32768 to 32767 Signed BIN16 ANY16_S
(d) Device for storing logic and result Signed BIN16 ANY16_S
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
WAND Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
Features
Perform a logical AND operation on each bit of the BIN 16-bit data of the device specified in (s1) and the BIN 16-bit data of the device
specified in (s2), and store the result in the device specified in (d).

In the case of bit devices, bit devices after the number of points specified by the number of digits will be calculated as 0.
Error code
Error code Content
4085H The output results of (s1) and (s2) in the read application instruction exceed the device range
4086H The output result of (d) in the write application instruction exceeds the device range
Example

When M0 is set, the logical AND operation of (D0) and (D2) is performed, and the value is stored in (D4), that is, (D0) ∧ (D2) → (D4).

127 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DAND/32-bit data logic AND
DAND(P)
Perform a logical AND operation on each bit of the BIN 32-bit data of the device specified in (s1) and the BIN 32-bit data of the device
specified in (s2), and store the result in the device specified in (d).
-[DAND (s1) (s2) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
Store the data for logical AND operation or
(s1) -2147483648 to +2147483647 Signed BIN32 ANY32_S
the device storing the data
Store the data for logical AND operation or
(s2) -2147483648 to +2147483647 Signed BIN32 ANY32_S
the device storing the data
(d) Device for storing logic and result Signed BIN32 ANY32_S
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ●● ● ●
DAND Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ●● ● ●
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
Perform a logical AND operation on each bit of the BIN 32-bit data of the device specified in (s1) and the BIN 32-bit data of the device
specified in (s2), and store the result in the device specified in (d).

In the case of bit devices, bit devices after the number of points specified by the number of digits will be calculated as 0.
Error code
Error code Content
4085H The output results of (s1) and (s2) in the read application instruction exceed the device range
4086H The output result of (d) in the write application instruction exceeds the device range
Example

When M0 is set, perform logical AND operation of (D1, D0) and (D3, D2), and store the value in (D5, D4), (D1, D0) ∧ (D3, D2) → (D5,
D4) .

128 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
WXOR/16-bit data logic exclusive OR
WXOR(P)
Perform an exclusive OR operation on the BIN 16-bit data of the device specified in (s1) and the BIN 16-bit data of the device
specified in (s2), and store the result in the device specified in (d).
-[WXOR (s1) (s2) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
Store the data for exclusive OR operation or the
(s1) -32768 to 32767 Signed BIN16 ANY16_S
device storing the data
Store the data for exclusive OR operation or the
(s2) -32768 to +32767 Signed BIN16 ANY16_S
device storing the data
(d) Device for storing XOR result Signed BIN16 ANY16_S
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
WXOR Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
Features
• Perform logical exclusive OR operation on the BIN 16-bit data of the device specified in (s1) and the BIN 16-bit data of the device
specified in (s2), and store the result in the device specified in (d).

In the case of bit devices, bit devices after the number of points specified by the number of digits will be calculated as 0.
Error code
Error code Content

4085H The output results of (s1) and (s2) in the read application instruction exceed the device range
4086H The output result of (d) in the write application instruction exceeds the device range
Example
Example 1: When M0 is set, (D0) and (D2) are XOR operation, and the value is stored in (D4), (D0)∀(D2)→(D4).

Example 2: When used with the CML instruction, it can realize the logic exclusive OR (XORNOT) operation:

129 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DXOR/32-bit data logic exclusive OR
DXOR(P)
Perform an exclusive OR operation on the BIN 32-bit data of the device specified in (s1) and the BIN 32-bit data of the device
specified in (s2), and store the result in the device specified in (d).
-[DXOR (s1) (s2) (d)]
Content, range and data type

Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)

Store the data for exclusive OR operation

(s1) -2147483648 to 2147483647 Signed BIN32 ANY32_S
or the device storing the data
Store the data for exclusive OR operation
(s2) -2147483648 to 2147483647 Signed BIN32 ANY32_S
or the device storing the data
(d) Device for storing XOR result Signed BIN32 ANY32_S
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ●● ● ●
DXOR Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ●● ● ●
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
Perform an exclusive OR operation on the BIN 32-bit data of the device specified in (s1) and the BIN 32-bit data of the device
specified in (s2), and store the result in the device specified in (d).

In the case of bit devices, bit devices after the number of points specified by the number of digits will be calculated as 0.
Error code
Error code Content
4085H The output results of (s1) and (s2)in the read application instruction exceed the device range
4086H The output result of (d) in the write application instruction exceeds the device range
Example

When M0 is set, (D1, D0) and (D3, D2) are XOR operation, and the value is stored in (D5, D4), that is, (D1, D0) ∀ (D3, D2) → (D5, D4) )

130 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
PRUN/8 digit transmission (16-bit data)
PRUN(P)
After processing the device numbers of (s) and (d) with designated digits as octal numbers, transfer the data.
-[PRUN (s) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range data Data type (label)
(s) Digit designation*1 - BIN16 bit ANY16
(d) Transfer destination device number*1 - BIN16 bit ANY16
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ●
PRUN
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ●

Features
• 8-digit device → decimal device

• Decimal digit device → octal digit device

Error code
Error code Content

4085H When reading the specified device range exceeds the corresponding device range
4086H When the specified device range for writing exceeds the range of the corresponding device

131 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Example

As shown in the above Circuit program:

X0 to X17 take the value of octal digits and pass it to the Devices corresponding to M.

132 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
7.5 Data processing instructions
BCC/BIN16 and BIN8 bit data addition, subtraction and exclusive check
BCC (P)
Specify the calculation method of BCC in (s1), specify the destination start address in (s2), and specify the destination data length in
(s3), and then store the operation result in the device specified in (d).
- [BCC (s1) (s2) (s3) (d)]
Content, range and data type

Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)

16-bit constant or the calculation method of 16-bit regions (block

(s1) 0 to 2 BIN16 bit ANY16_S
check code)

(s2) Calculate the initial 16-bit regions of BCC - BIN16 bit ANY16_S

16-bit constant or 16-bit regions (specify the number of bytes

(s3) 0 to 32767 BIN16 bit ANY16_S
calculated by BCC)
(d) Stores 16-bit regions of BCC results - BIN16 bit ANY16_S
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
(s1) ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
(s2) ●●●● ● ● ●
BCC
(s3) ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
(d) ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
Features
According to the calculation method specified by s1, starting from the 16-bit data specified by s2, calculate the ASCII block check
code (BCC) of the number of bytes specified by S3, and then store the result of BCC code in the low byte of 16-bit data specified by d.
S1: Specify the calculation method of BCC.
K0: addition operation
K1: subtraction operation
K2: exclusive or operation
S2 and s3: specify the destination data
For example, if the destination is the 12 bytes data starting from D0, the settings are as below.
S2: D0
S3: K12 (specify the data by decimal)
The modes used in the calculation of this instruction are 16-bit conversion mode and 8-bit conversion mode. For the actions of each
mode, refer to the followings.
(1) 16-bit conversion mode (When SM161 is OFF)
Calculate the high 8-bit (byte) and low 8-bit (byte) of device that started from (s2) and specify the byte length by (s3), and store the
low 8-bit of device specified by (d). The conversion result is as below.

133 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

(2) 8-bit conversion mode (When SM161 is ON)

Calculate the low 8-bit (byte) of device that started from (s2) and specify the byte length by (s3), and store the low 8-bit of device
specified by (d). The conversion result is as below.

Error code
Error code Content
4084H The read application instructions (s1) and (s3) input the data that exceeds the specified range
4085H The device specified in the read application instructions (s1), (s2) and (s3) exceeds the corresponding device range
4086H The device specified in the write application instruction (d) exceeds the corresponding device range
Example

When the trigger M0 is ON, calculate the a block check code (BCC) of 12-bit bytes of ASCII data starting from data register D0 by
“exclusive or operation”. The block check code (BCC) is stored in the low bit byte of data register D6.
Application example
In the example ,calculate the BCC code and send as information after adding to the string “%01→RC”.
The data transmission is carried out in the form of ASCII codes.
CC calculations use logical exclusive OR, addition, and subtraction.

134 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
The information is stored as follows:

Data register D6 D2 D1 D0
ASCII hexadecimal code 4 3 5 2 2 3 3 1 3 0 2 5
ASCII code C R # 1 0 %

↑
BCC check code 6 byte
BCC instruction is as below: Execution or operation

a b OR result
0 0 0
S1: logic exclusive OR 0 1 1
S2: The start of destination data 1 0 1
S3: destination data length
1 1 0
D: calculation result

After the execution BCC code is stored in the last byte of D6.
How to calculate block check code (BCC)
Calculate block check code (BCD) with XOR for each ASCII code.

BCC code

ASCII hexadecimal code 1 6

The calculation result is stored in the low bit byte of D6
ASCII binary code 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0

135 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
MAX/BIN16 bit the maximum value of 16-bit data
MAX (P)
Specify the destination start address in (s1), and specify the destination end address in (s2), and then store the operation result in the
device specified in (d).
- [MAX (s1) (s2) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Data type
Parameter Content Range Data type
(label)
(s1) Device that stores the start address when getting the max data -32768 to 32767 Signed BIN16 ANY16_S

(s2) Device that stores the end address when getting the max data -32768 to 32767 Signed BIN16 ANY16_S

(d) Stores the max value between the device data of (s1) and (s2) -32768 to 32767 Signed BIN16 ANY16_S
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
(s1) ●●●● ● ● ●
MAX (s2) ●●●● ● ● ●
(d) ●●●● ● ● ●
Features
Use the BIN16 bit data specified in (s1) as the start address, and use the BIN16 bit data specified in (s2) as the end address to get the
maximum value between the device of (s1) and (s2).
✎Note
1 The devices specified by (s1) and (s2) should be the same type. The type of device (d) that gets the results could be different.
2 The device size specified by (s1) can’t exceed the device size specified by (s2). For example, MAX D1 D5 D10 works, but MAX
D5 D1 D10 doesn't.
Error code
Error code Content
4084H The read application instructions (s1) and (s2) input the data that exceeds the specified range
4085H The device specified in the read application instructions (s1) and (s2) exceeds the device range
4086H The device specified in the write application instruction (d) exceeds the device range
4093H The specified ranges (s1) and (s2) are not the same device
4094H The sequence of specified ranges (s1) and (s2) is abnormal
Example

Use (D1) as the start address, and use (D5) as the end address to get the max value between them and store the result in (D6). As the
figure above, the max value between (D1) and (D5) is the value in (D3) which is stored in (D6) for output.

136 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DMAX/BIN32 bit the maximum value of 32-bit data
DMAX (P)
Specify the destination start address in (s1), and specify the destination end address in (s2), and then store the operation result in the
device specified in (d).
- [DMAX (s1) (s2) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Data type
Parameter Content Range Data type
(label)
Device that stores the start address when getting the
(s1) -2147483648 to 2147483647 Signed BIN32 ANY32_S
max data
Device that stores the end address when getting the
(s2) -2147483648 to 2147483647 Signed BIN32 ANY32_S
max data
Stores the max value between the device data of (s1)
(d) -2147483648 to 2147483647 Signed BIN32 ANY32_S
and (s2)
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
(s1) ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
DMAX (s2) ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
(d) ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
Use the BIN32 bit data specified in (s1) as the start address, and use the BIN32 bit data specified in (s2) as the end address to get the
maximum value between the device of (s1) and (s2).
✎Note
1 The devices specified by (s1) and (s2) should be the same type. The type of device (d) that gets the results could be different.
2 The device size specified by (s1) can’t exceed the device size specified by (s2). For example, DMAX D1 D5 D10 works, but
DMAX D5 D1 D10 doesn't.
Error code
Error code Content
4084H The read application instructions (s1) and (s2) input the data that exceeds the speicified range
4085H The device specified in the read application instructions (s1) and (s2) exceeds the device range
4086H The device specified in the write application instruction (d) exceeds the device range
4093H The specified ranges (s1) and (s2) are not the same device
4094H The sequence of specified ranges (s1) and (s2) is abnormal
Example

Use (D1) as the start address, and use (D7) as the

end address to get the max value between them
and store the result in (D9). As the figure above,
the max value between (D1) and (D7) is the
value in (D7) which is stores in (D9) for output.

137 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
MIN/BIN16 bit the minimum value of 16-bit data
MIN (P)
Specify the destination start address in (s1), and specify the destination end address in (s2), and then store the operation result in the
device specified in (d).
- [MIN (s1) (s2) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Data type
Parameter Content Range Data type
(label)
(s1) Device that stores the start address when getting the minimum data -32768 to 32767 Signed BIN16 ANY16_S

(s2) Device that stores the end address when getting the minimum data -32768 to 32767 Signed BIN16 ANY16_S

(d) Stores the minimum value between the device data of (s1) and (s2) -32768 to 32767 Signed BIN16 ANY16_S
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
(s1) ●●●● ● ● ●
MIN (s2) ●●●● ● ● ●
(d) ●●●● ● ● ●
Features
Use the BIN16 bit data specified in (s1) as the start address, and use the BIN16 bit data specified in (s2) as the end address to get the
maximum value between the device of (s1) and (s2).
✎Note
1 The devices specified by (s1) and (s2) should be the same type. The type of device (d) that gets the results could be different.
2 The device size specified by (s1) can’t exceed the device size specified by (s2). For example, MAX D1 D5 D10 works, but MAX
D5 D1 D10 doesn't.
Error code
Error code Content
4084H The read application instructions (s1) and (s2) input the data that exceeds the specified range
4085H The device specified in the read application instructions (s1) and (s2) exceeds the device range
4086H The device specified in the write application instruction (d) exceeds the device range
4093H The specified ranges (s1) and (s2) are not the same device
4094H The sequence of specified ranges (s1) and (s2) is abnormal
Example

Use (D1) as the start address, and use (D5) as the

end address to get the max value between them
and store the result in (D6). As the figure above,
the max value between (D1) and (D5) is the value
in (D3) which is stored in (D6) for output.

138 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DMIN/BIN32 bit the minimum value of 32-bit data
DMIN (P)
Specify the destination start address in (s1), and specify the destination end address in (s2), and then store the operation result in the
device specified in (d).
- [DMIN (s1) (s2) (d)]
Content, range and data type

Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)

Device that stores the start address when

(s1) -2147483648 to 2147483647 Signed BIN16 ANY16_S
getting the minimum data
Device that stores the end address when
(s2) -2147483648 to 2147483647 Signed BIN16 ANY16_S
getting the minimum data
Stores the minimum value between the
(d) -2147483648 to 2147483647 Signed BIN16 ANY16_S
device data of (s1) and (s2)
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
(s1) ●●●● ● ● ●
DMIN (s2) ●●●● ● ● ●
(d) ●●●● ● ● ●
Features
Use the BIN32 bit data specified in (s1) as the start address, and use the BIN32 bit data specified in (s2) as the end address to get the
maximum value between the device of (s1) and (s2).
✎Note
3 The devices specified by (s1) and (s2) should be the same type. The type of device (d) that gets the results could be different.
4 The device size specified by (s1) can’t exceed the device size specified by (s2). For example, MAX D1 D5 D10 works, but MAX
D5 D1 D10 doesn't.
Error code
Error code Content
4084H The read application instructions (s1) and (s2) input the data that exceeds the specified range
4085H The device specified in the read application instructions (s1) and (s2) exceeds the device range
4086H The device specified in the write application instruction (d) exceeds the device range
4093H The specified ranges (s1) and (s2) are not the same device
4094H The sequence of specified ranges (s1) and (s2) is abnormal
Example

Use (D1) as the start address, and use (D5) as the end address
to get the max value between them and store the result in (D6).
As the figure above, the max value between (D1) and (D5) is the
value in (D3) which is stored in (D6) for output.

139 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
ANS/alarm settings
ANS(P)
Used to set alarm instructions.
-[ANS (s) (n) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s) Timer number for judging time - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(n) Data that judges time 1 to 32767 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(d) The set alarm device - Bit ANY16_BOOL
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ●
ANS Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
Parameter 3 ● ● ●
Features
When the instruction input continues to be ON for the judgment time [(n)×100ms, timer (s)], set (d). If the instruction time turns off
below the judgment time [(n)×100ms], the current value of the judgment timer (s) is reset, and (d) is not set. In addition, if the
instruction input turns off, the judgment timer will be reset.

1 Judge the time ((n)X 100ms or less)

2 Judgment time or more (inclusive) ((n) X 100ms or more (inclusive))
Related device
Devices Name Content
SM249 Signal alarm is valid After SM249 is ON, the following SM248 and SD249 act.
SM248 Signal alarm action SM249 is ON, when any one of the states S900 to S999 is active, SM248 is ON
SD249 Signal alarm ON state minimum number Save the smallest number of actions in S900 to S999.
Error code
Error code Content
The value specified in (n1) and (n2) exceeds the range of 0 to 32767
4084H The timer number is not in the range of T0 to T199.
The signal alarm is not in the range of S900 to S999.
4085H When the device specified in the read application instructions (s) and (n) exceeds the corresponding device range
4086H When the device specified in the write application instruction (d) exceeds the corresponding device range
Example
The fault number is displayed by the signal alarm.
As shown below, when you write a program for diagnosing external faults, such as monitoring the content of SM249 (the smallest

140 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

Monitoring is effective after SM249 is turned ON

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
number in the ON state), the smallest number in the ON state among S900 to S999 will be displayed. When multiple faults occur at
the same time, the next fault number can be obtained after eliminating the fault with the smallest number.

Detect X1 for 2 seconds, turn ON, set S900

X4 is detected for 1 second, turn ON, set S901

SM248 will act after any one of S900 to S999 is ON,
and the output fault display YY6 will act
Display the fault number to the D0 device
Through the external fault diagnosis program, use
the reset button M0 to turn off the activated state.
Each time M0 turns ON, the action status of the new
number is set in turn, and the new number that is
already ON is reset.

141 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
ANR/Alarm reset
ANR(P)
The instruction to reset the small number that is ON in the alarm.
-[ANR]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
No No parameter setting - - -
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
ANR No No object device
Features
If the instruction input is ON, reset the active alarm in the alarm.
If multiple alarms are operating, reset the smaller number. If the input instruction is turned ON again, the next small number in the
alarm that is operating will be reset.

Related device
Devices Name Content
SM249 Signal alarm is valid After SM249 is ON, the following SM248 and SD249 act.
SM248 Signal alarm action SM249 is ON, when any one of the states S900 to S999 is active, SM248 is ON.
SD249 Signal alarm ON state minimum number Save the smallest number of actions in S900 to S999.
✎Note:
If you use the ANR instruction, reset in sequence every cycle.
If the ANRP instruction is used, it will be executed in only one operation cycle.
Error code
No operation error.
Example
The fault number is displayed by the signal alarm.
As shown below, when you write a program for diagnosing external faults, such as monitoring the content of SM249 (the smallest
number in the ON state), the smallest number in the ON state among S900 to S999 will be displayed. When multiple faults occur at
the same time, the next fault number can be obtained after eliminating the fault with the smallest number.
Monitoring is effective after SM249 is turned ON
Detect X1 for 2 seconds, turn ON, set S900

X4 is detected for 1 second, turn ON, set S901

SM248 will act after any one of S900 to S999 is
ON, and the output fault display YY6 will act
Display the fault number to the D0 device
Through the external fault diagnosis program, use
the reset button M0 to turn off the activated state.
Each time M0 turns ON, the action status of the
new number is set in turn, and the new number
that is already ON is reset.

142 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
BON/16-bit data bit judgment
BON(P)
Check whether the state of the BIN 16-bit data (n) bit of the device specified in (s) is ON or OFF, and output the result to the device
specified in (d).
-[BON (s) (n) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s) Data storage destination word device number - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(d) Bit device number of drive - Bit ANY16_BOOL
(n) The position of the bit to be judged 0 to 15 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
BON Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ● ●● ● ● ●
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
Features
Check whether the state of the BIN 16-bit data (n) bit of the device specified in (s) is ON or OFF, and output the result to the device
specified in (d).
If the above result is ON, then (d)=ON, if it is OFF, then (d)=OFF.
If a constant (K) is specified in the device specified in (s), it will be automatically converted to BIN.

Error code
Error code Content
4084H The data input in (n) exceeds the specified range of 0 to 15.
4085H When the device specified in the read application instructions (s) and (n) exceeds the corresponding device range
4086H When the device specified in the write application instruction (d) exceeds the corresponding device range
Example

When n in D0 = the third bit is 1 (ON), M0 is set to 1 (ON).

143 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DBON/32-bit data bit judgment
DBON(P)
Check whether the state of the BIN 32-bit data (n) bit of the device specified in (s) is ON or OFF, and output the result to the device
specified in (d).
-[DBON (s) (n) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s) Data storage destination word device number - Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32
(d) Bit device number of drive - Bit ANY32_BOOL
(n) The position of the bit to be judged 0 to 31 Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ●● ● ●
DBON Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ● ●● ● ● ●
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ●● ● ●
Features
Check whether the BIN 32-bit data (n) bit status of the device specified in (s) is ON or OFF, and output the result to the device
specified in (d).
If the above result is ON, then (d)=ON, if it is OFF, then (d)=OFF.
If a constant (K) is specified in the device specified in (s), it will be automatically converted to BIN.

Error code
Error code Content
4084H The data input in (n) exceeds the specified range of 0 to 31.
4085H When the device specified in the read application instructions (s) and (n) exceeds the corresponding device range
4086H When the device specified in the write application instruction (d) exceeds the corresponding device range
Example
When n in D0 = the third bit is 1 (ON), M0 is set to 1 (ON).

144 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
ENCO/Encode
ENCO(P)
Encode the data of the 2th (n)th power from (s) and store it in (d).
-[ENCO (s) (n) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s) Start device for storing coded data - Bit/Signed BIN 16 bit ANY_ELEMENTARY
(d) Device number storing the encoding result - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY_ELEMENTARY
(n) Effective bit length 0 to 8 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
ENCO Parameter 2 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
Features
The BIN value corresponding to the bit from 2 (n) bits of (s) to 1 is stored in (d).

When (n)=0, it will be no processing, and the content of the device specified in (d) will not change.
Bit devices are treated as 1 bit, and word devices are treated as 16 bits.
When multiple digits are 1, it will be processed at the upper position.
Error code
Error code Content
In the bit device specification of (s), when (n) is other than 0 to 8.
4084H In the word device specification of (s), when (n) is other than 0 to 4.
When the data of 2(n) bits starting from (s) are all 0.
4085H When the device specified in the read application instructions (s) and (n) exceeds the corresponding device range
4086H When the device specified in the write application instruction (d) exceeds the corresponding device range
Example

When M20 is turned ON, the D0 device is 16 after encoding.

145 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DECO/Decode
DECO(P)
Decode the lower (n) bits of the device specified in (s), and store the result in the 2 (n)th power of the device specified in (d).
-[DECO (s) (n) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s) Decoded data or the device number storing the decoded data - Bit/Signed BIN 16 bit ANY_ELEMENTARY
(d) The start device storing the decoding result - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY_ELEMENTARY
(n) Effective bit length 0 to 8 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
DECO Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
Features
Turn ON the position of (d) corresponding to the BIN value specified in the lower (n) bit of (s).
When (n)=0, it will be no processing, and the content of the device specified in (d) will not change.
Bit devices are treated as 1 bit, and word devices are treated as 16 bits.

Error code
Error code Content
In the bit device specification of (d), when (n) is other than 0 to 8.
4084H
In the word device specification of (d), when (n) is other than 0 to 4.
4085H When the device specified in the read application instructions (s) and (n) exceeds the corresponding device range
4086H When the device specified in the write application instruction (d) exceeds the corresponding device range
Example

When M20 is ON, M3 will be turned ON.

146 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
SUM/The ON bits of 16-bit data
SUM(P)
Store the total number of bits at 1 in the BIN 16-bit data of the device specified in (s) to the device specified in (d).
-[SUM (s) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s) The device start number that counts the total number of bits at 1 - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(d) The device start number of the total number of storage bits - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
SUM
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
Features
Store the total number of bits at 1 in the BIN 16-bit data of the device specified in (s) to the device specified in (d).
When the BIN 16-bit data of the device specified in (s) is all 0, the zero flag (SM153) turns on

The total number of 1 (ON) is stored in BIN.

There are 8 in the example on the left.

Error code
Error code Content
4085H When the device specified in the read application instructions (s) exceeds the corresponding device range
4086H When the device specified in the write application instruction (d) exceeds the corresponding device range
Example

When M0 is ON, the number of ON bits in D0 is counted and stored in D1. The value after D1 is executed is 4.

147 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DSUM/The ON bits of 32-bit data
DSUM(P)
Store the total number of bits at 1 in the BIN 32-bit data of the device specified in (s) to the device specified in (d).
-[SUM (s) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s) The device start number that counts the total number of bits at 1 - Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32
(d) The device start number of the total number of storage bits - Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ●● ● ●
DSUM
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
Store the total number of bits at 1 in the BIN 32-bit data of the device specified in (s) to the device specified in (d).
When the BIN 32-bit data of the device specified in (s) is all 0 (OFF), the zero flag (SM153) turns on.

The total number of 1 (ON) is stored in BIN.

There are 16 in the example on the left.

✎Note:
When the instruction input is OFF, the instruction will not be executed, and the output of the ON digits of the action will remain the
same as before.
Error code
Error code Content
4085H When the device specified in the read application instructions (s) exceeds the corresponding device range
4086H When the device specified in the write application instruction (d) exceeds the corresponding device range
Example

When M0 is ON, the number of ON bits in D0 is counted and stored in D10, and the value after D10 is executed is 4.

148 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
MEAN/Mean value of 16-bit data
MEAN(P)
Store the total number of bits at 1 in the BIN 16-bit data of the device specified in (s) to the device specified in (d).
-[MEAN (s) (d) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Data type
Parameter Content Range Data type
(label)
(s) The device start number storing the data for average calculation - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(d) The device start number storing the average value - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(n) Number of data or the device number storing the number of data 1 to 32767 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
MEAN Parameter 2 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
Features
Calculate the average value of the 16-bit data at (n) points starting from the device specified in (s) and store it in the device specified
in (d).
The total is calculated from the algebraic sum and divided by (n).
The remainder is rounded off.

Error code
Error code Content
4084H The data input by (n) in the application instruction exceeds the specifiable range. N≤0
4085H When the device specified in the read application instructions (s) and (n) exceeds the corresponding device range
4086H When the device specified in the write application instruction (d) exceeds the corresponding device range
Example

Add the data of D0, D1, and D2 and save the value obtained after dividing by 3 in D10. The calculated average value is 6.

149 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DMEAN/Mean value of 16-bit data
DMEAN(P)
Store the total number of bits at 1 in the BIN 32-bit data of the device specified in (s) to the device specified in (d).
-[DMEAN (s) (d) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Data type
Parameter Content Range Data type
(label)
(s) The device start number storing the data for average calculation - Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32
(d) The device start number storing the average value - Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32
(n) Number of data or the device number storing the number of data 1 to 2147483647 Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
DMEAN Parameter 2 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ●● ● ●
Features
Calculate the mean value of BIN 32-bit data at (n) points starting from the device specified in (s) and store it in the device specified in
(d).
The total is calculated from the algebraic sum and divided by (n).
The remainder is rounded off.

✎Note:
When the device number exceeds, (n) is handled as a smaller value within the allowable range.
Error code
Error code Content

4084H The data input in (n) exceeds the specifiable range. N≤0
4085H When the device specified in the read application instructions (s) and (n) exceeds the corresponding device range
4086H When the device specified in the write application instruction (d) exceeds the corresponding device range

Example

Add the data of D0, D2, and D4, and save the value obtained after dividing by 3 in D10 and D11, and the calculated average value is 6.

150 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
SQR/16-bit square root
SQR(P)
Calculate the square root of the BIN 16-bit data specified in (s), and store the calculation result in (d).
-[SQR (s) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s) The data device storing for square root calculation 0 to +32767 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(d) The device storing the calculated square root - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●● ● ●● ● ●
SQR
Parameter 2 ●● ● ● ●
Features
Calculate the square root of the BIN 16-bit data specified in (s), and store the calculation result in (d).

✎Note:
The decimal point of operation result will be rounded off and become an integer. If rounding occurs, SM152 (borrow flag) turns ON.
When the operation result is really 0, SM153 (zero flag) turns ON.
Error code
Error code Content
4084H When a negative value is specified in (s).
4085H When the device specified in the read application instructions (s) exceeds the corresponding device range
4086H When the device specified in the write application instruction (d) exceeds the corresponding device range
Example

The square root of D0 is stored in D2, and the value of D0 is 100, so the value of D2 is 10.

151 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DSQR/32-bit square root
DSQR(P)
Calculate the square root of the BIN 32-bit data specified in (s), and store the calculation result in (d).
-[DSQR (s) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s) The data device storing for square root calculation 0 to 2147483647 Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32
(d) The device storing the calculated square root - Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●● ● ● ● ●● ● ●
DSQR
Parameter 2 ●● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
Calculate the square root of the BIN 32-bit data specified in (s) and store the calculation result in (d).

✎Note:
The decimal point of operation result will be rounded off and become an integer. If rounding occurs, SM152 (borrow flag) turns ON.
When the operation result is really 0, SM153 (zero flag) turns on.
Error code
Error code Content
4084H When a negative value is specified in (s).
4085H When the device specified in the read application instructions (s) exceeds the corresponding device range
4086H When the device specified in the write application instruction (d) exceeds the corresponding device range
Example

The square root of D0 is stored in D2, and the value of D0 is 110, so the value in the D2 soft component is 10 (the fractional part is
discarded), and the borrow flag SM152 is turned ON.

152 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
WSUM/The sum value of 16-bit data
WSUM(P)
After adding all the BIN 16-bit data of point (n) starting from the device specified in (s), it is stored in the device specified in (d).
-[WSUM (s) (d) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s) The device start number storing the data for sum value calculation - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(d) The device start number storing the sum value - Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32
(n) Number of data - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●●● ● ● ●
WSUM Parameter 2 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
Features
After adding all the BIN 16-bit data of point (n) starting from the device specified in (s), it is stored in the device specified in (d).

Error code
Error code Content
4084H When a negative value is specified in (n).
4085H When the device specified in the read application instructions (s) and (n) exceeds the corresponding device range
4086H When the device specified in the write application instruction (d) exceeds the corresponding device range
Example

When M0=ON, the total of 16-bit data of D0 to D2 is saved in [D100, D101], and the accounting result is 18.

153 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DWSUM/The sum value of 32-bit data
DWSUM(P)
Add all the 32-bit BIN data of point (n) starting from the device specified in (s) and store it in the device specified in (d).
-[DWSUM (s) (d) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s) The device start number storing the data for total value calculation - Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32
(d) The device start number storing the total value - Signed BIN64 bit ANY64
(n) Number of data - Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
DWSUM Parameter 2 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ●● ● ●
Features
Add all the 32-bit BIN data of point (n) starting from the device specified in (s) and store it in the device specified in (d).

✎Note:
When the number of bits is specified in (d), the value of n ranges from 1 to 8, such as K8 (32-bit instructions, such as K8M0) without
K16 (64-bit instructions).
Error code
Error code Content
4084H When a negative value is specified in (n).
4085H When the device specified in the read application instructions (s) and (n) exceeds the corresponding device range
4086H When the device specified in the write application instruction (d) exceeds the corresponding device range
Example

When M0=ON, the total of 16-bit data of D0 to D2 is saved in [D100, D101], and the accounting result is 18.

154 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
SORT/16-bit data sorting
SORT
Sort the data rows in ascending order based on the group data of column (n3) in the BIN 16-bit data table (sorting source) of (n1×n2)
points specified in (s) and store them in the specified in (d) (N1×n2) points in the BIN 16-bit data table (after sorting).
-[SORT (s) (n1) (n2) (d) (n3)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s) The start device number storing the data table - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(n1) Number of data (rows) 1 to 32 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(n2) Number of group data (columns) 1 to 6 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(d) The start device number storing the operation result - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(n3) The column number of the group data (column) as the sorting basis - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●●● ● ●
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ●
SORT Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ●
Parameter 4 ●●●● ● ●
Parameter 5 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ●
Features
The BIN 16-bit data table (sorting source) of (n1×n2) points specified in (s), based on the group data of column (n3), sort the data
rows in ascending order, and store them in (d). The (n1×n2) point of the BIN 16-bit data table (after sorting).
Take (n1)=K3, (n2)=K4 in the sort source as an example, the data table structure is as follows. In the case of a sorted data table, (s)
should be replaced with (d).
Number of groups (n2) ((n2)=K4)
Column NO. 1 Column NO. 2 Column NO. 3 Column NO. 4
Management number Height Weight Age
Line NO.1 (s) (s) +3 (s) +6 (s) +9
When the number of data (n1)=3 Line NO.2 (s)+1 (s) +4 (s) +7 (s) +10
Line NO.3 (s)+2 (s) +5 (s) +8 (s) +11
Data alignment starts when instruction input is ON, data alignment ends after (n1) scan, instruction execution end flag SM229 is set
to ON. According to the source data sorted as follows, an example of the operation is shown below. In addition, by putting serial
numbers such as management numbers in the first column in advance, the original row number can be judged based on the content,
which is very convenient.
Number of groups (n2) ((n2)=K4)
Column NO. 1 Column NO. 2 Column NO. 3 Column NO. 4
Management number Height Weight Age
(s) (s) +5 (s) +10 (s) +15
Line NO.1
1 150 45 20
When the number of data (n1) = 5 (s)+1 (s) +6 (s) +11 (s) +16
Line NO.2
2 180 50 40
Line NO.3 (s)+2 (s) +7 (s) +12 (s) +17

155 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
3 160 70 30
(s) +3 (s) +8 (s) +13 (s) +18
Line NO.4
4 100 20 8
(s) +4 (s) +9 (s) +14 (s) +19
Line NO.5
5 150 50 45
Press (n3)=K2 (column number 2) to execute the sorting result.
Number of groups (n2) ((n2)=K4)
Column NO.1 Column NO.2 Column NO.3 Column NO.4
Management number Height Weight Age
(d) (d) +5 (d) +10 (d) +15
Line NO.1
4 100 20 8
(d) +1 (d) +6 (d) +11 (d) +16
Line NO.2
1 150 45 20
(d) +2 (d) +7 (d) +12 (d) +17
When the number of data (n1) = 5 Line NO.3
5 150 50 45
(d) +3 (d) +8 (d) +13 (d) +18
Line NO.4
3 160 70 30
(d) +4 (d) +9 (d) +14 (d) +19
Line NO.5
2 180 50 40

Press (n3)=K3 (column number 3) to execute the sorting result.

Number of groups (n2) ((n2)=K4)
Column NO.1 Column NO.2 Column NO.3 Column NO.4
Management number Height Weight Age
(d) (d) +5 (d) +10 (d) +15
Line NO.1
4 100 20 8
(d) +1 (d) +6 (d) +11 (d) +16
Line NO.2
1 150 45 20
(d) +2 (d) +7 (d) +12 (d) +17
When the number of data (n1) = 5 Line NO.3
2 180 50 40
(d) +3 (d) +8 (d) +13 (d) +18
Line NO.4
5 150 50 45
(d) +4 (d) +9 (d) +14 (d) +19
Line NO.5
3 160 70 30
✎Note:
only ascending order is supported by SORT instruction .
Do not change the operand and data content during operation.
When executing again, the instruction input should be turned OFF once.
SORT instruction can drive at most one in the program.
When the same device is specified in (s) and (d), the source data is rewritten to the sorted data order. Please pay special attention
not to change the content of (s) before the end of execution.

156 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Error code
Error
Content
code
When the value specified in (n1) exceeds the range of 1 to 32

4084H When the value specified in (n2) exceeds the range of 1 to 6

When the value specified in (n3) exceeds the range of 1 to n2

4085H When the device specified in read application instruction (s), (n1), (n2 )and (n3) exceeds the corresponding device range

4086H When the device specified in the write application instruction (d) exceeds the corresponding device range

4087H When the (d) parameter in the application instruction uses an unsupported device

4089H The number of application instructions exceeds the limit.

Example
Refer to the function description example.

157 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
SORT2/16-bit data sorting
SORT2(P)
Sort the data rows in ascending or descending order based on the group data in column (n3), and store them in (d), based on the BIN
16-bit data table (sorting source) of (n1×n2) points specified in (s) In the BIN 16-bit data table (after sorting) of the specified (n1×n2)
points.
-[SORT2 (s) (n1) (n2) (d) (n3)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s) The start device number storing the data table - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(n1) Number of data (rows) 1 to 32 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(n2) Number of group data (columns) 1 to 6 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(d) The start device number storing the operation result - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(n3) The column number of the group data (column) as the sorting basis - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●●● ● ●
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ●
SORT2 Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ●
Parameter 4 ●●●● ● ●
Parameter 5 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ●
Features
Sort the data rows in ascending or descending order based on the group data in column (n3) and store them in (d) (N1×n2) point
specified in the BIN 16-bit data table (after sorting).
Take (n1)=K3, (n2)=K4 in the sort source as an example, the data table structure is as follows. In the case of a sorted data table, (s)
should be replaced with (d).
When the number of groups (n2) (n2) = K4
Column NO.1 Column NO.2 Column NO.3 Column NO.4
Management number Height Weight Age
Line NO.1 (s) (s)+1 (s) +2 (s) +3
When the number of data (n1)=3 Line NO.2 (s) +4 (s) +5 (s) +6 (s) +7
Line NO.3 (s) +8 (s) +9 (s) +10 (s) +100
Sequence is set by the ON/OFF status of SM165
Sort order setting instruction
SM165=ON Descending
SM165=OFF Ascending
Data alignment starts when instruction input is ON, data alignment ends after (n1) scan, instruction execution end flag SM229 is set
to ON.
According to the source data sorted as follows, an example of the operation is shown below. In addition, by putting serial numbers
such as management numbers in the first column in advance, the original row number can be judged based on the content, which is
very convenient.

158 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

When the number of groups (n2) (n2) = K4

Column NO.1 Column NO.2 Column NO.3 Column NO.4
Management number Height Weight Age
(s) (s)+1 (s) +2 (s) +3
Line NO.1
1 150 45 20
(s) +4 (s) +5 (s) +6 (s) +7
Line NO.2
2 180 50 40
(s) +8 (s) +9 (s) +10 (s) +100
When the number of data (n1) = 5 Line NO.3
3 160 70 30
(s) +12 (s) +13 (s) +14 (s) +15
Line NO.4
4 100 20 8
(s) +16 (s) +17 (s) +18 (s) +19
Line NO.5
5 150 50 45
Press (n3)=K2 (column number 2) to execute the sorting result (SM165=OFF in the case of ascending order)
When the number of groups (n2) (n2) = K4
Column NO.1 Column NO.2 Column NO.3 Column NO.4
Management number Height Weight Age
(d) (d) +1 (d) +2 (d) +3
Line NO.1
4 100 20 8
(d) +4 (d) +5 (d) +6 (d) +7
Line NO.2
1 150 45 20
(d) +8 (d) +9 (d) +10 (d) +100
When the number of data (n1) = 5 Line NO.3
5 150 50 45
(d) +12 (d) +13 (d) +14 (d) +15
Line NO.4
3 160 70 30
(d) +16 (d) +17 (d) +18 (d) +19
Line NO.5
2 180 50 40
Press (n3)=K3 (column number 3) to execute the sorting result (SM165=ON in the case of ascending order)
When the number of groups (n2) (n2) = K4
Column NO.1 Column NO.2 Column NO.3 Column NO.4
Management number Height Weight Age
(d) (d) +1 (d) +2 (d) +3
Line NO.1
3 160 70 30
(d) +4 (d) +5 (d) +6 (d) +7
Line NO.2
2 180 50 40
(d) +8 (d) +9 (d) +10 (d) +100
When the number of data (n1) = 5 Line NO.3
5 150 50 45
(d) +12 (d) +13 (d) +14 (d) +15
Line NO.4
1 150 45 20
(d) +16 (d) +17 (d) +18 (d) +19
Line NO.5
4 100 20 8

159 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
✎Note:
Do not change the operand and data content during operation.
When executing again, the instruction input should be turned OFF once.
The SORT2 instruction can only be written in the program to drive 2 at most.
When the same device is specified in (s) and (d), the source data is rewritten to the sorted data order. Please pay special attention
not to change the content of (s) before the end of execution.
Do not overlap the source data and the sorted data.

Error code
Error code Content
When the value specified in (n1) exceeds the range of 1 to 32
4084H When the value specified in (n2) exceeds the range of 1 to 6
When the value specified in (n3) exceeds the range of 1 to n2
When the device specified in read application instruction (s), (d), (n1), (n2 )and (n3) exceeds the corresponding
4085H
device range
4086H When the device specified in the write application instruction (d) exceeds the corresponding device range
4089H The number of application instructions exceeded the limit.
Example
Refer to the function description example.

160 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DSORT2/32-bit data sorting
DSORT2(P)
Sort the data rows in ascending or descending order based on the group data of column (n3) in the BIN 32-bit data table (sorting
source) of (n1×n2) points specified in (s) and store them in (d) The specified (n1×n2) point BIN 32-bit data table (after sorting).
-[DSORT2 (s) (n1) (n2) (d) (n3)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s) The start device number storing the data table - Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32
(n1) Number of data (rows) 1 to 32 Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32
(n2) Number of group data (columns) 1 to 6 Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32
(d) The start device number storing the operation result - Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32
(n3) The column number of the group data (column) as the sorting basis - Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●●● ● ● ● ●
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ●● ●
DSORT2 Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ●● ●
Parameter 4 ●●●● ● ● ● ●
Parameter 5 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ●● ●
Features
Sort the data rows in ascending or descending order based on the group data in the (n3) column of the (n1×n2) point BIN 32-bit data
table (sorting source) specified in (s), and store to (d) (N1×n2) specified in the BIN 32-bit data table (after sorting).
Take (n1)=K3, (n2)=K4 in the sort source as an example, the data table structure is as follows. In the case of a sorted data table, (s)
should be replaced with (d).
When the number of groups (n2) (n2) = K4
Column NO.1 Column NO.2 Column NO.3 Column NO.4
Management number Height Weight Age
Line NO.1 (s)+1, (s) (s)+3, (s)+2 (s)+5, (s)+4 (s) +7, (s) +6
When the number of data (n1)=3 Line NO.2 (s) +9, (s) +8 (s)+11, (s)+10 (s) +13, (s) +12 (s) +15, (s) +14
Line NO.3 (s) +17, (s) +16 (s) +19, (s) +18 (s) +21, (s) +20 (s) +23, (s) +22
Sequence is set by the ON/OFF status of SM165
Sort order setting instructions
SM165=ON Descending
SM165=OFF Ascending
Data alignment starts when instruction input is ON, data alignment ends after (n1) scan, instruction execution end flag SM229 is set
to ON.
According to the source data sorted as follows, an example of the operation is shown below. In addition, by putting serial numbers
such as management numbers in the first column in advance, the original row number can be judged based on the content, which is
very convenient.

161 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
When the number of groups (n2) (n2) = K4
Column NO.1 Column NO.2 Column NO.3 Column NO.4
Management number height body weight age
(s)+1, (s) (s)+3, (s)+2 (s)+5, (s)+4 (s) +7, (s) +6
Line NO.1
1 150 45 20
(s) +9, (s) +8 (s)+11, (s)+10 (s) +13, (s) +12 (s) +15, (s) +14
Line NO.2
2 180 50 40
(s) +17, (s) +16 (s) +19, (s) +18 (s) +21, (s) +20 (s) +23, (s) +22
When the number of data (n1) = 5 Line NO.3
3 160 70 30
(s) +25, (s) +24 (s) +27, (s) +26 (s) +29, (s) +28 (s) +31, (s) +30
Line NO.4
4 100 20 8
(s) +33, (s) +32 (s) +35, (s) +34 (s) +37, (s) +36 (s) +39, (s) +38
Line NO.5
5 150 50 45
Press (n3)=K2 (column NO.2) to execute the sorting result (SM165=OFF in the case of ascending order)
When the number of groups (n2) (n2) = K4
Column NO.1 Column NO.2 Column NO.3 Column NO.4
Management number height body weight age
(s)+1, (s) (s)+3, (s)+2 (s)+5, (s)+4 (s) +7, (s) +6
Line NO.1
4 100 20 8
(s) +9, (s) +8 (s)+11, (s)+10 (s) +13, (s) +12 (s) +15, (s) +14
Line NO.2
1 150 45 20
(s) +17, (s) +16 (s) +19, (s) +18 (s) +21, (s) +20 (s) +23, (s) +22
When the number of data (n1) = 5 Line NO.3
5 150 50 45
(s) +25, (s) +24 (s) +27, (s) +26 (s) +29, (s) +28 (s) +31, (s) +30
Line NO.4
3 160 70 30
(s) +33, (s) +32 (s) +35, (s) +34 (s) +37, (s) +36 (s) +39, (s) +38
Line NO.5
2 180 50 40
Press (n3)=K3 (column NO.3) to execute the sorting result (SM165=ON in the case of ascending order)
When the number of groups (n2) (n2) = K4
Column NO.1 Column NO.2 Column NO.3 Column NO.4
Management number height body weight age
(s)+1, (s) (s)+3, (s)+2 (s)+5, (s)+4 (s) +7, (s) +6
Line NO.1
3 160 70 30
(s) +9, (s) +8 (s)+11, (s)+10 (s) +13, (s) +12 (s) +15, (s) +14
Line NO.2
2 180 50 40
(s) +17, (s) +16 (s) +19, (s) +18 (s) +21, (s) +20 (s) +23, (s) +22
When the number of data (n1) = 5 Line NO.3
5 150 50 45
(s) +25, (s) +24 (s) +27, (s) +26 (s) +29, (s) +28 (s) +31, (s) +30
Line NO.4
1 150 45 20
(s) +33, (s) +32 (s) +35, (s) +34 (s) +37, (s) +36 (s) +39, (s) +38
Line NO.5
4 100 20 8

162 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
✎Note:
Do not change the operand and data content during operation.
When executing again, the instruction input should be turned OFF once.
The SORT2 instruction can only be written twice in the program.
When the same device is specified in (s) and (d), the source data is rewritten to the sorted data order. Please pay special attention
not to change the content of (s) before the end of execution.
Do not overlap the source data and the sorted data.

Error code
Error code Content
When the value specified in (n1) exceeds the range of 1 to 32
4084H When the value specified in (n2) exceeds the range of 1 to 6
When the value specified in (n3) exceeds the range of 1 to n2
When the device specified in read application instruction (s), (d), (n1), (n2 )and (n3) exceeds the corresponding
4085H
device range
4086H When the device specified in the write application instruction (d) exceeds the corresponding device range
4089H The number of application instructions exceeded the limit.
Example
Refer to the function description example.

163 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
SWAP/16-bit data high and low byte swap
SWAP(P)
Swap the high and low 8-bit value of the device specified in (d).
-[SWAP (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(d) Word device with high and low byte swap - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
SWAP Parameter 1 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
Features
Convert the high and low 8-bit value of the device specified in (d).

Error code
Error code Content
4085H When the device specified in the read application instruction (d) exceeds the corresponding device range
4086H When the device specified in the write application instruction (d) exceeds the corresponding device range
Example

When the rising edge of M0 is triggered, swap the low 8 bits and high 8 bits of D0 to get H8F2A.

164 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DSWAP/32-bit data high and low byte swap
DSWAP(P)
The devices specified in (d) and (d)+1 will be converted to the high and low 8-bit values respectively.
-[DSWAP (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(d) Word device with high and low byte swap - Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
DSWAP Parameter 1 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
The devices specified in (d) and (d)+1 will be converted to the upper and lower 8-bit values respectively.

✎Note:
If continuous execution instructions are used, conversion will be performed every scan cycle.
Error code
Error code Content
4085H When the device specified in the read application instruction (d) exceeds the corresponding device range
4086H When the device specified in the write application instruction (d) exceeds the corresponding device range
Example

When the rising edge of M0 is triggered, the low 8 bits and the high 8 bits of D0 and D1 are swapped, and D0=H8F2A, D1=H3412 are
obtained.

165 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
BTOW/Byte unit data merge
BTOW(P)
Combine the low 8 bits of (n) bytes of BIN 16-bit data stored after the device number specified in (s) into word units and store it after
the device number specified in (d).
-[BTOW (s) (d) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s) The start device that stores the data merging in byte units - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(d) The start device that stores the result of merging in byte units - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(n) Number of byte data merged 0-32767 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●●● ● ● ●
BTOW Parameter 2 ●●●● ● ● ●
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
Features
After the device number specified in (s), the lower 8 bits of the 16-bit BIN data stored in (n) bytes are combined into word units and
stored in the device number specified in (d) or later.
The upper 8 bits of (n) word data stored after the device number specified in (s) will be ignored. In addition, when (n) is an odd
number, 0 is stored in the upper 8 bits of the device storing the (n)th byte of data.

: the th byte data;

(1): Ignore the high byte
*1: Carry below the decimal point.
Example
When (n)=5, the data up to the lower 8 bits of (s)+(s)+4 is stored in (d)+(d)+2.

(1): When (n)=5

(2): Change to 00H
By setting the number of bytes in (n), the range of byte data specified in (s) and the range of the device storing the combined data
specified in (d) will be automatically determined.
When the number of bytes specified in (n) is 0, no processing is performed.
The upper 8 bits of the byte data storage device specified in (s) will be ignored, and the lower 8 bits will be the target.

166 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Example
When the low 8 bits of D11 to D16 is stored in D12 to D14.

Even if the device range storing the data before merging overlaps the device rangestoring merged data, it will be handled as normal.
Device range storing the data before merging Device range for storing merged data
(S)+0 to (s)+(n)-1 (D) to (d) + (n/2-1)
Error code
Error code Content
4084H The value specified in (n) exceed range of 0 to 32767
4085H When the device specified in the write application instruction (s),(d) and (n) exceeds the corresponding device range
Example

When M0 is ON, the data of D20 to D25 is separated according to byte units, and then stored in D10 to D12.

167 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
WTOB/Byte unit data separation
WTOB(P)
After separating the BIN 16-bit data stored after the device number specified in (s) into (n) bytes, store it after the device number
specified in (d).
-[WTOB (s) (d) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s) The start device that stores the data separation in byte unit - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(d) The start device that stores the result of separation in byte unit - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(n) Number of byte data separated 0-32767 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●●● ● ● ●
WTOB Parameter 2 ●●●● ● ● ●
Parameter 3 ●● ● ●● ● ●
Features
After separating the BIN 16-bit data stored after the device number specified in (s) into (n) bytes, store it after the device number
specified in (d).

（1）High byte;
（2）Low byte;
（3）High byte data;
（4）Low byte data;
（5）*1: Carry below the decimal point.
Example
In the case of (n)=5, store the data up to the lower 8 bits of (s) to (s)+2 in (d) to (d)+4:

（1）(N)=5 is ignored.
（2）(N)=5.
By setting the number of bytes in (n), the range of BIN 16-bit data specified in (s) and the range of the device storing the byte data
specified in (d) will be automatically determined.
When the number of bytes specified in (n) is 0, no processing is performed.

168 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
00H is automatically stored in the upper 8 bits of the byte data storage device specified in (d).
Example
When D12 to D14 is stored in the low 8 bits of D11 to D16

Even if the device range storing the data before merging overlaps the device rangestoring merged data, it will be handled as normal.
Device range storing the data before merging Device range storing separated data
(s) to (s) + (n/2-1) (d)+0 to (d)+(n)-1
Error code
Error code Content
4084H The value specified by (n) exceed the range of 0 to 32767
4085H When the device specified in read application instruction (s) and (n) exceeds the corresponding device range
4086H When the device specified in the write application instruction (d) exceeds the corresponding device range
Example

When M0 is ON, the data of D10 to D12 are separated according to byte units, and then stored in D20 to D25.

169 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DIS/4-bit separation of 16-bit data
DIS(P)
Store the data of the low (n) bits (1 bit of 4 bits) of the BIN 16-bit data specified in (s) into the low 4-bit of the (n) point starting from
the device specified in (d).
-[DIS (s) (d) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s) The start device storing the data before separation - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(d) The start device storing separated data - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(n) Separation number (0 means no processing) 0-4 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
DIS Parameter 2 ●●●● ● ● ●
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
Features
Store the low-(n) bit (1 bits of 4 bits) of the BIN 16-bit data specified in (s) in the low 4-bit of the (n) point starting from the device
specified in (d).

The hig-12 bit of the point (n) starting from the device specified in (s) will become 0.
When (n)=0, it will become no processing, and the content of point (n) starting from the device of (d) will not change.
Error code
Error code Content

4084H The data in (n) exceed the range of 0 to 4

4085H When the device specified in read application instruction (s) and (n) exceeds the corresponding device range
4086H When the device specified in the write application instruction (d) exceeds the corresponding device range
Example

When M0 is ON, D0 is separated every 4 bits and stored in D10 to D12. The result is D10 = HF, D11 = H8, D12 = HA.

170 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
UNI/4-bit combination of 16-bit data
UNI(P)
Combine the low 4 bits of the BIN 16-bit data of point (n) starting from the device specified in (s) into the BIN 16-bit device specified
in (d).
-[UNI (s) (d) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s) The start device storing the data before merging - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(d) The start device storing the merged data - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(n) Number of merger 0-4 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●●● ● ● ●
UNI Parameter 2 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
Features
Combine the low 4 bits of the BIN 16-bit data at point (n) starting from the device specified in (s) into the BIN 16-bit device specified
in (d).

The high (4-n) bits of the device specified in (d) will become 0.
When (n)=0, it will become no processing, and the content of the device in (d) will not change.
Error code
Code Content
4084H The data in (n) exceed the range of 0 to 4
4085H When the device specified in read application instruction (s) and (n) exceeds the corresponding device range
4086H When the device specified in the write application instruction (d) exceeds the corresponding device range
Example

When M0 is ON, the low 4 bits of D0 to D3 are combined and stored in D10, the value is H236F.

171 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
ZRST/Data batch reset
ZRST(P)
Perform a batch reset between the devices specified in (d1) and (d2) of the same type. It is used when interrupting operation,
performing initial operation, or resetting control data.
-[ZRST ( d1) (d2)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(d1) The start bit or word device number of batch reset - Bit/Signed BIN 16 bit ANY_ELEMENTARY
(d2) The final bit or word device number of batch reset - Bit/Signed BIN 16 bit ANY_ELEMENTARY
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
ZRST
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
Perform batch reset between the devices specified in (d1) and (d2) of the same type.

When (d1) and (d2) are bit devices,

write OFF (reset) in the entire
device range of (d1) to (d2).

When (d1) and (d2) are word

devices, write K0 in the entire
device range of (d1) to (d2).

As a separate reset instruction for the device, the RST instruction can be used for bit devices or word devices.

Reset M0
Reset the current value of T0
Reset D0

The batch write instruction of constant (for example: K0) has FMOV (P) instruction, which can write 0 to word devices (including bit
device specification).

Write K0 in D0 to D99.

✎Note:
Please specify the same type number for (d1) and (d2), and make (d1) number <(d2) number. When (d1) number ≥ (d2) number, only
1 point will be reset for the device specified in (d1).
ZRST(P) instruction is a 16-bit instruction, which can specify (LC) and (HSC) devices for (d1) and (d2).

172 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Error code
Error code Content
4084H When the device type specified in (d1) is different from the device type specified in (d2).
4085H When the device specified in the read application instruction (d1) and (d2) exceeds the corresponding device range
4086H When the device specified in the write application instruction (d1) exceeds the corresponding device range
Example

The function of this Circuit program instruction is to set the value of the D0 to D100 device to 0.

173 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
ZSET/Data batch set
ZSET(P)
Perform a batch set between the devices specified in (d1) and (d2) of the same type.

Content, range and data type

Parameter Content Range Data type Data type(label)
(d1) The start bit device number of batch set - Bit ANY_BOOL
(d2) The final bit device number of batch set - Bit ANY_BOOL
Device used
Devices Offset modification
Instruction Parameter
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D]
Parameter 1 ●●● ● ● ●
ZSET
Parameter 2 ●●● ● ● ●
Features
·Perform a batch set between the devices specified in (d1) and (d2) of the same type.
·Write ON (set) in the entire device range of (d1) to (d2)

·As a separate set instruction for the device, the SET instruction can be used for bit devices.

Set M1
Set Y1
Set S1

✎Note:
Please specify the same type number for (d1) and (d2), and make (d1) number <(d2) number. When (d1) number ≥ (d2) number, only
1 point will be set for the device specified in (d1).
Error code
Error code Content
4084H When the device type specified in (d1) is different from the device type specified in (d2).
4085H When the device specified in the read application instruction (d1) and (d2) exceeds the corresponding device range
4086H When the device specified in the write application instruction (d1) exceeds the corresponding device range
4087H When the device type specified in (d1) and (d2) are not bit device.
Example

The function of this LAD instruction is to set the value of the M1 to M4 device to ON.

174 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
CRC/cyclic redundancy check instruction
CRC(P)
Calculate the CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) value, which is one of the error checking methods used in communications. In addition
to CRC, error checking methods include parity and
Sum check (checksum), calculate horizontal parity check value and sum check value can use CCD(P) instruction . And this instruction
is used in the generator polynomial that generates the CRC value (CRC-16)
"X 16 +X 15 +X 2 +1".
-[CRC(P) (s) (d) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
The device start number storing the data of CRC value
(s) - Signed BIN16 ANY16
generated objects
(d) The destination device number of the generated CRC value - Signed BIN16 ANY16
The number of 8-bit data (bytes) for calculating the CRC value
(n) 1 to 256 Unsigned BIN16 ANY16_U
or the number of the device storing the number of data
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
CRC Parameter 2 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ●
Features
Start with the device specified in (s), generate the CRC value of 8-bit data (byte unit) at (n) point, and store it in (d).
The mode used by this instruction in calculation includes 16-bit conversion mode and 8-bit conversion mode. For the operation of
each mode, please refer to the following content.
(1) 16-bit conversion mode (when SM161=OFF)
Calculate the upper 8 bits (byte) and lower 8 bits (byte) of the (s) device. The result is stored in 16 bits of 1 point of the device
specified in (d). In the case of the following program, perform the conversion as shown below.

Example (s)=D100, (d)=D0, (n)=6

Content of object data
Devices
8-bit 16-bit
Low byte D100 low 01H 0301H
(s)
High byte D100 high 03H
Low byte D101 low 03H 0203H
(s)+1
High byte D101 high 02H
CRC value generation target data storage destination Low byte D102 low 00H 1400H
(s)+2
High byte D102 high 14H
...
Low byte
(s)+(n)/2-1
High byte
175 WECON technology Co., Ltd.
 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Low byte D0 low E4H 41E4H
CRC value storage target (d)
High byte D0 high 41H
(2) 8-bit conversion mode (when SM8161=ON)
In 8-bit conversion mode, only the lower 8 bits (lower byte) of the (s) device are operated on. As a result, 2 points are used starting
from the device specified in (d), the lower 8 bits (bytes) are stored in (d), and the upper 8 bits (bytes) are stored in (d)+1.
In the case of the following program, perform the conversion as shown below.

Example) (s)=D100, (d)=D0, (n)=6

Devices Content of object data

(s) Low byte D100 low 01H

(s)+1 Low byte D101 low 03H
(s)+2 Low byte D102 low 03H
(s)+3 Low byte D103 low 02H
CRC value generation target data storage destination
(s)+4 Low byte D104 low 00H
(s)+5 Low byte D105 low 14H
...
(s)+(n)-1 Low byte

(d) Low byte D0 E4H

CRC value storage target
(d)+1 Low byte D1 41H
In the CRC(P) instruction, the generator polynomial of the CRC value (CRC-16) uses "X16+X15+X2+1", but there are also many
standardized generator polynomials for the CRC value. If the generator polynomial is different, it will become a completely different
CRC value, which should be noted. The main CRC value generator polynomials are shown below.
Name Generator polynomial

CRC-12 X12+X11+X3+X2+X+1
CRC-16 X16+X15+X2+1
CRC-32 X32+X26+X23+X22+X16+X12+X11+X10+X8+X7+X5+X4+X2+X+1
CRC-CCITT X16+X12+X5+1
✎Note:
When (s1) use KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, n must be specified as 4.
Error code
Error code Content
4084H The range of (n) exceeds 1 to 256
4085H The data address of (s) to be converted exceeds the device range
4086H The (d) write address exceeds the device range

4087H Unsupported device type is used by (s) and (d)

176 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Example
1 16-bit conversion mode

2 8-bit conversion mode

177 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
CRC-XMODEM/cyclic redundancy check instruction
CRC-XMODEM(P)
The device specified in (s) is used as the start, and the CRC value of 8-bit data (byte units) at point (n) is generated and stored in (d)
PLC Editor2 version that supports this command: 2.3.1 and above
-[CRC-XMODEM(P) (s) (d) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
The device start number storing the data of CRC-XMODEM
(s) - Signed BIN16 ANY16
value generated objects
The destination device number of the generated
(d) - Signed BIN16 ANY16
CRC-XMODEM value
The number of 8-bit data (bytes) for calculating the
(n) CRC-XMODEM value or the number of the device storing the 1 to 256 Unsigned BIN16 ANY16_U
number of data
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices modificatio extensio
Instruction Parameter n n
S T(bit C(bit LC(bit HSC(bit D. Kn Kn Kn Kn S L HS
XY M S T CDR KHE [D] XXP
M ) ) ) ) b X Y M S D C C
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
CRC-XMODEM Parameter 2 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ●
Features
CRC-XMODEM (Cyclic Redundancy Check-XMODEM, abbreviation: CRC-XMODEM) is one of the error checking methods used in
communication. In addition to CRC-XMODEM, there are also parity and checksum (checksum) error checking methods, and the CCD
(P) instruction can be used to calculate the horizontal parity and checksum values.
The polynomial for generating the CRC-XMODEM value (CRC-CCITT) in this command uses "X16+X12+X5+1"
The modes used in this instruction for calculation are 16-bit conversion mode and 8-bit conversion mode. For the action of each
mode, please refer to the following.
(1) 16-bit conversion mode (when SM161=OFF)
The high 8 bits (bytes) and low 8 bits (bytes) of the device in (s) are operated. The result is stored to the 16 bits of the soft element 1
point specified in (d).
In the case of the following program, the conversion is executed as follows

CRC value
CRC value generation object data storage target
storage target
CRC-XMODEM 16-bit mode (s) (s)+1 (s)+2 ... (s)+(n)/2-1 (d)
Low High Low High Low High Low High Low High
Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte
(s)=D100， Device D100 D100 D101 D101 D102 D102 D0 D0

178 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
(d)=D0，(n)=6 low high low high low high low high
Contents 8-bit 01H 03H 03H 02H 00H 14H 7BH 0CH
of object
16-bit 0301H 0203H 1400H 0C7BH
data
(1) 8-bit conversion mode (when SM161=ON)
In the 8-bit conversion mode, only the low 8 bits (low byte) of the device of (s) are operated. The result uses 2 points from the soft
component specified in (d), storing the low 8 bits (bytes) in (d) and the high 8 bits (bytes) in (d) + 1.
In the case of the following program, the conversion is executed as follows

CRC value
CRC value generation object data storage target
storage target
CRC-XMODEM 8-bit
(s) (s)+1 (s)+2 (s)+3 (s)+4 (s)+5 ... (s)+(n)-1 (d) (d)+1
mode
Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low
Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte
D100 D101 D102 D103 D104 D105
Device - - D0 D1
Low Low Low Low Low Low
(s)=D100，
Contents
(d)=D0，(n)=6
of object 01H 03H 03H 02H 00H 14H 7BH 0CH
data
The CRC value (CRC-CCITT) in the CRC-XMODEM(P) instruction uses "X16+X12+X5+1" in the generating polynomial, but there are
many standardized generating polynomials for CRC values. If this generating polynomial is different, it will become a completely
different CRC value and should be noted. The main generating polynomials for CRC values are shown below.
Name Generator polynomial

CRC-12 X12+X11+X3+X2+X+1
CRC-16 X16+X15+X2+1
CRC-32 X32+X26+X23+X22+X16+X12+X11+X10+X8+X7+X5+X4+X2+X+1
CRC-CCITT X16+X12+X5+1
✎Note:
When (s1) use KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, n must be specified as 4.
Error code
Error code Content
4084H The range of (n) exceeds 1 to 256
4085H The data address of (s) to be converted exceeds the device range
4086H The (d) write address exceeds the device range

4087H Unsupported device type is used by (s) and (d)

179 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Example
3 16-bit conversion mode

4 8-bit conversion mode

180 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
LRC/longitudinal redundancy check
LRC(P)
The device specified in (s) is used as the start, and the data to be checked (2n characters) is summed two by two into a hexadecimal
value and stored in (d).
PLC Editor2 version that supports this command: 2.3.1 and above
-[LRC(P) (s) (d) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
The device start number storing the data of LRC value
(s) - Signed BIN16 ANY16
generated objects
(d) The destination device number of the generated LRC value - Signed BIN16 ANY16
The number of 8-bit data (bytes) for calculating the LRC value
(n) 1 to 256 Unsigned BIN16 ANY16_U
or the number of the device storing the number of data
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
LRC Parameter 2 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ●
Features
Longitudinal Redundancy Check (LRC) is a common form of checksum used in communications, also known as LRC checksum or
longitudinal checksum. It is an error detection method that generates check bits from a specific bit string on a vertical channel. LRC is
often used in conjunction with VRC in the row and column format, so that for each character check digit.
The specific algorithm is as follows.
(1) Sum the data to be verified (2n characters) two by two to form a hexadecimal value.
(2) Modulo the summation result with 256.
(3) the resulting modulus is subtracted from 256 to get the result of the checksum (another method: the modulus is inverted by bit
and then added to 1).
Example of hexadecimal data: 01 A0 7C FF 02
(Hexadecimal calculation)
Summation: 01 + A0 + 7C + FF + 02 = 21E Modulo: 21E % 100 = 1E Calculation: 100 - 1E = E2
(Calculated in decimal)
Summation: 01 + 160 + 124 + 255 + 02 = 542 Modulo: 542 % 256 = 30 Calculation: 256 - 30 = 226
The modes used in this instruction for calculation are 16-bit conversion mode and 8-bit conversion mode. For more information on
the actions of each mode, see the following section.
(1) 16-bit conversion mode (when SM161=OFF)
The high 8 bits (bytes) and low 8 bits (bytes) of the device in (s) are operated. The result is stored to the 16 bits of the device 1 point
specified in (d).
In the case of the following program, the conversion is executed as follows

181 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

LRC value
LRC value generation object data storage target
storage target
LRC 16-bit mode
(s) (s)+1 (s)+2 ... (s)+(n)/2-1 (d)
D100 D101 D102 D(s)+(n)/2-1 D0
Low High Low High Low High Low High Low High
Device
(s)=D100，(d)=D0， Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte
(n)=6 Contents of 8-bit 01H 03H 03H 02H 00H 14H E3H 00H
object data 16-bit 0301H 0203H 1400H 00E3H
(1) 8-bit conversion mode (when SM161=ON)
In the 8-bit conversion mode, only the low 8 bits (low byte) of the device of (s) are operated. The result uses 2 points from the soft
component specified in (d), storing the low 8 bits (bytes) in (d) and the high 8 bits (bytes) in (d) + 1.
In the case of the following program, the conversion is executed as follows

LRC value
LRC value generation object data storage target
storage target
LRC 8-bit mode (s) (s)+1 (s)+2 (s)+3 (s)+4 (s)+5 ... (s)+(n)-1 (d) (d)+1
Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low
Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte
D100 D101 D102 D103 D104 D105
Device D0 D1
Low Low Low Low Low Low
(s)=D100，
Contents
(d)=D0，(n)=6
of object 01H 03H 03H 02H 00H 14H E3H 00H
data
✎Note:
When (s1) use KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, n must be specified as 4.
Error code
Error code Content
4084H The range of (n) exceeds 1 to 256
4085H The data address of (s) to be converted exceeds the device range
4086H The (d) write address exceeds the device range

4087H Unsupported device type is used by (s) and (d)

182 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Example
5 16-bit conversion mode

LRC operation is performed on the high 8 bits (bytes) and low 8 bits (bytes) of the 6 device starting at (D100). The result is stored to
the 16 bits of the (D0) soft component.

6 8-bit conversion mode

The low 8 bits (low byte) of the 6 device from (D100) are operated. The result uses 2 points from (D0) designated device, and stores
the low 8 bits (bytes) in (D0) and the high 8 bits (bytes) in (D1).

183 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
STDEV/BIN 16-bit sample standard deviation
STDEV(P)
The standard deviation of the (n) points (16-bit data units) starting from the device specified in (s1) is calculated, and the result of
the calculation is stored in (d) by rounding.
PLC Editor2 version that supports this command: 2.3.1 and above
-[STDEV(P) (s1) (d) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
Device start number of the data for standard deviation
(s1) - Signed BIN16 ANY16
calculation.
(d) Device start number for storing standard deviation. - Signed BIN16 ANY16
Number of data or device number where the number of
(n) 2 to 32767 Signed BIN16 ANY16
data is stored.
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
STDEV Parameter 2 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
Error code
Error code Content
4084H The range of (n) exceeds 2 to 32767
The data address of (s) (n) to be converted exceeds the device
4085H
range
4086H The (d) write address exceeds the device range

The standard deviation of the 5 device (16-bit data units) starting from the device specified in (D1) is calculated, and the result of the
calculation is stored in (D10).

184 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DSTDEV/BIN 32-bit sample standard deviation
DSTDEV(P)
The standard deviation of the (n) points (32-bit data units) starting from the device specified in (s1) is calculated, and the result of
the calculation is stored in (d) by rounding.
PLC Editor2 version that supports this command: 2.3.1 and above
-[DSTDEV(P) (s1) (d) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
Device start number of the data for standard deviation
(s1) - Signed BIN32 ANY32
calculation.
(d) Device start number for storing standard deviation. - Signed BIN32 ANY32
Number of data or device number where the number
(n) 1 to 2147483647 Signed BIN32 ANY32
of data is stored.
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
DSTDEV Parameter 2 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
Error code
Error code Content
4084H The range of (n) exceeds 1 to 2147483647
The data address of (s) (n) to be converted exceeds the device
4085H
range
4086H The (d) write address exceeds the device range

The standard deviation of the 5 device (16-bit data units) starting from the device specified in (D1,D2) is calculated, and the result of
the calculation is stored in (D20,D21)

185 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
7.6 Matrix input instructions
MTR/Matrix input
MTR
The instruction to read the input signal (switch) of 8 points multiply by n columns in the time division method of 8 input and (n)
output (transistor).
-[MTR (s) (d1) (d2) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Data type
Parameter Content Range Data type
(label)
The start device (X) number X000, X010, X020 of the row signal The lowest bit
Bit
(s) input of the matrix is up to the final input X number. 8 number of X can only ANY_BOOL
consecutively occupied. be 0
The starting device (Y) number of the column signal output of The lowest bit
(d1) the matrix is Y000, Y010, Y020... to the final output Y number. 8 number of Y can only Bit ANY_BOOL
consecutively occupied. be 0
The start device (Y, M, S) number of the ON output destination
address is Y000, Y010, Y020..., M000, M010, M020..., S000,
(d2) - Bit ANY_BOOL
S010, S020... until the final Y, M, S number. Y occupies 8*(n)
continuously, and the others occupy 10*(n) continuously.
Unsigned
(n) Set the number of columns in the matrix input. 2 to 8 ANY16_U
BIN 16 bit
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●
Parameter 2 ●
MTR
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ●
Parameter 4 ●●
Features

186 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
This instruction generally uses the normally ON contact SM100.

According to the example in the figure:

M10 will turn ON when Y30 and X30 are connected, M14 will be ON when Y30 and X34 are connected, M26 will be ON when Y31 and
X36 are connected
(D2) is recommended to use a minimum of 0, mainly when using an address such as M4, the first start is M4, and then it will continue
to occupy M11, which is inconvenient to calculate and view, so it is recommended to use a software with a minimum of 0 element.
Special device used
Devices Content
SM229 SM229 will turn ON after one cycle of execution is completed
✎Note:
The MTR instruction can only run one instruction at the same time.
Error code
Error code Content
The read address of (s) and (n) exceeds the device range
4085H
(s) use the numbered device whose low bit is not 0
The write address of (d1) and (d2) exceeds the device range
4086HA
(d2) use the numbered device whose low bit is not 0

4084H (n) is not in the range of 2 to 8

4089H Multiple MTR instructions are executed at the same time

187 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
7.7 Convenient instructions
ABSD/BIN 16-bit data absolute method
ABSD
Create multiple output modes corresponding to the current counter (BIN 16-bit value).
-[ABSD (s1) (s2) (d) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
The start device number storing the data table
(s1) - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(rising edge point and falling edge point)
The counter number used for monitoring of the
(s2) - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
current value compared to the data table
(d) The number of points of the output start device - Bit ANY16_BOOL
(n) Number of table rows and output bit device points 1 to 64 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●
Parameter 2 ● ●
ABSD
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ● ●
Parameter 4 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ●
Features
Take the turntable to rotate 1 revolution (0 to 360 degrees) to control the output ON/OFF as an example. (1 degree, 1 pulse angle
signal)
Compare the data table of row (n) starting from (s1) (row (n) multiply by 2 points) with the current value of the counter (s2), from (d)
to continuous (n) in the course of one revolution The output is ON/OFF control up to the point.

Use the transfer instruction to write the following data into (s1) to (s1)+2(n)-1 in advance. For example, the rising edge point data
stores 16-bit data to even-numbered devices in advance, and the falling edge point data stores 16-bit data to odd-numbered devices
in advance.
Rising edge point Falling edge point
Object output
- Data value (example) - Data value (example)
(S1) 40 (S1)+1 140 (D)
(S1)+2 100 (S1) +3 200 (D) +1
(S1) +4 160 (S1) +5 60 (D) +2
(S1) +6 240 (S1) +7 280 (D) +3
... ... ...
- -
(S1)+2(n)-2 (S1)+2(n)-1 (D) +n-1

188 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
If the instruction input is set to ON, (d) is the start, (n) point is the output mode as shown below. Each rising edge point and falling
edge point can be individually changed by rewriting the data from (s1) to (s1)+2(n)-1.

✎Note:
When specifying the number of bit devices in (s1), the device number should be a multiple of 16 (0, 16, 32, 64...), and only K4 should
be specified for the number of bits.
The number of target output points is determined by the value of (n). (1≤(n)≤64)
Even if the instruction input is turned off, the output does not change.
Error code
Error code Content
4084H When the value specified in (n) exceeds the range of 1 to 64
4085H When the device specified in the read application instruction (s1), (s2 )and (n) exceeds the corresponding device range
4086H When the device specified in the write application instruction (d) exceeds the corresponding device range
Example
Refer to the example in the function description.

189 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DABSD/BIN 32-bit data absolute method
DABSD
Create multiple output modes corresponding to the current counter (BIN 32-bit value).
-[DABSD (s1) (s2) (d) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
The start device number storing the data table
(s1) - Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32
(rising edge point and falling edge point)
The counter number used for monitoring of the current value
(s2) - Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32
compared to the data table
(d) The number of points of the output start device - Bit ANY16_BOOL
(n) Number of table rows and output bit device points 1 to 64 Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●●● ● ● ●
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ●
DABSD
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ● ●
Parameter 4 ● ● ● ● ●●●●● ● ● ●● ●
Features
Take the turntable to rotate 1 revolution (0 to 360 degrees) to control the output ON/OFF as an example. (1 degree, 1 pulse angle
signal)
Compare the data table of row (n) starting from (s1) (row (n) × 4 points) with the current value of the counter (s2), from (d) to
continuous (n) in the course of one revolution The output is ON/OFF control up to the point.

Use the transfer instruction to write the following data into (s1), (s1)+1 to (s1)+4(n)-2, (s1)+4(n)-1 in advance. For example, the
rising edge point data stores 32-bit data to even-numbered devices in advance, and the falling edge point data stores 32-bit data to
odd-numbered devices in advance.
Rising edge point Falling edge point
Object output
- Data value (example) - Data value (example)
(S1)+1, (S1) 40 (S1)+3, (S1)+2 140 (D)
(S1)+5, (S1)+4 100 (S1) +7, (S1) +6 200 (D) +1
(S1) +9, (S1) +8 160 (S1)+11, (S1)+10 60 (D) +2
(S1) +13, (S1) +12 240 (S1) +15, (S1) +14 280 (D) +3
... ... ...
(S1)+4(n)-3, - (S1)+4(n)-1, -
(D) +n-1
(S1)+4(n)-4 (S1)+4(n)-2

190 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
If the instruction input is set to ON, (d) is the start, (n) point is the output mode as shown below. Each rising edge point and falling
edge point can be individually changed by rewriting the data from (s1) to (s1)+2(n)-1.

✎Note:
The high-speed counter can be specified in the DABSD instruction. When a high-speed counter is specified, the current value of the
counter will have a response delay due to the scan cycle in the output mode.
When specifying the number of bit devices in (s1), the device number should be a multiple of 16 (0, 16, 32, 64...), and only K8 should
be specified for the number of bits.
The number of target output points is determined by the value of (n). (1≤(n)≤64)
Even if the instruction input is turned off, the output does not change.
Error code
Error code Content
4084H When the value specified in (n) exceeds the range of 1 to 64
4085H When the device specified in the read application instruction (s1), (s2 )and (n) exceeds the corresponding device range
4086H When the device specified in the write application instruction (d) exceeds the corresponding device range
Example
Refer to the example in the function description.

191 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
SER/16-bit data search
SER(P)
Search the same data and the maximum and minimum values from the data table.
-[SER (s1) (s2) (d) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
Search for the start device number of the same data, maximum
(s1) - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
value, and minimum value
Search for the value of the same data or its storage destination
(s2) - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
device number
Search for the same data, maximum value, minimum value and
(d) - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
store the start device number
(n) Search the number of same data, maximum and minimum 1 to 256 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●●● ● ●
SER Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ●●●●● ●● ● ●
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ●●●●● ● ●
Parameter 4 ● ● ● ● ●●●●● ●● ● ●
Features
For (s1) as the first (n) data, search for the same data as the BIN 16-bit data of (s2), and store the result in (d) to (d)+4.
In the case of the same data, the number of the same data, the first/final position, and the maximum and minimum positions of the
same data are stored in the device with the first 5 points (d).
If there is no identical data, the number of identical data, the first/final position, and the maximum and minimum positions of the
same data are stored in the device with the first 5 points (d). However, in (d) is the first 3 points of the device (the number of the
same data, the first \\ final position), 0 is stored.
• The structure and data examples of the search result table are as follows. (N=10)
Comparison search results
The searched The value of the
data Data location Maximum Minimum
device (s1) searched data (s1) Consistent (d)
(S2) value value (d) +4 value (d+3)
(s1) K100 0 ○(First time)
(s1)+1 K111 1
(s1)+2 K100 2 ○
(s1) +3 K98 3
(s1) +4 K123 4
K100
(s1) +5 K66 5 ○
(s1) +6 K100 6 ○ (final)
(s1) +7 K95 7
(s1) +8 210 8 ○
(s1) +9 K88 9

192 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
• The search result table based on the above example is shown below.
Device number Content Search result items

(d) 3 Number of identical data

(d) +1 0 The position of the same data (first time)

(d) +2 6 The position of the same data (last time)

(d) +3 5 The final position of the minimum

(d) +4 8 The final position of maximum

✎Note:
Perform algebraic size comparison. (-10<2)
When there are multiple minimum and maximum values in the data, the positions behind each are stored.
If driven by this instruction , the search result (d) occupies 5 points of (d), (d)+1, (d)+2, (d)+3, (d)+4. Be careful not to overlap with the
device used for machine control.
Error code
Error code Content

4084H When the value specified in (n) exceeds the range of 0 to 256
4085H When the device specified in read application instruction (s1), (s2), (d) and (n) exceeds the corresponding device range
4086H When the device specified in the write application instruction (d) exceeds the corresponding device range
Example
Refer to the example in the function description.

DSER/32-bit data search

DSER(P)
Search the same data and the maximum and minimum values from the data table.
-[DSER (s1) (s2) (d) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
Search for the start device number of the same data, maximum
(s1) - Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32
value, and minimum value
Search for the value of the same data or its storage destination
(s2) - Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32
device number
Search for the same data, maximum value, minimum value and
(d) - Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32
store the start device number

(n) Search the number of same data, maximum and minimum 1 to 128 Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32

Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
DSER Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ●● ● ●
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
Parameter 4 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ●● ● ●
Features
For (s1)+1, (s1) as the initial (n) data, search for the same data as the BIN 32-bit data of (s2)+1, (s2), and store the result in (d)+1, (D)
to (d) +9, (d) +8.
193 WECON technology Co., Ltd.
 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
In the case of the same data, the number of the same data, the first/final position and the maximum and minimum values are stored
in a 5-point BIN 32-bit data device starting with (d)+1 and (d) position.
In the case of no identical data, the number of identical data, the first/final position and the maximum and minimum values are
stored in the device with (d)+1 and (d) as the starting BIN 32-bit data with 5 points position. However, 0 is stored in the 32-bit 3-point
device (the number of the same data, the first\\last position) with (d)+1 and (d) as the starting BIN.
• The structure and data examples of the search result table are as follows. (N=10)
search results
The searched The value of the Comparison data Data
Maximum Minimum
device (S1) searched data (S1) (S2) value location Consistent (d)
value (d) +4 value (d+3)
(S1)+1, (S1) K100 0 ○ (First time)
(S1)+3, (S1)+2 K111 1
(S1)+5, (S1)+4 K100 2 ○
(S1) +7, (S1) +6 K98 3
(S1) +9, (S1) +8 K123 4
K100
(S1)+11, (S1)+10 K66 5 ○
(S1) +13, (S1) +12 K100 6 ○ (final)
(S1) +15, (S1) +14 K95 7
(S1) +17, (S1) +16 210 8 ○
(S1) +19, (S1) +18 K88 9

• The search result table based on the above example is shown below.
Device number Content Search result items
(d)+1, (d) 3 Number of identical data
(d)+3, (d)+2 0 The position of the same data (first time)
(d) +5, (d) +4 6 The position of the same data (last time)
(d) +7, (d) +6 5 The final position of the minimum
(d) +9, (d) +8 8 The final position of maximum
✎Note:
Perform algebraic size comparison. (-10<2)
When there are multiple minimum and maximum values in the data, the positions behind each are stored.
If driven by this instruction , the search result (d) occupies [(d)+1, (d)], [(d)+3, (d)+2,], [(d)+5, (d)+ 4], [(d)+7, (d)+6], [(d)+9, (d)+8] 5
points. Be careful not to overlap with the device used for machine control.
Error code
Error code Content
4084H When the value specified in (n) exceeds the range of 0 to 128
4085H When the device specified in read application instruction (s1), (s2), (d) and (n) exceeds the corresponding device range
4086H When the device specified in the write application instruction (d) exceeds the corresponding device range
Example
Refer to the example in the function description.

194 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
ALT/Bit device output inversion
ALT(P)
If the input turns ON, the bit device is inverted (ON→OFF).
-[ALT (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(d) Alternate output device number - Bit ANY16_BOOL
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
ALT Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
Alternating output (level 1)
Each time the instruction input changes from OFF→ON, the bit device specified in (d) is turned OFF→ON inverted.

Divided frequency output (through alternate output (2 levels))

Combine multiple ALTP instructions to perform frequency division output.

✎Note:
If you program with the ALT instruction, the action will be reversed every operation cycle. To reverse the action by the instruction
ON→OFF, use the ALT instruction (pulse execution type) or set the instruction contact to LDP (pulse execution type).
Error code
Error code Content
4085H When the device specified in the read application instruction (d) exceeds the corresponding device range
4086H When the device specified in the write application instruction (d) exceeds the corresponding device range

195 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Example
(1) Start/stop via an input.
1) After pressing the button X4, start the action of output Y1 and stop the action of Y0.
2) After pressing the button X4 again, stop the action of output Y1 and start the action of Y0.

(2) Flashing action

1) When input X6 is ON, the contact of timer T2 will act instantaneously every 5 seconds.
2) The contact of T2 makes the output Y7 alternately ON/OFF every time it is ON.

196 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
INCD/BIN 16-bit data relative method
INCD
Use a pair of counters to create multiple output modes.
-[INCD (s1) (s2) (d) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s1) The start device number storing the set value - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(s2) The start number of counter for current value monitoring - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(d) The start bit device number of output - Bit ANY16_BOOL
(n) Number of output bit device points 1 to 64 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●
Parameter 2 ● ●
INCD
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ● ●
Parameter 4 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ●
Features
Compare the data table of row (n) starting from (s1) (row (n) × 2 points occupied) with the current value of the counter (s2), reset if
they match, and control the output on/off in turn.
Example
The operation is explained by the following circuit example. (S2) Take up 2 points. C0 and C1 are equivalent to this in the following
timing chart.

• It is assumed that the following data is written using the transfer instruction in advance.
Storage device Output
- Data value (example) - Example
(S1) D300=20 (D) M0
(S1)+1 D301=30 (D) +1 M1
(S1)+2 D302=10 (D) +2 M2
(S1) +3 D303=40 (D) +3 M3
... .... ... ...
(S1)+(n)-1 - (D) +n-1 -

197 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Timing diagram

If the instruction contact turns on, the M0 output turns on.

The output (M0) is reset when the current value of C0 reaches the comparison value D300, the count value of the process counter C1
is +1, and the current value of the counter C0 is also reset.
The next output M1 turns ON.
Compare the current value of C0 with the comparison value D301. When the comparison value is reached, the output M1 is reset,
the count value of the process counter C1 is +1, and the current value of the counter C0 is also reset.
Compare the same to the point (K4) specified in (n). (1≤(n)≤64)
After the final process specified in (n) is completed, the execution end flag SM229 turns ON for 1 operation cycle. SM229 is the
instruction execution end flag used in multiple instructions, so it should be used as a contact after the instruction to execute the end
flag dedicated to the instruction.
Return to the beginning and repeat output.
✎Note:
In (s1), when specifying the device number by specifying the digits of the bit device, the device number should be a multiple of 16 (0,
16, 32, 64...).
Up to 4 INCD instructions can be driven simultaneously in the program.
Error code
Error code Content

4084H When the value specified in (n) exceeds the range of 1 to 64

4085H When the device specified in read application instruction (s1), (s2), (d) and (n) exceeds the corresponding device range
4086H When the device specified in the write application instruction (s2) and (d) exceeds the corresponding device range
4089H The number of instruction drives exceeds the limit.

Example
Refer to the example in the function description.

198 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
RAMP/Control ramp signal
RAM(P)
Obtain data that changes between the start (initial value) and end (target value) two values specified (n) times.
-[RAMP (s1) (s2) (d) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s1) The device number that stores the initial value of the set ramp - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(s2) The device number that stores the set ramp target value - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(d) The device number that stores the current value data of ramp - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(n) Ramp transition time (scan period) 1-32767 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●
RAMP
Parameter 3 ●●●● ● ●
Parameter 4 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ●
Features
Specify the start value (s1) and the value to end (s2) in advance. If the instruction input is turned ON, the value divided by the
number of times specified in (n) will be added to (s1) in sequence in each operation cycle The value of is stored in (d). This instruction
and analog output can be combined to output soft start/stop instructions.

(d)+1 stores the number of scans (0→n times).

The time from the start to the end value requires operation cycle×(n) scan.
If the input instruction is turned OFF during operation, it will be in the execution interrupt state ((d): current value data retention.
(d)+1 scan times clear), if it is turned ON again, (d) will be cleared (S1) Restart the action.
After the transition is completed, the instruction execution completed flag SM229 will act, and the value of (d) will return to the value
of (s1).

199 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

In the case of obtaining the calculation result at a certain time interval (constant scan mode), write the specified scan time to SD120
(a value slightly longer than the actual scan time), and turn on SM120. For example, when the value is specified as 20 ms and n=100
times, the value of (d) changes from (s1) to (s2) in 2 seconds.
The value of the constant scan mode can also be set by the parameter setting of the engineering tool (the constant scan execution
interval setting of the CPU parameter).
According to the ON/OFF action of the mode flag SM226, the content of (d) is changed as shown below.

✎Note:
When the power failure retention device (retention area) is specified in (d), the instruction input remains ON. When the CPU module
is set to RUN (start), clear (d) in advance.
Error code
Error code Content
4084H When the value specified in (n) exceeds the specified range of 1 to 32767
4085H When the device specified in read application instruction (s1), (s2), (d) and (n) exceeds the corresponding device range
4086H When the device specified in the write application instruction (d) exceeds the corresponding device range
Example

As in the above procedure, turn SM120 ON, and the program will run with a constant scan cycle (the value in SD120 is 10ms). When
M0=ON, it changes from 10 to 100 within 100×10ms.

200 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
ROTC/Rotary table proximity control
ROTC
In order to take out the items on the rotating table, take out the window according to the requirements, and make the rotating table
rotate nearby.
-[ROTC (s) (n1) (n2) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Data type
Parameter Content Range Data type
(label)
The specified register of (s)+0: Register for counting
the calling condition (s)+1: Call the window number setting
(s) - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(pre-set according to the
(s)+2: Call the item number setting
transfer instruction)
(n1) Number of divisions 2 to 32767 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(n2) Singular in low speed zone 0 to 32767 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(d): phase A signal

The specified bit of the (d)+1: phase B signal

calling condition (d)+2: zero point detection signal
(constitutes an internal (d)+3: high-speed forward rotation
- Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(d) contact circuit driven in (d)+4: low speed forward rotation
advance from the input (d)+5: stop
signal (X)) (d)+6: low speed reverse rotation
(d)+7: high-speed reverse rotation
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●● ● ●
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ●
ROTC
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ●
Parameter 4 ● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
In order to take out the items on the rotating table divided into n1 (=10) as shown in the figure below, take out the inserted window
as required, and rotate the rotating table nearby under the condition of n2 or (s), (d) . If the following operating conditions are
specified, (d)+3 to (d)+7 can be used for forward/reverse, high-speed/low-speed/stop output.

201 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Set up the switch X2 that is used to detect the two-phase shape (X0, X1) of the forward/reverse rotation of the rotary table and
window 0. Replace X0 to X2 with (d) to (d) +2 internal contacts. The start device number specified in X or (d) can be arbitrary.

(s) is a counter, which counts how many items come to window 0.

(s)+1 set the number of the window to be called.
(s)+2 sets the number of the recalled item.
Specify the number of divisions (n1) and low-speed operation section (n2) of the rotary table.
✎Note:
If the instruction input is turned ON to drive the instruction, the result of (d)+3 to (d)+7 will be automatically obtained. If the
instruction input is turned off, (d)+3 to (d)+7 will turn off.
As an example, when the rotation detection signal ((d) to (d)+2) is set to 10 actions within 1 division interval, the division number
setting, calling window number setting, and article number setting should all be 10 Times the value. In this way, the setting value of
the low-speed section can be set to the middle value of the number of divisions, etc.
When the instruction input is ON and the 0 point detection signal (M2) is turned ON, the content of the counting register (s) is
cleared to 0. It is necessary to perform this clear operation in advance before starting operation.
ROTC instructions can drive up to 4.
Error code
Error
Content
code
When the value specified in (n1) exceeds the range of 2 to 32767
When the value specified in (n2) exceeds the range of 0 to 32767
4084H When the values specified in (n1) and (n2) meet the condition of (n1)<(n2)
When one of (s), (s)+1 and (s)+2 is negative.
When one of (s), (s)+1 and (s)+2 is (n1) or more.
4085H When the device specified in read application instruction (s1), (n1), (n2) and (d) exceeds the corresponding device range
4086H When the device specified in the write application instruction (s2) and (d) exceeds the corresponding device range
4089H The number of instruction drives exceeds the limit.
Example

Variable Features Instructions

D200 Used as a counting register
D201 Call window number setting The 3 units are pre-set by the user program
D202 Call work piece number setting

202 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
M0 Phase A signal The user program executes before each scan of this statement:

M1 Phase B signal

M2 Zero point detection signal

M3 High speed forward rotate

M4 Low speed forward rotate
When X0 is ON, the result of M3 to M7 could be automatically obtained.
M5 Stop
When X0 is OFF, M3 to M7 are all OFF.
M6 Low speed reverse rotate
M7 High spped reverse rotate

203 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
STMR/Special function timer
STMR
Use the 4 points starting from the device specified in (d) to perform 4 types of timer output.
-[STMR (s1) (s2) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s1) Timer number used: T0 to T511 (100ms timer) - Device Name ANY16
(s2) Timer setting value 1-32767 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(d) The start bit number of the output (occupies 4 points) - Bit ANYBIT_ARRAY
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ●
STMR Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ●
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
Use the 4 points starting from the device specified in (d) to perform 4 types of timer output.

（1） STMR instruction instruction

（2） The setting value specified in (S2)

The blink will be in (d)+3 normally closed contact through the following program which turns on/off the STMR instruction (T10 is
allocated in (s1), K100 is allocated in (s2), and M0 is allocated in (d)) Output to (d)+1, (d)+2.

204 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

The setting value of (S2) can be specified in the range of 1 to 32767 (1 to 3276.7 seconds).
✎Note:
The timer number specified by this instruction cannot be reused with other general circuits (OUT instructions, etc.). In the case of
repetition, the timer action cannot be executed correctly.
The timer specified in (s1) is regarded as a 100ms timer, starting from the rising edge of the instruction contact.
Occupy the device specified in 4 points (d) at the beginning. Be careful not to overlap with the device used for machine control.
When the instruction contact is turned off, (d), (d)+1, (d)+3 will turn off after the set time. (D) +2 and timer (s1) are reset
immediately.
Error code
Error code Content
4084H When the value specified in (s2) is less or equal to 0
4085H When the device specified in the read application instruction (s2) and (d) exceeds the corresponding device range
Example

Y0: When X10 changes from Off→On, Y0=On, when X10 changes
from On→Off, Y0=Off after a delay of 10 seconds.
Y1: When X10 changes from On→Off, make Y1=On output once for
10 seconds.

Y2: When X10 changes from Off to On, output Y2=On once for 10
seconds.
Y3: When X10 changes from Off to On, Y3=On after 10 seconds of
delay. When X10 changes from On to Off, Y3=Off after 10 seconds
of delay.

If the component (d)+3 is introduced into the instruction stream, the oscillator output can be easily realized (this function can also be
realized by the ALT instruction), as shown in the following figure:

205 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
TTMR/Demonstration timer
TTMR
Test the time when the TTMR instruction is ON. It is used when adjusting the timer setting time with buttons.
-[TTMR (d) (s)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(d) Device for storing teaching data - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(s) Multiplying ratio of teaching data 0-2 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●●● ● ●
TTMR
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ●
Features
Measure the pressing time of the execution instruction (button) in seconds, multiply it by the magnification (10S) specified in (s) and
store it in the device specified in (d).

For the time stored in (d), when the hold time is  0 (unit: second), the actual value of (d) is as follows according to the
magnification specified in (s).
(s) Magnification (D)
K0 0 (D) ×1
K1 10 0 (D)×10
K2 100 0 (D) ×100

(s) (d) (d)+1 (unit: 100 milliseconds)

K0 (unit: second) 1  0 (d)+1 =(d)×10
K1 (unit: 100 milliseconds) 10   0 (d)+1 =(d)
K2 (unit: 10 milliseconds) 100  0 (d)+1 =(d)/10

✎Note:
If the instruction contact turns from ON→OFF, the current value of the hold time (d)+1 is cleared, and the teaching time (d) does not
change.
Occupy the device specified in the 2 teaching time (d) at the beginning. Be careful not to overlap with the device used for machine
control.

206 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Error code
Error code Content
4084H When the value specified in (n) exceeds the range of 0 to 2
4085H When the device specified in read application instruction (d) and (s) exceeds the corresponding device range
4086H When the device specified in the write application instruction (d) exceeds the corresponding device range
Example
Example 1

When X0 is closed, D10=D11; when X0 is opened, the value of D10 remains unchanged, while D11 becomes 0.

Example 2

Use the TTMR instruction to write 10 sets of setting time, write the setting
value into D10 to D19 in advance, reorganize the timer bit 100ms type
timer, so 1/10 of the teaching data is the actual operating time (seconds)

Connect the 1-digit DIP switch to X10 to X13, use the BIN command to
convert the setting value of the DIP switch into BIN value and store it in Z0

X0 is On, store the time (seconds) in D100

M100 demonstrates a scan cycle pulse generated by the release of the

timer button X0

Use the setting number of the DIP switch as an indirect specified pointer,
and then transfer the content of D100 to D10Z0 (D10 to D19)

207 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
TRH/Conversion of wet and dry bulb temperature and humidity
TRH
This instruction completes the conversion of dry bulb temperature, wet bulb temperature and corresponding humidity.
-[TRH (d1) (s) (d2) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(d1) humidity 0 to 100 Single precision floating point ANYREAL_32
(s) Dry bulb temperature - Single precision floating point ANYREAL_32
(d2) Wet bulb temperature - Single precision floating point ANYREAL_32
(n) mode 0 to 1 Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●●● ● ●
Parameter 2 ●●●● ● ●
TRH
Parameter 3 ●●●● ● ●
Parameter 4 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ●
Features
（n）There are two modes to choose from:
Mode 0: Calculate the corresponding humidity by wet bulb temperature and dry bulb temperature.
Mode 1: Calculate the corresponding wet bulb temperature by dry bulb temperature and humidity.
The conversion process formula is as follows:
Assuming that the wet bulb temperature is A, the dry bulb temperature is B, and the corresponding current humidity is C, the three
meet the following conditions:

EXP{( A  17.27) /( A  237.36)}  611  x (1)

EXP{( B  17.27) /( B  237.36)}  611  y ( 2)

z  x  C  y / 100 (3)

A  B  z / 65.566 ( 4)

✎Note:
● The wet bulb temperature is not greater than the dry bulb temperature. When the two are the same, the humidity reaches the
maximum 100%.
● The unit of dry and wet bulb temperature is (℃).

● The general value range of dry bulb is between 0 to 100℃, the command does not judge its range, so pay special attention when
using this command.
Error code
Error code Content
The value specified in (n) is out of the following range. 0 to 1
4084H The value specified in (d1) is out of the following range. 0 to 100
A negative value is specified in (s).

208 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
A negative value is specified in (d2).

4085H The output result of (d1)(s)(d2)(n) in the read application instruction exceeds the device range

4086H The output result of (d1)(d2) in the writing application instruction exceeds the device range
Dry and wet bulb humidity comparison table

Example

209 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
MOVAVG/BIN 32-bit moving average filtering instructions
MOVAVG
(s1) is the data to be filtered, (s2) is the set sliding average window size, (d1) saves the process data in the instruction calculation in
(s2+1) double-word devices after specifying the initial device, (d2 ) is the calculation end flag, (d3) saves the filtered result.
PLC Editor2 version that supports this instruction: 2.3.1 and above
-[MOVAVG (s1) (s2) (d1) (d2) (d3)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Contect Range Data type Data type (label)
The starting device number of the data to be Single precision
(s1) 0、2-126≤|(s)|<2128 ANYREAL_32
filtered is stored floating point
The sliding average window size or the initial
Un-signed BIN 32
(s2) device number of the sliding average window is 1~4294967295 ANY32
bit
stored
The storage instruction calculates the starting
device number of the process data storage queue
(d1) - Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32_ARRAY
(consecutively occupies (s2+1) double-word
devices)
(d2) Instruction calculation end flag bit - Bit ANYBIT
The starting device number of the filtered result is Single precision
(d3) - ANYREAL_32
stored floating point
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●● ● ●
Parameter 2 ●● ●● ●
MOVAVG Parameter 3 ●● ● ●
Parameter 4 ● ● ● ●
Parameter 5 ●● ● ●
Features
Each time this instruction is executed, the input value (s1) will be saved to the calculation process data storage queue specified by
(d1+2) starting device, where (d1) specifies the double-word device to store the current write process data queue index. The number
of sliding average windows used to calculate the average value is specified in (s2). When the number of input values in the process
save data queue reaches the number of sliding averages in (s2), the average calculation is started, and the value specified in (d2) The
calculation end flag bit is ON. Save the average value of the data queue in the process to the initial soft component specified by (d3)
as the operation result.
✎Note:
The larger the setting value in (s2), the greater the hysteresis of the output result in (d3)
When the contact before the MOVAVG instruction is closed, the calculation end flag is automatically reset, and the written index

210 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

Moving average is suitable for smoothing high-frequency oscillating signals. The picture above shows the effect of the sliding average
command. The blue marked high-frequency oscillation signal can be used for sliding average to obtain the yellow marked curve.
Error code
Error code Content
4084H The input value of (s1)(s2) in the read application instruction exceeds the data range
4085H The input value of (s1)(s2) in the read application instruction exceeds the device range

4086H The input value of (d1)(d2)(d3) in the write application instruction exceeds the device range
Example
This instruction can be used in conjunction with the BD expansion module. When the channel value of the BD expansion module
displayed in R0 is unstable, the channel value can be filtered through the following ladder diagram

① M18 is set to ON, and the digital quantity stored in R0 is converted into a floating-point input value;
② Specify the sliding average window size in R200;
③ D200~D201 record the position index in the current write cache queue, according to the number of sliding average windows
specified in R200, fill the input value in R0 into the process data cache queue with D202 as the starting device;
④ When the number of written values reaches the number specified in R200, the S50 calculation end flag will be ON, and the
calculated average value will be written into the soft component specified by D402.

211 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
FOLAG/BIN 32-bit first order lag filter instruction
FOLAG
Performing first-order lag filtering on the digital signal input by (s1), and output result is stored in (d), and the filter coefficient is
adjusted by (s2), and the range is (0~1).
PLC Editor2 version that supports this instruction: 2.3.1 and above
-[FOLAG (s1) (s2) (d) ]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Contect Range Data type Data type (label)
The starting device number of the data to be Single precision
(s1) 0、2-126≤|(s)|<2128 ANYREAL_32
filtered is stored floating point
Lag filter coefficient or the initial device number Single precision
(s2) 0~1 ANYREAL_32
where the lag filter coefficient is stored floating point
The starting device number of the filtered result is Single precision
(d) - ANYREAL_32
stored floating point
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●● ● ●
FOLAG Parameter 2 ●● ● ●
Parameter 3 ●● ● ●
Features
First order lag filter formula:
Current filtering result (d) = filtering coefficient (s2) * current input value (s1) + (1 - filtering coefficient (s2)) * last filtering result (d).
Assume that the last filtering result is 10, and the input value this time is 20, resulting in a sudden change of 10. If the first-order lag
filter is used, the filter coefficient is assumed to be a = 0.05, and the filtering value this time = 0.05 * 20 + 0.95 * 10 = 10.5, which
makes the sudden change less serious, and has a good effect in filtering out pulse interference. The first-order lag filter will make the
obtained data waveform smoother than the original waveform. At the same time, the smaller the filter coefficient, the better the
hysteresis bigger.
✎Note:
After the first-order filtering command is enabled, the filtering result is stored in (d) to calculate the next filtering result, and it is not
recommended to modify it manually.
Error code
Error code Content
4081H The calculated data stored in (d) overflows
4084H The input value of (s1)(s2)(d) in the read application instruction exceeds the data range
4085H The input value of (s1)(s2)(d) in the read application instruction exceeds the device range
Example

212 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
①Set M0 to ON, convert the numerical value in R0 into a floating point number and store it in R10 as the filter input value;
②Set the lag filter coefficient to 0.05 and store it in D100;
③After the FOLAG instruction is executed, the filtered output value is stored in R20
✎Note:
① Filter coefficient range: 0~1, if it exceeds the range, an error will be reported.
② When filtering, the filtered output value in R20 is used to calculate the next output value, and manual modification is not
recommended

213 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
RCD/BIN 16-bit data logging instruction
RCD(P)
Store (s2) data of the start device specified in (s1), and automatically store the data in the start device specified by (s3) according to
the storage number calculated in (d). Every time the instruction is enabled, ( d) It will automatically add 1, (s4) specify the maximum
number that can be stored.
PLC Editor2 version that supports this instruction: 2.3.1 and above
-[RCD (s1) (s2) (s3) (s4) (d) ]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Contect Range Data type Data type (label)
Store the starting device number of the data to be
(s1) - BIN16 bit ANY16
recorded (occupies (s2) word devices)
The number of devices that need to be recorded
(s2) or the device number that stores the number of 1 to 65535 Unsigned BIN16 bit ANY16
devices that need to be recorded
The starting device number of data record storage
(s3) - BIN16 bit ANY16
(occupying (s4) words of device)
The number of devices allowed to be occupied by
the data record or the number of the device that
(s4) 1 to 65535 Unsigned BIN16 bit ANY16
stores the number of devices allowed to be
occupied by the data record
The device number that stores the current
(d) 1 to 65535 Unsigned BIN16 bit ANY16
recording times
Device used
Offset Dword Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification expansion extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●● ● ●
Parameter 2 ●● ●● ● ●
RCD Parameter 3 ●● ● ●
Parameter 4 ●● ●● ● ●
Parameter 5 ●● ● ●
Features
①When SM233 is ON, the loop recording function is turned on, and when the recorded data exceeds the number of devices allowed
to be occupied by the setting in (s4), the recording starts from the specified device in (s3);
②When SM233 is OFF, the recorded data cannot exceed the allowed number of occupied devices set in (s4).
Error code
Error code Content
4084H The data in the read application instruction (s2), (s4) exceeds the specified range (s2=0, s4=0, s2>s4)
When the device specified in the read application instruction (s1), (s2), (s4), and (d) exceeds the range of
4085H
the corresponding device
When the device occupied by the write application instruction (s3), (d) exceed the range of the
4086H
corresponding device
4096H When the device in the read application instruction (s1) and (s3) are multiplexed
Example

214 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

①Set M0 to ON, set the number of devices to be recorded in D50 to 10, then the number of devices to be recorded is D0~D9;
②In D51, set the record data allowed to occupy the number of device to 100, then the record data allowed to store the device as
R100~R199;
③Every time a rising edge is detected, record the data in D0~D9 to the device starting from R100, and the writing position is offset
according to the current recording times;
④ If SM233 is OFF, the data will be recorded within the range of the currently allowed occupied device; if SM233 is ON, then
circular recording will be performed, and the recording times in D300 will be increased by 1 for each recording.

215 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
7.8 External IO instructions
ARWS/Arrow switch
ARWS
Use the arrow switches for digit movement and increase or decrease of digit values to input data instructions.
-[ARWS (s) (d1) (d2) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s) The start device number that input - BIN16 bit ANY_BOOL
(d1) The word device number storing BCD conversion data - BIN16 bit ANY_BOOL
The start bit device (Y) that connect the display of the
(d2) 0 to 9999 BIN16 bit ANY16_S
7-segment digital tube
Specify the number of digits displayed by the 7-segment digital
(n) 0 to 3 BIN16 bit ANY16_S
tube (Setting range: K0 to K3)
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Parameter 2 ●●●● ● ●
ARWS
Parameter 3 ● ●
Parameter 4 ●●
Features
16-bit operation (ARWS). The 16-bit BIN value from 0 to 9999 is stored in D+1. For the sake of convenience, the following description
is displayed in BCD conversion.
When the instruction input is ON, the ARWS instruction will operate as shown below

Display and operation part of the content

216 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

(1) The digit specification of n displayed by the 7-segment digital tube with BCD code
A 4-digit (103 digit) is used as an example in the following operation description, .
(2) The action of the digit selection switch (S+2, S+3)
1) The action when input S+2 with reduced digits is ON.Each time the switch is pressed, the number of digits specification is
changed according to 103 →102 →101 →100 →103.
2) The action when the input S+3 with increased digits is ON. Each time the switch is pressed, the number of digits
specification is changed according to 103 → 100 → 101 → 102 → 103.
(3) The action of the LED for displaying the selected digits (D2+4 to D2+7). The specified number of digits can be displayed by LED
by strobe signal D2+4 to D2+7.
(4) The operation of the data change switch in units of digits (S, S+1). The data is changed for the number of digits specified by the
"digit selection switch" above.
1) Increase the action when the input is ON. Each time the switch is pressed, the content of D1 changes according to
0→1→2→...→8→9→0→1.
2) Reduce the action when the input is ON. Each time the switch is pressed, the content of D1 changes according to
0→9→8→7...1→0→9.
These contents can be displayed in the 7-segment digital tube display.
As shown above, through a series of operations, you can write the target value into D1 while viewing the 7-segment display.
✎Note:
1 The setting of parameter n
Please refer to the parameter setting of SEGL (FNC 74) instruction. The setting range is 0 to 3.
2 The output format of the programmable controller, please use a transistor output type programmable controller.
3 About scan time (operation cycle) and display timing
The ARWS instruction is executed synchronously with the scan time (operation cycle) of the programmable controller.
In order to perform a series of displays, the scan time of the programmable controller needs to exceed 10ms.
When it is less than 10ms, please use the constant scan mode and run with a scan time longer than 10ms.
4 Number of occupied points of the device
 The input of the device s occupies 4 points.

217 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
 The output of the device d2 occupies 8 points.
5 Restrictions on the times of the uses of instructions
Only one ARWS instruction can be used in the program.
Error code
Error code Content
4084H The data input in the application instruction (d1) and (d2) exceeds the specified range
4085H The output result of the read application instruction (s), (d1) and (d2) exceeds the device range
4086H The output result of the write application instruction (d1) and (d2) exceeds the device range
Example

The corresponding hardware wiring is shown in the figure below, and the PLC should be transistor output type:

(1) The digital tube in the figure shows the value of D0. Press X10 to X13 to modify the value. The value of D0 can only be between 0
and 9999.
(2) When X20 is ON, the cursor position is thousands. Each time the back key (X12) is pressed, the specified position is switched in
the order of "thousands → hundred → ten → pieces → thousand"; if the forward key (X13) is pressed, the switching sequence is
reversed; the cursor position is determined by the strobe pulse signal (YO04 to YOO7) LED indication of connection.
(3) For the cursor position, each time you press the increment key (X11), the content of the position changes by 0 → 1→
2→……8→9→0→1, and when you press the decrement key (X10), press 0 →9→8→7→…… 1→0→9 changes, the modified value takes
effect immediately.

218 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DSW/Numeric key input
DSW
This instruction is to read the state of the matrix type setting switch, with 4 BCD setting switches as a group, and store the setting
value in the specified unit after reading it. Up to 2 groups of setting switches can be read.
-[DSW (s) (d1) (d2) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Data type
Parameter Content Range Data type
(label)
The start device (X) number connected to the digital switch
(s) - Bit ANY_BOOL
(occupies 4 points)
The start device (Y) number that strobe signal outputed
(d1) - Bit ANY_BOOL
(occupies 4 points)
The device number that stores the value of the digital switch
(d2) 0 to 9999 Signed BIN16 ANY16_S
(occupies n points)
(n) Number of groups of digital switches (4 digits a group) (n=1 or 2) 1 to 2 Signed BIN16 ANY16_S
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ●
Parameter 2 ● ●
DSW
Parameter 3 ●●●● ● ●
Parameter 4 ●●
Features
This instruction is to read the state of the matrix type setting switch, with 4 BCD setting switches as a group, and store the setting
value in the specified unit after reading it. Up to 2 groups of setting switches can be read.
(1) About the input value (d1)
4 digits from 0 to 9,999 could be read.
Data is saved in BIN (binary number) value.
The first group is saved in (d2), and the second group is saved in (d2)+1.
(2) specification of the number of groups n
1 When using 4 digits/1 group×1 [n=K1] pass the strobe signal
From (s) to [(s)+3], sequentially read the BCD 4-digit digital switches connected in (d1) to [(d1)+3], and save the value as BIN
value in (d2).
2 When using 4 digits/1 group×2 [n=K2] pass the strobe signal
From (s) to [(s)+3], sequentially read the BCD 4-digit digital switches connected in (d1) to [(d1)+3], and save the value as BIN
value in (d2).
Through the strobe signal (d1) to [(d1)+3], read the BCD 4-digit digital switch connected in (s)+4 to [(s)+7] in turn, and save its value
as a BIN value To (d2)+1.
✎Note:
(1) When the instruction contact is OFF
Even if it is OFF, the content of (d2) does not change, but from (d1) to [(d1)+3] all become OFF.
(2) Occupied points of the device
1) When using 4 digits 2 groups (n=K2), 2 points starting from (d2) are occupied.
2) When it is 4 digits and 1 group (s), 4 points are occupied, and when it is 4 digits and 2 groups, 8 points are occupied.
(3) When connecting a digital switch with less than 4 digits
219 WECON technology Co., Ltd.
 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
For unused digits, the strobe signal <output for specified digits> (d1) does not need to be wired, but even if there are unused
digits, its output is already occupied by this instruction, so it cannot be used for other purposes. Be sure to leave unused output
empty.
(4) It is recommended to use transistor output type
In order to read the value of the digital switch continuously, be sure to use a transistor output type programmable controller.
(5) About digital switches
Please use a digital switch of BCD output type.
(6) About the read timing of keyboard input
In order to prevent reading omissions caused by the filter delay of keyboard input, please use the “Constant Scan Mode” and
“Timer Interrupt” functions flexibly.
(7) The limit number of instructions
A maximum of two can be used at the same time
Related device
Devices Name Content
SM229 End of instruction execution After a reading cycle is over, SM229 will be set for a scan cycle
Error code
Error code Content
4084H The data input in the application instruction (n) and (d2) exceeds the specified range
4085H The output result of the read application instruction (s) and (d2) exceeds the device range
4086H The output result of the write application instruction (d1) and (d2) exceeds the device range
4089H The number of application instructions exceeds the limit

Example
Program

Wiring diagram

1 DSW operates while M1 (digital switch read input) is ON.

2 DSW will operate until the end of one cycle of operation and the instruction execution end flag (SM229) turns ON.

220 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
HKY/Hexadecimal numeric key input
HKY
Use the keyboard (16 keys) of 0 to F to input, set the numerical value (0 to 9) and operating conditions (A to F function keys) and
other instructions for data input.
When the extended function is ON, the hexadecimal number of the 0 to F keys could be used for keyboard input.
-[HKY (s) (d1) (d2) (d3)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s) The start bit device (X) number that input 16-key (occupies 4 points) - Bit ANY_BOOL
(d1) The start device (Y) number that outputs (occupies 4 points) - Bit ANY_BOOL
(d2) The device number that stores the value input from the 16 keys 0 to 9999 BIN16 bit ANY16_S
(d3) The start bit device number whose key is ON (occupies 8 points) - BIN16 bit ANY16_S
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ●
Parameter 2 ● ●
HKY
Parameter 3 ●●●● ● ●
Parameter 4 ● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
16-bit operation (HKY)
Scan the input [S to S+3] and column output [D1 to D1+3] signals connected with 16 keys (0 to F), press the 0 to 9 keys, the value will
be saved in D2, and the keyboard detection will be output to D3 +7 in.
In addition, after pressing the A to F keys, the key information corresponding to the keyboard [D3 to D3+5] is ON, and the keyboard
detection is output to D3+6.
(1) About using the keys 0 to 9 to input the values D3, D3+7
If it is more than 9,999, overflow from the high digit. The entered value is stored in D2 as BIN (binary number).
When any key from 0 to 9 is pressed, the keyboard detection output D3+7 is ON.
(2) Information about A to F keys D3 to D3+6
Corresponding to the A to F keys, the first 6 o'clock of D3 is ON. When any key from A to F is pressed, the keyboard detection output
D3+6 is ON.
Keyboard Key information
A D3
B D3+1
C D3+2
D D3+3
E D3+4
F D3+5
Extensions
After SM167 is ON and the extended function becomes valid, the data of the hexadecimal keys from 0 to F is saved in BIN mode.
Except for the following, it is the same as the above-mentioned [Function and Operation Description].
The hexadecimal data input using the 0 to F keys is written into D2 as it is.
(1) Regarding the numerical input using the 0 to F keys D2
When it is FFFF or more, overflow from the upper digits.
221 WECON technology Co., Ltd.
 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
For example, when inputting 1→2→3→B→F, “23BF" is saved in D2 in BIN mode. When F is input, 1 overflows.

✎Note
1 Restrictions on the number of uses of instructions
HKY instructions, only one of them can be used in the program.
2 When the keyboard is pressed simultaneously
When multiple keys are pressed at the same time, the key pressed first is effective.
3 When the instruction contact is OFF
Even if it is OFF, the content of D2 does not change, but D3 to D3 +7 all become OFF.
4 Number of occupied points of the device
When 16 keys are connected, 4 points from the start device S of input (X) are occupied.
When 16 keys are connected, 4 points from the start device D1 of output (Y) are occupied.
It occupies 8 points from the start device D3 for key information output.
Please do not to overlap with the devices used in other controls of the machine.
D3 to D3+5: A to F key key information
D3+6: Keyboard detection output of A to F keys
D3+7: 0-9 key keyboard detection output
5 About the read timing of keyboard input
HKY instruction is executed synchronously with the operation cycle of the programmable controller.
It takes 8 operation cycles to complete a series of keyboard scans.
In order to prevent reading omissions caused by the filter delay of keyboard input, please use the [Constant Scan Mode] and [Timer
Interrupt] functions flexibly.
6 6. Output form
Please use a transistor output type programmable controller.
Related device
Devices Name Content
OFF: (d1) to (d1)+3 is being scanned, or the instruction is not executed
SM229 End of instruction execution
ON: (d1) to (d1)+3 cyclic output operation (1 to 4 digit scan) and then turn ON
Error code
Error code Content
4085H The output result of the read application instruction (s) and (d2) exceeds the device range
4086H The output result of the write application instruction (d1), (d2) and (d3) exceeds the device range
Example
Program

222 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Wiring diagram

When inputting [1]→[2]→[3]→[B]→[F], save "23BF" in D0 in BIN mode.

When [F] is input, [1] overflows.

223 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DHKY/32 system numeric key input
DHKY
Use the keyboard (16 keys) of 0 to F to input, set numerical value (0 to 9) and operating conditions (A to F function keys) and other
instructions for data input.
When the extended function is ON, the hexadecimal number of 0 to F key can be used for keyboard input.
-[DHKY (s) (d1) (d2) (d3)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s) The start bit device (X) number that input 16-key (occupies 4 points) - Bit ANY_BOOL
(d1) The start device (Y) number that outputs (occupies 4 points) - Bit ANY_BOOL
(d2) The device number that stores the value input from the 16 keys 0 to 99999999 BIN32 bit ANY32_S
(d3) The start bit device number whose key is ON (occupies 8 points) - BIN16 bit ANY16_S
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ●
Parameter 2 ● ●
DHKY
Parameter 3 ●●●● ● ● ● ●
Parameter 4 ● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
32-bit operation (DHKY)
Scan the input [S to S+3] and column output [D1 to D1+3] signals connected with 16 keys (0 to F), press the 0 to 9 keys, and the value
will be saved in [D2+1, D2] , The keyboard detection is output to D3+7.
In addition, after pressing the A to F keys, the key information corresponding to the keyboard [D3 to D3+5] is ON, and the keyboard
detection is output to D3+6.
(1) Regarding the use of keys from 0 to 9 to input values [D2+1, D2], D3+7
If it is 99,999,999 or more, overflow from the high digit.
The entered value is stored in [D2+1, D2] as BIN (binary number).
When any key from 0 to 9 is pressed, the keyboard detection output D3+7 is ON.
(2) Button information about A to F keys D3 to D3+6
For keyboard press information, please refer to 16-bit operation (HKY) on the previous page
extensions
After SM167 is ON and the extended function becomes valid, the data of the hexadecimal keys from 0 to F is saved in BIN mode.
Except for the following, it is the same as the above-mentioned “Function and Operation Description”.
The hexadecimal data input using the 0 to F keys are written in [D2+1, D2] as they are.
(1) Regarding the numerical input using 0 to F keys [D2+1, D2]
-When it is FFFFFFFF or more, overflow from the upper digits.
For example, when inputting [9]→[2]→[3]→[B]→[F]→[A]→[F], save "923BFAF" in [D2+1, D2] in BIN mode.
✎Note
1 Restrictions on the number of uses of instructions
Only one of the DHKY instructions can be used in the program.
2 When the keyboard is pressed simultaneously
When multiple keys are pressed at the same time, the key pressed first is effective.
3 When the instruction contact is OFF

224 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Even if it is OFF, the content of D2 does not change, but D3 to D3 +7 all become OFF.
4 Number of occupied points of the device
When 16 keys are connected, 4 points from the start device S of input (X) are occupied.
When 16 keys are connected, 4 points from the start device D1 of output (Y) are occupied.
It occupies 8 points from the start device D3 for key information output.
Please be careful not to overlap with the devices used in other controls of the machine.
D3 to D3+5: A to F key key information
D3+6: Keyboard detection output of A to F keys
D3+7: 0-9 key keyboard detection output
5 About the read timing of keyboard input
The DHKY instruction is executed synchronously with the operation cycle of the programmable controller.
It takes 8 operation cycles to complete a series of keyboard scans.
In order to prevent reading omissions caused by the filter delay of keyboard input, please use the “Constant Scan Mode” and “Timer
Interrupt” functions flexibly.
6 Output form
Please use a transistor output type programmable controller.
Related device
Devices Name Content
OFF: (d1) to (d1)+3 is being scanned, or the instruction is not executed
SM229 End of instruction execution
ON: (d1) to (d1)+3 cyclic output operation (1 to 4 digit scan) and then turn ON
Error code
Error code Content

4085H The output result of the read application instruction (s) and (d2) exceeds the device range
4086H The output result of the write application instruction (d1), (d2) and (d3) exceeds the device range
Example
Program

.Wiring diagram

When inputting 1→2→3→B→F→5→7→6, save "123BF576" in BIN to [D1,D0].

225 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
PR/ASCII code printing
PR
This instruction is to output ASCII data in parallel to the output (Y).
-[PR (s) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s) Start number of the device storing ASCII code data String (ASCII code only) ANY_ASC
(d) The start number Y of output ASCII code data - Bit ANY_BOOL
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●●● ● ●
PR
Parameter 2 ● ●
Features
The ASCII code stored in the lower 8 bits (1 byte) of (S) to (S)+7 is output to (D) to (D)+7 character by character in a time division
manner.
The ASCII code saved in is shown below, and the following timing diagram is based on this example.
The sequence of sending starts from (S) = "A", and ends with (S) + 7 = "H" for this purpose, sending eight bytes.

Timing diagram

Related device
Devices Name Content

OFF: 8 bytes serial output (fixed to 8 characters)

SM227 PR mode
ON: 16 bytes serial output (1 to 16 characters)
✎Note
1 Instruction input and instruction action
Instruction input=ON: Even if the instruction is continuously ON or the pulse instruction is executed, as long as the output of one
cycle ends, the execution ends.

226 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
SM229 only works when SM227=ON.
instruction input=OFF: all outputs are OFF.
2 Relationship with scan time (operation time)
The instruction is executed synchronously with the scan time.
When the scan time is short, you can use the constant scan mode to drive; when the scan time is longer, you can use the timer
interrupt drive.
3 About the output of the programmable controller
Please use a transistor output type programmable controller.
4 When 00H (NUL) exists in the data (when SM227=ON)
After the instruction is executed, the remaining data is not output.
In addition, SM229 maintains an operation cycle ON.
5 Restrictions on the number of uses of instructions
Only one PR instruction can be used in the program.
Error code
Error code Content
4085H The output result of the read application instruction (s) exceeds the device range
4086H The output result of the write application instruction (d) exceeds the device range
Example
Program

If the ASCII code in D200 to D203 is "Stopped", the corresponding output port signal and its timing are as follows:

227 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
SEGD/Numeric key input
SEGD(P)
Instruction to light up the 7-segment digital tube (1 digit).
-[SEGD (s) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s) Decoded start word device -32767 to 32767 Bit ANY_BOOL
(d) Word device number for storing 7-segment display data -32767 to 32767 Bit ANY_BOOL
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
SEGD
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
Features
Decode the low 4-digit (1 digit) of 0 to F (hexadecimal number) of (S) into 7-segment display data and save it in the low 8-digit of (d).
1.7-segment code decode table

✎Note
Number of occupied points of the device: The low 8 bits of the output of the device (S) are occupied, and the high 8 bits do not
change.
Error code
Error code Content
4085H The output result of the read application instruction (s) and (d) exceeds the device range
4086H The output result of the write application instruction (d) exceeds the device range
Example

When M0 is set, the lower 4 bits of the data in D0 are decoded and output to the Y10 to Y17 ports. The corresponding table for
translation is shown in the above table (7-segment code decoding table). The table does not need to be prepared by the user, and the
comparison table is already available in the PLC system.

228 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
SEGL/7SEG code hour and minute display
SEGL
Control 1 or 2 groups of 4-digit 7-segment digital tube display instructions with latch.
-[SEGL (s) (d) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s) Start word device for BCD conversion 0 to 9999 BIN16 bit ANY16
(d) The starting Y number to be output - Bit ANY_BOOL
(n) Parameter number [Setting range: K0(H0) to K7(H7)] 0 to 7 BIN16/32 bit ANY16_U
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ●
SEGL Parameter 2 ● ●
Parameter 3 ●●
Features
Convert the 4-bit value of (s) into BCD data, and use the time-division method to sequentially output each 1 digit to a 7-segment
digital tube with BCD decoding. (s) is valid when BIN data in the range of 0 to 9999.
The parameter (n) should be set as follows based on the positive and negative logic on the programmable controller side and the
positive and negative logic on the 7-segment side.
Parameter n
Programmable
Data input Strobe signal 4 digits 4 digits
controller output logic
in 1 group in 2 groups
Negative logic (consistent) 0 4
Negative logic (consistent)
Positive logic (inconsistent) 1 5
Negative logic
Negative logic (consistent) 2 6
Positive logic (inconsistent)
Positive logic (inconsistent) 3 7
Negative logic (consistent) 0 4
Positive logic (consistent)
Positive logic (inconsistent) 1 5
Positive logic
Negative logic (consistent) 2 6
Negative logic (inconsistent)
Positive logic (inconsistent) 3 7
(1) When using 4 digits in 1 group (n=K0 to 3)
After converting the 4-digit value of (s) from BIN→BCD, use the time division method to output each digit in turn from (d) to (d)+3. In
addition, the strobe signal output (d)+4 to (d)+7 is also output in a time-division manner, locked to the 7-terminal display of the first
group of 4 digits
(2) When using 4 digits in 2 groups (n=K4 to 7)
1) 4-digit group 1
After converting the 4-digit value of (s) from BIN→BCD, use the time division method to output each digit in turn from (d) to (d)+3.
The strobe signal output (d)+4 to (d)+7 is output in time-division manner in turn, locked to the 7-segment display of the first group of
4 digits.
2) 4-digit group 2
After converting the 4-digit value of (s)+1 from BIN+BCD, use the time division method to output each digit in turn from (d)+10 to
(d)+13. The strobe signal output (d)+4 to (d)+7 is output in a time-division manner in turn, locked to the 7-segment display of the

229 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
second group of digits.
✎Note
1 About the time required to update the 7-segment 4-digit display
The time required to update the 4-digit display (1 group or 2 groups) is 12 times the scan time (operation time).
2 Action when command input is OFF
When the command input is ON, the action is repeated. However, if the command contact turns off during an action, the action will
be interrupted. When it is ON again, it will start from the original action.
3 Occupied points of the device
When using 4 digits in 1 group: 1 point from the start device specified in S is occupied.
Occupy 8 points from the start device specified in D. Even when the number of bits is small, the occupied points cannot be used for
other purposes.
When using 4 digits 2 groups: 2 points from the start device specified in S are occupied.
Occupy 12 points from the start device specified in D. Even when the number of bits is small, the occupied points cannot be used for
other purposes.
4 About scan time (operation cycle) and display timing
The SEGL instruction is executed synchronously with the scan time (operation cycle) of the programmable controller.
In order to perform a series of displays, the scan time of the programmable controller needs to exceed 10ms.
When it is less than 10ms, please use the constant scan mode and run with a scan time longer than 10ms.
5 Regarding the output format of the programmable controller
Please use a transistor output type programmable controller.
6 Limit number of instructions
This instruction can be used at most 2 at the same time.
Related device
Devices Name Content

SM229 End of instruction execution After the processing is completed, SM229 is ON for one scan cycle
Error code
Error code Content
4084H The data input in the application instruction (n) exceeds the specified range
4085H The output result of the read application instruction (s) exceeds the device range

4086H The output result of the write application instruction (d) exceeds the device range

4089H The number of application instructions exceeds the limit

Example
Program

The corresponding hardware wiring is shown in the following figure. The content of D0 is displayed on the first group of digital tubes,
and the content of D1 is displayed on the second group of digital tubes. If the reading of D0 or D1 exceeds 9999, the program will run
into an error:

230 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

The digital tube used in the wiring diagram has its own display data latch, 7-segment decoding and driving, and 7-segment digital of
negative logic type (when the input port is low, it means that the input data is 1, or is strobed) Show tube. During display processing,
PLC's Y4 to Y7 ports will scan automatically, and only one port is ON each time as a bit strobe signal. At this time, the data on Y0 to Y3
ports is the BCD code data sent to the corresponding bit. When the bit strobe signal turns from ON→OFF, it is latched into the latch in
the digital tube. After internal decoding and driving, the digital tube displays the number. The PLC system cyclically processes Y4 to Y7
in turn, until all 4 bits are processed. In the same way, Y10 to Y13 are the data output ports of the second group of 4-digit digital
tubes, which share the bit strobe lines of Y4 to Y7. The processing methods are the same, and the display processing of the two
groups is performed at the same time. In the example, if D0=K2468 and D1=K9753, the first group will display 2 4 6 8 and the second
group will display 9 7 5 3.
It takes 12 scan cycles to complete a display refresh. After the processing is completed: According to the positive and negative logic of
the programmable controller, the positive and negative logic of the seven-segment code, etc., select according to the following
principles:
For a group of 4 digits, n=0 to 3. When two groups of 4 digits, n= 4 to 7.
Display group number Group 1 Group 2
Y data output polarity PNP NPN PNP NPN
Strobe and data polarity Identical Opposite Identical Opposite Identical Opposite Identical Opposite
the value of n 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

231 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
TKY/Numeric key input
TKY
Use the keyboard (number keys) of 0 to 9 to input instructions for setting data such as timers and counters.
-[TKY (s) (d1) (d2)]
Content, range and data type
Data type
Parameter Content Range Data type
(label)
(s) The start bit device that input the numeric key (occupies 10 points) - Bit ANY_BOOL
(d1) Word device number for storing data 0 to 9999 Signed BIN16 ANY16_S
The start bit device number whose key start bit device is ON
(d2) - Bit ANY_BOOL
(occupies 11 points)
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
TKY Parameter 2 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
Input [(s) to +9] to the connected number keys and press the keyboard, save the input value in (d1), and output in (d2) to +10
Keyboard input information and detected keyboard output.
(1) About the input value (d1)
If it is more than 9,999, overflow from the high digit.
The entered value is saved in BIN (binary number).
After pressing the number keys in the order of ①, ②, ③, ④, it is stored as 2130 in (d1).
(2) About (d2) to 10 of key information
(d2) to 9 key information, according to the pressed key ON/OFF.
When any key from 0 to 9 is pressed, the keyboard detection output of (d2) +10 is ON.

232 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
✎Note
1 When the keyboard is pressed simultaneously
When multiple keys are pressed at the same time, only the key pressed first is effective.
2 When the instruction contact is OFF
Even if it is OFF, the content of (d2) will not change, but (d2) to (d2)+10 will be OFF.
3 Occupied points of the device
✎ Connect the input of the number keys, occupying 10 points from (s).
Even when the number key is not connected (not used), since (d2) is already occupied, it cannot be used for other purposes.
✎ It occupies 11 points from the start device (d2) for key information output.
Please be careful not to overlap with the devices used in other controls of the machine.
(D2) to (d2)+9: Turn ON according to the input of number keys 0 to 9.
(D2)+10: It is ON when any key between 0 to 9 is pressed. (Keyboard detection output)
4 Restrictions on the number of uses of instructions
Only one of the TKY instruction or DTKY instruction can be used in the program.
Error code
Error code Content
4085H The output result of the read application instruction (s) exceeds the device range
4086H The output result of the write application instruction (d) exceeds the device range
Example

To input the number "2013", press the keys 2, 0, 1, 3 (X2, X0, X1, X3) in order. The operation of the PLC internal variables is shown in
the figure below.

According to the parameter setting in the instruction, X0toX11

correspond to 0to9 numeric keys; M0toM9 correspond to the
state of the keys; when any key is pressed, the key output unit
M10 will be set;

The key value (such as 2013) is converted to BIN format and

stored in the specified D1 unit D0; (D0=0x7DD), even if the
power flow of the drive turns OFF, D0 will not change;

When multiple keys are pressed, the first detected key is valid;
when the input number exceeds 4 digits, the first input number
changes overflow, leaving only the last 4 numbers input.

233 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DTKY/Numeric key input
DTKY
Use the 4 points starting from the device specified in (d) to perform 4 types of timer output.
-[STMR (s1) (s2) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Data type
Parameter Content Range Data type
(label)
(s) The start bit device that input the numeric key (occupies 10 points) - Bit ANY_BOOL
(d1) Word device number for storing data 0 to 99999999 Signed BIN32 ANY32_S
The start bit device number whose key start bit device is ON
(d2) - Bit ANY_BOOL
[occupies 11 points]
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
DTKY Parameter 2 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ●
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
Input [(s) to +9] to the connected number keys and press the keyboard, save the input value in (d1), and output in (d2) to +10
Keyboard input information and detected keyboard output.
(1) About the input value (d1)
If it is more than 9,999, overflow from the high digit.
The entered value is saved in BIN (binary number).
(2) (d2) to 10 of key information
(d2) to +9 key information, according to the pressed key ON/OFF.
When any key from 0 to 9 is pressed, the keyboard detection output of (d2) +10 is ON.

✎Note
1 When the keyboard is pressed simultaneously
When multiple keys are pressed at the same time, only the key pressed first is effective.
2 When the command contact is OFF
Even if it is OFF, the content of (d2) will not change, but (d2) to (d2)+10 will be OFF.
3 Occupied points of the device
✎ Connect the input of the number keys, occupying 10 points from (s).
Even when the number key is not connected (not used), since (d2) is already occupied, it cannot be used for other purposes.
✎ It occupies 11 points from the start device (d2) for key information output.
Please be careful not to overlap with the devices used in other controls of the machine.
(D2) to (d2)+9: Turn ON according to the input of number keys 0 to 9.

234 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
(D2)+10: It is ON when any key between 0 to 9 is pressed. (Keyboard detection output)
4 Restrictions on the number of uses of instructions
Only one of the TKY instruction or DTKY instruction can be used in the program.
Error code
Error code Content

4085H The output result of the read application instruction (s) and (d1) exceeds the device range
4086H The output result of the write application instruction (d1) and (d2) exceeds the device range
Example

When X20 is on, if you want to input the number "20205689", press 2, 0, 2, 0, 5, 6, 8, 9 (X2, X0, X2, X0, X5, X6, X10, X11) in sequence ,
Then (the value in (D1,D0) is 20205689)

235 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
7.9 Data conversion instruction
BCD/BIN → BCD
BCD(P)
Convert the BIN data of the device specified in (s) to BCD, and store it in the device specified in (d).
The calculation of the CPU module uses BIN (binary number) data for processing, which is used to display values in a 7-segment
display equipped with a BCD decoder.
-[BCD (s) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s) BIN data or start device storing BIN data 0 to 9999 Signed BIN16 ANY16
(d) Start device for storing BCD data - BCD 4 digits ANY16
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
BCD
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
Features
The BIN 16-bit data (0 to 9999) of the device specified in (s) is converted to BCD 4-bit data and stored in the device specified in (d).
The data specified in (s) can be converted within the range of 0 to 9999 (BCD).
When the data specified in (s) or (d) is digit specification, the conditions are as shown in the table below.

(1): Must be set to 0.

The data specified in (s) can be converted in the range of K0 to K9999 by BCD (decimal number).
When the data specified in (s) or (d) is digit specification, the conditions are as shown in the table below.

(d) Digits Data range

K1Y0 1-bit 0 to 9
K2Y0 2-bit 00 to 99
K3Y0 3-bit 000 to 999
K4Y0 4-bit 0000 to 9999

236 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
✎Note
The four arithmetic operations (+-×÷), increment, decrement instructions and other operations in the CPU module are all performed
by BIN (binary number). Therefore, when sending BCD (decimal) digital switch information to the CPU module, please use the BIN(P)
command (BCD→BIN conversion transfer command). In addition, when outputting to the 7-segment display of BCD (decimal number),
please use the BCD(P) command (BIN→BCD conversion transmission).
Error code
Error code Content

4084H The data input in the application instruction (s) exceeds the specified range
4085H The output result of the read application instruction (s) exceeds the device range
4086H The output result of the write application instruction (d) exceeds the device range
Example

When M0 is set, the BIN value of D200 is converted into BCD and stored in K1Y0.

BIN/4-bit BCD → BIN

BIN(P)
Convert the BCD data of the device specified in (s) to BIN and store it in the device specified in (d).
Similar to the digital switch, it converts the value set in BCD (decimal number) to BIN (binary number) that can be operated by the
CPU module and is used for reading.
-[BIN (s) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s) BCD data or start device storing BIN data 0 to 9999 BCD 4 digits ANY16
(d) Start device for storing BIN data - Signed BIN16 ANY16
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
BIN
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
Features
The BCD 4-bit data (0 to 9999) of the device specified in (s) is converted into BIN 16-bit data and stored in the device specified in (d).

(1): Must become 0.

The data specified in (s) can be converted within the range of 0 to 9999 (BCD).
When the data specified in (s) or (d) is digit specification, the conditions are as shown in the table below.

237 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

(d) Digits Data range

K1X0 1-bit 0 to 9
K2X0 2-bit 00 to 99
K3X0 3-bit 000 to 999
K4X0 4-bit 0000 to 9999

✎Note
The calculations in the CPU module such as the four arithmetic operations (+-×÷), increment and decrement instructions are all
performed by BIN (binary number). Therefore, when sending BCD (decimal) digital switch information to the CPU module, please use
the BIN(P) command (BCD→BIN conversion transfer command). In addition, when outputting to the 7-segment display of BCD
(decimal number), please use the BCD(P) command (BIN→BCD conversion transmission).
Error code
Error code Content

4084H The data input in the application instruction (s) exceeds the specified range
4085H The output result of the read application instruction (s) exceeds the device range
4086H The output result of the write application instruction (d) exceeds the device range
Example

When M0 is set, the BCD value of K1Y0 is converted into BIN and stored in D200.

238 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DBIN/8-bit BCD → BIN
DBIN(P)
Convert the BCD data of the device specified in (s) to BIN and store it in the device specified in (d).
Similar to the digital switch, it converts the value set in BCD (decimal number) to BIN (binary number) that can be operated by the
CPU module and is used for reading.
-[DBIN (s) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s) BCD data or start device storing BIN data 0 to 99999999 BCD 8 digits ANY32
(d) Start device for storing BIN data - Signed BIN32 ANY32
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ●● ● ●
DBIN
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
Features
The BCD 8-bit data (0 to 99999999) of the device specified in (s) is converted to BIN 32-bit data and stored in the device specified in
(d).

(1): Must become 0.

The data specified in (s) can be converted within the range of 0 to 99999999 (BCD).
When the data specified in (s) or (d) is digit specification, the conditions are as shown in the table below.

(d) Bit data range

K1X0 1-bit 0 to 9
K2X0 2-bit 00 to 99
K3X0 3-bit 000 to 999
K4X0 4-bit 0000 to 9999
K5X0 5-bit 00000 to 99999
K6X0 6-bit 000000 to 999999
K7X0 7-bit 0000000 to 9999999
K8X0 8-bit 00000000 to 99999999

239 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
✎Note
The calculations in the CPU module such as the four arithmetic operations (+-×÷), increment and decrement instructions are all
performed by BIN (binary number). Therefore, when sending BCD (decimal) digital switch information to the CPU module, please use
the BIN(P) command (BCD→BIN conversion transfer command). In addition, when outputting to the 7-segment display of BCD
(decimal number), please use the BCD(P) command (BIN→BCD conversion transmission).
Error code
Error code Content

4084H The data input in the application instruction (s) exceeds the specified range
4085H The output result of the read application instruction (s) exceeds the device range
4086H The output result of the write application instruction (d) exceeds the device range

Example

When M0 is set, the BCD value of K8Y0 is converted into BIN and stored in D200.

FLT/BIN integer → binary floating point number

FLT(P)
An instruction to convert a BIN 16-bit integer value into a binary floating point number (real number).
-[FLT (s) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Data type
Parameter Content Range Data type
(label)
(s) The data register number that saves the BIN integer value - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
The data register number that saves the binary
(d) - Single precision real number ANYREAL_32
floating-point number (real number)
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
FLT
Parameter 2 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
The signed 16-bit data specified in (s) is converted into a binary floating point data and stored in (d)+1, (d).

✎Note
In each binary floating point number (real number) operation instruction, the specified K and H values will be automatically
converted into a binary floating point number (real number), so there is no need to use the FLT instruction for conversion.
The inverse conversion instruction of this instruction is INT (convert a binary floating point value into a BIN integer).
Error code

240 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Error code Content

4085H When the device specified in the read application instruction (s) exceeds the corresponding device range
4086H When the device specified in the write application instruction (d) exceeds the corresponding device range

Example
Four arithmetic using binary floating point operations
(1) Calculation example

(2) Sequence control program

(D0) → (D21, D20)

BIN binary floating point operations

(X17 to X10) → (D22)

BCD BIN

(D22) → (D25, D24)

BIN binary floating point operations

K345÷K10 → (D27, D26)

Binary floating point operations

(D21,D20)÷(D25,D24) → (D29,D28)
Binary floating-point number division operation
→Binary floating-point number operation

(D29,D28)×(D27,D26) → (D11,D10)
Binary floating-point number multiplication

(D11,D10) → (D13,D12)
Binary floating-point calculations →
Decimal floating-point calculations monitoring

(D11,D10) → (D13,D12)
Binary floating point operations 32-bit BIN integer

241 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DFLT/BIN integer → binary floating point number
DFLT(P)
An instruction to convert a BIN 32-bit integer value into a binary floating point number (real number).
-[DFLT (s) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s) The data register number that saves the BIN32 integer value - Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32
The data register number that saves the binary floating-point Single precision
(d) - ANYREAL_32
number (real number) real number
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ●● ● ●
DFLT
Parameter 2 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
Convert the signed BIN 32-bit data specified in (s) to binary floating point data and store them in (d)+1, (d).

✎Note
In each binary floating-point number (real number) operation instruction, the specified K and H values are automatically converted
into a binary floating-point number (real number), so there is no need to use the DFLT instruction for conversion.
The inverse conversion instruction of this instruction is INT (convert a binary floating point value into a BIN integer).
Error code
Error code Content
4085H When the device specified in the read application instruction (s) exceeds the corresponding device range
4086H When the device specified in the write application instruction (d) exceeds the corresponding device range
Example

When M2=ON, convert the BIN 32-bit integer -7963590 in [D1, D0] into a single-precision floating point number -7963590.0 and store
it in the [D101, D100] device.

242 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
VAL/ String → BIN 16-bit data conversion
VAL(P)
After converting the character string stored in the device number specified in (s) and later into BIN 16-bit data, store the number of
digits in (d1) and store the BIN data in (d2).
[VAL (s) (d1) (d2)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
The character string converted to BIN data or the start
(s) - String ANYSTRING_SINGLE
device that stores the character string
The start device that stores the number of digits of
(d1) - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16_S_ARRAY
converted BIN data
(d2) Start device for storing converted BIN data - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16_S
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●●● ● ● ●
VAL Parameter 2 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
Features
After converting the character string stored in the device number specified in (s) and later into BIN 16-bit data, store the number of
digits in (d1) and store the BIN data in (d2). In the conversion from character string to BIN, the data from the device number specified
in (s) to the device number storing 00H is treated as a character string.
The total number of digits stored in (d1) stores the number of all characters (including signs and decimal points) representing the
value. The number of decimal places stored in (d1)+1 stores the number of characters representing the decimal part after 2EH(.). For
the BIN 16-bit data stored in (d2), the character string ignoring the decimal point is converted into a BIN value and stored.

Error code
Error code Content
The character string specified by (s) could not be converted into a numeric value
For example:
The first character is not a negative sign or a space, space appears in the middle of the number, decimal point
4082H appears twice. Except for the first character that appears non-characters and decimal points, the number in the
symbolic string with the decimal point is removed and the range between -32768 and 32767 is exceeded
Except for the first character, there are non-character and decimal Signs
For example, 3.4000 is 34000 after removing the decimal point, which is out of range.
4085H (s) read address exceeds the device range
408AH When the character number of character string the specified in (s) is other than 2 to 8.
243 WECON technology Co., Ltd.
 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
408BH The maximum range of the device is read when (s) taking character string, but 00H is not found as the end
4086H When using offset, the offset address of (d) exceeds the device range
Example

The result obtained above:

D0 corresponds to str length is 7.
D1 corresponds to a decimal point length of 3.

D10 corresponds to -12356 ignoring the decimal point.

DVAL/String → BIN32-bit data conversion

DVAL(P)
After converting the character string stored in the device number specified in (s) into BIN 32-bit data, store the number of digits in
(d1) and store the BIN data in (d2).
-[DVAL (s) (d1) (d2)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
The character string converted to BIN data or the start device -
(s) String ANYSTRING_SINGLE
that stores the character string
The start device that stores the number of digits of converted -
(d1) Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16_S_ARRAY
BIN data
(d2) Start device for storing converted BIN data - Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32_S
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●●● ● ● ●
DVAL Parameter 2 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
After converting the character string stored in the device number specified in (s) into BIN 32-bit data, store the number of digits in
(d1) and store the BIN data in (d2). In the conversion from character string to BIN, the data from the device number specified in (s) to
the device number storing 00H is treated as a character string.
The total number of digits stored in (d1) stores the number of all characters (including signs and decimal points) representing the
value. The number of decimal places stored in (d1)+1 stores the number of characters representing the decimal part after 2EH(.). For
the BIN 32-bit data stored in (d2), the character string ignoring the decimal point is converted into a BIN value and stored.

244 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

Error code
Error code Content
The character string specified by (s) could not be converted into a numeric value.
For example:The first character is not a negative sign or a space, space appears in the middle of the number, decimal
point appears twice. Except for the first character that appears non-characters and decimal points, the number in
4082H the symbolic string with the decimal point is removed and the range between -2147483648 and 2147483647 is
exceeded
Except for the first character, there are non-character and decimal Signs
For example, 3.000000000 is 3000000000 after removing the decimal point, which is out of range.
4085H (s) read address exceeds the device range
408AH When the character number of character string the specified in (s) is other than 2 to 13.
The maximum range of the device is read when (d1) and (d2) taking character string, but 00H is not found as the
408BH
end
4086H When using offset, the offset address of (d) exceeds the device range
Example

The result obtained above

D0 corresponds to str length is 7.
D1 corresponds to a decimal point length of 3.

D10 corresponds to -12356 ignoring the decimal point

245 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
ASCI/HEX code data →ASCII conversion
ASCI(P)
After the n characters (bits) in the HEX code data specified in (s) are converted into ASCII codes, they are stored after the device
number specified in (d).
-[ASCI (s) (d) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s) The start number of the device storing the HEX code to be converted - BIN16 bit ANY16
(d) The start number of the device storing the converted ASCII code - String ANYSTRING_SINGLE
(n) The number of characters (digits) of the HEX code to be converted 1to256 BIN16 bit ANY16_U
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●●● ●● ● ●
ASCI Parameter 2 ● ● ● ●●●●● ● ●
Parameter 3 ●●● ●● ●
Features
The number of characters (bits) specified by (n) in the HEX code data specified in (s) is converted into ASCII code and stored in the
device number specified in (d) or later.
ASCI(P) instruction uses 16-bit mode and 8-bit mode when converting. For the operation of each mode, please refer to the following
content.
(1) 16-bit conversion mode (when SM8161=OFF)
Convert the digits of the HEX code after the device specified in (s) into ASCII, and transfer to the upper and lower 8 bits (bytes) of the
device specified in (d). When using in 16-bit conversion mode, SM161 should always be turned OFF.
In the case of the following program, perform the conversion as shown below.

Specify the number of bits (characters) and the conversion result

(n)
K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 K7 K8 K9
(d)
Under D200 C B C 0 4 3 2 1 8
D200 on C B C 0 4 3 2 1
Under D201 C B C 0 4 3 2
D201 on C B C 0 4 3
Under D202 C B C 0 4
D202 on Unchanged C B C 0
Under D203 C B C
D203 on C B
Under D204 C

246 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Bit structure in the case of (n)=K4

ASCII code
"0"=30H "1"=32H "5"=35H
"A"=41H "2"=32H "6"=36H
"B"=42H "3"=33H "7"=37H
"C"=43H "4"=34H "8"=38H

(2) 8-bit conversion mode (when SM161=ON)

Convert the digits of the HEX code after the device specified in (s) into ASCII, and transfer to the lower 8 bits (bytes) of the device
specified in (d). When using in 8-bit conversion mode, SM161 should always be set to ON for use.
In the case of the following program, perform the conversion as shown below.

If SM161 is set to ON, it will become 8-bit mode,

Perform conversion processing as shown below.

(n)
K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 K7 K8 K9
(d)
D200 C B C 0 4 3 2 1 8
D201 C B C 0 4 3 2 1
D202 C B C 0 4 3 2
D203 C B C 0 4 3
D204 C B C 0 4
D205 Unchanged C B C 0
D206 C B C
D207 C B
D208 C
Bit structure in the case of (n)=K2

ASCII
"0"=30H "1"=31H "5"=35H
"A"=41H "2"=32H "6"=36H
"B"=42H "3"=33H "7"=37H
"C"=43H "4"=34H "8"=38H

247 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Error code
Error code Content
4085H When the specified device range is read to exceed the corresponding device range
4086H When the specified device range is written to exceed the corresponding device range

4084H When the value specified in (n) exceeds the range of 1 to 256

Example

• 16-bit conversion mode (when SM161=OFF)

Convert the digits of the HEX code after the device specified in d100 into ASCII, and transfer to the upper and lower 8 bits (bytes) of
the device specified in d200. When using in 16-bit conversion mode, SM161 should always be turned OFF.

248 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
HEX/ASCII → HEX code data conversion
HEX(P)
After the device number specified in (s), the ASCII data stored in the number of characters specified in (n) is converted to HEX code,
and then stored in the device number specified in (d) or later.
-[HEX (s) (d) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s) The start device that stores the ASCII data converted to HEX code - String ANYSTRING_SINGLE
(d) The start device that stores converted HEX code - BIN16 bit ANY16
(n) Number of characters (bytes) of converted ASCII data 1 to 256 BIN16 bit ANY16_U
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
HEX Parameter 2 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
Parameter 3 ●● ● ●● ●
Features
• After the device number specified in (s), the ASCII data stored in the number of characters specified in (n) is converted to HEX code,
and then stored in the device number specified in (d) or later. The HEX(P) instruction uses 16-bit conversion mode and 8-bit
conversion mode when converting. For the operation of each mode, please refer to the following content.
(1) 16-bit conversion mode (when SM161=OFF)
After converting the ASCII data stored in the upper and lower 8 digits (bytes) of the device specified in (s) into HEX code, it transmits
every 4 digits to the device specified in (d). The number of characters to be converted is specified in (n).
SM161 is shared with ASC, ASCI, BCC, CCD and CRC instructions. When using in 16-bit conversion mode, please always set SM161 to
OFF.
SM161 is cleared when RUN→STOP.
In addition, it is necessary to store the ASCII data in the 16-bit conversion mode in the upper 8 bits of the device specified in (s).
In the following program, the conversion will be performed in the following manner.

Transform the source data

(s) ASCII data HEX conversion
Under D200 30H 0
D200 on 41H A
Under D201 42H B
D201 on 43H C
Under D202 31H 1
D202 on 32H 2
Under D203 33H 3
D203 on 34H 4
Under D204 35H 5
249 WECON technology Co., Ltd.
 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Bit structure in the case of (n)=K4

The number of characters specified and the conversion result becomes 0.

（n） 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
D102 ...OH
Unchanged
（d） D101 ...OH ..OAH .OABH OABCH ABC1H
D100 ...OH ..OAH .OABH OABCH ABC1H BC12H C123H 1234H 2345H
(2) 8-bit conversion mode (when SM161=ON)
After converting the ASCII data stored in the lower 8 digits of the device specified in (s) into HEX code, it will be transmitted to the
device specified in (d) every 4 digits.
The number of characters to be converted is specified in (n).
SM161 is shared with ASC, ASCI, BCC, CCD and CRC instructions. When using in 8-bit conversion mode, please always turn on SM161.
SM161 is cleared when RUN→STOP.
In the following program, the conversion will be performed in the following manner.

Transform the source data

(s) ASCII data HEX conversion
D200 30H 0
D201 41H A
D202 42H B
D203 43H C
D204 31H 1
D205 32H 2
D206 33H 3
D207 34H 4
D208 35H 5
Bit structure in the case of (n)=K2

250 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
The number of characters specified and the conversion result becomes 0.
（n） 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
D102 ...OH
Unchanged
（d） D101 ...OH ..OAH .OABH OABCH ABC1H
D100 ...OH ..OAH .OABH OABCH ABC1H BC12H C123H 1234H 2345H
Error code
Error code Content

When the value specified in (n) exceeds the range.

4084H
When ASCII codes other than 30H to 39H and 41H to 46H are set in (s).

4085H When the specified device range is read to exceed the corresponding device range

4086H When the specified device range is written to exceed the corresponding device range
Example

After converting the ASCII data stored in the upper and lower 8 digits (bytes) of the device specified in (s) into HEX code, it transmits
every 4 digits to the device specified in (d). The number of characters to be converted is specified in (n).
SM161 is shared with ASC, ASCI, BCC, CCD and CRC instructions. When using in 16-bit conversion mode, please always set SM161 to
OFF.

CCD/Check code
CCD(P)
Calculate the horizontal parity value and the sum check value of the error checking method used in communication and the like. In
addition to these error checking methods, there are CRC (Cyclic
Redundancy Check). To calculate the CRC value, use the CRC(P) command.
-[CCD (s) (d) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s) The start number of object device - BIN16 bit ANY16
The start number of the storage destination
(d) - BIN16 bit ANY16_ARRAY (number of elements: 2)
device of the calculated data
(n) Number of data 1 to 256 BIN16 bit ANY16_U
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
CCD Parameter 2 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
Parameter 3 ●● ● ●● ●
Features
Calculate the addition data and horizontal parity data of the data stored in (s) to (s)+(n)-1, and store the addition data in (d),
horizontal parity
The data is stored in (d)+1. The modes used by this instruction in calculation are 16-bit mode and 8-bit mode. For the operation of
each mode, please refer to the following content.

251 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
(1) 16-bit conversion mode (when SM161=OFF)
Regarding the data at point (n) starting with (s), the addition data and horizontal parity data of the high and low 8-bit data are stored
in the Devicess (d) and (d)+1.
SM161 is shared with ASC, ASCI, BCC, CCD and CRC instructions. When using in 16 bits, always set to OFF for use.
SM161 is cleared when RUN→STOP.
In the case of the following program, perform the conversion as shown below.

16-bit conversion mode

If the number of 1 is odd,

the horizontal parity is 1
If the number of 1 is even,
the horizontal parity is 0

1091 at BCD
Horizontal parity

(2) 8-bit conversion mode (when SM161=ON)

Regarding (s) as the starting point (n) data (lower 8 bits only), its addition data and horizontal parity data are stored in the devices (d)
and (d)+1.
SM161 is shared with ASC, ASCI, BCC, CCD and CRC instructions. If it is used in 8 bits, it should always be set to ON for use.
SM161 is cleared when RUN→STOP.
In the case of the following program, perform the conversion as shown below.

252 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

If the number of 1 is odd,

the horizontal parity is 1
If the number of 1 is even,

1091 at BCD
Horizontal parity

Error code
Error code Content

4084H When the value specified in (n) exceed the range of 1 to 256.
4085H When the specified device range is read to exceed the corresponding device range

4086H When the specified device range is written to exceed the corresponding device range
Example

Regarding D10 as the initial 10-point data, the addition data and horizontal parity data of the high and low 8-bit data are stored in the
Devicess of D0 and D0+1.
SM161 is shared with ASC, ASCI, BCC, CCD and CRC instructions. When using in 16 bits, always set to OFF for use.

253 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
GBIN/Gray code → BIN 16-bit data conversion
GBIN(P)
Convert the BIN 16-bit Gray code data stored in the device specified in (s) into BIN 16-bit data, and store it in the device specified in
(d).
-[GBIN (s) (d)]
Content, range and data type

Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)

(s) Gray code data or the start device that stores Gray code 0 to 32767 BIN16 bit ANY16_S
(d) The start device that stores the converted BIN data - BIN16 bit ANY16_S
Device used

Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
GBIN
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
Features
Convert the BIN 16-bit Gray code data stored in the device specified in (s) into BIN 16-bit data, and store it in the device specified in
(d).

GRY→BIN Mathematical Algorithm: Starting from the second bit from the left, XOR each bit with the decoded value of the left bit as
the decoded value of the bit (the leftmost bit remains unchanged).
Error code
Error code Content

4084H When the value specified in (s) exceeds the range

4085H When the specified device range is read to exceed the range of the corresponding device

4086H When the specified device range is written to exceed the range of the corresponding device
Example

It could be used when the encoder of Gray code method is used to detect the absolute position.
For S, the numerical are valid in the range of 0 to 32767.

254 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DGBIN/Gray code → BIN32-bit data conversion
DGBIN(P)
Convert the BIN32-bit Gray code data stored in the device specified in (s) to BIN 32-bit data and store it in the device specified in (d).
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s) Gray code data or the start device that stores Gray code 0 to 2147483647 BIN32 bit ANY32_S
(d) The start device that stores converted BIN data - BIN32 bit ANY32_S
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ●● ● ●
DGBIN
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
Convert the BIN32-bit Gray code data stored in the device specified in (s) into BIN 32-bit data, and store it in the device specified in
(d).

(s)+1: high 16 bits

(s): low 16 bits
GRY→BIN Mathematical Algorithm: Starting from the second bit from the left, XOR each bit with the decoded value of the left bit as
the decoded value of the bit (the leftmost bit remains unchanged).
Error code
Error code Content

4084H When the value specified in (s) exceeds the range

4085H When the specified device range is read to exceed the corresponding device range
4086H When the specified device range is written to exceed the corresponding device range
Example

255 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
GRY/BIN 16-bit data → Gray code conversion
GRY(P)
After converting the BIN 16-bit data of the device specified in (s) to BIN 16-bit Gray code data, it is stored in the device specified in
(d).
-[GRY (s) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s) BIN data or the start device that stores BIN data 0 to 32767 BIN16 bit ANY16_S
(d) The start device that stores the converted Gray code - BIN16 bit ANY16_S
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
GRY
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
Features
Convert the BIN 16-bit data specified in (s) into BIN 16-bit Gray code, and store it in the device specified in (d).

BIN→GRY Mathematical Algorithm: Starting from the rightmost bit, XOR each bit with the left bit as the value corresponding to the
GRY bit, and the leftmost bit remains unchanged (equivalent to 0 on the left) .
Error code
Error code Content

4084H When the value specified in (s) exceeds the range

4085H When the specified device range is read to exceed the corresponding device range

4086H When the specified device range is written to exceed the corresponding device range
Example

As shown in the above Circuit program:

For S, the range of 0 to 32767 is valid.

256 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DGRY/BIN 32-bit data → Gray code conversion
DGRY(P)
After converting the BIN 16-bit data of the device specified in (s) to BIN 16-bit Gray code data, it is stored in the device specified in
(d).
-[GRY (s) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s) BIN data or the start device that stores BIN data 0 to 2147483647 BIN32 bit ANY32_S
(d) The start device that stores the converted Gray code - BIN32 bit ANY32_S
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ●● ● ●
DGRY
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
Convert the BIN32-bit data specified in (s) into BIN32-bit Gray code and store it in the device specified in (d)

(s)+1: high 16 bits

(s): low 16 bits
BIN→GRY Mathematical Algorithm: Starting from the rightmost bit, XOR each bit with the left bit as the value corresponding to the
GRY bit, and the leftmost bit remains unchanged (equivalent to 0 on the left) .
Error code
Error code Content

4084H When the value specified in (s) exceeds the range

4085H When the specified device range is read to exceed the corresponding device range

4086H When the specified device range is written to exceed the corresponding device range
Example

As shown in the above Circuit program:

257 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DPRUN/Otal digit transmission (32-bit data)
DPRUN(P)
After processing the device numbers of (s) and (d) with specified digits as octal numbers, transfer the data.
-[PRUN (s) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s) Digit specification*1 - BIN32 bit ANY32
(d) Transfer destination device number*1 - BIN32 bit ANY32
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ●
DPRUN
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ●
Features
• Octal digit device to decimal digit device

• Decimal digit device → octal digit device

Error code
Error code Content
4085H When the specified device range is read to exceed the corresponding device range
4086H When the specified device range is written to exceed the corresponding device range
Example

As shown in the above Circuit program:

X0 to X27 take the value of octal digits and pass them to the Devices corresponding to M.

258 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
7.10 Floating point instructions
CHKFLT/Single precision real number check command
CHKFLT(P)
Check whether the data specified in (s) is a real number and store the result in the start soft component specified in (d)
PLC Editor2 version that supports this command: 2.3.1 and above
-[CHKFLT (s) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
Checked data or the starting device number that Single precision
(s) - ANYREAL_32
store the checked data real number
Start bit device number of output check result
(d) - Bit ANYBIT_ARRAY
(occupies 4 points)
Device used
Offset Dword Pulse
Devices
Instructio modification extension extension
Parameter
n S T(bit C(bit LC(bit HSC(bi D. Kn Kn Kn Kn S L HS
XY MS TCDR KHE [D] DXX XXP
M ) ) ) t) b X Y M S D C C
Parameter
●● ● ● ● ●
1
CHKFLT
Parameter
●● ● ● ●
2
Features
Check the data stored in (s) and determine whether it is a standard number, non-numeric, infinite, or non-standard number,
corresponding to the states of (d), (d+1), (d+2), and (d+3).
Descriptions
Numbers expressed as floating point numbers
The following types of floating-point numbers are available
Index (e)
mantissa（f） Non-zero and
0 All 1 (255)
non-all-1
0 0 Infinity
Non-standard Standard figures
Non-0 NaN
figures
✎Note
Non-standard numbers are numbers whose absolute values are too small to be expressed as standard numbers.
Non-standard numbers have fewer significant digits. If the calculation result is a non-standard number (including
intermediate results), the number of significant digits will be reduced.
Standard figures
Standard numbers represent real numbers. The sign bit 0 for positive numbers and 1 for negative numbers.
Exponent (e) will be represented from 1 to 254, and the actual exponent will be less than 127, i.e. -126 to 127.
The mantissa (f) is expressed from 0 to 223-1, in the actual mantissa, the bit 223 is 1 and the binary decimal point follows it
immediately.
Standard figures are shown as below:

For example:
259 WECON technology Co., Ltd.
 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
sign: -
Index: 128-127=1
   
mantissa: 1  2 22  2 21  2 23  1  2 1  2 2  1  0.75  1.75
value:  1.75  2  3.5
1

Non-standard figures
A non-standard figure represents a real number with a very small absolute value. The sign bit is 0 for a positive number and 1
for a negative number.
The exponent (e) is 0 and the actual exponent is -126.
The mantissa (f) is represented from 0 to 223-1, in the actual mantissa, bit 223 is 0, and the binary decimal point immediately
follows it.
Non-standard figure are shown as below:

For example:

sign：-
Index：-126
   
mantissa： 0  2 22  2 21  2 23  0  2 1  2 2  0  0.75  0.75
Value:  0.75  2 126

Zero
+0.0 and -0.0 values can be represented by setting signs, 0 for positive numbers and 1 for negative numbers. Both the
exponent and the mantissa are 0. +0.0 and -0.0 are both equal to 0.0.
Infinity
+∞ and -∞ values can be represented by setting signs, 0 for positive numbers and 1 for negative numbers. The exponent is
255 (28-1) and the mantissa is 0.
NaN
NaN (not a number) is generated when calculations such as 0.0/0.0, ∞/∞, or ∞-∞ result in a value other than a number or
infinity. The exponent is 255 (28-1), and the mantissa is non-zero.
✎Note
No NaN sign or mantissa area value (not non-zero) defined.
Error code
Error code Content

4085H The write address in (s) exceeds the device range

4086H The write address in (d) exceeds the device range
Example

M0 is ON, if D0 is a standard number (in the range of

single-precision real numbers), then M100 is ON.

M2 is ON, if D4 is a non-numeric value (NAN), then M109

is ON.

260 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

M9 set ON, if infinity in D18, then M138 set ON.

M10 is set to ON, and if D20 is a non-standard number,

M143 is set to ON.

261 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DACOS/Single precision real number COS-1 operation
DACOS(P)
-1
After calculating the COS (arc cosine) value of the angle specified in (s), the calculation result is stored in the device number
specified in (d).
-[DACOS (s) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
-1 Single precision
The angle data for COS (arc cosine) calculation or
(s) 0, 2-126 ≤|(s)|<1 ANYREAL_32
the start device number that stores the angle data real number
Single precision
(d) The start device number that stores operation result 0 to π ANYREAL_32
real number
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ● ●
DACOS
Parameter 2 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
After calculating the COS -1 (arc cosine) value of the angle specified in (s), the calculation result is stored in the device number
specified in (d).

The COS value specified in (s) can be set within the range of -1.0 to 1.0.
The angle (calculation result) stored in (d) stores the value from 0 to π in radians.
Related device are as follows:
Content
Devices Name
Condition Operation
SM153 Zero The operation result is zero The zero flag (SM153) turns ON.
The value of (d) becomes the minimum value of 32-bit real
SM152 Borrow The absolutevalue of operation result<2 -126
numbers (2 -126), and the borrow flag (SM152) turns ON.
Error code
Error code Content

4085H The write address in (s) exceeds the device range

4086H The write address in (d) exceeds the device range
4084H When the content of the device specified by (s) is an irregular number, a non-number, ±∞ and exceeds -1.0 to 1.0

Example

Calculate the arc cosine value of 0.4 and the result is 1.159279.

262 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DASIN/Single precision real number SIN-1 operation
DASIN(P)
After calculating the SIN -1 (arc sine) value of the angle specified in (s), the calculation result is stored in the device number specified
in (d).
-[DASIN (s) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
The angle data for SIN -1 (arcsine) calculation or the Single precision
(s) 0, 2-126 ≤|(s)|<1 ANYREAL_32
start device number that stores the angle data real number
Single precision
(d) The start device number that stores operation result -π/2 to π/2 ANYREAL_32
real number
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ● ●
DASIN
Parameter 2 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
Features

• After calculating the SIN-1 (arc sine) value of the angle specified in (s), the calculation result is stored in the device number
specified in (d).

The SIN-1 value specified in (s) can be set within the range of -1.0 to 1.0.

The angle (calculation result) stored in (d) is stored in the unit of radians (-π/2) to (π/2).

• The related devices are as follows.

Content
Devices Name
Condition Operation
SM153 Zero The operation result is zero The zero flag (SM153) turns ON.
The value of (d) becomes the minimum value of 32-bit real
SM152 Borrow The absolute value of operation result<2 -126
numbers (2 -126), and the borrow flag (SM152) turns ON.
Error code
Error code Content

4085H The write address in (s) exceeds the device range

4086H The write address in (d) exceeds the device range
4084H When the content of the device specified by (s) is an irregular number, a non-number, ±∞ and exceeds -1.0 to 1.0

Example

Calculate the arc sine of 0.4 and the result is 0.4115168.

263 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

DATAN/Single precision real number TAN-1 operation

DATAN(P)
After calculating the TAN -1 (arctangent) value of the angle specified in (s), the calculation result is stored in the device number
specified in (d).
-[DATAN (s) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Data type
Parameter Content Range Data type
(label)
The angle data for TAN -1 (arctangent) calculation or Single precision
(s) 0, 2 -126 ≤|(s)|< 2 128 ANYREAL_32
the start device number that stores the angle data real number
Single precision
(d) The start device number that stores operation result -π/2 to π/2 ANYREAL_32
real number
Device use
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ● ●
DATAN
Parameter 2 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
Calculate the TAN -1 ((arctangent) value of the angle specified in (s), and store the calculation result in the device number specified in
(d).

The angle (calculation result) stored in (d) is stored in the unit of radians (-π/2) to (π/2).
• The related devices are as follows.
Content
Devices Name
Condition Operation
SM153 Zero The operation result is zero The zero flag (SM153) turns ON.
The value of (d) becomes the minimum value of 32-bit real
SM152 Borrow The absolute value of operation result<2 -126
numbers (2 -126), and the borrow flag (SM152) turns ON.
Error code
Error code Content

4085H The write address in (s) exceeds the device range

4086H The write address in (d) exceeds the device range
4084H When the content of the device specified by (s) is an irregular number, a non-number and ±∞

Example

Calculate the arctangent value of 4.6 and the result is 1.356736

264 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DCOS/Single precision real number COS operation
DCOS (P)
After calculating the COS (cosine) value of the angle specified in (s), the calculation result is stored in the device number specified in
(d).
-[DCOS (s) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Data type
Parameter Content Range Data type
(label)
The angle data for COS (cosine) calculation or the Single precision
(s) 0, 2-126 ≤|(s)|< 2128 ANYREAL_32
start device number that stores the angle data real number
Single precision
(d) The start device number that stores operation result - ANYREAL_32
real number
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ● ●
DCOS
Parameter 2 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
After calculating the COS (cosine) value of the angle specified in (s), store the calculation result in the device number specified in (d).

For the angle specified in (s), set it in radians (angle×π÷180).

• The related devices are as follows.
Content
Devices Name
Condition Operation
SM153 zero The operation result is zero The zero flag (SM153) turns ON.
The value of (d) becomes the minimum value of 32-bit real
SM152 Borrow The absolute value of operation result<2-126
numbers (2-126), and the borrow flag (SM152) turns ON.
Error code
Error code Content

4085H The write address in (s) exceeds the device range

4086H The write address in (d) exceeds the device range
4084H When the content of the device specified by (s) is an irregular number, a non-number and ±∞

Example

Calculate the cosine value of 1.3 and the result is 2.674989E-1

265 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DCOSH/Single precision real number COSH operation
DCOSH(P)
After calculating the DCOSH (hyperbolic cosine) value of the angle specified in (s), the calculation result is stored in the device
number specified in (d).
-[DCOSH (s) (d)]
Content, range and data type

Data type
Parameter Content Range Data type
(label)
The angle data for DCOSH (hyperbolic cosine) calculation Single precision
(s) 0, 2-126 ≤|(s)|< 2128 ANYREAL_32
or the device start number that stores the angle data real number
Single precision
(d) The start device number that stores operation result - ANYREAL_32
real number
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ● ●
DCOSH
Parameter 2 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
• After calculating the DCOSH (hyperbolic cosine) value of the angle specified in (s), the calculation result is stored in the device
number specified in (d).

This instruction is to take the COSH value of a binary floating point number. The calculation formula is cosh value=(e s +e -s )/2.
• The related devices are as follows.
Content
Devices Name
Condition Operation
The value of (d) becomes the maximum value of 32-bit real
SM151 carry The absolute value of the operation result>2128
numbers (2128 ), and the carry flag (SM151) turns on.
Error code
Error code Content

4085H The write address in (s) exceeds the device range

4086H The write address in (d) exceeds the device range
4084H When the content of the device specified by (s) is an irregular number, a non-number and ±∞

Example

Calculate the hyperbolic cosine value of 2.5, and the result is 6.132289

266 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DSIN/Single precision real number SIN operation
DSIN(P)
After calculating the SIN (sine) value of the angle specified in (s), the calculation result is stored in the device number specified in (d).
-[DSIN (s) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Data type
Parameter Content Range Data type
(label)
The angle data for SIN (sine) calculation or the device Single precision
(s) 0, 2-126 ≤|(s)|< 2128 ANYREAL_32
start number that stores the angle data real number
Single precision
(d) The start device number that stores operation result - ANYREAL_32
real number
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ● ●
DSIN
Parameter 2 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
After calculating the SIN (sine) value of the angle specified in (s), the calculation result is stored in the device number specified in (d).

For the angle specified in (s), set it in radians (angle×π÷180).

• The related devices are as follows.
Content
Devices Name
Condition Operation
SM153 Zero The operation result is zero The zero flag (SM153) turns ON.
The value of (d) becomes the minimum value of a 32-bit
SM152 Borrow The absolute value of operation result <2 -126
real number (2 -126), and the borrow flag (SM152) turns on.
Error code
Error code Content

4085H The write address in (s) exceeds the device range

4086H The write address in (d) exceeds the device range
4084H When the content of the device specified by (s) is an irregular number, a non-number and ±∞

Example

Calculate the sine of 1.4 and the result is 0.9854497

267 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DSINH/Single precision real number SINH operation
DSINH(P)
After calculating the SINH (hyperbolic sine) value of the angle specified in (s), the calculation result is stored in the device number
specified in (d).
-[DSINH (s) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Data type
Parameter Content Range Data type
(label)
The angle data for SINH (hyperbolic sine) calculation or Single precision
(s) 0, 2-126 ≤|(s)|< 2128 ANYREAL_32
the device start number that stores the angle data real number
Single precision
(d) The start device number that stores operation result - ANYREAL_32
real number
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ● ●
DSINH
Parameter 2 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
After calculating the SINH (hyperbolic sine) value of the angle specified in (s), the calculation result is stored in the device number
specified in (d).

The instruction is to take the SINH value from a binary floating point number. The calculation formula is sinh value = (e s -e -s )/2.
The related devices are shown below.
Content
Devices Name
Condition Operation
SM153 Zero The operation result is zero The zero flag (SM153) turns ON.
The value of (d) becomes the minimum value of a 32-bit real
SM152 Borrow The absolute value of operation result <2-126
number (2-126), and the borrow flag (SM152) turns on.
The value of (d) becomes the maximum value of 32-bit real
SM151 Carry The absolute value of operation result > 2128
numbers (2128), and the carry flag (SM151) turns on.
Error code
Error code Content

4085H The write address in (s) exceeds the device range

4086H The write address in (d) exceeds the device range
4084H When the content of the device specified by (s) is an irregular number, a non-number and ±∞

Example

Calculate the hyperbolic sine value of 3.2 and the result is 12.24588

268 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DTAN/Single precision real number TAN operation
DTAN(P)
After calculating the TAN (tangent) value of the angle specified in (s), the calculation result is stored in the device number specified in
(d).
-[DTAN (s) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Data type
Parameter Content Range Data type
(label)
The angle data for TAN (tangent) calculation or the Single precision
(s) 0, 2-126 ≤|(s)|< 2128 ANYREAL_32
device start number that stores the angle data real number
Single precision
(d) The start device number that stores operation result - ANYREAL_32
real number
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ● ●
DTAN
Parameter 2 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
After calculating the TAN (tangent) value of the angle specified in (s), the calculation result is stored in the device number specified in
(d).

For the angle specified in (s), set it in radians (angle×π÷180).

The related devices are shown below.
Content
Devices Name
Condition Operation
SM153 Zero The operation result is zero The zero flag (SM153) turns ON.
The value of (d) becomes the minimum value of a 32-bit real
SM152 Borrow The absolute value of operation result <2-126
number (2-126), and the borrow flag (SM152) turns on.
The value of (d) becomes the maximum value of 32-bit real
SM151 Carry The absolute value of operation result> 2128
numbers (2128), and the carry flag (SM151) turns on.
Error code
Error code Content
4085H The write address in (s) exceeds the device range
4086H The write address in (d) exceeds the device range
4084H When the content of the device specified by (s) is an irregular number, a non-number and ±∞

Example

Calculate the tangent of 1.4 and the result is 5.797883

269 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DATANH/Single precision real number TANH operation
DTANH(P)
After calculating the DTANH (hyperbolic tangent) value of the angle specified in (s), the calculation result is stored in the device
number specified in (d).
-[DTANH (s) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Data type
Parameter Content Range Data type
(label)
The angle data for DTANH (hyperbolic tangent) calculation Single precision
(s) 0, 2-126 ≤|(s)|< 2128 ANYREAL_32
or the device start number that stores the angle data real number
Single precision
(d) The start device number that stores operation result - ANYREAL_32
real number
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ● ●
DTANH
Parameter 2 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
After calculating the DTANH (hyperbolic tangent) value of the angle specified in (s), the calculation result is stored in the device
number specified in (d).

The instruction is to take the TANH value of a binary floating point number. The calculation formula is tanh value=(e s -e -s )/(e s +e -s ).
The related devices are shown below.
Content
Device Name
Condition Operation
SM153 Zero The operation result is zero The zero flag (SM153) turns ON.
The value of (d) becomes the minimum value of a 32-bit real
SM152 Borrow The absolute value of operation result <2 -126
number (2-126), and the borrow flag (SM152) turns on.
Error code
Error code Content

4085H The write address in (s) exceeds the device range

4086H The write address in (d) exceeds the device range
4084H When the content of the device specified by (s) is an irregular number, a non-number and ±∞

Example

Calculate the hyperbolic tangent of 2.5, and the result is 0.9866143

270 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DDEG/Single precision real number radian → angle conversion
DDEG(P)
Convert the size unit of the angle from the radian unit specified in (s) to the degree unit (DEG. unit), and store it in the device number
specified in (d).
-[DDEG (s) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Data type
Parameter Content Range Data type
(label)
The radian angle that converts the degree unit or the Single precision
(s) 0, 2 -126 ≤|(s)|< 2 128 ANYREAL_32
device start number that stores the radian angle real number
The device start number that stores the value converted Single precision
(d) -π/2 to π/2 ANYREAL_32
in degrees real number
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ● ●
DDEG
Parameter 2 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
The angle size unit is converted from the radian unit specified in (s) to the degree unit (DEG. unit), and then stored in the device
number specified in (d).

The conversion from degree unit to radian unit is performed as follows.

Radian unit = degree unit * 180/π
• The related devices are as follows.
Content
Devices Name
Condition Operation
The operation result of is zero
SM153 Zero The zero flag (SM153) turns ON.
(when the mantissa part is zero)
The value of (d) becomes the maximum value of 32-bit real
SM151 Carry The absolute value of the operation result>2128
numbers (2128 ), and the carry flag (SM151) turns on.
Error code
Error code Content

4085H The write address in (s) exceeds the device range

4086H The write address in (d) exceeds the device range
4084H When the content of the device specified by (s) is an irregular number, a non-number and ±∞

Example

The result is 194.8057

271 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DRAD/Single precision real number conversion angle → radian conversion
DRAD(P)
The angle size unit is converted from the degree unit (DEG. unit) specified in (s) to the radian unit and stored in the device number
specified in (d).
-[DRAD (s) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
The radian angle that converts the degree unit Single precision
(s) 0, 2-126 ≤|(s)|< 2128 ANYREAL_32
or the device start number that stores the angle real number
The device start number that stores the value Single precision
(d) - ANYREAL_32
converted in degrees real number
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ● ●
DRAD
Parameter 2 ●●●● ● ● ● ●
Features
The angle size unit is converted from the degree unit (DEG. unit) specified in (s) to the radian unit and stored in the device number
specified in (d).

Degree unit → radian unit

The conversion is performed as follows.
Radian unit = degree unit*π/180
• The related devices are as follows.
Content
Devices Name
Condition Operation
SM153 Zero The operation result is zero The zero flag (SM153) turns ON.
The value of (d) becomes the minimum value of a 32-bit
SM152 Borrow The absolute value of operation result <2-126
real number (2-126), and the borrow flag (SM152) turns on.
Error code
Error code Content
4085H The write address in (s) exceeds the device range
4086H The write address in (d) exceeds the device range

4084H When the content of the device specified by (s) is an irregular number, a non-number and ±∞

Example

The result is 1.047197

272 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DEADD/Single precision real number addition operation
DEADD(P)
Add the binary floating point data specified in (s1) and the binary floating point data specified in (s2), and store the result in the
device specified in (d).
-[DEADD (s1 ) (s2) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
The added data or the device start
(s1) 0, 2-126 ≤|(s)|< 2 128 Single precision real number ANYREAL_32
number that stores the added data
Addition data or the device start
(s2) 0, 2-126 ≤|(s)|< 2128 Single precision real number ANYREAL_32
number that stores the addition data
the device start number that stores the
(d) - Single precision real number ANYREAL_32
operation result
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●●● ● ● ● ●●● ● ●
DEADD Parameter 2 ●●●● ● ● ● ●●● ● ●
Parameter 3 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
Add the binary floating point data specified in (s1) and the binary floating point data specified in (s2), and store the result of the
addition in the device specified in (d).

When constants (K, H) to (s1), (s2) are specified, the value is automatically converted to a binary floating point data.

• The related devices are as follows.

Content
Devices Name
Condition Operation
SM153 Zero The operation result is zero The zero flag (SM153) turns ON.
The absolute value of operation result The value of (d) becomes the minimum value of a 32-bit real
SM152 Borrow
<2-126 number (2-126), and the borrow flag (SM152) turns on.
The value of (d) becomes the maximum value of 32-bit real
SM151 Carry The absolute value of operation result> 2128
numbers (2128), and the carry flag (SM151) turns on.
Error code
Error code Content

4085H The write address in (s1) and (s2) exceed the device range
4086H The write address in (d) exceeds the device range
4084H When the content of the device specified by (s1) and (s2) is an irregular number, a non-number and ±∞

273 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Example

The result is 1.2 + 63.2 = 64.4

274 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DESUB/Single precision real number subtraction operation
DESUB(P)
Subtract the binary floating point data specified in (s1) and the binary floating point data specified in (s2), and store the result in the
device specified in (d).
-[DESUB (s1) (s2) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Data type
Parameter Content Range Data type
(label)
The subtracted data or the device start
(s1) 0, 2 -126 ≤|(s)|< 2 128 Single precision real number ANYREAL_32
number that stores the subtracted data
subtract data or the device start number
(s2) 0, 2 -126 ≤|(s)|< 2 128 Single precision real number ANYREAL_32
that stores the subtracted data
the device start number that stores the
(d) - Single precision real number ANYREAL_32
operation result
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●●● ● ● ● ●●● ● ●
DESUB Parameter 2 ●●●● ● ● ● ●●● ● ●
Parameter 3 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
• Subtract the binary floating point data specified in (s1) and the binary floating point data specified in (s2), and store the subtraction
result in the device specified in (d).

When constants (K, H) to (s1), (s2) are specified, the value is automatically converted to a binary floating point data.

• The related devices are as follows.

Content
Devices Name
Condition Operation
SM153 Zero The operation result is zero The zero flag (SM153) turns ON.
The value of (d) becomes the minimum value of a 32-bit real
SM152 Borrow The absolute value of operation result <2-126
number (2-126), and the borrow flag (SM152) turns on.
The value of (d) becomes the maximum value of 32-bit real
SM151 Carry The absolute value of operation result> 2128
numbers (2128), and the carry flag (SM151) turns on.
Error code
Error code Content

4085H The write address in (s1) and (s2) exceeds the device range
4086H The write address in (d) exceeds the device range
4084H When the content of the device specified by (s1) and (s2) is an irregular number, a non-number and ±∞

275 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Example

The calculation result is 1.2-63.2 = -62

276 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DEMUL/Single precision real number multiplication operation
DEMUL(P)
Multiply the binary floating point data specified in (s1) and the binary floating point data specified in (s2), and store the result in the
device specified in (d).
-[DEMUL (s1) (s2) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Data type
Parameter Content Range Data type
(label)
The multiplication data or the device start number that Single precision
(s1) 0, 2-126 ≤|(s)|< 2128 ANYREAL_32
stores the multiplication data real number
Multiplication operation data or the device start Single precision
(s2) 0, 2-126 ≤|(s)|< 2 128 ANYREAL_32
number that stores the multiplication data real number
Single precision
(d) the device start number that stores the operation result - ANYREAL_32
real number
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●●● ● ● ● ●●● ● ●
DEMUL Parameter 2 ●●●● ● ● ● ●●● ● ●
Parameter 3 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
Multiply the binary floating point data specified in (s1) and the binary floating point data specified in (s2), and store the
multiplication result in the device specified in (d).

When constants (K, H) to (s1), (s2) are specified, the value is automatically converted to a binary floating point data.

• The related devices are as follows.

Content
Devices Name
Condition Operation
SM153 Zero The operation result is zero The zero flag (SM153) turns ON.
The value of (d) becomes the minimum value of a 32-bit real
SM152 Borrow The absolute value of operation result <2-126
number (2-126), and the borrow flag (SM152) turns on.
The value of (d) becomes the maximum value of 32-bit real
SM151 Carry The absolute value of operation result> 2128
numbers (2128), and the carry flag (SM151) turns on.
Error code
Error code Content

4085H The write address in (s1) and (s2) exceeds the device range
4086H The write address in (d) exceeds the device range
4084H When the content of the device specified by (s1) and (s2) is an irregular number, a non-number and ±∞

277 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Example

The calculated result: 1.2*63.2 = 75.84

278 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DEDIV/Single precision real number division operation
DEDIV(P)
Divide the binary floating point data specified in (s1) and the binary floating point data specified in (s2), and store the result in the
device specified in (d).
-[DEDIV (s1) (s2) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
The divided data or the device start number Single precision
(s1) 0, 2 -126 ≤|(s)|< 2 128 ANYREAL_32
that stores the devided data real number
Division operation data or the device start Single precision
(s2) 0, 2 -126 ≤|(s)|< 2 128 ANYREAL_32
number that stores the division operation data real number
the device start number that stores the Single precision
(d) - ANYREAL_32
operation result real number
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●●● ● ● ● ●●● ● ●
DEDIV Parameter 2 ●●●● ● ● ● ●●● ● ●
Parameter 3 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
Divide the binary floating point data specified in (s1) and the binary floating point data specified in (s2), and store the result of the
division in the device specified in (d).

When constants (K, H) to (s1), (s2) are specified, the value is automatically converted to a binary floating point data.

• The related devices are as follows.

Content
Devices Name
Condition Operating
SM153 Zero The operation result is zero The zero flag (SM153) turns ON.
The value of (d) becomes the minimum value of a 32-bit real
SM152 Borrow The absolute value of operation result <2-126
number (2-126), and the borrow flag (SM152) turns on.
The value of (d) becomes the maximum value of 32-bit real
SM151 Carry The absolute value of operation result> 2128
numbers (2128), and the carry flag (SM151) turns on.
Error code
Error code Content

4085H The write address in (s1) and (s2) exceeds the device range
4086H The write address in (d) exceeds the device range

279 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
4084H When the content of the device specified by (s1) and (s2) is an irregular number, a non-number and ±∞

4080H (s2) value is 0

Example

Get the calculation result: 63.2 / 1.2 = 52.66666667

280 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DEMOD/Single precision real number remainder operation
DEMOD(P)
Perform division operation on the single-precision real number specified in (s1) and the single-precision real number specified in (s2),
and store the remainder operation result in the device specified in (d).
PLC Editor2 version that supports this instruction: 2.3.1 and above
-[DEMOD (s1) (s2) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
The divided data or the device start number Single precision
(s1) 0, 2 -126 ≤|(s)|< 2 128 ANYREAL_32
that stores the devided data real number
Remainder operation data or the device start
Single precision
(s2) number that stores the remainder operation 0, 2 -126 ≤|(s)|< 2 128 ANYREAL_32
real number
data
The start number of the device that stores the Single precision
(d) - ANYREAL_32
result of the remainder operation real number
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●● ● ● ●
DEMOD Parameter 2 ●● ● ● ●
Parameter 3 ●● ● ●
Features
Perform division operation on the single-precision real number specified in (s1) and the single-precision real number specified in (s2),
and store the remainder operation result in the device specified in (d).

Error code
Error code Content

4080H The input divisor in (s2) is 0

4081H Computational data overflow in (d)
4084H When the content of the device specified by (s1) and (s2) is an irregular number, a non-number and ±∞
4085H The write address in (s1) and (s2) exceeds the device range
4086H The write address in (d) exceeds the device range
Example

M21 is set to ON, resulting in the calculation: 10 % 3 = 1.000000E+00

281 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DEMOV/Single precision real data transmission
DEMOV(P)
Transfer the binary floating point data data stored in the device specified in (s) to the device specified in (d).
-[DEMOV (s) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
The transmitted data or the device that Single precision real
(s) 0, 2 -126 ≤|(s)|< 2 128 ANYREAL_32
stores the transmitted data number
The device number that stores the Single precision real
(d) - ANYREAL_32
transmit destination data number
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ● ●
DEMOV
Parameter 2 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
Transfer the binary floating point data data stored in the device specified in (s) to the device specified in (d).

Error code
Error code Content
4085H (s) read address exceeds the device range
4086H (d) write address exceeds the device range
Example

Assign 3.265 to R10

282 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DEBCD/Binary floating point → decimal floating point conversion
DEBCD(P)
After converting the binary floating point specified in (s) into a decimal floating point, it is stored in the device specified in (d).
-[DEBCD (s) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
The device number that stores the
(s) 0, 2 -126 ≤|(s)|< 2 128 Single precision real number ANYREAL_32
binary floating point data
The device number that stores the
(d) - Real number ANY32
converted decimal floating point data
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ● ●
DEBCD
Parameter 2 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
After converting the binary floating point specified in (s) into a decimal floating point, it is stored in the device specified in (d).

✎Note
All floating-point operations are performed in binary floating-point. However, the binary floating point is a difficult-to-understand
value (special monitoring method), so by converting it into a decimal floating point operation, it is convenient for peripheral
equipment to monitor and so on.
Error code
Error code Content

4085H The write address in (s) exceeds the device range

4086H The write address in (d) exceeds the device range
4084H When the content of the device specified by (s) is an irregular number, a non-number and ±∞

Example

Get the result: 5600 ×10 -5

283 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DEBIN/Decimal floating point → binary floating point conversion
DEBIN(P)
Convert the decimal floating point specified in (s) to binary floating point and store it in the device specified in (d).
-[DEBIN (s) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s) The device number that stores the decimal floating point data - Real ANY32
The device number that stores the converted binary floating Single precision
(d) - ANYREAL_32
point data real number
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
DEBIN
Parameter 2 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
Convert the decimal floating point specified in (s) to binary floating point and store it in the device specified in (d).

• The related devices are as follows.

Content
Devices Name
Condition Operation
SM153 Zero The operation result is zero The zero flag (SM153) turns ON.
The value of (d) becomes the minimum value of a 32-bit real
SM152 Borrow The absolute value of operation result <2-126
number (2-126), and the borrow flag (SM152) turns on.
The value of (d) becomes the maximum value of 32-bit real
SM151 Carry The absolute value of operation result> 2128
numbers (2128), and the carry flag (SM151) turns on.
Error code
Error code Content
4085H (s) read address exceeds the device range
4086H (d) write address exceeds the device range
Example

The result after conversion:

284 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DENEG/Single precision real number sign inversion
DENEG(P)
After inverting the sign of the single precision real number of the device specified in (d), it is stored in the device specified in (d).
-[DEBEG (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
The device start number that stores the
(d) - Single precision real number ANYREAL_32
sign-inverted binary floating point data
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
DENEG Parameter 1 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
The sign of the binary floating point data of the device specified in (d) is inverted and stored in the device specified in (d).

Used when inverting positive and negative signs.

Error code
Error code Content
4086H The write address in (d) exceeds the device range
Example

It becomes -1.43 after conversion

285 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DECMP/Single precision real number comparison
DECMP(P)
Compare two data (binary floating point data), and output their large, small, and consistent results to the bit device (3 points).
-[DECMP (s1) (s2) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
Comparison data or the device number that stores Single precision
(s1) 0, 2 -126 ≤|(s)|< 2 128 ANYREAL_32
the comparison data real number
Comparison data or the device number that stores Single precision
(s2) 0, 2 -126 ≤|(s)|< 2 128 ANYREAL_32
the comparison data real number
The start bit device number that outputs the
(d) - Bit ANYBIT_ARRAY
comparison result (occupies 3 points)
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●●● ● ● ● ●●● ● ●
DECMP Parameter 2 ●●●● ● ● ● ●●● ● ●
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
Compare the comparison value (s1) and the comparison source (s2) as a floating point comparison. According to the result of small,
consistent, and large, one of (d), (d)+1, (d)+2 turns ON.

(1) : Even if the command input is turned OFF and the DECMP command is not executed, (d) to (d)+2 will keep the state before X0 is
turned OFF.
When the constant (K, H) to the device specified in (s1), (s2) is specified, the value BIN→binary floating point data conversion is
processed automatically
✎Note: The device specified in (d) occupies 3 points [(d), (d)+1, (d)+2]. Please be careful not to overlap with devices used for other
purposes.
Error code
Error code Content
4085H The write address in (s1) or (s2) exceeds the device range
4086H The write address in (d) exceeds the device range
4084H When the content of the device specified by (s) or (s2) is an irregular number, a non-number and ±∞

286 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Example

Since the floating point number in R30 is greater than the floating point number in D30, M12 turns ON.

DEZCP/Binary floating point bandwidth comparison

DEZCP(P)
Compare the comparison range and data (binary floating point) of high and low 2 points, and output the result of its large, small, and
bandwidth to the bit device (3 points).
-[DEZCP (s1) (s2) (s3) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Data type
Parameter Content Range Data type
(label)
Comparison data or the device number
(s1) 0, 2 -126 ≤|(s)|< 2 128 Single precision real number ANYREAL_32
that stores the comparison data
Comparison data or the device number
(s2) 0, 2 -126 ≤|(s)|< 2 128 Single precision real number ANYREAL_32
that stores the comparison data
Comparison data or the device number
(s3) 0, 2 -126 ≤|(s)|< 2 128 Single precision real number ANYREAL_32
that stores the comparison data
The start bit device number that outputs
(d) - Bit ANYBIT_ARRAY
the comparison result (occupies 3 points)
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●●● ● ● ● ●●● ● ●
Parameter 2 ●●●● ● ● ● ●●● ● ●
DEZCP
Parameter 3 ●●●● ● ● ● ●●● ● ●
Parameter 4 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
Compare the comparison value (s1), (s2) and the comparison source (s3) as a floating point comparison, according to its small, range,
and large result, one of (d), (d)+1, (d)+2 The bit turns ON.

287 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

(1): Even if the instruction input is turned OFF and DEZCP instruction is not executed, (d) to (d)+2 will keep the state before X0 is
turned OFF.
When the constant (K, H) to the device specified in (s1), (s2), (s3) is specified, the value is automatically converted from BIN to binary
floating point for processing.
✎Note
The device specified in (d) occupies 3 points [(d), (d)+1, (d)+2]. Please be careful not to overlap with devices used for other purposes.
Please set the size relationship of the comparison data as [(s1)+1,(s1)]≤[(s2)+1,(s2)]. In the case of [(s1)+1,(s1)]>[(s2)+1,(s2)], it is
regarded as the value of [(s2)+1,(s2)] and [(s1)+1, (s1)] Same for comparison.
Error code
Error code Content

4085H The write address in (s1), (s2) and (s3) exceeds the device range
4086H The write address in (d) exceeds the device range
4084H When the content of the device specified by (s1), (s2) and (s3) is an irregular number, a non-number and ±∞

Example

Since 2.45 is greater than 1.456 and 2.45 is less than 2356, M41 is set to ON

288 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DESQR/Single precision real square root
DESQR(P)
After the square root of the value specified in (s) is calculated, the calculation result is stored in the device specified in (d).
-[DESQR (s) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
The data for square root operation or the device Single precision
(s) 0, 2 -126 ≤|(s)|< 2 128 ANYREAL_32
start number that stores the data real number
Single precision
(d) The device start number stores operation result - ANYREAL_32
real number
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●●● ● ● ● ●●● ● ●
DESQR
Parameter 2 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
• After the square root of the value specified in (s) is calculated, the calculation result is stored in the device number specified in (d).

The value specified in (s) can only be set to a positive number. (Cannot perform operations with negative numbers.)
• The related devices are as follows.
Content
Devices Name
Condition Operation
SM153 Zero The operation result is zero The zero flag (SM153) turns ON.
Error code
Error code Content

4085H The write address in (s) exceeds the device range

4086H The write address in (d) exceeds the device range
4084H When the content of the device specified by (s) is an irregular number, a non-number and ±∞
Example

Get the result: D0 is a floating point number 2

289 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DESTR/Single precision real number → string conversion
DESTR(P)
Convert the binary floating point data data stored in the device specified in (s1) into a character string according to the display
specification stored after the device number specified in (s2), and store it in the device number specified in (d) or later .
-[DESTR (s1) (s2) (d)]
Content, range and data type

Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)

Converted single precision real number data or Single precision

(s1) 0, 2 -126 ≤|(s)|< 2 128 ANYREAL_32
the device start number that stores the data real number
Display the specified device start number that ANY16_ARRAY
(s2) stores the converted value. The device specified - Signed BIN 16 bit (number of
in (s1) is used as the start, and (s2)+2 is used elements: 3)
Start number of the device storing the
(d) - String ANYSTRING_SINGLE
converted character string
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ● ●
DESTR Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
Features
Convert the binary floating point data data stored in the device specified in (s1) into a character string according to the display
specification stored after the device number specified in (s2), and store it in the device number specified in (d) after. You can also
directly specify the real number to (s1).
• The converted data differs according to the display specification specified in (s2).
Unit Features
(s2) 0: Decimal point form 1: Exponential form
(s2)+1 All digits (total number of strings). Range: 2 to 24
(s2)+2 The number of decimal digits. Range: 0 to 7
The range in the above table will change the value range according to the conversion form and other information used
Decimal form
If 0 is specified in (s2), it will be in decimal form.

290 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Corresponding digit range in decimal form:
Unit Features
(s2) 0: Decimal point form
All digits (total number of strings). Range: 2 to 24.
(s2)+1
When (s2)+2 is not 0: digits ≥ (number of decimal places + 3).
The number of decimal places. Range 0 to 7,
(s2)+2
When (s2)+2 is not 0: digits ≥ (number of decimal places + 3).
Example: The total number of digits is 8, the number of decimal places is 3, and when -1.235 is specified, (d) will be stored in the
following way.
When displaying character strings, display character strings in normal order from left to right for convenience.

Converted string

The corresponding ASCII code is:

The first one is the sign bit. In the sign, when binary floating point data data is positive, 20H (blank) is stored, and when it is negative,
2DH(-) is stored.
If the actual number of digits is less than all digits during conversion, 20H (blank) will be added between the sign and the first
number
If the decimal part of the binary floating point data data cannot be accommodated in the decimal part, the lower decimal part will be
rounded off.
2. Example: The total number of digits is 8, the number of decimal places is 2, and when -1.234 is specified, (d) will be stored in the
following way.

The converted string:

The corresponding ASCII code is:

291 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
In the above example: the low byte of D20 stores the negative sign 2DH(-). Then due to insufficient number of digits, the high byte of
D20 and D21 are both 20H (blank). Finally, D22 to D23 store numeric characters 1.23
Exponential form
When 1 is specified in (s2), it will be in exponential format.

The corresponding digit range in exponential form:

Unit Features
(s2) 1: Exponential form
All digits (total number of strings). Range: 2 to 24.
(s2)+1
(s2)+2 when non-zero: digits ≥ (number of decimal places + 7)
The number of decimal places. Range 0 to 7
(s2)+2
(s2)+2 when non-zero: digits ≥ (number of decimal places + 7)
For example 3, all digits are 12, decimal place is 4, and 1234.5 is specified, (d) and later will be stored as follows.

The converted string:

The corresponding ASCII code is:

In the sign of the integer part, when the binary floating point data data is positive, 20H (blank) is stored, and when it is negative,

292 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
2DH(-) is stored.
The integer part is fixed to 1 digit. 20H (blank) is stored between the integer part and the Sign.
If the decimal part of the binary floating point data data cannot be accommodated in the decimal part, the lower decimal part will be
rounded off.
When the number of decimal places is set to other than 0, 2EH(.) is automatically stored in the number of specified decimal places+1
digit. When the decimal place is 0, 2EH(.) is not stored.
In the sign of the exponent, 2BH(+) is stored when the exponent is positive, and 2DH(-) is stored when it is negative.
The exponent is fixed to 2 digits. When the exponent part is a 1-digit number, 30H(0) is stored between the signs of the exponent
part.
00H is automatically stored at the end of the converted character string.
Example 4: All digits are 12, decimal places are 3, and -16346 is specified, (d) will be stored in the following way.

The converted string:

The corresponding ASCII code is:

As in the above example:

The low byte of D20 stores the negative sign 2DH(-).
Then due to insufficient number of digits, the high byte of D20 and the low bit of D21 are both 20H (blank).
16346 becomes the string 1.635E+04, in which the last digit "6" of 16346 is rounded.
The exponent part is 34H(4) with only one bit, then add 30H(0) between the Signs 2DH(-) and 34H(4).
Finally D26 automatically stores 00H
Example 5: All digits are 12, and the number of decimal places is 0. If -16346 is specified, (d) will be stored as follows.

The converted string:

293 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
The corresponding ASCII code is:

This example mainly shows that if the decimal place is set to 0, the decimal point 2EH(.) will be automatically omitted.
✎Note
When the binary floating point data is converted, the more digits, the lower the accuracy of the digits, the worse the accuracy of the
digits, and the conversion value may be inaccurate due to the progress.
Error code
Error code Content
4085H The read address of (s1) and (s2) exceeds the device range
4086H The write address of (d) exceeds the device range

When the content of the specified device (s1) and (s2) is an irregular number, a non-number, or ±∞
When the format specified in (s2) is other than 0 or 1

When all the digits specified in (s1) +1 exceeds the value of 24

When the number of decimal places specified in (s2) +2 exceeds the range of 0 to 7

4084H In the decimal form, when (s2) is 0.

1 When the number of decimal places is 0: [(s2)+1]<2
2 When the number of decimal places is other than 0: [(s2)+1]<(number of decimal places+3)
In the exponential form, when (s2) is 0.
1 When the number of decimal places is 0: [(s2)+1]<6
2 When the number of decimal places is other than 0: [(s2)+1]<(number of decimal places+7)

294 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DEVAL/String → single precision real number conversion
DEVAL(P)
The character string stored in the device number specified in (s) and later is converted to a binary floating point data, and then stored
in the device specified in (d).
-[DEVAL (s) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
String data for single precision real number or the
(s) - String ANYSTRING_SINGLE
device start number that stores the string data
The device start number that stores the converted
(d) - Single precision real number ANYREAL_32
single precision real number
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
DEVAL
Parameter 2 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
The character string stored in the device number specified in (s) and later is converted to a binary floating point data, and then stored
in the device specified in (d).
Whether the specified string is in decimal form or exponential form, it can be converted to a binary floating point data.
Up to 24 characters can be set for the string. 20H (blank) and 30H (0) in the character string are also counted as 1 character.

(1) Decimal form

1) When the character string specified in (s) is in decimal format, the following is the case.

(1): single-precision real number

295 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
2) In the character string specified in (s), for the character string to be converted to a binary floating point data, the 6 digits after
the sign, decimal point, and exponent are valid, and the 7th digit and later will be discarded during conversion.

(1): discarded
(2): single-precision real number

When the sign is specified as 2BH(+) or omitted in the decimal point format, it will be converted as a positive value. In addition, when
the sign is specified as 2DH(-), it will be converted as a negative value.
3) If there are 20H (blank) or 30H (0) in the character string specified in (s) other than the first 0, 20H and 30H will be ignored
during conversion.

(1): ignore
(2): single-precision real number

(2) In the case of exponential form

1) When the character string specified in (s) is in exponential form, it is executed as follows.

(1): single-precision real number

296 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Among the character strings specified in (s), for the character string to be converted to a binary floating point data, the 6 digits after
the sign, decimal point, and exponent are valid, and the 7th digit and later will be discarded during conversion.

(1): discarded
(2): single-precision real number

If the sign of the exponent part is specified as 2BH(+) or omitted in the exponential form, it will be converted as a positive value.
When the sign of the exponent is specified as 2DH(-), it will be converted as a negative value.
2) If there is 20H (blank) or 30H (0) in the character string specified in (s) other than the first 0, 20H and 30H will be ignored during
conversion.
In the exponential character string, if 30H (0) is stored between "E" and the value, 30H will be ignored during conversion.

(1): Ignore.
(2): Single precision real number.

The related devices are shown below.

Content
Devices Name
Condition Operating
SM153 Zero The operation result is zero The zero flag (SM153) turns ON.
The value of (d) becomes the minimum value of a 32-bit real
SM152 Borrow The absolute value of operation result <2-126
number (2-126 ), and the borrow flag (SM152) turns on.
The value of (d) becomes the maximum value of 32-bit real
SM151 Carry The absolute value of operation result> 2128
numbers (2128 ), and the carry flag (SM151) turns on.
Error code
Error code Content
4085H The read address of (s) exceeds the device range
4086H The write address of (d) exceeds the device range
408AH The string is not read by (s), or the string length exceeds 24

408BH When (s) reading a character string, the maximum range of the device is read, but 00H is not found and the end
When there are characters other than 2BH (+), 2DH (-), 20H (space), 2EH (.), 45H (E), 65H(e), and 30 H(0) to 39H
4084H (9) in the string specified in (s)
When there are two or more 2EH(.) characters in the character string specified in (s).

297 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
When there are characters other than 45H(E), 2BH(+), 2DH(-), and 30 H(0) to 39H (9) in the exponent part
specified in (s), or if there are multiple exponent parts, or exponent In some cases, 2BH(+) or 2DH(-) occurred
twice or more.
2BH(+) or 2DH(-) appears twice or more before the first digit of the string specified in (s).
Example

The stored character string of D0 is: 5.2467E+12

The resulting floating point number is: 5.2467E+12

298 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DEXP/Single precision real number exponential operation
DEXP(P)
After performing the exponential calculation of the value specified in (s), the calculation result is stored in the device specified in (d).
-[DEXP (s) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
Data for exponential calculation or the device Single precision
(s) 0, 2 -126 ≤|(s)|< 2 128 ANYREAL_32
start number that stores the data real number
The device start number that stores the Single precision
(d) - ANYREAL_32
operation result real number
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ● ●
DEXP
Parameter 2 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
After performing the exponential calculation of the value specified in (s), the calculation result is stored in the device number
specified in (d).

In exponential calculation, the base (e) is calculated as "2.71828".

The related devices are shown below.
Content
Devices Name
Condition Operating
SM153 Zero The operation result is zero The zero flag (SM153) turns ON.
The value of (d) becomes the minimum value of a 32-bit
SM152 Borrow The absolute value of operation result <2-126
real number (2-126 ), and the borrow flag (SM152) turns on.
The value of (d) becomes the maximum value of 32-bit real
SM151 Carry The absolute value of operation result> 2128
numbers (2128 ), and the carry flag (SM151) turns on.
Error code
Error code Content

4085H The write address in (s) exceeds the device range

4086H The write address in (d) exceeds the device range
4084H When the content of the device specified by (s) is an irregular number, a non-number and ±∞

Example

Calculate the result:

299 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
INT/Single precision real number → signed BIN 16-bit data
INT(P)
Convert the specified single precision real number into signed BIN 16-bit data.
-[INT (s) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
Single precision real number or the start device Single precision
(s) -32768 to 32767 ANYREAL_32
storing single precision real number real number
(d) Signed device for storing BIN data - BIN16 bit ANY16_S
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
INT
Parameter 2 ●●●● ● ● ●
Features
• Convert the single precision real number specified in (s) into signed BIN 16-bit data and store it in the device specified in (d).
• The converted data will be rounded to the first digit below the decimal point of the single precision real number specified in (s).
• When setting the input value with the engineering tool, rounding errors may occur.
• The related devices are as follows.
Content
Devices Name
Condition Operation
SM153 Zero The operation result is zero The zero flag (SM153) turns ON.
Decimal places are rounded off when
SM152 Borrow During conversion ((s) – (d))> (2 -126) ,borrow (SM152) turns ON
converting
The value of (s) is out of the range -32768 to 32767 or the value of
SM151 Carry Conversion result is out of range (s) is less than the minimum value of 32-bit real numbers (2 -126),
and the carry flag (SM151) turns on.
Error code
Error code Content

4085H The write address in (s) exceeds the device range

4086H The write address in (d) exceeds the device range
4084H When the content of the device specified by (s) is an irregular number, a non-number and ±∞

Get the conversion result:

And the borrow means turn ON

300 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DINT/Single precision real number→ signed BIN 32-bit data
DINT(P)
Convert the specified single precision real number into signed BIN 32-bit data.
-[DINT (s) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Data type
Parameter Content Range Data type
(label)
Single precision real number or the start Single precision
(s) -2147483648 to 2147483647 ANYREAL_32
device storing single precision real number real number
(d) The start device storing BIN data - Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32_S
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
DINT
Parameter 2 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
• Convert the binary floating point data specified in (s) into signed BIN 32-bit data and store it in the device specified in (d).
• The converted data will be rounded to the first digit below the decimal point of the binary floating point data specified in (s).
• When setting the input value with the engineering tool, rounding errors may occur.
• The related devices are as follows.
Content
Devices Name
Condition Operating
SM153 Zero The operation result is zero The zero flag (SM153) turns ON.
The value of (d) becomes the minimum value of a 32-bit
SM152 Borrow The absolute value of operation result <2-126
real number (2-126 ), and the borrow flag (SM152) turns on.
The value of (d) becomes the maximum value of 32-bit real
SM151 Carry The absolute value of operation result> 2128
numbers (2128 ), and the carry flag (SM151) turns on.
Error code
Error code Content

4085H The write address in (s) exceeds the device range

4086H The write address in (d) exceeds the device range
4084H When the content of the device specified by (s) is an irregular number, a non-number and ±∞

Example

Get the conversion result:

And the borrow means turn ON

301 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DLOG10/Single precision real number common logarithmic operation
DLOG10(P)
Calculate the common logarithm (base 10 logarithm) of the value specified in (s), and store the result of the operation in the device
specified in (d).
-[DLOG10 (s) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
Data for common logarithmic operations or the Single precision
(s) 0, 2-126 ≤|(s)|< 2128 ANYREAL_32
device start number storing the data real number
Single precision
(d) The device start number storing operation result - ANYREAL_32
real number
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ● ●
DLOG10
Parameter 2 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
Calculate the common logarithm (base 10 logarithm) of the value specified in (s), and store the result of the calculation in the device
number specified in (d).

The value specified in (s) can only be set to a positive number. (Cannot perform operations with negative numbers.)
• The related devices are as follows.
Content
Devices Name
Condition Operating
SM153 Zero The operation result is zero The zero flag (SM153) turns ON.
The value of (d) becomes the minimum value of a 32-bit
SM152 Borrow The absolute value of operation result <2-126
real number (2-126 ), and the borrow flag (SM152) turns on.
The value of (d) becomes the maximum value of 32-bit real
SM151 Carry The absolute value of operation result> 2128
numbers (2128 ), and the carry flag (SM151) turns on.
Error code
Error code Content

4085H The write address in (s) exceeds the device range

4086H The write address in (d) exceeds the device range
4084H When the content of the device specified by (s) is an irregular number, a non-number and ±∞

Example

Get calculation results

302 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DLOGE/Single precision real number natural logarithm operation
DLOGE(P)
After calculating the logarithm when the natural logarithm e of the value specified in (s) is the base, store the calculation result in the
device specified in (d).
-[DLOGE (s) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
Data for logarithm operation or the device start Single precision
(s) 0, 2-126 ≤|(s)|< 2128 ANYREAL_32
number storing the data real number
Single precision
(d) the device start number storing operation result - ANYREAL_32
real number
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ● ●
DLOGE
Parameter 2 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
• After calculating the logarithm when the natural logarithm e of the value specified in (s) is the base, store the result of the
calculation in the device number specified in (d).

• The value specified in (s) can only be set to a positive number. (Cannot perform operations with negative numbers.)
• The related devices are as follows.
Content
Devices Name
Condition Operating
SM153 Zero The operation result is zero The zero flag (SM153) turns ON.
The value of (d) becomes the minimum value of a 32-bit real
SM152 Borrow The absolute value of operation result <2-126
number (2-126 ), and the borrow flag (SM152) turns on.
The value of (d) becomes the maximum value of 32-bit real
SM151 Carry The absolute value of operation result> 2128
numbers (2128 ), and the carry flag (SM151) turns on.
Error code
Error code Content

4085H The write address in (s) exceeds the device range

4086H The write address in (d) exceeds the device range
4084H When the content of the device specified by (s) is an irregular number, a non-number and ±∞

Example

The result is as below:

303 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
7.11 Contact comparison instruction
Signed 16-bit contact comparison instruction
LD , AND , OR 
The BIN 16-bit data of the device specified in (s1) and the BIN 16-bit data of the device specified in (s2) are compared by normal open
contact processing.
LD: Normally open contact comparison instruction
AND: Normally open contact series connection comparison instruction
OR: Normally open contact parallel connection comparison instruction
Ladder diagram

(You can enter "=", "<>", ">", "<", ">=", "<=" in "")
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s1) Comparison data or device storing comparison data -32768 to 32767 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16_S
(s2) Comparison data or device storing comparison data -32768 to 32767 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16_S
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
LD= s1, s2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ●
LD> s1, s2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ●
LD< s1, s2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ●
LD>= s1, s2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ●
LD<= s1, s2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ●
LD<> s1, s2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ●
AND= s1, s2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ●
AND> s1, s2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ●
AND< s1, s2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ●
AND>= s1, s2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ●
AND<= s1, s2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ●
AND<> s1, s2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ●
OR= s1, s2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ●
OR> s1, s2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ●
OR< s1, s2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ●
OR>= s1, s2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ●
OR<= s1, s2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ●
OR<> s1, s2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ●
Features
The BIN 16-bit data of the device specified in (s1) and the BIN 16-bit data of the device specified in (s2) are compared by normal
open contact processing.
The comparison operation result of each instruction is shown below.

304 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Instruction Sign Condition Comparison operation result Instruction Sign Condition Comparison operation result
= (s1)=(s2) = (s1)≠(s2)
<> (s1)≠(s2) <> (s1)=(s2)
> (s1)>(s2) > (s1)≤(s2)
On state Non-conduction state
< (s1)<(s2) < (s1)≥(s2)
>= (s1)≥(s2) >= (s1)<(s2)
<= (s1)≤(s2) <= (s1)>(s2)
Error code
Error code Content
4085H (s) read address exceeds the device range
Example
(1) LD instruction:

When the current value of counter C10 is 200, Y10 is set

When the content of D200 is above -29, and X1 is ON, Y11 is set

(2) AND instruction

When X0 is ON, or when the current value of counter C10 is 200,

Y10 is set

When X1 is OFF, and the content of data counter D0 is not -10,

Y11 is set

(3) OR□ instruction:

When X1 is ON, or when the current value of counter C10 is 200,

Y0 is set

When X2 and M30 are ON, or the content of register D100 is

K10000 and above, M60 is set

305 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Signed 32-bit contact comparison instruction
LDD , ANDD , ORD 
The BIN 32-bit data of the device specified in (s1) and the BIN 32-bit data of the device specified in (s2) are compared by normal open
contact processing.
LDD: Normally open contact comparison command
ANDD: Normally open contact series link comparison instruction
ORD: Normally open contact parallel link comparison instruction
Ladder diagram

“=”, “<>”, “>”, “<”, “>=”, “<=” can be input in “”

Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
-2147483648 to
(s1) Comparison data or device storing comparison data Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32_S
2147483647
-2147483648 to
(s2) Comparison data or device storing comparison data Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32_S
2147483647
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
LDD= s1, s2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ●● ●
LDD> s1, s2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ●● ●
LDD< s1, s2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ●● ●
LDD>= s1, s2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ●● ●
LDD<= s1, s2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ●● ●
LDD<> s1, s2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ●● ●
ANDD= s1, s2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ●● ●
ANDD> s1, s2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ●● ●
ANDD< s1, s2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ●● ●
ANDD>= s1, s2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ●● ●
ANDD<= s1, s2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ●● ●
ANDD<> s1, s2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ●● ●
ORD= s1, s2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ●● ●
ORD> s1, s2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ●● ●
ORD< s1, s2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ●● ●
ORD>= s1, s2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ●● ●
ORD<= s1, s2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ●● ●
ORD<> s1, s2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ●● ●
Features
The BIN 32-bit data of the device specified in (s1) and the BIN 32-bit data of the device specified in (s2) are compared by normal open
contact processing.
The comparison operation result of each instruction is shown below.
306 WECON technology Co., Ltd.
 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Instruction Sign Condition Comparison operation result Instruction Sign Condition Comparison operation result
= (s1)=(s2) = (s1)≠(s2)
<> (s1)≠(s2) <> (s1)=(s2)
> (s1)>(s2) > (s1)≤(s2)
On state Non-conduction state
< (s1)＜(s2) < (s1)≥(s2)
>= (s1)≥(s2) >= (s1)＜(s2)
<= (s1)≤(s2) <= (s1)>(s2)
Error code
Error code Content
4085H (S) read address exceeds the device range
Example
(1) LDD instruction:

When the data of LC10 is 200000, Y10 is set, otherwise Y10 is reset.
When the 32-bit data composed of D201 and D200 exceeds -5000, and X1 is ON, Y11 is turned ON.

(2) ANDD instruction:

When X0 is ON and the value of LC10 is 200000, Y10 is set, otherwise it is reset.
When X1 is OFF and the 32-bit data composed of D1 and D0 is not equal to K-50000, Y11 is set.
(3) ORD instruction:

When X1 is ON, or the data of LC10 is equal to the data of LC10 is equal to 200000, Y0 is set.
When X2 and M30 are set, or the double word data composed of D101 and D100 is greater than or equal to 100000, M60 is set.

307 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Single precision real number contact comparison instruction
LDE , ANDE , ORE 
The single precision real number of the device specified in (s1) and the single precision real number of the device specified in (s2)
are compared by normal open contact processing.
LDE□: Normally open contact comparison command
ANDE□: Normally open contact series link comparison instruction
ORE□: Normally open contact parallel link comparison instruction
Ladder diagram

“=”, “<>”, “>”, “<”, “>=”, “<=” can be input in “”

Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
Comparison data or the device start
(s1) 0, 2-126 ≤|(s)|< 2128 Single precision real number ANYREAL_32
number storing the comparison data
Comparison data or the device start
(s2) 0, 2-126 ≤|(s)|< 2128 Single precision real number ANYREAL_32
number storing the comparison data
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
LDE= s1, s2 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
LDE> s1, s2 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
LDE< s1, s2 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
LDE>= s1, s2 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
LDE<= s1, s2 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
LDE<> s1, s2 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
ANDE= s1, s2 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
ANDE> s1, s2 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
ANDE< s1, s2 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
ANDE>= s1, s2 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
ANDE<= s1, s2 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
ANDE<> s1, s2 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
ORE= s1, s2 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
ORD> s1, s2 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
ORE< s1, s2 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
ORE>= s1, s2 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
ORE<= s1, s2 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
ORE<> s1, s2 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
The single precision real number of the device specified in (s1) and the single precision real number of the device specified in (s2) are
compared by normal open contact processing.
The comparison operation result of each instruction is shown below.
308 WECON technology Co., Ltd.
 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Instruction Sign Condition Comparison operation result Instruction Sign Condition Comparison operation result
E= (s1)=(s2) E= (s1)≠(s2)
E<> (s1)≠(s2) E<> (s1)=(s2)
E> (s1)>(s2) E> (s1)≤(s2)
On state Non-conduction state
E< (s1)＜(s2) E< (s1)≥(s2)
E>= (s1)≥(s2) E>= (s1)＜(s2)
E<= (s1)≤(s2) E<= (s1)>(s2)
Error code
Error code Content
4084H When the content of the specified device by (s1) and (s2) is an irregular number, a non-number, or ±∞
4085H The read address of (s1) and (s2exceeds the device range
Example
(1) LDE instruction:

When the real number input in D0 is equal to E1.23, Y10 is ON, otherwise Y10 is OFF.
When the real number in R0 is greater than or equal to the real number in LC0, Y11 is ON, otherwise it is OFF.
If the input in D0, R0, LC0 is not a real number, it will report H4084 error.
(2) ANDE instruction:

Only when M0 is ON and D2 real number is not equal to E1.23 and R2 real number is less than real number LC2 , Y12 is ON, otherwise
all are OFF.
(3) ORE instruction:

When the real number of R4 is less than or equal to the real number of R15, or the real number R6 is equal to the real number R20,
Y13 is ON, otherwise Y13 is OFF.

309 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
String comparison
LDS、ANDS、 ORS
Compare the string stored after the device number specified in (s1) with the string stored after the device number specified in (s2).
LDS: String comparison instruction
ANDS: String serial connection comparison instruction
ORS: String parallel connection comparison instruction
Ladder diagram

“=” and “<>” could be entered in “”

Content, range and data type

Parameter Content Range Date type Date type(label)

Connection data or the device start number storing the data or

(S1) - String ANYSTRING_SINGLE
the string specified directly
Connection data or the device start number storing the data or
(S1) - String ANYSTRING_SINGLE
the string specified directly
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
LDS= s1、s2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●
LDS<> s1、s2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●
ANDS= s1、s2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●
ANDS<> s1、s2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●
ORS= s1、s2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●
ORS<> s1、s2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●
Features
• Compare the string stored after the device number specified in (s1) with the string stored after the device number specified in (s2).
• The comparison operation result of each instruction is shown below.
Instruction sign Condition Comparison operation result Instruction sign Condition Comparison operation result
= (s1)＝(s2) = (s1)≠(s2)
On stat Non-conduction state
<> (s1)≠(s2) <> (s1)＝(s2)

310 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Error code
Error code Content
4085H The read address of (s1) or (s2) exceeds the device range
408AH The length of the read string of (s1) or (s2) exceeds, and the continuous length of the string exceeds 400 characters.

408BH When (s1) or (s2) reading the string, the maximum range of the device is read but 00H is not found as the end.
Example
(1) 1、LDS instruction

(2) ANDS instruction

(3) ORS instruction

311 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
7.12 Clock operation instruction
TADD/The addition of clock data
TADD(P)
Add the time data stored after the device number specified in (s1) and the time data stored after the device number specified in (s2),
and store the result of the addition operation after the device number specified in (d) .
-[TADD (s1) (s2) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
ANY16_ARRAY
(s1) The device start number that stores the added time data - Signed BIN 16 bit (number of elements:
3)
The device start number that stores the addition ANY16_ARRAY
(s2) - Signed BIN 16 bit
operation time (time) data (number of elements: 3)
The device start number that stores the time (time) data ANY16_ARRAY
(d) - Signed BIN 16 bit
of the addition operation result (number of elements: 3)
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●●● ● ● ●
TADD Parameter 2 ●●●● ● ● ●
Parameter 3 ●●●● ● ● ●
Features
Add the time data specified in (s1) and the time data specified in (s2), and store the result of the addition in the device number
specified in (d) or later.

Example
When 6:32:40 and 7:48:10 are added together

When the calculation result time exceeds 24 o'clock, the carry flag turns ON, and the value after 24 hours is subtracted becomes the
calculation result. For example, when 14:20:30 and 20:20:20 are added, the result is not 34:40:50, but 10:40:50.

When the calculation result is 0 (0 hour, 0 minute, 0 second), the zero flag turns on.
When 23:59:59 and 1 second are added, the result of the calculation is 0:00:00, and the carry flag and zero flag are turned on.
Related device are as follows:
Devices Name Content
SM151 Carry It is ON when the result of the TADD(P) instruction exceeds the maximum clock data value of 23:59:59

312 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
SM153 Zero It is ON when the result of the TADD(P) instruction is 0:00:00
✎Note
The devices specified in (s1), (s2), (d) occupy 3 points respectively. Be careful not to overlap with the device used for machine control.
When using the clock data time (hour, minute, second) of the built-in real-time clock of the CPU module, use the TRD(P) instruction
to read the value of the special register and assign the word device to each operand.
Error code
Error code Content
4085H When reading the specified device range exceeds the corresponding device range
4086H When writing the specified device range exceeds the corresponding device range
When the values specified in (s1) and (s2) are other than 0 to 23
4084H
When the values specified in (s1)+1, (s2)+1, (s1)+2 and (s2)+2 are other than 0 to 59
Example

Set D0 time to 16:30:00 and D10 time to 4:30:0

After the coil is turned on, the D20 time is 21:0:0

313 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
TSUB/The subtraction of clock data
TSUB(P)
Subtract the time data stored after the device number specified in (s1) and the time data stored after the device number specified in
(s2), and store the subtraction result in the device number specified in (d) or later .
-[TSUB (s1) (s2) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
The device start number that stores the subtracted ANY16_ARRAY
(s1) - Signed BIN 16 bit
time data (number of elements: 3)
The device start number that stores the subtraction ANY16_ARRAY
(s2) - Signed BIN 16 bit
operation time (time) data (number of elements: 3)
The device start number that stores the time (time) ANY16_ARRAY
(d) - Signed BIN 16 bit
data of the subtraction result (number of elements: 3)
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●●● ● ● ●
TSUB Parameter 2 ●●●● ● ● ●
Parameter 3 ●●●● ● ● ●
Features
Subtract the time data specified in (s1) and the time data specified in (s2), and store the subtraction result in the device number
specified in (d) or later.

Example
When subtracting 10:40:20 and 3:50:10

When the calculation result time is a negative number, the borrow flag turns on and the data +24 is the calculation result. For
example, in the case of subtracting 4:50:32 and 10:42:12, the result is not -6:8:20, but 18:8:20.

When the calculation result is 0 (0 hour, 0 minute, 0 second), the zero flag turns on.
Related device are as follows:
Devices Name Content
SM152 Borrow It is ON when the result of the TSUB(P) instruction is less than 0:00:00
SM153 Zero It is ON when the result of the TSUB(P) instruction is at the time of 0:00:00:00
✎Note
• The devices specified in (s1), (s2), and (d) occupy 3 points respectively. Be careful not to overlap with the device used for machine
control.
314 WECON technology Co., Ltd.
 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
• When using the clock data time (hour, minute, second) of the built-in real-time clock of the CPU module, use the TRD(P) instruction
to read the value of the special register and assign the word device to each operand.
Error code
Error code Content
4085H When reading the specified device range exceeds the corresponding device range
4086H When writing the specified device range exceeds the corresponding device range
When the values specified in (s1) and (s2) are other than 0 to 23
4084H
When the values specified in (s1)+1, (s2)+1, (s1)+2 and (s2)+2 are other than 0 to 59
Example

Set D0 time to 16:30:00 and D10 time to 4:30:0

After the coil is turned on, the D20 time is 12:00:00

315 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
TRD/Clock data reading
TRD(P)
Read the clock data of the built-in real-time clock of the CPU module.
-[TRD (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
ANY16_ARRAY
(d) Read destination and start device number of clock data - Signed BIN 16 bit
(number of elements: 7)
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
TRD Parameter 1 ●●●● ● ●
Features
Read the clock data (SD100 to SD106) of the real-time clock built into the CPU module into (d) to (d)+6 in the following format.
Parameter Element Project Clock data Element Project
SD105 Year (Gregorian) 2000 to 2099 → (d) Year (Gregorian)
SD104 Month 1 to 12 → (d)+1 Month
SD103 Day 1 to 31 → (d)+2 Day

Special register SD102 Hour 0 to 23 → (d)+3 Hour

SD101 Minute 0 to 59 → (d)+4 Minute
SD100 Seconds 0 to 59 → (d)+5 Seconds

SD106 Week 0 (Sun) to 6 (Sat) → (d)+6 Week

• The related devices are shown below. The clock data of these special registers are updated through END processing.
Devices Content
SD100 The second data of the clock data is stored in BIN code.
SD101 The sub-data of the clock data is stored in BIN code.
SD102 Time data of clock data is stored in BIN code.
SD103 The daily data of the clock data is stored in BIN code.
SD104 The monthly data of the clock data is stored in BIN code.
SD105 The year data of the clock data is stored in a 4-digit BIN code of the Gregorian calendar.
SD106 The week data of the clock data is stored in BIN code. (0: day, 1: one, ..., 6: six) are stored in BIN code.
✎Note
• The device specified in (d) occupies 7 points. Be careful not to overlap with the device used for machine control.
Error code
Error code Content
4086H When reading the specified device range exceeds the corresponding device range
Example

After the M0 coil is turned on, the current date and time are read as 2020-2-19 13:10:38 Wednesday

316 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
TWR/Clock data writing
TWR(P)
Write the clock data of the built-in real-time clock of the CPU module.
-[TWR (s)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s) Clock data write source, start device number - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16_ARRAY (number of elements: 7)
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
TWR Parameter 1 ●●●● ● ●
Features
Write the set clock data (s) to (s)+6 to the clock data (SD100 to SD106) of the real-time clock built into the CPU module.
Set data at all times Special register
Element Project Clock data Element Project
(s) Year (Gregorian) 2000 to 2099 or 0 to 99 → SD105 Year (Gregorian)
(s)+1 Month 1 to 12 → SD104 Month
(s)+2 Day 1 to 31 → SD103 Day
(s)+3 Hour 0 to 23 → SD102 Hour
(s)+4 Minute 0 to 59 → SD101 Minute
(s)+5 Seconds 0 to 59 → SD100 Seconds
(s)+6 Week 0 (Sun) to 6 (Sat) → SD106 Week
• If the TWR(P) instruction is executed, the clock data of the real-time clock is changed immediately. Therefore, the clock data after a
few minutes should be transferred to the set clock data (s) to (s)+6 in advance, and the instruction will be executed when the correct
time is reached.
• If the year in (s) is in the range of 0 to 99, it will be automatically treated as 2000 to 2099.
• When a value indicating an impossible time is set, the clock data will not be updated. Set the correct clock data and write again.
• The day of the week (SD100) is automatically corrected.
• The related devices are shown below.
Devices Content
SD100 The second data of the clock data is stored in BIN code.
SD101 The sub-data of the clock data is stored in BIN code.
SD102 Time data of clock data is stored in BIN code.
SD103 The daily data of the clock data is stored in BIN code.
SD104 The monthly data of the clock data is stored in BIN code.
SD105 The year data of the clock data is stored in a 4-digit BIN code of the Gregorian calendar.
SD106 The week data of the clock data is stored in BIN code. (0: day, 1: one, ..., 6: six) are stored in BIN code.
✎Note
The device specified in (s) occupies 7 points. Be careful not to overlap with the device used for machine control.
Error code
Error code Content
4085H When reading the specified device range exceeds the corresponding device range

317 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Example
Set D0 date and time to 2020-2-19 12:36:00 in advance

At the moment when the time 12:36:00 arrives, turn on the M0 coil and write the time.

318 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
HTOS/16-bit data conversion of time data (hour, minute, second → second)
HTOS(P)
Convert the time data stored after the device number specified in (s) into seconds and store the conversion result as BIN 16-bit data
in the device specified in (d).
-[HTOS (s) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
The device start number that stores the
(s) - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16_ARRAY (number of elements: 3)
data of the subtracted time
The device start number that stores the
(d) - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
converted clock data
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
HTOS
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
Features
Convert the time data stored after the device number specified in (s) into seconds and store the conversion result in the device
specified in (d).

Example
When 4 hours, 29 minutes and 31 seconds are specified in (s)

Error code
Error code Content
4085H When reading the specified device range exceeds the corresponding device range
4086H When writing the specified device range exceeds the corresponding device range
When the calculation result is not in the range of 0 to 32767
4084H When the value specified in (s) is not in the range of 0 to 9
When the value specified in (s)+1 and (s)+2 is not in the range of 0 to 59
Example

D0 time is set to 5:36:53

The time of D10 after the M0 coil is turned on is as below.

319 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DHTOS/32-bit data conversion of time data (hour, minute, second → second)
DHTOS(P)
Convert the time data stored after the device number specified in (s) into seconds and store the conversion result as BIN 32-bit data
in the device specified in (d).
-[DHTOS (s) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
The device start number that stores the
(s) - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16_ARRAY (number of elements: 3)
data of the subtracted time
The device start number that stores the
(d) - Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32
converted clock data
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
DHTOS
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
Features
Convert the time data stored after the device number specified in (s) into seconds and store the conversion result in the device
specified in (d).

Example
When 35 hours, 10 minutes and 58 seconds are specified in (s)

Error code
Error code Content
4085H When reading the specified device range exceeds the corresponding device range
4086H When writing the specified device range exceeds the corresponding device range
When the calculation result is not in the range of 0 to 32767
4084H
When the value specified in (s)+1 and (s)+2 is not in the range of 0 to 59
Example

D0 time is set to 15:33:24

The second of D10 after the M0 coil is turned on is

320 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
HOUR/Hour measuring 16-bit
HOUR(P)
The time for the input contact to be ON is measured in units of one hour.C
-[HOUR (s) (d1) (d2)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
The time when the alarm (d2) is turned ON Signed BIN
(s) K0 to K32767 ANY16
(set by one hour) 16 bit
Device that stores the current value of measurement Unsigned ANY16_ARRAY
(d1) -
(specified data register for power failure retention) BIN 16 bit (Number of elements: 2)
Device that turns ON when the time limit expires
(d2) - Bit ANY_BOOL
(alarm output)
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
HOUR Parameter 2 ●● ● ● ●
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
The input contact ON time is measured in units of 1 hour. When the cumulative ON time exceeds the time (BIN 16-bit data) specified
in (s), the device specified in (d2) is turned on .
• In (s), set the time until the alarm (d2) turns ON in units of 1 hour.
• (d1) stores the current measured value in units of 1 hour.
• If the median value of (d1) exceeds 32767, it will be modified to 32767.
• (d1)+1 stores the current measured value (in units of 1 second) that is less than 1 hour.
• (d2) turns on when the current value (d1) exceeds the time specified in (s).
• In order to continue to use the current value data even after the power of the CPU module is turned off, specify the data register
for power failure retention to (d1). If you use general-purpose data registers, the current value data will be cleared by powering off
the CPU module and STOP→RUN operations.
• After the alarm output specified in (d2) turns ON, measurement will continue.
• The measurement stops when the current value reaches the 16-bit maximum. To continue the measurement, clear the current
value of (d1) to (d1)+1.
✎Note
• The device specified in (d1) occupies 2 points. Be careful not to overlap with the device used for machine control.
• After the instruction stops running, the measurement stops and the output continues to be maintained.
Error code
Error code Content
4085H When reading the specified device range exceeds the corresponding device range
4086H When writing the specified device range exceeds the corresponding device range
4084H When the value of (s) is negative

321 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Example

When M0 = ON, the duration of the state is accumulated, the time is recorded in D0, and the seconds less than 1 hour are recorded
in D1. When the accumulated time of D0 reaches 98 hours, the Y0 output state is ON. When the timing conditions are met, after
reaching the specified value (K98), the accumulated timing will continue and the reading will continue to increase; the current time
value D0 reaches the maximum value of 32767 hours and D1 reaches 3599 seconds, the timing measurement will stop. The current
time values D0 and D1 are cleared to 0.

322 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DHOUR/Hour measuring 32 bits
DHOUR(P)
The time for the input contact to be ON is measured in units of one hour.
-[DHOUR (s) (d1) (d2)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
The time when the alarm (d2) is turned ON Signed
(s) 0 to 2147483647 ANY32
(set by one hour) BIN 32 bit
Device that stores the current value of measurement Unsigned ANY32_ARRAY
(d1) -
(specified data register for power failure retention) BIN 32 bit (Number of elements: 2)
Device that turns ON when the time limit expires
(d2) - Bit ANY_BOOL
(alarm output)
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ●● ● ●
DHOUR Parameter 2 ●● ● ● ●
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
• The input contact ON time is measured in units of 1 hour. When the cumulative ON time exceeds the time (BIN 32-bit data)
specified in (s), the device specified in (d2) is set to ON.
• In (s)+1, (s), set the time until the alarm (d2) turns ON in units of 1 hour.
• (D1)+1 and (d1) store the current value measured in units of 1 hour. ((d1)+1: high bit, (d1): low bit)
• If the median of (d1)+1 and (d1) exceeds 2147483647, it will be modified to 2147483647.
• (D1)+2 stores the current value (in units of 1 second) of the measurement that is less than 1 hour.
• (D2) turns on when the current value (d1)+1, (d1) exceeds the time specified in (s).
• In order to continue to use the current value data even after the power of the CPU module is turned off, specify the data register
for power failure retention to (d1). If you use general-purpose data registers, the current value data will be cleared by powering off
the CPU module and STOP→RUN operations.
• After the alarm output specified in (d2) turns on, the measurement will continue.
• The measurement stops when the current value reaches the 32-bit maximum. To continue the measurement, clear the current
value of (d1) to (d1)+2.
✎Note
• The device specified in (d1) occupies 3 points. Be careful not to overlap with the device used for machine control.
• After the instruction stops running, the measurement stops and the output continues to be maintained.
Error code
Error code Content
4085H When reading the specified device range exceeds the corresponding device range
4086H When writing the specified device range exceeds the corresponding device range
4084H When the value of (s) is negative

323 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Example

When M0=ON, the duration of this state is accumulated, the time is recorded in D1, D0, and the seconds less than 1 hour are
recorded in D2. When the accumulated time of D1, D0 reaches 1000 hours, the Y0 output state is ON. When the timing conditions
are met, after reaching the specified value (K1000), the accumulated timing will continue, and the reading will continue to increase;
the current time values D1 and D0 reach the maximum value of 2147483647 hours, and when D2 reaches 3599 seconds, the timing
measurement will stop and the timing should be restarted. The current time values D0, D1, and D2 must be cleared to 0.

324 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
STOH/16-bit data conversion of time data (second → hour, minute, second)
STOH(P)
Convert the second 16-bit data stored in the device number specified in (s) into hour, minute, and second, and store the conversion
result in the device specified in (d) and later.
-[STOH (s) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
The device start number that stores the clock
(s) 0 to 32767 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
data before conversion
The device start number that stores the ANY16_ARRAY
(d) - Signed BIN 16 bit
converted clock data (number of elements: 3)
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
STOH
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
Features
Convert the second data stored after the device number specified in (s) into hour, minute, and second, and store the conversion
result in the device specified in (d) and later.

Example
When 29,011 seconds are specified in (s)

Error code
Error code Content
4085H When reading the specified device range exceeds the corresponding device range
4086H When writing the specified device range exceeds the corresponding device range
4084H When the value of (s) exceeds the range
Example

Set D0 seconds to 12537

The hour, minute and second of D10 after the M0 coil is turned on are

325 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DSTOH/32-bit data conversion of time data (second → hour, minute, second)
DSTOH(P)
Convert the second 32-bit data of second stored in the device number specified in (s) into hour, minute, and second, and store the
conversion result in the device specified in (d) and later.
-[DSTOH (s) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
The device start number that stores the clock
(s) 0 to 117964799 Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32
data before conversion
The device start number that stores the ANY16_ARRAY
(d) - Signed BIN 16 bit
converted clock data (number of elements: 3)
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
DSTOH
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
Features
Convert the second data stored after the device number specified in (s) into hour, minute, and second, and store the conversion
result in the device specified in (d) and later.

Example
When 45,325 seconds is specified in (s)

Error code
Error code Content
4085H When reading the specified device range exceeds the corresponding device range
4086H When writing the specified device range exceeds the corresponding device range
4084H When the value of (s) exceeds the range
Example

Set D0 seconds to 2152537

The hour, minute and second of D10 after the M0 coil is turned on are

326 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
TCMP/Clock data comparison
TCMP(P)
Compare the comparison time specified in (s1), (s2), (s3) with the time data specified in (s4), and turn the bit device specified in (d)
ON/OFF according to their size match.
-[TCMP (s1) (s2) (s3) (s4) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s1) Specify the "hour" of the comparison base time. 0 to 23 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(s2) Specify the "minute" of the comparison base time. 0 to 59 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(s3) Specify the "second" of the comparison base time. 0 to 59 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(s4) Specify the "hour" of the time data (hour, minute, second). - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16_ARRAY
(d) The bit device is turned ON/OFF according to the comparison result. - Bit ANYBIT_ARRAY
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
TCMP Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
Parameter 4 ●●●● ● ● ●
Parameter 5 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
Compare the time of the reference time (hour, minute, second) [(s1), (s2), (s3)] with the time data (hour, minute, second) [(s4), (s4)+1,
(s4) +2] Compare the size and turn on/off the 3 points from (d) according to the result of the same size.

✎Note
The device specified in (s4) and (d) occupies 3 points. Be careful not to overlap with the device used for machine control.
When using the clock data time (hour, minute, second) of the built-in real-time clock of the CPU module, use the TRD(P) instruction
to read the value of the special register and assign the word device to each operand.
Error code
Error code Content
4085H When reading the specified device range exceeds the corresponding device range
4086H When writing the specified device range exceeds the corresponding device range
When the value specified in (s) and (s4) is not in the range of 0 to 23
4084H
When the value specified in (s2),(s3) (s4)+1 and (s4)+2 is not in the range of 0 to 59

327 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Example

Set D10 to 1, D11 to 30, D12 to 0

When M0 is turned on, the time that D23 will come is 0:31:27

M10 is turned ON

328 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
TZCP/Clock data bandwidth comparison
TZCP(P)
Compare the comparison time of the high and low points specified in (s1) and (s2) with the time data specified in (s3), and turn the
bit device specified in (d) ON/OFF according to its size and bandwidth.
-[TZCP (s1) (s2) (s3) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
Specify the "hour" of the lower limit time (hour, ANY16_ARRAY
(s1) - Signed BIN 16 bit
minute, second) (number of elements: 3)
Specify the "hour" of the lower limit time (hour, ANY16_ARRAY
(s2) - Signed BIN 16 bit
minute, second) (number of elements: 3)
ANY16_ARRAY
(s3) Specify "hour" of time data (hour, minute, second) - Signed BIN 16 bit
(number of elements: 3)
The bit device is turned ON/OFF according to the ANY16_ARRAY
(d) - Bit
comparison result. (number of elements: 3)
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●●● ● ● ●
Parameter 2 ●●●● ● ● ●
TZCP
Parameter 3 ●●●● ● ● ●
Parameter 4 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
Compare the comparison time of the high and low points specified in (s1) and (s2) with the time data specified in (s3), and turn the
bit device specified in (d) ON/OFF according to its size and bandwidth.

✎Note
• The devices specified in (s1), (s2), (s3), (d) occupy 3 points. Be careful not to overlap with the device used for machine control.
• When using the clock data time (hour, minute, second) of the built-in real-time clock of the CPU module, use the TRD(P) instruction
to read the value of the special register and assign the word device to each operand.
• When (s1)> (s2), two of (d), (d)+1, (d)+2 are ON/OFF.

329 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Error code
Error code Content
4085H When reading the specified device range exceeds the corresponding device range
4086H When writing the specified device range exceeds the corresponding device range
When the value specified in (s1), (s2) and (s3) is not in the range of 0 to 23
4084H
When the value specified in (s1)+1, (s2)+1, (s3)+1, (s1)+2, (s2)+2 and (s3)+2 is not in the range of 0 to 59
Example

Set D0 time to 16:30:00 and D10 time to 4:30:0

After the coil is turned on, the reading time to D20 time is 8:30:00

M0/M12 is ON

330 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
TON/BIN 16-bit Turn-on delay timer
TON(P)
Specify the T timer device in (s1), the expected time in (s2), and the time base (resolution) in (s3). And the result of the measured
individual time interval operation is stored in the device specified in (s1).
PLC Editor2 version that supports this instruction: 2.3.1 and above.
-[TON (s1) (s2) (s3)]
Content, scope, data type
parameter Content range type of data Data type (label)

(s1) T device 0~511 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16_S

(s2) Expected time 0~32767 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16_S
(s3) Time base(resolution) 1/10/100/1000/10000 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16_S
Device used

Offset
Devices Pulse extension
instruction parameter modification

X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP

Parameter 1 ●

TON Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ●● ● ● ●●

Parameter 3 ●●

Timing Chart

Features
1) When the timer starts timing, the instruction after the timer starts to run when the timing time is greater than the time value of
"the product of S2 and S3".
2) When the timer value is greater than 0 and less than the time value of "the product of S2 and S3", the timer will stop whenever
the contact is disconnected, and when the contact is connected, the timer will start timing again.

S3 time base Actual value

1 100us
10 1ms
100 10ms
1000 100ms
10000 1s

331 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Precautions
• Avoid timer number conflict: the same timer number cannot be used for TON, TONR, TOF, TP, OUT_T timers at the same time. For
example, TON T32 and TOF T32 cannot be used at the same time (it may cause data confusion and not achieve the effect of the
corresponding instruction function).
Error code

Error code Content

4084H Input data in (s2) (s3) is outside the specified range.
4085H Device tpye in (s1) (s2) (s3) is outside the specified range.
4086H Device tpye in (s1) is outside the specified range.
Example

T1 is used for storing time, setting the expected time as K10 and the time base as K10000.
After set on (M8) contact and waiting for the value in the turn-on delay timer (T1) to reach the estimated time of 10s, the contact of
(T1) on and output Y0.

If the (M8) contact is off in the process of turn-on delay timer (T1) timing, the turn-on delay timer (T1) value is
cleared to 0 and the timing ends.

332 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
TONR/BIN 16-bit Hold-type turn-on delay timer
TONR(P)
Specify the T timer device in (s1), the expected time in (s2), and the time base (resolution) in (s3). And store the time values of the
accumulated multiple timing intervals into the device specified in (s1).
PLC Editor2 version that supports this instruction: 2.3.1 and above.
-[TONR (s1) (s2) (s3)]
Content, scope, data type
parameter Content range type of data Data type (label)

(s1) T device 0~511 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16_S

(s2) Expected time 0~32767 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16_S
(s3) Time base(resolution) 1/10/100/1000/10000 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16_S
Device used

Offset
Devices Pulse extension
instruction parameter modification

X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP

Parameter 1 ●

TON Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ●● ● ● ●●

Parameter 3 ●●

Timing Chart

Features
1) When the timer starts timing, the instruction after the timer starts to run when the timing time is greater than the time value of
"the product of S2 and S3".
2) When the coil in front of the timer is off, the TONR timer saves the current value. When the coil is on, the TONR timer continues to
timing.
3) The current value of TONR can be cleared using the reset command. After the preset time is reached, TONR maintains the current
value of the timer.

S3 time base Actual value

1 100us
10 1ms
100 10ms
1000 100ms
10000 1s

333 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

Precautions
• Avoid timer number conflict: the same timer number cannot be used for TON, TONR, TOF, TP, OUT_T timers at the same time. For
example, TON T32 and TOF T32 cannot be used at the same time (it may cause data confusion and not achieve the effect of the
corresponding instruction function).
Error code

Error code Content

4084H Input data in (s2) (s3) is outside the specified range.
4085H Device tpye in (s1) (s2) (s3) is outside the specified range.
4086H Device tpye in (s1) is outside the specified range.
Example

T1 is used for storing time, setting the expected time as K10 and the time base as K10000.
When the (M8) contact off and on again during timing. (T1) maintains the value at the last disconnection and continues timing until
the estimated time of 10s. After the estimated time is reached, the (T1) contact on and output Y0. If the (M8) contact off in this time,
the (T1) contact is still ON but Y0 is off.
When (M0) contact turn ON, the (T1) timer value is cleared to 0 with the RST reset command, the (T1) contact is off, and the Y0 OFF.

334 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
TOF/BIN 16-bit Turn-off delay timer
TOF(P)
Specify the T timer device in (s1), the expected time in (s2), and the time base (resolution) in (s3). And store the time values of the
accumulated multiple timing intervals into the device specified in (s1).
PLC Editor2 version that supports this instruction: 2.3.1 and above.
-[TOF (s1) (s2) (s3)]
Content, scope, data type
parameter Content range type of data Data type (label)

(s1) T device 0~511 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16_S

(s2) Expected time 0~32767 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16_S
(s3) Time base(resolution) 1/10/100/1000/10000 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16_S
Device used

Offset
Devices Pulse extension
instruction parameter modification

X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP

Parameter 1 ●

TON Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ●● ● ● ●●

Parameter 3 ●●

Timing Chart

Features
1) After the input is disconnected, the output is delayed for a fixed time before stopping. The timer bit turns on immediately when
the input is started and the current value is set to 0. When the input is disconnected, timing starts until the current time is equal to
the preset time, then timing stops.
2) When the preset value is reached, the timer bit is disconnected and the current value stops incrementing; If the input is turned on
again before the TOF reaches the preset value, the timer bit remains on.
3) For the TOF timer to start timing, the enable input must perform an on-off transition.

S3 time base Actual value

1 100us
10 1ms
100 10ms
1000 100ms
10000 1s

335 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Precautions
• Avoid timer number conflict: the same timer number cannot be used for TON, TONR, TOF, TP, OUT_T timers at the same time. For
example, TON T32 and TOF T32 cannot be used at the same time (it may cause data confusion and not achieve the effect of the
corresponding instruction function).
Error code

Error code Content

4084H Input data in (s2) (s3) is outside the specified range.
4085H Device tpye in (s1) (s2) (s3) is outside the specified range.
4086H Device tpye in (s1) is outside the specified range.
Example

T1 is used for storing time, setting the expected time as K10 and the time base as K10000.
Make the (M8) contact ON and oFF, When (M8) ON, (T1) contact is ON and Y0 is ON. when (M8) OFF, (Y0) is OFF and (T1) starts timing.
When the estimated time of 5s is reached, the (T1) contact is also 0FF.
If the (M8) contact ON again during (T1) timing, the (T1) value clears to 0 and the timing ends

336 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
TP/BIN 16-bit Start pulse timer
TP(P)
Specify the T timer device in (s1), the expected time in (s2), and the time base (resolution) in (s3). And output TRUE in the set time of
"(s2)*(s3)" product.
PLC Editor2 version that supports this instruction: 2.3.1 and above.
-[TP (s1) (s2) (s3)]
Content, scope, data type
parameter Content range type of data Data type (label)

(s1) T device 0~511 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16_S

(s2) Expected time 0~32767 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16_S
(s3) Time base(resolution) 1/10/100/1000/10000 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16_S
Device used

Offset
Devices Pulse extension
instruction parameter modification

X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP

Parameter 1 ●

TON Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ●● ● ● ●●

Parameter 3 ●●

Timing Chart

Features

Timer that outputs TRUE only for the set time after startup
1) When the enable input is turned on, timer (s1) is started and timer (s1) bit is immediately turned on. Timer (s1) stops as time
increases and reaches the expected time.
2) After timer (s1) reaches the predetermined time (s2), timer (s1) bit is disconnected. At this time, timer (s1) stops increasing. If the
enable input becomes FALSE, timer (s1) will reset. The expected time (s2) becomes 0.
3) After starting, if the enable input becomes FALSE before the timer (s1) reaches the expected time (s2), the timer will be reset after
reaching the expected time (s2).

S3 time base Actual value

1 100us
10 1ms
100 10ms
1000 100ms
10000 1s
Precautions
337 WECON technology Co., Ltd.
 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
• Avoid timer number conflict: the same timer number cannot be used for TON, TONR, TOF, TP, OUT_T timers at the same time. For
example, TON T32 and TOF T32 cannot be used at the same time (it may cause data confusion and not achieve the effect of the
corresponding instruction function).
Error code

Error code Content

4084H Input data in (s2) (s3) is outside the specified range.
4085H Device tpye in (s1) (s2) (s3) is outside the specified range.
4086H Device tpye in (s1) is outside the specified range.
Example

T1 is used for storing time, setting the expected time as K5 and the time base as K10000.
When the enable input (M8) is on, the timer (T1) is started and the timer (T1) bit turns on immediately. Timer (T1) stops as time
increases and reaches the expected time.
After timer (T1) reaches a predetermined time of 5s, timer (T1) bit is disconnected. At this time, timer (T1) stops increasing. If the
enable input (M8) becomes FALSE, timer (T1) will reset. The expected time becomes 0.
After startup, if the enable input (M8) becomes FALSE before the timer (T1) reaches the estimated time of 5s, the timer will be reset
after reaching the estimated time of 5s.

338 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
7.13 Data control instructions
BAND/BIN 16-bit data dead zone control
BAND(P)
The input value (BIN 16-bit value) specified in (s3) controls the output value stored in the device specified in (d) according to the
upper and lower limits of the dead zone specified in (s1) and (s2).
-[BAND (s1) (s2) (S3) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s1) Lower limit of dead zone (no output zone) -32,768 to +32,767 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16_S
(s2) Upper limit of dead zone (no output zone) -32,768 to +32,767 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16_S
(S3) Input value controlled by dead zone control -32768 to +32,767 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16_S
The start number of the device that stores the
(D) - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16_S
output value controlled by the dead zone control
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
BAND
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
Parameter 4 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
Features
The input value (BIN 16-bit value) specified in (s3) controls the output value stored in the device specified in (d) according to the
upper and lower limits of the dead zone specified in (s1) and (s2). The output value is controlled as follows.
Condition The value stored in the output value
When dead zone low limit (s1)> input value (s3) Input value (s3)-Dead zone low limit (s1)
When dead zone high limit (s1) <input value (s3) Input value (s3)- Dead zone high limit (s2)
When dead zone low limit (s1) ≤ input value (s3) ≤ dead zone low limit (s2) 0

•When the output value stored in (d) is a signed BIN 16-bit value, and the operation result
exceeds the range of -32768 to 32767, the situation is shown in the following example.
For example, when (s1) is 10 and (s3) is -32768,
the output value = -32768-10=8000H-000AH=7FFFH=32758.

Error code
Error code Content
4085H When the specified device range for reading exceeds the range of the corresponding device.
4086H When the specified device range for writing exceeds the range of the corresponding device.
4084H When the low limit specified in (s1) is greater than the high limit specified in (s2).
Example

When X000 is ON, when D0<(-1,000), the value of ( D0)-(-1,000) is stored in (D1).
• When -1,000≦ D0≦1,000, 0 is stored in D1.
• When D0<1,000, the value of (D0)-1,000 is stored in D1.

339 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DBAND/BIN 32-bit data dead zone control
DBAND(P)
The input value (BIN 32-bit value) specified in (s3) controls the output value stored in the device specified in (d) according to the
upper and lower limits of the dead zone specified in (s1) and (s2).
-[DBAND (s1) (s2) (S3) (d)]
Content, range and data type

Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)

-2,147,483,648 to
(s1) Dead zone low limit (no output zone) Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32_S
+2,147,483,647
-2,147,483,648 to
(s2) Dead zone high limit (no output zone) Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32_S
+2,147,483,647
-2,147,483,648 to
(S3) Input value controlled by dead zone control Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32_S
+2,147,483,647
The start number of the device that stores the
(d) - Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32_S
output value controlled by the dead zone control
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ●● ● ●
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ●● ● ●
DBAND
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
Parameter 4 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
The input value (BIN 32-bit value) specified in (s3) controls the output value stored in the device specified in (d) according to the
upper and lower limits of the dead zone specified in (s1) and (s2). The output value is controlled as follows.
Condition The value stored in the output value
When dead zone low limit ((s1), (s1)+1)> input value ((s3), (s3)+1) Input value ((s3), (s3)+1)-dead zone low limit ((s1), (s1)+1)
When dead zone high limit ((s1), (s1)+1) <input value ((s3), (s3)+1) Input value ((s3), (s3)+1)-dead zone high limit ((s2), (s2)+1)
When dead zone low limit ((s1), (s1)+1) ≤ input value ((s3), (s3)+1)
0
≤ dead zone high limit ((s2), (s2)+1)

• When the output value stored in (d) is a signed BIN 32-bit value, and the
operation result exceeds the range of -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647, the
situation is as the following example. For example, When (s1) and (s1)+1 are 1000,
(s3) and (s3)+1 are -2,147,483,648, then the output value=
-2,147,483,648-1000=80000000H-000003E8H=7FFFFC18H=2,147,482,648.
Error code
Error code Content
4085H When the specified device range for reading exceeds the range of the corresponding device.
4086H When the specified device range for writing exceeds the range of the corresponding device.
4084H When the low limit specified in (s1) is greater than the high limit specified in (s2).

340 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Example

• When (D1, D0)<(-10,000), the value of (D1, D0)-(-10,000) is stored in (D11, D10).
• When -10,000≦(D1, D0)≦10,000, 0 is stored in (D11, D10).
• When 10,000< (D1, D0), the value of (D1, D0)-10,000 is stored in D1.

341 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
BINDA/BIN 16-bit data → Decimal ASCII conversion
BINDA(P)
Convert the BIN 16-bit data specified in (s) and the value of each digit in decimal numbers into ASCII codes and store them after the
device number specified in (d).
-[BINDA(s)(d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s) BIN data for ASCII conversion -32768 to +32767 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16_S
The start number of the device storing the
(d) - String ANYSTRING_SINGLE
conversion result
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
modification extension
Instruction Parameter
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
BINDA
Parameter 2 ●● ● ● ●
Features
Convert the BIN 16-bit data specified in (s) and the value of each digit in decimal numbers into ASCII codes and store them after the
device number specified in (d).

←Only store 0 when SM191 is OFF

For example, when -12,345 is specified in (s) (in the case of specifying signed)

The calculation result stored in (d) will be as below.

• In "Sign", 20H is stored when the BIN data is positive, and 2DH is stored when it is negative.
• In the 0 to the left of the effective digit, 20H is stored. (Suppress 0.) For example, in the case of "00325", "00" becomes 20H,
and "325" becomes the effective digit.
• When storing data to the device specified in (d)+3, when SM191 (output character number switching signal) is OFF, 0 is stored, and
it does not change when it is ON.
✎Note: The number of occupied points of (d) is 3 when SM191 is ON, and it is 4 when SM191 is OFF.
Error code
Error code Content
4085H The read address of (s) exceeds the device range.
4086H The write address of (d) exceeds the device range.
Example

When X000 is ON, convert the value of 16-bit data (BIN) D1000 into
decimal ASCII code, and then use PR instruction to output the
converted ASCII code character by character to the program of Y040 to

342 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DBINDA/BIN 32-bit data → Decimal ASCII conversion
DBINDA(P)
Convert the BIN 32-bit data specified in (s) and the value of each bit in decimal numbers into ASCII codes and store them after the
device number specified in (d).
-[DBINDA(s)(d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s) BIN data for ASCII conversion -2,147483648 to 2147483647 Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32_S
The start number of the device
(d) - String ANYSTRING_SINGLE
storing the conversion result
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ●● ● ●
DBINDA
Parameter 2 ●● ● ● ●
Features
Convert the BIN 32-bit data specified in (s) and the value of each bit when expressed in decimal numbers into ASCII codes, and store
them after the device number specified in (d).
For example, when -12345678 is specified in (s). (in the case of specifying signed)

The calculation result stored in (d) will be as below.

• In "Sign", 20H is stored when the BIN data is positive, and 2DH is stored when it is negative.
• 20H is stored at 0 to the left of the effective number of digits. (Suppress 0.) For example, in the case of "0012034560", "00"
becomes 20H, and "12034560" becomes effective digits.
• For the data stored in the upper 8 bits of the device specified in (d)+5, 0 will be stored when SM191 (output character switching
signal) is OFF, and 20H will be stored when it is ON.
✎Note: (d) Occupies 6 points.
Error code
Error code Content
4085H (s) read address exceeds the device range
4086H (d) write address exceeds the device range
Example

When X000 is ON, convert the value of 32-bit data (BIN) D1000 into decimal ASCII code, and then use PR (FNC 77) instruction to
output the converted ASCII code character by character to the program in Y040 to Y051 in time and time division.

343 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DABIN/Decimal ASCII → BIN conversion
DABIN(P)
Digital ASCII code (30H to 39H) is a instruction to convert real data into BIN data.
-[DABIN (s) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
The start number of the device that stores the data (ASCII
(s) - String ANYSTRING_SINGLE
code) to be converted into a BIN value
(d) The device number for storing conversion result - BIN16 bit ANY16_S
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●● ● ● ●
DABIN
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
Features
The decimal ASCII data stored after the device number specified in (s) is converted into BIN 16-bit data and stored in the device
specified in (d).

ASCII S ASCII 100 ASCII 101 ASCII 102 ASCII 103 ASCII 104
Units of Tens of Hundreds of Thousands of Ten thousands
ASCII code
ASCII code ASCII code ASCII code ASCII code of ASCII code
For example, When -25,108 is specified in (s)

• The ASCII data specified in (s) to (s)+2 is within the range of -32,768 to +32,767.
• In “Sign”, set 20H when the converted data is positive, and set 2DH when it is negative. (When other than 20H or 2DH is set, it will
be treated as positive data. (DABIN(P))
• The range of the ASCII code set in each digit is 30H to 39H.
• When the ASCII code set in each bit is 20H or 00H, it will be treated as 30H.
Error code
Error code Content
When the Sign data exceeds the range of 30H to 39H, 20H, 00H, 2DH;
4084H When the ASCII code of each bit specified in (s) to (s)+2 exceeds the range of 30H to 39H, 20H, 00H;
When the ASCII data specified in (s) to (s)+2 is other than -32,768 to +32,767.
4085H The read address of (s) exceeds the device range.
4086H The write address of (d) exceeds the device range.
Example
When X000 is ON, the Signs set in D20 to D22 and the ASCII code data of 5-digit
decimal numbers are converted into BIN values, and then stored in the program of D0.
344 WECON technology Co., Ltd.
 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DDABIN/Decimal ASCII → BIN32-bit data conversion
DDABIN(P)
The decimal ASCII data stored after the device number specified in (s) is converted into BIN 32-bit data and stored in the device
number specified in (d).
-[DDABIN (s) (d) ]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
The start number of the device that stores data (ASCII code) to
(s) - String ANYSTRING_SINGLE
be converted into a BIN value
(d) The device number for storing conversion result - Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32_S
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●● ● ● ●
DDABIN
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
The decimal ASCII data stored after the device number specified in (s) is converted into BIN 32-bit data and stored in the device
specified in (d).

ASCII S ASCII code ASCII S ASCII code

ASCII 100 Units of ASCII code ASCII 105 Hundred thousands of ASCII code
ASCII 101 Tens of ASCII code ASCII 106 Millions of ASCII code
ASCII 10 2
Hundreds of ASCII code ASCII 10 7
Ten millions of ASCII code
ASCII 10 3
Thousands of ASCII code ASCII 10 8
Hundred millions of ASCII code
ASCII 104 Tens thousands of ASCII code ASCII 109 billions of ASCII code
When -1234543210 is specified in (s) (When signed is specified)

• The ASCII data specified in (s) to (s)+5 is within the range of -2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647. In addition, the data stored in the
high byte of (s)+5 will be ignored.
• In the Sign data, set 20H when the converted data is positive, and set 2DH when it is negative. (When other than 20H or 2DH is set,
it will be treated as positive data. (DABIN(P))
• The range of ASCII code set in each digit is 30H to 39H.
• When the ASCII code set in each bit is 20H or 00H, it will be treated as 30H.
345 WECON technology Co., Ltd.
 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Error code
Error code Content

When the Sign data exceeds the range of 30H to 39H, 20H, 00H and 2DH;
4084H When the ASCII code of each bit specified in (s) to (s)+5 exceeds the range of 30H to 39H, 20H and 00H;
When the ASCII data specified in (s) to (s)+5 exceeds the range of -2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647

4085H The read address of (s) exceeds the device range.

4086H The write address of (d) exceeds the device range.
Example

When X000 is ON, the Signs set in to D20 to D25 and the ASCII code data of 10-digit decimal numbers are converted into BIN values
and then saved to the program in D0 to D1.

346 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
LIMIT/ BIN 16-bit data high and low limit control
LIMIT(P)
The input value (BIN 16-bit value) specified in (s3) controls the output value stored in the device specified in (d) according to the
upper and lower limit value ranges specified in (s1) and (s2).
-[LIMIT (s1) (s2) (s3) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
s1 Low limit value (minimum output limit value) -32,768 to 32,767 BIN16 bit ANY16_S
s2 High limit value (maximum output limit value) -32,768 to 32,767 BIN16 bit ANY16_S
s3 Input value controlled by high and low limit control -32,768 to 32,767 BIN16 bit ANY16_S
The start number of device that stores the output value
d - BIN16 bit ANY16_S
controlled by high and low limit control
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
LIMIT
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
Parameter 4 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
Features
The input value (BIN 16-bit value) specified in (s3) controls the output value stored in the device specified in (d) according to the high
and low limit value ranges specified in (s1) and (s2). The output value is controlled as follows.
Condition The value stored in the output value
Low limit value (s1)>input value (s3) Low limit value (s1)
High limit value (s1) <input value (s3) High limit value (s2)
Low limit value (s1) ≤ input value (s3) ≤ high limit value (s2) Input value (s3)

•Only in the case of controlling high limit value, set the minimum value of
data range in the low limit value specified in (s1).
• Only in the case of controlling low limit value, set the maximum value of
data range in the high limit value specified in (s2).

Error code
Error code Content
4085H The read address exceeds the device range
4086H The write address exceeds the device range
4084H High limit <low limit
Example

When X000 is ON
• When D0 <500, D1 is 500.
• When 500 ≤ D0 ≤ 5,000, D1 is the value of D0.
• When 5,000 <D0, D1 is 5,000.

347 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DLIMIT/BIN 32-bit data high and low limit control
DLIMIT(P)
The input value (BIN 32-bit value) specified in (s3) controls the output value stored in the device specified in (d) according to the
range of high and low limit values specified in (s1) and (s2).
-[DLIMIT (s1) (s2) (s3) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Data type
Parameter Content Range Data type
(label)
s1 Low limit value (minimum output limit value) -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 BIN32 bit ANY32_S
s2 High limit value (maximum output limit value) -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 BIN32 bit ANY32_S
s3 Input value controlled by high and low limit control -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 BIN32 bit ANY32_S
The start number of the device that stores the
d - BIN32 bit ANY32_S
output value controlled by high and low limit control
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ●● ● ●
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ●● ● ●
DLIMIT
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
Parameter 4 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
The input value (BIN 32-bit value) specified in (s3) controls the output value stored in the device specified in (d) according to the
range of high and low limit values specified in (s1) and (s2). The output value is controlled as follows.
Condition The value stored in the output value
Low limit value ((s1), (s1)+1)> input value ((s3), (s3)+1) Low limit value ((s1), (s1)+1)
High limit value ((s2), (s2)+1) <input value ((s3), (s3)+1) High limit value ((s2), (s2)+1)
Low limit value ((s1), (s1)+1) ≤ input value ((s3), (s3)+1) ≤ high limit value ((s2), (s2)+1) Input value ((s3), (s3)+1)
•Only in the case of controlling high limit value, set the minimum value of data range in the low limit value specified in (s1).
• Only in the case of controlling low limit value, set the maximum value of data range in the high limit value specified in (s2).
Error code
Error code Content
4085H The read address exceeds the device range
4086H The write address exceeds the device range
4084H High limit <low limit

Example

Operation:
• When (D1, D0) <10,000, (D11, D10) is 10,000.
• When 10,000 ≤ (D1, D0) ≤ 1,000,000, (D11, D10) is the value of (D1, D0).
• When 1,000,000 <(D1, D0), (D11, D10) is 1,000,000.

348 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
SCL/BIN 16-bit unit scale (coordinate data of each point)
SCL(P)
The scaling conversion data (16-bit data unit) specified in (s2) is scaled from the input value specified in (s1), and the calculation
result is stored in the device specified in (d).
-[SCL (s1) (s2) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
The input value for scaling or the start number of
(s1) -32,768 to 32,767 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16_S
device storing the input value
The start number of the device storing conversion
(s2) - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16_S
data for scaling
The start number of the device that stores the
(d) - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16_S
output value controlled by scaling
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
SCL Parameter 2 ●● ● ● ●
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
Features
For the scale conversion data (16-bit data unit) specified in (s2), scale by the input value specified in (s1), and store the operation
result in the device specified in (d). Scale conversion is performed based on the scale conversion data stored after the device
specified in (s2).
Setting items (n represents the number of coordinate points specified in (s2)) Device allocation
Coordinate points (s2)
X coordinate (s2)+1
Point 1
Y coordinate (s2)+2
X coordinate (s2)+3
Point 2
Y coordinate (s2)+4
........
X coordinate (s2)+2n-1
Point n
Y coordinate (s2)+2n

349 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
• If the operation result is not an integer value, round the first digit below the decimal point.
• The X coordinate data of the conversion data for scaling should be set in ascending order.
• (s1) should be set within the range of conversion data for scaling (device value of (s2)).
• If the same X coordinate is specified for multiple points, the Y coordinate value of the second point will be output.
• Set the number of coordinate points of the conversion data for scaling within the range of 1 to 32,767.
• Setting example of conversion table for scaling.
In the case of scaling conversion characteristics as shown in the figure below, set it as the following data sheet.

Sett device and content

Set items Remarks
When R0 is specified in (s2) Set content

Coordinate points (s2) R0 K10

X coordinate (s2)+1 R1 K5
Point 1
Y coordinate (s2)+2 R2 K20
X coordinate (s2)+3 R3 K30
Point 2
Y coordinate (s2)+4 R4 K50
X coordinate (s2)+5 R5 K100
Point 3
Y coordinate (s2)+6 R6 K200
X coordinate (s2)+7 R7 K25 If the coordinates are specified by 3 points, the
Point 4
Y coordinate (s2)+8 R8 K200 intermediate value could be the output value.
X coordinate (s2)+9 R9 K70 In this example, the output value (median value) is
Point 5
Y coordinate (s2)+10 R10 K200 specified by the Y coordinate of point 5.
X coordinate (s2)+11 R11 K250 When the X coordinate is the same at 3 points or
Point 6
Y coordinate (s2)+12 R12 K250 more, the value of the 2nd point is also output.

X coordinate (s2)+13 R13 K250

Point 7
Y coordinate (s2)+14 R14 K90
X coordinate (s2)+15 R15 K350 If the coordinates are specified by two points, the
Point 8
Y coordinate (s2)+16 R16 K90 output value is the value of the Y coordinate of the
X coordinate (s2)+17 R17 K350 next point.
Point 9 In this example, the output value is specified by the Y
Y coordinate (s2)+18 R18 K30
coordinate of point 9.
X coordinate (s2)+19 R19 K400
Point 10
Y coordinate (s2)+20 R20 K7
Error code
Error code Content
4085H When the specified device range for reading exceeds the range of the corresponding device.
4086H When the specified device range for writing exceeds the range of the corresponding device.

350 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
When the Xn data of data table is not sorted in ascending order. However, the instruction will be
executed until the position where the error occurs;
4084H
When the input value specified in (s1) exceeds the range of the set scale conversion data;
When the number of start coordinate points of device (s2) is less than 0.
Example

When -100 ≤ D0(X) < 0, D100(Y)= 1 X  2

2
when D0(X)=0, D100(Y)=0;
1 X 2
when 0< D0(X) ≤ 100, D100(Y)= 2

351 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DSCL/32-bit unit scale (coordinate data of each point)
DSCL(P)
The conversion data (32-bit data unit) for scaling specified in (s2) is scaled by the input value specified in (s1), and the operation
result is stored in the device specified in (d).
-[DSCL (s1) (s2) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)

The input value for scaling or the start number of -2,147,483,648 to

(s1) Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32_S
the device storing the input value 2,147,483,647

The start number of the device storing

(s2) - Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32_S
conversion data for scaling
The start number of the device that stores the
(d) - Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32_S
output value controlled by scaling
Device used
Offset Pulse
Device
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ●● ● ●
DSCL Parameter 2 ●● ● ● ●
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
The conversion data (32-bit data unit) for scaling specified in (s2) is scaled by the input value specified in (s1), and the operation
result is stored in the device number specified in (d). The scale conversion is performed based on the scale conversion data stored
after the device specified in (s2).
Set items (n represents the number of coordinate points specified in (s2)) Device allocation
Coordinate points (s2)+1, (s2)
X coordinate (s2)+3, (s2)+2
Point 1
Y coordinate (s2)+5, (s2)+4
X coordinate (s2)+7, (s2)+6
Point 2
Y coordinate (s2)+9, (s2)+8
........
X coordinate (s2)+4n-1, (s2)+4n-2
Point n
Y coordinate (s2)+4n+1, (s2)+4n

• If the calculation result is not an integer value, round the first digit below the decimal point.
• The X coordinate data of the conversion data for scaling should be set in ascending order.
• For (s1), set within the range of the conversion data for scaling ((s2), (s2) + 1 device value).

352 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
• If the same X coordinate is specified for multiple points, the Y coordinate value of the second point will be output.
• Set the number of coordinate points of conversion data for scaling within the range of 1 to 2,147,483,647.
• Setting example of conversion table for scaling.
In the case of scaling conversion characteristics as shown in the figure below, set it as the following data sheet.

Set device and content

Set items Remarks
When R0 is specified in (s2) Set content
Coordinate points (s2)+1, (s2) R1, R0 K10
X coordinate (s2)+3, (s2)+2 R3, R2 K5
Point 1
Y coordinate (s2)+5, (s2)+4 R5, R4 K7
X coordinate (s2)+7, (s2)+6 R7, R6 K20
Point 2
Y coordinate (s2)+9, (s2)+8 R9, R8 K30
X coordinate (s2)+11, (s2)+10 R10, R11 K50
Point 3
Y coordinate (s2)+13, (s2)+12 R13, R12 K100
X coordinate (s2)+15, (s2)+14 R15, R14 K200 if the coordinates are specified by 3 points, the
Point 4
Y coordinate (s2)+17, (s2)+16 R17, R16 K25 intermediate value could be the output value.
X coordinate (s2)+19, (s2)+18 R19, R18 K200 In this example, the output value (median value) is
Point 5
Y coordinate (s2)+21, (s2)+20 R21, R20 K70 specified by the Y coordinate of point 5.
X coordinate (s2)+23, (s2)+22 R23, R22 K200 When the X coordinate is the same at 3 points or more,
Point 6
Y coordinate (s2)+25, (s2)+24 R25, R24 K250 the value of the 2nd point is also output.

X coordinate (s2)+27, (s2)+26 R27, R26 K250

Point 7
Y coordinate (s2)+29, (s2)+28 R29, R28 K90
X coordinate (s2)+31, (s2)+30 R31, R30 K350 If the coordinates are specified by two points, the
Point 8
Y coordinate (s2)+33, (s2)+32 R33, R32 K90 output value is the value of the Y coordinate of the next
X coordinate (s2)+35, (s2)+34 R35, R34 K350 point.
Point 9 In this example, the output value is specified by the Y
Y coordinate (s2)+37, (s2)+36 R37, R36 K30
coordinate of point 9.
X coordinate (s2)+39, (s2)+38 R39, R38 K400
Point 10
Y coordinate (s2)+41, (s2)+40 R41, R40 K7
Error code
Error code Content
4085H When the specified device range for reading exceeds the range of the corresponding device.
4086H When the specified device range for writing exceeds the range of the corresponding device.
When the Xn data of data table is not sorted in ascending order. However, the instruction will be
executed until the position where the error occurs;
4084H
When the input value specified in (s1) exceeds the range of the set scale conversion data;
When the number of start coordinate points of device (s2) is less than 0.

353 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Example

When -100 ≤ D0(X) < 0, D100(Y)= 1 X 2

2
When D0(X)=0, D100(Y)=0;
When 0 < D0(X) ≤ 100, D100(Y)= 1 2 X  2

354 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
SCL2/BIN 16-bit unit scale (X/Y coordinate data)
SCL2(P)
The conversion data (16-bit data unit) for scaling specified in (s2) is scaled by the input value specified in (s1), and the operation
result is stored in the device specified in (d).
-[SCL2 (s1) (s2) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
The input value for scaling or the start number
(s1) -32,768 to 32,767 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16_S
of the device storing the input value
The start number of the device storing
(s2) - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16_S
conversion data for scaling
The start number of the device that stores the
(d) - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16_S
output value controlled by scaling
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
SCL2 Parameter 2 ●● ● ● ●
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
Features
The conversion data (16-bit data unit) for scaling specified in (s2) is scaled by the input value specified in (s1), and the operation
result is stored in the device number specified in (d). The scale conversion is performed based on the scale conversion data stored
after the device specified in (s2).
Set items (n represents the number of coordinate points specified in (s2)) Device allocation
Coordinate points (s2)
Point 1 (s2)+1
Point 2 (s2)+2
X coordinate
..... ......
Point n (s2)+n
Point 1 (s2)+n+1
Point 2 (s2)+n+2
Y coordinate
..... .....
Point n (s2)+2n

355 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
• If the operation result is not an integer value, round the first digit below the decimal point.
• The X coordinate data of the conversion data for scaling should be set in ascending order.
• For (s1), set within the range of the conversion data for scaling ((s2), (s2) + 1 device value).
• If the same X coordinate is specified for multiple points, the Y coordinate value of the second point will be output.
• Set the number of coordinate points of conversion data for scaling within the range of 1 to 32,767.
• Setting example of conversion table for scaling.
In the case of scaling conversion characteristics as shown in the figure below, set it as the following data sheet.

Set device and content

Set items Remarks
When R0 is specified in (s2) Set content
Coordinate points (s2) R0 K10
Point 1 (s2)+1 R1 K5
Point 2 (s2)+2 R2 K20
Point 3 (s2)+3 R3 K50
Point 4 (s2)+4 R4 K200
Point 5 (s2)+5 R5 K200 Refer to ✎1
X coordinate
Point 6 (s2)+6 R6 K200
Point 7 (s2)+7 R7 K250
Point 8 (s2)+8 R8 K350
Refer to ✎2
Point 9 (s2)+9 R9 K350
Point 10 (s2)+10 R10 K400
Point 1 (s2)+11 R11 K7
Point 2 (s2)+12 R12 K30
Point 3 (s2)+13 R13 K100
Point 4 (s2)+14 R14 K25
Point 5 (s2)+15 R15 K70 Refer to✎1
Y coordinate
Point 6 (s2)+16 R16 K250
Point 7 (s2)+17 R17 K90
Point 8 (s2)+18 R18 K90
Refer to ✎2
Point 9 (s2)+19 R19 K30
Point 10 (s2)+20 R20 K7

✎1 Like points 4, 5, and 6, if the coordinates are specified by 3 points, the intermediate value could be the output value.
In this example, the output value (median value) is specified by the Y coordinate of point 5.
When the X coordinate is the same at 3 or more points, the value of the second point is also output.
✎2 Like points 8 and 9, if the coordinates are specified by 2 points, the output value is the value of the Y coordinate of next point.
In this example, the output value is specified by the Y coordinate of point 9.

356 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Error code
Error code Content
4085H When the specified device range for reading exceeds the range of the corresponding device.
4086H When the specified device range for writing exceeds the range of the corresponding device.
When the Xn data of data table is not sorted in ascending order. However, the instruction will be executed
until the position where the error occurs;
4084H
When the input value specified in (s1) exceeds the range of the set scale conversion data;
When the number of start coordinate points of device (s2) is less than 0.
Example

When -100 ≤D0 (X) < 0, D100(Y)=

when D0(X)=0, D100(Y)=0; 1 X 2
2
when 0 < D0(X) ≤ 100, D100(Y)= 1 2 X  2

357 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DSCL2/BIN 32-bit unit scale (X/Y coordinate data)
DSCL2(P)
The conversion data (32-bit data unit) for scaling specified in (s2) is scaled by the input value specified in (s1), and the operation
result is stored in the device specified in (d).
-[DSCL2 (s1) (s2) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Data type
Parameter Content Range Data type
(label)
The input value for scaling or the start
(s1) -2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647 Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32_S
number of the device storing the input value
The start number of the device storing
(s2) - Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32_S
conversion data for scaling
The start number of the device that stores
(d) - Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32_S
the output value controlled by scaling
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ●● ● ●
DSCL2 Parameter 2 ●● ● ● ●
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
The conversion data (32-bit data unit) for scaling specified in (s2) is scaled by the input value specified in (s1), and the operation
result is stored in the device number specified in (d). The scale conversion is performed based on the scale conversion data stored
after the device specified in (s2).
Set items (n represents the number of coordinate points specified in (s2)) Device allocation
Coordinate points (s2)+1, (s2)
Point 1 (s2)+3, (s2)+2
Point 2 (s2)+5, (s2)+4
X coordinate
..... ......
Point n (s2)+2n+1, (s2)+2n
Point 1 (s2)+2n+3, (s2)+2n+2
Point 2 (s2)+2n+5, (s2)+2n+4
Y coordinate
..... .....
Point n (s2)+4n+1, (s2)+4n

358 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

• If the operation result is not an integer value, round the first digit below the decimal point.
• The X coordinate data of the conversion data for scaling should be set in ascending order.
• For (s1), set within the range of the conversion data for scaling ((s2), (s2) + 1 device value).
• If the same X coordinate is specified for multiple points, the Y coordinate value of the second point will be output.
• Set the number of coordinate points of conversion data for scaling within the range of 1 to 2,147,483,647.
• Setting example of conversion table for scaling.
In the case of scaling conversion characteristics as shown in the figure below, set it as the following data sheet.

Set device and content

Set items Remarks
When R0 is specified in (s2) Set content
Coordinate points (s2)+1, (s2) R1, R0 K10
Point 1 (s2)+3, (s2)+2 R3, R2 K5
Point 2 (s2)+5, (s2)+4 R5, R4 K20
Point 3 (s2)+7, (s2)+6 R7, R6 K50
Point 4 (s2)+9, (s2)+8 R9, R8 K200
Point 5 (s2)+11, (s2)+10 R10, R11 K200 Refer to ✎1
X
Point 6 (s2)+13, (s2)+12 R13, R12 K200
Point 7 (s2)+15, (s2)+14 R15, R14 K250
Point 8 (s2)+17, (s2)+16 R17, R16 K350
Refer to ✎2
Point 9 (s2)+19, (s2)+18 R19, R18 K350
Point 10 (s2)+21, (s2)+20 R21, R20 K400
Point 1 (s2)+23, (s2)+22 R23, R22 K7
Point 2 (s2)+25, (s2)+24 R25, R24 K30
Point 3 (s2)+27, (s2)+26 R27, R26 K100
Y coordinate
Point 4 (s2)+29, (s2)+28 R29, R28 K25
Point 5 (s2)+31, (s2)+30 R31, R30 K70 Refer to ✎1
Point 6 (s2)+33, (s2)+32 R33, R32 K250
359 WECON technology Co., Ltd.
 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Point 7 (s2)+35, (s2)+34 R35, R34 K90
Point 8 (s2)+37, (s2)+36 R37, R36 K90
Refer to ✎2
Point 9 (s2)+39, (s2)+38 R39, R38 K30
Point 10 (s2)+41, (s2)+40 R41, R40 K7
✎1 Like points 4, 5, and 6, if the coordinates are specified by 3 points, the intermediate value could be the output value.
In this example, the output value (median value) is specified by the Y coordinate of point 5.
When the X coordinate is the same at 3 or more points, the value of the second point is also output.
✎2 Like points 8 and 9, if the coordinates are specified by 2 points, the output value is the value of the Y coordinate of the next
point.
In this example, the output value is specified by the Y coordinate of point 9.
Error code
Error code Content
4085H When the specified device range for reading exceeds the range of the corresponding device.
4086H When the specified device range for writing exceeds the range of the corresponding device.
When the Xn data of data table is not sorted in ascending order. However, the instruction will be executed until
the position where the error occurs;
4084H
When the input value specified in (s1) exceeds the range of the set scale conversion data;
When the number of start coordinate points of device (s2) is less than 0.
Example

When -100 ≤D0(X) < 0, D100(Y)= 1 X  2 ;

2

when D0(X)=0, D100(Y)=0;

when 0< D0(X) ≤ 100, D100(Y)= 1 X  2 .

2

360 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
ZONE/BIN 16-bit data zone control
ZONE(P)
After adding the offset value specified in (s1) or (s2) to the input value specified in (s3), it is stored in the device number specified in
(d).
-[ZONE (s1) (s2) (s3) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
s1 The negative offset value for addition in the input value -32,768 to 32,767 BIN16 bit ANY16_S
s2 The positive offset value for addition in the input value -32,768 to 32,767 BIN16 bit ANY16_S
s3 Input value for zone control` -32,768 to 32,767 BIN16 bit ANY16_S
The start number of the device storing the output value
d - BIN16 bit ANY16_S
controlled by zone control
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
ZONE
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
Parameter 4 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
Features
After adding the offset value specified in (s1) or (s2) to the input value (BIN 16-bit value) specified in (s3), it is stored in the device
number specified in (d). The offset value is controlled as follows.
Condition The value stored in the output value
When input value (s3)<0 Input value (s3) + negative offset value (s1)
When input value (s3)=0 0
When input value (s3)>0 Input value (s3) + positive offset value (s2)

• When the output value stored in (d) is a signed BIN 16-bit value, and the operation
result exceeds the range of -32,768 to 32,767, the situation is shown in the following
example.
For example, when (s1) is -100 and (s3) is -32,768,
the output value = -32768+(-100)=8000H-FF9CH=7F9CH=32668.

Error code
Error code Content
4085H When the specified device range for reading exceeds the range of the corresponding device
4086H When the specified device range for writing exceeds the range of the corresponding device
Example

When X000 is ON
• When D0<0, the value of (D0)+(-1,000) is stored in D1.
• When D0=0, 0 is stored in D1.
• When 0<D0, the value of (D0)+(1,000) is stored in D1.
361 WECON technology Co., Ltd.
 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DZONE/BIN 32-bit data zone control
DZONE(P)
After adding the offset value specified in (s1) or (s2) to the input value specified in (s3), it is stored in the device number specified in
(d).
-[DZONE (s1) (s2) (s3) (d)]
Content, range and data type

Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)

-2147483648 to
(s1) The negative offset value for addition in the input value BIN32 bit ANY32_S
2147483647
-2147483648 to
(s2) The positive offset value for addition in the input value BIN32 bit ANY32_S
2147483647
-2147483648 to
(s3) Input value for zone control BIN32 bit ANY32_S
2147483647
The start number of the device storing the output value
(d) - BIN32 bit ANY32_S
controlled by zone control
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ●● ● ●
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ●● ● ●
DZONE
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
Parameter 4 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
Features
After adding the offset value specified in (s1) or (s2) to the input value (BIN 32-bit value) specified in (s3), it is stored in the device
number specified in (d). The offset value is controlled as follows.
Condition The value stored in the output value
When input value ((s3), (s3)+1)<0 Input value ((s3), (s3)+1) + negative offset value (s1), (s1)+1
When input value ((s3), (s3)+1)=0 0
When input value ((s3), (s3)+1)>0 Input value ((s3), (s3)+1) + positive offset value (s2), (s2)+1

• When the output value stored in (d) and (d)+1 is a signed BIN 32-bit value,
and the operation result exceeds the range of -2,147,483,648 to
2,147,483,647, the situation is shown in the following example.
For example, (s1), (s1)+1 is -1,000, (s3), (s3)+1 is -2,147,483,648, then the
output value=-2,147,483,648+(-1000)=80000000H+FFFFFC18H=2,147,482,648.

Error code
Error code Content
4085H When the specified device range for reading exceeds the range of the corresponding device
4086H When the specified device range for writing exceeds the range of the corresponding device
Example

362 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
• When (D1, D0)<0, the value of (D1, D0)+(-10,000) is stored in (D11, D10).
• When (D1, D0)=0, 0 is stored in (D11, D10).
• When 0<(D1, D0), the value of (D1, D0)+10,000 is stored in (D11, D10).

7.14 Data block instructions

BK+/BIN 16-bit block data addition operation
BK+(P)
Add the BIN 16-bit data of point (n) starting from the device specified in (s1) and the BIN 16-bit data of point (n) starting from the
device specified in (s2), and store the operation result in the device specified in (d).
-[BK+ (s1) (s2) (d) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Data type
Parameter Content Range Data type
(label)
s1 The start device that stores the addition operation data -32,768 to +32,767 BIN16 bit ANY16_S
s2 Addition data or the starting device that stores the addition data -32,768 to +32,767 BIN16 bit ANY16_S
d The start device that stores the addition operation result - BIN16 bit ANY16_S
n The number of addition operation data 0 to 65,535 BIN16 bit ANY16
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●●● ● ● ●
Parameter 2 ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
BK+
Parameter 3 ●●●● ● ● ●
Parameter 4 ●● ● ●● ●
Features
Add the BIN 16-bit data of point (n) starting from the device specified in (s1) and the BIN 16-bit data of point (n) starting from the
device specified in (s2), and store the result in the device specified in (d).
• Block addition operations are performed in 16-bit units.
When a device is specified in (s2) (when specified with a sign)

When a constant is specified in (s2) (when specified with a sign)

363 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
• When an underflow or overflow occurs in the operation result, the conditions are as follows. In this case, the carry flag does not
change to ON.
When specifying sign:

When specifying unsigned:

Error code
Error code Content
The device range of point (n) starting from (s1) or (s2) is partially consistent with the device range of point (n)
4084H
starting from (d). (duplicate)
4085H When the specified device range for reading exceeds the range of the corresponding device
4086H When the specified device range for writing exceeds the range of the corresponding device
Example

As shown in the above ladder program:

When X0 is ON, add the device data starting from D100 (the number of device points is the value stored in D0), and the number of
devices starting from D150(the number of device points is the value stored in D0), and save the result to the program after D200.

364 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DBK+/BIN 32-bit block data addition operation
DBK+(P)
Add the BIN 32-bit data of point (n) starting from the device specified in (s1) and the BIN 32-bit data of point (n) starting from the
device specified in (s2), and store the operation result in the device specified in (d).
-[DBK+ (s1) (s2) (d) (n)]
Content, range and data type

Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)

-2147483648 to
s1 The start device that stores addition operation data BIN32 bit ANY32_S
+2147483647
Addition data or the starting device that stores -2147483648 to
s2 BIN32 bit ANY32_S
addition operation data +2147483647
d The start device that stores the operation data - BIN32 bit ANY32_S
n The number of addition operation data 0 to 65535 BIN32 bit ANY32_S
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
Parameter 2 ●●●● ● ● ● ●● ● ●
DBK+
Parameter 3 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
Parameter 4 ●● ● ●● ●
Features
Add the BIN 32-bit data of point (n) starting from the device specified in (s1) and the BIN 32-bit data of point (n) starting from the
device specified in (s2), and store the operation result in the device specified in (d).
• Block addition operations are performed in 32-bit units.
When a device is specified in (s2) (when specified with a sign)

When a constant is specified in (s2) (when specified with a sign)

• When (s1) or (s2) and (d) are specified with the same device (completely consistent), operation could be performed. However, if
the device range of point (n) starting from (s1) or (s2) partially matches (overlaps) the device range of point (n) starting from (d), an
error occurs.

365 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Example
When the first 4 points of the device of (s2) and (d) are completely consistent.

(1) Due to the complete consistence, operation could be executed.

When (s2) and (d) the first 4 points of the device are partially consistent.

(1) Due to partial consistence, an operation error occurs.

• If the value specified in (n) is 0, it will be no processing.
• When an underflow or overflow occurs in the operation result, the conditions are as follows. In this case, the carry flag does not
change to ON.
When a Sign is specified:

When specifying unsigned:

Error code
Error code Content
The device range of point (n) starting from (s1) or (s2) is partially consistent with the device range of point
4084H
(n) starting from (d). (duplicate)
4085H When the specified device range for reading exceeds the range of the corresponding device
4086H When the specified device range for writing exceeds the range of the corresponding device
Example

As shown in the above ladder program:

When X0 is ON, add the device data starting from D100 (the number of device points is the value stored in D0), and the number of
devices starting from D150(the number of device points is the value stored in D0), the result is saved to the program in the device
after D200.

366 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
BK-/BIN 16-bit block data subtraction operation
BK-(P)
Subtract the BIN 16-bit data of point (n) starting from the device specified in (s1) and the BIN 16-bit data of point (n) starting from
the device specified in (s2), and store the operation result in the device specified in (d).
-[BK- (s1) (s2) (d) (n)]
Content, range and data type

Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)

(s1) The start device that stores the subtracted data -32768 to +32767 BIN16 bit ANY16_S
Subtraction data or the start device that stores
(S2) -32768 to +32767 BIN16 bit ANY16_S
the subtraction data
(d) The start device that stores the operation result - BIN16 bit ANY16_S
(n) The number of subtraction operation data 0 to 65,535 BIN16 bit ANY16
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●●● ● ● ●
Parameter 2 ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
BK-
Parameter 3 ●●●● ● ● ●
Parameter 4 ●● ● ●● ●
Features
Subtract the BIN 16-bit data of point (n) starting from the device specified in (s1) and the BIN 16-bit data of point (n) starting from
the device specified in (s2), and store the result in the device specified in (d).
• Block subtraction operations are performed in 16-bit units.
When a device is specified in (s2)

When a constant is specified in (s2)

• When an underflow or overflow occurs in the operation result, the conditions are as follows. In this case, the carry flag does not
change to ON.

367 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
When a Sign is specified:

When specifying unsigned:

Error code
Error code Content
4084H The device range of point (n) starting from (s1) or (s2) is partially consistent with the device range of
point (n) starting from (d). (duplicate)
4085H When the specified device range for reading exceeds the range of the corresponding device
4086H When the specified device range for writing exceeds the range of the corresponding device
Example

As shown in the ladder program above:

When X010 is ON, after subtracting the 3 point data from D100 and the constant 8765, the result is saved to the program in the
device after D200.

368 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DBK-/BIN 32-bit block data subtraction operation
DBK-(P)
Subtract the BIN 32-bit data of point (n) starting from the device specified in (s1) and the BIN 32-bit data of point (n) starting from
the device specified in (s2), and store the operation result in the device specified in (d).
-[DBK- (s1) (s2) (d) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s1) The start device that stores the subtracted data -2147483648 to 2147483647 BIN32 bit ANY32_S
Subtraction data or the start device that stores
(s2) -2147483648 to 2147483647 BIN32 bit ANY32_S
the subtraction data
(d) The start device that stores the operation result - BIN32 bit ANY32_S
(n) The number of subtraction operation data 0 to 65,535 BIN32 bit ANY32_S
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
Parameter 2 ●●●● ● ● ● ●● ● ●
DBK-
Parameter 3 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
Parameter 4 ●● ● ●● ●
Features
Subtract the BIN 32-bit data of point (n) from the device specified in (s1) and the BIN 32-bit data of point (n) from the device
specified in (s2), and store the result in the device specified in (d).
• Block subtraction operations are performed in 32-bit units.
When a device is specified in (s2) (when specified with a sign)

When a constant is specified in (s2) (when specified with a sign)

• When (s1) or (s2) and (d) are specified with the same device (completely consistent), operation could be performed. However, if
the device range of point (n) starting from (s1) or (s2) partially matches (overlaps) the device range of point (n) starting from (d), an
error occurs.

369 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Example
When the first 4 points of the device of (s2) and (d) are completely consistent.

(1)Due to the complete consistency, operation could be executed.

When the first 4 points of the device of (s2) and (d) are partially consistent.

(1)Due to the partial consistency, an operation error occurs.

• If the value specified in (n) is 0, it will be no processing.
• When an underflow or overflow occurs in the operation result, the conditions are as follows. In this case, the carry flag does not
change to ON.
When specifying Signed:

When specifying unsigned:

Error code
Error code Content
The device range of point (n) starting from (s1) or (s2) is partially consistent with the device range of point (n)
4084H
starting from (d). (duplicate)
4085H When the specified device range for reading exceeds the range of the corresponding device
4086H When the specified device range for writing exceeds the range of the corresponding device
Example

As shown in the ladder program above:

When X010 is ON, after subtracting the 3-point data starting from D100 with the constant 987,654,321, save the result to the
program in the device after D200.

370 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
BKCMP=/BIN 16-bit block data comparison
BKCMP=(P)
Compare the BIN 16-bit data of point (n) starting from the device specified in (s1) with the BIN 16-bit data of point (n) starting from
the device specified in (s2), and store the operation result in the device specified in (d).
-[BKCMP= (s1) (s2) (d) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s1) Comparative data or the device storing comparative data -32768 to 32767 BIN16 bit ANY16_S
(s2) The device storing the comparison source data -32768 to 32767 BIN16 bit ANY16_S
(d) The start device storing the comparative result - Bit ANY_BOOL
(n) The number of comparative data 0 to 65535 BIN16 bit ANY16
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
Parameter 2 ●●●● ● ● ●
BKCMP =
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Parameter 4 ●● ●● ●
Features
Compare the BIN 16-bit data of point (n) starting from the device specified in (s1) with the BIN 16-bit data of point (n) starting from
the device specified in (s2), and store the comparative result in the point (n) starting from the device specified in (d).
• The corresponding device at point (n) starting from the device specified in (d) turns on when the comparison condition is satisfied,
and turns off when the comparison condition is not satisfied.

• Comparison operations are performed in 16-bit units.

• (s1) could specify a direct constant.

Instruction sign Condition Comparative result

BKCMP= (s1)=(s2) ON
• When all the comparison operation results stored in point (n) starting from (d) are ON (1), SM156 (block comparison signal) would
turn ON.

371 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Error code
Error code Content
4085H When the specified device range for reading exceeds the range of the corresponding device
4086H When the specified device range for writing exceeds the range of the corresponding device
Example

When X020 is ON, use “BKCMP=” instruction to compare the 4-point 16-bit data (BIN) starting from D100 and the 4-point 16-bit data
starting from D200, and save the result to the program in the 4-point of the device starting from M10.
In addition, when the comparative results (4 points starting from M10) are all ON (1), Y000 turns ON.

DBKCMP=/BIN32-bit block data comparison

DBKCM=(P)
Compare the BIN 32-bit data of point (n) starting from the device specified in (s1) with the BIN 32-bit data of point (n) starting from
the device specified in (s2), and store the operation result in the device specified in (d).
-[DBKCMP= (s1) (s2) (d) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Data type
Parameter Content Range Data type
(label)
Comparative data or the device storing
(s1) -2147483648 to 2147483647 BIN32 bit ANY32_S
comparative data
(s2) The device storing the comparison source data -2147483648 to 2147483647 BIN32 bit ANY32_S
(d) The start device storing the comparative result - Bit ANY_BOOL
(n) The number of comparative data 0 to 65,535 BIN32 bit ANY32_S
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●●● ● ● ● ●● ● ●
Parameter 2 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
DBKCMP=
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Parameter 4 ●● ●● ●
Features
Compare the BIN 32-bit data of point (n) starting from the device specified in (s1) with the BIN 32-bit data of point (n) starting from
the device specified in (s2), and store the comparison result in point (n) starting from the device specified in (d).
• The corresponding device at point (n) starting from the device specified in (d) turns on when the comparison condition is satisfied,
and turns off when the comparison condition is not satisfied.

• Comparison operations are performed in 32-bit units.

• (s1) could specify a direct constant.

372 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

• (d) is specified outside the device range of point (n) starting from (s1) and (s2).
• The comparison operation result of each instruction is shown below.
Instruction sign Condition Comparative results
DBKCMP= (s1)=(s2) ON
• When all the comparison operation results stored in point (n) starting from (d) are ON (1), SM156 (block comparison signal) would
turn ON.
Error code
Error code Content
4084H When (n) is out of range
4085H When the specified device range for reading exceeds the range of the corresponding device
4086H When the specified device range for writing exceeds the range of the corresponding device
Example

When X020 is ON, use DBKCMP= instruction to compare the 4 points 32-bit data (BIN) starting from D100 and the 4 points 32-bit data
starting from D200, and save the result to the program in the 4-point of the device starting from M10.
In addition, when the comparative results (4 points starting from M10) are all ON (1), Y000 turns ON.

BKCMP<>/BIN 16-bit block data comparison

BKCMP<>(P)
Compare the BIN 16-bit data of point (n) starting from the device specified in (s1) with the BIN 16-bit data of point (n) starting from
the device specified in (s2), and store the operation result in the device specified in (d).
Ladder
-[BKCMP<> (s1) (s2) (d) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s1) Comparative data or the device storing comparative data -32768 to 32767 BIN16 bit ANY16_S
(s2) The device storing the comparison source data -32768 to 32767 BIN16 bit ANY16_S
(d) The start device storing the comparative result - Bit ANY_BOOL
(n) The number of comparative data 0 to 65535 BIN16 bit ANY16
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
Parameter 2 ●●●● ● ● ●
BKCMP<>
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Parameter 4 ●● ●● ●
373 WECON technology Co., Ltd.
 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Features
Compare the BIN 16-bit data of point (n) starting from the device specified in (s1) with the BIN 16-bit data of point (n) starting from
the device specified in (s2), and store the comparison result in point (n) starting from the device specified in (d).
• The corresponding device at point (n) starting from the device specified in (d) turns on when the comparison condition is satisfied,
and turns off when the comparison condition is not satisfied.

• Comparison operations are performed in 16-bit units.

• (s1) could specify a direct constant.

Instruction Sign condition Comparative results

BKCMP<> (s1)≠(s2) ON
• When all the comparison operation results stored in point (n) starting from (d) are ON (1), SM156 (block comparison signal) would
turn ON.

Error code
Error code Content

4085H When the specified device range for reading exceeds the range of the corresponding device
4086H When the specified device range for writing exceeds the range of the corresponding device
Example

When X020 is ON, use BKCMP<> instruction to compare the 4-point 16-bit data (BIN) starting from D100 and the 4-point 32-bit data
starting from D200, and save the result to the program in the 4-point of the device starting from M10.
In addition, when the comparative results (4 points starting from M10) are all ON (1), Y000 turns ON.

374 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DBKCMP<>/BIN32-bit block data comparison
DBKCMP<>(P)
Compare the BIN 32-bit data of point (n) starting from the device specified in (s1) with the BIN 32-bit data of point (n) starting from
the device specified in (s2), and store the operation result in the device specified in (d).
-[DBKCMP<> (s1) (s2) (d) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Data type
Parameter Content Range Data type
(label)
Comparative data or the device storing
(s1) -2147483648 to 2147483647 BIN32 bit ANY32_S
comparative data
(s2) The device storing the comparison source data -2147483648 to 2147483647 BIN32 bit ANY32_S
(d) The start device storing the comparative result - Bit ANY_BOOL
(n) The number of comparative data 0 to 65535 BIN32 bit ANY32_S
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●●● ● ● ● ●● ● ●
Parameter 2 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
DBKCMP<>
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Parameter 4 ●● ●● ●
Features
Compare the BIN 32-bit data of point (n) starting from the device specified in (s1) with the BIN 32-bit data of point (n) starting from
the device specified in (s2), and store the comparison result in point (n) starting from the device specified in (d).
• The corresponding device at point (n) starting from the device specified in (d) turns on when the comparison condition is satisfied,
and turns off when the comparison condition is not satisfied.

• Comparison operations are performed in 32-bit units.

• (s1) could specify a direct constant.

• (d) is specified outside the device range of point (n) starting from (s1) and (s2).
• The comparative operation result of each instruction is shown below.
Instruction sign Condition Comparative results
DBKCMP<> (s1)≠(s2) ON
• When all the comparison operation results stored in point (n) starting from (d) are ON (1), SM156 (block comparison signal) would
turn ON.

375 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Error code
Error code Content
4084H When (n) is out of range
4085H When the specified device range for reading exceeds the range of the corresponding device
4086H When the specified device range for writing exceeds the range of the corresponding device
Example

When X020 is ON, use DBKCMP<> instruction to compare the 4-point 32-bit data (BIN) starting from D100 and the 4-point 32-bit data
starting from D200, and save the result to the program in the 4-point of the device starting from M10.
In addition, when the comparative results (4 points starting from M10) are all ON (1), Y000 turns ON.

BKCMP>/BIN 16-bit block data comparison

BKCMP>(P)
Compare the BIN 16-bit data of point (n) starting from the device specified in (s1) with the BIN 16-bit data of point (n) starting from
the device specified in (s2), and store the operation result in the device specified in (d).
-[BKCMP> (s1) (s2) (d) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s1) Comparative data or the device storing comparative data -32768 to 32767 BIN16 bit ANY16_S
(s2) The device storing the comparison source data -32768 to 32767 BIN16 bit ANY16_S
(d) The start device storing the comparative result - Bit ANY_BOOL
(n) The number of comparative data 0 to 65535 BIN16 bit ANY16
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
Parameter 2 ●●●● ● ● ●
BKCMP>
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Parameter 4 ●● ●● ●
Features
Compare the BIN 16-bit data of point (n) starting from the device specified in (s1) with the BIN 16-bit data of point (n) starting from
the device specified in (s2), and store the comparison result in point (n) starting from the device specified in (d).
• The corresponding device at point (n) starting from the device specified in (d) turns on when the comparison condition is satisfied,
and turns off when the comparison condition is not satisfied.

• Comparison operations are performed in 16-bit units.

376 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
• (s1) could specify a direct constant.

Instruction sign Condition Comparative results

BKCMP> (s1)>(s2) ON
• When all the comparison operation results stored in point (n) starting from (d) are ON (1), SM156 (block comparison signal) would
turn ON.
Error code
Error code Content

4085H When the specified device range for reading exceeds the range of the corresponding device
4086H When the specified device range for writing exceeds the range of the corresponding device
Example

When X020 is ON, use BKCMP> instruction to compare the 4-point 16-bit data (BIN) starting from D100 and the 4-point 16-bit data
starting from D200, and save the result to the program in the 4-point of the device starting from M10.
In addition, when the comparative results (4 points starting from M10) are all ON (1), Y000 turns ON.

DBKCMP>/BIN32-bit block data comparison

DBKCMP>(P)
Compare the BIN 32-bit data of point (n) starting from the device specified in (s1) with the BIN 32-bit data of point (n) starting from
the device specified in (s2), and store the operation result in (d) In the specified device.
-[DBKCMP> (s1) (s2) (d) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Data type
Parameter Content Range Data type
(label)
Comparative data or the device storing
(s1) -2147483648 to 2147483647 BIN32 bit ANY32_S
comparative data
(s2) The device storing the comparison source data -2147483648 to 2147483647 BIN32 bit ANY32_S
(d) The start device storing the comparative result - Bit ANY_BOOL
(n) The number of comparative data 0 to 65535 BIN32 bit ANY32_S
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●●● ● ● ● ●● ● ●
DBKCMP> Parameter 2 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

377 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Parameter 4 ●● ●● ●
Features
Compare the BIN 32-bit data of point (n) starting from the device specified in (s1) with the BIN 32-bit data of point (n) starting from
the device specified in (s2), and store the comparison result in point (n) starting from the device specified in (d).
• The corresponding device at point (n) starting from the device specified in (d) turns on when the comparison condition is satisfied,
and turns off when the comparison condition is not satisfied.

• Comparison operations are performed in 32-bit units.

• (s1) could specify a direct constant.

• (d) is specified outside the device range of point (n) starting from (s1) and the device range of point (n) starting from (s2).
• The comparison operation result of each instruction is shown below.
Instruction sign Condition Comparative results
DBKCMP> (s1)>(s2) ON
• When all the comparative operation results stored in point (n) starting from (d) are ON (1), SM156 (block comparison signal) would
turn ON.
Error code
Error code Content
4084H When (n) is out of range
4085H When the specified device range for reading exceeds the range of the corresponding device

4086H When the specified device range for writing exceeds the range of the corresponding device
Example

When X020 is ON, use DBKCMP> instruction to compare the 4-point 32-bit data (BIN) starting from D100 and the 4-point 32-bit data
starting from D200, and save the result to the program in the 4-point of the device starting from M10.
In addition, when the comparative results (4 points starting from M10) are all ON (1), Y000 turns ON.

378 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
BKCMP>=/BIN 16-bit block data comparison
BKCMP>=(P)
Compare the BIN 16-bit data of point (n) starting from the device specified in (s1) with the BIN 16-bit data of point (n) starting from
the device specified in (s2), and store the operation result in the device specified in (d).
-[BKCMP>= (s1) (s2) (d) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s1) Comparative data or the device storing comparative data -32768 to 32767 BIN16 bit ANY16_S
(s2) The device storing the comparison source data -32768 to 32767 BIN16 bit ANY16_S
(d) The start device storing the comparative result - Bit ANY_BOOL
(n) The number of comparative data 0 to 65,535 BIN16 bit ANY16
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
Parameter 2 ●●●● ● ● ●
BKCMP>=
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Parameter 4 ●● ●● ●
Features
Compare the BIN 16-bit data of point (n) starting from the device specified in (s1) with the BIN 16-bit data of point (n) starting from
the device specified in (s2), and store the comparative result in point (n) starting from the device specified in (d).
• The corresponding device at point (n) starting from the device specified in (d) turns on when the comparison condition is satisfied,
and turns off when the comparison condition is not satisfied.

• Comparison operations are performed in 16-bit units.

• (s1) could specify a direct constant.

Instruction sign Condition Comparative results

BKCMP>= (s1)>=(s2) ON
• When all the comparative operation results stored in point (n) starting from (d) are ON (1), SM156 (block comparison signal) would

379 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
turn ON.
Error code
Error code Content
4085H When the specified device range for reading exceeds the range of the corresponding device
4086H When the specified device range for writing exceeds the range of the corresponding device
Example

When X020 is ON, use BKCMP>= instruction to compare the 4-point 16-bit data (BIN) starting from D100 and the 4-point 16-bit data
starting from D200, and save the result to the program in the 4-point of the device starting from M10.
In addition, when the comparative results (4 points starting from M10) are all ON (1), Y000 turns ON.

DBKCMP>=/BIN32-bit block data comparison

DBKCMP>=(P)
Compare the BIN 32-bit data of point (n) starting from the device specified in (s1) with the BIN 32-bit data of point (n) starting from
the device specified in (s2), and store the operation result in the device specified in (d).
-[DBKCMP>= (s1) (s2) (d) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Data type
Parameter Content Range Data type
(label)
Comparative data or the device storing
(s1) -2147483648 to 2147483647 BIN32 bit ANY32_S
comparative data
(s2) The device storing the comparison source data -2147483648 to 2147483647 BIN32 bit ANY32_S
(d) The start device storing the comparative result - Bit ANY_BOOL
(n) The number of comparative data 0 to 65535 BIN32 bit ANY32_S
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●●● ● ● ● ●● ● ●
Parameter 2 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
DBKCMP>=
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Parameter 4 ●● ●● ●
Features
Compare the BIN 32-bit data of point (n) starting from the device specified in (s1) with the BIN 32-bit data of point (n) starting from
the device specified in (s2), and store the comparative result in point (n) starting from the device specified in (d).
• The corresponding device at point (n) starting from the device specified in (d) turns on when the comparison condition is satisfied,
and turns off when the comparison condition is not satisfied.

• Comparison operations are performed in 32-bit units.

380 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
• (s1) could specify a direct constant.

• (d) is specified outside the device range of point (n) starting from (s1) and the device range of point (n) starting from (s2).
• The comparison operation result of each instruction is shown below
Instruction sign Condition Comparative results
DBKCMP>= (s1)>=(s2) ON
• When all the comparison operation results stored in point (n) at the beginning of (d) are ON (1), SM349 (block comparison signal)
will turn ON.
Error code
Error code Content

4084H When (n) is out of range

4085H When the specified device range for reading exceeds the range of the corresponding device
4086H When the specified device range for writing exceeds the range of the corresponding device
Example

When X020 is ON, use DBKCMP>= instruction to compare the 4-point 32-bit data (BIN) starting from D100 and the 4-point 32-bit data
starting from D200, and save the result to the program in the 4-point of the device starting from M10.
In addition, when the comparative results (4 points starting from M10) are all ON (1), Y000 turns ON.

BKCMP</BIN 16-bit block data comparison

BKCMP<(P)
Compare the BIN 16-bit data of point (n) starting from the device specified in (s1) with the BIN 16-bit data of point (n) starting from
the device specified in (s2), and store the operation result in the device specified in (d).
-[BKCMP< (s1) (s2) (d) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s1) Comparative data or the device storing comparative data -32768 to 32767 BIN16 bit ANY16_S
(s2) The device storing the comparison source data -32768 to 32767 BIN16 bit ANY16_S
(d) The start device storing the comparative result - Bit ANY_BOOL
(n) The number of comparative data 0 to 65535 BIN16 bit ANY16
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
Parameter 2 ●●●● ● ● ●
BKCMP<
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Parameter 4 ●● ●● ●
381 WECON technology Co., Ltd.
 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Features
Compare the BIN 16-bit data of point (n) starting from the device specified in (s1) with the BIN 16-bit data of point (n) starting from
the device specified in (s2), and store the comparative result in point (n) starting from the device specified in (d).
• The corresponding device at point (n) starting from the device specified in (d) turns on when the comparison condition is satisfied,
and turns off when the comparison condition is not satisfied.

• Comparison operations are performed in 16-bit units.

• (s1) could specify a direct constant.

Instruction sign Condition Comparative results

BKCMP< (s1)<(s2) ON
• When all the comparison operation results stored in point (n) starting from (d) are ON (1), SM156 (block comparison signal) would
turn ON.
Error code
Error code Content
4085H When the specified device range for reading exceeds the range of the corresponding device
4086H When the specified device range for writing exceeds the range of the corresponding device
Example

When X020 is ON, use BKCMP< instruction to compare the 4-point 16-bit data (BIN) starting from D100 and the 4-point 16-bit data
starting from D200, and save the result to the program in the 4-point of the device starting from M10.
In addition, when the comparative results (4 points starting from M10) are all ON (1), Y000 turns ON.

382 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DBKCMP</BIN 32-bit block data
DBKCMP<(P)
Convert the n characters (bit) in the HEX code data specified in (s) to ASCII codes, and store then after the device number specified in
(d).
-[DBKCMP< (P) (s) (d) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Data type
Parameter Content Range Data type
(label)
Comparative data or the device storing comparative
(s1) -2147483648 to 2147483647 BIN32 bit ANY32_S
data
(s2) The device storing the comparison source data -2147483648 to 2147483647 BIN32 bit ANY32_S
(d) The start device storing the comparative result - Bit ANY_BOOL
(n) The number of comparative data 0 to 65535 BIN32 bit ANY32_S
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●●● ● ● ● ●● ● ●
Parameter 2 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
DBKCMP<
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Parameter 4 ●● ●● ●
Features
Compare the BIN 32-bit data of point (n) starting from the device specified in (s1) with the BIN 32-bit data of point (n) starting from
the device specified in (s2), and store the comparative result in point (n) starting from the device specified in (d).
• The corresponding device at point (n) starting from the device specified in (d) turns on when the comparison condition is satisfied,
and turns off when the comparison condition is not satisfied.

• Comparison operations are performed in 32-bit units.

• (s1) could specify a direct constant.

• (d) is specified outside the device range of point (n) starting from (s1) and the device range of point (n) starting from (s2).
• The comparison operation result of each instruction is shown below.
Instruction sign Condition Comparative results
DBKCMP< (s1)>=(s2) ON
• When all the comparison operation results stored in point (n) starting from (d) are ON (1), SM349 (block comparison signal) would
turn ON.

383 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Error code
Error code Content

4084H When (n) is out of range

4085H When the specified device range for reading exceeds the range of the corresponding device
4086H When the specified device range for writing exceeds the range of the corresponding device
Example

When X020 is ON, use DBKCMP< instruction to compare the 4-point 32-bit data (BIN) starting from D100 and the 4-point 32-bit data
starting from D200, and save the result to the program in the 4-point of the device starting from M10.
In addition, when the comparative results (4 points starting from M10) are all ON (1), Y000 turns ON.

BKCMP<=/BIN16-bit block data comparison

BKCMP<=(P)
Compare the BIN 16-bit data of point (n) starting from the device specified in (s1) with the BIN 16-bit data of point (n) starting from
the device specified in (s2), and store the operation result in the device specified in (d).
-[BKCMP<= (s1) (s2) (d) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s1) Comparative data or the device storing comparative data -32768 to 32767 BIN16 bit ANY16_S
(s2) The device storing the comparison source data -32768 to 32767 BIN16 bit ANY16_S
(d) The start device storing the comparative result - Bit ANY_BOOL
(n) The number of comparative data 0 to 65535 BIN16 bit ANY16
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
Parameter 2 ●●●● ● ● ●
BKCMP<=
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Parameter 4 ●● ●● ●
Features
Compare the BIN 16-bit data of point (n) starting from the device specified in (s1) with the BIN 16-bit data of point (n) starting from
the device specified in (s2), and store the comparative result in point (n) starting from the device specified in (d).
• The corresponding device at point (n) starting from the device specified in (d) turns on when the comparison condition is satisfied,
and turns off when the comparison condition is not satisfied.

384 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
• Comparison operations are performed in 16-bit units.
• (s1) could specify a direct constant.

• When all the comparison operation results stored in point (n) starting from (d) are ON (1), SM156 (block comparison signal) would
turn ON.
Instruction sign Condition Comparative results
BKCMP<= (s1)>=(s2) ON
• When all the comparison operation results stored in point (n) starting from (d) are ON (1), SM156 (block comparison signal) would
turn ON.
Error code
Error code Content
4085H When the specified device range for reading exceeds the range of the corresponding device
4086H When the specified device range for writing exceeds the range of the corresponding device
Example

When X020 is ON, use BKCMP<= instruction to compare the 4-point 16-bit data (BIN) starting from D100 and the 4-point 16-bit data
starting from D200, and save the result to the program in the 4-point of the device starting from M10.
In addition, when the comparative results (4 points starting from M10) are all ON (1), Y000 turns ON.

DBKCMP<=/BIN32-bit block data comparison

DBKCMP<=(P)
Compare the BIN 32-bit data of point (n) starting from the device specified in (s1) with the BIN 32-bit data of point (n) starting from
the device specified in (s2), and store the operation result in the device specified in (d).
-[DBKCMP<= (s1) (s2) (d) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Data type
Parameter Content Range Data type
(label)
Comparative data or the device storing
(s1) -2147483648 to 2147483647 BIN32 bit ANY32_S
comparative data
(s2) The device storing the comparison source data -2147483648 to 2147483647 BIN32 bit ANY32_S
(d) The start device storing the comparative result - Bit ANY_BOOL
(n) The number of comparative data 0 to 65535 BIN32 bit ANY32_S

385 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Iarameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●●● ● ● ● ●● ● ●
Parameter 2 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
BKCMP<=
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Parameter 4 ●● ●● ●
Features
Compare the BIN 32-bit data of point (n) starting from the device specified in (s1) with the BIN 32-bit data of point (n) starting from
the device specified in (s2), and store the comparative result in point (n) starting from the device specified in (d).
• The corresponding device at point (n) starting from the device specified in (d) turns on when the comparison condition is satisfied,
and turns off when the comparison condition is not satisfied.

• Comparison operations are performed in 32-bit units.

• (s1) could specify a direct constant.

• (d) is specified outside the device range of point (n) starting from (s1) and the device range of point (n) starting from (s2).
• The comparison operation result of each instruction is shown below.
Instruction sign Condition Comparative results
DBKCMP<= (s1)>=(s2) ON
• When all the comparison operation results stored in point (n) starting from (d) are ON (1), SM156 (block comparison signal) would
turn ON.
Error code
Error code Content
4084H When (n) is out of range
4085H When the specified device range for reading exceeds the range of the corresponding device
4086H When the specified device range for writing exceeds the range of the corresponding device
Example

When X020 is ON, use DBKCMP<= instruction to compare the 4-point 32-bit data (BIN) starting from D100 and the 4-point 32-bit data
starting from D200, and save the result to the program in the 4-point of the device starting from M10.
In addition, when the comparative results (4 points starting from M10) are all ON (1), Y000 turns ON.

386 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
7.15 Data table operation instructions
SFRD/shift read
SFRD(P)
Data read instructions for first-in, first-out and control.
-[SFRD (s) (d) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
The start word device number storing data
(s) - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(The start is a pointer, and the data starts from (s)+1)
(d) The word device number storing the first-out data - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
It should be specified as the value of the number of points + 1
(n) 2 to 512 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
of the stored data. +1 is pointer
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
SFRD Parameter 2 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
Features
Transfer (s)+1 written sequentially to (d) by SFWR instruction, shift up each point (n)-1 by one word from (s)+1. The number of
stored data of (s) subtracts one.
The content of (s)+1 is transferred (read) to (d). At the same time, the content of the pointer (s) decreases, and the data is shifted up
by 1 word each. (In the continuous execution instruction SFRD, each operation cycle will shift, so the pulse execution instruction
SFRDP should be used for programming).

Related device
Devices Name Content
SM153 Zero bit Data readout usually starts from (s)+1, but when the pointer (s) is 0, the zero bit SM153 will operate.
✎Note:
The data after reading would not change the content of (s)+(n) due to reading.
In the case of continuous execution (SFRD) instructions, each scan time (operation cycle) will be read sequentially, but the content of
(s) + (n) would not change. When the pointer (s) is 0, it would become no processing, and the content of (d) would not change.

387 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Error code
Error code Content
When the value set in (n) is other than the following. 2≤(n)≤512
4084H
A negative value is specified in (s).
4085H When the device specified in the read application instruction (s) and (n) exceeds the corresponding device range.
4086H When the device specified in the write application instruction (s) and (d) exceeds the corresponding device range.
Example
The following examples illustrate the use of shift write (SFWR) and shift read (SFRD) instructions.
(1) Action content
1) While registering the product number, in order to realize the first-in-first-out principle, the following introduces an example
of a ladder circuit program that outputs the current product number.
2) The product number is a hexadecimal number with 4 digits or less, and the maximum inventory is below 99 points.
(2) Program
1) Program 1

Enter the product number from X0 to X17 and transfer it to D256

Data register D258 to D356 (99 points) for pointer D257 storing product number
Output the first-in product number to D357 according to the requirements

Output the product number that should be taken out in hex 4 digits to Y0 to Y17

2) Program 2

First-in-first-out data read instruction

Turn X0 from OFF to ON, and this instruction acts according to the following numbers 1 to 3. (The content of D10 remains
unchanged),
1 The content of D2 is read out and sent to D20.
2 D10 to D3 all shift one register to the right.
3 The contents of pointer D1 are reduced by 1.

388 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
POP/Read from the back of the data table
POP(P)
Read the last data written by the shift write instruction(SFWR) for first in first out/first in last out control.
-[POP (s) (d) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
The start device number that stores the first-in data (including
(s) - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
pointer data) (the start word device number that stores data)
(d) The device number that stores the last-out data - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(n) The points of stored data 2 to 512 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
instruction parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
POP Parameter 2 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
Features
For the word device of "(s) to (s)+(n)-1", the device of "(s) + instruction data (s)" will be read to (d) ( The last data written by the shift
write instruction (SFWR) for first-in first-out control is read to (d)). (N) Specifies 2 to 512.
The value of pointer data (s) is reduced by one.
First-in-last-out control data
Content
(S) Pointer data (the number of stored data)
(S)+1
(S) +2
(S) +3
Data field
......
(Data entered by shift write instruction (SFWR))
(S)+(n)-3
(S)+(n)-2
(S)+(n)-1

389 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
✎Note:
✎If the POP(P) instruction is programmed in continuous execution type, the instruction will be processed per cycle. Therefore, it may
not be possible to achieve the desired action. Generally, POP(P) instruction programming should be executed with "pulse execution
type" or "pulse specified contact".
✎When the current value of pointer (s) is 0, the zero flag SM153 turns on, and the POP(P) instruction becomes no processing.
✎When the current value of pointer (s) is 1, write 0 to (s), and the zero flag SM153 turns on.
Error code
Error code Content
(s)>(n)-1
4084H (s)<0
Data outside the specified range is entered in (n). 2≤(n)≤512
4085H When the device specified in the read application instruction (s) and (n) exceeds the corresponding device range
4086H When the device specified in the write application instruction (s) and (d) exceeds the corresponding device range
Example

Each time M1 is ON, for the values of D20 input first in D101 to D106, the last saved value would be saved in D10, and then the data
saved number (pointer D100) will be reduced by 1.
When the data entered first is the content in the table below.
Pointer D100 K3
D101 H1234
D102 H5678
D103 HABCD
Data
D104 H0000
D105 H0000
D106 H0000

390 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
SFWR/Shift write
SFWR(P)
Data writing instructions for first-in-first-out and control.
-[SFWR (s) ( d) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Data type
Parameter Content Range Data type
(label)
(s) The word device number that stores the data you want to enter first - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
The start word device number for storing data and shifting (the start
(d) - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
is pointer, and data starts from (d)+1)
(n) The value of points + 1 of stored data should be specified 2 to 512 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
SFWR Parameter 2 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
Features
Start from (d)+1, write the contents of (s) to point (n)-1, and the stored data of (d) add one. For example, if (d)=0, write to (d) +1,
(d)=1, write to (d)+2.
Through the first execution, the content of (s) is stored to (d)+1 and becomes the value of (s).
If the content of (s) is changed and executed for the second time, the content of (s) is stored to (d)+2, and the content of (d)+2
becomes (s) (in the continuous execution instruction SFWR, each operation cycle will be stored sequentially, so the pulse execution
instruction SFWRP should be used for programming). After that, the data will be filled in sequentially from the right, and the number
of data storage points is displayed by the content of the pointer (d).

Related device
Devices Name Content
When the content of pointer (s) exceeds (n)-1, it becomes no processing (no writing), and the carry flag SM151
SM151 carry
turns ON.
✎Note:
In the continuous execution type (SFWR) instruction, you should be noted that each scan time (operation cycle) will be stored

391 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
(overwritten) sequentially.
Error code
Error code Content
When the value set in (n) is other than the following. 2≤(n)≤512
4084H
A negative value is specified in (d).
4085H When the device specified in the read application instruction (s), (d) and (n) exceeds the corresponding device range.
4086H When the device specified in the write application instruction (d) exceeds the corresponding device range.
Example
The following examples illustrate the use of shift write (SFWR) and shift read (SFRD) instructions.
(1) Action content
1) While registering the product number, in order to realize the first-in-first-out principle, the following introduces an example
of a ladder circuit program that outputs the current product number.
2) The product number is a hexadecimal number with 4 digits or less, and the maximum inventory is below 99 points.
(2) Program
1) Program 1

Enter the product number from X0 to X17 and transfer it to D256

Data register D258 to D356 (99 points) for pointer D257 storing product
number
Output the first-in product number to D357 according to the requirements

Output the product number that should be taken out in hex 4 digits to Y0
to Y17

2) Program 2

First-in-first-out data read instruction

When X0=1, the content of D0 is stored in D2, and the content of D1 becomes 1. When X0 changes from OFF to ON again, the
content of D0 is stored in D3, the content of D1 becomes 2, and so on. If the content of D1 exceeds n-1, the instruction is not
processed, and the carry flag M8022 will be set to 1.

392 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
FINS/Data table data insertion
FINS(P)
Insert the BIN 16-bit data specified in (s) into the number (n) of the data table specified in (d). After the instruction is executed, the
data starting with number (n) in the data table will be postponed downward one by one.
-[FINS (s) (d) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s) The start number of device storing the inserted data - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(d) The starting number of table - word ANY16
(n) The position of the inserted table 1-512 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
FINS Parameter 2 ●●●● ● ● ●
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
Features
Insert the BIN 16-bit data specified in (s) into the number (n) of the data table specified in (d). After the instruction is executed, the
data starting with number (n) in the data table will be postponed downward one by one.

1 N: the number of data storage;

2 DTr: data table range;
3 When (n)=2, it will be inserted into (d)+2.
✎Note:
✎The range of device used in the data table is managed by user.
✎The range of the data table is (d) started from device (d) +1) after the number of data (d).
Error code
Error code Content
FINS(P) instruction is executed when the value of (d) is 0.
The storage data of the table of (d) exceeds 512.
4084H When the data set in (n) is other than the following, 1≤(n)≤512.
When the FINS(P) instruction is executed, the table position (n) of the inserted data is greater than data storage
number.
When the device specified in the read application instruction (s), (d) and (n) exceeds the corresponding device
4085H
range.
4086H When the device specified in the write application instruction (d) exceeds the corresponding device range.

393 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Example

When X10=ON, insert the data of D100 into No. 3 of the data table of D0 to D4.
However, when the number of saved data exceeds 7, the FINS(P) instruction is not executed (the device range used in the data table
is D0 to D7).

FDEL/Data deletion of data sheet

FDEL(P)
Delete the (n)th data of the data table specified in (d) and store it in the device specified in (s). After the instruction is executed, the
data after (n)+1 in the data table will be postponed forward one by one.
-[FDEL (s) (d) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s) The start number of the device stored deleted data - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(d) The starting number of the table - word ANY16
(n) The position of the deleted table 1-512 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
FDEL Parameter 2 ●●●● ● ● ●
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
Features
Delete the (n)th data of the data table specified in (d) and store it in the device specified in (s). After the instruction is executed, the
data after (n)+1 in the data table will be postponed forward one by one.

394 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

✎Note:
✎The user is responsible for the management of the device range used in the data sheet.
✎The range of the data table is (d) after the data storage number (d) of the device ((d) + 1).
Error code
Code Content
FDEL(P) instruction is executed when the value of (d) is 0.
The storage data of the table of (d) exceeds 512.
4084H
When the data set in (n) is other than the following, 1≤(n)≤512.
When the FDEL(P) instruction is executed, the table position (n) of the deleted data is greater than data storage number.
4085H When the device specified in the read application instruction (d) and (n) exceeds the corresponding device range.
4086H When the device specified in the write application instruction (s) and (d) exceeds the corresponding device range.

Example

When X10 is ON, delete the second data in the data table of D100 to D105, and save the deleted data in D0. However, when the
number of data saved is 0, do not execute the FDEL instruction. (The device range used in the data table is D100 to D107.)

395 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
7.16 IO refresh instruction
REF/IO refresh
REF(P)
Perform a batch reset between the devices specified in (d1) and (d2) of the same type. It is used when interrupting operation,
performing initial operation, or resetting control data.
Refresh n points at the beginning of the device specified in (s) to obtain or output external inputs
-[REF (s) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Data type
Parameter Content Range Data type
(label)
The start number When using X and Y: The lowest bit number could only be 0;
(s) Bit ANY_BOOL
of refreshed device When using HSC: HSC0 to HSC7
When using X and Y: It can only be the multiples of 8; Unsigned
(n) Refresh points ANY16_U
When using HSC: 1 to 8 BIN 16 bit
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ●
REF
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ●●●●● ●● ●
Features
It is a function that only refreshes the corresponding device during a scan, and obtains or outputs external inputs.
Acquisition of input and external output are performed in batches only after the END instruction of the program is executed, so pulse
signals could not be output to the outside in one scan. When the I/O refresh instruction is executed, the corresponding input (X) or
output (Y) will be forced to refresh during program execution, so pulse signals could be output to the outside in one scan.
It can be used between FOR to NEXT and CJ instructions.
It can be used to refresh the input and output in the interrupt subroutine to obtain the latest input information and output the
operation result in time.
The actual input port state change delay is determined by the filter time of the input components.
The actual output port status change delay is determined by the response time of the output components (such as relays). The
output contact during output refresh will act after the response time of the output relay (transistor).
The response lag time of the relay output type is about 10ms (maximum 20ms), the transistor output type high-speed output port is
about 10us, and the ordinary point output port is about 0.5ms.
There will still be a certain delay when X0 to X17 filter time is set to 0.
REF instruction could also refresh the value of high-speed counter HSC device. The value of high-speed counter is updated every
100us in normal use, if you need to get the latest values of high-speed counter immediately, you could use the REF instruction to do a
count refresh. After the instruction is executed, the value in HSC device is the latest high-speed counter.
Error code
Error code Content
The read address of (s) and (n) exceeds the device range.
4085H ✎Note: if (s)+(n) exceeds the maximum range of the device corresponding (s), an error will be reported
(s) use numbered device whose low bit is not 0
When (s) use X and Y, (n) is not the multiples of 8
4084H
When (s) use HSC: (n) exceeds the range of K1 to K8

396 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Use REF instruction to refresh high-speed counter value, but there is no OUT HSC instruction to open the
2585H
high-speed counter of the channel.
Example
(1) REF refreshes the X input or Y output

As in the example above, X0 to X7 can quickly update the input signal after M8 is turned on. After X0 triggers Y20, output Y20 to Y27
quickly through the next REF Y20 K8 instruction.
(2) REF refreshes the high-speed counter HSC

As in the example above, turn M0 OM, and refresh the current input pulse of high-speed counter, and store the latest high-speed
counter value in HSC0, and store the current high-speed counter value in R1000 address.

397 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
REFF/Input refresh (with filter setting)
REFF(P)
Temporarily change the filter effect of the digital filter of X0 to X17 to (n)ms. (n) The range is 0 to 60ms.
-[REFF (n)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(n) Filter value of X0 to X17 0 to 60 BIN16 bit ANY16

Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
REFF Parameter 1 ● ● ●● ● ●● ● ●
Features
In programmable controller, X0 to X17 use a digital filter. The default filter time constant is set by SD2280 and SD2281, and the filter
could be temporarily changed to 0 to 60ms through the REFF instruction.
When the high-speed counter or X input terminal interrupt function is used, the filter time of the relevant port is automatically the
shortest time, and the filter time of the irrelevant port is still the original set value.
MOV instruction could also be used to directly assign to SD2280 and SD2281 to change the filter time, but it would not change the
value of SD2280 and SD2281.
✎Note:
The X point filtering before this instruction may be out of control (if SD2280 and SD2281 are set to 0, the X point before the
instruction will be completely out of control).
Error code
Error code Content
4085H The (n) read address exceeds the device range
4084H (n) is not in the range of 0 to 60
Example

After M0 is turned on , the filter wave of X0 to X17 in the ladder program after the REFF instruction will temporarily be 3ms, and
SD2280 and SD2281 would not change.

398 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
7.17 Timing measure instruction
DUTY/Clock pulse generation instruction
DUTY
Set the user's timing clock output destination (SM340 to SM344) specified in (d) to ON according to the number of scans specified in
(n1), and set it OFF according to the number of scans specified in (n2).
-[DUTY (n1) (n2) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(n1) The number of scans that set to ON 0 to 32,767 Unsigned BIN16 ANY16
(n2) The number of scans that set to ON 0 to 32,767 Unsigned BIN16 ANY16
(d) Special register for timing clock output destination SM340 to SM344 Bit ANY_BOOL
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ●
DUTY Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ●
Parameter 3 ● ●
Features
Set the user's timing clock output destination (SM340 to SM344) specified in (d) to ON according to the number of scans specified in
(n1), and set it OFF according to the number of scans specified in (n2).

• The output destination special relay of the timing clock specified in (d) should be SM340 to SM344.
• Store the count value of the number of scans in SD340 to SD344 corresponding to the output destination special relay of the timing
clock specified in (d).
• The count value of the number of scans, SD340 to SD344, becomes (n1)+(n2) or reset when the instruction input (instruction) is
turned ON.
Special relay (d) for timing clock output Device for counting the number of scans
SM340 SD340
SM341 SD341
SM342 SD342
SM343 SD343
SM344 SD344
• The operation starts at the rising edge of instruction input, and the output destination special relay of the timing clock is turned
ON/OFF by the END instruction. Even if the instruction input is disconnected, the operation would not stop. It stops when it is STOP
or the power is off.
• The cases where (n1) and (n2) are set to 0 are as follows.
The status of (n1) and (n2) The ON/OFF status of (d)
(n1)=0, (n2)≥0 Fixed as (d)=OFF
(n1)>0, (n2)=0 Fixed as (d)=ON

399 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
• The related devices are shown below.
Special relay Name Content
SM340 Timing clock output 1
SM341 Timing clock output 2
SM342 Timing clock output 3 Timing clock output of DUTY instruction
SM343 Timing clock output 4
SM344 Timing clock output 5

Special register Name Content

SD340 Timing clock output 1 counts with scan number DUTY instruction timing clock output 1 scan count count value
SD341 Timing clock output 2 counts with scan number DUTY instruction timing clock output 2 scan count count value
SD342 Timing clock output 3 counts with scan number DUTY instruction timing clock output 3 scan count count value
SD343 Timing clock output 4 counts with scan number DUTY instruction timing clock output 4 scan count count value
SD344 Timing clock output 5 counts with scan number DUTY instruction timing clock output 5 scan count count value
✎Note:
The DUTY instruction could be used up to 5 times (dots). However, the same timing clock output destination could not be used in
multiple DUTY instructions.
Error code
Error code Content
4084H The written value of (n1) and (n2) exceed the range
4085H The device address of (n1) and (n2) exceed the range
4086H (d) is not in SM340 to SM344

408EH (d) of multiple DUTY instructions use the same SM device

Example
Use the DUTY instruction to make Y0 flip once every cycle.

Set M0, SM340 will be ON for one cycle and OFF for one cycle.

400 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
7.18 Random number instruction
RND/Random number instruction
RND(P)
A pseudo-random number from 0 to 32767 is generated, and the value is stored as a random number in the device specified in (d).
-[RND (P) (d)]
Content, range and data type

Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)

(d) The start number of the device storing random number --- Signed BIN16 ANY16

Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
RND Parameter 1 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
Features
A pseudo-random number from 0 to 32767 is generated, and the value is stored as a random number in the device specified in (d).
Error code
Error code Content
4086H The write address of (d) exceeds the device range
Example
Pseudo-random numbers from 0 to 9 would be generated.

Turn on M0 to generate a pseudo-random number between 0-9.

401 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
7.19 Preferred instruction
DEXMN/Preferred instruction
DEXMN(P)
The position of the given value that is closest to the target value in multiple given values is selected through calculation.
-[DEXMN (s1) (s2) (s3) (d1) (d2)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s1) Input data parameter array start device number Form type LIST
Select the maximum number of data and the
(s2) Form type LIST
start device number of the output mode
(s3) Target value 0 to 16777215 Unsigned BIN32 ANY32_U
(d1) Select result array start device number Form type LIST

(d2) Operation result array start device number Form type LIST
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●● ●
Parameter 2 ●● ●
DEXMN Parameter 3 ●● ●
Parameter 4 ●● ●
Parameter 5 ●● ●
Feature
(1) Instruction function description
From the data set given by S1, Select the data combination whose number is less than or equal to S2 (select the maximum number of
data) and the sum value is closest to S3 (target value). The selected result is stored in array D1 according to the position
corresponding to array S1.
The error code of the instruction execution is stored in D2, and the number of the selected is stored in D2+2, and the difference
between the selected array and the target value is stored in D2+4.
(2) Detailed parameter description
Input parameter S1
Unit Number of bytes Features Description Range
s1
Double word The number of input data Specify the number of input data 1 to 32
s1+1
s1+2
Double word The first data
s1+3
s1+4
Double word The second data
s1+5 Input data 0 to 16777215
... ... ...
s1+64
Double word The 32nd data
s1+65

402 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Input parameter S3
Unit Number of bytes Features Parameter Description Range
s2 Specify the maximum Specify the maximum number of 1 to s1. Due to the time
Double word
s2+1 number of selected data selected data limit, please refer the notes.
s2+2 Output mode selection:
0: the 0 value in the input array is not
Double word Output mode added to the output combination
s2+3
1. Add the 0 value in the input array to
the output combination

Input parameter S3
Unit Number of bytes Features Parameter Description Range
s3
Double word Specify target data Specify the selected target data 0 to 16777215
s3+1

Parameter d1
Unit Number of bytes Features Parameter Description Range

d1 Use bits to indicate the position of data

Selection result, each bit represents a
Double word Bit 0 corresponds to S1+2 Read-only
d1+1 data
Bit 1 corresponds to S1+4
d1+2
Double word Select the position of the 1st data
d1+3
The position of the data, relative to the
d1+4
Double word Select the position of the 2nd data offset of S1+2,
d1+5
0 means the data is in S1+2 Read-only
d1+N*2+2
Double word Select the position of the Nth data 3 means the data is in S1+8
d1+N*2+3
And so on
d1+64
Double word Select the position of the 32th data
d1+65

Parameter d2
Number Remarks Remarks
Unit Features Parameter Description
of bytes
-1: The number entered is out of range
d2
-2: The number of selected data is out
of range
-3: The target data is out of range
Select the ≥0: execute
Double -4: The input data is out of range
execution result Error code correctly
word (If there are repeated errors, the top
d2+1 OR Error code <0: Error code
error will be reported first. For example,
the number of inputs is 0 and the target
data is -30. At this time, an error of -1
will be reported)
d2+2 Double The number The number of Actually Read-only

403 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
d2+3 word selected selected data
d2+4 Double Minimum The current result
d2+5 word deviation minus the target value

d2+6 Double
Operation time Total time used (ms)
d2+7 word
d2+8 Number of
Double Read-only
Reserved combinations (where
d2+9 word
the result is)
d2+10
Double Cache for internal
to Internal use
word calculation
d1+73
✎Note:
In the case of a large number of data, a watchdog timeout may occur. This is because the calculation takes a lot of time.
The current timetable for this instruction is as below. Please use the maximum number of data selected according to the timetable.
The number of arrays 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
The number of selected Time unit (ms)
1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1
2 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1
3 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1
4 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1
5 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1
6 <0.1 <0.2 <0.2
7 <0.2 <0.2
8 <0.2

The number of arrays 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

The number of selected Time unit (ms)
1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1
2 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1
3 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.2 <0.2
4 <0.1 <0.1 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.4 <0.4 <0.4
5 <0.2 <0.2 <0.3 <0.4 <0.5 <0.6 <0.9 1.1
6 <0.2 <0.3 <0.3 <0.6 <0.9 1.2 1.8 2.5
7 <0.2 <0.4 <0.6 <0.9 1.4 2.2 3.4 5.9
8 <0.3 <0.4 <0.7 1.4 2.0 3.3 5.5 8.9
9 <0.3 <0.5 <0.9 1.5 2.6 4.6 7.9 13.4
10 <0.6 <1.0 1.7 3.2 5.8 10.4 18.4
11 1.1 2.2 3.7 6.9 12.8 23.3
12 2.3 4.4 8.2 15.2 28.8
13 4.9 9.3 17.5 32.8
14 10.5 19.8 37.5
15 23.0 43.0

404 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
16 46.8
The number of arrays 17 18 19 20 211 22 23 24
The number of selected Time unit (ms)
1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1
2 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1
3 <0.3 <0.3 <0.3 <0.3 <0.3 <0.3 <0.3 <0.3
4 <0.5 <0.6 <0.7 <0.8 <0.9 1.2 1.3 1.5
5 1.4 1.8 2.3 2.9 3.7 4.6 5.7 6.9
6 3.6 5.0 6.8 9.9 12.2 15.9 20.8 26.8
7 7.7 11.4 16.5 23.5 32.9 45.7 62.5 84.4
8 14.2 22.9 33.4 51.2 75.8 110.6 158.9 225.1
9 22.6 37.2 60.2 95.3 148.6 227.6 342.9
10 32.2 55.4 93.8 156.9 255.2
11 42.4 75.3 132.2 222.8
12 51.8 94.9 171.9
13 61.4 114.3 221.2
14 70.7 133.2
15 80.6 151.9
16 89.4 170.5
17 98.6 189.7
18 207.7

The number of arrays 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

The number of selected Time unit (ms)
1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1
2 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1
3 <0.3 <0.3 <0.4 <0.4 <0.5 <0.5 <0.6 <0.6
4 1.7 1.9 2.3 2.6 3.0 3.5 3.8 4.4
5 8.4 10.2 12.3 14.7 17.5 20.6 24.2 28.3
6 34.2 43.3 54.2 15.9 83.3 102.2 124.3 150.5
7 112.6 148.6 194.2 251.4 322.6 410.5 515.4 649.8
8 314.4 433.7 591.6
9
✎Note:Red text is the limit of exceeding the default scan cycle.
Error code
Error code Content
4084H Data range error. For details, see the error code of parameter d2
4085H The device addresses of (s1), (s2) and (s3) are out of range
4086H The device addresses of (d1) and (d2) are out of range
Example

405 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
When D200 = 8, D4 = 2, it means to take out two data from 8 groups of data, and the sum of the two data is closest to the data in D8.
Array data of D200 (S1):

Select a combination with a sum close to 300 from the data above, and the results selected by D300 (D1) are as below:

Bit 1 and Bit 3 of D300 are 1, and the data positions of 1 and 3 are currently selected. The indicated positions are D204 (99) and D208
(200).
D400 (D2) running results are as below:

If D400 is 0, the execution is correct.

If D402 is 2, the number of selected is 2.
If D404 is -1, the selected data combination sum value minus the target value difference is -1.
If D406 is 2, the use time is 2ms.

406 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

8 High-speed pulse output

8.1 High-speed pulse output instruction
ZRN/DZRN/Origin return
ZRN/DZRN
This instruction is to use the specified pulse speed and pulse output port to make the actuator move to the origin of action (DOG)
when the PLC and the servo drive work together, until the origin signal meets the conditions.
-[ZRN/DZRN (s1) (s2) (s3) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
1 to 32767
(s1) The speed when the origin return starts Signed BIN16/Signed BIN32 ANY16_S/ANY32_S
1 to 200000
1 to 32767
(s2) Crawl speed Signed BIN16/Signed BIN32 ANY16_S/ANY32_S
1 to 200000
The device number of the input number of
(s3) - Bit ANY_BOOL
the near-point signal (DOG) to be input.
(d) The device number (Y) that outputs pulse - Bit ANY_BOOL
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ●● ●
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ●● ●
ZRN
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ●
Parameter 4 ●
Features
This instruction is to use the specified pulse speed and pulse output port to make the actuator move to the origin of action (DOG)
when the PLC and the servo drive work together, until the origin signal meets the conditions.

.
• Specify the speed at the start of origin return in (s1). (It should be in the range of 1 to 200,000)
• Specify the crawling speed in (s2). (It should be in the range of 1 to 200,000)
• Specify the device number of the input number of the near-point signal (DOG) to be input in (s3).
• Specify the device that outputs pulses in (d). Only Y devices with positioning parameters could be specified.
• After the DOG contact signal of this instruction disappears, the pulse stops immediately.
• The pulse frequency could be modified during operation.
407 WECON technology Co., Ltd.
 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

✎Note:
Please do not duplicate soft components used for other controls.
When designing the near-point DOG, please consider that there is enough time to be ON to fully decelerate to the crawl speed.
Please set the near-point DOG between the reverse limit 1 (LSR) and the forward limit 1 (LSF). When near-point DOG, reverse limit 1
(LSR), forward limit 1 (LSF) do not form the relationship shown in the figure below, the action may not be performed.

Please make the crawling speed slow enough. Since it does not decelerate to stop, if the crawling speed is too fast, the stop position
will shift due to inertia.
Error code
Error code Content
4084H The data input in the application instruction (s1) and (s2) exceed the specified range
4085H The result output in the read application instruction (s1), (s2), (s3) and (d) exceed the device range
4088H The same pulse output axis (d) is used and has been started.
Example

Set Y1 as the output axis at a maximum speed of 200K, a offset speed of 500, and a acceleration/deceleration time of 100ms. Origin
return is performed at the frequency of 200Khz, and it runs at a crawling speed after receiving the origin signal X0, and it stops after
the X0 signal is reset.

408 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DSZR/DDSZR/Origin return
DSZR/DDSZR
The instruction is that when the PLC works with the servo drive, it uses the specified pulse speed and pulse output port and the
specified direction axis to move the actuator to the origin of the action (DOG) until the origin signal meets the conditions.
-[DSZR/DDSZR (s1) (s2) (s3) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
1 to 32767
(s1) The speed when the origin return starts Signed BIN16/Signed BIN32 ANY16_S/ANY32_S
1 to 200000
1 to 32767
(s2) Crawling speed Signed BIN16/Signed BIN32 ANY16_S/ANY32_S
1 to 200000
The device number of the input number of the
(s3) - Bit ANY_BOOL
near-point signal (DOG) to be input.
(d1) The device number (Y) that outputs pulse - Bit ANY_BOOL
(d2) Operation direction output port or bit variable
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ●● ●
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ●● ●
DSZR Parameter 3 ● ● ● ●
Parameter 4 ●
Parameter 5 ● ● ● ●
Features
The instruction is that when the PLC works with the servo drive, it uses the specified pulse speed and pulse output port and the
specified direction axis to move the actuator to the origin of the action (DOG) until the origin signal meets the conditions.

.
• Specify the speed at the start of origin return in (s1). (It should be in the range of 1 to 200000)
• Specify the crawling speed in (s2). (It should be in the range of 1 to 200000)
• Specify the device number of the input number of the near-point signal (DOG) to be input in (s3).
• Specify the device that outputs pulses in (d1). Only Y devices with positioning parameters could be specified.
• Specify the bit device that specify the pulse output direction signal in (d2). Only the device specified in parameters and universal
output could be specified.
• After the DOG contact signal of this instruction disappears, the pulse stops immediately.
• The pulse frequency could be modified during operation.

409 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

✎Note:
Please do not duplicate soft components used for other controls.
When designing the near-point DOG, please consider that there is enough time to be ON to fully decelerate to the crawl speed.
Please set the near-point DOG between the reverse limit 1 (LSR) and the forward limit 1 (LSF). When near-point DOG, reverse limit 1
(LSR), forward limit 1 (LSF) do not form the relationship shown in the figure below, the action may not be performed.

Please make the crawling speed slow enough. Since it does not decelerate to stop, if the crawling speed is too fast, the stop position
will shift due to inertia.
Error code
Error code Content
4084H The data input in the application instruction (s1) and (s2) exceed the specified range
4085H The result output in the read application instruction (s1), (s2), (s3), (d1) and (d2) exceed the device range
4088H The same pulse output axis (d1) is used and has been started.
Example

Set Y1 as the output axis and Y10 as the direction axis at a maximum speed of 200K, a offset speed of 500, and a
acceleration/deceleration time of 100ms. Origin return is performed at the frequency of 200Khz, and it runs at a crawling speed after
receiving the origin signal X0, and it stops after the X0 signal is reset.

410 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DVIT/DDVIT/16-bit data relative positioning
DVIT/DDVIT
This instruction outputs the specified number of pulses according to the specified port, frequency and running direction. When an
interrupt signal is received, it will stop after sending the specified number of pulses.
-[DVIT/DDVIT (s1) (s2) (d1) (d2) (d3)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
-32768 to +32767 Signed BIN16/
(s1) Specify the number of output pulses ANY16_S/ANY32_S
-2147483648 to 2147483647 Signed BIN32
1 to 32767 Signed BIN16/
(s2) Specify the frequency of output pulse ANY16_S/ANY32_S
1 to 200000 Signed BIN32
(d1) Specify output pulse port - Bit ANY_BOOL
(d2) Running direction output port or bit variable - Bit ANY_BOOL
(d3) Interrupt signal - Bit ANY_BOOL
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ●● ●
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ●● ●
DVIT Parameter 3 ●
Parameter 4 ● ● ● ●
Parameter 5 ● ● ●
Features
This instruction uses relative drive to perform 1st gear positioning. The specified positioning address adopts incremental mode, and
positioning is performed by specifying the moving direction and the moving amount (relative address) from the current position.
• Specify the number of output pulses in (s1). (It should be in the range of -2,147,483,647 to +2,147,483,647)
• Specify the instruction speed of user units in (s2). (It should be in the range of 1 to 200,000)
• Specify the device that outputs pulses in (d1). Only Y devices with positioning parameters can be specified.
• Specify the bit device of the pulse output direction signal in (d2). Only the devices and general outputs specified in the parameters
could be specified.
• Specify the bit device of the interrupt signal in (d3). Only the devices and general outputs specified in the parameters could be
specified.

411 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
✎Note:
Please do not duplicate device used for other controls.
If the positioning address (s1) is 0 when the instruction is started, it will end abnormally and report 4084H error.
Before the interrupt input signal 1 is detected, if the positioning address (s1) is changed to 0, the positioning operation will continue,
and the pulse output will stop after the input interruption, and it will end normally.
After the interrupt input signal 1 is detected, when the positioning address (s1) is changed to 0, it will decelerate to a stop, reverse
the output direction, and continue to operate until the positioning address of the interrupt is input, and end normally.
When the number of pulses is less than the number required for deceleration and stop, it stops immediately when the positioning
address is reached.
Error code
Error code Content
4084H The data input in the application instruction (s1) and (s2) exceed the specified range
4085H The result output in the read application instruction (s1), (s2), (d1), (d2) and (d3) exceed the device range
4088H The same pulse output axis (d1) is used and has been started.
Example

Set Y0 as the output axis and Y1 as the direction axis with the maximum speed of 200K, the offset speed of 500, and the
acceleration/deceleration time of 100ms, and run at a frequency of 200,000, and send 200,000 pulses after receiving the X0 signal.

412 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DRVI/DDRVI/Relative positioning
DRVI/DDRVI
Execute single-speed positioning instructions in relative drive mode. The method of specifying the movement distance from the
current position with positive/negative signs is also called incremental (relative) drive mode.
-[DRVI/DDRVI (s1) (s2) (d1) (d2)]
Content, range and data type
Data type
Parameter Content Range Data type
(label)

Specify the number of output pulses -32768 to 32767 Signed BIN16/ ANY16_S/
(s1)
(relative address) -2147483648 to +2147483647 Signed BIN32 ANY32_S

1 to 32,767 Signed BIN16/ ANY16_S/

(s2) Specify the frequency of output pulse
1 to 200,000 Signed BIN32 ANY32_S
(d1) Specify the device number of output pulse - Bit ANY_BOOL

(d2) Running direction output port or bit variable - Bit ANY_BOOL

Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ●● ●
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ●● ●
DRVI
Parameter 3 ●
Parameter 4 ● ● ● ●
Features
This instruction uses incremental mode (specified by position of relative address) to perform single-speed positioning.
With the current stop position as the starting point, specify the movement direction and movement amount (relative address) for
positioning.

• Specify the positioning address of the user unit with a relative address in (s1). (It should be in the range of -2147483647 to
+2147483647)
• Specify the instruction speed of user unit in (s2). (It should be in the range of 1 to 200,000)
• Specify the device that outputs pulses in (d1). Only Y devices with positioning parameters could be specified.
• Specify the bit device of the output direction signal in (d2). Only the devices and general outputs specified in the parameters could
be specified.
• The pulse frequency and pulse position could be modified during the operation of this instruction.

413 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

✎Note:
Please do not duplicate device used for other controls.
Error code
Error code Content
4084H The data input in the application instruction (s1) and (s2) exceed the specified range
4085H The result output in the read application instruction (s1), (s2), (d1) and (d2) exceed the device range
4088H The same pulse output axis (d1) is used and has been started.
Example

Set Y0 as the output axis, and Y1 as the direction axis with the maximum speed in 200K, and the offset speed in 500, and the
acceleration/deceleration time in 100ms. Send a high-speed pulse with acceleration and deceleration at a frequency of 200KHZ, and
a pulse number of 200K.

414 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DRVA/DDRVA/Absolute positioning
DRVA/DDRVA
Execute single-speed positioning instructions in absolute drive mode. The method of specifying the movement distance from the
origin (zero) is also called the absolute drive method.
-[DRVA/DDRVA (s1) (s2) (d1) (d2)]
Content, range and data type
Data type
Parameter Content Range Data type
(label)
Specify the number of output pulses -32768 to 32767 Signed BIN16 ANY16_S
(s1)
(absolute address) -2147483648 to 2147483647 Signed BIN32 ANY32_S
1 to 32767 Signed BIN16 ANY16_S
(s2) Specify the frequency of output pulse
1 to 200000 Signed BIN32 ANY32_S
(d1) Specify the device number of output pulse - Bit ANY_BOOL
(d2) Running direction output port or bit variable - Bit ANY_BOOL
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ●● ●
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ●● ●
DRVA
Parameter 3 ●
Parameter 4 ● ● ● ●
Features
This instruction uses absolute drive to perform single-speed positioning. The specified positioning address adopts the absolute
method, and the specified position (absolute address) is used for positioning based on the origin.

• Specify the positioning address of user unit with a absolute address in (s1). (It should be in the range of -2,147,483,647 to
+2,147,483,647)
• Specify the instruction speed of user unit in (s2). (It should be in the range of 1 to 200,000)
• Specify the device that outputs pulses in (d1). Only Y devices with positioning parameters could be specified.
• Specify the bit device of the output direction signal in (d2). Only the devices and general outputs specified in the parameters could
be specified.
• The pulse frequency and pulse position could be modified during the operation of this instruction.

415 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

✎Note:
Please do not duplicate device used for other controls.
Error code
Error code Content
4084H The data input in the application instruction (s1) and (s2) exceed the specified range
4085H The result output in the read application instruction (s1), (s2), (d1) and (d2) exceed the device range
4088H The same pulse output axis (d1) is used and has been started.

Example

Set Y0 as the output axis, and Y1 as the direction axis with the maximum speed in 200K, and the offset speed in 500, and the
acceleration/deceleration time in 100ms. Send a high-speed pulse with acceleration and deceleration at a frequency of 200KHZ,
starting at the origin position and ending at 200,000

416 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
PLSR/DPLSR/Pulse output with acceleration and deceleration
PLSR/DPLSR
Pulse output instruction with acceleration and deceleration function.
-[PLSR/DPLSR (s1) (s2) (s3) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Data type
Parameter Content Range Data type
(label)
(1 to 32767) Signed BIN16/ ANY16_S/
(s1) Specify the frequency of output pulse
(1 to +200000) Signed BIN32 ANY32_S
(0 to 32767) Signed BIN16/ ANY16_S/
(s2) Specify the number of output pulse
(0 to +2147483647) Signed BIN32 ANY32_S
Save acceleration and deceleration time (50 to 32000) Signed BIN16/ ANY16_S/
(s3)
(ms) data (0: No acceleration or deceleration) Signed BIN32 ANY32_S
(d) The device number of output pulse - Bit ANY_BOOL
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ●● ●
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ●● ●
PLSR
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ●● ●
Parameter 4 ●
Features
Pulse output instruction with acceleration and deceleration function.
• Specify the output instruction speed in (s1). (It should be in the range of 1 to 200,000)
• Specify the number of output pulses in (s2). (It should be in the range of 0 to +2,147,483,647)
• Specify the acceleration/deceleration time (ms) in (s3). (It should be in the range of 50 to 32,000. If set to 0, no acceleration or
deceleration will be performed)
• Specify the device that outputs pulses in (d). Only output devices (Y) with positioning parameters could be specified.

✎Note:
Please do not duplicate device used for other controls.

417 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Error code
Error code Content

4084H The data input in the application instruction (s1) and (s2) exceed the specified range
4085H The result output in the read application instruction (s1), (s2), (s3) and (d) exceed the device range
4088H The same pulse output axis (d) is used and has been started.
Example

Set Y0 as the output axis at a maximum speed of 200K, and a offset speed of 500, and a acceleration/deceleration time of 100ms.
Send a high-speed pulse with acceleration and deceleration at a frequency of 200KHZ, a pulse number of 200K.

418 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
PLSR2/Multi-speed positioning
PLSR2
The PLSR2 instruction sets parameters in the form of a table, and generates relative and absolute position pulse instructions
according to the specified port, frequency, running direction and acceleration/deceleration time in segments, so that the servo
actuator could make a given offset based on the current position.
-[PLSR2 (s) (d1) (d2)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
Signed BIN16/ ANY16_S/
(s) The parameter address is an area with Dn as the starting address -
Signed BIN32 ANY32_S
(d1) The device (Y) number of output pulse - Bit ANY_BOOL
(d2) Running direction output port or bit variable - Bit ANY_BOOL
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●● ●
PLSR2 Parameter 2 ●
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ●
Features
The PLSR2 instruction sets parameters in the form of a table, and generates relative and absolute position pulse instructions
according to the specified port, frequency, running direction and acceleration/deceleration time in segments, so that the servo
actuator could make a given offset based on the current position.
• Specify the parameter address in (s), which is an area with Dn as the starting address.
• Specify the device that outputs pulses in (d1). Only Y devices with positioning parameters could be specified.
• Specify the bit device of the output direction signal in (d2). Only the devices and general outputs specified in the parameters could
be specified.
• During the operation of this instruction, only the pulse frequency and pulse position of the last segment could be modified. If the
value exceeds the parameter range, it will stop with an error.
• The number of pulse segments could not be modified while the instruction is running. If the number of segments is modified, the
error will stop.
• When the instruction has a waiting condition or the reverse operation need to stop to restart, use the same start frequency and
end frequency as the first segment.
Instruction parameter configuration table:
Address offset (s) Content Instruction
(S) + 0 The number of pulse segments (1-n)
(S) + 1 Form identification Reserved
(S) + 2
The first segment pulse frequency 1HZ to 200,000HZ
(S) + 3
(S) + 4
The number of pulses in the first segment None
(S) + 5
0: Pulse sending completed
(S) + 6 The first segment waiting condition 1: Waiting time
2: Waiting signal (ON valid)

419 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
3: Waiting signal (OFF is effective)
4: Trigger signal (rising edge)
5: Trigger signal (falling edge)
(Use with [Waiting Condition] and [Waiting Register])
Correspondence between waiting conditions and waiting
register types:
Pulse sending completed: none
Waiting time: =0: D register;
=1: constant;
Waiting signal: =0: X-bit register;
(S) + 7 The first segment waiting register type =1: M-bit register;
=2: S-bit register;
=3: Y-bit register;
Trigger signal: =0: X-bit register;
=1: M-bit register;
=2: S-bit register;
=3: Y-bit register
(S) + 8 The first segment constant value/waiting
None
(S) + 9 register number
(S) + 10 The first segment operation mode 0: Relative mode; 1: Absolute mode
(S) + 11 Reserved Reserved
... ... ...
(S)+2+(n-1)*10
The Nth segment pulse frequency 1HZ to 200,000HZ
(S)+3+(n-1)*10
Parameter Description
(1) Number of pulse segments:
(s) + 0 is used to set the number of pulse segments (single word), and the number of segments needs to be greater than 0 segment,
Pay attention to whether the table range exceeds the maximum usable device value.
(2) Form ID:
(s) +1: reserved.
(3) Pulse mode:
(s) +(n-1)*10+10 (single word) is the pulse mode of the nth segment. When it is set to 0, it is relative mode, that is, the number of
pulses and the current position register are relative positions. When it is set to 1, it is absolute mode, that is, the pulse number and
current position register are absolute positions.
(4) Waiting conditions:
(s) +(n-1)*10+6 (single word) is the waiting condition of the nth segment, (s) +(n-1)*10+7 (single word) is the waiting register type, (s)
+ (n-1)*10+8 (double word) is the waiting register number or constant value.
Waiting condition = 0 means no waiting condition, = 1 means waiting time, = 2 means waiting signal (high level), = 3 means waiting
signal (low level), = 4 means trigger signal (rising edge)), = 5means trigger signal (falling edge).
The waiting condition is used in conjunction with the waiting register and the waiting register number/constant value.
1) No waiting conditions
When (s) +(n-1)*10+6=0, it is no waiting condition, that is, after the number of pulses set in this segment is executed, it will
immediately jump to the pulse segment specified later.

420 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Example one: Three pulses are needed now. The pulse frequency of the first segment is 2,000Hz, and the number of pulses is 2,000;
The pulse frequency of the second segment is 4,000Hz, and the number of pulses is 4,000; The pulse frequency of the third segment
is 6,000 with no waiting conditions.
The number of segments Pulse frequency The number of pulses Waiting mode Condition
1 20,000 20,000 No waiting conditions K0
2 40,000 40,000 No waiting conditions K0
3 60,000 60,000 No waiting conditions K0
The ladder program parameter settings are as follows:

The waveform diagram is as follows:

2) Waiting time
When (s) +(n-1)*10+6 =1, it is the waiting time. When (s) +(n-1)*10+7 =0, it is waiting D register, when =1, it is waiting constant.
After the pulse output of the current segment is completed, start timing. When the timing time is up, it will immediately jump to he
specified pulse segment; the timing time could be constant or specified by register D, unit: ms (range: 1-65,535ms).
Example 2: Three pulses are needed now. The pulse frequency of the first segment is 20,000Hz, and the number of pulses is 20,000,
and the waiting time is K100ms. The pulse frequency of the second segment is 40,000Hz, and the number of pulses is 40,000; and the
waiting time is K100ms. The pulse frequency of the third segment is 60,000,and the number of pulses is 60,000 with no waiting
conditions.
The number of segments Pulse frequency The number of pulses Waiting mode Condition
1 20,000 20,000 waiting time K100
2 40,000 40,000 waiting time D100
3 60,000 60,000 No waiting conditions K0

421 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
The ladder program parameter settings are as follows:

The waveform diagram is as follows:

3) Waiting signal
When (s) +(n-1)*10+6=2, it is waiting signal high level (ON status). When (s) +(n-1)*10+6 =3, it is waiting signal low level ( OFF status).
When (s) +(n-1)*10+7 =0, it means waiting for X signal, and =1 means waiting for M signal, =2 means waiting for S signal, =3 means
waiting for Y signal.
Example 3: Three pulses are needed now. The pulse frequency of the first segment is 20,000Hz, and the number of pulses is 20,000,
and the waiting signal is M2. The pulse frequency of the second segment is 40,000Hz, and the number of pulses is 40,000; and the
waiting signal is X2. The pulse frequency of the third segment is 60,000,and the number of pulses is 60,000 with no waiting
conditions.
The number of segments Pulse frequency The number of pulses Waiting mode Condition
1 20,000 20,000 Waiting signal high level M2
2 40,000 40,000 Waiting signal low level X2
3 60,000 60,000 No waiting conditions K0

422 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
The ladder program parameter settings are as follows:

The waveform diagram is as follows:

If the signal is received in advance, it will not decelerate to stop, but directly accelerate/decelerate to the specified speed of the next
segment. (X2 low level is received during operation)

4) Trigger signal
When (s) +(n-1)*10+6 =4, it is the rising edge of trigger signal. When (s) +(n-1)*10+6 = 5, it is the falling edge of trigger signal.
(s) +(n-1)*10+7 =0 means waiting for X signal, =1 means waiting for M signal, =2 means waiting for S signal, =3 means waiting for Y
signal.
After the current pulse segment starts to send pulses, if the external bit signal triggers operates (ON state) before the current number
of pulses are sent, the next pulse is sent immediately. At the end of the pulse transmission of the current segment, if the signal is not
triggered (OFF state), the next pulse will continue to be sent (that is, the configured pulse segment will be pulsed in a mode without
waiting conditions. But if the current pulse is receiving a trigger signal during the process, it will directly accelerate and decelerate to
the next pulse).
Example 4: Three pulses are needed now. The pulse frequency of the first segment is 20,000Hz, and the number of pulses is 20,000,

423 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
and the waiting signal is M2. The pulse frequency of the second segment is 40,000Hz, and the number of pulses is 40,000; and the
waiting signal is X2. The pulse frequency of the third segment is 60,000,and the number of pulses is 60,000 with no waiting
conditions.
The number of segments Pulse frequency The number of pulses Waiting mode Condition
1 20,000 20,000 Trigger signal rising edge M2
2 40,000 40,000 Trigger signal falling edge X2
3 60,000 60,000 No waiting conditions K0
The ladder program parameter settings are as follows:

The pulse waveform diagram is as follows:

If a signal is received in the acceleration section (deceleration section), it will directly accelerate (decelerate) in the current section to
the next pulse frequency.
✎Note: Please do not duplicate device used for other controls.
Error code
Error code Content
4084H The table parameter input data that exceeds the specified range
The table parameter with the first address in the read application instruction (s) exceeds the device range, and
4085H
the output result of the read parameter (s), (d1) and (d2) exceeds the device range
4088H The same pulse output axis (d1) is used and has been started.

424 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
PLSV/DPLSV/Variable speed operation
PLSV/DPLSV
Output variable speed pulse instruction with rotation direction. This instruction could change the speed with acceleration and
deceleration.
-[PLSV (s) (d1) (d2)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s) Specify output pulse frequency - Signed BIN16/Signed BIN32 ANY16_S/ANY32_S
(d1) Specify the number of output pulse - Bit ANY_BOOL
(d2) The device (Y) number of output pulse - Bit ANY_BOOL
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ●● ●
PLSV Parameter 2 ●
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ●
Features
This instruction is used to output variable speed pulse with rotation direction output.
• Specify the instruction speed of user units in (s). (It should be in the range of -200,000 to 200,000. When it is 0, stop sending pulse)
• Specify the device that outputs pulses in (d1). Only Y devices with positioning parameters could be specified.
• Specify the bit device of the output direction signal in (d2). Only the devices and general outputs specified in the parameters could
be specified.
• The pulse frequency could be modified while the instruction is running.

✎Note:
Please do not duplicate device used for other controls.
If the acceleration time is 0, no acceleration action will be performed, and the speed is changed to the instruction speed immediately.
If the deceleration time is 0, no deceleration action will be performed, and it will stop immediately when the drive contact is OFF.

425 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Error code
Error code Content
4084H The data input in the application instruction (s1) exceeds the specified range
4085H The result output in the read application instruction (s1), (d1) and (d2) exceed the device range

4088H The same pulse output axis (d1) is used and has been started.
Example
Set the highest frequency to 200,000K, the offset speed to 500, and the acceleration/deceleration time to 100ms.

The sending pulse is as follows:

426 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
PLSY/DPLSY/Pulse output
PLSY/DPLSY
The pulse specified in the instruction speed (s) is output from the device specified in the output (d) to the pulse specified pulse in the
positioning address (n).
-[PLSY/DPLSY (s) (n) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s) Specify output pulse frequency - Signed BIN16/Signed BIN32 ANY16_S/ANY32_S
(n) Specify the number of output pulse - Bit ANY_BOOL
(d) The device (Y) number of output pulse - Bit ANY_BOOL
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ●● ●
PLSY Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ●● ●
Parameter 3 ●
Features
• The pulse specified in the instruction speed (s) is output from the device specified in the output (d) to the pulse specified pulse in
the positioning address (n).
• Specify the instruction speed of user unit in (s). (It should be in the range of 1 to 200,000)
• Specify the positioning address of user unit with a relative address in (n). (It should be in the range of 0 to 2,147,483,647)
• Specify the device that outputs pulses in (d). Only Y devices with positioning parameters could be specified.
• The instruction pulse output has no acceleration/deceleration process.

✎Note:
Please do not duplicate device used for other controls. Since this instruction has no direction, the direction polarity is invalid, and it
always increases with the current address.
When the reverse limit is used, it will act as the forward limit.
Error code
Error code Content

4084H The data input in the application instruction (s) and (n) exceed the specified range
4085H The result output in the read application instruction (s), (n) and (d) exceed the device range
4088H The same pulse output axis (d) is used and has been started.

427 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Example
1 Unlimited pulse output: positioning address (operand (n)) = 0

2 Pulse output: positioning address (operand (n))> 0

428 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
PWM/BIN 16-bit pulse output
PWM
Output the ON time (16-bit data unit) specified in (s1) and the cycle pulse (16-bit data unit) specified in (s2) to the output destination
specified in (d).
-[PWM (s1) (s2) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s1) The ON time or the device number storing the ON time 0 to 32,767 Signed BIN16 ANY16_S
(s2) Cycle or the device number storing the cycle 1 to 32,767 Signed BIN16 ANY16_S
(d) The channel number and device number that pulse outputs - Bit ANY_BOOL
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ●● ●
PWM Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ●● ●
Parameter 3 ●
Features
Normal mode
• Output the ON time specified in (s1) and the cycle pulse specified in (s2) to the output destination specified in (d).

• Specify the output pulse width in (s1). (The setting range is 0 to 32,767)
• Specify the output pulse period in (s2). (The setting range is 1 to 32,767)
• Specify the device that outputs pulses in (d). Only Y devices with positioning
parameters can be specified.
• The pulse width and pulse period can be modified during pulse sending.
✎Note:
1 Please do not duplicate device used for other controls.
2 Set pulse width and cycle time. Please set the value of pulse width (s1) and period (s2) as (s1)≤(s2).
3 About pulse output: This instruction is executed in interrupt mode. When the instruction power flow is OFF, the output stops,
and (s1) and (s2) could be modified when the PWM instruction is executed. If it is modified to an incorrect parameter, the sending of
PWM pulse will be stopped.
Related device
Output shaft Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7
Percentage mode sign SM897 SM957 SM1017 SM1077 SM1137 SM1197 SM1257 SM1317

Output shaft Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7
PWM unit selection SM902 SM962 SM1022 SM1082 SM1142 SM1202 SM1262 SM1322
Take Y0 as an example: When SM902 is OFF, the Y0 PWM output cycle and pulse width are in "ms"; When SM902 is ON, the Y0
PWM output cycle and pulse width are in "us".
Error code
Error code Content
4084H The data input in the application instruction (s1) and (s2) exceed the specified range or (s1)>(s2)
4085H The result output in the read application instruction (s1), (s2) and (d) exceed the device range
4088H The same pulse output axis (d) is used and has been started.

429 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Example
The waveform diagram is shown as below..

PWM/PWM permil mode

PWM
The period parameter (s2), the average equal division is 1000 equal divisions, (s1) is the pulse duty ratio, and the setting of the
permil mode is used to output to the output target specified in (d).
-[PWM (s1) (s2) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s1) Set output pulse duty cycle 0 to 1000 Signed BIN16 ANY16_S
(s2) Set pulse output cycle 1 to 32767 Signed BIN16 ANY16_S
(d) Pulse output channel number, device number - Bit ANY_BOOL
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ●● ●
PWM Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ●● ●
Parameter 3 ●
Features
The period parameter (s2), the average equal division is 1000 equal divisions, (s1) is the pulse duty ratio, and the setting of the permil
mode is used to output to the output target specified in (d).
It is necessary to turn on the permil mode of the PWM instruction, and the corresponding related device:
Output shaft Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7
Permil mode sign SM897 SM957 SM1017 SM1077 SM1137 SM1197 SM1257 SM1317
Specify the output pulse duty ratio in (s1). (The setting range is 0 to 1000)
Specify the output pulse period in (s2). (The setting range is 1 to 32,767)
Specify the device that outputs the pulse in (d). Only Y devices with positioning parameters can be specified.
The calculation formula is: t (ms) = T0 (ms) * K / 1000
High level time (ms) = set cycle time (ms) x duty cycle / 1000
Low level time (ms) = period (ms) - high level time (ms)
That is, the period is set to 100ms, if the duty cycle is set to 500, the output is high for 50ms and low for 50ms; if the duty cycle
is set to 100, the output is high for 10ms and low for 90ms; If it is set to 900, the output will be high for 90ms and low for 10ms.
The fractional part of the calculated pulse output time is output by rounding.
The period and duty cycle can be modified during pulse sending.
✎Note:
1 Please be careful not to overlap with other control devices.
2 About pulse output: This instruction is executed in interrupt mode. When the instruction power flow is OFF, the output stops.
430 WECON technology Co., Ltd.
 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
(s1) and (s2) can be changed when the PWM instruction is executed. If it is modified to an incorrect parameter, the sending of PWM
pulse will be stopped.
Related device
• Permil mode flag
Output shaft Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7
Permil mode sign SM897 SM957 SM1017 SM1077 SM1137 SM1197 SM1257 SM1317

Output shaft Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7
PWM unit selection SM902 SM962 SM1022 SM1082 SM1142 SM1202 SM1262 SM1322
Take Y0 as an example: When SM902 is OFF, the Y0 PWM output cycle and pulse width are in "ms"; When SM902 is ON, the Y0
PWM output cycle and pulse width are in "us".
Error code
Error code Content
4084H The data input in the application instruction (s1) and (s2) exceed the specified range
4085H The result output in the read application instruction (s1), (s2) and (d) exceed the device range
4088H The same pulse output axis (d) is used and has been started.
Example
The period is set to 100ms, if the duty cycle is set to 500, the output is high for 50ms and low for 50ms; if the duty cycle is set to 100,
the output is high for 10ms and low for 90ms; duty cycle If it is set to 900, then the output is high for 90ms and low for 10ms;

The waveform diagram is as follows, the period is 300ms, the duty cycle is 100, and the output is 30ms high level and 270ms low
level:

431 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
G90G01 Absolute position line interpolation instruction
G90G01
Execute 2 axis/3 axis line interpolation instruction in absolute drive mode. The method of specifying the movement distance from the
origin point(zero point) is also called absolute drive mode.
-[G90G01 (s1) (s2) (d1) (d2) ]
Content, range and data type
Parameters Content Range Data type Data type tag
(s1) Specify the target position (absolute address) -2147483648 to +2147483647 Signed BIN32 ANY32_S
(s2) Specify the synthetic output frequency 1 to 141421 Signed BIN32 ANY32_S
(d1) Device (Y) number of output pulse Y0/Y2 Bit ANY_BOOL
(d2) Running direction output port or bit variable - Bit ANY_BOOL
Device used
Offset Pulse
Device
Instruction Parameters modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●
Parameter 2 ●● ●●
G90G01
Parameter 3 ●
Parameter 4 ● ●
Features
This instruction outputs pulses according to the specified port, frequency and running direction, and performs 2-axis/3-axis line
interpolation, and servo actuator runs to the target position according to the line interpolation.

 (s1) is the starting address, and occupies 6 consecutive addresses. s1 is the target position (absolute positioning) of X axis , s1+2 is
the target position (absolute positioning) of Y axis, and s1+4 is the target position (absolute positioning) of Z axis. The range is
-2147483648 to +2147483647.
 Specify the synthetic output frequency in (s2) . The range is 1 to 141421.
 Specify the device of output pulse in (s2) ,only Y0/Y2 could be specified, and consecutive addresses (Y0, Y1, Y2, Y3) are occupied .
SM345: Set the mode of switching line interpolation. When SM345=0, it is two-axis line interpolation mode. When
SM345=1, it is three-axis line interpolation mode.
If d1 specifies Y0 and SM345=0, Y0 and Y1 are occupied. If SM345=1, Y0, Y1 and Y2 are occupied;
If d1 specifies Y2 and SM345=0, Y2 and Y3 are occupied. If SM345=1, the software reports an error.
 Specify the bit device of output direction signal in d2 and occupy 3 consecutive addresses, which indicate the directions of the X, Y,
and Z axes in turn.

432 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
✎Note:
1 Please do not duplicate devices that used for other controls.
2 When using interpolation instructions, the parameter settings (such as acceleration/deceleration time and other
parameters) are subject to the starting axis specified by d1.
3 Only trapezoidal acceleration and deceleration are supported.
4 The actual synthetic frequency S (the minimum frequency value) is the lowest base frequency of the output synthetic
frequency. The calculation modes are as follows:

Maximum running frequency Maximum running frequency

Vmin  Vmin 
2  accelerat on tme  1000 2  decelerat on tme  1000
Error Codes

Error Codes Contents

4084H The data input in the application instruction (s1) and (s2) exceed the specified range
4085H The result output in the read application instruction (s1), (s2), (d1) and (d2) exceed the device range
4088H The same pulse output axis (d1) is used and has been started.
Example

Set Y0 as the interpolation starting axis, Y5 as the direction starting axis, and the maximum speed is 2000, the offset speed is 500,
and the acceleration/deceleration time is 500ms. Send a absolute position line interpolation output based on the original position
which is with acceleration and deceleration, and the end position is X (Y0) axis 100, Y (Y1) axis 100, and the pulse synthesis frequency
is 1000.

433 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
G91G01 Relative position line interpolation instruction
G91G01
Execute 2 axis/3 axis line interpolation instruction in relative drive mode. The method of specifying the movement distance from the
current position is also called incremental(relative) drive mode.
-[G91G01 (s1) (s2) (d1) (d2) ]
Content, range and data type
Parameters Content Range Data type Data type tag
(s1) Specify the target position (relative address) -2147483648 to 2147483647 Signed BIN32 ANY32_S
(s2) Specify the synthetic output frequency 1 to 141421 Signed BIN32 ANY32_S
(d1) Device (Y) number of output pulse Y0/Y2 Bit ANY_BOOL
(d2) Running direction output port or bit variable - Bit ANY_BOOL
Device used
Offset Pulse
Device
Instruction Parameters modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●
Parameter 2 ●● ●●
G91G01
Parameter 3 ●
Parameter 4 ● ●
Features
This instruction outputs pulses according to the specified port, frequency and running direction, and performs 2-axis line
interpolation, and servo actuator performs 2-axis line interpolation with a given offset based on the current position.

 (s1) is the starting address, and occupies 6 consecutive addresses. s1 is the target position (relative positioning) of X axis , s1+2 is
the target position (relative positioning) of Y axis, and s1+4 is the target position (relative positioning) of Z axis. The range is
-2147483648 to +2147483647.
 Specify the synthetic output frequency in (s2) . The range is 1 to 141421.
 Specify the device of output pulse in (s2), only Y0/Y2 could be specified, and consecutive addresses (Y0, Y1, Y2, Y3) are occupied .
SM345: Set the mode of switching line interpolation. When SM345=0, it is two-axis line interpolation mode. When
SM345=1, it is three-axis line interpolation mode.
If d1 specifies Y0 and SM345=0, Y0 and Y1 are occupied. If SM345=1, Y0, Y1 and Y2 are occupied;
If d1 specifies Y2 and SM345=0, Y2 and Y3 are occupied. If SM345=1, the software reports an error.
 Specify the bit device of output direction signal in d2 and occupy 3 consecutive addresses, which indicate the directions of the X, Y,
and Z axes in turn.

434 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
✎Note:
1 Please do not duplicate device that used for other controls.
2 When using interpolation instructions, the parameter settings (such as acceleration/deceleration time and other
parameters) are subject to the starting axis specified by d1.
3 Only trapezoidal acceleration and deceleration are supported.
4 The actual synthetic frequency S (the minimum frequency value) is the lowest base frequency of the output synthetic
frequency. The calculation modes are as follows:

Maximum running frequency Maximum running frequency

Vmin  Vmin 
2  accelerat on tme  1000 2  decelerat on tme  1000
Error Codes

Error Codes Contents

4084H The data input in the application instruction (s1) and (s2) exceed the specified range
4085H The result output in the read application instruction (s1), (s2), (d1) and (d2) exceed the device range
4088H The same pulse output axis (d1) is used and has been started.
Example

Set Y0 as the interpolation starting axis, Y5 as the direction starting axis, and the maximum speed is 2000, and the offset speed is 500,
and the acceleration/deceleration time is 500ms. Send a relative position line interpolation output based on the relative position
which is with acceleration and deceleration , and the incremental position is X (Y0) axis 100, Y (Y1) axis 100, and the pulse synthesis
frequency is 1000.

435 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
G90G02 Absolute position clockwise circular interpolation instruction
G90G02
Execute 2 axis clockwise circular interpolation instruction in absolute drive mode. The method of specifying the movement distance
from the origin point(zero point) is also called absolute drive mode.
-[G90G02 (s1) (s2) (s3) (d1) (d2) ]
Content, range and data type
Parameters Content Range Data type Data type tag
(s1) Specify the target position (absolute address) -2147483648 to 2147483647 Signed BIN32 ANY32_S
(s2) Radius/Center mode - Signed BIN32 ANY32_S
(s3) Specify the synthetic output frequency 1 to 100000 Signed BIN32 ANY32_S
(d1) Device(Y) number for output pulse Y0 Bit ANY_BOOL
(d2) Running direction output port or bit variable - Bit ANY_BOOL
Soft components
Offset Pulse
Device
Instruction Parameters modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●
Parameter 2 ●●
G90G02 Parameter 3 ●● ●●
Parameter 4 ●
Parameter 5 ● ●
Features
This instruction outputs pulses according to the specified port, frequency and running direction, and performs 2-axis clockwise
circular interpolation, and servo actuator performs clockwise circular interpolation to run to the target position point.

 (s1) is the starting address, and occupies 6 consecutive addresses. s1 is the target position (absolute positioning) of X axis , s1+2 is
the target position (absolute positioning) of Y axis, and s1+4 is the target position (absolute positioning) of Z axis. The range is
-2147483648 to +2147483647.
 Specify radius or center mode in (s2), and occupy 4 consecutive addresses. The center coordinate of s2+0 is in the difference value
of the number of pulse output of X axis relative to the current position, or the number of the pulse of radius R. The center
coordinate of s2+2 is in the difference value of the number of pulse output of Y axis relative to the current position. When using
radius, the value must be 0X7FFF FFFF. The range is 1 to 141421.
 Specify the synthetic output frequency in (s3) . The range is 1 to 100000.
 Specify the device of output pulse in (d1), only Y0 could be specified, and consecutive addresses (Y0, Y1) are occupied .

436 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
 Specify the bit device of output direction signal in (d2), and occupy 2 consecutive addresses, which indicate the directions of the X
and Y axes in turn.
✎Note
1 Please do not duplicate device that used for other controls.
2 When using interpolation instruction, the parameter settings (such as acceleration/deceleration time and other parameters)
are subject to the starting axis specified by d1.
3 The maximum radius supported by circular interpolation is plus or minus 800,000 pulses, and the radius cannot be zero.
4 There are two modes for setting s2: IJ mode (circle center coordinate mode) and R mode (radius mode). When the value of
s2+2 is set to 0x7FFF FFFF, it is R mode (radius mode), otherwise it is IJ mode (circle center coordinate mode).
5 IJ mode: Regardless of absolute position interpolation or relative position interpolation, s2 is only expressed as the
difference of the pulse output number between the coordinates of the center of the circle on the XY axis (Y0/Y1) relative to the
current position, and both are in the offset value.
6 R mode (radius mode): When the value of R is greater than 0, it indicates that it is an arc less than or equal to 180 degrees.
When the value of R is less than 0, it indicates that it is an arc greater than or equal to 180 degrees. A full circle cannot be generated
In R mode because there are infinite solutions.
7 When s1 indicates the relative position of the target position, a reasonable target position needs to be set to ensure that
the target arc path can be generated correctly. When s1+0=0 and s1+2=0, it means that a full circle is generated.
8 When using the interpolation instruction, parameter settings (such as celebration/deceleration time and so on) are subject
to the X axis (Y0);
9 The actual synthetic frequency S (the lowest frequency value) is the lowest base frequency of the output synthetic
frequency. The calculation modes are as follows:

Maximum running frequency Maximum running frequency

Vmin  Vmin 
2  accelerat on tme  1000 2  decelerat on tme  1000
Error Codes
Error Codes Contents

4084H The data input in the application instruction (s1) and (s2) exceed the specified range

4085H The result output in the read application instruction (s1), (s2), (d1) and (d2) exceed the device range

4088H The same pulse output axis (d1) is used and has been started.

4F90H In radius mode, the radius is not in the range.

In center/radius mode, the error of quadrant calculation is caused by the large deviation between the set
4F92H
coordinate of the end point and the theoretical end point of circle.
4F93H In radius mode, the chord length is greater than the diameter.
In center mode, the distance between the circle center and the starting point, and the distance between
4F95H
the circle center and the end point are not in the range of -10 to 10.
In radius mode, when the absolute/relative mode calculates that the starting point is the same as the target
4F96H
position, a full circle cannot be generated.
In center mode, the calculated radius distance is greater than the maximum radius range, which is positive
4F97H
or negative 800000 pulse.

437 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Example

Set Y0 as the interpolation starting axis, Y5 as the direction starting axis, and the maximum speed is 2000, and the offset speed is 500,
and the acceleration/deceleration time is 500ms. Send a absolute position clockwise circular interpolation output based on the
absolute position with acceleration and deceleration, and the target position is X (Y0) axis 100, Y (Y1) axis 100, and the the radius is
1000 pulse in radius mode, and the pulse synthesis frequency is 1000.

438 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
G91G02 Relative position clockwise circular interpolation instruction
G91G02
Execute 2 axis clockwise circular interpolation instruction in relative drive mode. The method of specifying the movement distance
from the current position is also called incremental(relative) drive mode.
-[G91G02 (s1) (s2) (s3) (d1) (d2) ]
Content, range and data type
Parameters Content Range Data type Data type tag
(s1) Specify the target position (relative address) -2147483648 to 2147483647 Signed BIN32 ANY32_S
(s2) Radius/center mode - Signed BIN32 ANY32_S
(s3) Specify the synthetic output frequency 1 to 100000 Signed BIN32 ANY32_S
(d1) Device (Y) number for output pulse Y0 Bit ANY_BOOL
(d2) Running direction output port or bit variable - Bit ANY_BOOL
Device used
Offset Pulse
Device
Instruction Parameters modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●
Parameter 2 ●●
G91G02 Parameter 3 ●● ●●
Parameter 4 ●
Parameter 5 ● ●
Features
This instruction outputs pulses according to the specified port, frequency and running direction, performs 2-axis clockwise circular
interpolation, and servo actuator performs 2-axis clockwise circular interpolation with a given offset based in current position.

 s1 is the starting address, and occupies 4 consecutive addresses. s1 is the target position of X axis (relative positioning), s1+2 is the
target position of Y axis (relative positioning). The range is -2147483648 to +2147483647.
 Specify radius or center mode in (s2), and occupy 4 consecutive addresses. The center coordinate of s2+0 is in the difference value
of the number of pulse output of X axis relative to the current position, or the number of the pulse of radius R. The center
coordinate of s2+2 is in the difference value of the number of pulse output of Y axis relative to the current position. When using
radius, the value must be 0X7FFF FFFF. The range is 1 to 141421.
 Specify the synthetic output frequency in (s3) . The range is 1 to 100000.
439 WECON technology Co., Ltd.
 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
 Specify the device of output pulse in (d1), only Y0 could be specified, and consecutive addresses (Y0, Y1) are occupied .
 Specify the bit device of output direction signal in (d2), and occupy 2 consecutive addresses, which indicate the directions of the X
and Y axes in turn.
✎Note:
1 Please do not duplicate device that used for other controls.
2 When using interpolation instruction, the parameter settings (such as acceleration/deceleration time and other parameters)
are subject to the starting axis specified by d1.
3 The maximum radius supported by circular interpolation is plus or minus 800,000 pulses, and the radius cannot be zero.
4 There are two modes for setting s2: IJ mode (circle center coordinate mode) and R mode (radius mode). When the value of
s2+2 is set to 0x7FFF FFFF, it is R mode (radius mode), otherwise it is IJ mode (circle center coordinate mode).
5 IJ mode: Regardless of absolute position interpolation or relative position interpolation, s2 is only expressed as the
difference of the pulse output number between the coordinates of the center of the circle on the XY axis (Y0/Y1) relative to the
current position, and both are in the offset value.
6 R mode (radius mode): When the value of R is greater than 0, it indicates that it is an arc less than or equal to 180 degrees.
When the value of R is less than 0, it indicates that it is an arc greater than or equal to 180 degrees. A full circle cannot be generated
In R mode because there are infinite solutions.
7 When s1 indicates the relative position of target position, a reasonable target position needs to be set to ensure that the
target arc path can be generated correctly. When s1+0=0 and s1+2=0, it means that a full circle is generated.
8 When using the interpolation instruction, parameter settings (such as celebration/deceleration time and so on) are subject
to the X axis (Y0);
9 The actual synthetic frequency S (the lowest frequency value) is the lowest base frequency of the output synthetic
frequency. The calculation modes are as follows:

Maximum running frequency Maximum running frequency

Vmin  Vmin 
2  accelerat on tme  1000 2  decelerat on tme  1000
Error Codes
Error Codes Contents

4084H The data input in the application instruction (s1) and (s2) exceed the specified range

4085H The result output in the read application instruction (s1), (s2), (d1) and (d2) exceed the device range

4088H The same pulse output axis (d1) is used and has been started.

4F90H In radius mode, the radius is not in the range.

In center/radius mode, the error of quadrant calculation is caused by the large deviation between the set
4F92H
coordinate of the end point and the theoretical end point of circle.
4F93H In radius mode, the chord length is greater than the diameter.
In center mode, the distance between the circle center and the starting point, and the distance between
4F95H
the circle center and the end point are not in the range of [-10-10].
In radius mode, when the absolute/relative mode calculates that the starting point is the same as the target
4F96H
position, a full circle cannot be generated.
In center mode, the calculated radius distance is greater than the maximum radius range, which is plus or
4F97H
minus 800,000 pulses.

440 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Example

Set Y0 as the interpolation starting axis, Y5 as the direction starting axis, and the maximum speed is 2000, and the offset speed is 500,
and the acceleration/deceleration time is 500ms. Send a relative position clockwise circular interpolation output based on relative
position with acceleration and deceleration, and the incremental position is X (Y0) axis 100, Y (Y1) axis 100, and the the radius is 1000
pulse in radius mode, and the pulse synthesis frequency is 1000.

441 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
G90G03 Absolute position counterclockwise circular interpolation instruction
G90G03
Execute 2 axis counterclockwise circular interpolation instruction in absolute drive mode. The method of specifying the movement
distance from the origin (zero point) is also called absolute drive method.
-[G90G03 (s1) (s2) (s3) (d1) (d2) ]
Content, range and data type
Parameters Content Range Data type Data type tag
(s1) Specify the target position (absolute address) -2147483648 to 2147483647 Signed BIN32 ANY32_S
(S2) Radius/center mode - Signed BIN32 ANY32_S
(s3) Specify the synthetic output frequency 1 to 100000 Signed BIN32 ANY32_S
(d1) Device (Y) number for output pulse Y0 Bit ANY_BOOL
(d2) Running direction output port or bit variable - Bit ANY_BOOL
Device used
Offset Pulse
Device
Instruction Parameters modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●
Parameter 2 ●●
G90G03 Parameter 3 ●● ●●
Parameter 4 ●
Parameter 5 ● ●
Features
This instruction outputs pulses according to the specified port, frequency and running direction, performs 2-axis counterclockwise
circular interpolation, and the servo actuator performs counterclockwise circular interpolation to run to the target position point.

 s1 is the starting address, and occupies 4 consecutive addresses. s1 is the target position of X axis (absolute positioning), s1+2 is
the target position of Y axis (absolute positioning). The range is -2147483648 to +2147483647.
 Specify radius or center mode in (s2), and occupy 4 consecutive addresses. The center coordinate of s2+0 is in the difference value
of the number of pulse output of X axis relative to the current position, or the number of the pulse of radius R. The center
coordinate of s2+2 is in the difference value of the number of pulse output of Y axis relative to the current position. When using
radius, the value must be 0X7FFF FFFF. The range is 1 to 141421.
442 WECON technology Co., Ltd.
 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
 Specify the synthetic output frequency in (s3) . The range is 1 to 100000.
 Specify the device of output pulse in (d1), only Y0 could be specified, and consecutive addresses (Y0, Y1) are occupied .
 Specify the bit device of output direction signal in (d2), and occupy 2 consecutive addresses, which indicate the directions of the X
and Y axes in turn.
✎Note:
1 Please do not duplicate device that used for other controls.
2 When using interpolation instruction, the parameter settings (such as acceleration/deceleration time and other parameters)
are subject to the starting axis specified by d1.
3 The maximum radius supported by circular interpolation is plus or minus 800,000 pulses, and the radius cannot be zero.
4 There are two modes for setting s2: IJ mode (circle center coordinate mode) and R mode (radius mode). When the value of
s2+2 is set to 0x7FFF FFFF, it is R mode (radius mode), otherwise it is IJ mode (circle center coordinate mode).
5 IJ mode: Regardless of absolute position interpolation or relative position interpolation, s2 is only as the difference of the
pulse output number between the coordinates of the center of the circle on the XY axis (Y0/Y1) relative to the current position, and
both are in the offset value.
6 R mode (radius mode): When the value of R is greater than 0, it indicates that it is an arc less than or equal to 180 degrees.
When the value of R is less than 0, it indicates that it is an arc greater than or equal to 180 degrees. A full circle cannot be generated
In R mode because there are infinite solutions.
7 When s1 indicates the relative position of target position, a reasonable target position needs to be set to ensure that the
target arc path can be generated correctly. When s1+0=0 and s1+2=0, it means that a full circle is generated.
8 When using the interpolation instruction, parameter settings (such as celebration/deceleration time and so on) are subject
to the X axis (Y0);
9 The actual synthetic frequency S (the lowest frequency value) is the lowest base frequency of the output synthetic
frequency. The calculation modes are as follows:

Maximum running frequency Maximum running frequency

Vmin  Vmin 
2  accelerat on tme  1000 2  decelerat on tme  1000
Error Codes
Error Codes Contents

4084H The data input in the application instruction (s1) and (s2) exceed the specified range

4085H The result output in the read application instruction (s1), (s2), (d1) and (d2) exceed the device range

4088H The same pulse output axis (d1) is used and has been started.

4F90H In radius mode, the radius is not in the range.

In center/radius mode, the error of quadrant calculation is caused by the large deviation between the set
4F92H
coordinate of the end point and the theoretical end point of circle.
4F93H In radius mode, the chord length is greater than the diameter.
In center mode, the distance between the circle center and the starting point, and the distance between
4F95H
the circle center and the end point are not in the range of [-10-10].
In radius mode, when the absolute/relative mode calculates that the starting point is the same as the target
4F96H
position, a full circle cannot be generated.
In center mode, the calculated radius distance is greater than the maximum radius range, which is plus or
4F97H
minus 800,000 pulses.

443 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Example

Set Y0 as the interpolation starting axis, Y5 as the direction starting axis, the maximum speed is 2000, the offset speed is 500, and the
acceleration/deceleration time is 500ms. Send a absolute position counterclockwise circular interpolation output based on relative
position with acceleration and deceleration, and the target position is X (Y0) axis 100, Y (Y1) axis 100, and the the radius is 1000 pulse
in radius mode, and the pulse synthesis frequency is 1000.

444 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
G91G03 Relative position counterclockwise circular interpolation instruction
G91G03
Execute 2 axis reverse circular interpolation instruction in relative drive mode. The method of specifying the movement distance from
the current position is also called relative (incremental)drive method.
-[G91G03 (s1) (s2) (s3) (d1) (d2) ]
Content, range and data type
Parameters Content Range Data type Data type
(s1) Specify the target position (relative address) -2147483648 to 2147483647 Signed BIN32 ANY32_S
(s2) Radius/center mode - Signed BIN32 ANY32_S
(s3) Specify the synthetic output frequency 1 to 100000 Signed BIN32 ANY32_S
(d1) Soft component (Y) number for output pulse Y0 Bit ANY_BOOL
(d2) Running direction output port or bit variable - Bit ANY_BOOL
Device used
Offset Pulse
Device
Instruction Parameters modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●
Parameter 2 ●●
G91G03 Parameter 3 ●● ●●
Parameter 4 ●
Parameter 5 ● ●
Features
This instruction outputs pulses according to the specified port, frequency and running direction, performs 2-axis counterclockwise
circular interpolation, and servo actuator performs a 2-axis counterclockwise circular interpolation with a given offset based in
current position.

 s1 is the starting address, and occupies 4 consecutive addresses. s1 is the target position of X axis (absolute positioning), s1+2 is
the target position of Y axis (absolute positioning). The range is -2147483648 to +2147483647.
 Specify radius or center mode in (s2), and occupy 4 consecutive addresses. The center coordinate of s2+0 is in the difference value
of the number of pulse output of X axis relative to the current position, or the number of the pulse of radius R. The center
coordinate of s2+2 is in the difference value of the number of pulse output of Y axis relative to the current position. When using
radius, the value must be 0X7FFF FFFF. The range is 1 to 141421.
 Specify the synthetic output frequency in (s3) . The range is 1 to 100000.

445 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
 Specify the device of output pulse in (d1), only Y0 could be specified, and consecutive addresses (Y0, Y1) are occupied .
 Specify the bit device of output direction signal in (d2), and occupy 2 consecutive addresses, which indicate the directions of the X
and Y axes in turn.
✎Note:
1 Please do not duplicate device that used for other controls.
2 When using interpolation instruction, the parameter settings (such as acceleration/deceleration time and other parameters)
are subject to the starting axis specified by d1.
3 The maximum radius supported by circular interpolation is plus or minus 800,000 pulses, and the radius cannot be zero.
4 There are two modes for setting s2: IJ mode (circle center coordinate mode) and R mode (radius mode). When the value of
s2+2 is set to 0x7FFF FFFF, it is R mode (radius mode), otherwise it is IJ mode (circle center coordinate mode).
5 IJ mode: Regardless of absolute position interpolation or relative position interpolation, s2 is only as the difference of the
pulse output number between the coordinates of the center of the circle on the XY axis (Y0/Y1) relative to the current position, and
both are in the offset value.
6 R mode (radius mode): When the value of R is greater than 0, it indicates that it is an arc less than or equal to 180 degrees.
When the value of R is less than 0, it indicates that it is an arc greater than or equal to 180 degrees. A full circle cannot be generated
In R mode because there are infinite solutions.
7 When s1 indicates the relative position of target position, a reasonable target position needs to be set to ensure that the
target arc path can be generated correctly. When s1+0=0 and s1+2=0, it means that a full circle is generated.
8 When using the interpolation instruction, parameter settings (such as celebration/deceleration time and so on) are subject
to the X axis (Y0);
9 The actual synthetic frequency S (the lowest frequency value) is the lowest base frequency of the output synthetic
frequency. The calculation modes are as follows:

Maximum running frequency Maximum running frequency

Vmin  Vmin 
2  accelerat on tme  1000 2  decelerat on tme  1000
Error Codes
Error Codes Contents

4084H The data input in the application instruction (s1) and (s2) exceed the specified range

4085H The result output in the read application instruction (s1), (s2), (d1) and (d2) exceed the device range

4088H The same pulse output axis (d1) is used and has been started.

4F90H In radius mode, the radius is not in the range.

In center/radius mode, the error of quadrant calculation is caused by the large deviation between the set
4F92H
coordinate of the end point and the theoretical end point of circle.
4F93H In radius mode, the chord length is greater than the diameter.
In center mode, the distance between the circle center and the starting point, and the distance between
4F95H
the circle center and the end point are not in the range of [-10-10].
In radius mode, when the absolute/relative mode calculates that the starting point is the same as the
4F96H
target position, a full circle cannot be generated.
In center mode, the calculated radius distance is greater than the maximum radius range, which is plus or
4F97H
minus 800,000 pulses.

446 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Example

Set Y0 as the interpolation starting axis, Y5 as the direction starting axis, the maximum speed is 2000, the offset speed is 500, and the
acceleration/deceleration time is 500ms. Send a relative position reverse circular interpolation output based on relative position
with acceleration and deceleration, and the incremental position is X (Y0) axis 100, Y (Y1) axis 100, and the the radius is 1000 pulse in
radius mode, and the pulse synthesis frequency is 1000.

447 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
G90G02H Absolute position clockwise circular helical interpolation instruction
G90G02H
Execute 3 axis clockwise circular interpolation instruction in absolute drive mode. The method of specifying the movement distance
from the origin point(zero point) is also called absolute drive mode.
-[G90G02H (s1) (s2) (s3) (d1) (d2) ]
Content, range and data type
Parameters Content Range Data type Data type
(s1) Specify the target position (absolute address) -2147483648 to +2147483647 Signed BIN32 ANY32_S
(s2) Radius/Center mode - Signed BIN32 ANY32_S
(s3) Specify synthetic output frequency 1 to 100000 Signed BIN32 ANY32_S
(d1) Device(Y) number for output pulse Y0 Bit ANY_BOOL
(d2) Running direction output port or bit variable - Bit ANY_BOOL
Device used
Offset Pulse
Device
Instruction Parameters modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●
Parameter 2 ●●
G90G02H Parameter 3 ●● ●●
Parameter 4 ●
Parameter 5 ● ●
Features
This instruction outputs pulses according to the specified port, frequency and running direction, and performs 3-axis clockwise
circular helical interpolation, and servo actuator performs clockwise helical interpolation to run to the target position point.

 (s1) is the starting address, and occupies 8 consecutive addresses. s1 is the target position (absolute positioning) of X axis , s1+2 is
the target position (absolute positioning) of Y axis, and s1+4 is the target position (absolute positioning) of Z axis, and s1+6 is the
lead range of Z axis. The lead range is 0  K  4 2 R .(The range is -2147483648 to +2147483647.)
 Specify radius or center mode in (s2), and occupy 4 consecutive addresses. The coordinate of circle center of s2+0 is in the
difference value of the number of pulse output of X axis relative to the current position, or the number of the pulse of radius R.
The coordinate of circle center of s2+2 is in the difference value of the number of pulse output of Y axis relative to the current
position. When using radius, the value must be 0X7FFF FFFF. The range is 1 to 141421.
 Specify the synthetic output frequency in (s3) . The range is 1 to 100000. Helical interpolation can switch the synthetic frequency

448 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
by setting SM901. 0 means default, and the synthetic frequency is the frequency of the linear velocity of helix. 1 means that the
synthetic frequency is the frequency of the linear velocity of the arc of arc plane, that is, the actual synthetic frequency is greater
than the setting synthetic frequency.
 Specify the device of output pulse in (d1), only Y0 could be specified, and consecutive addresses (Y0, Y1,Y2) are occupied .
 Specify the bit device of output direction signal in (d2), and occupy 3 consecutive addresses, which indicates the directions of the X,
Y and Z axes in turn. It is recommended to specify direction signal in (Y00-Y07).
✎Note:
1 Please do not duplicate device that used for other controls.
2 When using interpolation instruction, parameter settings (such as acceleration/deceleration time and other parameters) are
subject to the starting axis specified by d1.
3 The maximum radius supported by helical interpolation is plus or minus 800,000 pulses, and the radius cannot be zero.
4 There are two modes for setting s2: IJ mode (circle center coordinate mode) and R mode (radius mode). When the value of
s2+2 is set to 0x7FFF FFFF, it is R mode (radius mode), otherwise it is IJ mode (circle center coordinate mode).
5 IJ mode: Regardless of absolute position interpolation or relative position interpolation, s2 is only expressed as the
difference of the pulse output number between the coordinates of circle center on the XY axis (Y0/Y1) relative to the current
position, and both are in the offset value.
6 In helical interpolation R mode (radius mode): When the value of R is greater than 0, it indicates that from the starting point
coordinate to the set end point coordinate in the circular plane of XY is an arc less than or equal to 180 degrees. When the value of R
is less than 0, it indicates that from the starting point coordinate to the set end point coordinate in the circular plane of XY is an arc
greater than or equal to 180 degrees, and the actual passing angle is determined by the endpoint of Z axis and the lead K. ( If Ze=75,

Ze
lead K=50, and the actual radian   * 2 )
K

7 When using the interpolation instruction, parameter settings (such as acceleration/deceleration time and so on) are subject
to the X axis (Y0);
8 The actual synthetic frequency S (the lowest frequency value) is the lowest base frequency of the output synthetic
frequency. The calculation modes are as follows:

Maximum running frequency Maximum running frequency

Vmin  Vmin 
2  accelerat on tme  1000 2  decelerat on tme  1000
9 Exact match pitch of screws (lead) K and Ze .
The starting point coordinate of helical interpolation is 0,0,0 , set the end point coordinate to  Xe , Ye , Ze  ,the number of

turns of helical interpolation n is determined by formula (1), and recalculate the end point coordinates of X axis and Y axis
according to the number of turns of interpolation.
The final interpolation result is: make sure that lead is equal to K, and the end point of Z axis is equal to Ze .The actual end point

position of X and Y axes Xe ' ,Ye '  may not be equal to the set Xe, Ye  , but it must pass through the set point Xe, Ye  in the
whole circle.

Ze  Zs
n (1)
K

10 In helical interpolation radius mode, the center distribution table of whole circle is as below. (For example: the starting
point coordinate 0,0,0  ,the end point coordinate (0,0, Ze) ).
Helical interpolation Coordinate of circle Helical interpolation Coordinate of circle
Radius value R Radius value R
direction center direction center
R>0 (0, R） Counterclockwise R>0 （0, -R）
Clockwise circular
-R < 0 （0, -R） circular -R < 0 （0, R）

449 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Error Codes
Error Codes Contents

4084H The data input in the application instruction (s1) and (s2) exceed the specified range

4085H The result output in the read application instruction (s1), (s2), (d1) and (d2) exceed the device range

4088H The same pulse output axis (d1) is used and has been started.

4F90H In radius mode, the radius is not in the range.

In center/radius mode, the error of quadrant calculation is caused by the large deviation between the set
4F92H
coordinate of the end point and the theoretical end point of circle.
4F93H In radius mode, the chord length is greater than the diameter.
In center mode, the distance between the circle center and the starting point, and the distance between
4F95H
the circle center and the end point are not in the range of [-10-10].
In center mode, the calculated radius distance is greater than the maximum radius range, which is positive
4F97H
or negative 800,000 pulse.
Helical interpolation error, Z axis is the main axis.(The coordinate of Z axis is greater than the number of of
4F98H
virtual main axis of circular plane)
4F99H Helical interpolation error, Z axis is 0.
4F9BH Lead setting exceeds the range.(Lead K  0 )
Example

Set Y0 as the interpolation starting axis, Y4 as the direction starting axis, and the maximum speed is 2000, and the offset speed is 500,
and the acceleration/deceleration time is 500ms. Send a absolute position clockwise circular helical interpolation output based on
the absolute position with acceleration and deceleration, and the target position is X (Y0) axis 0, Y (Y1) axis 0 and Z (Y2) axis 5000,
and the lead is 5000, and the radius is 5000 pulse in radius mode, and the synthesis frequency is 1000.

450 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
G91G02H Relative position clockwise circular helical interpolation instruction
G91G02H
Execute 3 axis clockwise circular interpolation instruction in relative drive mode. The method of specifying the movement distance
from current point is also called incremental (relative) drive mode.
-[G91G02H (s1) (s2) (s3) (d1) (d2) ]
Content, range and data type
Parameters Content Range Data type Data type
(s1) Specify the target position (relative address) -2147483648 to 2147483647 Signed BIN32 ANY32_S
(s2) Radius/Center mode - Signed BIN32 ANY32_S
(s3) Specify synthetic output frequency 1 to 100000 Signed BIN32 ANY32_S
(d1) Device(Y) number for output pulse Y0 Bit ANY_BOOL
(d2) Running direction output port or bit variable - Bit ANY_BOOL
Device used
Offset Pulse
Device
Instruction Parameters modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●
Parameter 2 ●●
G91G02H Parameter 3 ●● ●●
Parameter 4 ●
Parameter 5 ● ●
Features
This instruction outputs pulses according to the specified port, frequency and running direction, and performs 3-axis clockwise
circular helical interpolation, and servo actuator performs clockwise helical interpolation to run to the target position point.

 (s1) is the starting address, and occupies 8 consecutive addresses. s1 is the target position (relative positioning) of X axis , s1+2 is
the target position (relative positioning) of Y axis, and s1+4 is the target position (relative positioning) of Z axis, and s1+6 is the lead
range of Z axis. The lead range is 0  K  4 2 R .(The range is -2147483648 to +2147483647.)
 Specify radius or center mode in (s2), and occupy 4 consecutive addresses. The coordinate of circle center of s2+0 is in the
difference value of the number of pulse output of X axis relative to the current position, or the number of the pulse of radius R.
The coordinate of circle center of s2+2 is in the difference value of the number of pulse output of Y axis relative to the current
position. When using radius, the value must be 0X7FFF FFFF. The range is 1 to 141421.
 Specify the synthetic output frequency in (s3). The range is 1 to 100000. Helical interpolation can switch the synthetic frequency

451 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
by setting SM901. 0 means default, and the synthetic frequency is the frequency of the linear velocity of helix. 1 means that the
synthetic frequency is the frequency of the linear velocity of the arc of arc plane, that is, the actual synthetic frequency is greater
than the setting synthetic frequency.
 Specify the device of output pulse in (d1), only Y0 could be specified, and consecutive addresses (Y0, Y1,Y2) are occupied .
 Specify the bit device of output direction signal in (d2), and occupy 3 consecutive addresses, which indicates the directions of the X,
Y and Z axes in turn. It is recommended to specify direction signal in (Y00-Y07).
✎Note:
1 Please do not duplicate device that used for other controls.
2 When using interpolation instruction, parameter settings (such as acceleration/deceleration time and other parameters) are
subject to the starting axis specified by d1.
3 The maximum radius supported by helical interpolation is plus or minus 800,000 pulses, and the radius cannot be zero.
4 There are two modes for setting s2: IJ mode (circle center coordinate mode) and R mode (radius mode). When the value of
s2+2 is set to 0x7FFF FFFF, it is R mode (radius mode), otherwise it is IJ mode (circle center coordinate mode).
5 IJ mode: Regardless of absolute position interpolation or relative position interpolation, s2 is only expressed as the
difference of the pulse output number between the coordinates of the circle center on the XY axis (Y0/Y1) relative to the current
position, and both are in the offset value.
6 In helical interpolation R mode (radius mode) : When the value of R is greater than 0, it indicates that from starting point
coordinate to the setting end point coordinate in the circular plane of XY is an arc less than or equal to 180 degrees. When the value
of R is less than 0, it indicates that from starting point coordinate to the setting end point coordinate in the circular plane of XY is an
arc greater than or equal to 180 degrees, and the actual passing angle is determined by the endpoint of Z axis and the lead K. ( If

Ze
Ze=75, lead K=50, and the actual radian   * 2 )
K

7 When using interpolation instruction, parameter settings (such as acceleration/deceleration time and so on) are subject to
the X axis (Y0);
8 The actual synthetic frequency S (the lowest frequency value) is the lowest base frequency of the output synthetic
frequency. The calculation modes are as follows:

Maximum running frequency Maximum running frequency

Vmin  Vmin 
2  accelerat on tme  1000 2  decelerat on tme  1000
9 Exact match pitch of screws (lead) K and Ze .
The starting point coordinate of helical interpolation is 0,0,0 , set the end point coordinate to  Xe , Ye , Ze  ,the number of

turns of helical interpolation n is determined by formula (1), and recalculate the end point coordinates of X axis and Y axis
according to the number of turns of interpolation.
The final interpolation result is: make sure that lead is equal to K, and the end point of Z axis is equal to Ze .The actual end point

position of X and Y axes Xe ' ,Ye '  may not be equal to the set Xe, Ye  , but it must pass through the set point Xe, Ye  in the
whole circle.

Ze  Zs
n (1)
K

10 In helical interpolation radius mode, the center distribution table of whole circle is as below. (For example: the starting
point coordinate 0,0,0  ,the end point coordinate (0,0, Ze) ).
Helical interpolation Coordinate of Helical interpolation Coordinate of
Radius value R Radius value R
direction circle center direction circle center
R>0 (0, R） Counterclockwise R>0 （0, -R）
Clockwise circular
-R < 0 （0, -R） circular -R < 0 （0, R）

452 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Error Codes
Error Codes Contents

4084H The data input in the application instruction (s1) and (s2) exceed the specified range

4085H The result output in the read application instruction (s1), (s2), (d1) and (d2) exceed the device range

4088H The same pulse output axis (d1) is used and has been started.

4F90H In radius mode, the radius is not in the range.

In center/radius mode, the error of quadrant calculation is caused by the large deviation between the set
4F92H
coordinate of the end point and the theoretical end point of circle.
4F93H In radius mode, the chord length is greater than the diameter.
In center mode, the distance between the circle center and the starting point, and the distance between the
4F95H
circle center and the end point are not in the range of [-10-10].
In center mode, the calculated radius distance is greater than the maximum radius range, which is positive or
4F97H
negative 800,000 pulse.
Helical interpolation error, Z axis is the main axis.(The coordinate of Z axis is greater than the number of of
4F98H
virtual main axis of circular plane)
4F99H Helical interpolation error, Z axis is 0.
4F9BH Lead setting exceeds the range.(Lead K  0 )
Example

Set Y0 as the interpolation starting axis, Y4 as the direction start axis, and the maximum speed is 2000, and the offset speed is 500,
and the acceleration/deceleration time is 500ms. Send a relative position clockwise circular helical interpolation output based on the
relative position with acceleration and deceleration, and the target position is X (Y0) axis 0, Y (Y1) axis 0 and Z (Y2) axis 5000, and the
lead is 5000, and the radius is 5000 pulse in radius mode, and the synthesis frequency is 1000.

453 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
G90G03H Absolute position counterclockwise circular helical interpolation instruction
G90G03H
Execute 3 axis counterclockwise circular interpolation instruction in absolute drive mode. The method of specifying the movement
distance from the origin point(zero point) is also called absolute drive mode.
-[G90G03H (s1) (s2) (s3) (d1) (d2) ]
Content, range and data type
Parameters Content Range Data type Data type
(s1) Specify the target position (absolute address) -2147483648 to 2147483647 Signed BIN32 ANY32_S
(s2) Radius/Center mode - Signed BIN32 ANY32_S
(s3) Specify synthetic output frequency 1 to 100000 Signed BIN32 ANY32_S
(d1) Device(Y) number for output pulse Y0 Bit ANY_BOOL
(d2) Running direction output port or bit variable - Bit ANY_BOOL
Device used
Offset Pulse
Device
Instruction Parameters modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●
Parameter 2 ●●
G90G03H Parameter 3 ●● ●●
Parameter 4 ●
Parameter 5 ● ●
Features
This instruction outputs pulses according to the specified port, frequency and running direction, and performs 3-axis
counterclockwise circular helical interpolation, and servo actuator performs counterclockwise helical interpolation to run to the
target position point.

 (s1) is the starting address, and occupies 8 consecutive addresses. s1 is the target position (absolute positioning) of X axis , s1+2 is
the target position (absolute positioning) of Y axis, and s1+4 is the target position (absolute positioning) of Z axis, and s1+6 is the
lead range of Z axis. The lead range is 0  K  4 2 R .(The range is -2147483648 to +2147483647.)
 Specify radius or center mode in (s2), and occupy 4 consecutive addresses. The coordinate of circle center of s2+0 is in the
difference value of the number of pulse output of X axis relative to the current position, or the number of the pulse of radius R.
The coordinate of circle center of s2+2 is in the difference value of the number of pulse output of Y axis relative to the current
position. When using radius, the value must be 0X7FFF FFFF. The range is 1 to 141421.
 Specify the synthetic output frequency in (s3). The range is 1 to 100000. Helical interpolation can switch the synthetic frequency

454 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
by setting SM901. 0 means default, and the synthetic frequency is the frequency of the linear velocity of helix. 1 means that the
synthetic frequency is the frequency of the linear velocity of the arc of arc plane, that is, the actual synthetic frequency is greater
than the setting synthetic frequency.
 Specify the device of output pulse in (d1), only Y0 could be specified, and consecutive addresses (Y0, Y1,Y2) are occupied .
 Specify the bit device of output direction signal in (d2), and occupy 3 consecutive addresses, which indicates the directions of the X,
Y and Z axes in turn. It is recommended to specify direction signal in (Y00-Y07).
✎Note:
1 Please do not duplicate device that used for other controls.
2 When using interpolation instruction, parameter settings (such as acceleration/deceleration time and other parameters) are
subject to the starting axis specified by d1.
3 The maximum radius supported by helical interpolation is plus or minus 800,000 pulses, and the radius cannot be zero.
4 There are two modes for setting s2: IJ mode (circle center coordinate mode) and R mode (radius mode). When the value of
s2+2 is set to 0x7FFF FFFF, it is R mode (radius mode), otherwise it is IJ mode (circle center coordinate mode).
5 IJ mode: Regardless of absolute position interpolation or relative position interpolation, s2 is only expressed as the
difference of the pulse output number between the coordinates of the center of the circle on the XY axis (Y0/Y1) relative to the
current position, and both are in the offset value.
6 In helical interpolation R mode (radius mode): When the value of R is greater than 0, it indicates that from starting point
coordinate to the setting end point coordinate in the circular plane of XY is an arc less than or equal to 180 degrees. When the value
of R is less than 0, it indicates that from starting point coordinate to the setting end point coordinate in the circular plane of XY is an
arc greater than or equal to 180 degrees, and the actual passing angle is determined by the endpoint of Z axis and the lead K. ( If

Ze
Ze=75, lead K=50, and the actual radian   * 2 )
K

7 When using the interpolation instruction, parameter settings (such as acceleration/deceleration time and so on) are subject
to the X axis (Y0);
8 The actual synthetic frequency S (the lowest frequency value) is the lowest base frequency of the output synthetic
frequency. The calculation modes are as follows:

Maximum running frequency Maximum running frequency

Vmin  Vmin 
2  accelerat on tme  1000 2  decelerat on tme  1000
9 Exact match pitch of screws (lead) K and Ze .
The starting point coordinate of helical interpolation is 0,0,0 , set the end point coordinate to  Xe , Ye , Ze  ,the number of

turns of helical interpolation n is determined by formula (1), and recalculate the end point coordinates of X axis and Y axis
according to the number of turns of interpolation.
The final interpolation result is: make sure that lead is equal to K, and the end point of Z axis is equal to Ze .The actual end point

position of X and Y axes Xe ' ,Ye '  may not be equal to the set Xe, Ye  , but it must pass through the set point Xe, Ye  in the
whole circle.

Ze  Zs
n (1)
K

10 In helical interpolation radius mode, the center distribution table of whole circle is as below. (For example: the starting
point coordinate 0,0,0  ,the end point coordinate (0,0, Ze) ).
Helical interpolation Radius Coordinate of Helical interpolation Radius Coordinate of circle
direction value R circle center direction value R center
R>0 (0, R） Counterclockwise R>0 （0, -R）
Clockwise circular
-R < 0 （0, -R） circular -R < 0 （0, R）

455 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Error Codes
Error Codes Contents

4084H (S1) (s2) input data that exceeds the specified range in application instruction.

4085H The output result of (s1)(s2)(d1)(d2) in the read application instruction exceeds the device range.

4088H The same pulse output axis (d1) is used and has been started.

4F90H In radius mode, the radius is not in the range.

In center/radius mode, the error of quadrant calculation is caused by the large deviation between the set
4F92H
coordinate of the end point and the theoretical end point of circle.
4F93H In radius mode, the chord length is greater than the diameter.
In center mode, the distance between the circle center and the starting point, and the distance between the
4F95H
circle center and the end point are not in the range of [-10-10].
In center mode, the calculated radius distance is greater than the maximum radius range, which is positive or
4F97H
negative 800,000 pulse.
Helical interpolation error, Z axis is the main axis.(The coordinate of Z axis is greater than the number of of
4F98H
virtual main axis of circular plane)
4F99H Helical interpolation error, Z axis is 0.
4F9BH Lead setting exceeds the range. (Lead K  0 )
Example

Set Y0 as the interpolation starting axis, Y4 as the direction starting axis, and the maximum speed is 2000, and the offset speed is 500,
and the acceleration/deceleration time is 500ms. Send a absolute position counterclockwise circular helical interpolation output
based on the absolute position with acceleration and deceleration, and the target position is X (Y0) axis 0, Y (Y1) axis 0 and Z (Y2) axis
5000, and the lead is 5000, and the radius is 5000 pulse in radius mode, and the synthesis frequency is 1000.

456 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
G91G03H Relative position counterclockwise circular helical interpolation instruction
G91G03H
Execute 3 axis counterclockwise circular interpolation instruction in relative drive mode. The method of specifying the movement
distance from current point is also called incremental (relative) drive mode.
-[G91G03H (s1) (s2) (s3) (d1) (d2) ]
Content, range and data type
Parameters Content Range Data type Data type
(s1) Specify the target position (relative address) -2147483648 to 2147483647 Signed BIN32 ANY32_S
(s2) Radius/Center mode - Signed BIN32 ANY32_S
(s3) Specify synthetic output frequency 1 to 100000 Signed BIN32 ANY32_S
(d1) Device(Y) number for output pulse Y0 Bit ANY_BOOL
(d2) Running direction output port or bit variable - Bit ANY_BOOL
Device used
Offset Pulse
Device
Instruction Parameters modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●
Parameter 2 ●●
G91G03H Parameter 3 ●● ●●
Parameter 4 ●
Parameter 5 ● ●
Features
This instruction outputs pulses according to the specified port, frequency and running direction, and performs 3-axis
counterclockwise circular helical interpolation, and servo actuator performs counterclockwise helical interpolation to run to the
target position point.

 (s1) is the starting address, and occupies 8 consecutive addresses. s1 is the target position (relative positioning) of X axis , s1+2 is
the target position (relative positioning) of Y axis, and s1+4 is the target position (relative positioning) of Z axis, and s1+6 is the lead

0 K 4 2 R
range of Z axis. The lead range is .(The range is -2147483648 to +2147483647.)

 Specify radius or center mode in (s2), and occupy 4 consecutive addresses. The coordinate of circle center of s2+0 is in the
difference value of the number of pulse output of X axis relative to the current position, or the number of the pulse of radius R.
The coordinate of circle center of s2+2 is in the difference value of the number of pulse output of Y axis relative to the current
position. When using radius, the value must be 0X7FFF FFFF. The range is 1 to 141421.
 Specify the synthetic output frequency in (s3). The range is 1 to 100000. Helical interpolation can switch the synthetic frequency

457 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
by setting SM901. 0 means default, and the synthetic frequency is the frequency of the linear velocity of helix. 1 means that the
synthetic frequency is the frequency of the linear velocity of the arc of arc plane, that is, the actual synthetic frequency is greater
than the setting synthetic frequency.
 Specify the device of output pulse in (d1), only Y0 could be specified, and consecutive addresses (Y0, Y1,Y2) are occupied .
 Specify the bit device of output direction signal in (d2), and occupy 3 consecutive addresses, which indicates the directions of the X,
Y and Z axes in turn. It is recommended to specify direction signal in (Y00-Y07).
✎Note:
1 Please do not duplicate device that used for other controls.
2 When using interpolation instruction, parameter settings (such as acceleration/deceleration time and other parameters) are
subject to the starting axis specified by d1.
3 The maximum radius supported by helical interpolation is plus or minus 800,000 pulses, and the radius cannot be zero.
4 There are two modes for setting s2: IJ mode (circle center coordinate mode) and R mode (radius mode). When the value of
s2+2 is set to 0x7FFF FFFF, it is R mode (radius mode), otherwise it is IJ mode (circle center coordinate mode).
5 IJ mode: Regardless of absolute position interpolation or relative position interpolation, s2 is only expressed as the
difference of the pulse output number between the coordinates of the circle center on the XY axis (Y0/Y1) relative to the current
position, and both are in the offset value.
6 In helical interpolation R mode (radius mode) : When the value of R is greater than 0, it indicates that from starting point
coordinate to the setting end point coordinate in the circular plane of XY is an arc less than or equal to 180 degrees. When the value
of R is less than 0, it indicates that from starting point coordinate to the setting end point coordinate in the circular plane of XY is an
arc greater than or equal to 180 degrees, and the actual passing angle is determined by the endpoint of Z axis and the lead K. ( If

Ze
Ze=75, lead K=50, and the actual radian   * 2 )
K

7 When using interpolation instruction, parameter settings (such as acceleration/deceleration time and so on) are subject to
the X axis (Y0);
8 The actual synthetic frequency S (the lowest frequency value) is the lowest base frequency of the output synthetic
frequency. The calculation modes are as follows:

Maximum running frequency Maximum running frequency

Vmin  Vmin 
2  accelerat on tme  1000 2  decelerat on tme  1000
9 Exact match pitch of screws (lead) K and Ze .
The start point coordinate of helical interpolation is 0,0,0 , set the end point coordinate to  Xe , Ye , Ze  ,the number of turns

of helical interpolation n is determined by formula (1), and recalculate the end point coordinates of X axis and Y axis according
to the number of turns of interpolation.
The final interpolation result is: make sure that lead is equal to K, and the end point of Z axis is equal to Ze .The actual end point

position of X and Y axes Xe ' ,Ye '  may not be equal to the set Xe, Ye  , but it must pass through the set point Xe, Ye  in the
whole circle.

Ze  Zs
n (1)
K

10 In helical interpolation radius mode, the center distribution table of whole circle is as below. (For example: the start point
coordinate 0,0,0  ,the end point coordinate (0,0, Ze) ).
Helical interpolation Radius Coordinate of Helical interpolation Radius Coordinate of circle
direction value R circle center direction value R center
R>0 (0, R） Counterclockwise R>0 （0, -R）
Clockwise circular
-R < 0 （0, -R） circular -R < 0 （0, R）

458 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Error Codes
Error Codes Contents

4084H (S1) (s2) input data that exceeds the specified range in application instruction.

4085H The output result of (s1)(s2)(d1)(d2) in the read application instruction exceeds the device range.

4088H The same pulse output axis (d1) is used and has been started.

4F90H In radius mode, the radius is not in the range.

In center/radius mode, the error of quadrant calculation is caused by the large deviation between the set
4F92H
coordinate of the end point and the theoretical end point of circle.
4F93H In radius mode, the chord length is greater than the diameter.
In center mode, the distance between the circle center and the starting point, and the distance between the
4F95H
circle center and the end point are not in the range of [-10-10].
In center mode, the calculated radius distance is greater than the maximum radius range, which is positive or
4F97H
negative 800,000 pulse.
Helical interpolation error, Z axis is the main axis.(The coordinate of Z axis is greater than the number of of
4F98H
virtual main axis of circular plane)
4F99H Helical interpolation error, Z axis is 0.
4F9BH Lead setting exceeds the range.(Lead K  0 )
Example

Set Y0 as the interpolation starting axis, Y4 as the direction starting axis, and the maximum speed is 2000, and the offset speed is 500,
and the acceleration/deceleration time is 500ms. Send a relative position counterclockwise circular helical interpolation output
based on the relative position with acceleration and deceleration, and the target position is X (Y0) axis 0, Y (Y1) axis 0 and Z (Y2) axis
5000, and the lead is 5000, and the radius is 5000 pulse in radius mode, and the synthesis frequency is 1000.

459 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
8.2 General matters of high-speed pulse output instruction
Related bit devices
(1) Pulse sending flag bit
When high-speed pulse are being sending, the flag bit is ON. When pulse is not sent or after pulse is sent, the flag bit is OFF.
Special device:
Output axis Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7
Pulse sending SM880 SM940 SM1000 SM1060 SM1120 SM1180 SM1240 SM1300
(2) Pulse sending completion flag bit
When high-speed pulse is sent, the flag bit is ON.
Special device:
Output axis Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7
Pulse sending SM882 SM942 SM1002 SM1062 SM1122 SM1182 SM1242 SM1302
During process of pulse sending, if the forward rotation limit, the reverse rotation limit, and the output stop (SM34) signal are
encountered, the flag bit will be ON after stopping the pulse.
If the contact is closed directly, this flag bit will not be set after deceleration stop.(Except for PLSV)
(3) Forward limit and reverse limit
When using a servo motor, you can set the forward rotation limit or reverse rotation limit on the servo amplifier.

When positioning instruction action, such as the limit switch of forward limit or reverse limit, acts, please set and connect forward
limit 1 (LSF) and reverse limit 1(LSR) on the CPU module if you want to use CPU for retreat, and these two limits should act before the
forward limit 2 or the reverse limit 2 of the servo amplifier.

Special device:
Output axis Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7
Forward limit SM883 SM943 SM1003 SM1063 SM1123 SM1183 SM1243 SM1303
Reverse limit SM884 SM944 SM1004 SM1064 SM1124 SM1184 SM1244 SM1304
If forward limit 1(LSF) and reverse limit 1(LSR) are not set, servo motor will stop automatically even if the forward limit 2 or the
reverse limit 2 is in action. But the positioning instruction in action can’t identify this situation, it will output pulses until the
instruction ends.
When forward limit or reverse limit acts, it will stop according the set stop method (deceleration stop, immediate stop).
If the instruction has no direction, then both the forward limit and the reverse limit are valid for the instruction.
(4) Direction polarity
When [0: increase current address by forward pulse output] is selected, the current address increases when the forward pulse is
output, and decreases when the reverse pulse is output.
When [1: Increase current address by reverse pulse output] is selected, the current address is increased during reverse pulse output
and decreased during forward pulse output.
460 WECON technology Co., Ltd.
 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
The default is 0: increase the current address through forward pulse output。
Special device:
Output axis Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7
Direction polarity SM885 SM945 SM1005 SM1065 SM1125 SM1185 SM1245 SM1305
(5) Origin return correlation (ZRN)
Origin return enable [default is 1: enable the origin return function]
Select [0: turn off origin return function], that is, the origin return instruction is disabled and cannot be used.
Select [1: turn on origin return function], that is, the origin return instruction is enabled and can be used normally.
Origin return direction [default is 0: the direction of origin return is negative]
Select [0: the direction of origin return is negative], that is, the pulse output count is negative.
Select [1: the direction of origin return is positive], that is, the pulse output count is positive.
Special device:
Output axis Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7
Origin return enable SM886 SM946 SM1006 SM1066 SM1126 SM1186 SM1246 SM1306
Origin return direction SM887 SM947 SM1007 SM1067 SM1127 SM1187 SM1247 SM1307
(6) External signal correlation
External signal start [default is 0: turn off the external signal start function]
Select [0: turn off external signal start function], that is, the external signal start function is not used.
Select [1: turn on external signal start function], that is, when an external signal is received, the pulse will be sent.
External signal logic [default is 0: OFF signal]
Select [0:OFF signal], that is, when the signal is OFF, it means the signal is received.
Select [1: ON signal], that is, when the signal is ON, it means the signal is received.
For the specific external signal, refer to the external signal of the word Devices. The external signal is affected by the scan cycle and is
judged in the instruction. If the X signal is used as an external signal, the signal is affected by the X point filtering.
Special device:
Output axis Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7
External signal start SM892 SM952 SM1012 SM1072 SM1132 SM1192 SM1252 SM1312
External signal logic SM893 SM953 SM1013 SM1073 SM1133 SM1193 SM1253 SM1313

461 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
(7) Interrupt signal correlation (DVIT)
Interrupt positioning enable [default is 1: enable interrupt positioning function]:
Select [0: Disable interrupt positioning function]: interrupt positioning instruction is disabled and cannot be used.
Select [1: enable interrupt positioning function]: interrupt positioning instruction is enabled and can be used normally. [The
default is on]
Interrupt signal logic [default is 0: ON signal]:
Select [0: ON signal], that is, when the signal is ON, it means the signal is received.
Select [1: OFF signal], that is, when the signal is OFF, it means the signal is received.
Special device:
Output axis Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7
Interrupt signal enable SM894 SM954 SM1014 SM1074 SM1134 SM1194 SM1254 SM1314
Interrupt signal logic SM895 SM955 SM1015 SM1075 SM1135 SM1195 SM1255 SM1315
(8) Stop immediately flag bit
Special device:
Output axis Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7
Pulse stops immediately SM898 SM958 SM1018 SM1078 SM1138 SM1198 SM1258 SM1318
When the flag bit is [1: pulse sending stop immediately], that is, pulse sending stops immediately without acceleration or
deceleration. This flag is not affected by the scan cycle.

(9) Not scanned

When the flag bit is [0: continue to send pulse], if the instruction is not scanned in the current scan cycle (such as called in the event
interrupt subroutine), then continue to send pulse. At this time, it should be noted that if the instruction is scanned after the
pulse sending is stopped, the pulse sending will continue.
When the flag bit is [1: stop sending pulse], if the instruction is not scanned in the current scan cycle (such as called in the event
interrupt subroutine), then it will decelerate and stop.
Output axis Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7
Not scanned SM899 SM959 SM1019 SM1079 SM1139 SM1199 SM1259 SM1319
(10) The description of start speed
Start speed=(Maximum speed - bias speed )/acceleration time
But the starting speed will be the following value according to the relationship between the instruction speed and the base speed.
 Bias speed < start speed < instruction speed: start speed = start speed.(It will be the value of above calculation)
 Bias speed <= instruction speed < start speed: start speed = instruction speed.
 Start speed < bias speed, or instruction speed < bias speed: start speed = bias speed.
 Maximum speed < bias speed: start speed = maximum speed.

462 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Related word devices
(1) Location address
Store the current address operated positioning instruction. Store the absolute address in the current address and increase or
decrease according to the pulse direction.This parameter is saved when power off.
Special device:
Output axis Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7
[SD881, [SD941, [SD1001, [SD1061, [SD1121, [SD1181, [SD1241, [SD1301,
Location address
SD880] SD940] SD1000] SD1060] SD1120] SD1180] SD1240] SD1300]
(2) Current frequency
Store the real-time running frequency operated by the positioning instruction.
Special device:
Output axis Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7
[SD885, [SD945, [SD1005, [SD1065, [SD1125, [SD1185, [SD1245, [SD1305,
Current frequency
SD884] SD944] SD1004] SD1064] SD1124] SD1184] SD1244] SD1304]
(3) Maximum speed
Set the upper limit (maximum speed) of instruction speed, origin return speed, and crawl speed. The range is: (1 to 200K), and
calculate according to the boundary value if it exceeds the range.
Even if it is within the setting range, please set the relationship of bias speed <= instruction speed <= maximum speed.
If bias speed > maximum speed, then use the lower frequency to send, that is, the highest frequency.
Special device:
Output axis Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7
[SD899, [SD959, [SD1019, [SD1079, [SD1139, [SD1199, [SD1259, [SD1319,
Maximum speed
SD898] SD958] SD1018] SD1078] SD1138] SD1198] SD1258] SD1318]
(4) Bias speed
Set the lower limit value (offset speed) of the instruction speed, home return speed, and crawl speed.
The setting range is: (1 to 200K), and the over range is calculated according to the boundary value.
Even if it is within the setting range, please set the relationship of bias speed <= instruction speed <= maximum speed.
If the bias speed>maximum speed, then use the lower frequency to send, that is, the highest frequency.
Special device:
Output axis Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7
[SD901, [SD961, [SD1021, [SD1081, [SD1141, [SD1201, [SD1261, [SD1321,
Bias speed
SD900] SD960] SD1020] SD1080] SD1140] SD1200] SD1260] SD1320]
(5) Acceleration time
Set the acceleration time from the bias speed to the maximum speed.
The acceleration time can be set in the range of 15 to 32767ms. If it exceeds the range, it will be modified to the value closest to the
range.
Special device:
Output axis Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7
Accelerated Time SD902 SD962 SD1022 SD1082 SD1142 SD1202 SD1262 SD1322
✎Note: When the acceleration time is set to 0, there is no acceleration process.
(6) Deceleration time
Set the deceleration time from the maximum speed to the bias speed.
The deceleration time can be set in the range of 15 to 32767ms. If it exceeds the range, it will be modified to the value closest to the
463 WECON technology Co., Ltd.
 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
range.
Special device:
Output axis Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7
Deceleration time SD903 SD963 SD1023 SD1083 SD1143 SD1203 SD1263 SD1323
✎Note: When the acceleration time is set to 0, there is no deceleration process.
(7) Stop method
Set the stop mode of high-speed pulse: turn off the instruction halfway or the instruction encounters a limit situation [default is 0:
decelerate to stop].
Set [0: Decelerate to stop]: When the pulse stops halfway, the pulse decelerates and stops.
Set [1: Stop immediately]: when the pulse stops halfway, the pulse stops immediately without deceleration.
Output axis Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7
Stop method SD904 SD964 SD1024 SD1084 SD1144 SD1204 SD1264 SD1324
[0: Decelerate to stop]: Decelerate to stop after receiving the stop signal.

[1: Stop immediately]: Stop immediately after receiving the stop signal without decelerating movement.

(8) Direction delay

Set the delay time between the direction and the pulse, which is only applicable to instructions with direction, and the range is
0-32767ms.
✎Note: The error of direction delay is within one scan period.
Output shaft Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7
Direction delay SD905 SD965 SD1025 SD1085 SD1145 SD1205 SD1265 SD1325

464 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

(9) External start signal

Set the device number (X device) of external start signal. If it is set to X0, the value is 0. It is necessary to set the existing external
input point, otherwise the function will not take effect.
The external signal is affected by the scan cycle and is judged when executing instruction.
Special device:
Output axis Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7
External start signal SD906 SD966 SD1026 SD1086 SD1146 SD1206 SD1266 SD1326
(10) The description of start speed
Start speed = (maximum speed - bias speed) / acceleration time
But the starting speed will be the following value according to the relationship between the instruction speed and the base speed.
 Bias speed < start speed < instruction speed: start speed = start speed.(It will be the value of above calculation)
 Bias speed <= instruction speed < start speed: start speed = instruction speed
 Start speed < bias speed, or instruction speed < bias speed: start speed = bias speed
 Maximum speed < bias speed: start speed = maximum speed
(11) Pulse number and frequency modification
1) Modify frequency
1 Reachable frequency

465 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
2 Unreachable frequency

2) Modify the number of pulses:

1 Modify to the number of reachable pulses

2 Modify to the number of unreachable pulses (only support instructions with direction. If there is no direction, stop pulse
sending)

(12) The number of sent pulses is out of range

When the number of pulses to be sent exceeds the range represented by the number of pulses (32 bits) (-2147483648 to
+2147483647), it will run to the target position in the opposite direction to the expected. For example:
The current position is 1, when you want to run to the target position -2147483648, you should send 2147483647 pulses in the
forward direction instead of sending 2147483649 pulses in the reverse direction;
The current position is -1, when you want to run to the target position 2147483647, you should send 2147483648 pulses inthe
reverse direction instead of sending 2147483648 pulses in the forward direction.
(13) Acceleration and deceleration mode
Output axis Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7
Acceleration and deceleration mode SD907 SD967 SD1027 SD1087 SD1147 SD1207 SD1267 SD1327

466 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
When the parameter is 0, post acceleration and deceleration mode is adopted.
When the parameter is 1, forward acceleration and deceleration mode is adopted.(Accelerate to the next segment in advance)
For example, three pulses are needed. The pulse frequency of the 1st segment is 2000Hz, the number of pulse is 2000; the pulse
frequency of the 2nd segment is 4000Hz, the number of pulse is 4000; the pulse frequency of the 3rd segment is 6000Hz, the
number of pulse is 6000;
Forward acceleration and deceleration mode oscillogram Post acceleration and deceleration mode oscillogram

(14) High-speed pulse acceleration and deceleration mode selection

Acceleration and deceleration mode selection
Output axis Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7
Acceleration and deceleration mode SD911 SD971 SD1031 SD1091 SD1151 SD1211 SD1271 SD1331
When the parameter is 0, Ladder acceleration and deceleration(calculate the pulse frequency one by one) mode is adopted.
When the parameter is 1, Time-minute ladder acceleration and deceleration is adopted.
When the parameter is 2, Time-minute s-type acceleration and deceleration is adopted.
(15) Time-minute acceleration and deceleration parameter
Output axis Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7
Time-minute intervals SD912 SD972 SD1032 SD1092 SD1152 SD1212 SD1272 SD1332
Time-minute intervals:
This parameter is time interval of time-minute acceleration and deceleration. The unit is 100us. The value range is 10 to1000.When
the value is less than 10, the value is 10. When the value is greater than 1000, the value is 1000.
Time-minute ladder acceleration and deceleration

Time-minute S-type acceleration and deceleration

467 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

The following figure shows the changes of each parameter

✎Note: When the frequency is modified during the operation, acceleration would accelerate again from zero. There will be
discontinuous acceleration.
(16) Oringin return mode
Output axis Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7
Origin return mode SD914 SD974 SD1034 SD1094 SD1154 SD1214 SD1274 SD1334
[SD919, [SD979, [SD1039, [SD1099, [SD1159, [SD1219, [SD1279, [SD1339,
Origin return distance
SD918] SD978] SD1038] SD1098] SD1158] SD1218] SD1278] SD1338]
Origin return mode 0:

468 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Origin return mode 1: When the signal is received, go backward to the specified origin return distance and then search for the origin
at crawling speed.

Origin return mode 2: When the signal is received, go to the specified origin return distance and then search for the origin 0 at
crawling speed.

Origin return mode 2: Start running toward zero based on the current position, and search for the origin at crawling speed after
reaching zero.

469 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

9 Electronic cam
9.1 Electronic CAM (ECAM) instruction
DEGEAR/Electronic gear/32 bit hand wheel instruction
DEGEAR
Electronic gear function refers to the function of multiplying the speed of the driving shaft by the set gear ratio and outputting to the
driven shaft at this speed to control the mechanical operation.
-[DEGEAR (s1) (s2) (s3) (d1) (d2)]

Content, range and data type

Data type
Parameter Content Range Data type
(label)
Specify the high-speed counter or ordinary double-word Signed BIN
(s1) -2147483648 to 2147483647 ANY32
counter that receives the master axis pulse 32 bit
(s2) Specify the data buffer of the electronic gear command Form type LIST
Response time, that is, how often the gear calculation is Signed BIN
(s3) 0~500 ANY32
performed 32 bit
(d) Specify pulse output axis Y0~Y7 Bit ANY_BOOL
(d) Specify direction output shaft Y/M/S/D.b Bit ANY_BOOL
Device used
Offset Pulse
Device
Instruction Parameters modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ●
Parameter 2 ●●
DECAM Parameter 3 ●● ●●
Parameter 4 ●
Parameter 5 ● ● ● ●
Features
•When the instruction is turned on, the PLC obtains the number of pulses of the master axis (s1) according to the set response time
(s2), calculates the average frequency within the response time, and calculates the output of the driven axis according to the set gear
ratio Frequency and output pulse number, and output pulse (d1) and direction (d2). When the frequency of the driven shaft is
greater than the set maximum frequency, it will output according to the set maximum frequency.
• When the master axis (s1) uses the high-speed counter (HSC), the PLC internally obtains the number of external input pulses.
Modifying the value of the HSC counter does not affect the judgment of the input pulse.
•When the master axis (s1) uses an ordinary double-word counter (LC), the PLC directly obtains the number of pulses from the LC
register, and modifying the value of the register directly affects the judgment of the input pulse.
470 WECON technology Co., Ltd.
 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
• Electronic gear data buffer (s2) table:
Electronic gear instruction parameter description table
Read and
Offset Content Instruction Range write
permission

0 Electronic gear ratio (numerator) Number of outputs =Number of inputs in 0 to 32767

Read/write
1 Electronic gear ratio (denominator) response time*numerator/denominator 1 to 32767
2 Maximum output frequency (low word) Max frequency Read/write
1 to 200000
3 Maximum output frequency (high word) Max frequency Read/write
4 Average spindle frequency (low word) Hand crank input frequency Read-only
-
5 Average spindle frequency (high word) Hand crank input frequency Read-only
Accumulative electronic gear input pulse
6
number (low word) Cumulative number of electronic gear input
- Read-only
Cumulative number of electronic gear input pulses
7
pulses(High word)
After the electronic gear is initialized, the
8 Sign Reserved Reserved
flag is equal to 1
9 interval Confirmation value - Read-only
10 Electronic gear ratio (numerator) Confirmation value - Read-only
11 Electronic gear ratio (denominator) Confirmation value - Read-only
12 Maximum output frequency (low word) Read-only
Confirmation value 1 to 200000
13 Maximum output frequency (high word) Read-only
1: Switch to the newly set gear ratio
immediately. And set the address back to 0.
2: The cycle is completed and the gear ratio
14 Dynamically switch gear ratio is switched, and the value is set back to 0 0 to 2 Read/write
after the switching is completed. (The value
of the spindle count reaching the
denominator is regarded as a cycle)
0: Use 16-bit gear ratio
1: Use 32-bit gear ratio
✎Note: After changing this bit, it will only
15 16-bit gear ratio and 32-bit gear ratio switch 0 to 1 Read/write
take effect after the DEGEAR command is
re-enabled or the dynamic gear ratio
function is used.
32-bit electronic gear ratio numerator (low
16
word) 0 to
Read/write
32-bit electronic gear ratio numerator (high Number of outputs = 214748647
17
word) Spindle input number within response
32-bit electronic gear ratio denominator time*numerator/denominator
18 1 to
(low word) Read/write
214748647
19 32-bit electronic gear ratio denominator

471 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
(high word)
32-bit electronic gear ratio numerator (low
20
word)
- Read-only
32-bit electronic gear ratio numerator (high
21
word)
Confirmation value
32-bit electronic gear ratio denominator
22
(low word)
- Read-only
32-bit electronic gear ratio denominator
23
(high word)
✎Note:
• When the output pulse axis (d1) is used by this instruction, other high-speed pulse instructions can no longer use the output axis.
Otherwise, an operation error will occur and pulse output will not be performed.
• The cycle of calculating the electronic gear inside the PLC is 100us once. If multiple electronic gear/electronic cam commands are
used at the same time, The computing interval is unchanged, that is, the 8-axis electronic gear instruction is executed at the same
time, and the computing interval is also 100us.
• The electronic gear commands can only be enabled at most 8 (Y0 ~ Y7) at the same time.
• The electronic gear command is used, and the data buffer (s2) will occupy 24 consecutive devices. Note that the address cannot
exceed the range of the device and reuse.
Error code
Error code Content
4085H The read address of (s1), (s2) and (s3) exceeds the device range
4084H The data exceeds the settable range
4EC0H Electronic gear ratio setting error
4088H High-speed pulse instructions use the same output shaft (d1)
Example
(1) Realize the 1:1 follow function of Y0 output pulse to Y3 output pulse.
1) Configure the high-speed counter, enable HSC0, and configure it as one-way output and count-up mode.

472 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
2) Ladder

Connect the Y3 output of the PLC to the X0 input.

Turn on M1, start M2, and Y3 for output. At this time, Y0 will follow Y3 1:1 (SD880 = SD1060).
(2) Use of 32-bit gear ratio.

Set the 32-bit gear ratio: 18518517: 12345678, set the 15 address of the data buffer to 1, and enable the 32-bit gear ratio function.
M1 turns ON to turn on the electronic gear command, M2 turns ON, LC0 will increase by 1 every 100ms, at this time SD880:LC0
always = 18518517:12345678.
(3) Use of gear ratio switching function

Set the gear ratio to 1:1.

M1 turns ON to turn on the electronic gear instruction, M2 turns ON, LC0 will increase by 1 every 100ms, at this time SD880:LC0
always = 1:1. When M3 is turned on, change the gear ratio to 2:1 and enable the switch gear ratio function. After that, the increment
of SD880 and the increment of LC0 are always 2:1.

473 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DECAM/32-bit electronic cam instruction
DECAM
The electronic cam function uses the preset cam curve to determine the slave axis movement amount according to the spindle
movement (phase information) and the cam curve, and output. The cam curve refers to each phase (rotation angle (Degree) and
CAM curve refers master axis rotation 1 cycle as the movement benchmark. The displacement of the slave axis can be set by the
ECAMTBX instruction.
-[DECAM (s1) (s2) (s3) (d1) (d2)]

Content, range and data type

Data type
Parameter Content Range Data type
(label)
-2147483648 to
(s1) Specify to receive the input pulse of the master axis Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32
2147483647
(s2) Specify the data buffer of the electronic cam instruction Form type LIST
The external start signal of the electronic cam needs to
(s3) X/M/S/D.b Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32
be enabled in the data buffer area to be effective.
(d1) Specify pulse output axis Y0~Y7 Bit ANY_BOOL
(d2) Specify direction output shaft Y/M/S/D.b Bit ANY_BOOL
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ●●
Parameter 2 ●●
DECAM Parameter 3 ● ● ● ●
Parameter 4 ●
Parameter 5
Features
When the instruction is turned on, the PLC obtains the number of pulses of the master axis (s1), calculates the number of pulses that
the slave axis needs to output for this calculation according to the set cam curve, and performs the pulse (d1) and direction (d2)
Output. When the frequency of the driven shaft is greater than the set maximum frequency, it will output according to the set
maximum frequency.
• When the master axis (s1) uses the high-speed counter (HSC), the PLC internally obtains the number of external input pulses.
Modifying the value of the HSC counter does not affect the judgment of the input pulse.
• When the master axis (s1) uses an ordinary double-word counter (LC), the PLC directly obtains the number of pulses from the LC
register, and modifying the value of the register directly affects the judgment of the input pulse.

474 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
• When the master axis (s1) uses the constant K/H, the number of input pulses is the time axis. If it is K1, the number of input pulses
will increase by 1 every 100 us.
• Electronic cam data buffer (s2) table:
Offset Initial
Name Instruction Range
address value
0 Form version number 5200
Bit0-Initialization complete flag
After the electronic cam permission signal is activated, calculate the related
Data, automatically set to ON after initialization, users need to clear this flag 0 —
state by themselves
Bit1-Cycle complete flag
Electronic cam completion flag. When the periodic electronic cam is executed
After completion, this flag will be automatically set to ON; if you want to 0 —
restart the periodic electronic cam, the user needs to clear this flag state first.
Bit2-Pulse transmission delayed flag bit
Bit3-Error electronic cam stop running flag bit
1 Flag register
Bit4-Parameter error error, electronic cam stop running flag bit
Bit5-Table error, electronic cam stop running flag
Bit6-Periodic electronic cam flag
Bit7-Aperiodic electronic cam flag
0
Bit9-Stop flag for current cycle completion
Bit10-synchronization zone flag
Bit11-Time axis flag —
Bit12-New form loading complete flag
Bit13-Periodic delay electronic cam flag
Bit14-Delayed start function, delayed waiting flag bit
Operation error condition (check Bit3 of address 1): Display Error code.
Parameter error condition (check Bit4 of address 1): Display the offset address
2 Error register of the error parameter register. 0
Table error condition (check Bit5 of address 1): display Incorrect table
—
segment number.
Bit0-Delayed start enable Bit1-Start at specified position
Function register
Bit2-Spindle zoom Bit3-zoom from axis
3 (Confirm before using 0
Bit5-Use external start signal Bit6-Start from current position —
electronic cam)
*Bit1 and Bit6 cannot both be 1.
Bit0-Sync signal enable
Function register
Bit1-Stop the electronic cam after the current cycle is completed
4 (can be changed while the 0
Bit2-Switch the table after the cycle is completed, the bit will automatically
electronic cam is running) —
change back to 0 after the switch is completed
✎Note:
When the output pulse axis (d1) is used by this instruction, other high-speed pulse instructions can no longer use the output axis.
Otherwise, an operation error will occur and pulse output will not be performed.
The cycle of calculating the electronic gear inside the PLC is 100us once. If multiple electronic gear/electronic cam commands are

475 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
used at the same time, the time will increase accordingly. If the 8-axis electronic gear command is executed at the same time, the
calculation cycle will become 800us.
The electronic gear commands can only be enabled at most 8 (Y0 ~ Y7) at the same time.
The electronic gear command is used, and the data buffer (s2) will occupy 24 consecutive devices. Note that the address cannot
exceed the range of the device and reuse.
Error code
Error code Content
4E80H E-cam table loading error
4E81H The currently numbered form has a cam in use
4E82H E-cam table address error

4E83H The electronic cam table exceeds the device range

Example
For details, please refer to "9.2 Instruction manual of Electronic CAM (ECAM )".

476 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
ECAMCUT/Electronic cam table switching instruction
ECAMCUT
This instruction needs to be used in conjunction with the electronic cam instruction (DECAM) to specify the newly defined table
address to realize the function of switching the electronic cam table periodically during the operation of the electronic cam.
-[ECAMCUT (s1) (s2)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
Specify the table number, currently only
(s1) 1 to 2 (LX5VT: 1 to 16) Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
supports one table
Specify the first address of the data buffer area
(s2) - Form type LIST
of the electronic cam table
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●● ●●
ECAMCUT
Parameter 2 ●●
Features
Table format definition:
Offset Instruction
0 Number of table segments
1 Table version
2 to 3 Spindle section 0 (double word)
4 to 5 Section 0 slave axis (double word)
6 to 7 Spindle section 1
8 to 9 Section 1 slave axis
......
Instruction function description
(1) In the (s1) parameter, only K1 or K2 can be used to specify the location of the table. The format of the table must be as above.
K1 means Form 1
K2 means Form 2
Form 0 is the original form of the cam (optional)
(2) When the instruction is running, check the table data in the start address specified by (s2) and verify the correctness of the
data. After the operation is successful, the table with the specified table number should point to the starting address of (s2). In
the process of command pointing, if the corresponding numbered table is in the current cam operation, an operation error will
be reported.
Before using the table, you need to run this command to configure the address where the table is located. After the table
address is specified, it will not be saved after power off.
(3) Related registers and flags
•Electronic cam buffer offset 1 (flag bit register)
bit12 --- table switching completed flag
•Electronic cam buffer offset 4 (function register)
After bit2-cycle is completed, switch to the specified table operation
•Electronic cam buffer offset 31
Number of the table to be run in the next cycle (0 ~ 2)
477 WECON technology Co., Ltd.
 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
•Electronic cam buffer offset 32
The table number of current cycle operation (0 ~ 2)
✎Note:
Table 0 is the self-contained table of the electronic cam, that is, the continuous address starting at offset 38 of the electronic cam
data buffer. Therefore, the electronic cam can specify up to 3 tables at the same time, which can be switched freely during operation.
If the curve generated by the electronic cam table generation command ECAMTBX is used, the data buffer of the ECAMTBX generated
table should be offset by 38 addresses and then specified.

Error code
Error code Content
4E80H E-cam table loading error
4E81H The currently numbered form has a cam in use
4084H Data exceeding 1 to 2 is specified in (s1)
4085H The (s2) table exceeds the device range
Example
Realize the mutual switching between electronic cam form 1 and form 2

478 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

✎Note:
1 According to the above Circuit program, first set M2, configure table 1 data, and use ECAMCUT to designate table 1 as
electronic cam operation table 1.
2 Set M200 to configure the cam running command DECAM.
3 Set M201 to enable electronic cam operation. And automatically prepare table 2 data, and assign table 2 data as electronic
cam operation table 2.
4 Set the second position of D2004 to 1 to turn on the electronic cam switching table function. At this time, table 1 is run in
the current cycle, and table 2 is run in the next cycle.
5 Use manual addition (M110) to change the master axis (LC0), and the slave axis pulse number SD880 will also change, and
the ratio is the ratio of Table 1 (1:2).
6 When LC0 = 100, the program automatically switches to Table 2 to run, LC0 increment: SD880 increment = 2000:120500.
And currently running table 2 and next cycle running table 1. When LC0 = 2100, switch back to Table 1 to run.

479 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
ECAMTBX/Electronic cam table generation instruction
ECAMTBX
This instruction is used to generate the table data of the electronic cam.
-[ECAMTBX (S0) (S1) (D0) (D1)]
Content, range and data type
Data type
Parameter Content Range Data type
(label)
(S0) Specify the first address of the electronic cam table parameter - Form type LIST
(S1) Specify the curve type of the electronic cam - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(D0) Specify the first address of the data buffer area of the E-cam table - Form type LIST
(D1) Table generation results - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●
Parameter 2 ●● ●●
ECAMTBX
Parameter 3 ●●
Parameter 4 ●●
Features
S0--parameter address, allowable Devices: D, R.
Description: Indicate the parameters to be set to generate the curve.
S1--curve type, allowable Devicess: D, R, H, K.
Description: Indicates the type of curve to be generated.
K1: Generate S type acceleration/deceleration curve with a spindle of 1ms
K2: Customize the designated key point to generate a table
K100: Generate flying shear curve
K101: Generate chase curve
D0--The first address of cam parameters, allowable devices: D, R
Description: The generated table data is stored at the beginning of [D0 + 40], and the number of table segments is stored in [D0
+ 38].
D1-table generation result, allowable Devices: D, R
D1 <0 generates a table error;
D1> 0 The table is successfully generated. D1 represents the total number of segments in the current table.
Error code
ECAMTBX instruction generates curve Error code:
Error code Content
-1 Condition parameter error
-2 The spindle pulse number is too few, not enough for synchronization area
-3 Unknown cam curve type
-4 Resolution range error
-5 Too many pulses of the slave axis calculated
-6 The calculated number of pulses from the slave axis is too small
-7 The calculated number of spindle pulses exceeds the set length
-8 The pulse number of the slave axis is set to 0

480 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
-10 S type acceleration and deceleration curve calculation error
-11 Unknown curve type
-12 Curve left wrong
-13 The number of slave axes exceeds the range
Key point generating curve Error code:
Error code Content
-21 The number of key points is out of range
-22 Total resolution exceeds range
-23 Incorrect relationship between spindle size
-24 The resolution setting of each segment is incorrect
-25 When calculating, the number of control points is insufficient
-26 Unknown acceleration curve type
-27 Spindle pulse number is negative
S-type acceleration and deceleration generated curve Error code:
Error code Content
-31 The number of pulses exceeds the range
-32 Maximum frequency out of range
-33 Acceleration and deceleration time out of range
-34 The number of pulses or frequency settings cannot meet the curve generation conditions

✎Note:
After the curve is successfully generated by the ECAMTBX instruction, the cam table can be uploaded to the upper computer for
viewing in the PLC of the PLC Edit upper computer software.
Example
For details, please refer to "9.2 Instruction manual of Electronic CAM (ECAM )".

481 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
9.2 Instruction manual of Electronic CAM (ECAM )
Principle of ECAM
The traditional mechanical cam is composed of cam, follower and frame. A mechanical cam is an irregular part, generally an input
part with a constant speed, which can transmit motion to a follower through direct contact, so that the action moves according to a
set law. The follower is a passive part driven by a mechanical cam, and is generally an output part that produces unequal speed,
discontinuous, and irregular motion.
ECAM is a software system that uses the constructed concave wheel curve to simulate mechanical cam to achieve the same relative
motion between the camshaft and the main shaft of the mechanical cam system.
Compared with mechanical cams, ECAM makes the design of mechanical and electrical parts more and more simple. ECAM allows
the equipment to be flexibly used in different templates and plate styles, and also allows the operation process and cycle of the
equipment to be modified, either during the design phase of the equipment or after the equipment is formed. It reduces the
complexity of the equipment, makes the equipment run more smoothly and doubles the production efficiency.

Description of ECAM function

Establish ECAM data
LX5V provides 3 ways to establish ECAM data:
① Write table data to the table data area by DMOV instruction.

② Generate ECAM data automatically by ECAMTBX instruction.

③ Draw ECAM data with PLC Editor software.

Spindle pulse selection

The selectable spindles of LX5V series PLC are HSC, LC type and virtual time axis K.
Among them, external high-speed input uses high-speed counter, which supports single-phase single-count input\single-phase
double-count input and biphase double-count input. As for the assignment of counters, refer to the instructions for high-speed
counters in the PLC help.
When using HSC register (high-speed counter), the pulse of spindle is obtained internally. Modifying the value of the counter does
not affect the cam to judge the actual pulse input quantity.
When using the normal counter LC, the pulse of spindle is obtained from devices. Modifying the value of the register will affect the
judgment of the pulse of spindle .
When using the K type register, it means to use the internal virtual time axis, and the minimum unit is 100us, K1=100us, K10=1ms.

Enable ECAM configuration

Use the DECAM instruction to configure the ECAM function of PLC.
Name Function Bits Whether pulse type Instruction format Step number
DECAM ECAM configuration 32 No DECAM s1 s2 s3 d1 d2 10
Ladder :

(1) Parameters
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
-2147483648 to
(s1) Specify to receive the input pulse of the master axis Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32
+2147483647
(s2) Specify the data buffer area of the ECAM instruction Form LIST
(s3) The external start signal of ECAM needs to be X/M/S/D.b Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32

482 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
enabled in the data buffer area to be effective.

(d1) Specify pulse output axis Y0 to Y7 Bit ANY_BOOL

(d2) Specify direction output axis Y/M/S/D.b Bit ANY_BOOL
Device used:
Offset Pulse
Device
modification extension
Instruction Parameters
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP

Parameter 1 ● ● ●●
Parameter 2
DECAM Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ●●
Parameter 4 ●
Parameter 5 ● ● ●
(2) Function description
When the contact M0 is turned on, the PLC activates ECAM function, but the ECAM function is not yet running at this time, it just
initializes the parameters of the cam. It includes that D1000 to D1005, D1031, D1032 will be cleared and check whether the cam
table is correct. After initialization, these registers still need to be set for control.
This instruction configures the relevant registers and required data for cam operation, and enables the function of ECAM, but the
cam does not actually run. To actually enable the ECAM function, the relevant device in the cache address of the instruction (such as
D1000 in the instruction) is also needed to control the start and stop of the cam.
If the instruction is disconnected, the cam stops working.
Refer to the description of "9.2.2.5 ECAM function register" for the definition of cam parameter devices.
(3) Instruction error description
When the instruction is running, PLC will check the relevant cam parameters in the cache address and prompt the corresponding
error. You can find the error according to the prompt [PLC Error code information]:
Error code Content
4084H The parameter set in the instruction exceeds the limit
4085H The device used in the instruction exceeds the maximum device number
4088H Multiple application instructions use the same output axis for pulse output
4E80H ECAM table loading error
4E81H The currently numbered form has a cam in use
4E82H ECAM table address error
4E83H The electronic cam table exceeds the device range
When an error occurs, the ECAM function is not enabled at this time.
(4) Devices involved in instruction execution
Devices Content
SD881 (high byte), SD880 (low byte) Y000 Output pulse number. Decrease when reversed. (Use 32 bits)
SD941 (high byte), SD940 (low byte) Y001 Output pulse number. Decrease when reversed. (Use 32 bits)
SD1001 (high byte), SD1000 (low byte) Y002 Output pulse number. Decrease when reversed. (Use 32 bits)
SD1061 (high byte), SD1060 (low byte) Y003 output pulse number. Decrease when reversed. (Use 32 bits)
SD1121 (high byte), SD1120 (low byte) Y004 Output pulse number. Decrease when reversed. (Use 32 bits)
SD1181 (high byte), SD1180 (low byte) Y005 Output pulse number. Decrease when reversed. (Use 32 bits)
SD1241 (high byte), SD1240 (low byte) Y006 Number of output pulses. Decrease when reversed. (Use 32 bits)
SD1301 (high byte), SD1300 (low byte) Y007 Output pulse number. Decrease when reversed. (Use 32 bits)

Devices Content Devices Content

483 WECON technology Co., Ltd.
 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
SM882 Y000 Pulse output stop (stop immediately) SM880 Y000 monitoring during pulse output (BUSY/READY)
SM942 Y001 Pulse output stop (stop immediately) SM940 Y001 Monitoring during pulse output (BUSY/READY)
SM1002 Y002 Pulse output stop (stop immediately) SM1000 Y002 Monitoring during pulse output (BUSY/READY)
SM1062 Y003 Pulse output stop (stop immediately) SM1060 Y003 Monitoring during pulse output (BUSY/READY)
SM1122 Y004 Pulse output stop (stop immediately) SM1120 Y004 Monitoring during pulse output (BUSY/READY)
SM1182 Y005 Pulse output stop (stop immediately) SM1180 Y005 Monitoring during pulse output (BUSY/READY)
SM1242 Y006 Pulse output stop (stop immediately) SM1240 Y006 Monitoring during pulse output (BUSY/READY)
SM1302 Y007 Pulse output stop (stop immediately) SM1300 Y007 Monitoring during pulse output (BUSY/READY)
ECAM start/stop
(1) Periodic ECAM start/stop
Periodic ECAM means that while the main axis is continuously advancing, the cam axis will realize the corresponding position
according to the "ECAM curve table (table)", but the table only defines one period of data, so the positional relationship of
master/slave axis in this mode is the continuous repetitive extension of the table.

1) Periodic ECAM start

Periodic ECAM start sequence is as below.
✎At time T1, address 5=1, start periodic electronic cam.
✎After the time T2 has elapsed, the PLC takes the initiative to set address 1-bit0 (ECAM initialization complete flag).
✎During time T3, ECAM initialization is completed and the periodic action is started. The slave axis follows the movement of
the spindle according to the position relationship in the table, and the synchronization signal terminal is output according to
the synchronization point range.
✎When a cycle is completed, ECAM cycle completion flag address 1-bit1 turns ON, and the user clears the completion flag by
itself, and then continues to judge the next cycle.

484 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
2) Periodic ECAM stop
The periodic ECAM stop sequence is as below.
✎When ECAM starts register (address 5) = 0, the ECAM stops operating immediately.
✎When the periodic ECAM is operating, the system receives the completion stop flag ((address 4-bit1), the periodic ECAM will
continue until the current table is executed, the slave axis will stop operating, as shown in the figure below. If you want to
start the periodic cam again, you need to write 0 to address 5 and keep it more than 100us, and then you can start the
periodic cam through address 5 again.

3) Example description
The following figure shows the ECAM data, where the spindle length is 50000, the output unit is the number of pulses, and the
synchronization range is 20000 to 30000. When running into the synchronization zone, the synchronization terminal output can
be used as a control signal. To create ECAM data, please refer to the ECAM data. Hardware circuit Y1 outputs pulse to connect
to X0, and it means that the spindle input terminal receives the output pulse of Y1.

This example is to use the software PLC Editor2 to set the table.
Instructions
1 When executing the program, the special register is set first. The set parameters are as follows:
A. Double word is composed of SD881 and SD880, the current position of Y0 is cleared to 0,
B. Start the high-speed counter HSC0 and configure it as a single-phase input to receive the high-speed pulse input of X0
(in this case, the pulse of X0 comes from the output pulse of Y1).
2 SET M0 to start the ECAM, Y axis starts to perform variable speed movement. The main axis receives variable speed input
pulse of Y axis, the slave axis outputs pulse according to the ECAM curve, and when the main axis position is 20000-30000
in each cycle, Y7 is ON state.
✎Note: Special registers must be set before the ECAM is started. Set the upper and lower limits of the synchronization position of

485 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
the ECAM D2009 = 20000, D2011 = 30000; and set the number of the synchronization terminal Y D2008, and the synchronization
output enable D2004-BIT0, an ECAM cycle is 50000 pulses and when the spindle position is 20000-30000 pulses (monitored by
D2025 and D2026), the synchronization terminal is ON.
3 RST M0, the cam stops running.
PLC program

(2) Aperiodic ECAM start/stop

Aperiodic ECAM refers to the timing when the camshaft starts to realize the corresponding position according to the table while the
main shaft is continuously advancing after the cam start signal is input. Different from the periodic ECAM, The position relationship of
the master/slave axis in this mode actually only runs for one cycle, that is, the table only moves once.

486 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
1) Aperiodic ECAM start
The aperiodic ECAM stop sequence is as below.
1 At time T1, address 5=2, and aperiodic ECAM is started.
2 After the calculation of the time T2, the PLC actively sets the address 1-bit0=ON (the initialization of aperiodic ECAM is
completed). At this time, the slave axis will not follow the movement of the master axis.
3 At time T3, the ECAM start signal is turned ON (when the external start signal is used), the slave axis will follow the
spindle movement for one cycle according to the position relationship in the table.
4 After the cycle is completed at the position of time T4, the PLC will actively clear the state of address 1-bit0=ON, and the
user can also judge whether the cycle is completed according to the state of address 1-bit1 to .
5 During the time T5, the user can choose whether to set the address 1-bit0=ON again through the program , for the
purpose of completing the judgment next time.
6 Time T6/T7 position is to repeat the action of T3 to T4 again. ✎Note: The interval between the rising edges of the cam
start signal must be more than 0.5ms.
7 Sync signal terminal output.

2) Aperiodic electronic cam stop

1 When starting the ECAM register address 5=0, the ECAM slave axis stops operating immediately, as shown in the figure
below.

487 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
2 When the aperiodic ECAM is running, address 4-BIT1=1 (stop after the current cycle is completed), the aperiodic ECAM will
continue to run through the table and then the slave axis will stop operating, as shown in the figure below.

3) Example explanation
The following figure shows the ECAM running table (the spindle length is 0 to 100000 for a cycle), and its output is the
number of pulses. When the external signal X2 is triggered by the rising edge, execute two consecutive tables (D1014=2), and
wait for the X2 rising edge Trigger again, and execute two consecutive tables again, and so on.

This example uses the software PLC EDITOR to ECam0. Please refer to 9.2.2.5 for the detailed steps of creating an ECAM curve.
The Y1 axis of the hardware circuit outputs pulse and connects to the X0 axis input terminal, indicating that input terminal
position of master axis is to receive the pulse output of Y1 axis as input.
Operation steps
1 When the program is executed, set special registers first, and the set parameters are as follows:
A. The contents of SD880, SD881 and SD940, SD941 are cleared to 0
B. Set D1014=2 (repeat the form twice)
2 Set M0: Configure and start the cam. When M0 is the rising edge, set D1003-Bit5 to use an external start signal;
when D1005=2, Y1 outputs pulses, and Y0 axis has not output yet at this time.
3 The external signal X2 is triggered, and Y0 axis is output with the ECAM curve; the output stops after 2 cycles.
4 RST M0: Close the ECAM mode; if runs RST M0 when the ECAM is running, Y0 axis will stop output immediately.

488 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
[PLC program]

9.2.2.5 Electronic cam function register

Offset Initial
Name Instruction Range
address value
0 Form version number 0
Bit0: Initialization complete flag
After the ECAM permission signal is activated, calculate the related data,
1 Flag register 0 —
and automatically set to ON after initialization. Users need to clear the
state of this flag by themselves.

489 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Bit1: Cycle completion flag
ECAM completion flag. When the periodic ECAM is executed, this flag
0 —
will be automatically set to ON; if you want to restart the periodic ECAM,
clear the state of this flag first.
Bit2: Pulse sending delayed flag
Bit3: ECAM error stop running flag
Bit4: Parameter error, ECAM stop running flag
Bit5: Table error, electronic cam stop running flag
Bit6: Periodic ECAM flag
Bit7: Aperiodic ECAM flag
0 —
Bit9: Current cycle completion stop flag
Bit10: synchronization zone flag
Bit11: Time axis flag
Bit12: New form load completion flag
Bit13: Periodic delay ECAM flag
Bit14: Delayed start function, delayed waiting flag bit
Operation error condition (check Bit3 of address 1): Display Error code.
Parameter error condition (check Bit4 of address 1): Display the offset
address of the error parameter register.
2 Register error 0 —
Table error condition (check Bit5 of address 1): display error
Incorrect table segment number.
✎Note: Bit3 of address 1 must be set with Bit4 and Bit5
Bit0: Delayed start enable Bit1: Start at specified position Bit2: Spindle
Function register zoom
3 (Confirm before using Bit3: zoom from axis 0 —
electronic cam) Bit5: Use external start signal
Bit6: Start from current position
Bit0: Sync signal enable
Function register
Bit1: Stop the electronic cam after the current cycle is completed
4 (Can be changed while 0 —
Bit2: Switch the table after the cycle is completed, the bit will
the ECAM is running)
automatically change back to 0 after the switch is completed
0: Stop the electronic cam immediately
1: Periodic electronic cam (start)
2: Aperiodic electronic cam (start)
5 ECAM start register 3: Stop after the cycle is completed, this register automatically becomes 0 —
3
4: Periodic delay electronic cam (start)
Other: reserved, not available
Maximum output
6 frequency setting of 200000 0 to 200000
Maximum output frequency setting of electronic cam;
ECAM
When the frequency is less than 0 or greater than 200K, it is 200K
The highest ECAM
7
output frequency

490 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
setting

Output terminal number:

Set the Y number of the synchronization output terminal, the range is 0
Sync signal Y terminal to 1777 (octal), when the synchronization output function is enabled,
8 0 0 to 1777
number when in the synchronization area, the corresponding Y terminal outputs
the synchronization signal. This function needs to set the upper and
lower limits of the synchronization position first .
CAM synchronization
9 position lower limit
(Low word) The synchronization position upper/lower limit setting of the electronic 0 to
0
CAM synchronization cam, 2147483647
10 position lower limit When the synchronization position lower limit ≤ spindle position ≤
(High word) position upper limit
CAM synchronization And the synchronization signal terminal Y output is ON when the
11 position upper limit synchronization signal is enabled (address 4, BIT0).
(Low word) When the lower limit> the upper limit, the upper and lower limit values 0 to
0
CAM synchronization will be exchanged. 2147483647
12 position upper limit
(High word)
Electronic cam pulse
remainder distribution — —
13 Reserved
setting (reserved)
Periodic electronic cam: reserved;
Aperiodic electronic cam: control table execution times; when the value
Aperiodic ECAM
14 is H0001, the electronic cam will stop after executing once; 11 1 to 65535
execution times
When the value is HFFFF, it will become a periodic electronic cam
execution.

ECAM start delay pulse Periodic electronic cam: reserved

15 setting (low word) Aperiodic electronic cams and periodic delay electronic cams: the
delayed start function can be enabled through (Address 3, Bit0-delayed 32-bit
start enable). When the aperiodic electronic cam is executed, a cam start 0 unsigned
ECAM start delay pulse signal is received. If the electronic cam table is not executed integer
16
setting (high word) immediately, but the spindle rotates for a few pulses, the table is run. At
this time, this register sets the number of delayed pulses.
Spindle specified
Periodic electronic cam: reserved
17 position start 32-bit
Aperiodic electronic cam:
(Low word) unsigned
It can be enabled by (address 3, Bit1-specified location start enable),
Spindle specified 0 integer
To enable the function of the specified location. The starting position is
18 position start number
set by this address. The setting value must be within the table period.
(high word)
Current position of Output shaft: current position of slave shaft (after conversion) 32-bit
19 0
slave axis (low word) The position of the slave axis during the current cam execution, after unsigned

491 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Current position of scaling integer
20
slave axis (high word)
Current position of
21 Output shaft: current position of slave shaft (before conversion)
slave axis (low word) 32-bit
The position of the slave axis during the current cam execution, before 0
Current position of integer
22 scaling
slave axis (high word)
Denominator of slave
23 1 1 to 65535
axis magnification
Zoom from axis
Slave magnification
24 1 1 to 65535
numerator
Spindle current
25 Input axis: the current position of the spindle (after conversion) 32-bit
position (low word)
The position of the main axis during the current cam execution, after 0 unsigned
Spindle current
26 scaling integer
position (high word)
Spindle current
27 Input axis: the current position of the spindle (before conversion) 32-bit
position (low word)
The position of the main axis during the current cam execution, before 0 unsigned
Spindle current
28 scaling integer
position (high word)
Denominator of
29 1 1 to 65535
spindle magnification
Spindle zoom
Spindle magnification
30 1 1 to 65535
numerator
Switch to use in the table function after the cycle is completed. 0: Use
Specify the table to be the default table
31 0 0 to 2
run in the next cycle 1: Use the data in Table 1 (ECAMCUT specifies the address)
2: Use the data in Table 2 (ECAMCUT specifies the address)
Switch to use in the table function after the cycle is completed. Indicates
Table running in
32 the current week 0 0 to 2
current cycle
Periodically run form.
33 Reserved Reserved — —
34 Reserved Reserved — —
35 Reserved Reserved — —
36 Reserved Reserved — —
37 Reserved Reserved — —
Number of segments in
38 Total data segment of cam table data 0 0 to 512
the table
39 Start offset of the table Specify the offset address of the cam table, fixed to 40 40 40
Spindle segment 0
40
(low word) 32-bit
Spindle position of segment 0 0
Spindle segment 0 integer
41
(high word)
42 Section 0 slave axis Slave axis position of segment 0 0 32-bit

492 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
(low word) integer
Section 0 slave axis
43
(high word)
Spindle section 1
44
(low word) 32-bit
Spindle position of segment 1 0
Spindle section 1 integer
45
(high word)
Section 1 slave axis
46
(low word) 32-bit
Slave axis position of segment 1 0
Section 1 slave axis integer
47
(high word)
Nth spindle
40+ N*4
(low word) 32-bit
Nth segment spindle position 0
Nth spindle integer
40+ N*4+1
(high word)
Nth segment slave
40+ N*4+2
axis(low word) 32-bit
Nth segment slave axis position 0
Nth segment slave integer
40+ N*4+3
axis(high word)

Description of cam register

(1) Address 2 - Error register:

Operation error (check Bit3 of address 1) error code description:
Error code Content
-1 Form number is out of range
-2 The table is not initialized properly
-3 The number of table segments is too short
1 Spindle input error, pulse change is too large, 100us exceeds 200
3 Too many slave axes calculated
5 The spindle has too many unprocessed pulses in the current cycle
8 Calculate the number of pulses that the slave axis currently needs to output is too much
9 The cam master is 2 cycles ahead of the slave
Parameter error (check Bit4 of address 1) Display the offset address of the error parameter register.
Form error (check Bit5 of address 1) The wrong table segment number is displayed.
(2) Address 3—function register before ECAM is enabled
Start the corresponding function register of the cam. When the corresponding setting is 1, the corresponding function of the cam is
enabled.
BIT6: start from current position
You can set the starting point of the master and slave when the cam starts.
When this function is enabled, the initial position of the spindle is obtained from [Address 27, 28 — current position of the spindle
(before conversion)];
The initial position of the slave axis is obtained from [Address 19, 20 — current position of the slave axis (after conversion)].
(3) Address 4—function register in ECAM operation

493 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Bit0-Sync signal enable
When the address 4-Bit0=1, when the spindle position is at the lower limit of the synchronous position ≤ the spindle position ≤ the
upper limit of the synchronous position, the synchronous terminal outputs.
Bit1-Stop when the current cycle is completed
When address 4-BIT1 = 1, the cam will stop immediately after the execution of the current table is completed. After stopping,
address 5 will automatically change to 3, reset to 1, and the periodic electronic cam can be started again. The same applies to
non-periodic electronic cams.
(4) Address 5—electronic cam start register
Periodic electronic cam start: when address 5=1, start periodic electronic cam: when address 5=0, stop electronic cam.
Periodic delay electronic cam start: when address 5=2, start the first period delay pulse set by address 15, 16 and execute according
to periodic electronic cam; address 5=0, stop electronic cam.
When switching between periodic electronic cam and non-periodic electronic cam, the data switching between address
5=1→address 5=0→address 5=2 requires an interval of more than 100us.
(5) Address 8—synchronization signal Y terminal number
This register is used to set the terminal number of the synchronization signal output.
When the address 4-Bit0=1, when the spindle position is at the lower limit of the synchronous position≦the spindle position ≦the
upper limit of the synchronous position, the synchronous terminal outputs.
(6) Address 9-12—synchronization position upper and lower limit
Address Features Range
Address 9 CAM synchronization position lower limit (LOW WORD)
0 to 2147483647
Address 10 CAM synchronization position lower limit (HIGH WORD)
Address 11 CAM synchronization LOW WORD)
0 to 2147483647
Address 12 CAM synchronization position upper limit (HIGH WORD)
The synchronization position upper/lower limit of the electronic cam is set. When the synchronization position lower limit ≤ spindle
position ≤ position upper limit and the synchronization signal is enabled (address 4, BIT0), the synchronization signal terminal Y is
output.

(7) Address 14—Aperiodic electronic cam execution times setting

Address Features Range
Periodic electronic cam-reserved
Address 14 1 to 65535
Non-periodic electronic cam-control the number of times the electronic cam is executed
When the non-periodic electronic cam mode is selected, the address 14 controls the execution times of the electronic cam. The
current address is set to the number of times the cam repeats the table. When the value is HFFFF, it will become periodic cam
execution. When the value is 0, the current address will automatically become 1 if it exceeds the range.

494 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Number of repetitions=0

Number of repetitions=1

(8) Address 15-16—Electronic cam start delay pulse setting

Address Features Range

Address 15 Aperiodic electronic cams or periodic delay electronic cams. The electronic cam table will be
32-bit unsigned integer
Address 16 executed immediately after the spindle rotates the set number of pulses
When executing aperiodic electronic cams or periodic delayed electronic cams, if address 3 (Bit0-delayed start enable) is set, the
delayed start function is enabled. The slave axis receives a cam start signal. If the electronic cam table is not executed immediately,
the table is run after delaying the spindle rotation for several pulses. At this time, the number of delayed pulses must be set for
address 16.
As shown in the figure below: When the system receives a cam start signal, the electronic cam table will be executed immediately
after the spindle rotates the set number of pulses.
Delayed start pulse=10

Delayed start pulse=50

(9) Address 17-18—start at the specified position of the spindle

Address Features Range
Address 17 The non-periodic electronic cam can be started at the specified position by address
32-bit unsigned integer
Address 18 3 (Bit1-specified position start enable). The starting location is set by this address

495 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

9.2.2.6 E-cam spreadsheet data creation

(1) Single table data change setting

Each electronic cam table can create 512 points of data, which are set using offset address 40-address [40+n*4+4] respectively. Every
4 points of data is a group of ECAM data, which is composed of master axis position and slave axis position.
Use DMOV instruction to manipulate table data:

Set the total data segment of the spreadsheet data to 3

The spindle position of segment 0 is 0
The position of the 0th segment slave axis is 0
The spindle position of the first segment is 100
The first segment slave axis position is 100
The second stage spindle position is 200
The second segment slave axis position is 0
Configure electronic cam

(2) Use PLC Editor to generate table data

Define the relationship between master axis and slave axis, which is called electronic cam table data. In the data input, the electronic
cam table has two ways to express:
Method 1: The functional relationship between the adopter
Method 2: Use the point-to-point relationship of X and Y to obtain the electronic cam table in two ways:
Approach 1: According to the standard function relationship of the master and slave axis
Approach 2: According to the corresponding relationship between points measured in actual work.
The cam table can define multiple CAM curves. After the relationship is determined, the position of the slave axis can be obtained
according to the position of the master axis.
For example, the cam table for sinusoidal signals:

496 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
The electronic cam table is called electronic cam table in PLC Editor. Select [electronic cam table] in [Project Properties]-[Protection
Function], right click to add and delete the table.

The chart is mainly divided into 4 parts, namely the relative position of the master/slave axis, the relative speed of the master/slave
axis, the relative acceleration of the master/slave axis, and the bottom data setting. The first three parts are used to display the CAM
data set by the user. The horizontal axis is the main axis, and the vertical axis is the position of the slave axis, the speed ratio of the
slave axis to the master axis, and the acceleration ratio of the slave axis to the master axis. The data setting area is introduced as
follows:
1 Displacement resolution: Provide users to set the total number of data points occupied by the table, and the setting range
is from 10 to 512, one point occupies 4 WORD Devicess.
2 Data setting: Describe the displacement change of the master/slave axis by function.
3 Import: describe the displacement change of the master/slave axis through a point-to-point method.
4 Export: Export and archive the change relationship of the master/slave axis in a point-to-point manner.
1) Functionally describe the position changes of the master and slave axes
Select [Data Setting] in the data setting area and the "Data Setting Window" will appear, which allows the user to describe the
curve of the entire cam in a function, rather than a point-to-point description. At present, Wecon PLC provides 3 cam curve
modes for users to choose, namely: Const Speed (constant speed), Const Acc (uniform acceleration), BSpline (cycloid).

497 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
[Data Setting] The window is composed of sections, each section provides the user to set a section of cam curve, and then the entire
section composes the cam curve. Each section is composed of master axis, slave axis, CAM curve and resolution, as explained below:
Main shaft: the displacement of the main shaft, the displacement of the main shaft must be greater than a value of 0, and increase;
Slave axis: the displacement of the slave axis, which is positive or negative;
CAM curve: the function used in the current section;
Resolution: The number of points used in the current section. The entire table can be set in the range 10-512. 1 point occupies 4
WORDs. If not set, the remaining points will be divided equally. The resolution is set according to the requirements of the device. The
higher the resolution, the smoother the device runs, but the larger the device.
2) Describe the position changes of the master and slave axes in a point-to-point manner
Directly add data to the electronic cam table in a point-to-point mode. A cam table can input up to 512 points of data.
[Export]Export the current table data in a point-to-point manner and store it in the specified file.
[Import] Import the current table data in a point-to-point manner.
(3) Use ECAM TBX to generate tables
Name Features Bits (bits) Whether pulse type Instruction format Step count
ECAMTBX Generate spreadsheet data 16 No ECAMTBXS0 S1 D0 D1 9
S0--parameter address, allowable device: D, R.
For the setting parameters when generating the curve, please refer to the description in [Appendix]-[Parameter List]
S1--curve type, allowable Devicess: D, R, H, K.
Indicates the type of curve to be generated.
K1: Generate S type acceleration/deceleration curve with a spindle of 1ms
K2: Customize the specified key point to generate a table
K100: Generate rotary saw curve
K101: Generate chase curve
D0--the first address of cam parameters,
Allowed devices: D, R
The generated table data is stored at the beginning of [D0 + 40], and the number of table segments is stored in [D0 + 38].
D1--form generation result
Allowed devices: D, R
D1 <0 generates a table error;
D1> 0 The table is successfully generated. D1 represents the total number of segments in the current table.
ECAMTBX instruction generating curve error code:
Error code Content
-1 Condition parameter error
-2 The spindle pulse number is too few, not enough for synchronization area
-3 Unknown cam curve type
-4 Resolution range error
-5 Too many pulses of the slave axis calculated
-6 The calculated number of pulses from the slave axis is too small
-7 The calculated number of spindle pulses exceeds the set length
-8 The pulse number of the slave axis is set to 0
-10 S type acceleration and deceleration curve calculation error
-11 Unknown curve type
-12 Curve left wrong

498 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
-13 The number of slave axes that exceeds the range
Key point generating curve Error code:
Error code Content
-21 The number of key points is out of range
-22 Total resolution exceeds range
-23 Incorrect relationship between spindle size
-24 The resolution setting of each segment is incorrect
-25 When calculating, the number of control points is insufficient
-26 Unknown acceleration curve type
-27 Spindle pulse number is negative
S-type acceleration and deceleration generated curve Error code:
Error code Content
-31 The number of pulses exceeds the range
-32 Maximum frequency out of range
-33 Acceleration and deceleration time out of range
-34 The number of pulses or frequency settings cannot meet the curve generation conditions
✎Note: After the curve is successfully generated by the ECAMTBX instruction, the cam table can be uploaded to the upper computer
for viewing in the PLC of the PLC Edit upper computer software.

The application of ECAM

Rotary saw application
In the feeding and cutting application, the traditional method is to use the stop-and-go method. The feeding shaft first walks to a
fixed length, and then the cutting shaft moves again, and then the process of "feeding stop" and "cutting stop" is repeated.
Disadvantages of the medium method. In the process of feeding shaft stop and stop, the required acceleration and deceleration can
not improve the production efficiency. Therefore, the new method is to use the non-stop feeding method. Generally, there are two
feeding and cutting methods: rotary saw and flying saw. The difference between the two is that rotary saw moves in the same
direction, while flying saw moves back and forth, and the set CAM table curves are also different.

(1) Description of rotary saw action

1) Rotary saws control the cutting axis to rotate in the same direction, and cut when the tool touches the material. During
this period, the feeding axis will continue to feed at a constant speed without stopping. The action and output stroke of
rotary saw control are shown in the figure below:
499 WECON technology Co., Ltd.
 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
①. Accelerate and move to the synchronization area from the beginning of the axis;

②. In the synchronization zone and the spindle at the same speed and output the cutting signal (CLR0);

③. After leaving the synchronization zone, the slave axis will decelerate and move back to the origin to complete a cycle of

cutting. After knowing the stroke, the speed relationship can be drawn.
2) In the peeling process, the most important thing is speed synchronization. For example, when the cutting knife contacts
the material, it must be synchronized with the material speed. If the cutting knife speed is greater than the synchronous
speed during contact, a force that pulls the material forward will cause the material to be uneven. If the speed is lower
than the material speed, it will appear. Blocking phenomenon.
3) The planning of the synchronization area will affect the operation of the actual equipment. If the synchronization area is
larger in a cutting cycle, the acceleration and deceleration time will be smaller, which means that the equipment needs to
be accelerated and decelerated in a short time. For motors and machines The impact of the cutter is very large, and it is
easy to cause the servo over-current alarm and the equipment cannot operate normally.

4) The relationship between cutting length and cutter circumference:

Cutting length <cutter circumference:

In the synchronization zone, the cutter linear speed is synchronized with
the feeding speed. After the synchronization zone, in order to catch up with
the next cutting, the cutting axis is accelerated, as shown in the figure.

Cutting length = cutter circumference:

Average speed of cutting axis

500 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

1 times cutter circumference <cutting length <2 times cutter

circumference:After the cutting action in the synchronization zone is
completed, the cutting axis decelerates, then speed up to synchronize the
next cutting, as shown in the figure.

Cutting length> 2 times the circumference of the cutter:When the cutting

length is greater than 2 times the knife circumference (this is also the most
common situation), in a cycle, after the cutting of the knife edge in the
synchronization zone is completed, it decelerates to a stop, waits for a
certain length to pass, and then starts the next cutting .
(2) Rotary saw generation
The PLC built-in rotary saw curve automatically generates instructions. For the parameters needed to generate the curve, please refer
to the "Rotary saw Parameter Table". The CAM curve in depth 6 has 5 forms. The combination of these 5 forms can generate the
required rotary saw curve. ,As shown below.
Rotary saw curve parameter setting
Parameter Offset address Name Format Instruction
Address 0
Parameter 1 Spindle length 32 Bits Integer The cutting length of the feeding axis moving, the unit is Pulse.
Address 1
Address 2 The circumference of the cutting axis (including the tool length),
Parameter 2 Slave length 32-bit integer the unit is Pulse.
Address 3
Range [-2000000000, 2000000000]
The length of the slave axis synchronization zone is smaller than
Address 4
the slave axis length, generally set to 1/3 of the slave axis length.
Slave axis sync (When the new S-type rotary saw is selected, the value satisfies
32-bit integer
Parameter 3 length 40 *synchronization ratio<=synchronization length<slave axis
Address 5
Length-2. ), synchronization area range: 0＜synchronization area
length＜|slave axis length|
Calculation method 1: In the synchronization zone, the speed of
Address 6 the master axis and the slave axis are equal, and the calculation
method of synchronization magnification:

Slave axis
among them
Parameter 4 synchronization Floating
V1(V2)=Master (slave) axis speed
magnification
Address 7 F1(F2)=Master (slave) axis speed (Hz)
D1(D2)=Master (slave) shaft diameter
R1 (R2) = master (slave) axis pulse number per revolution
Calculation method two:
Slave axis synchronization magnification=1mm The number of
pulses required by the slave axis/
Number of pulses required by 1mm spindle

501 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Slave axis
Address 8 Maximum magnification=
Parameter 5 maximum Floating
Maximum speed of slave axis/maximum speed of main axis
Address 9 magnification limit
0: constant acceleration curve, the speed curve is T type
1: Constant jerk curve, speed curve is S type
2: reserved
Parameter 6 Address 10 Acceleration curve Integer 3: reserved
4: New S type rotary saw curve (the synchronization zone is in the
middle),Please refer to the appendix for details. The current
curve only supports CAM curve 0
Start, stop, and various curve selections of different
synchronization zone positions:
0: LeftCAM synchronization area is located on the front curve;
1: MidCAMall;
2: MidCAMBegin initial curve;
Parameter 7 Address 11 CAM curve Integer 3: MidCAMEnd end curve;
4: RightCAM sync area is located at the back curve;
BIT[15]=1: continue the previous data, used for splicing curves,
such as setting the subdivision of the curve, the total resolution
range of all splicing curves is 31 to 1024, and the two rotary saw
curves are spliced into a shearing curve
Range [31,511], of which 20 synchronization areas;
Address 12 Resolution Integer When CAM curve is selected as MdiCAMall (resolution range is
Parameter 8
[54, 511])
Address 13 Reserved Retained Reserved

Address 14 After the curve is generated correctly, the calculated starting

Synchronization
Parameter 9 32-bit integer position of the spindle synchronization area can be used to set
Address 15 zone start position
the lower limit of the synchronization area.

Address 16 End of After the curve is correctly generated, the calculated end position
Parameter 10 synchronization 32-bit integer of the spindle synchronization area can be used to set the lower
Address 17 zone limit of the synchronization area.
It is valid only when parameter 6 acceleration curve is set to 4.
Address 18 Slave axis minimum
Make sure that the actual maximum speed of the slave axis
limit operation Floating
Parameter 11 cannot be less than the speed corresponding to this value.
Address 19 magnification
Thereby adjusting the slope of the deceleration section.

502 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

(3) Rotary saw configuration

1) Overview
Synchronization zone: At this time, the feeding axis and the cutter axis rotate at a fixed speed ratio (the linear velocity of the cutter
head is equal to the linear velocity of the cutting surface), and the cutting of the material occurs in the synchronous zone.
Adjustment area: due to different cutting lengths, corresponding displacement adjustments are required. According to the cutting
length adjustment zone, it can be divided into the following three situations.
Short material cutting: the cutter shaft first has a uniform speed in the adjustment area, and then decelerates to the synchronous
speed.
Normal material cutting: In this case, the cutter axis accelerates first in the adjustment zone. Then decelerate to synchronous speed.
Long material cutting: In this case, the cutter shaft first accelerates to the minimum limit operating speed in the adjustment area, and
then decelerates to the synchronous speed. After the cutter shaft makes one revolution, the cutter shaft decelerates to zero and
stays for a while, then speed up and cycle operation. The longer the material length, the longer the residence time.

503 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

✎Note:
When setting the maximum limit magnification, synchronization magnification, and minimum limit operation magnification, the
material length boundary is also determined. Several limit values are as follows:
1 The speed of the shortest material (Lm1) satisfies: the actual maximum operating magnification = the maximum limit
magnification, and the adjustment area is a constant speed + deceleration process.

2 The shortest normal material (Lm2): the actual maximum operating magnification = the maximum limit magnification, the
adjustment area is the acceleration + deceleration process.

504 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
3 The shortest length of material (Lm3): the actual maximum operating magnification = the minimum limit operating
magnification, the adjustment area is acceleration + deceleration + dwell process.

Therefore, the length of the material determines the type of operation of the slave axis:
① When Lm1 ≤ L <Lm2, this is a short material, and its 0 ≤ actual maximum operating magnification ≤ maximum limit magnification
② When Lm2 ≤ L <Lm3, this is a normal material, and its minimum limit operation magnification ≤ actual maximum operation
magnification ≤ maximum limit magnification
③ When L ≥ Lm3, this is a long material, and the actual maximum operating magnification = minimum limit magnification. There is a
residence zone, the longer the material, the longer the residence time.
2) Example
The process result will be different according to the difference of the maximum limit magnification, synchronization magnification
and minimum limit operation magnification.
① Synchronous magnification <minimum limit operation magnification <maximum limit magnification

The parameter settings are as follows:

505 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Short material:

Normal materials:

Long material:

506 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
② Synchronous magnification = minimum limit operation magnification <maximum limit magnification

In this case, when the material is long, there is no deceleration into the synchronization zone. The parameter settings are as follows:

The situation of short material and normal material is the same as described in 2.1.
Long material: (no deceleration process in the adjustment zone)

③ Synchronous magnification = minimum limit operation magnification = maximum limit magnification

In this case, there are no normal materials, only short materials and long materials. The parameter settings are as follows:

507 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Short material Long material

(4) Case
1) Control requirements:
①. Use rotary saw curve to automatically generate cam table.

②. For the equipment matched with the cutting axis and the feeding axis, the servo parameter is 1,000 pulse/rev.

③. Related parameters:

Cutting material length is 1000 mm, cutting shaft circumference is 60πmm, feeding shaft circumference is 100πmm, and
feeding shaft speed is 1,000 Hz
2) Parameters required to establish rotary saw curve
Parameter 1: You eed to input the length of the spindle cutting material because the cutting material length is 1000mm, it is
converted to pulse
1000*1000/100Pi=3183 (pulse)
Parameter 2: The circumference of the slave shaft, that is, the number of pulses required for one revolution of the slave shaft
1000 pulse
Parameter 3: The synchronization length of the slave axis is set to approximately 1/3 of the circumference of the slave axis as
1000/3=333 pulse.
Parameter 4: During synchronization, the speed ratio of master and slave

Parameter 5: The maximum magnification limit is: set to 10 times the synchronization magnification as 50/3 (floating point number).
Parameter 6: Low WORD is set to 0 - uniform acceleration
High WORD set to 0 - LEFTCAM
Parameter 7: Set the curve generation result to 0
Using curve generation instructions, ECAMTBX generates curves.

Circuit program corresponding to the case:

508 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

Spindle length
Slave length
Slave synchronization length

Slave axis synchronization magnification

Slave axis maximum magnification limit

Acceleration curve
CAM curve solution resolution
Set as rotary saw curve

Curve generation instruction

The curve corresponding to the Circuit program:

Upload via PLC, check the electronic cam table, set the table address, and upload the generated cam curve.

509 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

Flying saw application

The flying saw system means that the feeding shaft will not stop while the system is cutting, so the camshaft must keep the same
speed with the feeding shaft when cutting, and the same speed time must be enough for the cutter to complete the cutting and
detach to safety s position. The flying saw camshaft will drive the cutter and the entire group of cutting mechanisms to move, so that
it can maintain the same speed with the main shaft during cutting.
(1) Description of flying saw action
Suppose the wiring is as shown in the figure below, where 1, 2, 3, 4 are the waiting point (starting point), synchronization point,
synchronization departure point, and waiting point (starting point), and its actions will follow the movement of the spindle. At the
beginning, the camshaft stops at position 1, and then accelerates forward to position 2 to achieve speed synchronization, and
continues to position 3, then decelerates and returns to position 4 in the opposite direction (assuming position 1 and position 4 are
the same), and then repeat this action .

Flying saw control is used in pipe cutting machines, beverage filling and other equipment that needs to move with the processed
product; its action is to add axis (slave axis)-start to accelerate and follow the processed product, and after moving to the
synchronization zone, it will contact the processed product Start processing at a constant speed. After leaving the synchronization
zone, the speed will decrease and stop, and then return to the starting position. All the stroke feeding axes (spindles) have been
feeding at a constant speed. As shown below.

510 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
The stroke of the flying saw is divided into two parts: the following part and the returning part. The two moving distances must be
the same. From the speed stroke point of view, that is, positive area = negative area.
During flying saw, you need to pay attention that the feeding will not stop during processing, so the processing axis must keep the
same speed with the feeding axis, and the synchronization time must be enough for the equipment to complete processing and move
to a safe position.
The stroke length of the synchronization area is also the processing time, which can be considered when planning the synchronization
area. In addition, the planning of the synchronization area will affect the operation of the actual equipment. If the synchronization
area is large in a cutting cycle, the acceleration and deceleration time will be smaller, indicating that the equipment needs to be
accelerated and decelerated in a short time. For motors, machines, and cutters The impact is very large, and it is easy to cause the
servo over-current alarm, and the equipment cannot operate normally.
(2) Flying saw parameter table
Parameter setting of flying saw curve
Offset
Parameter Name Format Instruction
address
Address 0
Parameter 1 Spindle length 32-bit integer The cutting length of the feeding axis moving, the unit is Pulse.
Address 1
Address 2 The circumference of the cutting axis (including the tool length),
Parameter 2 Slave length 32-bit integer
Address 3 the unit is Pulse. Range [-2000000000, 2000000000]
Address 4 The length of the slave axis synchronization zone.
Slave synchronization
Parameter 3 32-bit integer Synchronization area range: 0＜synchronization area length＜
Address 5 length
|slave axis length/2|
Calculation method one:
In the synchronization zone, the speed of the master axis and the
Address 6 slave axis are equal, and the synchronization magnification
calculation method:
V1(V2)=Master (slave) axis speed
Slave axis
F1(F2)=Master (slave) axis speed (Hz)
Parameter 4 synchronization Floating
D1(D2)=Master (slave) shaft diameter
magnification
R1 (R2) = master (slave) axis pulse number per revolution
Address 7 Calculation method two:
Slave axis synchronization magnification=1mm The number of
pulses required by the slave axis/1mm
Number of pulses required by the spindle
Address 8 Slave axis maximum Maximum magnification = maximum speed of slave
Parameter 5 Floating
Address 9 magnification limit axis/maximum speed of main axis
0: constant acceleration curve, the speed curve is T type
Address 10 Acceleration curve Integer
1: Constant jerk curve, the speed curve is S type
Start, stop, and various curve selections for different
Parameter 6
synchronization zone positions: (currently only one type is
Address 11 CAM curve Integer
supported, the default tracking RightCam, and the return
LeftCam curve type. May not be set)

Parameter 7 Address 12 Resolution Integer Range [62,511]

511 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Address 13 Reserved Retained Reserved

Address 14 After the curve is generated correctly, the calculated starting

synchronization zone
Parameter 8 32-bit integer position of the spindle synchronization area can be used to set
Address 15 start position
the lower limit of the synchronization area.

Address 16 After the curve is correctly generated, the calculated end

End of
Parameter 9 32-bit integer position of the spindle synchronization area can be used to set
Address 17 synchronization zone
the lower limit of the synchronization area.
Address 18
Parameter 10 Reserved Reserved Reserved
Address 19
The maximum The maximum magnification of the actual operation of slave axis:
Address 20
magnification of the It is sync magnification when it is long material, and it is between
Parameter 11 Floating
actual operation of sync magnification and maximum limit magnification when it is
Address 21
slave axis short material.
(3) Case
1) Control parameters
①. The servo parameter is 1000 pulse/rev.

②. Related parameters

The processing length of the feeding shaft is 660 mm, and the circumference of the feeding shaft is 60πmm
The machining length of the machining shaft is 40 mm
One rotation of the machining axis is 20 mm
The feed shaft speed is 1000 Hz
2) Establish flying saw curve by rotary saw curve
The parameters needed to establish rotary saw curve
Spindle length (processing length): Assuming that the spindle servo parameter is 1000 pulse/rev and the mechanism parameter
is 60π mm/rev, then 1pulse is 0.188mm. If the actual processing length is 660mm→convert to 660/0.188=3501 pulse.
Slave axis length(machining axis length):
First consider that the slave axis servo parameter is 1000 pulse/rev and the mechanism parameter is 20mm/rev, then
1pulse=0.01mm can be obtained.
The actual measured slave shaft machining length is 40 mm → converted to 2000 Pulse.
The location of the synchronization zone;
The lower limit of the synchronization zone is when the actual START0 signal is triggered, the slave axis goes from 0 to the position
200 where it catches up with the spindle speed;
The upper limit of the synchronization zone is the position 500 where the processing time ends and the processing equipment also
leaves.
The speed ratio of master and slave axis in synchronization zone: the speed ratio of the master axis and slave axis in the
synchronization zone.
The speed ratio of master and slave axis when returning:
After the total length of the stroke subtracts the stroke of the following movement, the return stroke length can be obtained, and
then use the following stroke distance = return stroke distance to know the speed ratio when returning = 3.
3) Establish flying saw curve automatically by rotary saw curve
① Establish a positive area curve

Parameter 1: It needs to input the processing length of the spindle feeding shaft to be 660mm, which is converted to pulse
660*1000/60pi=3501 pulse; Since the chase shear needs to return to the origin after the machining is completed, the pulse of

512 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
the spindle = 3501/2 =1750 pulse;
Parameter 2: Slave shaft processing length is 40mm, conversion 40*1000/20=2000 pulse;
Parameter 3: Slave axis synchronization length setting agrees that 1/3 of the slave axis circumference is 2000/3 = 667 pulse;
Parameter 4:

Parameter 5: the highest synchronization magnification 10 (floating point number);

Parameter 6: Low word setting 0: uniform acceleration;
High word setting 0: LeftCam.
② Establish a negative area curve

Parameter 1: Need to input the processing length of the spindle feeding shaft to be 660mm, which is converted to pulse
660*1000/60pi=3501 pulse; Since the chase shear needs to return to the origin after the machining is completed, the pulse of
the spindle =3501/2 =1750 pulse;
Parameter 2: Reverse running size is -2000;
Parameter 3: Same;
Parameter 4: Same;
Parameter 5: Same;
Parameter 6: Low word setting 0: uniform acceleration;
High word setting H8000: LeftCam continues the existing table data.
4) Generate tables with the function of flying saw
Parameter 1: Need to input the processing length of the spindle feeding shaft to be 660mm, which is converted to pulse
660*1000/60pi=3501 pulse;
Parameter 2: Slave shaft processing length is 40mm, conversion 40*1000/20=2000 pulse;
Parameter 3: Slave axis synchronization length setting agrees that 1/3 of the slave axis circumference is 2000/3=667 pulse;
Parameter 4:

Parameter 5: the highest synchronization magnification 10 (floating point number)

Parameter 6: Low word setting 1: Uniform acceleration;
High word setting 0: invalid.
Use ECAMTBX to generate curves:

513 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

Spindle length
Slave length
Slave synchronization length

Slave axis synchronization magnification

Slave axis maximum magnification limit

Acceleration curve
CAM curve solution resolution
Set as rotary saw curve
Curve generation
instruction

Obtain the curve according to the ladder program:

514 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
S type acceleration and deceleration curve establishment
(1) S type acceleration and deceleration curve table parameters
S type acceleration and deceleration curve parameter setting
Offset
Parameter Name Format Instruction Unit Range
address
Address 0 Total number of pulses 1 to
Parameter 1 32-bit integer Total number of output pulses Pulse
Address 1 (length) 2147483647
Address 2 Set the maximum speed
Parameter 2 32-bit integer Set the highest frequency of pulses Hz 1 to 200000
Address 3 of pulse
Address 4
Parameter 3 Reserved Retained Reserved
Address 5
Parameter 4 Address 6 Accelerated Time 16-bit integer Pulse acceleration time ms 2 to 32767
Parameter 5 Address 7 deceleration time 16-bit integer Pulse deceleration time ms 2 to 32767
Parameter 6 Address 8 Resolution 16-bit integer Pulse resolution Length 50 to 511
Parameter 7 Address 9 Reserved Retained Reserved
Address 10 Number of spindle pulses Number of spindle pulses in the last
Parameter 8 32-bit integer Pulse
Address 11 in the last segment segment (high and low)
Address 12 Number of pulses from the last
Number of slave axis
Parameter 9 32-bit integer segment of the slave axis (high and Pulse
Address 13 pulses in the last segment
low bits)
Address 14 The length of the pulse at a constant Internally
Parameter 10 Uniform time 32-bit integer Pulse
Address 15 speed generated
Address 16 Maximum speed of curve results
Parameter 11 Maximum speed 32-bit integer Hz
Address 17 during operation
Parameter 12 Address 18 Reserved
Parameter 13 Address 19 Curve generation result
✎Note:
Generate S type acceleration and deceleration curve (table) with the given acceleration time, deceleration time, and the highest
speed. When calculating, the spindle uses the pulse input frequency of 1K (1ms) as the calculation basis.
(2) Case
1 Related control parameters
Calculation case:
Total number of pulses (length): 10000 pulses
Acceleration time: 100ms
Deceleration time: 100ms Resolution: 200
2 2. Curve parameters:
Parameter 1: The total number of output pulses 10000
Parameter 2: Maximum speed 50000
Parameter 6: acceleration time 100
Parameter 7: acceleration time 100
Parameter 8: Resolution 200

515 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

Pulse maximum speed

Total pulse number
Acceleration time
Deceleration time
Resolution

Set S type acceleration and deceleration curve

Curve generation instruction

Customize specified key points to generate a table

(1) Specified key points generate table parameters
Specified key points generate table parameters
Address Name Length Instruction Range
>0: The curve is generated successfully
S0 Curve result Single word
<0: Failed to generate curve
S0+1 Error parameter position Single word
S0+2 Total resolution Single word 10 to 511
S0+3 Number of key points (n) Single word 1 to 10
S0+4
The initial position of slave axis Double word Set the initial offset position of slave axis Reserved
S0+5
S0+6 Spindle segment 0 Single word
The master/slave axis segment 0 is always 0 Reserved
S0+7 Slave axis segment 0 Single word

516 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
S0+8
Spindle segment 1 Double word Number of pulses of spindle segment 1 32-bit integer
S0+9
S0+10
Slave axis segment 1 Double word Number of pulses of slave axis segment 1 32-bit integer
Key S0+11
point 1 S0+12 Curve type of segment 1 Single word *1
S0+13 Resolution of segment 1 Single word *2
S0+14
Spindle segment 2 Double word Number of pulses of spindle segment 2 32-bit integer
S0+15
S0+16
Slave axis segment 2 Double word Number of pulses of slave axis segment 2 32-bit integer
Key S0+17
point 2 S0+18 Curve type of segment 2 Single word *1
S0+19 Resolution of segment 2 Single word *2
...... ...... ..... ...... ......
S0+n*6+2
Spindle segment N Double word Number of pulses of spindle segment N 32-bit integer
S0+n*6+3
S0+n*6+4
Slave axis segment N Double word Number of pulses of slave axis segment N 32-bit integer
Key point S0+n*6+5
N S0+n*6+6 Curve type of segment N Single word *1
S0+n*6+7 Resolution of segment N Single word *2
Curve type: Different values represent different curve types.
0 = uniform acceleration, 1 = S acceleration and deceleration (uniform acceleration), 2 = cycloid, 3 = uniform speed.
The resolution range is 0-511, the total resolution of all segments does not exceed the total resolution set by [S0]. if the resolution of
all segments is set to 0, the total resolution set by [S0] split equally. When the curve type is cycloid, the corresponding resolution
range is 3-511.W
Refer to the setting method of PLC Editor to generate a table based on the given key points and the given function relationship. The
parameter setting is the same as the setting method of the upper computer. The editing interface of the upper computer is shown
below. When the table is generated in K2 mode, The generated result is similar to the table result set by the relevant parameters of
the upper computer. This mode expands the function of the table generated by the lower computer through the key points. In the
key point curve, the spindle must have an increasing relationship, that is, the spindle pulse number of the next point must be greater
than the spindle pulse number of the previous point, otherwise an error will be reported.
(2) Case
1) Specified key points parameters
When the spindle has 0-600 pulses, the slave axis stops at position 0;
When the spindle has 600-1500 pulses, the slave axis moves to the position 2000;
When the spindle is 1500-1700 pulses, the slave axis stops at position 2000;
When the spindle has 1700-1900 pulses, the slave axis will return to position 600;
When the spindle has 1900-2000 pulses, the slave axis returns to position 0.
2) Specified key points for tabulation
Use PLC Editor software to create ECAM table, and set the parameter value of each key point in the table.

517 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

Then set the starting address of the parameter, check the ECam0 form in [Electronic Cam] when downloading, the system
will automatically fill in the data of the above form into the corresponding parameter address.
3) Specified key point parameters table
Address Instruction Set value Address Instruction Set value
S0 Curve generation result S0+19 Resolution of segment 2 0
S0+1 Error parameter location S0+20
Spindle position of segment 3 1700
S0+2 Total resolution 100 S0+21
S0+3 Number of key point 1-10 S0+22
Slave axis position of segment 3 2000
S0+4 S0+23
Initial position of slave axis ——
S0+5 S0+24 Curve type of segment 3 0
S0+6 Spindle position of segment 0 Reserved S0+25 Resolution of segment 3 0
S0+7 Slave axis position of segment 0 Reserved S0+26
Spindle position of segment 4 1900
S0+8 S0+27
Spindle position of segment 1 600
S0+9 S0+28
Slave axis position of segment 4 600
S0+10 S0+29
Slave axis position of segment 1 0
S0+11 S0+30 Curve type of segment 4 0
S0+12 Curve type of segment 1 0 S0+31 Resolution of segment 4 0
S0+13 Resolution of segment 1 0 S0+32
Spindle position of segment 5 2000
S0+14 S0+33
Spindle position of segment 2 1500
S0+15 S0+34
Slave axis position of segment 5 0
S0+16 S0+35
Slave axis position of segment 2 1200
S0+17 S0+36 Curve type of segment 5 0
S0+18 Curve type of segment 2 0 S0+37 Resolution of segment 5 0

518 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
4) The table generated by specified key points is shown as below.

5) If you do not need to fill in the data in the form, you can use the Circuit program to replace the form data:

Special address
Devices Content
SD881 (high byte), SD880 (low byte) Y000 Output pulse number. Decrease when reversed. (Use 32 bits)
SD941 (high byte), SD940 (low byte) Y001 Output pulse number. Decrease when reversed. (Use 32 bits)
SD1001 (high byte), SD1000 (low byte) Y002 Output pulse number. Decrease when reversed. (Use 32 bits)
SD1061 (high byte), SD1060 (low byte) Y003 output pulse number. Decrease when reversed. (Use 32 bits)
SD1121 (high byte), SD1120 (low byte) Y004 Output pulse number. Decrease when reversed. (Use 32 bits)
SD1181 (high byte), SD1180 (low byte) Y005 Output pulse number. Decrease when reversed. (Use 32 bits)
SD1241 (high byte), SD1240 (low byte) Y006 Number of output pulses. Decrease when reversed. (Use 32 bits)
SD1301 (high byte), SD1300 (low byte) Y007 Output pulse number. Decrease when reversed. (Use 32 bits)

519 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

Devices Content Devices Content

SM882 Y000 Pulse output stop (stop immediately) SM880 Y000 monitoring during pulse output (BUSY/READY)
SM942 Y001 Pulse output stop (stop immediately) SM940 Y001 Monitoring during pulse output (BUSY/READY)
SM1002 Y002 Pulse output stop (stop immediately) SM1000 Y002 Monitoring during pulse output (BUSY/READY)
SM1062 Y003 Pulse output stop (stop immediately) SM1060 Y003 Monitoring during pulse output (BUSY/READY)
SM1122 Y004 Pulse output stop (stop immediately) SM1120 Y004 Monitoring during pulse output (BUSY/READY)
SM1182 Y005 Pulse output stop (stop immediately) SM1180 Y005 Monitoring during pulse output (BUSY/READY)
SM1242 Y006 Pulse output stop (stop immediately) SM1240 Y006 Monitoring during pulse output (BUSY/READY)
SM1302 Y007 Pulse output stop (stop immediately) SM1300 Y007 Monitoring during pulse output (BUSY/READY)

Appendix
Rotary saw parameter table
Rotary saw curve parameter setting
Offset
Parameter Name Format Instruction
address
Address 0
Parameter 1 Spindle length 32-bit integer The moving cut length of the feeding axis moving. Unit: pulse.
Address 1
Address 2 The circumference of the cutting axis (including the tool length).
Parameter 2 Slave length 32-bit integer
Address 3 Unit: pulse. Range [-2,000,000,000, 2,000,000,000]
The length of the slave axis synchronization zone is smaller than the
Address 4
slave axis length, generally set to 1/3 of the slave axis length. (When
Parameter 3 Slave sync length 32-bit integer the new S type rotary saw is selected, the value satisfies 40 *sync
Address 5 ratio<=sync length< slave axis length-2. ). Sync area range: 0＜sync
area length＜|slave axis length|
Calculation method one:
In the synchronization zone, the speed of the master axis and the
slave axis are equal, and the sync magnification calculation method:
V1(V2)=Master (slave) axis speed
Address 6 Slave axis sync F1(F2)=Master (slave) axis speed (Hz)
Parameter 4 Floating
magnification D1(D2)=Master (slave) axis diameter
R1 (R2) = master (slave) axis pulse number per revolution
Calculation method two:
Slave axis sync magnification=the number of pulses required by
Address 7
1mm slave axis/the number of pulses required by 1mm spindle
Address 8 Slave axis maximum Maximum magnification = maximum speed of slave axis/maximum
Parameter 5 Floating
Address 9 magnification limit speed of spindle

520 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
0: Constant acceleration curve, the speed curve is T type
1: Constant jerk curve, the speed curve is S type
2: reserved
Parameter 6 Address 10 Acceleration curve Integer 3: reserved
4: New S rotary saw curve (synchronization zone is in the middle),
see appendix for details. Current curve only supports CAM curve as
0.
Start, stop, and various curve selections of different synchronization
zone positions:
0: LeftCAM synchronization area is on the front curve;
1: MidCAMall;
2: MidCAMBegin start curve;
Parameter 7 Address 11 CAM curve Integer 3: MidCAMEnd end curve;
4: RightCAM synchronization area is on the back curve;
BIT[15]=1: Continuing the previous data, used for splicing curves,
such as setting the subdivision of the curve, the total resolution
range of all splicing curves is 31 to 1024, and the two rotary saw
curves are spliced into a shearing curve
Range [31,511], of which 20 synchronization areas;
Parameter 8 Address 12 Resolution Integer When CAM curve is selected as MdiCAMall (resolution range is [54,
511])
Address 13 Reserved Retained Reserved

Address 14 After the curve is generated correctly, the calculated start position
Synchronization zone
Parameter 9 of the spindle synchronization area could be used to set the lower
Address 15 start position 32-bit integer
limit of the synchronization area.

Address 16 After the curve is correctly generated, the calculated end position of
Parameter End of
the spindle synchronization area could be used to set the lower limit
10 Address 17 synchronization zone 32-bit integer
of the synchronization area.
It is valid only when parameter 6 acceleration curve is set to 4.
Address 18 Slave axis minimum
Parameter Make sure that the actual maximum speed of the slave axis cannot
limit operation Floating
11 be less than this value magnification corresponds to the speed so as
Address 19 magnification
to adjust the slope of the deceleration section.
The maximum The maximum magnification of the actual operation of slave axis:
Address 20
Parameter magnification of the It is sync magnification when it is long material, and it is between
Floating
11 actual operation of sync magnification and maximum limit magnification when it is
Address 21
slave axis short material.

9.2.5.2 Flying saw parameter table

Parameter setting of flying saw curve
Offset
Parameter Name Format Instruction
address
Address 0 32-bit
Parameter 1 Spindle length The cutting length of the feeding axis moving. Unit: Pulse.
Address 1 integer

521 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Address 2 32-bit The circumference of the cutting axis (including the tool length). Unit:
Parameter 2 Slave length
Address 3 integer Pulse. Range [-2,000,000,000, 2,000,000,000]
Address 4 Slave synchronization 32-bit The length of the slave axis synchronization zone. Synchronization area
Parameter 3
Address 5 length integer range: 0＜synchronization area length＜|slave axis length/2|
Calculation method one:
In the synchronization zone, the speed of master axis and the slave
axis are equal, and the synchronization magnification calculation
method is as below.
Address 6

Slave axis
Parameter 4 synchronization Floating
among them
magnification
V1(V2)=Master (slave) axis speed
F1(F2)=Master (slave) axis speed (Hz)
D1(D2)=Master (slave) axis diameter
Address 7
R1 (R2) = master (slave) axis pulse number per revolution
Calculation method two:
Slave axis synchronization magnification=1mm The number of pulses
required by the slave axis/1mm The number of pulses required by the
spindle
Address 8 Slave axis maximum Maximum magnification = maximum speed of slave axis/maximum
Parameter 5 Floating
Address 9 magnification limit speed of main axis

0: constant acceleration curve, the speed curve is T type

Address 10 Acceleration curve Integer
1: Constant jerk curve, the speed curve is S type
Start, stop, and various curve selections for different synchronization
Parameter 6
zone positions: (currently only one type is supported, the tracking
Address 11 CAM curve Integer
RightCam and the return LeftCam curve type are defaulted and can
not be set)
Parameter 7 Address 12 Resolution Integer Range [62,511]
Address 13 Reserved Reserved Reserved

Address 14 After the curve is generated correctly, the calculated starting position
Synchronization zone 32-bit
Parameter 8 of the spindle synchronization area can be used to set the lower limit
Address 15 start position integer
of the synchronization area.

Address 16 After the curve is correctly generated, the calculated end position of
End of 32-bit
Parameter 9 the spindle synchronization area can be used to set the lower limit of
Address 17 synchronization zone integer
the synchronization area.
The maximum The maximum magnification of the actual operation of slave axis:
Address 20
magnification of the It is sync magnification when it is long material, and it is between sync
Parameter 11 Floating
actual operation of magnification and maximum limit magnification when it is short
Address 21
slave axis material.

522 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
S type acceleration and deceleration curve parameter table
S type acceleration and deceleration curve parameter setting
Offset
Parameter Name Format Instruction Unit Range
address
Address 0 Total number of pulses
Parameter 1 32-bit integer Total number of output pulses Pulse 1 to 2147483647
Address 1 (length)
Address 2 Set the maximum speed of
Parameter 2 32-bit integer Set the highest frequency of pulses Hz 1 to 200000
Address 3 pulse

Address 4
Parameter 3 Reserved Retained Reserved 2 to 32767
Address 5
Parameter 4 Address 6 Accelerated time 16-bit integer Pulse acceleration time ms 2 to 32767
Parameter 5 Address 7 Deceleration time 16-bit integer Pulse deceleration time ms 50 to 511
Parameter 6 Address 8 Resolution 16-bit integer Pulse resolution Length 51 to 512
Parameter 7 Address 9 Reserved Reserved Reserved
Address 10 Number of pulses of Number of pulses of spindle in the last
Parameter 8 32-bit integer Pulse
Address 11 spindle in the last segment segment (high and low)
Address 12 Number of pulses of slave Number of pulses of slave axis in the last
Parameter 9 32-bit integer Pulse
Address 13 axis in the last segment segment(high and low)

Address 14 The time span when outputting pulses

Parameter 10 Uniform time 32-bit integer Pulse Internally
Address 15 at a constant speed
generated
Address 16 The maximum speed of curve during
Parameter 11 Maximum speed 32-bit integer Hz
Address 17 operation
Parameter 12 Address 18 Reserved
Parameter 13 Address 19 Curve generation result

4 Specified key points generate a table

Specified key points generate table parameters
Address Name Length Instruction Range
>0: The curve is generated successfully
S0 Curve generation result Single word
<0: Failed to generate the curve
S0+1 Error parameter location Single word
S0+2 Total resolution Single word 10 to 511

S0+3 Number of key points (n) Single word 1 to 10

S0+4
Start position of slave axis Double word Set the start offset position of slave axis Reserved
S0+5
S0+6 Spindle segment 0 Single word
The master/slave axis of segment 0 is always 0 Reserved
S0+7 Slave axis segment 0 Single word
S0+8
Spindle segment 1 Double word The number of pulse of spindle segment 1 32-bit integer
S0+9
S0+10
Slave axis segment 1 Double word The number of pulse of slave axis segment 1 32-bit integer
Key S0+11

523 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
point 1 S0+12 Curve type of segment 1 Single word *1

S0+13 Resolution of segment 1 Single word *2

S0+14
Spindle segment 2 Double word The number of pulse of spindle segment 2 32-bit integer
S0+15
S0+16
Slave axis segment 2 Double word The number of pulse of slave axis segment 2 32-bit integer
S0+17
Key
S0+18 Curve type of segment 2 Single word *1
Point 2
S0+19 Resolution of segment 2 Single word *2
...... ...... .... ...... ......
S0+n*6+2
Spindle segment N Double word The number of pulse of spindle segment N 32-bit integer
S0+n*6+3
S0+n*6+4
Slave axis segment N Double word The number of pulse of slave axis segment N 32-bit integer
S0+n*6+5
Key
S0+n*6+6 Curve type of segment N Single word *1
point N
S0+n*6+7 Resolution of segment N Single word *2

524 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

10 Communication instruction
10.1 Communication port protocol setting
PROTOCOL/communication port protocol setting
PROTOCOL(P)
Set (s) protocol for (n) communication port.
-[PROTOCOL (s) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Data type
Parameter Content Range Data type
(label)
(s) Protocol number to be set - Unsigned BIN 16 bit ANY16
(n) Which communication port to set, 0 means COM1, 1 means COM2 *1 0, 1 Unsigned BIN 16 bit ANY16
Device used

Offset Pulse
Devices
modification extension
Instruction Parameter

X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP

Parameter 1 ● ● ● ●●●●● ●● ● ●
PROTOCOL
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ●●●●● ●● ● ●
Features
This instruction is mainly used to set the protocol during run, and can also be used in the first cycle of run.
The value of the protocol address (COM1 SD2542, COM2 SD2592) and the protocol modification flag (COM1 SD2543, COM2 SD2593)
can be directly set according to the command parameters.
The specific calculation formula for setting the protocol modification flag (COM1 SD2543, COM2 SD2593) is: (parameter setting value
+ offset of the corresponding serial port's initial special soft component + 10)*2
For example, setting the protocol to 2 is (2 +2593-2590 +10)*2, which is (2+3+10) *2=30. At this time, SD2592 will be set to 1, and
SD2593 will be set to 32.
✎Note: Whether it is by self-calculation and then modifying the setting value of the identifier (COM1 SD2543, COM2 SD2593) to the
protocol, or using this instruction to set, it is possible to modify the protocol when the PLC is in the RUN state.
Regarding the protocol modification flags (COM1 SD2543, COM2 SD2593): During the RUN process, the first cycle of setting the
protocol and modifying the flags is correct (judging at END) to the correct first cycle. When the modification is completed, the
protocol modification flags (COM1 SD2543, COM2 SD2593) is cleared, and then set the same value will not be processed. Mainly to
avoid repeated settings multiple times.
Agreement Number
Agreement Number Content
0H Wecon Modbus slave
2H ModbusRTU slave
3H ModbusASCII slave
10 H User-defined protocol
20 H ModbusRTU master station
30 H ModbusASCII master

525 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Related software components
Devices Content
SD2542 COM1 protocol settings
SD2543 COM1 protocol modification sign
SD2592 COM2 protocol settings
SD2593 COM2 protocol modification sign
✎Note:
The setting of communication parameters will affect the overall communication. The processing in the PLC is to modify it when there
is no communication or after a round of communication is completed. This point needs attention.
If the set protocol does not match the provided protocol number, the protocol modification flag (COM1 SD2543, COM2 SD2593) will
not be cleared after setting. At this time, the protocol will not be set successfully, and it will run according to the original protocol.
Error code
Error code Content

4085H The read address of (s) and (n) exceeds the device range
4084H (n) is not 1
Example

Example above
M1 changes from OFF to ON during the run
SD2592 will be set to 32 (20H), SD2593 will be set to 90 and then it will be cleared. At this time, it means that the setting is
successful.

If you turn M1 from OFF to ON again

SD2592 will be set to 32 (20H), SD2593 will be set to 90 but will not be cleared.

526 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
10.2 Modbus serial port parameter setting
PORTPARA/Modbus serial port parameter setting
PORTPARA(P)
Set (s) serial port parameters for (n) communication port.
-[PORTPARA (s) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Data type
Parameter Content Range Data type
(label)
(s) Serial port parameters to be set - Unsigned BIN 16 bit ANY16
(n) Which communication port to set, 0 means COM1, 1 means COM2 0, 1 Unsigned BIN 16 bit ANY16
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
ECAMCUT
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
Features
This instruction is mainly used to set serial port parameters during run, and can also be used in the first cycle of run.
Can directly set the serial port parameter address (COM1 SD2540, COM2 SD2590) and the value of the serial parameter modification
flag (COM1 SD2541, COM2 SD2591) according to the command parameters.
The specific calculation formula for setting the serial port parameter modification flags (COM1 SD2541, COM2 SD2591) is: (parameter
setting value + offset of the corresponding serial port's initial special soft component + 10)*2
For example, setting the COM1 serial port parameter to 193 (HC1) is (193 +2541-2540 +10)*2 which is (193 +1+10) *2=408. At this
time, 193 (HC1) will be set for SD2540 and 408 for SD2541.
✎Note: Whether it is by self-calculation and then to the serial port parameter to modify the flag (COM1 SD2541, COM2 SD2591)
setting value, or use this instruction to set, it is possible to modify the serial port parameter when the PLC is in the RUN state.
About serial port parameter modification flags (COM1 SD2541, COM2 SD2591): During RUN, when the serial port parameters are set
and the modified flag is correct (judging at END) to the correct first cycle, the serial port parameter modification flag (COM1 SD2541,
COM2, SD2591) are cleared, and then set the same value will not be processed. Mainly to avoid repeated settings multiple times.
Serial port parameter setting table
Bit number B0 B1、B2 B3 B4、B5、B6、B7、B8、B9 B10 B11
Data Stop
Name Parity Baud Rate（bps） STX ETX
length Bit
4800 0111
0 9600 1000 Turn off STX Turn off ETX
7bit 1bit
off 19200 1001 function function
b2,b1 38400 1010
(0,0):None 57600 1011
Content Enable STX Turn on the
(0,1):Odd parity(ODD) 115200 1100
function, the ETX function,
1 (1,1):Even parity(EVEN) 187500 1101
8bit 2bit specific value the specific
on 230400 1110
is set by value is set by
460800 1111
D8124 D8125
921600 10000

527 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Related software components
Devices Content

SD2540 COM1 serial port parameter setting

SD2541 COM1 serial port parameter modification identification
SD2590 COM2 serial port parameter setting
SD2591 COM2 serial port parameter modification sign
✎Note:
The setting of communication parameters will affect the overall communication. The processing in the PLC is to be modified when
there is no communication or after a round of communication is completed. This point needs attention.
STX function and ETX function are only useful in the case of custom protocol.
If the set protocol does not match the provided protocol number, the serial port parameter modification flags (COM1 SD2541, COM2
SD2591) will not be cleared after setting. At this time, the protocol will not be set successfully, and it will run according to the original
protocol.
Error code
Error code Content
4085H The read address of (s) and (n) exceeds the device range
4084H (n) is not 0 or 1
Example

Example above
M1 changes from OFF->ON during run
SD2540 will be set to 129 (H81, baud rate: 9600, stop bit: 1, data bit: 8, parity bit: none), SD2541 will be set to 280 and then cleared.
At this time it has been set successfully

If you turn M1 from OFF->ON again

SD2540 will be set to 129 (H81), SD2541 will be set to 280 but will be cleared.

528 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
10.3 Modbus station number setting
STATION/Modbus station number setting
STATION(P)
Under the Modbus slave station protocol. Set the station number (s) for the (n) communication port.
-[STATION (s) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Data type
Parameter Content Range Data type
(label)
(s) Station number to be set 0 to 255 Unsigned BIN 16 bit ANY16
(n) Which communication port to set 0 means COM1, 1 means COM2 0, 1 Unsigned BIN 16 bit ANY16
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ●
ECAMCUT ●
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ●
Features
●This instruction is mainly used to set the station number during run, and it can also be used in the first cycle of run.

●The value of the station number address (COM1 SD2544, COM2 SD2594) and the station number modification flag (COM1 SD2545,
COM2 SD2595) can be directly set according to the command parameters.
●The specific calculation formula for setting the station number modification flag (COM1 SD2545, COM2 SD2595) is: (parameter
setting value + offset of the corresponding serial port's initial special device + 10)*2
●For example, setting the COM2 station number to 1 is (1 +2595-2590 +10)*2, which is (1 +5+10) *2=32. At this time, SD2594 will be
set to 1, and SD2595 will be set to 32.
✎Note: Whether it is by self-calculation and then modifying the ID (COM1 SD2545, COM2 SD2595) setting value to the station
number, or setting with this instruction, the station number can be modified when the PLC is in the RUN state.
●Regarding station number modification identification (COM1 SD2545, COM2 SD2595): During RUN, when the station number is set
and the modification identification is correct (judgment at END) to the correct first cycle, the station number will be modified when
the modification is completed (COM1 SD2545, COM2 SD2595) are cleared, and then set the same value will not be processed. Mainly
to avoid repeated settings multiple times.
Related software components
Devices Content

SD2544 COM1 station number setting

SD2545 COM1 station number modification sign
SD2594 COM2 station number setting
SD2595 COM2 station number modification sign
Error code
Error code Content
4085H The read address of (s) and (n) exceeds the device range
(s) not in the range of 0 to 255
4084H
(n) is not 0 or 1
✎Note:
The setting of communication parameters will affect the overall communication. The processing in the PLC is to modify it when there
is no communication or after a round of communication is completed. This point needs attention.

529 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Example

Example above
M1 changes from OFF->ON during run
SD2594 will be set to 2, SD2595 will be set to 34 and then it will be cleared. At this time it has been set successfully

If you turn M1 from OFF->ON again

SD2594 will be set to 2, SD2595 will be set to 34 but will not be cleared.

530 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
10.4 RS instruction
RS/External communication instruction
RS
In the case of Modbus master station protocol: This instruction is the setting interface for the master station to send protocol frames.
The function code (s), slave address (m), length (d) of the station number set according to the instruction, and the function code
determines whether the data of n is required to be automatically combined to send and receive protocol frames. If it is a read type
function code, the data will be written into (n).
-[RS (s) (m) (d) (n)]
Content, range and data type
In the case of user-defined protocol:
Data type
Parameter Content Range Data type
(label)
(s) The start address of register area that stores the data to be sent - Unsigned BIN 16 bit ANY16
(m) The length of data to be sent (bytes) 0 to 523 Unsigned BIN 16 bit ANY16
(d) The device start number that stores the written data - Unsigned BIN 16 it ANY16
(n) Number of data written (bytes) 0 to 523 Unsigned BIN 16 bit ANY16
In the case of Modbus protocol:
Data type
Parameter Content Range Data type
(label)
The high byte stores the station number of slave station, and the
(s) - Unsigned BIN 16 bit ANY16
low byte stores function code of Modbus
Slave address. The address provided by the slave station will
(m) - Unsigned BIN 16 bit ANY16
read or write data from this address of the slave station
Length. The length of Modbus read or write. The unit is
(d) - Unsigned BIN 16 bit ANY16
determined by function code.
(n) Start address for reading or writing data - Unsigned BIN 16 bit ANY16
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●●● ●●
Parameter 2 ●●●● ●●
RS
Parameter 3 ●●●● ●●
Parameter 4 ●●●● ●●
(1) Custom protocol
When the communication protocol is set as a custom protocol. When the contact in before RS instruction is turned on and SM2591 is
also turned on at the same time, if the sending length (m) is not 0, the data of (s) will be sent (m) bytes out, and then it will be in the
mode of waiting for reception. When the data is received, (n) bytes of data will be stored in (d). SM2593 will be turned ON after
receiving (n) data.
In addition, when the sending length (m) is 0, it will be in the receive-only mode. When the receiving length (n) is 0, it will be in the
send-only mode.
To enable the start character (STX) and the end character (ETX) modes of RS instruction, the status of the 10th and 11th bits of the
special address SD2600 must be set. See the table below for detailed settings:

531 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

B4、B5、B6、
Bit number B0 B1、B2 B3 B10 B11
B7、B8、B9
Data Stop
Name Parity Baud rate(bps) STX ETX
length Bit

9600 001000
0 19200 001001
7-bit 1-bit None None
off
38400 001010
b2, b1
57600 001011
(0,0): None
Content 115200 001100
(0,1): Odd parity (ODD)
187500 001101 Turn on STX, the Turn on ETX, the
1 (1,1): Even parity (EVEN)
8-bit 2-bit 230400 001110 STX value is set ETX value is set
on
460800 001111 in SD2600 in SD2601

921600 010000
Example

When M1 is ON, the sending and receiving data of communication after executing instruction is stored as the following figure.

Some configuration and preparation of serial communication are needed for actual programming to communicate as expected, such
as setting the transceiver mode of serial port, baud rate, number of bits, parity, software protocol settings, timeout judgment
conditions, and data preparation for the transceiver buffer, send and receive flag processing, etc.,
A relatively complete RS communication setup program is shown as follows:
Serial port parameters settings:
Baud rate 112500, stop bit 1, data bit 8, parity bit none
Set the protocol as a custom protocol
Sending interval: 5ms
Receiving timeout: 100ms
Number of repetitions: 3 times
Timeout between characters: 30ms
Custom protocol, send start address D200, sending length 8,
receive start address D300, receiving length 8,
Receive start address D300 Receive length 6
Send directly after trigger

After receiving, close the instruction directly and reset the

instruction receiving flag
For detailed user-defined protocol instructions, please refer to "10.7.1 Custom protocol description"
532 WECON technology Co., Ltd.
 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
(2) Modbus protocol
When the protocol is set to Modbus master protocol (whether it is RTU or ASCII). When the contact before RS instruction is turned
ON, the RS instruction will send the combined data frame according to the station number function code (s), slave station address
(m), length (d) and judge whether the data of (n) is needed according to the function code.

Parameter Content
(s) The high byte stores the station number of slave station, and the low byte stores the function code of Modbus
(m) Slave address. The address provided by the slave station will read or write data from this address of the slave station
(d) Length, the length of Modbus read or write. The unit is determined by the function code.
(n) Start address for reading or writing data

Serial port parameter setting

Baud rate 115200, data bit 8, parity bit none, stop bit 1

Communication protocol setting: ModbusRTU master

Sending interval: 5ms

Receiving timeout: 100ms

Timeout retry times: 3 times

Station number 01H, function code 03H, slave address

As the ladder program shown above:

When M1 is turned ON, PLC will send data (hexadecimal) from COM2 of PLC: 01 03 00 0A 00 05 A5 C8
01: represents slave address, the upper 8 bits of (s);
03: Modbus instruction code, the lower 8 bits of (s), meaning to read the slave register;
00 0A: The address of slave register to be read, the value of (m);
00 05: The number of registers to be read, the value of (d),
A5 C8: CRC check code.
For detailed custom protocol instructions, please refer to "10.7.2 Modbus protocol description"
✎Note:
Although the RS instruction currently allows all the parameters of the instruction to use constants such as K and H, there are
different restrictions depending on the protocol.
When the protocol is a custom protocol, S and D cannot be constants, otherwise it will report (3189H) error.
When the protocol is Modbus protocol, n cannot be a constant, otherwise it will report (3189H) error.
The combination of RTU protocol and 7-bit data bits cannot be set.
If the serial port parameter settings are different, it may still be able to communicate. At present, it is normal to set one.
Currently, the RS instruction cannot be used in interrupts and events.
Error code
Error code Content
4085H The read address of (s), (m), (d) and (n) exceed the device range.
COM2 data reception error. There may be interference on the communication line, it is recommended to connect
3180H
the ground wire.
COM2 data reception timed out. "Check the wiring, check whether the serial port parameter settings are compatible
3181H with master and slave, check whether there is interference. Check whether the slave station is too late to respond.
For this reason, you can try to increase the sending interval SD2546."

533 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
COM2 CRC check error. There may be interference on the communication line, it is recommended to connect the
3182H
ground wire.
COM2 LRC check error. There may be interference on the communication line, it is recommended to connect the
3183H
ground wire.
The COM2 station number is incorrectly configured. Check the slave station number setting, and check whether
3184H
there is any problem with the receiving and sending mechanism of slave station.
3185H COM2 send buffer overflow. Contact a technician if this error occurs
3186H COM2 function code is wrong. Check whether the set function code is a function code supported by PLC
3187H COM2 address is wrong. Check whether the slave station has this address (please refer to Modbus Abnormal 02)
3188H The length of COM2 is wrong. Check whether the communication length exceeds the length range specified by the
Modbus protocol, or whether it exceeds the specified length range of the custom protocol.
3189H COM2 data error. "Check whether there are errors in the parameters of the instruction. Check whether the slave
station supports the setting of this value. (Please refer to Modbus Abnormal 03)"
318AH COM2 slave station is busy. Slave station returns information: Slave station is busy (please refer to Modbus exception
06)
318BH COM2 slave station does not support function codes. Check whether the slave station supports this function code
(please refer to Modbus exception 01)
318CH COM2 slave station is faulty. Slave station returns information: Slave station is faulty, please check whether the slave
station is faulty (please refer to Modbus Abnormal 04)
318DH COM2 slave station confirmation. Slave station return information: slave station confirmation (please refer to
Modbus abnormal 05)
318EH COM2 current protocol does not support this instruction or function. The related conmunication instruction of
master station or the function of maste station cannot be used when it is set to slave station protocol, please change
the protocol or close the contact before the corresponding instruction or diable the corresponding communication
function.
318FH COM2 sending timed out. Contact a technician if this error occurs
31A0H COM2 is not available as a gateway. Slave station returns information: unavailable gateway (please refer to Modbus
exception 0A)
31A1H COM2 indicates that no response was obtained from the target device. Slave station returns information: the device
is not in the network (please refer to Modbus exception 0B)

534 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
10.5 RS2 instruction
RS2/External communication instruction
RS2
In custom protocol: This instruction is a communication send and receive instruction. It takes out (M) of the initial data specified (s)
and send it, and stores (n) of the data received through the serial port in (d) and sent by (n1) automatic communication port.
In Modbus master station protocol: This instruction is the setting interface for the master station to send protocol frames. According
to the station number function code (s), slave address (m), length (d) set by the instruction, and the function code to determine
whether n data is required to automatically combined sending and receiving protocol frames. If it is a read type function code, the
data would be written to (n) and sent by (n1) custom communication port.
-[RS2 (s) (m) (d) (n) (n1)]
Content, range and data type
In custom protocol
Data type
Parameter Content Range Data type
(label)
(s) The start address of register area that stores the data to be sent - Unsigned BIN 16 bit ANY16
(m) The length of data to be sent (bytes) 0 to 528 Unsigned BIN 16 bit ANY16
(d) The device start number that stores the written data - Unsigned BIN 16 bit ANY16
(n) Number of data written (bytes) 0 to 528 Unsigned BIN 16 bit ANY16
(n1) Specify the communication port Unsigned BIN 16 bit ANY16
In Modbus protocol
Data type
Parameter Content Range Data type
(label)
The high byte stores the station number of slave station, and the low
(s) - Unsigned BIN 16 bit ANY16
byte stores function code of Modbus
Slave address. The address provided by the slave station will read or
(m) - Unsigned BIN 16 bit ANY16
write data from this address of the slave station
Length. The length of Modbus read or write. The unit is determined
(d) - Unsigned BIN 16 bit ANY16
by function code.
(n) The start address of the data to be read or written - Unsigned BIN 16 bit ANY16
(n1) Specify the communicatiom port Unsigned BIN 16 bit ANY16
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
(s) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ●●●● ● - - ●● - - -
(m) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ●●●● ● - - ●● - - -
RS2 (d) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ●●●● ● - - ●● - - -
(n) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ●●●● ● - - ●● - - -
(n1) ●●
Features
Parameter (n1) is the specified port. Curently, k0 indicates COM1, and k1 indicates COM2.
(1) Custom protocol
When the communication protocol is set as a custom protocol. When the contact in before RS2 instruction is turned on and “sending
control enable” is also turned on at the same time, and the sending length (m) is not 0, the data of (s) will be sent (m) bytes out, and
then it will be in the mode of waiting for reception. When the data is received, (n) bytes of data will be stored in (d). “reception
control or reception notice” will be turned ON after receiving (n) data.
535 WECON technology Co., Ltd.
 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
In addition, when the sending length (m) is 0, it will be in the receive-only mode. When the receiving length (n) is 0, it will be in the
send-only mode.
To enable the start character (STX) and the end character (ETX) modes of RS2 instruction, the status of the 10th and 11th bits of the
special address “communication port setting” must be set. See the table below for detailed settings:
B4、B5、B6、
Bit number B0 B1、B2 B3 B10 B11
B7、B8、B9
Data Stop
Name Parity Baud rate(bps) STX ETX
length Bit

9600 001000
0 19200 001001
7-bit 1-bit None None
off
38400 001010
b2, b1
57600 001011
(0,0): none
Content 115200 001100 Turn on STX, the Turn on ETX, the
(0,1): odd parity (ODD)
187500 001101 STX value is set in ETX value is set in
1 (1,1): even parity (EVEN)
8-bit 2-bit 230400 001110 the device of the the device of the
on
460800 001111 corresponding corresponding
communication communication
921600 010000
Example

When M1 is ON, the sending and receiving data of communication after executing instruction is stored as the following figure.

Some configuration and preparation of serial communication are needed for actual programming to communicate as expected, such
as setting the transceiver mode of serial port, baud rate, number of bits, parity, software protocol settings, timeout judgment
conditions, and data preparation for the transceiver buffer, send and receive flag processing, etc.,
A relatively complete RS communication setup program is shown as follows:

536 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

Set the protocol to a custom protocol.

Set serial port parameter: baud rate
115200 stop bit 1, data bit 8, no parity
bit

For detailed custom protocol instructions, please refer to "10.7.1 Custom protocol description"
(2) Modbus protocol
When the protocol is set to Modbus master protocol (whether it is RTU or ASCII). When the contact before RS2 instruction is turned
ON, the RS2 instruction will send the combined data frame according to the station number function code (s), slave station address
(m), length (d) and judge whether the data of (n) is needed according to the function code.

Parameter Content
(s) The high byte stores the station number of slave station, and the low byte stores function code of Modbus
(m) Slave address. The address provided by the slave station will read or write data from this address of the slave station
(d) Length. The length of Modbus read or write. The unit is determined by function code.
(n) The start address of the data to be read or written
(n1) Specify the communicatiom port

Serial port parameter setting

Baud rate 115200, data bit 8, no parity bit, stop bit 1
Communication protocol setting: ModbusRTU master station
protocol
Sending interval: 5ms

Receiving timeout: 100ms

Timeout retry times: 3 times
Station number 01H, function code 03H, slave address 10,
length 05
As the ladder program shown above:
When M1 is turned ON, PLC will send data (hexadecimal) from COM2 of PLC: 01 03 00 0A 00 05 A5 C8
01: represents slave address, the high 8 bits of (s);
03: Modbus command code, the low 8 bits of (s), which means to read the slave register;
00 0A: The address of slave register to be read, the value of (m);
00 05: The number of registers to be read, the value of (d),
A5 C8: CRC check code.
537 WECON technology Co., Ltd.
 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
For detailed custom protocol instructions, please refer to "10.7.2 Modbus protocol description"
✎Note:
1 The RS2 instruction allows parameters to be represented by K and H constants, but there are different restrictions
depending on the protocol.
2 When the protocol is a custom protocol, S and D cannot be constants, otherwise it will report (3X189H) error.
3 When the protocol is Modbus protocol, n cannot be a constant, otherwise it will report (3X89H) error.
4 When the protocol is set to the RTU protocol, only 8 bits of data can be selected
5 If the serial port parameter settings are different, it may still be able to communicate. However, it is recommended that the
serial port parameters be the same to avoid other faults.
6 Currently, the RS2 instruction cannot be used in interrupts and events.
Error code
Error code Content
4085H The read address of (s), (m), (d) and (n) exceed the device range.

4084H The parameter value exceed the specified range

COM1 data reception error. There may be interference on the communication line, it is recommended to connect
3080H
the ground wire.
COM1 data reception timed out. "Check the wiring, check whether the serial port parameter settings are compatible
3081H with master and slave, check whether there is interference. Check whether the slave station is too late to respond.
For this reason, you can try to increase “the sending interval".
COM1 CRC check error. There may be interference on the communication line, it is recommended to connect the
3082H
ground wire.
COM1 LRC check error. There may be interference on the communication line, it is recommended to connect the
3083H
ground wire.
The COM1 station number is incorrectly configured. Check the slave station number setting, and check whether
3084H
there is any problem with the receiving and sending mechanism of slave station.
3085H COM1 send buffer overflow. Contact a technician if this error occurs
3086H COM1 function code is wrong. Check whether the set function code is a function code supported by PLC
3087H COM1 address is wrong. Check whether the slave station has this address (please refer to Modbus Abnormal 02)
3088H The length of COM1 is wrong. Check whether the communication length exceeds the length range specified by the
Modbus protocol, or whether it exceeds the specified length range of the custom protocol.
3089H COM1 data error. "Check whether there are errors in the parameters of the instruction. Check whether the slave
station supports the setting of this value. (Please refer to Modbus Abnormal 03)"
308AH COM1 slave station is busy. Slave station returns information: Slave station is busy (please refer to Modbus exception
06)
308BH COM1 slave station does not support function codes. Check whether the slave station supports this function code
(please refer to Modbus exception 01)
308CH COM1 slave station is faulty. Slave station returns information: Slave station is faulty, please check whether the slave
station is faulty (please refer to Modbus Abnormal 04)
308DH COM1 slave station confirmation. Slave station return information: slave station confirmation (please refer to
Modbus abnormal 05)
308EH COM1 current protocol does not support this instruction or function. The related conmunication instruction of
master station or the function of maste station cannot be used when it is set to slave station protocol, please change

538 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
the protocol or close the contact before the corresponding instruction or diable the corresponding communication
function.
308FH COM1 sending timed out. Contact a technician if this error occurs.
30A0H COM1 is not available as a gateway. Slave station returns information: unavailable gateway (please refer to Modbus
exception 0A)
30A1H COM1 indicates that no response was obtained from the target device. Slave station returns information: the device
is not in the network (please refer to Modbus exception 0B).
COM2 data reception timed out. "Check the wiring, check whether the serial port parameter settings are compatible
3181H with master and slave, check whether there is interference. Check whether the slave station is too late to respond.
For this reason, you can try to increase the “sending interval".
COM2 CRC check error. There may be interference on the communication line, it is recommended to connect the
3182H
ground wire.
COM2 LRC check error. There may be interference on the communication line, it is recommended to connect the
3183H
ground wire.
The COM2 station number is incorrectly configured. Check the slave station number setting, and check whether
3184H
there is any problem with the receiving and sending mechanism of slave station.
3185H COM2 send buffer overflow. Contact a technician if this error occurs
3186H COM2 function code is wrong. Check whether the set function code is a function code supported by PLC
3187H COM2 address is wrong. Check whether the slave station has this address (please refer to Modbus Abnormal 02)
3188H The length of COM2 is wrong. Check whether the communication length exceeds the length range specified by the
Modbus protocol, or whether it exceeds the specified length range of the custom protocol.
3189H COM2 data error. "Check whether there are errors in the parameters of the instruction. Check whether the slave
station supports the setting of this value. (Please refer to Modbus Abnormal 03)"
318AH COM2 slave station is busy. Slave station returns information: Slave station is busy (please refer to Modbus exception
06)
318BH COM2 slave station does not support function codes. Check whether the slave station supports this function code
(please refer to Modbus exception 01)
318CH COM2 slave station is faulty. Slave station returns information: Slave station is faulty, please check whether the slave
station is faulty (please refer to Modbus Abnormal 04)
318DH COM2 slave station confirmation. Slave station return information: slave station confirmation (please refer to
Modbus abnormal 05)
318EH COM2 current protocol does not support this instruction or function. The related conmunication instruction of
master station or the function of maste station cannot be used when it is set to slave station protocol, please change
the protocol or close the contact before the corresponding instruction or diable the corresponding communication
function.
318FH COM2 sending timed out. Contact a technician if this error occurs
31A0H COM2 is not available as a gateway. Slave station returns information: unavailable gateway (please refer to Modbus
exception 0A)
31A1H COM2 indicates that no response was obtained from the target device. Slave station returns information: the device
is not in the network (please refer to Modbus exception 0B)

539 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
10.6 Expansion module communication
Single word data writing from TO/PLC to the module (16-bit specification)
TO(P)
Write the data at the start (n) point of the device specified in (s3) to the buffer memory in the intelligent function module specified in
(s1) after the address specified in (s2).
-[TO (s1) (s2) (s3) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Data type
Parameter Content Range Data type
(label)
Module number, the first module is 0, the second module
(s1) 0 to 32767 Unsigned BIN 16 bit ANY16
is 1, and so on
(s2) Start writing from which BFM in the module 0 to 32767 Unsigned BIN 16 bit ANY16
(s3) Start number of the device storing the written data -32768 to 32767 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(n) Number of data written 0 to 512 Unsigned BIN 16 bit ANY16
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
TO
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
Parameter 4 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
Features
Write the data at the start (n) point of the device specified in (s3) to the buffer memory in the intelligent function module specified in
(s1) after the address specified in (s2).

As the following Circuit program

Indicates that when X1 is ON, write the data in the PLC's D220 register to the buffer register (BFM) #24 in the #1 (second) special
module. When X1 is OFF, no operation is performed.
Currently LX5VPLC supports 16 special expansion modules at the same time.
The special devices used are as follows
Devices Content
SD2081 Total number of modules
SD2082 Number of IO expansion modules
SD2083 Number of special expansion modules
SD2084 The first missing expansion module. When the value is -1, it means not lost

540 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Error code
Error code Content
4085H The read addresses of (s1), (s2), (s3) and (n) exceed the device range
4084H (s1) and (s2) is not in the range of 0 to 32767 or (n) is not in the range of 0 to 512
7080H Check error when communicating between PLC and module
7081H Expansion module communication message is abnormal
7082H FROM/TO instruction error
7083H The specified extension module was not found
Example

When M1 is turned on
The values of D200 and D201 will be passed to BFM2 and BFM3 of module #0 (the first)

541 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Double word data write from DTO/PLC to the module (32-bit specification)
DTO(P)
Write the data of (n)×2 points from the device specified in (s3) to the buffer memory in the intelligent function module specified in
(s1) and beyond the address specified in (s2).
-[DTO (s1) (s2) (s3) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Data type
Parameter Content Range Data type
(label)
Module number, the first module is 0, the
(s1) 0 to 32767 Unsigned BIN 16 bit ANY16
second module is 1, and so on
(s2) Start writing from which BFM in the module 0 to 32767 Unsigned BIN 16 bit ANY16
Start number of the device storing the
(s3) -2147483648 to 2147483647 Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32
written data
(n) Number of data written 0 to 256 Unsigned BIN 16 bit ANY16
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
DTO
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ●● ● ●
Parameter 4 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
Features
Write the data of (n)×2 points from the device specified in (s3) to the buffer memory in the intelligent function module specified in
(s1) and beyond the address specified in (s2).

As the following Circuit program

Indicates that when M1 is ON, write the data in the PLC's D200 and D201 registers to the buffer registers (BFM) #1 and #2 in the #0
(first) special module. When X1 is OFF, no operation is performed.
Currently LX5V PLC supports 16 special expansion modules at the same time.
The special devices used are as follows
Devices Content

SD2081 Total number of modules

SD2082 Number of IO expansion modules
SD2083 Number of special expansion modules
SD2084 The first missing expansion module. When the value is -1, it means not lost

542 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Error code
Error code Content
4085H (s1) (s2) (s3) (n) The read address exceeds the device range
4084H (s1) (s2) is not in the range of 0 to 32767 or (n) is not in the range of 0 to 256
7080H Check error when communicating between PLC and module
7081H Expansion module communication message is abnormal
7082H FROM/TO instruction error
7083H The specified extension module was not found
Example

When M1 is turned on
The values from D200 to D203 will be transferred to BFM1 to BFM4 of module #0 (first)

543 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
FROM/Read single word data from the module (16-bit specification)
FROM(P)
Read (n) word data from the buffer memory specified in (s2) in the module specified in (s1), and store it in the device specified in (d)
and later.
Ladder
-[FROM (s1) (s2) (d) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Data type
Parameter Content Range Data type
(label)
Module number, the first module is 0, the second module is 1,
(s1) 0 to 32767 Unsigned BIN 16 bit ANY16
and so on
(s2) Start reading from which BFM in the module 0 to 32767 Unsigned BIN 16 bit ANY16
(d) Start number of the device storing the read data - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(n) Number of read data 0 to 512 Unsigned BIN 16 bit ANY16
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
FROM
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
Parameter 4 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
Features
Read (n) word data from the buffer memory specified in (s2) in the intelligent function module specified in (s1) and store it in the
device specified in (d) and later.

As the following Circuit program

It means that when M1 is ON, the data in the buffer registers (BFM) #10 and #11 in the special module #0 (the first) will be written
into the D200 and D201 registers of the PLC. When M1 is OFF, no operation is performed.
Currently LX5V PLC supports 16 special expansion modules at the same time.
The special soft components used are as follows:
Devices Content

SD2081 Total number of modules

SD2082 Number of IO expansion modules
SD2083 Number of special expansion modules
SD2084 The first missing expansion module. When the value is -1, it means not lost

544 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

Error code
Error code Content

4085H (s1) (s2) (n) The read address exceeds the device range
4086H (d) The write address exceeds the device range
4084H (s1) (s2) is not in the range of 0 to 32767 or (n) is not in the range of 0 to 512
7080H Check error when communicating between PLC and module
7081H Expansion module communication message is abnormal
7082H FROM/TO instruction error
7083H The specified extension module was not found
Example

When M1 is turned on
The values of BFM3, BFM4, and BFM5 of the #0 (first) module will be transferred to D200, D201, D202

545 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DFROM/single word data read from the module (32-bit specification)
DFROM(P)
Read (n)*2 words of data from the buffer memory specified in (s2) in the module specified in (s1), and store it in the device specified
in (d) and later.
-[DFROM (s1) (s2) (d) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Data type
Parameter Content Range Data type
(label)
Module number, the first module is 0, the second module is 1,
(s1) 0 to 32767 Unsigned BIN 16 bit ANY16
and so on
(s2) Start reading from which BFM in the module 0 to 32767 Unsigned BIN 16 bit ANY16
(d) Start number of the device storing the read data - Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32
(n) Number of read data 0 to 256 Unsigned BIN 16 bit ANY16
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
DFROM
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●
Parameter 4 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
Features
Read (n)×2 words of data from the buffer memory specified in (s2) in the intelligent function module specified in (s1), and store it in
the device specified in (d) and later.

As the following Circuit program

It means that when M1 is ON, the data in the buffer register (BFM) #10 to #13 in the special module #0 (the first) will be written to
the D200 to D203 registers of the PLC. When M1 is OFF, no operation is performed.
Currently LX5V PLC supports 16 special expansion modules at the same time.
The special soft components used are as follows:
Devices Content

SD2081 Total number of modules

SD2082 Number of IO expansion modules
SD2083 Number of special expansion modules
SD2084 The first missing expansion module. When the value is -1, it means not lost

546 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Error code
Error code Content

4085H (s1) (s2) (n) The read address exceeds the device range
4086H (d) The write address exceeds the device range
4084H (s1) (s2) is not in the range of 0 to 32767 or (n) is not in the range of 0 to 256
7080H Check error when communicating between PLC and module
7081H Expansion module communication message is abnormal
7082H FROM/TO instruction error
7083H The specified extension module was not found
Example

When M1 is turned on
The value of BFM3 to BFM8 of module #0 (first) will be transferred to D200 to D205

547 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
10.7 RS and RS2 instructions corresponding protocol description
10.7.1 Custom protocol description
Introduction
The function of custom protocol is that it can directly transmit data with the device without any processing or communicate with
other devices with the corresponding protocol set by the customer.
At present, the custom protocol of 5V PLC is configured and sent by COM2, and the instruction used is RS instruction, and it need to
configure the protocol and serial port parameters through the Devices.
The current custom protocol is generally close to 3V series.
Basic configuration
(1) Instructions
The RS instruction itself has the same usage as the previous RS instruction at 3V, and it can use R device.
-[RS (s) (m) (d) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Data type
Parameter Content Range Data type
(label)
The start address of the register area where the data to be sent is
(s) - Unsigned BIN 16 bit ANY16
stored

(m) Is the length of the data to be sent (number of bytes) 0 to 528 Unsigned BIN 16 bit ANY16

(d) Start number of the device storing the written data - Unsigned BIN 16 bit ANY16

(n) Number of data written 0 to 528 Unsigned BIN 16 bit ANY16

Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●●● ●●
Parameter 2 ●●●● ●●
RS
Parameter 3 ●●●● ●●
Parameter 4 ●●●● ●●
✎Note: Although the RS instruction currently allows all the parameters of the instruction to use constants such as K and H, there are
different restrictions according to the different protocol. When the protocol is a custom protocol, S and D cannot be constants,
otherwise it will report an error.
(2) Special device settings
Special address table
COM2 special D device (SD) COM2 special M Device (SM)
2590 Communication port setting 2590 Send control on
2591 Serial parameter modification identification 2591 Send control/send reminder
2592 Protocol settings 2592 Receive control on
2593 Protocol modification logo 2593 Accept control/receive prompt
2594 Station number setting 2594 8-bit mode (for custom protocol)
2595 Station number modification logo 2595
Sending interval (0.1ms) 0-32767
2596 2596
It is 10 (1ms) when set to 0

548 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Communication timeout setting (10ms) 0-32767
2597 2597
It is 10(100ms) when set to 0
2598 Timeout retry times 0-32767 2598
Character interval timeout setting (for custom protocol) (0.1ms)
2599 2599
0-32767 . It is 10 (1ms) when set to 0
2600 STX value 2600
2601 ETX value 2601
... ...
2610 The amount of data received 2610 Communication complete flag
2611 Last error 2611 Receiving flag
2612 Current error 2612 Retry occurred
2613 Error steps 2613 Communication error
2614 Error station number 2614 Communication timeout
2615 Cumulative number of errors 2615
The contents that the custom protocol will be used and set has been marked with underline and bold.
In addition, the devices to be used as judgment conditions have also been marked in bold in the table.
✎Note: COM1 currently does not support custom protocols.
1) Communication port setting SD2590
B4、B5、B6、
Bit number B0 B1、B2 B3 B10 B11
B7、B8、B9
Name Data length Parity Stop Bit Baud rate(bps) STX ETX
4800 0111

0 off 7 bit 1 bit 9600 1000 None None

19200 1001
b2,b1 38400 1010
(0,0): None 57600 1011
Content
(0,1): Odd parity (ODD) 115200 1100 Turn on ETX, Turn on ETX,

(1,1): Even parity (EVEN) 187500 1101 the ETX value the ETX value
1 on 8 bit 2 bit
230400 1110 is set in is set in
SD2600 SD2601
460800 1111
921600 10000
Set the serial port parameters to SD2590 according to the bit settings provided in the table above. The setting is roughly the same as
3V. It is mainly because the baud rate can be set to a higher baud rate, the bit used need backward two bits when STX and ETX start.
For example: To set the serial port parameters: baud rate 115200, stop bit 1, data bit 8, no parity bit, turn on STX, you need to set
the value H4C1 (K1217) on SD2590. The parameters directly set to SD2590 are only valid in the first cycle of PLC RUN.
If you need to modify it during RUN, you can use the PORTPARAM instruction to set it.
2) Protocol setting SD2592
Protocol settings Protocol settings
0H Wecon Modbus slave station 10 H Cunstom protocol
2H ModbusRTU slave station 20 H ModbusRTU master station
3H ModbusASCII slave station 30 H ModbusASCII master station
The corresponding protocol can be set by setting the corresponding value in SD2592.

549 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
The parameters directly set to SD2592 are only valid in the first cycle of PLC RUN.
If you need to modify it during RUN, you can use the PROTOCOL instruction to set it.
3) Sending interval SD2596
The main function of sending interval is: how long to wait for sending the next instruction after one instruction is completed. If the
value is set to 0, there is basically no waiting for sending interval, but it will be affected by the scan cycle.
The unit of the sending interval is 0.1ms, that is, the interval time is 10ms when the setting is 100.
4) Communication timeout SD2597 and timeout retry SD2598

The main function of communication timeout is: How long does it take to wait for no data to be received after the PLC sends retry or
occurs an error. When 0 is set, the default is 100ms.
The unit of communication timeout is 10ms, that is, the timeout judgment time is 10ms when the setting is 100.
When a receiving timeout occurs, it will determine whether there are retry times and the current retry times. If the retry times are
greater than or equal to SD2598, an error will be reported.
If SD2598 is set to 0, it will not try again.
If it is set to 1, send once again after sending a timeout.
5) Character interval timeout SD2599
Currently this setting is only available for custom protocols.
The main function of the character interval timeout is: after receiving at least one character before the communication timeout,
judge whether the interval time between the following two characters has exceeded. if it is, report an error and end the
communication.

This setting is mainly designed considering that some devices may send slow or have other specific sending requirements.
The character interval timeout will not retry.
(3) Serial port parameter setting instructions
1) Host computer interface settings

550 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

Through the PLC parameter setting in the upper computer interface, If protocol is set to none, it is a custom protocol.
The serial port parameter content mainly sets the serial port parameters such as baud rate and data bit.
After the start character is enabled, the start/end character can be sent. The start/end character will also be distinguished when
receiving. See the description in the sending and receiving process for details.
✎Note: The characters here are decimal values.
2) PORTPARA instruction
-[PORTPARA (s) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Data type
Parameter Content Range Data type
(label)
(s) Serial port parameters to be set 0 to 256 Unsigned BIN 16 bit ANY16
(n) Which communication port to set (0 means COM1, 1 means COM2) 0, 1 Unsigned BIN 16 bit ANY16
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
PROTPARA
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
Function: To set communication parameters when running.
Please refer to "PORTPARA instruction description" for details.
3) PROTOCOL instruction
-[PROTOCOL (s) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Data type
Parameter Content Range Data type
(label)
(s) Protocol number to be set 0 to 65535 Unsigned BIN 16 bit ANY16
Which communication port to set (0 means COM1, 1 means
(n) 1 Unsigned BIN 16 bit ANY16
COM2 *1)
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ●
PORTOCOL
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ●

551 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Features:
It is used to set the communication protocol when running. The above instruction actually sets a specific value for the parameter
modification flag. The specific calculation formula is: (parameter setting value + the offset of the start special device corresponding to
the serial port + 10)*2
For example, setting the protocol to Modbusrtu master station (H20) is (0x20 +2593-2590 +10)*2, that is (32 +3+10) *2=90. This is
to prevent the serial port parameters from being modified at will.
The trigger of setting parameters in custom protocol will not change the value until an instruction is completed.
The trigger of setting parameters in Modbus master station protocol won’t change the value until an instruction is completed.
The trigger of setting parameters in the Modbus slave protocol can be switched as long as it is not processing the received data.
Please refer to "PROTOCOL instruction description" for details.
4) Priority description of serial port parameters
The priority of serial port parameter settings are listed as blow. The serial port parameters are saved by power failure currently.
Serial port parameter set instruction setting = Ladder program MOV instruction set the corresponding SD device > the download
parameters of host computer > Previous power-off save data.
(4) Ladder program
Set serial port parameters: Baud rate 112500, stop bit 1,
data bit 8, no parity bit none
Set protocol to custom protocol
Sending interval: 5ms

Receiving timeout: 100ms

Number of repetitions: 3 times

Characters interval timeout: 30ms
Custom protocol sending start address D200, sending
length 8. Receiving start address D300, receiving length 6

Send directly after trigger

After receiving is completed, close the instruction directly

and reset the instruction receiving flag

10.7.1.3 Sending and receiving process

(1) Sending and receiving mechanism
1) No start character (STX) and end character (ETX)

1 16-bit (SM2594 is OFF)

The devices will be divided into high and low directly, and send data from the low address first and then the high address in order.

552 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

2 8-bit (SM2594 is ON)

Get the value of the low address of device directly and send it

The data sent in the case of the ladder program and the data above should be 70 E1 31 62 6C.

Receiving will also be stored in the lower address

2) Open and set the start character STX
The value of the start character SD2600 is only valid in the low bit
When STX is enabled, the send will start with STX. When receiving, the send will start with STX, but STX will not be displayed.
If it receives the STX during the receiving, the receiving will restart.
If the first character is not received, the timeout period is judged by the first character timeout. When a character is received, no
matter what data is received, the inter-character timeout will be counted from the last character received.

553 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

For example, the result of the above ladder program and the above data sending is FE 70 7D E1 00 31.
Sending FE 51 26 34 15 to the PLC at this time will receive the following data. And if you send FE 25 63 FE 51 26 34 15 you will also
receive the following data.

3) Open and set the end character ETX situation

The value of ending character SD2601 is only valid in the low bit.
When ETX is enabled, the send will end with ETX.
When ETX is received, SM2610 and SM2593 are immediately turned ON, regardless of whether sufficient length is received.

For example, the result of the above Circuit program and the above data transmission is 70 7D E1 00 31 FD.
If the above Circuit program sends 01 06 FD to him, the following data will be received. If the FD is sent directly, it will be judged as
the end directly.

4) Both the start character STX and the end character ETX are turned on
When both are opened, it is basically a combination of the above single opened states. But if only ETX data is received when both
start, it will not end immediately. It will judge the character interval time and does not start receiving data.
(2) Receiving after sending (similar to Modbus master station mechanism)
1) Send control switch (SM2590) and receive control switch (SM2592) OFF (default)
When the contact of RS instruction is on, turn SM2591 on and send it immediately. SM2591 will be automatically OFF immediately
after sending.
After sending, SM2593 is ON, it will always stop at this instruction, and wait for it to be OFF and then receive data. If it is OFF, it will
start to receive data.
After the first character timeout period (SD2597), if no character is received, it is judged as a timeout. If there are retry times, it will
retry. But after retrying, the communication still does not report an error, and SM2593 and SM2614 are turned on.

554 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
After receiving the first character, it will judge whether that the interval between characters exceeds the time set by SD2599. If it it
doesn’t. it will report an error.(For the details, please refer to [the timeout of the interval character].)
When there are two or more instructions, the first RS instruction which is set ON will be sent after SM2591 is ON. Later, if this RS
instruction is completed*1, then turn ON, SM2591 will switch to the next RS instruction*2 in the ladder sequence.
When there are two or more instructions, switch to another one during the data reception and it continue to stay back in the original
instruction to until the reception is complete.
✎Note:
✎Completion refers to receiving data or reporting an error.
✎If there is no other open RS instruction after the ladder sequence, it will return to the first RS instruction that was opened in the
ladder sequence for execution.
2) The sending way when the sending control switch (SM2590) is ON
When the sending control switch (SM2590) is ON, there is no need to set SM2591 ON. At this time, as long as the contact of the RS
instruction is triggered, it can be sent, and SM2591 is automatically turned ON.
3) The receiving way when the receiving control switch (SM2592) is ON
When the receiving control switch (SM2592) is ON, SM2593 will be OFF automatically when the instruction is executed. It will no
longer judge the status of SM2593 when receiving, and SM2593 will still be turned ON after receiving.
4) Sending control switch (SM2590) and receiving control switch (SM2592) ON
In this case, you only need to trigger the contact before the RS instruction to send data, then it will automatically switch to the
waiting status. When the reception is completed, it will turn to the next RS instruction that is turned on.
(3) Send-only

When the sending length is set to a value other than 0, and the receiving length is set to 0, it is send-only mode.
1) The sending control switch (SM2590) is OFF
When SM2591 is turned ON, the data will be sent without receiving.
When there are two or more instructions, the first RS instruction which is turned ON will be sent after SM2591 is turned ON. After
this RS instruction is completed, then turn ON SM2591 will switch to the next RS instruction in the ladder program.
2) The Sending control switch (SM2590) is ON
The RS instruction will be sent when triggered. Multiple instructions are triggered and sent in a loop. During the sending cycle, the
interval will be sent according to the set sending interval.
(4) Receive-only

When the sending length is 0 and the receiving length is not 0, it is only receiving.
1) SM2592 receiving control switch OFF
SM2593 will be turned ON when receiving, and the ladder program control must be turned OFF to continue receiving. SM2593 will
not turn ON without receiving data.
When multiple instructions are enabled to receive only at the same time, it will start to receive from the smallest number of steps in
the ladder diagram. Time out or received data will be forwarded to the second to continue receiving.
2) SM2592 receiving control switch ON
It can receive normally and will not be controlled by the flag bit. The SM2593 receiving identifier serves as the receiving prompt
identifier,and SM2593 will not turn ON without receiving data.
If multiple RS receive only instructions are turned on at the same time, the receiving position is uncertain due to the timeout

555 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
judgment and switching to the next one.
(5) Use receive-only and send-only methods to send after receiving (similar to Modbus slave mechanism)

Receive-only: When it is determined that the

reception is complete, it will determine the
instruction to be triggered according to the
received content, and save the received data at the
same time.

Send-only: The content sent by triggered M2 is

different from that of triggered M3. After the
trigger is over, they will return to trigger the
receive-only of M1.

10.7.1.4 Error message

Currently The Error code will be displayed on SD7, SD0, SD 2611 and SD2612.
The Error codes that will appear in the custom protocol are mainly as follows.
Error code Content
3181H Data receiving timeout
3188H Wrong length
COM2 data error. "Check whether there are errors in the parameters of instruction. Check whether the
3189H
slave station supports the setting of this value. (Please refer to Modbus exception 03)"
Current protocol does not support this instruction
318EH
(This error is only displayed on SD7 and SD0)
318FH COM2 sending timed out. Contact a technician if this error occurs.
3190H COM2 receiving data exceeds the buffer limit.
After resetting the protocol or communication parameters, the error will be cleared.
In addition, the communication completion/communication error/communication timeout flag will be set after the executed
instruction.

10.7.1.5 The difference with Mitsubishi

The current differences:
1 STX and ETX: Mitsubishi can set up to 4 bytes, we only have one byte.

2 Add sum check and CR, LF.

3 The instruction control of Mitsubishi is that the first instruction triggered is fixed to execute this instruction. It will not be
switched to other instructions midway, unless the contact of this instruction is closed.

556 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
10.7.2 Modbus protocol description
Introduction
The Modbus master station protocol is generally close to LX3V. The address was modified in the slave station.

Basic configuration
(1) Introduction
The RS instruction has the same usage as the previous RS instruction of 3V, and can use R device.
-[RS (s) (m) (d) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
The high byte stores the station number of slave station, and
(s) - Unsigned BIN 16 bit ANY16
the low byte stores the Modbus function code.
Slave address. The address provided by slave station will read
(m) - Unsigned BIN 16 bit ANY16
or write data from this address of the slave station
Length. The length of Modbus read or write. The unit is
(d) - Unsigned BIN 16 bit ANY16
determined by function code.
(n) Start address for reading or writing data - Unsigned BIN 16 bit ANY16
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●●● ●●
Parameter 2 ●●●● ●●
RS
Parameter 3 ●●●● ●●
Parameter 4 ●●●●
✎Note: Although the RS instruction currently allows all the parameters of the instruction to use constants such as K and H, there are
different restrictions according to the different protocols. When the protocol is Modbus master station protocol, n cannot be a
constant, otherwise an error will be reported.
(2) Special device setting
Special address table
COM 1 special D device (SD)
2540 Communication port settings
2541 Serial parameter modification identification
2542
2543
2544 Station number setting
2545 Station number modification logo
✎Note: COM1 does not support modifying the protocol.
COM2 special D device (SD) COM2 special M Device (SM)
2590 Communication port setting 2590 Send control start
2591 Serial parameter modification identifier 2591 Send control/send reminder
2592 Protocol setting 2592 Receive control start
2593 Protocol modification identifier 2593 Receive control/receive prompt
2594 Station number setting 2594 8-bit mode (for custom protocol)
2595 Station number modification identifier 2595

557 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Sending interval (0.1ms) 0-32767.
2596 2596
It is 10 when set to 0 (1ms)
Communication timeout setting (10ms) 0-32767
2597 2597
It is 10 when set to 0 (100ms)
2598 Timeout retry times 0-32767 2598
Character interval timeout setting (for custom protocol) (0.1ms)
2599 2599
0-32767. It is 10 when set to 0 (1ms)
2600 STX value 2600
2601 ETX value 2601
... ...
2610 The amount of data received 2610 Communication complete flag
2611 Last error 2611 Receiving flag
2612 Current error 2612 Retry occurred
2613 Error steps 2613 Communication error
2614 Error station number 2614 Communication timeout
2615 Cumulative number of errors 2615
The contents that the custom protocol will be used and set has been marked with underline and bold. In addition, the devices to be
used as judgment conditions have also been marked in bold in the table.
1) Communication port setting SD2590
Bit number B0 B1、B2 B3 B4、B5、B6、B7、B8、B9
Name Data length Parity Stop Bit Baud rate(bps)
4800 0111

0 off 7 bit 1 bit 9600 1000

19200 1001
b2,b1 38400 1010
(0,0): None 57600 1011
Content
(0,1): Odd parity (ODD) 115200 1100
(1,1): Even parity (EVEN) 187500 1101
1 on 8 bit 2 bit
230400 1110
460800 1111
921600 10000
Set the serial port parameters to SD2590 according to the bit settings provided in the table above. The setting is roughly the same as
3V. It is mainly because the baud rate can be set to a higher baud rate, the bit used need backward two bits when STX and ETX start.
For example: To set the serial port parameters: baud rate 115200, stop bit 1, data bit 8, no parity bit, you need to set the value H4C1
(K1217) on SD2590. The parameters directly set to SD2590 are only valid in the first cycle of PLC RUN. If you need to modify it during
RUN, you can use the PORTPARAM instruction to set it.
2) Protocol setting SD2592
Protocol settings
0H Wecon Modbus slave station 10 H Custom protocol
2H ModbusRTU slave station 20 H ModbusRTU master station
3H ModbusASCII slave station 30 H ModbusASCII master station
The corresponding protocol can be set by setting the corresponding value in SD2592. The parameters directly set to SD2592 are only

558 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
valid in the first cycle of PLC RUN. If you need to modify it during RUN, you can use the PROTOCOL instruction to set it. COM1 cannot
use protocols other than Wecon Modbus slave station Currently.
3) Sending interval SD2596
The main function of sending interval is: how long to wait for sending the next instruction after one instruction is completed. If it is
set to 0, there is basically no waiting for interval sending, but it will be affected by the scan cycle. The unit of the sending interval is
0.1ms, that is, the interval is 10ms when set to 100.
4) Communication timeout SD2597 and timeout retry SD2598

The main function of communication timeout is: How long does it take to wait for no data to be received and then retry or report an
error after the PLC sends. When it is set to 0, the default value is 100ms.
The unit of communication timeout is 10ms, that is, the timeout determine time is 100ms when set to 10.
When a receiving timeout occurs, it will determine whether there are retry times and the current retry times. If the retry times are
greater than or equal to SD2598, an error will be reported.
If SD2598 is set to 0, it will not retry.
If it is set to 1, send once and then send once again after timeout.
(3) Serial port parameter setting
1) PORTPARA instruction
-[PORTPARA (s) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
The start number of the device that stores
(s1) - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16_S_ARRAY
the number of digits of converted value
(s2) Converted BIN data -2147483648 to 2147483647 Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32_S
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
PORTPARA
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
Features
Set communication parameters when used for run. Please refer to "PORTPARA instruction description" for details.
2) PROTOCOL instruction
-[PROTOCOL (s) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Data type
Parameter Content Range Data type
(label)
(s) Protocol number to be set 0 to 65535 Unsigned BIN 16 bit ANY16
Which communication port to set (0 means COM1, 1 means
(n) 1 Unsigned BIN 16 bit ANY16
COM2 *1)

559 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
PROTOCOL
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
Features
Set the communication protocol when used for run. The instruction above actually is to set a specific value for the parameter
modification flag.
The calculation formula is: (parameter setting value + the offset of the start special device corresponding to the serial port + 10)*2
For example, setting the protocol to ModbusRTU master station (H20) is (0x20 +2593-2590 +10)*2, which is (32 +3+10) *2=90. This is
to prevent the serial port parameters from being modified at will. .
In Modbus master protocol, the trigger of setting parameters is to change the value after an instruction is completed.
In Modbus slave protocol, the trigger of setting parameters is that to switch as long as it is not processing the received data.
For details, please refer to "PROTOCOL instruction description"
3) Host computer settings
The PLC parameter setting of host computer can set the corresponding serial port parameters.

Specialized protocol station number cannot be 0.

The station number under ModbusRTU and ModbusASCII protocol is 0: the protocol sets the master station.
The station number under ModbusRTU and ModbusASCII protocol is not 0: the protocol sets the slave station.
The serial port parameters are filled in according to the content in the form.
✎Note: RTU protocol cannot set data bit of 7-bit.
4) Priority description of serial port parameters
The priority of serial port parameter settings are listed as blow. The serial port parameters are saved by power failure currently.
Serial port parameter set instruction setting = Ladder program MOV instruction set the corresponding SD device > the download
parameters of host computer > Previous power-off save data.

560 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
(4) Basic ladder program
Serial port parameter setting
Baud rate 115200, data bit 8, parity bit none, stop bit 1

Communication protocol setting: ModbusRTU master station protocol

Sending interval: 5ms

Receiving timeout: 100ms

Timeout retry times: 3 times

Station number 01H, function code 03H, slave address 10,

10.7.2.3 Send and receive process

(1) Modbus master station
When programming, before each RS (Modbus mode) instruction, the assignment of each operand unit, such as the communication
operation object address, operation type, operation register address, data number, sending or receiving unit, etc., is completed, once
the execution starts, the system program will automatically calculate the CRC check, organize the communication frame, and
complete the operation of sending data and receiving response.
If you use Modbus-ASC protocol communication (set SD2592 as H30), the HEX-ASC format conversion of sending and receiving data is
automatically completed by the PLC system program. The RS (Modbus mode) instruction method and the Modbus-RTU protocol
method are exactly the same.
In the plc program, if multiple RS (Modbus mode) instructions are driven, the system program will still execute the "sending, waiting
for answer, receiving, verification, analysis and storage" of an RS instruction, and then perform the same process for the next RS
instruction until all RS instructions are executed and then restarted. You don not need to care about the timing and process of its
execution, which simplifies the PLC programming design. This is the advantage of Modbus instruction.
Modbus master function list
Function code Function name Details
0x01 Coil readout Coil readout (multiple points optional)
0x02 Input readout Input and read (multiple points optional)
0x03 Holding register readout Holding register readout(multiple points optional)
0x04 Input register readout Input register readout (multiple points optional)
0x05 1 coil write Coil writing (only 1 point)
0x06 1 register write Holding register write (only 1 point)
0x0F Batch coil write Multi-point coil writing
0x10 Batch register write Multi-point holding register write
Example:
Serial port parameter setting
Baud rate 115200, data bit 8, no parity bit, stop bit 1
Communication protocol setting: ModbusRTU master station protocol

Sending interval: 5ms

Receiving timeout: 100ms

Timeout retry times: 3 times

Station number 01H, function code 03H, slave address 10,

As shown in the ladder program shown:
When M1 is turned ON, PLC will send data (hexadecimal) from COM2 of PLC: 01 03 00 0A 00 05 A5 C8
01: Slave address, the high 8 bits of (s);
03: Modbus instruction code, the lower 8 bits of (s). It is to read the slave register;
00 0A: The address of the slave register to be read, the value of (m);
561 WECON technology Co., Ltd.
 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
00 05: The number of registers to be read, the value of (d),
A5 C8: CRC check code.
✎Note:
When using 1 coil to write (0x05), the value used for writing 1 is 0xFF00, and the value used for writing 0 is 0x0000.
When using batch coil write (0x0F), pay attention to the high and low byte exchange. For example, when writing 1 length, the fourth
parameter value is 1 (0x0001), which means 0 is sent. You need to write 256 (0x0100) to write 1 to the target address.
(2) Modbus slave
When the PLC series is used as a Modbus slave, it supports Modbus communication operation instructions such as 0x01, 0x03, 0x05,
0x06, 0x 0f, 0x10. The coils of the PLC that can be read and written include M, S, T, C, X (only Read) SM, Y, LC, HSC and other variables
through these instructions. Register variables include D, T, C, R, SD, LC, HSC.
When the Modbus communication master accesses (reads or rewrites) the internal variables of the PLC slave, it must follow the
following communication instruction frame definition and the variable address index method in order to carry out normal
communication operations.
1) instruction code 0x01 (01): read coil
Serial number Data (byte) meaning Number of bytes Instruction
1 Slave address 1 byte Value 1 to 247, set by SD2544, SD2594
2 0x01 (instruction code) 1 byte Read coil
3 Coil start address 2 bytes High bit in front, low bit in back, see coil addressing
4 Number of coils 2 bytes High bit in front, low bit in back (N)
5 CRC check 2 bytes Low bit in front, high bit in back
Response frame format: slave address + 0x01 + number of bytes + coil status + CRC check
Serial
Data (byte) meaning Number of bytes Instruction
number
1 Slave address 1 byte Value 1 to 247, set by SD2544, SD2594
2 0x01 (instruction code) 1 byte Read coil
3 Number of bytes 1 byte Value: [(N+7)/8]
Every 8 coils are combined into one byte. If the last one is less than 8
4 Coil state [(N+7)/8] bytes bits, fill in 0 in the undefined part. The first 8 coils are in the first byte,
and the coil with the smallest address is in the lowest bit. And so on
5 CRC check 2 bytes High bit first, then low bit
Error response: refer to error response frame.
2) instruction code 0x03 (03): read register
Request frame format: slave address + 0x03 + register start address + number of registers + CRC check.
Serial number Data (byte) meaning Number of bytes Instruction
1 Slave address 1 byte Value 1 to 247, set by SD2544, SD2594
2 0x03 (instruction code) 1 byte Read register
3 Register start address 2 bytes High bit in front, low bit in back, see register addressing
4 Number of registers 2 bytes High bit in front, low bit in back (N)
5 CRC check 2 bytes High bit in front, low bit in back
Response frame format: slave address + 0x03 + number of bytes + register value + CRC check.
Serial number Data (byte) meaning Number of bytes Instruction
1 Slave address 1 byte Value 1 to 247, set by SD2544, SD2594

562 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
2 0x03 (instruction code) 1 byte Read register
3 Number of bytes 1 byte Value: N*2
Every two bytes represent a register value, with high
4 Register value N*2 bytes bit in front, low bit in back. The smallest register
address comes first
5 CRC check 2 bytes High bit in front, low bit in back
Error response: See error response frame.
3) instruction code 0x05 (05): write single coil
Request frame format: slave address + 0x05 + coil address + coil status + CRC check.
Serial number Data (byte) meaning Number of bytes Instruction
1 Slave address 1 byte Value 1 to 247, set by SD2544, SD2594
2 0x05 (instruction code) 1 byte Write single coil
3 Coil address 2 bytes High bit in front, low bit in back, see coil addressing
4 Coil state 2 bytes High bit in front, low bit in back. Non-zero is valid
5 CRC check 2 bytes High bit in front, low bit in back
Response frame format: slave address + 0x05 + coil address + coil status + CRC check.
Serial number Data (byte) meaning Number of bytes Instruction
1 Slave address 1 byte Value 1 to 247, set by SD2544, SD2594
2 0x05 (instruction code) 1 byte Write single coil
3 Coil address 2 bytes High bit in front, low bit in back, see coil addressing
4 Coil state 2 bytes High bit in front, low bit in back. Non-zero is valid
5 CRC check 2 bytes High bit in front, low bit in back
Error response: see error response frame. The coil status 0xFF00 means ON, and 0x0000 means OFF.
4) instruction code 0x06 (06): write a single register
Request frame format: slave address + 0x06 + register address + register value + CRC check.
Serial number Data (byte) meaning Number of bytes Instruction
1 Slave address 1 byte Value 1 to 247, set by SD2544, SD2594
2 0x06 (instruction code) 1 byte Write single coil
3 Register 2 bytes High bit in front, low bit in back, see coil addressing
4 Register value 2 bytes High bit in front, low bit in back. Non-zero is valid
5 CRC check 2 bytes High bit in front, low bit in back
Response frame format: slave address + 0x06 + register address + register value + CRC check.
Serial number Data (byte) meaning Number of bytes Instruction
1 Slave address 1 byte Value 1 to 247, set by SD2544, SD2594
2 0x06 (instruction code) 1 byte Write single coil
3 Register 2 bytes High bit in front, low bit in back, see coil addressing
4 Register value 2 bytes High bit in front, low bit in back. Non-zero is valid
5 CRC check 2 bytes High bit in front, low bit in back
Error response: See error response frame.

563 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
5) instruction code 0x 0f (15): write multiple coils
Request frame format: slave address + 0x 0f + coil start address + coil number + byte number + coil status + CRC check.
Serial Number of
Data (byte) meaning Instruction
number bytes
1 Slave address 1 byte Value 1 to 247, set by SD2544, SD2594
2 0x 0f (instruction code) 1 byte Write multiple single coils
3 Coil start address 2 bytes High bit in front, low bit in back, see coil addressing
4 Number of coils 2 bytes High bit in front, low bit in back. The maximum of N is 1968
5 Number of bytes 1 byte Value: [(N+7)/8]
Every 8 coils are combined into one byte. If the last one is less than 8
6 Coil state [(N+7)/8] bytes bits, fill in 0 in the undefined part. The first 8 coils are in the first byte,
and the coil with the smallest address is in the lowest bit. And so on
7 CRC check 2 bytes High bit in front, low bit in back
Response frame format: slave address + 0x 0f + coil start address + coil number + CRC check
Serial number Data (byte) meaning Number of bytes Instruction
1 Slave address 1 byte Value 1 to 247, set by SD2544, SD2594
2 0x 0f (instruction code) 1 byte Write multiple single coils
3 Coil start address 2 bytes High bit in front, low bit in back, see coil addressing
4 Number of coils 2 bytes High bit in front, low bit in back
5 CRC check 2 bytes High bit in front, low bit in back
Error response: See error response frame.
6) 3.2.6 instruction code 0x10 (16): write multiple registers
Request frame format: slave address + 0x10 + register start address + register number + byte number + register value + CRC check.
Serial number Data (byte) meaning Number of bytes Instruction
1 Slave address 1 byte Value 1 to 247, set by SD2544, SD2594
2 0x10(instruction code) 1 byte Write multiple registers
3 Register start address 2 bytes High bit in front, low bit in back, see register addressing
4 Number of registers 2 bytes High bit in front, low bit in back. The maximum of N is 120
5 Number of bytes 1 byte Value: N*2
6 Register value N*2 (N*4)
7 CRC check 2 bytes High bit in front, low bit in back
Response frame format: slave address + 0x10 + register start address + register number + CRC check.
Serial number Data (byte) meaning Number of bytes Instruction
1 Slave address 1 byte Value 1 to 247, set by SD2544, SD2594
2 0x10 (instruction code) 1 byte Write multiple registers
3 Register start address 2 bytes High bit in front, low bit in back, see register addressing
4 Number of registers 2 bytes High bit in front, low bit in back. The maximum of N is 120
5 CRC check 2 bytes High bit in front, low bit in back
Error response: See error response frame.

564 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
7) Error response frame
Error response: slave address + (instruction code + 0x80) + Error code + CRC check.
Serial number Data (byte) meaning Number of bytes Instruction
1 Slave address 1 byte Value 1 to 247, set by SD2544, SD2594
2 Instruction code+0x80 1 byte Error instruction code
3 Code 1 byte 1 to 4
4 CRC check 2 bytes High bit in front, low bit in back

Serial number Error code Instruction

1 01 Unsupported function code
2 02 Wrong address or function code
3 03 Wrong length
4 04 Imperfect instruction
5 05 Address not allowed
8) Slave address table
Word address
Address type Occupy Address range Decimal address Total reserved address size
T0 to T511 512 WORD 0x0000-0x01ff 0 1536
C0 to C255 256 WORD 0x0600-0x06ff 1536 1024
LC0 to LC255 512 WORD 0x0A00-0x0BFF 2560 1024
HSC0 to HSC15 32 WORD 0x0E00-0x0E1F 3584 512
D0 to D7999 8000 WORD 0x1000-0x2F3F 4096 16384
SD0 to SD4095 4096 WORD 0x5000-0x5FFF 20480 12288
R0 to R30000 30000 WORD 0x8000-0xF52F 32768 30000

Bit address
Address type Occupy Address range Decimal address Total reserved address size
T0 to T511 512 bit 0x0000-0x01ff 1536
C0 to C255 256 bit 0x0600-0x06ff 1536 1024
LC0 to LC255 256 bit 0x0A00-0x0AFF 2560 1024
HSC0 to HSC15 16 bit 0x0E00-0x0E0F 3584 512
M0 to M8000 8000 bit 0x1000-0x2F3F 4096 16384
SM0 to SM4095 4096 bit 0x5000-0x5FFF 20480 12288
Reserved 0x8000-0xBFFF 16383
S0 to S4095 4096 bit 0xC000-0xCFFF 49152 8192
X0 to X1023 1024 bit 0xE000-0xE3FF 57344 4096
Y0 to Y1023 1024bit 0xF000-0xF3FF 61440 4096

565 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
10.7.2.4 Error message
Currently the Error code will be displayed on SD7 and SD0 and SD2611 and SD2612.
The Error codes that appear in the Modbus protocol are mainly as follows.
Error code Content
4085H (s)(m)(d)(n) The read address is out of the device range (this error is only displayed on SD7 and SD0)
COM2 data reception error. There may be interference on the communication line, it is recommended to connect
3180H
the ground wire.
COM2 data reception timed out. "Check the wiring, check whether the serial port parameter settings are
3181H compatible with master and slave, check whether there is interference. Check whether the slave station is too late
to respond. For this reason, you can try to increase the sending interval SD2546."
COM2 CRC check error. There may be interference on the communication line, it is recommended to connect the
3182H
ground wire.
COM2 LRC check error. There may be interference on the communication line, it is recommended to connect the
3183H
ground wire.
The COM2 station number is incorrectly configured. Check the slave station number setting. And check whether
3184H
there is any problem with the receiving and sending mechanism from the station.
3185H COM2 send buffer overflow. Contact a technician if this error occurs
3186H COM2 function code is wrong. Check whether the set function code is a function code supported by PLC
3187H COM2 address is wrong. Check whether the slave station has this address (please refer to Modbus Abnormal 02)
The length of COM2 is wrong. Check whether the communication length exceeds the length range specified by the
3188H
Modbus protocol, or whether it exceeds the specified length range of the custom protocol.
COM2 data error. "Check whether there are errors in the parameters of the instruction. Check whether the slave
3189H
station supports the setting of this value. (Please refer to Modbus Abnormal 03)"
318AH COM2 slave is busy. Slave station returns information: Slave station is busy (please refer to Modbus exception 06)
The COM2 slave station does not support function codes. Check whether the slave station supports this function
318BH
code (please refer to Modbus exception 01)
The COM2 slave is faulty. Slave station returns information: Slave station is faulty, please check whether the slave
318CH
station is faulty (please refer to Modbus Abnormal 04)
COM2 slave confirms. Slave station return information: slave station confirmation (please refer to Modbus abnormal
318DH
05)
COM2 current protocol does not support this instruction. RS instruction cannot be used when it is set to slave
318EH station protocol, please change the protocol or close the contact before RS instruction (this error is only displayed
on SD7 and SD0)
318FH COM2 sending timed out. Contact a technician if this error occurs
3190H COM2 receiving data exceeds the buffer limit.
COM2 is not available as a gateway. Returned information from the station: unavailable gateway (please refer to
31A0H
Modbus exception 0A)
COM2 indicates that no response was obtained from the target device. Slave station returns information: the device
31A1H
is not in the network (please refer to Modbus exception 0B)
After resetting the protocol or communication parameters, the error will be cleared.
In addition, the communication completion/communication error/communication timeout flag will be set after the executed
instruction.

566 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
10.8 PLCLINK/Fast interconnect function
PLCLINK function is used to simplify the fast connection between PLCs. The fast communication of the LX5V series PLC could be
achieved only using the configuration parameters without using the communication instruction(RS).
The topological diagram is shown in the figure below.

When using the PLCLINK function:

1 Master station configuration: Select COM2 port and set the protocol to PLCLINK protocol.
2 Slave configuration: Select COM1 or COM2 and set the protocol to dedicated protocol.
Create a table
In [Project manager]-[Extended function]-[PLCLINK], right click [PLCLINK], and click it to create a table.

Click it and a prompt box as below would pop up.

567 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Click "Yes" will automatically change the protocol to PLCLINK, click "No" will not change the protocol.
The number of PLCLINK protocol is H60.
0H Wecon Modbus slave station
2H ModbusRTU slave station
3H ModbusASCII slave station
10H user-defined protocol
20H ModbusRTU main station
30H ModbusASCII main station
60H PLCLINK protocol
Click "Yes" will generate an empty table MAIN.

Double click MAIN will pop up the POLCLINK table as below.

Currently only one PLCLINK table can be created. Creating a new table after creating one is disallowed.

568 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

(1) Write the table

After writing the station number in the new instruction station number in the table, click the new instruction to add the
communication instruction. The range of station number is 1 to 31. The maximum number of communication instruction is 255.

Currently the station number is only selected by drop-down box.

569 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

The devices of main station and slave station are selected by drop-down box.

The transfer direction are read and write, and also selected by drop-down box.

570 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

The device address range limitations are as below.

1) The device address could not exceed the current device range
2) In the device of bit written, the mantissa of points of X and Y must be zero, such as X0, X10, X20, Y0, Y10, Y20 and so on. The
software PLC Editor 2 will adjust automatically.
3) The Points of bit device other than X and Y must be a multiple of 8,such as M0, M8, N16, T(bit) 16, C(bit) 24 and so on. The
software PLC Editor 2 will adjust automatically.
4) Bit device must communicate with bit device , and word device must communicate with word device. Double word device can
only communicate with double word device. This is to avoid length perception differences.
The number limitations of slave station device are as below.
1) The number of bit device ranges from 8 to 2,032.
2) The number of word device ranges from 1 to 126.
3) The number of double word device ranges from 1 to 63. HSC can only use a maximum of 16 due to the number limitation.
4) The number of bit device must be a multiple of 8, such as 8, 16, 24, 32 and so on. The software PLC Editor 2 will adjust
automatically.display the corresponding device address and range.
(2) Download
Currently PLCLINK could only be downloaded with the program and could not downloaded separately.

571 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

Click on PLCLINK in monitoring mode to re-write part of the table into PLC, but the start device could not be modified.

In monitoring mode, monitoring read and monitoring write could not be executed if the ladder program comparison is incorrect.
(3) Automatic check
Click “Check” in monitoring mode, the PLC that can communicate will be automatically searched and enabled. Stations that could not
communicate will be closed. The Stations without instructions will not be checked. The PLCLINK table will be updated after the
automatic check of the upper computer is finished.

572 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

Write 1 to in the table for addresses whose start address is offset 12 (for example, R200 is R212). The corresponding function is as
below.
0: No check; 1: Automatic check mode; 2: Automatic check in progress.
Auto check
When enabled, all the station numbers will send data to determine whether the station number exists.
S1+12 mode
The corresponding communication switch will be turned on if it exists. If not, the corresponding
(Reserved)
communication switch will be turned off.
No error will be reported during auto check after the auto check is enabled. After the check is complete, the corresponding station
number will be automatically enabled and disabled.
The switch control of station 1 to 15
Corresponding station Bit0: ON: Station number 0 (broadcast) normal communication
S1+13 number communication OFF: Station number 0 (broadcast) communication prohibited (broadcast prohibited)
switch 1 Bit1: ON: Station number 1 normal communication; OFF: Station 1 communication prohibited
Bit2: ON: Station number 2 normal communication; OFF: Station 2 communication prohibited
Corresponding station
S1+14 number communication The switch control of station 16 to 31
switch 2
Click [station number enable] to set the station enable according to the corresponding situations.

573 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

✎Note: When in the automatic check state, forcibly turn off the automatic check state (write 0 in S1+12), an error may occur.
(4) Main station parameter configuration

The protocol must be PLCLINK protocol, and the data bit can not be 7-bit data bit. Other parameters can be selected as required.
(5) Slave station configuration
For PLCLINK communication ports, select the dedicated protocol from the station protocol.

The settings of Baud rate, data bit, stop bit, parity bit must be consistent with main station. The parameters above are consistent if
not modified. The station number needs to be configured separately. The slave station number ranges from 1 to 31.
(6) Close PLCLINK

574 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
In S1+11, The pause and start of PLCLINK are controlled by bit 8. If bit 8 is ON, PLCLINK would be closed. No error is reported when
switching protocol after this function is disabled.
Bit0=1, Port is occupied. This function obtains the right of data transaction transmission.
Bit2=1, One cycle has been executed.
Bit4, Communication transmission output indication
S1+11 Operation state
Bit5, Communication error output indication (Exceeds the number of retry times)
Bit6, Communication completion output indication
Bit8, PLCLINK suspension (0: Normal operation, 1: Operation paused)
(7) Table contents
Currently the communication table is downloaded to the device to operate. The details of the table are as follows.
Brief description
Address offset Detailed description
High byte Low byte
S1+0 Header Header =70h, correct PLCLINK table. (modification prohibited)
S1+1 Number of communication instructions 1 to 255 (modification prohibited)
S1+2 Version V1.100 (modification prohibited)
S1+3 The start address of communication table modification prohibited
Simple check calculation for table header, number of communication
Check bit of the number of header and
S1+4 instructions, version, and the start address of communication table
communication
((modification prohibited))
S1+5 Which instruction currently is running Display the current running command (read only)
S1+6 Station NO.1 Read/write direction
S1+7 The data start address of station NO.1
S1+8 Station NO.2 Address type distinction The instruction content of current communication
S1+9 The data start address of station NO.2
S1+10 Data length
Bit0=1,Port is occupied. This function obtains the right of data
transaction transmission.
Bit2=1, One cycle has been executed.
Bit4, Communication transmission output indication
S1+11 Operation state Bit5, Communication error output indication (Exceeds the number of
retry times)
Bit6, Communication completion output indication
Bit8, PLCLINK suspension (0: Normal operation, 1: Operation
paused)
0: No check; 1: Automatic check mode; 2: Automatic check in
progress.
When enabled, all the station numbers will send data to determine
S1+12 Auto check mode (Reserved)
whether the station number exists. The corresponding
communication switch will be turned on if it exists. If not, the
corresponding communication switch will be turned off.

575 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
The switch control of station 1 to 15
Bit0: ON: Station NO. 0 (broadcast) normal communication
OFF: Station NO.0 (broadcast) communication prohibited
Corresponding station number (broadcast prohibited)
S1+13
communication switch 1 Bit1: ON: Station NO.1 normal communication;
OFF: Station NO.1 communication prohibited
Bit2: ON: Station NO.2 normal communication;
OFF: Station NO.2 communication prohibited
Corresponding station number
S1+14 The switch control of station 16 to 31
communication switch 2
S1+15 Reserved
S1+16 Reserved
S1+17 Reserved
S1+18 Reserved
S1+19 Reserved
S1+20 Reserved
• Station NO. 1 to 32, FF(FF represents main station)
• Function code:
S1+21 Station NO.1 Read/write direction
=01H, read
=02H, write
S1+22 The data start address of station NO.1 • Valid word. Define operating the start address of slave station data
•Station NO.0 to 32 (If it is 0, broadcast to all the slave stations on
behalf of master station, and slave stations do not respond
S1+23 Station NO.2 Address type distinction •Distinguish the type of the starting device for storing data in the
main station.
Main station address type distinction. 0: word address; 1: bit address
• Valid word. Define operating the start device of slave station data.
S1+24 The data start address of station NO.2
Define the corresponding address by MUDBUS address of 5V.
S1+25 Data length • Valid word. Range 1 to 126(bit data), 1 to 2,032(bit data)
S1+26 Station NO.1 Read/write direction
S1+27 The data start address of station NO.1
The second data transmission description.
S1+28 Station NO.2 Address type distinction
Main station address type distinction.
S1+29 The data start address of station NO.2
S1+30 Data length
•
•
S1+20+ n×5 Reserved • n is the total number of data transmission commands.
✎Note:
1 It is forbidden to modify S0 to S4.
2 It is not recommended to change the value except the function enable or station number enable. Otherwise, the operation
or upload may be abnormal.
Error code

576 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Error
Contents
code
31C0H Abnormal PLCLINK header. Re-download the program.
31C1H PLCLINK function is not supported by COM port currently.
31C2H PLCLINK table version is incompatible. Re-download the program.
31C3H The number of PLCLINK command exceeds the range. The value ranges from 1 to 255 Currently.
31C4H The station number of PLCLINK table exceeds the range. Check the station number in the table.
31C5H PLCLINK table exceeds the range of device. Check the corresponding device range of table.
31C6H The device used by PLCLINK table command exceeds the range. Check the device used for each command in the table.
COM2 data reception error. There may be interference on the communication line. It is recommended to connect the
3180H
ground wire.
COM2 data reception time. Check wiring, whether the parameters of the serial port setting is master-slave
3181H correspondence, whether there is interference, whether it is caused by the delay of the slave station. For this reason,
try to increase the sending interval SD2546.
COM2 CRC check error. There may be interference on the communication line. It is recommended to connect the
3182H
ground wire.
COM2 station number error. Check the setting of slave station number. Check whether there is a problem with the
3184H
slave receiving and sending mechanism.
3186H COM2 function code error. Check whether the function code is supported by PLC.
3187H COM2 address error.
COM2 length error. Check whether the communication length exceeds the length range specified by Modbus or
3188H
user-defined protocol.
COM2 data error. Check whether the parameter of instruction is wrong. Check whether the setting of the value is
3189H
supported by slave station. (Please refer to Modbus abnormal 03)
318AH COM2 slave station is busy. Slave station returns message: Slave station is busy. (Please refer to Modbus abnormal 06)
COM2 slave station does not support function codes. Check whether the function code is supported by slave station.
318BH
(Please refer to Modbus abnormal 01)
COM2 slave station fault. Slave station returns message: Slave station is fault. Check whether the slave station is faulty.
318CH
(Please refer to Modbus abnormal 04)
COM2 slave station confirmation. Slave station returns message: Slave station confirmation.(Please refer to Modbus
318DH
abnormal 05)
COM2 does not support this instruction or function. When slave station protocol is set, the corresponding
318EH communication instruction or function of main station could not be used. Please change the protocol or close the
contacts before the corresponding instruction, or the corresponding communication function.
3190H The data received by COM2 exceeds the cache limit.
Example
Create a PLCLINK table and automatically switch the Com2 protocol to PLCLINK.

577 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

Open PLCLINK table, write the master station D10 to the slave station D10 device number 10, and read the slave station D10 to the
master station D20 device number 10.

Connect Com2 of master station PLC to COM1 of slave station, and set the slave station number to 1. After downloading, set the
value of main station D10 to 1 and D11 to 8192 . Then, D20 will change to 1 and and D21 will change to 8192.

The situation of connecting more than one

When adding commands, the station number that corresponding more slave station number can add more station number
communication connections

578 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

10.9 Wecon Modbus protocol description

The current Wecon Modbus protocol description (special protocol) is modified based on the ModbusRTU protocol.
Therefore, 7-bit data bits cannot be used in the serial port parameter part.
The protocol of COM0 and COM1 can only use WECON Modbus protocol at present and cannot be changed.
This protocol is fully compatible with Modbus RTU protocol, and the address is also the same as the default address of LX5V PLC's
Modbus RTU protocol.
The extended function is mainly used to communicate with PLCEDITOR.

579 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

11 Special instructions
PID/PID calculation
PID
This instruction is used to perform PID control that changes the output value according to the amount of input change.
-[PID (s1)(s2)(s3)(d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s1) Device number for storing the target value (SV) -32767 to 32767 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(s2) Device number for storing the measured value (PV) -32767 to 32767 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(s3) Device number for storing parameters 1 to 32767 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(d) Device number for storing output value (MV) -32767 to 32767 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●●
Parameter 2 ●●●
PID
Parameter 3 ●●●
Parameter 4 ●●●
Features
This instruction is to complete the PID operation and is used to control the parameters of the closed-loop control system. PID control
has a wide range of applications in mechanical equipment, pneumatic equipment, constant pressure water supply and electronic
equipment, etc. among them:
is the target value of PID control;
is the measured feedback value;
The starting address of the buffer area for setting parameters required for PID operation and saving intermediate results,
occupies a total of 26 variable units in the subsequent addresses, the value range is D0 to D7974, it is best to specify the power
failure retention area, which will remain after the power is OFF Set the value, otherwise the buffer area needs to be assigned value
before starting the operation for the first time. The function and parameter description of each unit are described in this section;
is the storage unit of the PID calculation result. Please designate as a non-battery holding area, otherwise it needs to
be initialized and cleared before starting the calculation for the first time.
Programming example

The parameter description is as follows:

What is stored in D9 is the target value of PID adjustment, and D10 is the closed-loop feedback value. Note that D9 and D10 must be
of the same dimension, such as both 0.01MPa units, or 1℃ units, etc.;
A total of 26 units of D200 to D225 are used to store the set value and process value of PID operation. These values must be set item
by item before the first PID calculation;
The D130 unit is used to store the calculated control output value to control the execution of the action.
The function and setting method of the parameter value of each unit about starting of are described in the following table:

Unit Features Setting instructions

The setting range is 1 to 32767 (ms), but it needs to be greater than the PLC program
Sampling time (TS)
scan period

580 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
bit0: 0 = positive action; 1 = reverse action bit3: 0 = unidirectional; 1 = bidirectional
+1 Action direction (ACT) bit4: 0 = auto-tuning does not work; 1 = auto-tuning is executed, others cannot be
used.
Maximum ascent rate
+2 Setting range 0 to 32000 is the threshold of integral increment
(DeltaT)
Setting range 0 to 32767, note that this value is enlarged by 256 times, the actual value
+3 Proportional gain (Kp)
is Kp/256

+4 Integral gain (Ki) Setting range 0 to 32767, Ki=16384Ts/Ti, Ti is the integral time

+5 Differential gain (Kd) Setting range 0 to 32767, Kd≈Td/Ts, Td is the derivative time

+6 Filtering (C0) Setting range 0 to 1023, integral part filtering

Recommended setting range -2000 to 2000
+7 Output lower limit
When bit3 of S3+1=0, set to 0; When bit3 of S3+1=1, set to -2000;

+8 Output upper limit Recommended setting value 2000

+9 Reserved Reserved
︙ ︙ ︙

+25 Reserved Reserved

Auto tuning example

✎Note:
● When multiple instructions are used, the device number of (d) cannot be repeated.

● During the execution of auto-tuning, the (s3) parameter space cannot be modified.

● The instruction occupies 26 point devices from the device specified in (s3).
● PID instruction can be used multiple times in the program and can be executed at the same time, but the variable area used in each
PID instruction should not overlap; it can also be used in step instructions, jump instructions, timing interrupts, and subroutines, in
this case When executing the PID instruction, the (s3)+9 cache unit must be cleared in advance.
● The maximum error of the sampling time Ts is -(1 operation cycle +1ms) +(1 operation cycle). If the sampling time Ts ≤ 1 operation
cycle of the programmable controller, the following PID operation error (4D86H) will occur, and the PID operation will be executed
with TS = operation cycle. In this case, it is recommended to use constant scan mode or use PID instruction in timer interrupt.

581 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Error code
Error code Content

When the device specified in the read application instructions (s1), (s2), (s3), (d) exceeds the range of the
4085H
corresponding device.
When the device specified in the write application instruction (s3) and (d) exceeds the range of the corresponding
4086H
device.
4D80H The sampling time is out of range. Ts 0
4D81H Input filter constant ( Co ) is out of range (. Co  0Or Co  1023 )
4D82H The maximum ascent rate ( T ) is out of range. T  0OrT  32000
4D83H The proportional gain (Kp) is out of range. Kp 0
4D84H The integral gain (Ki) is out of range. Ki 0
4D85H The differential gain (Kd) is out of range. Kd 0

4D86H The sampling time (Ts) is less than the operation cycle. Ts  Scan cycle
Example
See manual.

582 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
CCPID/CCPID calculation
CCPID
This instruction is used to perform PID control that changes the output value according to the amount of input change.
-[CCPID (s1) (s2) (s3) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s1) Device number for storing the target value (SV) -32767 to 32767 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(s2) Device number for storing the measured value (PV) -32767 to 32767 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(s3) Device number for storing parameters 1 to 32767 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(d) Device number for storing output value (MV) -32767 to 32767 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●● ●
Parameter 2 ●● ●
CCPID
Parameter 3 ●● ●
Parameter 4 ●● ●
Features
After setting target value (s1), measured value (s2), parameter (s3) to (s3) +12 and executing the program, the calculation result (MV)
will be stored to the output according to the first sampling time (s3) in the parameter Value (d). For details, please refer to the user
manual of "Wecon CC Series ccpid Function Description v1.4".
✎Note:
It can be executed multiple times at the same time (there is no limit to the number of loops), but please note that the device
numbers (s3) and (d) used in the calculation cannot be repeated.
The instruction occupies 52 points of devices starting from the device specified in (s3).
During the execution of auto-tuning, the (s3) parameter space cannot be modified.
Error code
Error code Content
When the device specified in the read application instructions (s1), (s2), (s3), (d) exceeds the range of the
4085H
corresponding device.
When the device specified in the write application instruction (s3) and (d) exceeds the range of the corresponding
4086H
device.
4D80H The sampling time is out of range. Ts 0

4D81H Input filter constant ( Co ) is out of range ( Co  0OrCo  1023 )

4D82H The maximum ascent rate ( T ) is out of range. T  0OR T  32000
4D86H The sampling time (Ts) is less than the operation cycle. Ts  Scan cycle

4D87H The proportional gain (Kp) is out of range. Kp  1OrKp  30000

4D88H The integral time constant (Ti) is out of range. Ti  0OrTi  3600
4D89H The differential time constant (Td) is out of range. Td  0OrTd  1000
4D90H The upper limit of CCPID output is less than the lower limit.
Example
See "CCPID Instruction Manual".

583 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
FPID/FPID calculation
FPID
The function of this instruction is to adjust PID control parameters by fuzzy algorithm.
-[FPID (s) (d1) (d2) (d3)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
Store the start number of the device of the fuzzy parameter
(s) - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
table (no input required)
(d1) Start number of the device storing the initialization parameters - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(d2) Store the start number of the device of the input PID parameter - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
The start number of the device that stores the adjusted PID
(d3) - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
parameters
Device used
Offset Pulse
Soft component
modification extension
Instruction Parameter
S T(bit C(bit LC(bit HSC(bit D. Kn Kn Kn Kn S L HS
XYMS TCDR KH E [D] XXP
M ) ) ) ) b X Y M S D C C
Parameter
●● ● ●
1
Parameter
●● ● ●
2
FPID
Parameter
●● ● ●
3
Parameter
●● ● ●
4
Features
This instruction needs to be used in conjunction with the PID instruction. It completes the fuzzy calculation of the adjustments of the
three parameters of PID, Kp, Ki, and Kd. By passing in the three parameters of the PID, the new three parameters are calculated and
substituted into the PID for output control.
Parameter Description:
S parameter setting
Parameter Offset address Name Format Instruction Range
Parameter 1 S - - - -

d1 parameter setting
Parameter Offset address Name Format Instruction Range
d1
Parameter 1 em domain Floating point Temperature difference >0
d1+1
d1+2
Parameter 2 ecm domain Floating point Temperature difference >0
d1+3
d1+4
Parameter 3 kpm coefficient Floating point 0.5 (fixed) (not set) -
d1+5
d1+6
Parameter 4 kim coefficient Floating point 1 (fixed) (not set) -
d1+7
d1+8
Parameter 5 kdm coefficient Floating point 1 (fixed) (not set) -
d1+9

584 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
d1+10
Parameter 6 EM 32-bit integer 6 (fixed) (not set) -
d1+11
d1+12
Parameter 7 ECM 32-bit integer 6 (fixed) (not set) -
d1+13
d1+14
Parameter 8 UM 32-bit integer 6 (fixed) (not set) -
d1+15
d1+16
Parameter 9 Size_x 32-bit integer 13 (fixed) (not set) -
d1+17
d1+18
Parameter 10 Size_y 32-bit integer 13 (fixed) (not set) -
d1+19
Parameter 11 d1+20 Kpm reserved for internal use Reserved Reserved -
Parameter 12 d1+21 Kim reserved for internal use Reserved Reserved -
Parameter 13 d1+22 Kdm reserved for internal use Reserved Reserved -
Parameter 14 d1+23 Kukp reserved for internal use Reserved Reserved -
Parameter 15 d1+24 Kuki reserved for internal use Reserved Reserved -
Parameter 16 d1+25 Kukd reserved for internal use Reserved Reserved -
︙ ︙ ︙ ︙ Reserved -
Parameter 20 d1+37 Reserved for internal use Reserved Reserved -

d2 parameter setting
Parameter Offset address Name Format Instruction Range
Parameter 1 d2 Current Temperature 16-bit integer Current test temperature -
Parameter 2 d2+1 set temperature 16-bit integer Set temperature -
Take an integer multiple of the pid
Parameter 3 d2+2 Calculation period 16-bit integer -
sampling time, usually the same
Parameter 4 d2+3 Kp 16-bit integer PID initial Kp value -
Parameter 5 d2+4 KI 16-bit integer PID initial Ki value -
Parameter 6 d2+5 KD 16-bit integer PID initial Kd value -
Parameter 7 d2+6 Sampling cycle 16-bit integer No need to enter -
Parameter 8 d2+7 Initialization flag 16-bit integer Reserved for internal use -
d2+8
Parameter 9 Last calculation time 32-bit integer View usage (not operable) -
d2+9
Parameter 10 d2+10 Last temperature 16-bit integer View usage (not operable) -
Parameter 11 d2+11 Reserved 16-bit integer Reserved
d3 parameter setting
Parameter Offset address Name format Instruction Range
Parameter 1 d3 Current Temperature 16-bit integer Current test temperature -
Parameter 2 d3+1 set temperature 16-bit integer Set temperature -
Take an integer multiple of the pid
Parameter 3 d3+2 Calculation period 16-bit integer -
sampling time, usually the same
Parameter 4 d3+3 Kp 16-bit integer Kp value of PID after adjustment -
Parameter 5 d3+4 KI 16-bit integer Ki value of PID after adjustment -

585 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Parameter 6 d3+5 KD 16-bit integer Kd value of PID after adjustment -
Parameter 7 d3+6 Sampling cycle 16-bit integer No need to enter -
Parameter 8 d3+7 Reserved 16-bit integer Reserved -
✎Note:
The instruction starts from the device specified in (d1) and occupies 38 points of the device, and initializes the parameters. Normally,
it only needs to be initialized once before calling (some parameters are fixed) (occupies 38 words space).
The instruction starts with the device specified in (d2) and occupies 12 points of the device, input parameters, and input the first 6
parameters, where Kp, Ki, Kd are the initial values of the PID control parameters (occupies 12 words space) .
The instruction starts from the device specified in (d3) and occupies 8 points of soft elements and output parameters, among which
Kp, Ki, Kd are the parameter values after fuzzy adaptive calculation, which can be input to the designated position of PID (occupy 8
words space).
The FPID instruction occupies 58 words. The address of each operand must have a specified interval interval, which cannot be
occupied by other instructions.
Error code
Error code Content
When the device specified in the read application instructions (d1), (d2), (d3) exceeds the range of the
4085H
corresponding device.
When the device specified in the write application instructions (d1), (d2), (d3) exceeds the range of the
4086H
corresponding device.
4D91H FPID calculation cycle is less than or equal to 0
4D92H FPID parameter range error
4D93H FPID initial flag error
Example
1. Parameter d1

586 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
2. Parameter d2

3. Invoke FPID

587 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
CCPID instruction introduction manual
Background and purpose
(1) Background:
PID (proportion, integral, derivative) controller has been the earliest practical controller for nearly a hundred years, and it is still the
most widely used industrial controller. The PID controller is simple and easy to understand, and does not require precise system
models and other prerequisites in use, making it the most widely used controller.
(2) Purpose:
You might not be familiar with the parameter settings in the new series of CCPID for the first time, this manual could let you quickly
understand the meaning of each parameter in the CCPID and the influence on the control effect, so that you can quickly learn the
CCPID.
Description of the host CCPID instruction
Instruction description
Content, range and data type

Name Features Bits (bits) Whether pulse type Instruction format Step count

CCPID PID Operation 16 No CCPID 9

Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●● ●
Parameter 2 ●● ●
CCPID
Parameter 3 ●● ●
Parameter 4 ●● ●
Device used
is the target value (SV) of PID control;
is the measured feedback value (PV);
is the start address of the buffer area for setting parameters required for PID operation and saving intermediate results,
occupying a total of 52 variable units of subsequent addresses (recommended to reserve 100 continuous spaces).The value range is
D0 to D7,948, it is better to specify power failure retention, and the setting value remains after power supply is off. Otherwise,the
buffer needs to be assigned value before starting the calculation for the first time. The function and parameter description of each
unit are described in this section;
is the storage unit (MV) of the PID calculation result. Please specify it as a non-battery retentive area, otherwise it needs to be
initialized and cleared before the first start of calculation.

Programming example
The parameter description is as follows:
In D9, the target value of PID adjustment is stored, and D10 is the closed-loop feedback value. Note that D9 and D10 must be of the
same dimension, such as both 0.01MPa units, or 1℃ units, etc.;
A total of 52 units of D200 to D224 are used to store the set value and process value of PID operation. These values must be set item
by item before the first PID calculation;
D130 unit is used to store the calculated control output value to control the execution of the action.
The functions and setting methods of the parameter values of each unit used by are described in the following table:
to +14 is the parameter range that can be set (parameters set when CCPID is executed).
588 WECON technology Co., Ltd.
 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
+15 to +21 is the space used internally by CCPID control.
+22 to +51 is the parameter space used in the auto-tuning process.

Unit Features Setting instructions Supplement

It is how often the instruction calculates and updates the

The set range is 1 to 32,767 (ms), but greater output value (MV). When TS is less than one scan time,
Sample time (TS)
than PLC program scan cycle. PID instruction is executed with one scan time and alarm
4D86H. When TS ≤ 0, alarm 4D80H and no execution.

bit0: Positive action: similar heating system, when the

bit0: 0=positive action; 1=reverse action temperature is lower than the set value, increases the
bit2: auto-tuning transition zone switch. output ; Reverse action: similar cooling system, when
0=not open;1=open the temperature is greater than the set value, increases
bit3: 0=unidirection; 1=bidirection the output.
Bit4: 0=auto-tuning does not execute; bit2: Self-tuning transition zone switch. There is a
1=execute auto-tuning transition zone size of 1.5℃ when opened.
Action direction
+1 [Bit6:0=Two-stage auto-tuning does not bit3: Bidirection indicates that outputs the positive and
(ACT)
execute. 1=Execute two-stage auto-tuning negative values to the heating system or the cooling
(bit4 must be set to 1). system to control two external systems by one PID.
bit7: 0=Three-stage auto-tuning does not bit4: ✎When bit4=1 and bit6 and bit7 are not 1,
execute. 1=Execute three-stage auto-tuning auto-tuning is not executed. ✎When bit4=0 and one of
(bit4 must be set to 1 )] bit6 and bit7 is 1, auto-tuning is not executed. ✎When
The Others cannot be used. bit4=1 and bit6 and bit7 are both 1, auto-tuning is
executed

The first-order inertia filter of feedback When the value is greater than or equal to 100, it will be
+2 Filter coefficient
amount (0 to 100%) has a range of 0 to100 executed as 0, that is, no filtering will be executed;

Proportional
+3 Set range: 0 to 30,000[%] Overrun error 4D87H
gain(Kp)

Integration time Ti is integration time, and the range is 0 to

+4 Overrun error 4D88H
(Ti) 3,600 (s)

Differential time Td is derivative time, and the range is 0 to

+5 Overrun error 4D89H
(Td) 1,000 (s)

Operating temperature setting enabled by It is recommended to be greater than 5°C, that is, 50
+6 Working interval PID (0 indicates no effect) The range is 0 to (precision 0.1°C). If it exceeds the range, the boundary
1,000 value will be taken.

1. Self-tuning initialization:
① Unidirection control: the lower limit is 0;

② Bidirection control: If the lower limit is greater than

Range: -10,000 to 10,000.
0, adjust the lower limit to 0; if the upper limit and the
Recommended setting range: -2,000 or 0
+7 Output low limit lower limit are equal to 0, the default lower limit is
(when S3+1 bit3=0, the lower limit = 0;
-2,000. ✎Note: If set to -2,000, and the output value
when bit3=1, the lower limit = -2,000)
(MV) is less than -2,000, it will output -2,000.
2. During the control process, the lower limit is
dynamically adjustable. If the lower limit is greater than

589 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
or equal to the upper limit, error 4D90H will be
reported.

1. Self-tuning initialization:
① Unidirection control: If the upper limit is less than 0,

the default upper limit is 2,000;

② Bidirection control: If the upper limit is less than 0,
adjust the upper limit to 0; if the upper limit and the
Output upper Value range: -10,000 to 10,000. lower limit are equal to 0, the default upper limit is
+8
limit Recommended setting value is 2,000 -2,000. ✎Note: If set to -2,000 and the output value
(MV) is greater than -2,000, it will output 2,000.
2. During the control process, the upper limit is
dynamically adjustable. If the lower limit is greater than
or equal to the upper limit, error 4D90H will be
reported.

0: Overshoot allowed
0:Overshoot allowed (ukd = 100)
+9 Mode setting 1: Slight overshoot or no overshoot
1: Slight overshoot or no overshoot mode (ukd = 300)
2: Dynamic setting

Typically sets value to 100 (default 100)

Scale factor When the value is less than or equal to 0, or greater than
+10 [enabled when S3+9 is set to 2].The range is
(ukp) 500, the boundary value will be taken.
1 to 500.

Typically sets value to 50 (default 50)

Integral When the value is less than or equal to 0, or greater than
+11 [enabled when S3+9 is set to 2]. The range is
coefficient (uki) 300, the boundary value will be taken.
1 to 300.

Typically sets value to 50 (default 100. 300

Differential to 400 can be set when slight overshoot is When the value is less than or equal to 0, or greater than
+12
coefficient (ukd) required) [Enable when S3+9 is set to 2]. The 500, the boundary value will be taken.
range is 1 to 500.

Maximum ascent The range is 0 to 32,000, which is the

+13 Overrun error 4D82H
rate (DeltaT) threshold of integral increment

+14 Filtering (C0) The range is 0 to 1,023, integral part filtering Overrun error 4D81H

+15
reserved for
┆ Internal control space occupation
internal control
+21

+22
used space for
┆ New self-tuning space for internal use
self-tuning
+51
1) The auto-tuning process occupies the space of S3+22 to S3+51. When the auto-tuning is successful, the adjusted
parameters will be written into the space of S3+2 to S3+21.
2) +2 filter coefficient α: Processing in first-order inertial filter
Formula: Tnow=(100-α)×Tα+α×Told

590 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Tα is the currently measured temperature. Told is the temperature that participated in the PID calculation last time. Tnow is the
temperature used for the current PID calculation. α is the filter coefficient (when α=0, no filtering is performed, and the range of α is
0 to 100.(If there is a temperature with a small overshoot but a long stabilization time, the parameter can be set to 80, and analyze
the specific problems in detail)
3) +6 work range: Twork(example: 170 represents 17℃)

4) +9 working mode:
0: Working mode that allows overshoot
1: Slight overshoot or no overshoot working mode
2: Custom settings; to achieve by setting +10, +11, +12 three coefficients.
5) +1 bit2 self-tuning transition zone switch: (upper limit 1℃, low limit 0.5℃)
The transition zone description in forward control:

In the heating process, when PV≤SV+1℃, 100% power output; when PV＞SV+1℃, no output.
In the cooling process, when PV＜SV-0.5℃, 100% power output; When PV≥SV-0.5℃, no output.
The transition zone description in reverse control:

591 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
In the cooling process, when PV≥SV-1℃, 100% power output; when PV＜SV-1℃, no output.
In the heating process, when PV＞SV+0.5℃, 100% power output; When PV≤SV+0.5℃, no output.
The transition zone description in bidirectional control:

In the heating process, when PV≤SV+1℃, 100% power heating output; when PV>SV+1℃, 100% power cooling output.
In the cooling process, when PV＜SV-0.5℃, 100% power heating output. When PV≥SV-0.5℃, 100% power cooling output
Programming case
CCPID application configuration
(1) Parameter setting

(2) CCPID control process setting

592 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

(3) Bidirection control

✎Note:
1. CCPID is a special instruction for operation control. CCPID operation will be executed only after the sample time is reached.
2. There is no limit to the number of times the CCPID instruction can be used, but+51 cannot be repeated.
3. Before CCPID instruction is executed, CCPID parameters need to be set.

Case analysis
(1) Control requirements
The control environment of this example is a kettle. The configuration is controlled by PLC-5V2416 host with 4PT module, and PI8070
screen is used for data storage and process curve viewing.
(2) Sample program

593 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

(3) Parameter description

PLC device Control instructions

M0 Set auto tuning
M1 CCPID instruction calculation start
M2 CCPID operating status
Y0 Pulse output with adjustable pulse width
D0 Temperature measured value
D1 Temperature setting value
D100 sample time
D101 Control detail settings
D102 First-order inertial filter coefficient
D106 Working interval
D109 Operating mode
(4) Parameter control effect description
1) Boiling water experiment
1 Auto-tuning process and control process (no transition zone setting), take two-stage auto-tuning as an example

594 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

Figure 1 Auto-tuning process curve without transition zone

When the control system is a single temperature control system or a system where environmental interference does not cause large
fluctuations. Generally the automatic tuning without transition zone is selected, so that the self-tuning process can be completed
more quickly than the method with transition zone.
2 Self-tuning process and control process (transition zone setting)

Figure 2 Self-tuning process curve with transition zone

It is more suitable in a two-way control system with transition zone self-tuning process. The transition zone has a range of 1.5°C. The
upper limit is 1°C, and the lower limit is 0.5°C.
2) Difference in working interval setting

595 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Figure 3 Process curve under different working interval parameters

Figure 4 Process curve without different working interval parameters (heating process diagram)
It can be seen from the partially enlarged graph that the parameters of the working interval have a certain influence on the
overshoot and the stable time. In the case of allowing overshoot, setting the working interval parameters can make the overshoot
smaller. This is because the deviation E of PID starting to work is relatively small, and the integration accumulation will not quickly
saturate.
3) Result of filter coefficient setting

Figure 5 Process curve under different filtering parameters

The figure above is the experimental result under the small overshoot coefficient, the sample time is 1s. The coefficients of the
first-order inertial filtering are (20, 50, 70, 80, 90). After adding the inertia coefficient, the stability time of system control is greatly
accelerated, and it is increased by about 6 minutes for the boiling water experiment. The overshoot is about 1.2°C to 1.7°C.
Therefore, the introduction of first-order inertial filtering could greatly improve the PID environment where the temperature
fluctuates to a certain extent and increase stabilization time.
✎Note: This parameter of filter coefficient is helpful for systems with not very large hysteresis or the control effect of the
phenomenon that the control amount fluctuates back and forth has been greatly improved.
4) The difference in mode selection

596 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
0: Overshoot allowed(ukd = 100)
1: Small overshoot or no overshoot (ukd = 300)

Figure 6 Process curves in different working modes

When selecting mode 1 (small overshoot or no overshoot), the stable temperature may be slightly higher than the set temperature
(fluctuates above the set temperature).

5) The function of the coefficient

Figure 7 Process curve under dynamic setting

When selecting working mode 2, there are three corresponding adjustable parameters: ukp[S3+10], uki[S3+11], ukd[S3+12]. Usually,
the default parameters can be used for ukp and uki. Adjust the value of ukd could achieve the control effect.
Ukp is adjusted when the value of Kp reaches the maximum value, and the default value is usually 100.
Uki is adjusted when periodic oscillations occur. Gradually increase the value of uki to track the control effect.

597 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
CCPIN_SHT operation
CCPIN_SHT
This instruction is used to perform PID control that changes the output value according to the variation of the input.
-[CCPID_SHT (s1) (s2) (s3) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Data type
Parameter Content Range Data type
(label)
(s1) The device number that stores the target value (SV) -32767 to 32767 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(s2) The device number that stores the measured value (SV) -32767 to 32767 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(s3) The device number that stores parameters 1 to 32767 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(d) The device number that stores the output value (SV) -32767 to 32767 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●● ●
Parameter 2 ●● ●
CCPID_SHT
Parameter 3 ●● ●
Parameter 4 ●● ●
Features
This instruction is to complete the temperature control operation, used to control the parameters of the closed-loop control system.
is the target value of CCPID SHT control (SV).
is the measured feedback value (PV).
is the start address of the cache where the parameters required by CCPID_SHT operation and intermediate results are saved,
occupying a total of 36 variable units of subsequent addresses. The value range is from D0 to D7946 or from R0 to R29964. It is better
to specify power failure retention, and the setting value remains after power supply is off. Otherwise, the cache needs to be assigned
value before starting the calculation for the first time. The function and parameter description of each unit are described in this
section.
is the storage unit of the CCPID_SHT calculation result. Please specify it as a non-battery retentive area, otherwise it needs to
be initialized and cleared before the first start of calculation.
Programming example

The parameter description is as follows:

The target value of CCPID_SHT adjustment is stored in D1, and D0 is the closed-loop feedback value. Note that D0 and D9 must be of
the same dimension, such as both 0.01MPa units, or 1℃ units, etc..
A total of 36 units of D1000 to D1035 are used to store the set value and process value of CCPID_SHT operation. These values must
be set item by item before the first CCPID_SHT calculation.
D100 unit is used to store the calculated control output value to control the execution of the action.
to +15 is the parameter range that can be set (parameters set when CCPID_SHT is executed). +2 to +31 is the
parameter space used in the self-tuning process. (This space is multiplexed with the parameter space during control)

598 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
The functions and setting methods of the parameter values of each unit started by are described in the following table:
Unit Function Description
Sampling time (TS) Range: 1 to 32767 (ms). It must be longer than PLC program scan cycle.
bit0: 0＝Forward action; 1＝Reverse action
bit3: 0＝one-way; 1＝two-way
bit4: 0＝Self-tuning does not act; 1＝Perform self-tuning and the others are not available.
bit6: 0＝Two-segment self-tuning does not act; 1＝Perform two-segment self-tuning (bit4
+1 Control flag bit
must set to 1)
bit7: 0=Three-segment self-tuning does not act; 1＝Perform three-segment self-tuning (bit4
must set to 1)
Bit15: The instruction initialization flag bit. When initialization is complete, it is set to 1.
Maximum rate of
+2 Range: 0 to 32000. Threshold of integral increment
increase (DeltaT)
+3 Proportional gain (Kp) Range: 0 to 32767. This value is magnified 256 times and the actual value is Kp/256.
+4 Integral gain (Ki) Range: 0 to 32767, Ki=16384Ts/Ti,Ti is integral time
+5 Differential gain (Kd) Range: 0 to 32767, Kd≈Td/Ts, Td is differential time
+6 Filter constant (Co) Range: 0 to 1023, Integral partial filtering.
+7 Output lower limit Recommended setting range: -2000 to 2000
Recommended setting value: 2000. When the upper and lower limits are both 0, the upper
+8 Output upper limit
limit becomes 2000 and the lower limit becomes 0.
+9 Reserved Reserved for internal use
┇ ┇ ┇
+35 Reserved Reserved for internal use
Parameter space corresponding to the self-tuning time
Unit Function Description

Sampling time (TS) Range: 1 to 32767 (ms). It must be longer than PLC program scan cycle.

bit0: 0＝Forward action; 1＝Reverse action

bit3: 0＝one-way; 1＝two-way
bit4: 0＝Self-tuning does not act; 1＝Perform self-tuning and the others are not available.
bit6: 0＝Two-segment self-tuning does not act; 1＝Perform two-segment self-tuning (bit4
+1 Control flag bit must set to 1)
bit7: 0=Three-segment self-tuning does not act; 1＝Perform three-segment self-tuning
(bit4 must set to 1)
Bit15: This instruction initializes the flag bit. When initialization is complete, the position
is set to 1.
Sampling time of PID
+2 Setting range: 1 to 32767 ms(). When Ts≦0, Ts=3000
running after self-tuning
Coefficient ukp for PID
+3 Setting range: 0 to 500. When ukp≦0, ukp=100; When ukp≧500, ukp=500.
parameter calculation
Coefficient uki for PID
+4 Setting range: 0 to 32767. When uki≦0, uki=50.
parameter calculation
+5 Coefficient ukd for PID Setting range: 0 to 32767. When ukd≦0, ukd=50.

599 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
parameter calculation
+6 Reserved Reserved
+7 Output lower limit Recommended setting range: -2000 to 2000
Recommended setting value: 2000. When the upper and lower limits are both 0, the
+8 Output upper limit
upper limit becomes 2000 and the lower limit becomes 0.
+9 Reserved Reserved for internal use
┇ ┇ ┇
+35 Reserved Reserved for internal use
Error code
Error code Content
4085H Read application instruction (S1), (S2), (S3) and (d) output results exceed the range of device.
4086H The devices specified in write application instruction (S3) and (d) exceed the range of the corresponding device.
4DB0H Sampling time (Ts) exceeds the range the object (Ts≦0)
4DB1H Output filter constant (Co) exceeds the range the object (Co<0 or Co>1023)
4DB2H Maximum rate of increase (DeltaT) exceeds the range the object (deltaT<0 or deltaT>32000)
4DB3H Proportional gain (Kp) exceeds the range the object (Kp≦0)
4DB4H Integral gain (Ki) exceeds the range the object (Ki≦0)
4DB5H Differential gain (Kd) exceeds the range the object (Kd≦0)
4DB6H Sampling time (Ts) < operation cycle
Example

600 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

LAGCDL Large time-delay temperature control instruction

LAGCDL
This instruction is used to perform large time-delay system temperature control that changes the output value according to changes
in the input.
-[LAGCDL (s1) (s2) (s3) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Data type
Parameter Content Range Data type
(label)
(s1) The device number that stores the target value (SV) -32767 to 32767 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(s2) The device number that stores the measured value (SV) -32767 to 32767 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(s3) The device number that stores parameters 1 to 32767 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(d) The device number that stores the output value (SV) -32767 to 32767 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●● ●
Parameter 2 ●● ●
LAGCDL
Parameter 3 ●● ●
Parameter 4 ●● ●
Features
This instruction is to complete large time-delay system control operation, and used to control the parameters of the closed-loop
control system.
is the target value of CCPID SHT control (SV).
is the measured feedback value (PV).
is the start address of the cache where the parameters required by LAGCDL operation and intermediate results are saved,
occupying a total of 634 variable units of subsequent addresses. The value range is from D0 to D7974 or from R0 to R35000. It is
better to specify power failure retention, and the setting value remains after power supply is off. Otherwise, the cache needs to be
assigned value before starting the calculation for the first time. The function and parameter description of each unit are described in
this section.
is the storage unit of the LAGCDL calculation result. Please specify it as a non-battery retentive area, otherwise it needs to be
initialized and cleared before the first start of calculation.
Programming example

601 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
The parameter description is as follows:
The target value of LAGCDL adjustment is stored in D1, and D0 is the closed-loop feedback value. Note that D0 and D9 must be of the
same dimension, such as both 0.01MPa units, or 1℃ units, etc..
A total of 634 units of D1000 to D1633 are used to store the set value and process value of LAGCDL operation. These values must be
set item by item before the first LAGCDL calculation.
D100 unit is used to store the calculated control output value to control the execution of the action.
to +15 is the parameter range that can be set (parameters set when LAGCDL is executed). +28 to +631 is the
historical data space for LAGCDL control internal use. +4 to +27 is the parameter space used in the self-tuning process.
(This space is multiplexed with the parameter space during control)
The functions and setting methods of the parameter values of each unit started by are described in the following table:
Unit Function Description
Sampling time (TS) Range: 1 to 32767 (ms). It must be longer than PLC program scan cycle.
bit0: 0＝Forward action; 1＝Reverse action
bit1: Overshoot power limit output enable bit. 0＝no limit; 1＝limited
Bit2: Reset historical data. 0=reset; 1=no reset. This bit must be 0 before
each execution.
bit4: 0＝Self-tuning does not act; 1＝Perform self-tuning and the others
+1 Control flag bit
are not available.
Bit14:Historical data initialization flag bit. When initialization is
complete, it is set to 1.
Bit15: The instruction initializes the flag bit. When initialization is
complete, it is set to 1.
+2 Output lower limit Range: -32000 to 32000. Recommended setting range: -2000 or 0.
Range: 0 to 32000. Recommended setting value is 2000. When the
+3 Output upper limit upper and lower limits are both 0, the upper limit becomes 2000 and
the lower limit becomes 0.
The suggested value can be obtained by self-tuning, and can also be
+4 Full power output boundary
adjusted according to the actual situation.
The suggested value can be obtained by self-tuning, and can also be
+5 Half-power output boundary
adjusted according to the actual situation.
The suggested value can be obtained by self-tuning, and can also be
+6 Stop output boundary
adjusted according to the actual situation.
The maximum rate of increase of the
+7 Given by self-tuning
controlled system
+8 The lagged time of the controlled system Given by self-tuning. Unit: s
The time constant of the controlled
+9 Given by self-tuning. Unit: s
system
+10 Ideal closed-loop time constant Given by self-tuning. Unit: s
Given by self-tuning. This parameter can be adjusted during the control
+11 Ideal closed-loop sampling time
process. Unit: s
Maximum temperature difference during
+12 Given by self-tuning. (for your reference)
setting
+13 The temperature difference between the Given by self-tuning. (for your reference)

602 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
residual heat and temperature rise
+14 Heating time Given by self-tuning. (for your reference)
+15 Setting time Given by self-tuning. (for your reference)
+16
┇ Self-tuning use space Reserved for internal use
+27
+28 Current temperature difference Used during control
+29 Previous temperature difference Used during control
+30 The 1st operation flag bit Used during control
+31 Number of valid history outputs Used during control
+32
┇ Historical output data Used during control
+631
+632
Previous sampling time stamp Reserved for internal use
+633
Error code
Error code Content
4085H Read application instruction (S1), (S2), (S3) and (d) output results exceed the range of device.
4086H The devices specified in write application instruction (S3) and (d) exceed the range of the corresponding device.
4D86H Sampling time (Ts) < operation cycle
4DA1H Power limit boundary (s3+4), (s3+5) and (s3+6) exceed the range.
4DA2H System parameters (s3+7), (s3+8) and (s3+9) exceed the range.
4DA3H Control parameters (s3+10) and (s3+11) exceed the range.
4DA4H The output upper limit is smaller than the lower limit
Example

603 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

12 String instructions
LEN/string length detection
LEN(P)
After detecting the length of the character string specified in (s), store it after the device number specified in (d).
The data from the device number designated in (s) to the device number of 00H is treated as a character string.
-[LEN (s) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s) String or start number of the device storing the string - String ANYSTRING_SINGLE
(d) Store the device number of the detected character string length - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
LEN
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
Features
After detecting the length of the character string specified in (s), store it after the device number specified in (d).
The data from the device number specified in (s) to the stored device number of 00H is treated as a character string.

Error code
Error code Content
4085H (s) The read address exceeds the device range
408AH (s) The length of the read string exceeds, and the continuous length of the string exceeds 400 characters
408BH (s) When reading a character string, the maximum range of the device is read, but 00H is not found and the end
4086H (d) When using offset, the offset address exceeds the device range
Example

For example, the above Circuit program

Use the asc instruction to write the string abcdef to the address starting from R0.
Then use the LEN instruction to determine the length. At this time, D0 will display 6.

604 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
LEFT/Extract from the left side of the string
LEFT(P)
For the character string data stored after the device number specified in (s), the data of (n) characters starting from the left side of
the character string (the beginning of the character string) is stored in the device specified in (d) After numbering.
-[LEFT (s) (d) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s) String or start number of the device storing the string - String ANYSTRING_SINGLE
(d) The start number of the device that stores the (n) character
- String ANYSTRING_SINGLE
string from the left of (s)
(n) Number of characters extracted 1 to 400 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
LEFT Parameter 2 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
Features
For the character string data stored after the device number specified in (s), the data of (n) characters starting from the left side of
the character string (the beginning of the character string) is stored in the device specified in (d) After numbering.

The character string specified in (s) is the data from the specified device to the position where "00H" is first detected in byte units.
(n)=7:

The final NULL code (00H) representing the character string will be automatically appended to the end of the character string data.
If the number of extracted characters is an odd number, "00H" is stored in the upper byte of the device storing the final character. If
the number of extracted characters is an even number, "0000H" is stored in the device after the device storing the final character.
605 WECON technology Co., Ltd.
 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
When the number of characters specified in (n) is 0, the NULL code (00H) is stored in (d).
✎Note:
When handling character codes other than ASCII codes, pay attention to the following points.
✎The number of characters is handled in byte units (8 bits). Therefore, like the shifted JIS code, the character code of 1 character is
represented by 2 bytes, and the number of characters of 1 character is "2".
✎When extracting a character string from a character string containing a character code representing one character in 2 bytes, such
as the shift JIS code, the number of characters to be extracted should be considered in the unit of the character code of one character.
If only 1 byte of the 2-byte character code is extracted, it will not be the expected character code, so be careful.
Error code
Error code Content
4085H (s) The read address exceeds the device range
408AH (s) The length of the read string exceeds, and the continuous length of the string exceeds 400 characters
408BH (s) When reading a character string, the maximum range of the device is read, but 00H is not found and the end
4084H (n)<1 or (n)> string length
4086H (d) The write address exceeds the device range
Example

From the "a b c d e f" starting from D0, take out 5 characters from the left to the R0 type. The character string of R0 is "a b c d e".

606 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
RIGHT/Extract from the right side of the string
RIGHT(P)
For the string data stored after the device number specified in (s), the data of (n) characters starting from the right side of the string
(the end of the string) is stored in the device number specified in (d) after.
-[RIGHT (s) (d) (n)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s) String or start number of the device storing the string - String ANYSTRING_SINGLE
The start number of the device that stores the (n) character
(d) - String ANYSTRING_SINGLE
string from the right of (s)
(n) Number of characters extracted 1 to 400 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
Device used
Offset Pulse
Device
Instruction Parameter modification expansion
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●● ● ●

RIGHT Parameter 2 ● ● ● ●●● ● ●

Parameter 3 ● ● ● ●●● ● ● ●●

Features
For the string data stored after the device number specified in (s), the data of (n) characters starting from the right side of the string
(the end of the string) is stored in the device number specified in (d) after.

The character string specified in (s) is the data from the specified device to the position where "00H" is first detected in byte units.
(N)=5:

607 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
The final NULL code (00H) representing the character string will be automatically appended to the end of the character string data.
If the number of extracted characters is an odd number, "00H" is stored in the upper byte of the device storing the final character. If
the number of extracted characters is an even number, "0000H" is stored in the device after the device storing the final character.
When the number of characters specified in (n) is 0, the NULL code (00H) is stored in (d).
✎Note:
When handling character codes other than ASCII codes, pay attention to the following points.
✎The number of characters is handled in byte units (8 bits). Therefore, like the shifted JIS code, the character code of 1 character is
represented by 2 bytes, and the number of characters of 1 character is "2".
✎When extracting a character string from a character string containing a character code representing one character in 2 bytes, such
as the shift JIS code, the number of characters to be extracted should be considered in the unit of the character code of one character.
If only 1 byte of the 2-byte character code is extracted, it will not be the expected character code, so be careful.
Error code
Error code Content
4085H (s), (n) The read address exceeds the device range
408AH (s) The length of the read string exceeds, and the continuous length of the string exceeds 400 characters
408BH (s) When reading a character string, the maximum range of the device is read, but 00H is not found and the end
4084H (n)<1 or (n)> string length
4086H (d) The write address exceeds the device range
Example

Get 3 characters “890” from the right in the string "1234567890" and store them in R0

608 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Any extraction from MIDR/string
MIDR(P)
Store the data at any position in the character string data after the device number specified in (d).
-[MIDR (s1) (d) (s2)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s1) String or start number of the device storing the string - String ANYSTRING_SINGLE
Start number of the device storing the character string data
(d) - String ANYSTRING_SINGLE
of the operation result
The start number of the device that stores the start character
position and the number of characters
(s2) - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16_ARRAY
(s2)+0: the position of the starting character, (s2)+1: the
number of characters is signed
Device used

Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension

X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
MIDR Parameter 2 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
Features
For the character string data stored after the device number specified in (s1), the data of the character specified in (s2)+1 starting
from the specified position in (s2) is stored to the device number specified in (d) and later .

（1）: The position of the 5th character (S2).

（2）: ASCII code (S2)+1 of the 5th character.
The character string specified in (s1) is the data from the specified device to the position where "00H" is first detected in byte units.
The final NULL code (00H) representing the character string will be automatically appended to the end of the character string data.
If the number of extracted characters "(s2)+1" is an odd number, "00H" is stored in the upper byte of the device storing the final
character. If the number of extracted characters "(s2)+1" is an even number, "0000H" is stored in the device after the device storing
the final character.
(s2) If the number of characters specified in +1 is 0, no processing is performed.
When the number of characters specified in (s2)+1 is -1, the data up to the final character data specified in (s1) is stored in the device
specified in (d) and later.

609 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

(1): The position of the 5th character (S2).

✎Note:
When handling character codes other than ASCII codes, pay attention to the following points.
✎The number of characters is handled in byte units (8 bits). Therefore, like the shifted JIS code, the character code of 1 character is
represented by 2 bytes, and the number of characters of 1 character is "2".
✎When extracting a character string from a character string containing a character code representing one character in 2 bytes, such
as the shift JIS code, the number of characters to be extracted should be considered in the unit of the character code of one character.
If only 1 byte of the 2-byte character code is extracted, it will not be the expected character code, so be careful.
Error code
Error code Content
4085H (s1), (s2) The read address exceeds the device range
408AH (s1) The length of the read string exceeds, and the continuous length of the string exceeds 400 characters
408BH (s1) When reading a character string, the maximum range of the device is read, but 00H is not found.
(s2) When the value of +1 is -2 (including -2) or less.
When the value of (s2) exceeds the number of characters in (s1).
4084H When the value of (s2) is negative.
When the value of (s2)+1 exceeds the number of characters of (s1).
When the value of (s2) and (s2) + 1 after the addition operation exceeds the number of characters of (s1).
4086H (d) The write address exceeds the device range
Example

Get three characters "234" from the second character of the string "123456" into R0.

610 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
$MOV/ string transfer
$MOV(P)
Transfer the character string data specified in (s) to the device number specified in (d) and later.
-[$MOV (s) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
Transmission string (maximum 255 characters) or the start number
(s) - String ANYSTRING_SINGLE
of the device storing the string
The start number of the device storing the transferred character
(d) - String ANYSTRING_SINGLE
string
Device used
Offset Pulse
Device
Instruction Parameter modification expansion
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
$MOV
Parameter 2 ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
Features
Transfer the character string data specified in (s) to the device number specified in (d) and later. In the transmission of a character
string, the character string enclosed by the "" (double quotation marks) specified in (s) or the character string starting from the
device number to the device number storing 00H is transmitted once.

Even if the device range (s) to (s)+n storing the transferred character string data overlaps with the device range (d) to (d)+n storing
the transferred character string data, it will be normal To process. For example, when the character string stored in D10 to D13 is
transferred to D11 to D14, the situation is as follows.

(1): It directly becomes the character string before transmission.

When 00H is stored in the low byte of (s)+n, both the high byte and low byte of (d)+n will store 00H.

611 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

(1): The upper byte cannot be transmitted.

(2): It directly becomes the character string before transmission.
(3): The upper byte automatically stores 00H.
Error code
Error code Content

4085H (s) The read address exceeds the device range

408AH (s) The length of the read string exceeds, and the continuous length of the string exceeds 400 characters
408BH (s) When reading a character string, the maximum range of the device is read, but 00H is not found and the end
4086H (d) The write address exceeds the device range
Example

Copy the string "a b c d e" in D0 to R0.

612 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Arbitrary replacement in MIDW/string
MIDW(P)
For the string data stored after the device number specified in (s1), the data of the character specified in (s2)+1 is stored in the string
data stored after the device number specified in (d) After the position specified in (s2).
-[MIDW (s1) (d) (s2)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s1) String or start number of the device storing the string - String ANYSTRING_SINGLE
Start number of the device storing the character string
(d) - String ANYSTRING_SINGLE
data of the operation result
The start number of the device that stores the start
character position and the number of characters
(s2) - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16_ARRAY
(s2)+0: the position of the starting character, (s2)+1: the
number of characters is signed
Device used
Offset Pulse
Device
Instruction Parameters modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●● ● ● ● ● ●

MIDW Parameter 2 ● ● ● ●● ● ● ● ● ●

Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ●● ● ● ● ● ●

Features
For the string data stored after the device number specified in (s1), the data of the character specified in (s2)+1 is stored in the string
data stored after the device number specified in (d) After the position specified in (s2).

 The character string specified in (s1) or (d) is the data from the specified device to the position where "00H" is first detected in
byte units.
 The final NULL code (00H) representing the character string will be automatically appended to the end of the character string

613 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
data.
 If the number of characters specified in (s2)+1 is 0, no processing is performed.
 If the number of characters specified in (s2)+1 exceeds the last character of the character string data specified in (d), the data
up to the last character of (d) is stored.

When the number of characters specified in (s2)+1 is -1, the data up to the final character data specified in (s1) is stored in the device
specified in (d) and later.

✎Note:
 When handling character codes other than ASCII codes, pay attention to the following points.

614 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
 The number of characters is handled in byte units (8 bits). Therefore, like the shifted JIS code, the character code of 1 character
is represented by 2 bytes, and the number of characters of 1 character is "2".
 When extracting a character string from a character string containing a character code representing one character in 2 bytes,
such as the shift JIS code, the number of characters to be extracted should be considered in the unit of the character code of
one character. If only 1 byte of the 2-byte character code is extracted, it will not be the expected character code, so be careful.
Error code
Error code Content
4085H (s1) (s2) (d) The read address exceeds the device range
408AH (s1) (d) The length of the read string exceeds, and the continuous length of the string exceeds 400 characters
408BH (s1) (d) When reading a character string, the maximum range of the device is read, but 00H is not found.
(s2) When the value of +1 is -2 (including -2) or less.
When the value of (s2) exceeds the number of characters in (d).
4084H
When the value of (s2) is negative.
When the value of (s2)+1 exceeds the number of characters of (s1).
4086H (d) The write address exceeds the device range
Example

Replace the three-character-length characters starting with the second character in the character string "q w e r y" stored in R0 with
the first three characters in D20.
The result of R0 is "q123y".

615 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
STR/BIN 16-bit data → character string conversion
STR(P)
The BIN 16-bit data specified in (s2) is converted into a character string after a decimal point is added to the position specified in (s1),
and stored in the device number specified in (d) or later.
-[STR (s1) (s2) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
The start number of the device that stores the
(s1) - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16_S_ARRAY
number of digits of the converted value
(s2) Converted BIN data -32768 to +32767 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16_S
Start number of the device storing the converted
(d) - String ANYSTRING_SINGLE
character string
Device used
Offset Pulse
Device
Instruction Parameters modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●● ● ● ● ● ●

STR Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ●● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Parameter 3 ●● ● ● ● ● ●

Features
The BIN 16-bit data specified in (s2) is converted into a character string after a decimal point is added to the position specified in (s1),
and stored in the device number specified in (d) or later.

All digits that can be specified in (s1) are 2 to 8 digits.

The number of decimal places that can be specified in (s1)+1 is 0 to 5 digits. However, the setting should satisfy the condition that the
number of decimal places ≤ (all digits-3).
The converted character string data will be stored in the device numbers after (d) as follows.
• In the sign, BIN 16-bit data will store 20H (blank) when it is positive, and 2DH (-) when it is negative.
• When the number of decimal places is set to other than 0, 2EH(.) is automatically stored in the specified digit + 1 digit. When the
decimal place is 0, 2EH(.) is not stored.

616 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
(1): Number of decimal places
(2): Automatically attach
If the value of the decimal place is greater than the number of digits of the BIN 16-bit data, 0 is automatically appended and
converted to "0.***" right-aligned.

(1): Automatically attach

In the value of all digits, excluding the sign, and if the number of digits after the decimal point is greater than the number of BIN
16-bit data, 20H (blank) is stored between the sign and the value. If the digit of BIN 16-bit data is larger, it will be in error status.

(1): Change to 20H (SP).

00H is automatically stored at the end of the converted character string.
• When the total digits are even digits, "0000H" is stored in the device after the device storing the final character. In the case of an
odd number of digits, "00H" is stored in the upper byte (8 bits) of the device storing the final character.
Error code
Error code Content
4085H (s1), (s2) The read address exceeds the device range
(s1) or (s1+1) parameter setting value is out of range. E.g:
1. The value of (s1) is not in the range of 2-8
2. The value of (s1+1) is not in the range of 0-5
3. The value of (s1+1) is greater than the value of (s1) minus 3
4. When (s1+1) is 0, the number of digits specified in (s1) is less than the number of BIN 16-bit data specified in
4084H
(s2)+1.
When (s1+1) is not 0, the number of digits specified in (s1) is less than the number of BIN 16-bit data specified in
(s2) + 2.
(The number of digits of (s1) <the number of BIN 16-bit data that does not contain a sign of (s2) + the number of
signs (+ or -) + the number of decimal points (.))
4086H (d) When using offset, the offset address exceeds the device range
Example

After M8 is turned ON, according to the setting of all digits, 6 decimal places and 0 digits, it is converted into a character string
"12345" (with a space before 1)

617 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DSTR/BIN 32-bit data → string conversion
DSTR(P)
The BIN 32-bit data specified in (s2) is converted into a character string after a decimal point is added to the position specified in (s1),
and stored in the device number specified in (d) or later.
-[DSTR (s1) (s2) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
The start number of the device that
(s1) stores the number of digits of the - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16_S_ARRAY
converted value
(s2) Converted BIN data -2147483648 to 2147483647 Signed BIN 32 bit ANY32_S
Start number of the device storing the
(d) - String ANYSTRING_SINGLE
converted character string
Device used
Offset Pulse
Device
Instruction Parameters modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
DSTR Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Parameter 3 ●●●● ● ● ●
Features
The BIN 32-bit data specified in (s2) is converted into a character string after a decimal point is added to the position specified in (s1),
and stored in the device number specified in (d) or later. -654.321 is specified in S2.

618 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
All digits that can be specified in (s1) are 2 to 13 digits.
The number of decimal places that can be specified in (s1)+1 is 0 to 10 digits. However, the setting should satisfy the condition that
the number of decimal places ≤ (all digits-3).
The converted character string data will be stored in the device numbers after (d) as follows.
• In the sign, when the BIN 32-bit data is positive, 20H (blank) is stored, and when it is negative, 2DH (-) is stored.
• When the number of decimal places is set to other than 0, 2EH(.) is automatically stored in the specified digit + 1 digit. When the
decimal place is 0, 2EH(.) is not stored.

（1）: Number of decimal places

（2）: Automatically attach
• If the value of the decimal place is greater than the number of digits in the BIN 32-bit data, 0 is automatically added and converted
to "0.***" right-justified.

(1): Automatically attach

• If the sign is excluded from the value of all digits, and the number of digits after the decimal point is greater than the number of BIN
32-bit data, 20H (blank) is stored between the sign and the value. If the digit of BIN 16-bit data is larger, it will be in error status.

(1): Change to 20H (SP)

• 00H is automatically stored at the end of the converted character string.
• When the total digits are even digits, "0000H" is stored in the device after the device storing the final character. In the case of an
odd number of digits, "00H" is stored in the upper byte (8 bits) of the device storing the final character.
Error code
Error code Content
4085H (s1), (s2) The read address exceeds the device range
(s1) or (s1+1) parameter setting value is out of range. E.g:
4084H 1. The value of (s1) is not in the range of 2 to 13.
2. The value of (s1+1) is not in the range of 0 to 10.

619 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
3. The value of (s1+1) is greater than the value of (S1) minus 3.
4. When (s1+1) is 0, the number of digits specified in (s1) is less than the number of BIN 16-bit data specified in
(s2)+1.
When (s1+1) is not 0, the number of digits specified in (s1) is less than the number of BIN 16-bit data specified in
(s2) + 2.
(The number of digits of (s1) <the number of BIN 16-bit data that does not contain a sign of (s2) + the number of
signs (+ or -) + the number of decimal points (.))
4086H (d) When using offset, the offset address exceeds the device range.

xample

As shown in the example

We need to convert 123456 into a floating point string with 9 lengths after the decimal point and 3 lengths,
The result of the conversion should be 123.456. The previous value will have two spaces to supplement the insufficient number.

620 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
$+/ Combination of strings
$+(P)
Connect the string data stored after the device number specified in (s2) to the string data stored after the device number specified in
(s1), and store it after the device number specified in (d).
-[$+ (s1) (s2) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
Connection data or the start number of the device storing the data
(s1) - String ANYSTRING_SINGLE
or a directly specified character string
The connected data or the start number of the device storing the
(s2) - String ANYSTRING_SINGLE
connected data or the directly specified character string
(d) Start number of the device storing the connection result - String ANYSTRING_SINGLE
Device used
Offset Pulse
Device
Instruction Parameters modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ● ● ● ● ●● ● ● ● ● ●

$+ Parameter 2 ● ● ● ● ●● ● ● ● ● ●

Parameter 3 ● ● ● ●● ● ● ● ● ●

Features
Connect the string data stored after the device number specified in (s2) to the string data stored after the device number specified in
(s1), and store it after the device number specified in (d).
The character strings of (s1) and (s2) start with the specified device number until the device number of 00H is stored.

When merging character strings, 00H indicating the end of the character string specified in (s1) is ignored, and the character string
specified in (s2) is connected at the final character of (s1).
If the character string is merged, 00H will be automatically appended at the end. If the number of characters after connection is an
odd number, 00H is stored in the upper byte of the device that stores the final character, and if the number of characters after
connection is an even number, the device after the device that stores the final character is stored 0000H will be stored.
Error code
Error code Content

4085H (s1) or (s2) read address out of device range

408AH (s1) or (s2) The length of the read string exceeds, and the continuous length of the string exceeds 400 characters
408BH (s1) or (s2) When reading a character string, the maximum range of the device is read, but 00H is not found.
4086H (d) The write address exceeds the device range

621 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

Example

The result of combining the string "12345" and the string "abcde" is "12345abcde"

622 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
INSTR/string search
INSTR(P)
Starting from the left (s3) character of the string data stored after the device number specified in (s2), search for the string data
stored after the device number specified in (s1), and store the search result in In the device specified in (d).
-[ INSTR (s1) (s2) (d) (s3)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
Search string or the start number of the device storing
(s1) - String ANYSTRING_SINGLE
the search string
The searched character string or the start number of the
(s2) - String ANYSTRING_SINGLE
device storing the searched character string
(d) Start number of the device storing the search result - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(s3) Search start position 1 to 400 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
Device used
Offset Pulse
Device
Instruction Parameters modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●●● ● ● ●
Parameter 2 ●●●● ● ● ●
INSTR
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ● ●
Parameter 4 ● ● ● ● ●●●● ● ●● ● ●
Features
Starting from the left (s3) character of the string data stored after the device number specified in (s2), search for the string data
stored after the device number specified in (s1), and store the search result in In the device specified in (d). The search result will
store the first character from the start character of the string data specified in (s2).

(1): Search start position (S3): 3rd character

(2): The fifth character from the start character
 If there is no matching character string data, 0 is stored in (d).
 If the search start position (s3) is "0", no processing is performed.
 The searched character string (s1) can be directly specified.

623 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

(1): Search start position (s3): 3rd character

(2): The fifth character from the start character
Error code
Error code Content

4085H (s1), (s2), (s3) The read address exceeds the device range
408AH (s1), (s2) The length of the read string exceeds, and the continuous length of the string exceeds 400 characters
408BH (s1), (s2) When reading a character string, the maximum range of the device is read, but 00H is not found.
4086H (d) The write address exceeds the device range
4084H (s3) <0 or (s3)>=string length
Example

Search for the string "ef" in the continuous string "abcdefg" from the first to the fifth position.

624 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
ASC/ASCII data input
ASC
A command to convert a character string of half-width/English numbers into ASCII code.
Used to select and display multiple messages on the external display.
-[ASC (s) (d)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
32-character half-width English numbers input from
(s) - String (ASCI code only) ANY_ASC
the computer
(d) Start word device number for storing ASCII data - BIN16 bit ANY16_S
Device used
Offset Pulse
Device
Instruction Parameters modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1
ASC
Parameter 2 ●●●●● ●
Features
1. 16-bit arithmetic (ASC)
After converting the half-width, English, and numeric character strings specified in (S) into ASCII codes, they are transferred to (D) in
sequence.
• Process A to Z, 0 to 9, and half-width characters of Signs in (S). (Full-width character strings are not processed.)When programming
with a programming tool, enter a character string.
• The converted ASCII code is stored in (D) every 2 characters/1 word in the order of low 8 bits and high 8 bits.
Extensions
After SM161 is turned ON, the extended function becomes effective. At this time, the half-width/alphanumeric character string
specified in S is converted into ASCII code, and then it is transmitted to the lower 8 bits (1 byte) of D in sequence.
✎Note:
1. Number of occupied points of the device
1) When the extended function is OFF
－ D occupies the number of characters ÷ 2 points (if not evenly divisible, the decimal point is rounded up.)
2) When the extended function is ON
-The number of points occupied by D is the same as the number occupied by characters.
2. When using etc.
The extended function flag SM161 is a flag bit common to other instructions.
When using the above instructions and ASC instructions, please note that the SM161 ON or OFF program is written before the ASC
instruction so as not to affect it.
Error code
Error code Content

4085H The output result of reading application instruction(s) exceeds the device range
4086H (D) The output result exceeds the device range in writing application instructions

Example
1. Procedure

625 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
When X20 = ON, the assignment of D200 to D203:

If the special register SM161 is set to ON, each ASCII character occupies a 16-bit variable after conversion, as shown in the figure
below, the high byte of each variable is filled with 0 (hexadecimal):
D• S
High 8 bits Low 8 bits String
00 41 A

+1 00 42 B

+2 00 43 C

+3 00 44 D

+4 00 45 E

+5 00 46 F

+6 00 47 G

+7 00 48 H

626 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

13 step ladder diagram instruction

13.1 STL/RET step ladder diagram instruction
STL: step ladder diagram starts
RET: step ladder diagram ends

Content, range and data type

Parameter Content Range Data type Data type(Label)
(d) State assigns the number of destination step relay 0 to 4,095 bit ANY_BOOL
Device used
Offset Pulse
Device
Instruction Parameter modification expansion
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
STL Parameter 1 ●
Features
① Programs that use step ladder diagram are based on the mechanical actions, and assign step relay S according to each process.
It acts as a loop connected in the state contact (STL contact), and carries on the sequential control programming of input condition
and output control.
② In step ladder diagram, consider step relay S as a control process and carries on the sequential control programming of input
condition and output control. As the process operates, the previous process would be not executed. Therefore, the mechanical
control could be performed by the simple sequential control of each process.
③ For a series of step ladder diagram, start with the initialization state, and program in the order of the states to be transferred.

627 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Step ladder diagram exhibits relay ladder program, you could use state to program according to the flow of mechanical control. It
could be thought of that state and relay are the same, which consist of drive coil and contact(STL contact).
Coil drives use SET instruction and OUT instruction, and contacts use STL instruction.
The internal loop actions connect to the status are as follows.
Internal loop action
ON execution If the status is ON, the loop that connected to this outputs actions by STL.
If the condition set in the transition of the state (transition condition) is satisfied, the next state is set to ON,
and the state previous ON is turned OFF(reset). (Transition action) During state transition, only one operation
cycle will both states be ON at the same time.
OFF execution After the transition, the state before the transition is turned OFF(reset) in the next operation cycle. Regardless
(one operation cycle) of the state of the contact before the drive command, the drive instruction connected to the bus in the OFF
state is only executed when it is OFF for one operation cycle (the same action as when the contact is OFF).
However, when the transition state is used by the contact instruction, the contact image is turned OFF and
executed after the transition condition is satisfied.
After the next operation cycle that after OFF is executed, the action of OFF execution of the instruction is not
No execution
performed. (jump state)
The sequence chart of the state (internal loop)execution state is as below.

Each state has three functions of drive processing on the load, specifying the transition target, and specifying its transition conditions.
As shown below, execute the drive processing on the load first, and then execute the sequential execution of the transfer processing.
In the state without load, no drive processing is required

Step ladder programs execute the following actions

628 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

1 It is recommended that contacts be programmed in the output drive.

2 The output coil could be programmed repeatedly in different states.
3 The OUT and SET instructions of stepping relay automatically reset the state before the transfer.
4 It is not recommended to use the same stepping relay (S) number repeatedly
5 Pointers(P) cannot be configured immediately after STL instruction. If configured, a program error occurs.
Key points
The action state of stepping relay set to be saved after power-off is backed up by the non-volatile memory. These stepping relays are
used when a power failure occurs in the middle of the mechanical operation, and when the power is turned on again and you want
to continue the operation from there. Besides, since these stepping relays keep operating even from RUN to STOP, when RUN is
executed again, the operation will be restarted from the state before STOP.
1 STL instruction can not be used in Interrupt routine, event routine and subroutine.
2 When using STK instruction in interrupt routine, please do not use SET instruction or the driving state S of the OUT
instruction.
3 It is not that the use of jump instructions (CJ/CJP) in the state is prohibited. It is recommended to not use it as much as
possible because it will cause complex actions.

629 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

✎Note:The pointer P could be set to the first instruction in STL without contacts, so the first instruction is regarded as irrelevant to
the STL action below.
Device used
Device Name Content
SM240 Transfer prohibited If SM240 is set ON, all the transfers between the states are prohibited.
SM246 STL operation If SM247 and stepping relay ( device S ) are both ON, SM246 will be ON automatically.
If SM247 is set to ON, the number of stepping relay in operating in stepping relay
SM247 STL valid monitoring
would be stored in SD240 to SD247 from least to most.
The number of the stepping relay to be ON is stored in SD240 to SD247 (up to 8)from
SD240 to SD247 ON stepping relay number
least to most.
✎Note:
Stepping relay(S) without setting lock is cleared by turning the power ON to OFF and RUN to STOP. If the power is turned ON to OFF
and RUN to STOP while the status is valid, the process cannot be restarted from the middle.
Error code
No errors.
Program

Open M2, state relay S1is set to ON, the programs in STL S1
are executed normally.

Open M4, if S1 is ON, the state S11/S12 can be selected for

transition according to the OFF/ON of M7, and the state S1
can be reset.

When M7 is OFF, transfer to S11

When M7 is ON, transfer to S12

630 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
13.2 IST/Initialization state
In the program that using stepping ladder diagram, the initialization state and special relays are automatically controlled.

Stepping ladder diagram program

Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type(label)
ANYBIT_ARRAY
(s) Start bit device number of the run mode switch -- bit
(element number: 8)
The minimum state number of the useful state in
(d1) -- bit ANY_BOOL
automatic mode ((d1)<(d2))
The maximum state number of the useful state in
(d2) -- bit ANY_BOOL
automatic mode ((d1)<(d2))
EN Execution condition -- bit BOOL
ENO Execution result -- bit BOOL
Device used
Offset Pulse
Device
Instruction Parameter modification expansion
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
(s) ●● ● ● ●
IST (d1) ●
(d2) ●
Only device S could be used.
Features
(1) IST
1) Specify the start input of run mode in (s).
2) The switch for selecting the run mode occupies 8 points from the start bit device.
3) The device specified by the switch for selecting the run mode.The switch functions in the following table and X20 are
separately assigned to the devices specified by the switch for selecting the run mode. Under the circumstances, to prevent X20
to X24 from being ON at the same time, a rotary switch must be used. Switches that are not in use need no wiring. However,
these switches cannot be used for other purposes because they are occupied by IST instructions,
Device
Source
number Switch function Content
address
(example)
(s) X20 Individual run Uses each button to turn the each load on or off.
(s)+1 X21 Origin reset Press the origin reset button to automatically return the machine to the origin.
(s)+2 X22 Stepping Each time the start button is pressed, it advances one process.
If the start button is pressed at the origin, it will stop at the origin after executing
one cycle of automatic operation.
(s)+3 X23 Cycle run once If the stop button is pressed in the middle, the process will be stopped, and if the
start button is pressed again, the operation will continue from there, and then
automatically stop at the origin.

631 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
If the start button is pressed at the origin position, continuous repeated run starts. If
(s)+4 X24 continuous run
the stop button is pressed, the run will stop after reaching the origin.
(s)+5 X25 Start origin reset Uses each button to turn the each load on or off.
(s)+6 X26 Start automatically Start stepping, cycle run once, continuous run
(s)+7 X27 Stop Stop run
4) he minimum state number of the useful state in (d1).(automatic mode)
5) The maximum state number of the useful state in (d2).(automatic mode)
6) When the instructions are When the instruction input is ON, the following devices are automatically switched and controlled. It
does not change when the instruction input is OFF.
Device number Content ON/OFF condition
Always ON during individual run
ON condition Always ON Except that when the start button is pressed during stepping
Transfer
SM240 When the stop button is pressed during origin reset and cycle run once.
prohibited
When the start button is pressed during stepping.
OFF condition
After the stop button is pressed during origin reset and cycle run once.
When the start button is pressed during origin reset and cycle run once.
ON condition
After the start button is pressed during continuous run
SM241 Start transfer When it is from RUN to STOP
OFF condition Always ON during individual run and origin reset
After the stop button is pressed during continuous run
ON condition Only at the moment when the start button is pressed
SM242 Start pulse
OFF condition Except when it is ON
ON condition When the origin reset is completed (user program)
Origin reset
SM243 When it is from RUN to STOP
completion OFF condition
When the origin reset is not completed
ON condition When the origin condition is satisfied (user program)
SM244 Origin condition When it is from RUN to STOP
OFF condition
When origin reset is not completed

All the output ON condition When not executing all the output resets (user program)
SM245
reset prohibited OFF condition When executing all the output resets (user program)
ON condition When STL monitoring valid is ON and any of the stepping relay(device S) is ON
SM246 STL state ON When STL monitoring valid is OFF, or when STL monitoring valid is ON and all the
OFF condition
stepping relays(device S) are ON

STL monitoring ON condition When issuing IST instruction

SM247
valid OFF condition When stepping ladder diagram ends(user program)

Device number Content ON/OFF condition

ON condition When it is individual mode

S0 Initialization state of individual run
OFF condition Except the individual mode
ON condition When it is origin reset mode
S1 Initialization state of origin state
OFF condition Except the origin reset mode

632 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
ON condition When it is automatic run mode
S2 Initialization state of automatic run
OFF condition Except the automatic run mode
7) Do not program the following states as normal states.

Device number Content ON/OFF condition

Occupied as initialization state When the step relay (S device) is selected as the initialization
ON condition
state.
✎S0 to S2 are used for individual
S0 to S9
run, origin reset and automatic run.
OFF condition When the step relay (S device) is not selected
✎S3 to S9 could be used freely.
ON condition When the step relay (S device) is selected as the origin reset.
S10 to S19 Occupied as origin reset
OFF condition When the step relay (S device) is not selected

8) When origin reset completion(SM243) is not ON, if switching between individual run(X20), origin reset(X21) and automatic
run(X22,X23,X24), then all the output would be OFF. Automatic operation could be restarted after origin reset completion.
✎Note:
1 Mode selection switches don’t need to be all used. Unused switches should be set to empty (cannot be used for other
purposes). It is necessary to write the program of the IST instruction before a series of STL loops such as states S0 to S2.
2 S10 to S19 should be used for the state of the origin reset operation. In the final state of the origin reset operation,
self-reset should be performed after SM243 is set
3 Only one IST instruction can be written in the program.
(2) IST instruction equivalent loop
1) The details of the special relay (SM) and initialization state (S0 to S9) that are automatically controlled by the IST instruction are
shown in the following equivalent circuit. (Please read it as a reference.) This equivalent circuit could not be
programmed.

2) If the mode is switched between each, origin reset and automatic, when the machine is outside the origin position, all the
outputs (output (Y) not driven by state and output (Y) driven by status by OUT and SET instructions) and the old state are reset
633 WECON technology Co., Ltd.
 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
in batches. The SM245 drive does not reset all outputs

(3) The example of importing IST instruction(workpiece transfer equipment)

Run mode

Run mode Operations

Individual run Uses each button to turn the each load on or off.
Manual
Origin reset Press the origin reset button to automatically return the machine to the origin.

Stepping Each time the start button is pressed, it advances one process.
If the start button is pressed at the origin, it will stop at the origin after executing one cycle of automatic
operation.
Cycle once
Automatic If the stop button is pressed in the middle, the process will be stopped, and if the start button is pressed
again, the operation will continue from there, and then automatically stop at the origin.
If the start button is pressed at the origin position, continuous repeated run starts. If the stop button is
Continuous run
pressed, the run will stop after reaching the origin.

634 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Transfer equipment

1) To use IST instructions, mode inputs need to be assigned consecutive number inputs as shown below. When the numbers are
not consecutive or a part of the mode is omitted, use the auxiliary relay to change the arrangement as shown in the figure
below, and use it as the start input for mode specification.
Input device X20 X21 X22 X23 X24 X25 X26 X27
Assignment Individual run Origin reset Stepping Cycle run once Continuous run Origin reset start Automatic start Stop

635 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
In this example, M0 is used as the start input for mode specification.

2) The special relay (SM) used in the IST instruction has different classifications. One is that the instruction itself is automatically
controlled according to the situation and the other needs to be controlled by the program according to the preparation for
operation and the purpose of control.
Special relay Content Remark
Once the special relay is in operation, all the state transfers are prohibited.
Individual: SM240 continues operating.
Origin reset and cycle once: After pressing the stop button, the operation is held until the
start button is pressed.
SM240
Stepping: SM240 continues operating, but only when the start button is pressed, it does
(Transfer prohibited)
not operate and the transfer is executed.
When switching STOP to RUN, the operation of programmable controller is held, and
unlocked when the start button is pressed. Even when the transfer state is prohibited, the
IST
output in the state continues the origin operation.
instructions
An auxiliary relay as a transition condition from the initialization state S2 to the next state.
execute
Individual and origin reset: No operation.
SM241 automatic
Stepping and cycle once: Only operates when the start button is pressed.
(Start transfer) control
Continuous: The operation is held when the start button is pressed, and unlocked after
pressing the stop button.
SM242(Start pulse) Only operates at the moment of pressing the start button.
After using the IST instruction, set SM247 to ON.When SM247 turns ON, the STL
monitoring becomes valid, and the status numbers (S0 to S899) in operation are stored in
SM247
the special registers SD240 to SD247 in ascending order.
(STL monitoring valid)
Therefore, a maximum of eight operation states number can be monitored
Besides, if any of there states is in operation, special relay SM246 also operates.
SM243 In origin reset mode, when the machine returns to the origin, operates the special relay
(Origin reset completion) (SM) with the user program.
Driven by
SM244 The special relay should be driven after detecting the origin condition of the machine. It is
sequential
(Origin condition) valid signal in all the modes.
control
SM245 If switching between individual run, origin reset and automatic mode, when the machine
program
(All the output reset is not in the origin, reset all the outputs and operation states. But if SM245 is driven first,
prohibited) then only the operation state is reset.
Program
3) When the machine is running, it could switch freely in "Automatic" mode (stepping/cycle once/continuous). In this case, to be
safe, the switched mode becomes effective only after all outputs are reset once.(When SM245 (all the output reset prohibited)
is set to ON, it will not be reset)

636 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

4) No programming is required if there is no individual run mode.

5) No programming is required if there is no origin reset mode. But before automatic run, You need to reset the origin first to
complete the SM243 set once

637 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
6) Automatic run (stepping/cycle once/continuous)

Error code
Error code Content

When the device number specified by (d1) and (d2) is in the following case. (d1)>(d2)
4085H
When the device specified in (s) couldn’t reserve eight points.

638 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

14 Ethernet communication
14.1 Ethernet overview
IP address
IP address consists of network address and host address, and distinguished by subnet mask. If programming device (such as PC) use
network card to connect to LAN, the programming device and PLC must be in the same subnet. You can specify the subnet of a device
by combining an IP address with a subnet mask.
The network address could be calculated by performing logic and operation between IP address and subnet mask. If the addresses
are in the same network, it means that communication is possible.
Network device 1 Network device 2 Network
Number
IP Subnet mask Network address IP Subnet mask Network address connection

1 192.168.0.1 255.255.255.0 192.168.0.0 192.168.0.10 255.255.255.0 192.168.0.0 Yes

2 192.168.0.1 255.255.255.0 192.168.0.0 192.168.1.10 255.255.255.0 192.168.1.0 No
3 192.168.0.1 255.255.255.1 192.168.0.1 192.168.0.10 255.255.255.1 192.168.0.0 No

Set PC network address

(1) Click “Control panel”→”Network and Internet”→”Network and sharing center”.

(2) Click “Ethernet”→”Properties”→”Internet protocol version 4”.

(3) Set the IP address and subnet mask on the same network address as the PLC. The IP address that has been used in LAN could
not be set. If the IP of PLC is 192.168.8.8, and the subnet mask is 255.255.255.0. The IP address as shown below could be set to
connect PC to PLC.

639 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

Test the network connection status

Test the connection status between PC and PLC by ping command.
(1) Press “WIN” and “R” keys, and input “cmd”.

(2) If the IP address of PLC is 192.168.8.8.

1) Input “ping 192.168.8.8 ”, and enter. If it display ”100% loss”, it means that PLC could be connected.

640 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

2) Input “ping 192.168.8.8 ”, and enter. If it display ”0% loss”, it means that it could be connected to PLC.

3) The command “ping network device IP” could only be use four times. To ping network devices continuously, run “ping network
device ip-t” command, it is shown as below.

641 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
PLC Editor2 connect to PLC with Ethernet
(1) Transfer settings →Ethernet configuration → Input IP address.(✎Note: The address of NIC must be on the same network
segment as that of the PLC.)

(2) Click “Communication test” to comfirm the communication.

(3) After successful connection, PLC is able to operate.

642 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
PLC Editor2 Ethernet search funtion
(1) Transfer settings → NIC comfiguration → Device search. (✎Note: The address of NIC must be on the same network segment as
that of the PLC.)

(1) The search interface is as below. Click search to display the PLC devices in the LAN, and select the corresponding device and
click OK to communicate.

(2) The IP address of one is filled in automatically.

643 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
14.2 Ethernet configuration
Hardware interface
The LX5V is equipped with standard Ethernet ports (1 channel RJ45 port) and supports Modbus TCP communication protocol.
RJ45 specification
Contents Ethernet interfece
10Mbps: 10BASE-T
Transmission speed 100Mbps: 100BASE-TX
10Mbps/100Mbps self-adaptive
Modulation Basband
Topology Starlike
Transmission medium Class 5 or above twisted pairs or shielded twisted pairs with aluminum foil and woven mesh
Transmission distance The distance between nodes: 100m or less
Linking number 8

Total numbers of links supported

When LX5V-N series PLC is powered on, ModbusTCP server monitor is automatically enabled by default. 2 to 8 ModbusTCP clients
are supported, and the port number is 502. (PLC host computer upload and download, monitor and HMI communication protocol are
supported by the ModbusTCP server.)

The number of configurable links is 6. The free configurations of TCP server free protocol, TCP client free protocol, ModbusTCP server
and ModbusTCP client are supported.
Communicaition protocol Maximum links supported
ModbusTCP server 8
ModbusTCP client 6
Free TCP server 6
Free TCP client 6

IP address settings
(1) Set by programming software.
Project manager → Parameter → PLC parameters → Ethernet configuration. Download selected parameters through PLC after
modification. The download takes effect after STOP->RUN is complete.
✎Note: The maximum link supported of ModbusTCP servers is used to set the maximum number of external ModbusTCP clients that
could connect to PLC simultaneously. The range is from 2 to 8.

644 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

(2) Set by special device.

Write IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway in SD2680 to SD2691.
SM2680 is set to ON, static IP function is enable. (✎Note: DHCP function is not supported by LX5V currently.)
SM2683 is set to ON, IP identification could be modified.
New IP address takes effect when STOP->RUN or after power-on again.

SM number Name Contents R/W SD number Name

ON: Static set

Static set IP OFF: Automatically configurate IP address by The 1st byte of IP
SM2680 R/W SD2680
switch router DHCP, and could not be modify IP. When address
STOP->RUN takes effect.
Display current Refresh current IP gateway subnet mask after
The 2nd byte of
SM2681 network ON. R/W SD2681
IP address
information Turn OFF after the fresh is complete.
Display current Refresh current MAC after ON. The 3rd byte of IP
SM2682 R/W SD2682
MAC information Turn OFF after the fresh is complete. address
ON: Modifiable
The modification
OFF: Unmodifiable The 4th byte of IP
SM2683 flag of IP, subnet R/W SD2683
(After setting to ON, modify when stop->run, and address
mask and gateway
automatically turn OFF after the modification)
The 1st byte of
SM2684 SD2684
subnet mask
The 2nd byte of
SM2685 SD2685
subnet mask
The 3rd byte of
SM2686 SD2686
subnet mask
The 4th byte of
SM2687 SD2687
subnet mask

645 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
The 1st byte of
SM2688 SD2688
default gateway
The 2nd byte of
SM2689 SD2689
default gateway
The 3rd byte of
SM2690 SD2690
default gateway
The 4th byte of
SM2691 SD2691
default gateway

TCP protocol
TCP protocol, short for Transport Control Protocol, is Is a connection-oriented and reliable transport layer protocol.
Connection-oriented means that a normal TCP transmission need to be completed by establishing a specific virtual circuit connection
between TCP client and TCP server. To transfer data over TCP, a connection must be established between hosts at both ends.

UDP protocol
UDP protocol, short for User Datagram Protocol, is a connectionless transport layer protocol. There is no guarantee of data order, a
risk of data loss. It provides a simple and unreliable information transfer service for transactions and is Mainly used in data
broadcasting.

Socket
When the application layer communicates data over the transport layer, TCP encounters the problem of providing concurrent
services to multiple application processes at the same time. Multiple TCP connections or multiple application processes may require
data to be transmitted over the same TCP protocol port. To distinguish between different application processes and connections,
many computer operating systems provide interfaces called sockets for applications to interact with the TCP/IP protocol.
To generate a socket, there are three main parameters: the IP address of the destination of the communication, the transport layer
protocol used (TCP or UDP) used, and the port number used. By combining these three parameters and binding to a socket, the
application layer and the transport layer can distinguish communication from different application processes or network connections
through the socket interface, realizing concurrent services for data transmission.

Establish an Ethernet link by socket

At least one pair of sockets is required to establish a socket link.
For TCP, the two sockets, one running on the TCP client and the other running on the TCP server. The connection process between
sockets is divided into three steps: server monitor, client request, connection confirmation, also known as the three-way handshake.
Server monitor: After the server socket is enabled, it does not locate the specific client socket, but is in a state of waiting for the
connection, monitoring the network status in real time, and waiting for the client's connection request.
Client request: Refers to a connection request made by a client-side socket, and the target of the connection is the server-side socket.
To do this, the client-side socket must first describe the socket of the server to which it is connecting, indicate the address and port
number of the server-side socket, and then make a connection request to the server-side socket
Connection confirmation: Refers to when the server-side socket listens to or receives a connection request from the client socket, it
responds to the client socket request, establishes a new thread, sends the description of the server-side socket to the client. Once
the client confirms this description, the connection is established. The server-side socket continues to listen and continues to receive
connection requests from other client-side sockets.

646 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

In order to simplify the complexity of ladder programming, sockets have been partially simplified:
For TCP clients, merge socket() and connect() into SOCOOPEN instructions. After this function is enabled, automatically connect to
the TCP server.
For TCP server, merge socket(), bind(), listen(), and accept() into SOCOOPEN instructions. After this function is enabled, automatically
listen to server connection. If the server is successfully connected, the corresponding position is marked and the IP address and port
information of the server are displayed.
For UDP, there is no concept of client and server. Creating a UDP socket only requires local address information and remote address
information, without connection operations. Communication could be made when the address information of the local socket and
the remote socket could be matched, that is, the remote address of the local socket is the same as the local address of the remote
socket, and the local address of the local socket is the same as the remote address of the remote socket. For UDP connections, the
connection could be established immediately by calling the SOCOPEN instruction.

LX5V-N socket configuration instructions

LX5V socket could be configured in Project manager → Extended function → Ethernet, right click to create socket configuration, as
shown below.

Socket ID: The number of the socket ranges from K0 to K5, and a total of six are supported. The socket is used to specify links, and
each ID could be used for one link and could not be defined repeatedly.
Communication protocol: TCP protocol and UDP protocol are supported.

647 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Operating mode: For TCP, client and server could be selected. For UDP, this is meaningless.
Local port:
For TCP client mode, the local port would be automatically allocated by PLC without setting.
For TCP server mode, the local port ranges from 1 to 65535. Port 502 is used for internal ModbusTCP and can not be set to port 502.
For UDP mode, the local port ranges from 1 to 65535. Port 1092 is used for scanning protocol of Wecon and can not be set to port
1092.
Destination IP: It is valid in TCP client mode or UDP mode, and specify the IP of opposite end device to be linked.
Destination port: It is valid in TCP client mode or UDP mode, and specify the port number of opposite end device to be linked.
Receive timeout period(10ms): After the PLC sends the data, If the response of the opposite end device exceeds the timeout period,
it is considered that the network has an abnormality and sets the wrong flag.
TCP keep-alive mechanism: When using the TCP protocol for communication, if the communication line is idle in most cases, there is
only a small amount of data to be sent and received, but it is necessary to keep the link open continuously, or disconnect in time in
the case of a drop, crash or forced end of the process at the other end of the communication, the keep-alive mechanism can be used
to communicate.
When the keep-alive function is turned on, after the two parties stop communicating for 5 seconds, the TCP connection that opens
the keep-alive function will send a survival confirmation message to the other party. If the other party responds, it means that the
other party is alive and online. The connection is normal, and the survival confirmation message is sent again after 5 seconds to
continue to confirm. If the other party does not confirm the survival, it means that the other party has a problem, the end that opens
the keep-alive will continue to send it a survival confirmation message after 5 seconds. When the opposite end does not respond for
9 consecutive times, it means that the opposite end communication is abnormal, and the end that opens the keep-alive will actively
disconnect.

648 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
14.3 Ethernet instruction
SOCOPEN/Create a socket link
Create socket link specified by (s), and update the data information of this socket link to (d1) and the status information to (d2).
-[SOCOPEN (s) (d1) (d2)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s) Socket ID 0 to 5 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
The start device that stores the data information of socket
(d1) - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY_ELEMENTARY
links
The start device that stores the status information of
(d2) - Bit ANY_BOOL
socket links
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●
SOCOPEN Parameter 2 ●●●● ●
Parameter 3 ● ● ● ● ●
Features
✎Create the socket link specified in (s) and update the link information in (d1) and (d2).
✎When the instruction is turned on, the devices specified in (d1) and (d2) will be used in other Ethernet instructions using the same
socket ID. (SOCSEND, SOCRECV, SOCCLOSE, SOCMTCP)
✎(d1) Specifies the following information (a total of 14 word devices):
Device Function
（d1） Local port number
（d1+1） The 1st segment of the destination IP
（d1+2） The 2nd segment of the destination IP
（d1+3） The 3rd segment of the destination IP
（d1+4） The 4th segment of the destination IP
（d1+5） Destination port number
（d1+6） Receive timeout period(10ms)
（d1+7） Actual receiving length (byte)
（d1+8） Current link error code
（d1+9） Numbers of communication errors high bit
（d1+10） Numbers of communication errors low bit
（d1+11） Reserved
（d1+12） Reserved
（d1+13） Reserved
✎(d2) Specifies the following information (a total of 14 bit devices):
Device ON status OFF status
（d2） Connecting The connection is not turned on
（d2+1） Connection completed Connecting or not connected
（d2+2） Sending data(used by SOCSEND instruction) Data is not sent or data sending is complete
（d2+3） Data sending completed(used by SOCSEND instruction) The instruction is not started or being sent.
649 WECON technology Co., Ltd.
 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
（d2+4） Receiving data(used by SOCRECV instruction) No data or receiving is completed
（d2+5） Data receiving completed(used by SOCRECV instruction) The instruction is not started or received
（d2+6） Connection is closing The instruction is not started or is receiving
（d2+7） Connection close completed The instruction is not started or close is complete
（d2+8） Communication completed(used by SOCMTCP instruction) In communication
（d2+9） Connection error No error in connection
（d2+10） Reserved Reserved
（d2+11） Reserved Reserved
（d2+12） Reserved Reserved
（d2+13） Reserved Reserved
Features
Local port number:
Establish a TCP client: PLC automatically allocates the local communication port, ranging from 49152 to 65535. The port number is
automatically incremented by 1 each time it is turned on.
Establish a TCP server: specified by Ethernet socket configuration of the host computer.
Establish a UDP connection: specified by Ethernet socket configuration of the host computer.
Destination IP:
Establish a TCP client: The destination address is specified by Ethernet socket configuration of the host computer.
Establish a TCP server: After the remote client connection is successful, display the IP address of the remote connection.
Establish a UDP connection: The destination address is specified by Ethernet socket configuration of the host computer.
Destination port number:
Establish a TCP client: The destination port number is specified by Ethernet socket configuration of the host computer.
Establish a TCP server: After the remote client connection is successful, display the port number of the remote connection.
Establish a UDP connection: The destination port number is specified by Ethernet socket configuration of the host computer.
Receive timeout period(10ms): specified by Ethernet socket configuration of the host computer.
Actual receiving length: This parameter is valid only when the SOCRECV instruction is used. It indicates the number of bytes received
after the instruction is enabled.
Current link error code: Display the current error information. For details, Refer to Ethernet error code List.
Numbers of communication errors: total number of communication errors after successful connection (double word).
Error codes
Error code Content
4085H The device specified in application instruction (d1) and (d2) exceeds the corresponding device range.
5080H The specified socket is already connected and cannot be opened again.

5082H The socket used by parameter 1 exceeds the range of 0 to 5.

5083H Failed to establish TCP server.

5084H Failed to create links.

5086H The specified (d) is not configured socket or the socket is not enabled.

5089H 502 port could not be used on the TCP server because the 502 port is enabled by default.

650 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
SOCCLOSE/Close socket link
Close socket link specified by (s).
-[SOCCLOSE (s)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s) Socket ID 0 to 5 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
SOCCLOSE Parameter 1 ●●
Features
✎Close the socket link specified in (s).
✎When the TCP server is closed, the reset request will be sent to the remote client. At the moment, in bit device specified by
SOCOPEN, the status of connection closure will be set. The socket is not actually released until the connection closure state is set and
the next connection is opened
✎If the socket specified by (s) is not connected to the remote end, it cannot be closed and the instruction error occurs.
Error codes
Error code Content
5081H The socket specified by is not connected, and could not be closed
5082H The data specified in (s) exceeds the range of 0 to 5

651 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
SOCSEND/Ethernet free-form communication sending
Send the data in (s2) to the socket link specified by (s1) at the length specified by (S3).
-[SOCSEND (s1) (s2) (s3)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s1) Socket ID 0 to 5 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(s2) The start device that send the data - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY_ELEMENTARY
(s3) Sent length 1 to 256 Bit ANY16
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●
SOCSEND Parameter 2 ●●●● ●
Parameter 3 ●●●● ● ●●
Features
✎Send the data specified in (s2) from the socket connected to (s1), and the length is (s3).
✎According to the devices specified by SOCOPEN, the information such as the sending status and the total sending length could be
queried. For details, refer to the SOCOPEN instruction.
✎It must be used with the SOCOPEN instruction, and data can only be sent after a full link has been established.
Error codes
Error code Content
4084H The data in (s3) exceeds the specified range.
5081H The socket specified by is not connected, and could not be sent.
5082H The data specified in (s) exceeds the range of 0 to 5.

652 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
SOCRECV/Ethernet free-form communication reveiving
Receive the data from the socket link in (s1) and store in the start device of (s2) at the length of (S3).
-[SOCRECV (s1) (S2) (S3)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s1) Socket ID 0 to 5 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(s2) The start device that receive the data - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY_ELEMENTARY
(s3) Receive length 1 to 256 Bit ANY16
Device used
Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●
SOCRECV Parameter 2 ●●●● ●
Parameter 3 ●●●● ● ●●
Features
✎Receive the data from the socket link in (s1) and store in the start device of (s2) at the length of (S3).
✎According to the devices specified by SOCOPEN, the information such as the sending status and the total sending length could be
queried. For details, refer to the SOCOPEN instruction.
✎It must be used with the SOCOPEN instrcution, and data can only be sent after a full link has been established.
✎When used with SOCSEND, it could not be opened at the same time.
Error codes
Error code Content
4084H The data in (s3) exceeds the specified range.
5081H The socket specified by is not connected, and could not be sent.
5082H The data specified in (s) exceeds the range of 0 to 5.
5087H Receiving data timeout

653 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
SOCMTCP/Ethernet ModbusTCP communication
Ethernet ModbusTCP client communication instruction
-[SOCMTCP (s1) (s2) (s3) (s4) (s5)]
Content, range and data type
Parameter Content Range Data type Data type (label)
(s1) Socket ID 0 to 5 Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(s2) High byte is station number, low byte is function code - Signed BIN 16 bit ANY_ELEMENTARY
(s3) The Modbus address that need communication 1 to 256 Unsigned BIN 16 bit ANY16
(s4) Sent length or received length Signed BIN 16 bit ANY16
(s5) Sent or received start device Signed BIN 16 bit ANY_ELEMENTARY
Device used

Offset Pulse
Devices
Instruction Parameter modification extension
X Y M S SM T(bit) C(bit) LC(bit) HSC(bit) D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R SD LC HSC K H E [D] XXP
Parameter 1 ●●
Parameter 2 ●●●● ● ●●
SOCMTCP Parameter 3 ●●●● ● ●●
Parameter 4 ●●●● ● ●●
Parameter 5 ●●●● ●
Features
✎(s1) specify the socket link. The other parameters are compatible with RS instruction Modbus master protocol.
✎(s2) high byte is station number. For ModbusTCP, the station number could be set at will.
✎(s2) low byte is function code. For details, refer to 10.7.2 Modbus protocol description.
✎(s3) Modbus communication address, ModbusTCP server address that needs to be read or written.
✎(s4): the length read or written by Modbus.
✎(s5): the start device that Modbus receive read data or or store written data.
✎It must be used with the SOCOPEN instruction, and data can only be sent after a full link has been established.
✎This instruction can only be used when a TCP client socket link is established.
✎The communication completion information and the number of received and transmitted could be viewed in the soft devices
specified in the SOCOPEN instruction.
Error codes
Error code Content
5081H The socket specified by is not connected, and could not communicate.
5082H The data specified in (s1) exceeds the range of 0 to 5.
5086H The socket specified by (s1) is not configured in the host computer or enabled.
5088H The SOCMTCP instruction only supports TCP client mode.

654 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
14.4 Ethernet applications
Data exchange between two PLCs through ModbusTCP

Parameters PLC No.1 PLC No.2

Port number Free internal distribution 502
IP address 192.168.8.10 192.168.8.8
Protocol type ModbusTCP client ModbusTCP server
The socket configuration of PLC No.1

Ladder diagram logic: Automatically connect socket 0 after power on 1s. Read the 0 address length 20 of PLC No.2 to D100 to D119
after the link is successful, and set the value of D100 to D119 to address 100 of PLC No.2 after the communication is successful.
Close the link when communicate successfully again, and wait 1s to re-connect after closing successfully. Repeat the actions above.
The ladder diagram of PLC No.1

As a ModbusTCP server, PLC No. 2 does not need to write instructions. (Open two links by default, and could be modified in [PLC
parameters]→[Ethernet settings]. A maximum of eight links are supported.)

655 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Data exchange between two PLCs through Free TCP

Parameters PLC No.1 PLC No.2

Port number Free internal distribution 520
IP address 192.168.8.10 192.168.8.8
Protocol type Free TCP client Free TCP server
The IP setting of PLC No.1
[Project manager]→[Parameter]→[PLC parameter]→[Ethernet settings]

The socket comfiguration of PLC No.1

[Project manager]→[Extended function]→[Ethernet],and right click to create.

656 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
The ladder diagram of PLC No.1
Ladder diagram logic: Automatically connect socket one after power on. Send character string ”hello word” initiatively to PLC No.2
after connecting successfully.
After receiving "hello word" and verifying it correctly, PLC No.2 would reply “abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz”. If PLC No.1 receives the
reply of PLC No.2, the link closed.

The socket configuration of PLC No.2

[Project manager]→[Parameter]→[PLC parameter]→[Ethernet settings]

The socket comfiguration of PLC No.2

[Project manager]→[Extended function]→[Ethernet],and right click to create.

657 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

The ladder diagram of PLC No.2

Ladder diagram logic: Automatically open the monitor server link of socket one after power on. The data sent by the client is
continuously read after connecting successfully. After receiving "hello word", PLC No.2 would reply “abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz”.

658 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Data exchange between two PLCs through Free UDP

Parameters PLC No.1 PLC No.2

Port number 666 666
IP address 192.168.8.10 192.168.8.8
Protocol type Free UDP Free UDP
The IP setting of PLC No.1

The socket configuration of PLC No.1

The ladder diagram of PLC No.1

Ladder diagram logic: After setting the NIC state bit, establish UDP socket. After the link is established successful, send a data of 20
bytes that start from D100 to 192.168.8.10: 666. After the data is sent successfully, wait for the reply data of the other party. After

659 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
the reply succeeds, continues the process, and so on

The IP address configuration of PLC No.2

The socket configuration of PLC No.2

660 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
The ladder diagram of PLC No.2
Ladder diagram logic: After setting the NIC state bit, establish UDP socket. After the link is established successful, send a data of 20
bytes that start from D300 to 192.168.8.10: 666. After the data is sent successfully, wait for the reply data of the other party, and so
on.

661 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
14.5 List of special device related to Ethernet

Power down
SM number Name Content R/W
retentive
Refresh current IP gateway subnet mask after ON.
SM2681 Display current network information R/W ×
Turn OFF after the fresh is complete.
Refresh current MAC after ON.
SM2682 Display current MAC information R/W ×
Turn OFF after the fresh is complete.
ON: Modifiable
The modification flag of IP, subnet mask and OFF: Unmodifiable
SM2683 R/W √
gateway (After setting to ON, modify when stop->run, and
turn OFF automatically after the modification)
ON: The network is connected
SM2684 The connecting status of NIC OFF: The network is not connected. Please check R √
whether the network cable is connected.
ON: Modifiable
OFF: Unmodifiable
SM2692 MAC address modification flag R/W √
(After setting to ON, modify when stop->run, and
automatically turn OFF after the modification)
ON: open
SM2700 ModbusTCP keep-alive mechanism R/W √
OFF: close (default)
ON: open
OFF: close (default)
SM2701 ModbusTCP server force close R/W ×
(After enabling, automatically changes to OFF After
it is successfully turned OFF)
ON: Ethernet error. Please check SD2710 and
SM2710 Ethernet error flag SD2711 R ×
OFF: No Ethernet error.
ON: The client is connected
SM2740 ModbusTCP server connection status 1 R ×
OFF: The client is not connected
ON: The client is connected
SM2760 ModbusTCP server connection status 2 R ×
OFF: The client is not connected
ON: The client is connected
SM2780 ModbusTCP server connection status 3 R ×
OFF: The client is not connected
ON: The client is connected
SM2800 ModbusTCP server connection status 4 R ×
OFF: The client is not connected
ON: The client is connected
SM2820 ModbusTCP server connection status 5 R ×
OFF: The client is not connected
ON: The client is connected
SM2840 ModbusTCP server connection status 6 R ×
OFF: The client is not connected
SM2860 ModbusTCP server connection status 7 ON: The client is connected R ×

662 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
OFF: The client is not connected
ON: The client is connected
SM2880 ModbusTCP server connection status 8 R ×
OFF: The client is not connected

Power down
SD number Name Content R/W
retentive
SD2680 The 1st byte of IP address R/W √
SD2681 The 2nd byte of IP address R/W √
Local IP address
SD2682 The 3rd byte of IP address R/W √
SD2683 The 4th byte of IP address R/W √
SD2684 The 1st byte of subnet mask R/W √
SD2685 The 2nd byte of subnet mask R/W √
Local subnet mask
SD2686 The 3rd byte of subnet mask R/W √
SD2687 The 4th byte of subnet mask R/W √
SD2688 The 1st byte of default gateway R/W √
SD2689 The 2nd byte of default gateway R/W √
Local default gateway
SD2690 The 3rd byte of default gateway R/W √
SD2691 The 4th byte of default gateway R/W √
SD2692 The 1st byte of MAC R/W √
SD2693 The 2nd byte of MAC R/W √
SD2694 The 3rd byte of MAC R/W √
Local MAC address
SD2695 The 4th byte of MAC R/W √
SD2696 The 5th byte of MAC R/W √
SD2697 The 6th byte of MAC R/W √
0: 100Mbps/Half-duplex
1: 100Mbps/Full-duplex
SD2700 Communication speed display R ×
2: 10Mbps/Half-duplex
3: 10Mbps/Full-duplex
Maximum link number supported by Maximum link number of simultaneous client links
SD2702 R/W ×
ModbusTCP server supported by local ModbusTCP server
SD2703 The number of links of ModbusTCP The number of links of local ModbusTCP R ×
SD2710 Error code Ehternet error code R ×
-1: default ModbusTCP server
SD2711 The socket ID of current error R ×
0 to 5: Custom socket error
SD2720 Input low bit of number of ping request R ×
The number of external input ping command
SD2721 Input high bit of number of ping request R ×
SD2722 Input low bit of number of ping response The number of replies after receiving external R ×
SD2723 Input high bit of number of ping response ping command R ×
SD2724 Input low bit of number of ping request R ×
The number of sending ping command
SD2725 Input high bit of number of ping request R ×
SD2726 Input low bit of number of ping response The number of replies after receiving external R ×

663 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
SD2727 Input high bit of number of ping response ping command sent R ×
SD2728 The number of arp pack sent Count of the number of arp packets sent R ×
SD2729 The number of arp pack received The number of arp pack received R ×
SD2730 The number of IP pack sent The number of IP pack sent R ×
SD2731 The number of IP pack received The number of IP pack received R ×
SD2732 The number of TCP pack sent The number of TCP pack sent R ×
SD2733 The number of TCP pack received The number of TCP pack received R ×
SD2734 The number of UDP pack sent The number of UDP pack sent R ×
SD2735 The number of UDP pack received The number of UDP pack received R ×
SD2740 Connection one Local port number R ×
SD2741 Connection one The 1st byte of IP address R ×
SD2742 Connection one The 2nd byte of IP address R ×
SD2743 Connection one The 3rd byte of IP address R ×
SD2744 Connection one The 4th byte of IP address R ×
The first ModbusTCP client to connect the
SD2745 Connection one Opposite end port number R ×
connection information and error information of
SD2746 Reserved R ×
this PLC.
SD2747 Reserved
SD2748 Connection one Error code R ×
Connection one Error communication times
SD2749 R ×
low word
Connection one Error communication times
SD2750 R ×
high word
SD2760 Connection two Local port number R ×
SD2761 Connection two The 1st byte of IP address R ×
SD2762 Connection two The 2nd byte of IP address R ×
SD2763 Connection two The 3rd byte of IP address R ×
SD2764 Connection two The 4th byte of IP address R ×
SD2765 Connection two Opposite end port number The second ModbusTCP client to connect the R ×
SD2766 Reserved connection information and error information of R ×
SD2767 Reserved this PLC.

SD2768 Connection two Error code R ×

Connection two Error communication times
SD2769 R ×
low word
Connection two Error communication times
SD2770 R ×
high word
SD2780 Connection three Local port number R ×
SD2781 Connection three The 1st byte of IP address The third ModbusTCP client to connect the R ×
SD2782 Connection three The 2nd byte of IP address connection information and error information of R ×
SD2783 Connection three The 3rd byte of IP address this PLC. R ×
SD2784 Connection three The 4th byte of IP address R ×

664 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
SD2785 Connection three Opposite end port number R ×
SD2786 Reserved R ×
SD2787 Reserved
SD2788 Connection three Error code R ×
Connection three Error communication
SD2789 R ×
times low word
Connection three Error communication
SD2780 R ×
times high word
SD2800 Connection four Local port number R ×
SD2801 Connection four The 1st byte of IP address R ×
SD2802 Connection four The 2nd byte of IP address R ×
SD2803 Connection four The 3rd byte of IP address R ×
SD2804 Connection four The 4th byte of IP address R ×
SD2805 Connection four Opposite end port number The forth ModbusTCP client to connect the R ×
SD2806 Reserved connection information and error information of R ×
SD2807 Reserved this PLC.

SD2808 Connection four Error code R ×

Connection four Error communication times
SD2809 R ×
low word
Connection four Error communication times
SD2810 R ×
high word
SD2820 Connection five Local port number R ×
SD2821 Connection five The 1st byte of IP address R ×
SD2822 Connection five The 2nd byte of IP address R ×
SD2823 Connection five The 3rd byte of IP address R ×
SD2824 Connection five The 4th byte of IP address R ×
SD2825 Connection five Opposite end port number The fifth ModbusTCP client to connect the R ×
SD2826 Reserved connection information and error information of R ×
SD2827 Reserved this PLC.

SD2828 Connection five Error code R ×

Connection five Error communication times
SD2829 R ×
low word
Connection five Error communication times
SD2830 R ×
high word
SD2840 Connection six Local port number R ×
SD2841 Connection six The 1st byte of IP address R ×
SD2842 Connection six The 2nd byte of IP address The sixth ModbusTCP client to connect the R ×
SD2843 Connection six The 3rd byte of IP address connection information and error information of R ×
SD2844 Connection six The 4th byte of IP address this PLC. R ×
SD2845 Connection six Opposite end port number R ×
SD2846 Reserved R ×
665 WECON technology Co., Ltd.
 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
SD2847 Reserved
SD2848 Connection six Error code R ×
Connection six Error communication times
SD2849 R ×
low word
Connection six Error communication times
SD2850 R ×
high word
SD2860 Connection seven Local port number R ×
SD2861 Connection seven The 1st byte of IP address R ×
SD2862 Connection seven The 2nd byte of IP address R ×
SD2863 Connection seven The 3rd byte of IP address R ×
SD2864 Connection seven The 4th byte of IP address R ×
Connection seven Opposite end port
SD2865 The seventh ModbusTCP client to connect the R ×
number
connection information and error information of
SD2866 Reserved R ×
this PLC.
SD2867 Reserved
SD2868 Connection seven Error code R ×
Connection seven Error communication
SD2869 R ×
times low word
Connection seven Error communication
SD2870 R ×
times high word
SD2880 Connection eight Local port number R ×
SD2881 Connection eight The 1st byte of IP address R ×
SD2882 Connection eight The 2nd byte of IP address R ×
SD2883 Connection eight The 3rd byte of IP address R ×
SD2884 Connection eight The 4th byte of IP address R ×
SD2885 Connection eight Opposite end port number The eighth ModbusTCP client to connect the R ×
SD2866 Reserved connection information and error information of

SD2867 Reserved this PLC. R ×

SD2888 Connection eight Error code R ×
Connection eight Error communication times
SD2889 R ×
low word
Connection eight Error communication times
SD2890 R ×
high word

666 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
14.6 Ethernet error codes table
Operational error

Error
Description Action Processing scheme Test time
code
Continue When the instruction
3680 Ethernet data reception error Check the environment for interference.
to run is executed
Check whether the network cable is loose.
Check whether the network opposite end is faulty
and cannot send data.
Continue When the instruction
3681 Ethernet data reception timeout Check whether the network opposite end is not
to run is executed
responding in time and the data is too late.
For this reason, try increasing the receive timeout in
the socket configuration.
Check the setting of slave station number.
ModbusTCP station number Continue Check whether there is a problem with the When the instruction
3684
configuration error to run receiving and sending mechanism of the slave is executed
station.

Continue When the instruction

3685 ModbusTCP send buffer overflow Contact the technician for the error
to run is executed

Continue Check whether the function code set is supported When the instruction
3686 ModbusTCP function code error
to run by the PLC. is executed
Continue Check whether the slave station has the address. When the instruction
3687 ModbusTCP address error
to run (Please refer to Modbus abnormality 02) is executed
Continue Check whether the communication length exceeds When the instruction
3688 ModbusTCP length error
to run the range of Modbus. is executed
Check whether the parameter of instruction is
Continue incorrect. When the instruction
3689 ModbusTCP data error
to run Check whether the value set is supported by slave. is executed
(Please refer to Modbus abnormality 03)
Continue Slave returns message: Slave is busy. When the instruction
368A ModbusTCP slave station is busy
to run (Please refer to Modbus abnormality 06) is executed
ModbusTCP slave station does not Continue Check whether the function code is supported by When the instruction
368B
support function code to run slave. (Please refer to Modbus abnormality 01) is executed
Continue Slave returns message: Slave is faulty. When the instruction
368C ModbusTCP slave station fault
to run (Please refer to Modbus abnormality 04) is executed
Continue Slave returns message: Slave confirmation. When the instruction
368D ModbusTCP slave station confirmation
to run (Please refer to Modbus abnormality 05) is executed
RS instruction could not be used when set to slave
ModbusTCP protocol currently does not Continue When the instruction
368E protocol. Please change protocol or close the
support this instruction to run is executed
contact before the RS instruction.

667 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Continue When the instruction
368F Network port sending timeout Contact the technician for the error.
to run is executed
Continue Check whether the other device has been sending When the instruction
3690 Receiving cache overflow
to run data. is executed
Continue Slave returns message: Unavailable gateway. When the instruction
36A0 ModbusTCP unavailable gateway
to run (Please refer to Modbus abnormality 0A) is executed
ModbusTCP No response was received
Slave returns message: The device is not on the
from the target device. Generally it Continue When the instruction
36A1 network.
means that the device is not on the to run is executed
(Please refer to Modbus abnormality 0B)
network.
Continue Check whether the network is congested and data When the instruction
36C0 ModbusTCP transaction identifier error
to run cannot be received. is executed
ModbusTCP The server is full of Continue Check whether SD2702 and SD2703 have too many When the instruction
36C1
available links to run clients to link. is executed
The Ethernet protocol stack is running Continue When the instruction
36C8 Contact the technician for the error.
out of space to run is executed
Continue Check whether the total number of links exceeds When the instruction
36C9 The number of links exceeded the limit
to run the limit. is executed
Continue Use the send completion flag to judge the current When the instruction
36CA The last sending is not complete
to run send is complete before sending the next one. is executed
Use flag bit device to judge whether the connection
Continue When the instruction
36CB TCP abnormal write is normal. If not, not data is sent. For example, after
to run is executed
the closing flag is set,no data is sent.
Continue When the instruction
36CC TCP abnormal output Contact the technician for the error.
to run is executed
Continue Check whether a connection using the same When the instruction
36CD The IP address has been used
to run address information exists. is executed
Continue When the instruction
36CE The server receiving link error Contact the technician for the error.
to run is executed
Continue When the instruction
36CF TCP receiving buffer overflow Contact the technician for the error.
to run is executed
Continue The TCP client may be enabled when the network When the instruction
36D0 TCP connection failed
to run cable is not connected. is executed
Abnormal when closing the link Continue When the instruction
36D1 Contact the technician for the error.
initiative to run is executed
It may be closed because of no response for a long
An abnormal shutdown occurred inside Continue When the instruction
36D2 time. Check whether the opposite end is online,
the protocol stack to run is executed
and whether it could be pinged.
1 Check whether the opposite end initiates an
abnormal shutdown.
Continue When the instruction
36D3 Initiate an RST link on the opposite end 2 As a client, the number of links on the
to run is executed
opposite end is full or the port on the opposite end is
notopened.

668 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
A single-ended shutdown of the Continue When the instruction
36D4 Contact the technician for the error.
protocol stack occurs to run is executed
Continue There are the same IP devices in the LAN, please When the instruction
36D5 There is an IP address conflict
to run change the IP address. is executed
Continue There are the same MAC devices in the LAN, please When the instruction
36D6 There is an MAC address conflict
to run change the MAC address. is executed
Continue When the instruction
36D7 TCP sending buffer overflow Contact the technician for the error.
to run is executed
Continue When the instruction
36D8 UDP abnormal connection IP address and port number may have been used.
to run is executed
Continue When the instruction
36D9 UDP sending buffer overflow Contact the technician for the error.
to run is executed
UDP insufficient memory space when Continue When the instruction
36DA Contact the technician for the error.
sending to run is executed
Continue When the instruction
36DB UDP failed to send Contact the technician for the error.
to run is executed
Continue When the instruction
36DC UDP memory release failure Contact the technician for the error.
to run is executed
Continue The data length that UDP received exceeds the limit When the instruction
36DD UDP receiving buffer overflow
to run value 512. is executed
The data input in the application Continue When the application
4084 Modify application instruction parameter.
instruction exceeds the specified range. to run instruction is executed
The output result in the read application Continue When the application
4085 Modify application instruction parameter.
instruction exceeds the device range. to run instruction is executed
The output result in the read application Continue When the application
4086 Modify application instruction parameter.
instruction exceeds the device range. to run instruction is executed
The Ethernet socket is already linked Continue Check whether the SOCOPEN instruction is When the application
5080
and could not be opened again to run executed repeatedly. instruction is executed
The Ethernet socket is not opened and Continue Check whether the connected bit of SOCOPEN When the application
5081
could not be operated to run instruction (d2) parameter is set. instruction is executed
The socket ID that Ethernet instruction Continue When the application
5082 Modify application instruction parameter.
inputs exceeds the range to run instruction is executed
Continue When the application
5083 Failed to create TCP server Check whether the link is full.
to run instruction is executed
Continue When the application
5084 Failed to create links Check whether the link is full.
to run instruction is executed
The socket ID used by Ethernet
instruction is not configured in the host Continue Check the Ethernet configuration of the host When the application
5086
computer or is not enabled after to run computer. instruction is executed
configuration

669 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
1 Check whether the network connection is
Continue normal. When the application
5087 SOCRECV instruction reception timeout
to run 2 Check whether the network opposite end has instruction is executed
data sent.
The socket specified by SOCMTCP
Continue Check the Ethernet configuration of the host When the application
5088 instruction uses the configuration mode
to run computer. instruction is executed
of non-TCP client
When Ethernet socket configures a TCP Continue The port 502 is occupied by the system. Please When the application
5089
server, specify the local port as 502 to run modify the local port number. instruction is executed
The UDP port 1092 is occupied by the system and
Continue When the application
508A The UDP port is set to 1092 could not be used. Please modify the local port
to run instruction is executed
number.
Continue When the application
5090 Abnormal network cable connection Check whether the network cable is connected
to run instruction is executed

670 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

Appendix
Attachment 1 Special Relay (SM)
Error message

Power-down data
SM label Name Content R/W
preservation
OFF: No error
SM0 Latest error message R ×
ON: There is an error
SM1 Reserved
OFF→ON: Clear wrong request
SM2 Error resolution R/W ×
ON→OFF: Error clearing completed
OFF: Normal
SM3 Battery voltage is too low R ×
ON: Battery voltage is too low
OFF: Normal
SM4 Low battery voltage latch R ×
ON: Battery voltage is too low
SM5 Reserved R ×
OFF: No error
SM6 PLC Hardware Error R ×
ON: There is an error
OFF: No error
SM7 PLC communication error R ×
ON: There is an error
OFF: No error
SM10 Parameters error R ×
ON: There is an error
OFF: No error
SM11 Operation Error R ×
ON: There is an error
OFF: No error
SM14 Operation error latch R ×
ON: There is an error

System message

Power-down data
SM label Name Content R/W
preservation
OFF: turn off (default)
SM30 Low battery warning shield R/W ×
ON: open
OFF→ON: Clear request
SM31 Clear all non-retentive registers R/W ×
ON→OFF: Clear completed
OFF→ON: Clear request
SM32 Clear all holding registers R/W ×
ON→OFF: Clear completed
OFF: turn off (default)
SM33 All device remain unchanged in stop state R/W ×
ON: open
OFF: turn off
SM34 All PLC outputs are OFF R/W ×
ON: open
OFF: BAT light is invalid
SM35 Low battery BAT light status R/W ×
ON: Low battery BAT light is on
SM36 to SM49 Reserved
SM53 to SM99 Reserved

Clock information

Power-down
SM label Name Content R/W
data preservation
SM100 Always ON after RUN R ×
SM101 Always OFF after RUN R ×
SM102 The 1st cycle after RUN is ON R ×

671 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
SM103 The 1st cycle after RUN is OFF R ×
USB power supply mode when ON. In this case, only
SM104 USB power supply R ×
download, clock setting, and password setting are allowed.
SM105 to
Reserved R ×
SM106
SM107 Clock stop and preset Stop clock running and display R/W ×
SM108 Clock reading display stops Clock running at background, display stopped R/W ×
SM109 1min oscillation clock Switch state every 30 seconds R ×
SM110 1ms oscillator clock Switch state every 0.5ms R ×
SM111 10ms oscillation clock Switch state every 5ms R ×
SM112 100ms oscillation clock Switch state every 50ms R ×
SM113 1s oscillation clock Switch state every 500ms R ×
SM114 nms oscillation clock State switch for each (n/2) ms, n is set by SD114 R ×
SM115 ns oscillation clock State switch for each (n/2) s, n is set by SD115 R ×
If the clock number is less than 30S, it is reset; if the clock
SM116 ±30s correction R/W ×
number is greater than 30S, it is carried
SM117 to
Reserved R ×
SM119
Scan information

Power-down data
SM label Name Content R/W
preservation
OFF: not turned on (default)
SM120 Constant scan period R/W ×
ON: open
OFF:STOP
SM121 RUN, STOP control R/W ×
ON: RUN
OFF: not open
SM122 Circuit program Watchdog function switch R/W ×
ON: open (default)

Instruction related

SM Power-down data
Name Content R/W
label preservation
OFF: Operation does not carry
SM151 Carry sign R ×
ON: Operation carries
OFF: Operation does not abdicate
SM152 Abdication sign R ×
ON: Operation abdicates
OFF: Result is not zero
SM153 Zero sign R ×
ON: Result is zero
OFF: Parameter 1 is exchanged with parameter 2
SM160 XCH exchange mode ON: high 8-bit is exchanged with eighth bits for R/W ×
parameter itself.
Bit processing mode (ASC, ASCI, BCC, OFF: 16 bit processing mode
SM161 R/W ×
CCD,CRC) ON: 8 bit processing mode
SORT/SORT2 instruction ascending and OFF: Ascending
SM165 R/W ×
descending order selection ON: Descending
OFF: Number key + Function key
SM167 HKY instruction HEX data processing R/W ×
ON : Hex key
OFF: Perform BIN→BCD conversion
SM168 SMOV instruction hexadecimal processing R/W ×
ON: BIN→BCD conversion is not performed
BINDA output character number switching OFF: Output00H
SM191 R/W ×
signal ON: There is no change
OFF: Forward transmission
SM224 BMOV instruction direction R/W ×
ON: Reverse transmission
OFF: looping execution mode
SM226 RAMP instruction mode R/W ×
ON: Hold after completion

672 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
OFF :8 bytes serial output (fixed to 8 characters)
SM227 PR mode R/W ×
ON : 16-byte serial output (1 to 16 characters)
Partial application instruction execution OFF: Instruction not executed or under executing
SM229 R/W ×
completed flag ON: Instruction execution completed
OFF: Common action
SM240 STL instruction transfer prohibited R/W ×
ON: State transfer is prohibited
OFF: The IST instruction is not performed
SM241 IST instruction transfer start R/W ×
ON: IST instruction transfer started
IST instruction corresponds to start input OFF: Not Started
SM242 R/W ×
pulse output ON: Started
End flag of IST command origin return OFF: Regression through the origin is not finished
SM243 R/W ×
state(User program control) ON: Regression through the origin is finished
IST instruction detects mechanical origin OFF: Non mechanical origin
SM244 R/W ×
movement(User program control) ON: Mechanical origin
STL instruction: disables all output reset
OFF: Full reset output when state is switched
SM245 during mode switch(User program ×
ON: No action when state is switched
control)

OFF: When the STL monitoring effect is OFF, or when

the STL monitoring effect is ON and all stepping relays
SM246 IST instruction: It is ON in the state of STL (S soft component) are OFF ×
ON: When STL monitoring is ON and any one of the
stepping relay (S soft component) is ON.

OFF: Void
ON: The STL monitoring becomes effective, and the
SM247 STL monitoring is valid state numbers in the action (S0 to S4095) are saved in R/W ×
the special auxiliary relays SD240 to SD247 in the
order from small to large.
OFF: Alarm not working
SM248 ANS command signal alarm action R/W ×
ON: Alarm working
OFF: Alarm void
SM249 ANS command signal alarm is effective R/W ×
ON: Alarm effective
SM340 DUTY timing clock output 1 R ×
SM341 DUTY timing clock output 2 R ×
SM342 DUTY timing clock output 3 CLKOUT for DUTY instruction R ×
SM343 DUTY timing clock output 4 R ×
SM344 DUTY timing clock output 5 R ×

673 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Interrupt prohibited

Power-down data
SM label Name Content R/W
preservation

OFF: X0 rising edge interruption is valid

SM352 X0 rising edge interrupt R ×
ON: X0 rising edge interrupt is prohibited

OFF: X0 falling edge interruption is valid

SM353 X0 falling edge interrupt R ×
ON: X0 falling edge interrupt is prohibited
OFF: X1 rising edge interruption is valid
SM354 X1 rising edge interrupt R ×
ON: X1 rising edge interrupt is prohibited
OFF: X1 falling edge interruption is valid
SM355 X1 falling edge interrupt R/W ×
ON: X1 falling edge interrupt is prohibited
OFF: X2 rising edge interruption is valid
SM356 X2 rising edge interrupt R/W ×
ON: X2 rising edge interrupt is prohibited
OFF: X2 falling edge interruption is valid
SM357 X2 falling edge interrupt R/W ×
ON: X2 falling edge interrupt is prohibited
OFF: X3 rising edge interruption is valid
SM358 X3 rising edge interrupt R/W ×
ON: X3 rising edge interrupt is prohibited
OFF: X3 falling edge interruption is valid
SM359 X3 falling edge interrupt R/W ×
ON: X3 falling edge interrupt is prohibited
OFF: X4 rising edge interruption is valid
SM360 X4 rising edge interrupt R/W ×
ON: X4 rising edge interrupt is prohibited
OFF: X4 falling edge interruption is valid
SM361 X4 falling edge interrupt R/W ×
ON: X4 falling edge interrupt is prohibited
OFF: X5 rising edge interruption is valid
SM362 X5 rising edge interrupt R/W ×
ON: X5 rising edge interrupt is prohibited
OFF: X5 falling edge interruption is valid
SM363 X5 falling edge interrupt R/W ×
ON: X5 falling edge interrupt is prohibited
OFF: X6 rising edge interruption is valid
SM364 X6 rising edge interrupt R/W ×
ON: X6 rising edge interrupt is prohibited
OFF: X6 falling edge interruption is valid
SM365 X6 falling edge interrupt R/W ×
ON: X6 falling edge interrupt is prohibited
OFF: X7 rising edge interruption is valid
SM366 X7 rising edge interrupt R/W ×
ON: X7 rising edge interrupt is prohibited
OFF: X7 falling edge interruption is valid
SM367 X7 falling edge interrupt R/W ×
ON: X7 falling edge interrupt is prohibited

High-speed input and output

Power-down data
SM label Name Content R/W
preservation
OFF:Calculated value does not reach the set value
SM400 HSC0 contact status R ×
ON: Calculated value reaches the set value
OFF: forward and reverse
SM401 Moving direction of HSC0 R ×
ON: reverse direction
OFF: count up
SM405 HSC0 counting direction R/W ×
ON: count down
SM406 to SM429 Reserved
OFF:Calculated value does not reach the set value
SM430 HSC1 contact status R ×
ON: Calculated value reaches the set value
OFF: forward direction
SM431 Moving direction of HSC1 R ×
ON: reverse direction
OFF: count up
SM435 HSC1 counting direction R/W ×
ON: count down
SM436 to SM459 Reserved
OFF:Calculated value does not reach the set value
SM460 HSC2 contact status R ×
ON: Calculated value reaches the set value
674 WECON technology Co., Ltd.
 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
OFF: forward direction
SM461 Moving direction of HSC2 R ×
ON: reverse direction
OFF: count up
SM465 HSC2 counting direction R/W ×
ON: count down
SM466 to SM489 Reserved
OFF:Calculated value does not reach the set value
SM490 HSC3 contact status R ×
ON: Calculated value reaches the set value
OFF: forward and reverse
SM491 Moving direction of HSC3 R ×
ON: reverse direction
OFF: count up
SM495 HSC3 counting direction R/W ×
ON: count down
SM496 to SM519 Reserved
OFF:Calculated value does not reach the set value
SM520 HSC4 contact status R ×
ON: Calculated value reaches the set value
OFF: forward and reverse
SM521 Moving direction of HSC4 R ×
ON: reverse direction
OFF: count up
SM525 HSC4 counting direction R/W ×
ON: count down
SM526 to SM549 Reserved
OFF:Calculated value does not reach the set value
SM550 HSC5 contact status R ×
ON: Calculated value reaches the set value
OFF: forward direction
SM551 Moving direction of HSC5 R ×
ON: reverse direction
OFF: count up
SM555 HSC5 counting direction R/W ×
ON: count down
SM556 to SM579 Reserved
OFF:Calculated value does not reach the set value
SM580 HSC6 contact status R ×
ON: Calculated value reaches the set value
OFF: forward direction
SM581 Moving direction of HSC6 R ×
ON: reverse direction
OFF: count up
SM585 HSC6 counting direction R/W ×
ON: count down
SM586 to SM609 Reserved
OFF:Calculated value does not reach the set value
SM610 HSC7 contact status R ×
ON: Calculated value reaches the set value
OFF: forward direction
SM611 Moving direction of HSC7 R ×
ON: reverse direction
OFF: count up
SM615 HSC7 counting direction R/W ×
ON: count down
SM616 to SM639 Reserved

675 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Pulse output (positioning axis)

Power-down data
SM label Name Content R/W
preservation
OFF: Pulse transmission has not started or completed
SM880 CH1 Pulse sending R/W ×
ON: Pulse being sent
OFF: Normal
SM881 CH1 Pulse sending error R/W ×
ON: Error
OFF: Indicates that the pulse is being sent or started
SM882 CH1 Pulse sending stopped R/W ×
ON: Pulse transmission is complete
OFF: Inactive
SM883 CH1 Forward limit R/W ×
ON: After the function is enabled, forward pulse sending stops
OFF: Inactive
SM884 CH1 Reversal limit R/W ×
ON: After the function is enabled, reverse pulse sending stops
OFF: Pulse meter value increases during forward rotation
SM885 CH1 Rotation direction setting R/W ×
ON: Pulse meter value increases when reversed
OFF: Disables the origin regression function. That is, the origin
regression command is disabled and cannot be used.
SM886 CH1 Origin return start ON: Enable the origin regression function, that is, the origin R/W ×
regression command is enabled and can be used normally
(default).
SM887 CH1 Origin regression direction Reserved R/W ×
SM888 Reserved R/W ×
SM889 Reserved R/W ×
SM890 Reserved R/W ×
SM891 Reserved R/W ×
OFF: Receiving external signals when inactive
SM892 CH1 External signal start R/W ×
ON: Receiving external signals when activated
OFF: No external signal is received
SM893 CH1 External signal logic R/W ×
ON: Receives external signals
OFF: Turns OFF the interrupt signal and cannot use the DVIT
SM894 CH1 Interrupt signal start command R/W ×
ON: Turn ON interrupt signal (default)
OFF: No interrupt signal is received
SM895 CH1 Interrupt signal logic R/W ×
ON: Interrupt signal is received
SM896 CH1 External limit signal open CH1 Limit signal on R/W
OFF: 16-bit pulse output mode
SM897 CH1 PWM mode R/W ×
ON: 1000 ratio mode
OFF: No action is performed
SM898 CH1 Immediately stop ON: Stop pulse output immediately without acceleration or R/W ×
deceleration
CH1 scan period is not OFF: Common mode, stop after sending (default)
SM899 R/W ×
processed ON: Stop or slow down immediately
OFF: Use self-contained acceleration and deceleration
SM900 CH1 start speed setting R/W ×
ON: Use set acceleration and deceleration
OFF: Pulse transmission has not started or completed
SM940 CH2 Pulse sending R/W ×
ON: Pulse being sent
OFF: Normal
SM941 CH2 Pulse sending error R/W ×
ON: Error
OFF: Indicates that the pulse is being sent or started
SM942 CH2 Pulse sending stopped R/W ×
ON: Pulse transmission is complete
OFF: Inactive
SM943 CH2 Forward limit R/W ×
ON: After the function is enabled, forward pulse sending stops
OFF: Inactive
SM944 CH2 Reversal limit R/W ×
ON: After the function is enabled, reverse pulse sending stops
OFF: Pulse meter value increases during forward rotation
SM945 CH2 Rotation direction setting R/W ×
ON: Pulse meter value increases when reversed
OFF: Disables the origin regression function. That is, the origin
SM946 CH2 Origin return start R/W ×
regression command is disabled and cannot be used.

676 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
ON: Enable the origin regression function, that is, the origin
regression command is enabled and can be used normally
(default).
SM947 CH2 Origin regression direction Reserved R/W ×
SM948 Reserved
SM949 Reserved
SM950 Reserved
SM951 Reserved
OFF: Receiving external signals when inactive
SM952 CH2 External start signal start R/W ×
ON: Receiving external signals when activated
OFF: No external signal is received
SM953 CH2 External start signal logic R/W ×
ON: Receives external signals
OFF: Turns OFF the interrupt signal and cannot use the DVIT
SM954 CH2 Interrupt signal start command R/W ×
ON: Turn ON interrupt signal (default)
OFF: No interrupt signal is received
SM955 CH2 Interrupt input signal logic R/W ×
ON: Interrupt signal is received
SM956 CH2 External limit signal open CH2 Limit signal on R/W ×
OFF: 16-bit pulse output mode
SM957 CH2 PWM mode R/W ×
ON: 1000 ratio mode
OFF: No action is performed
SM958 CH2 Immediately stop ON: Stop pulse output immediately without acceleration or R/W ×
deceleration
CH1 scan period is not OFF: Common mode, stop after sending (default)
SM959 R/W ×
processed ON: Stop or slow down immediately
OFF: Use self-contained acceleration and deceleration
SM960 CH2 Start speed setting R/W ×
ON: Use set acceleration and deceleration
OFF: Pulse transmission has not started or completed
SM1000 CH3 Pulse sending R/W ×
ON: Pulse being sent
OFF: Normal
SM1001 CH3 Pulse sending error R/W ×
ON: Error
OFF: Indicates that the pulse is being sent or started
SM1002 CH3 Pulse sending stopped R/W ×
ON: Pulse transmission is complete
OFF: Inactive
SM1003 CH3 Forward limit R/W ×
ON: After the function is enabled, forward pulse sending stops
OFF: Inactive
SM1004 CH3 Reversal limit R/W ×
ON: After the function is enabled, reverse pulse sending stops
OFF: Pulse meter value increases during forward rotation
SM1005 CH3 Rotation direction setting R/W ×
ON: Pulse meter value increases when reversed
OFF: Disables the origin regression function. That is, the origin
regression command is disabled and cannot be used.
SM1006 CH3 Origin return start ON: Enable the origin regression function, that is, the origin R/W ×
regression command is enabled and can be used normally
(default).
SM1007 CH3 Origin regression direction Reserved R/W ×
SM1008 Reserved
SM1009 Reserved
SM1010 Reserved
SM1011 Reserved
OFF: Receiving external signals when inactive
SM1012 CH3 External start signal start R/W ×
ON: Receiving external signals when activated
OFF: No external signal is received
SM1013 CH3 External start signal logic R/W ×
ON: Receives external signals
OFF: Turns OFF the interrupt signal and cannot use the DVIT
SM1014 CH3 Interrupt signal start command R/W ×
ON: Turn ON interrupt signal (default)
OFF: No interrupt signal is received
SM1015 CH3 Interrupt input signal logic R/W ×
ON: Interrupt signal is received
SM1016 CH3 External limit signal open CH3 Limit signal on R/W ×

677 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
OFF: 16-bit pulse output mode
SM1017 CH3 PWM mode R/W ×
ON: 1000 ratio mode
OFF: No action is performed
SM1018 CH3 Immediately stop ON: Stop pulse output immediately without acceleration or R/W ×
deceleration
CH1 scan period is not OFF: Common mode, stop after sending (default)
SM1019 R/W ×
processed ON: Stop or slow down immediately
OFF: Use self-contained acceleration and deceleration
SM1020 CH3 Start speed setting R/W ×
ON: Use set acceleration and deceleration
OFF: Pulse transmission has not started or completed
SM1060 CH4 Pulse sending R/W ×
ON: Pulse being sent
OFF: Normal
SM1061 CH4 Pulse sending error R/W ×
ON: Error
OFF: Indicates that the pulse is being sent or started
SM1062 CH4 Pulse sending stopped R/W ×
ON: Pulse transmission is complete
OFF: Inactive
SM1063 CH4 Forward limit R/W ×
ON: After the function is enabled, forward pulse sending stops
OFF: Inactive
SM1064 CH4 Reversal limit R/W ×
ON: After the function is enabled, reverse pulse sending stops
OFF: Pulse meter value increases during forward rotation
SM1065 CH4 Rotation direction setting R/W ×
ON: Pulse meter value increases when reversed
OFF: Disables the origin regression function. That is, the origin
regression command is disabled and cannot be used.
SM1066 CH4 Origin return start ON: Enable the origin regression function, that is, the origin R/W ×
regression command is enabled and can be used normally
(default)。
SM1067 CH4 Origin regression direction Reserved R/W ×
SM1068 Reserved
SM1069 Reserved
SM1070 Reserved
SM1071 Reserved
OFF: Receiving external signals when inactive
SM1072 CH4 External start signal start R/W ×
ON: Receiving external signals when activated
OFF: No external signal is received
SM1073 CH4 External start signal logic R/W ×
ON: Receives external signals
OFF: Turns OFF the interrupt signal and cannot use the DVIT
SM1074 CH4 Interrupt signal start command R/W ×
ON: Turn ON interrupt signal (default)
OFF: No interrupt signal is received
SM1075 CH4 Interrupt input signal logic R/W ×
ON: Interrupt signal is received
SM1076 CH4 External limit signal open CH4 Limit signal on
OFF: 16-bit pulse output mode
SM1077 CH4 PWM mode R/W ×
ON: 1000 ratio mode
OFF: No action is performed
SM1078 CH4 Immediately stop ON: Stop pulse output immediately without acceleration or R/W ×
deceleration
CH4 scan period is not OFF: Common mode, stop after sending (default)
SM1079 R/W ×
processed ON: Stop or slow down immediately
OFF: Use self-contained acceleration and deceleration
SM1120 CH5 Pulse sending R/W ×
ON: Use set acceleration and deceleration
OFF: Pulse transmission has not started or completed
SM1121 CH5 Pulse sending error R/W ×
ON: Pulse being sent
OFF: Normal
SM1122 CH5 Pulse sending stopped R/W ×
ON: Error
OFF: Indicates that the pulse is being sent or started
SM1123 CH5 Forward limit R/W ×
ON: Pulse transmission is complete
OFF: Inactive
SM1124 CH5 Reversal limit R/W ×
ON: After the function is enabled, forward pulse sending stops
OFF: Inactive
SM1125 CH5 Rotation direction setting R/W ×
ON: After the function is enabled, reverse pulse sending stops
678 WECON technology Co., Ltd.
 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
OFF: Pulse meter value increases during forward rotation
SM1126 CH5 Origin return start R/W ×
ON: Pulse meter value increases when reversed
OFF: Disables the origin regression function. That is, the origin
regression command is disabled and cannot be used.
SM1127 CH5 Origin regression direction ON: Enable the origin regression function, that is, the origin R/W ×
regression command is enabled and can be used normally
(default).
SM1128 Reserved Reserved R/W ×
SM1129 Reserved
SM1130 Reserved
SM1131 Reserved
SM1132 CH5 External signal start
OFF: Receiving external signals when inactive
SM1133 CH5 External signal logic R/W ×
ON: Receiving external signals when activated
OFF: No external signal is received
SM1134 Interrupt signal start R/W ×
ON: Receives external signals
OFF: Turns OFF the interrupt signal and cannot use the DVIT
SM1135 CH5 Interrupt signal logic command R/W ×
ON: Turn ON interrupt signal (default)
SM1136 CH5 External limit signal open CH5 Limit signal on R/W ×
SM1137 CH5 PWM mode R/W ×
OFF: 16-bit pulse output mode
SM1138 CH5 Immediately stop R/W ×
ON: 1000 ratio mode
OFF: No action is performed
CH5 scan period is not
SM1139 ON: Stop pulse output immediately without acceleration or R/W ×
processed
deceleration
OFF: Common mode, stop after sending (default)
SM1140 CH5 Start speed setting R/W ×
ON: Stop or slow down immediately
OFF: Use self-contained acceleration and deceleration
SM1180 CH6 Pulse sending R/W ×
ON: Use set acceleration and deceleration
OFF: Pulse transmission has not started or completed
SM1181 CH6 Pulse sending error R/W ×
ON: Pulse being sent
OFF: Normal
SM1182 CH6 Pulse sending stopped R/W ×
ON: Error
OFF: Indicates that the pulse is being sent or started
SM1183 CH6 Forward limit R/W ×
ON: Pulse transmission is complete
OFF: Inactive
SM1184 CH6 Reversal limit R/W ×
ON: After the function is enabled, forward pulse sending stops
OFF: Inactive
SM1185 CH6 Rotation direction setting R/W ×
ON: After the function is enabled, reverse pulse sending stops
OFF: Pulse meter value increases during forward rotation
SM1186 CH6 Origin return start R/W ×
ON: Pulse meter value increases when reversed
OFF: Disables the origin regression function. That is, the origin
regression command is disabled and cannot be used.
SM1187 CH6 Origin regression direction ON: Enable the origin regression function, that is, the origin R/W ×
regression command is enabled and can be used normally
(default).
SM1188 Reserved Reserved R/W ×
SM1189 Reserved
SM1190 Reserved
SM1191 Reserved
SM1192 CH6 External signal start
OFF: Receiving external signals when inactive
SM1193 CH6 External signal logic R/W ×
ON: Receiving external signals when activated
OFF: No external signal is received
SM1194 CH6 Interrupt signal start R/W ×
ON: Receives external signals
OFF: Turns OFF the interrupt signal and cannot use the DVIT
SM1195 CH6 Interrupt input signal logic command R/W ×
ON: Turn ON interrupt signal (default)
SM1196 CH6 External limit signal open CH6 Limit signal on R/W ×
679 WECON technology Co., Ltd.
 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
SM1197 CH6 PWM mode
OFF: 16-bit pulse output mode
SM1198 CH6 Immediately stop R/W ×
ON: 1000 ratio mode
OFF: No action is performed
CH6 Scan period processing is
SM1199 ON: Stop pulse output immediately without acceleration or R/W ×
not performed
deceleration
OFF: Common mode, stop after sending (default)
SM1200 CH6 start speed setting R/W ×
ON: Stop or slow down immediately
OFF: Use self-contained acceleration and deceleration
SM1240 CH7 Pulse sending R/W ×
ON: Use set acceleration and deceleration
OFF: Pulse transmission has not started or completed
SM1241 CH7 Pulse sending error R/W ×
ON: Pulse being sent
OFF: Normal
SM1242 CH7 Pulse sending stopped R/W ×
ON: Error
OFF: Indicates that the pulse is being sent or started
SM1243 CH7 Forward limit R/W ×
ON: Pulse transmission is complete
OFF: Inactive
SM1244 CH7 Reversal limit R/W ×
ON: After the function is enabled, forward pulse sending stops
OFF: Inactive
SM1245 CH7 Rotation direction setting R/W ×
ON: After the function is enabled, reverse pulse sending stops
OFF: Pulse meter value increases during forward rotation
SM1246 CH7 Origin return start R/W ×
ON: Pulse meter value increases when reversed
OFF: Disables the origin regression function. That is, the origin
regression command is disabled and cannot be used.
SM1247 CH7 Origin regression direction ON: Enable the origin regression function, that is, the origin R/W ×
regression command is enabled and can be used normally
(default).
SM1248 Reserved Reserved R/W ×
SM1249 Reserved
SM1250 Reserved
SM1251 Reserved
SM1252 CH7 External start signal start
OFF: Receiving external signals when inactive
SM1253 CH7 External start signal logic R/W ×
ON: Receiving external signals when activated
OFF: No external signal is received
SM1254 CH7 Interrupt signal start R/W ×
ON: Receives external signals
OFF: Turns OFF the interrupt signal and cannot use the DVIT
SM1255 CH7 Interrupt input signal logic command R/W ×
ON: Turn ON interrupt signal (default)
SM1256 CH7 External limit signal open CH7 Limit signal on R/W ×
SM1257 CH7 PWM mode
OFF: 16-bit pulse output mode
SM1258 CH7 Immediately stop R/W ×
ON: 1000 ratio mode
OFF: No action is performed
CH7 Scan interval is not
SM1259 ON: Stop pulse output immediately without acceleration or R/W ×
performed
deceleration
OFF: Common mode, stop after sending (default)
SM1300 Pulse sending R/W ×
ON: Stop or slow down immediately
OFF: Use self-contained acceleration and deceleration
SM1301 CH8 Pulse sending error R/W ×
ON: Use set acceleration and deceleration
OFF: Pulse transmission has not started or completed
SM1302 CH8 Pulse sending stopped R/W ×
ON: Pulse being sent
OFF: Normal
SM1303 CH8 Forward limit R/W ×
ON: Error
OFF: Indicates that the pulse is being sent or started
SM1304 CH8 Reversal limit R/W ×
ON: Pulse transmission is complete
OFF: Inactive
SM1305 CH8 Rotation direction setting R/W ×
ON: After the function is enabled, forward pulse sending stops
OFF: Disables the origin regression function. That is, the origin
SM1306 CH8 Origin return start R/W
regression command is disabled and cannot be used.
680 WECON technology Co., Ltd.
 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
ON: Enable the origin regression function, that is, the origin
regression command is enabled and can be used normally
(default)。
SM1307 CH8 Origin regression direction Reserved R/W
SM1308 Reserved R/W
SM1309 Reserved R/W
SM1310 Reserved R/W
SM1311 Reserved R/W
OFF: Receiving external signals when inactive
SM1312 CH8 External start signal start R/W
ON: Receiving external signals when activated
OFF: No external signal is received
SM1313 CH8 External start signal logic R/W
ON: Receives external signals
OFF: Turns OFF the interrupt signal and cannot use the DVIT
SM1314 CH8 Interrupt signal start command R/W
ON: Turn ON interrupt signal (default)
OFF: No interrupt signal is received
SM1315 CH8 Interrupt input signal logic R/W
ON: Interrupt signal is received
SM1316 CH8 External limit signal open CH8 Limit signal on R/W
OFF: 16-bit pulse output mode
SM1317 CH8 PWM mode R/W
ON: 1000 ratio mode
OFF: No action is performed
SM1318 CH8 Immediately stop ON: Stop pulse output immediately without acceleration or R/W
deceleration
OFF: Common mode, stop after sending (default)
SM1319 Reserved R/W
ON: Stop or slow down immediately
OFF: Use self-contained acceleration and deceleration
SM1320 CH8 Start speed setting
ON: Use set acceleration and deceleration
BD module

Power-down data
SM label Name Content R/W
preservation
BD module 1

SM2010 BD1 first switch R/W ×

SM2011 BD1 second way switch The BD module has different models and functions. For details, see R/W ×

SM2012 BD1 third way switch the corresponding BD module description R/W ×

SM2013 BD1 fourth way switch R/W ×

BD module 2

SM2030 BD2 first switch R/W ×

SM2031 BD2 second way switch The BD module has different models and functions. For details, see R/W ×

SM2032 BD2 third way switch the corresponding BD module description R/W ×

SM2033 BD2 fourth switch R/W ×

681 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Communication

Power-down data
SM label Name Content R/W
preservation
Communication COM1
COM1 Sending- control function is enabled
SM2540 COM1 Sending- control/sent & reminding function R/W ×
COM1 Receive - control is enabled
COM1 Sending- control function is enabled
SM2541 COM1 Sending- control/sent & reminding function R/W ×
COM1 Receive - control is enabled
COM1 Sending- control function is enabled
SM2542 COM1 Sending- control/sent & reminding function R/W ×
COM1 Receive - control is enabled

SM2543 COM1 Control acceptance /prompt receiving R/W ×

SM2544 COM1 8-bit mode R/W ×

SM2560 COM1 Communication completion mark R/W ×
SM2561 COM1 Receiving sign R/W ×
SM2562 COM1 Retry occurs R/W ×
SM2563 COM1 Communication error R/W ×
SM2564 COM1 Communication timeout R/W ×
SM2565 Reserved ×
SM2566 Reserved ×
SM2567 Reserved ×
SM2568 Reserved ×
SM2569 Reserved ×
SM2570 Reserved ×
SM2571 Reserved ×
Communication COM2
COM2 sending- control function is enabled OFF: Data transmission will be controlled
SM2590 COM2 sending- control/sent & reminding function by SM2591 R/W ×
COM2 receive - control is enabled ON: Data is automatically sent
COM2 sending- control function is enabled
OFF→ON: Start of data transmission
SM2591 COM2 sending- control/sent & reminding function R/W ×
ON→OFF: End of data transmission
COM2 receive - control is enabled
OFF: Automatic stop when data receiving
COM2 sending- control function is enabled
is fully loaded
SM2592 COM2 sending- control/sent & reminding function R/W ×
ON: Normal reception, not affected by
COM2 receive - control is enabled
flag SM2593
OFF: Data is not fully received or data is
not received (according to the status of
SM2593 COM2 control acceptance /prompt receiving SM2592) R/W ×
ON: Full data reception or data receiving
(according to the status of SM2592)
OFF: 16-bit mode
SM2594 COM2 8-bit mode (used by RS custom protocol) ×
ON: 8-bit mode
OFF: Communication is not completed
SM2610 Communication completion mark R/W ×
ON: Communication is completed
OFF: No data is received
SM2611 Receiving sign R/W ×
ON: Data is being received
OFF: No retries occur
SM2612 Retry occurs R/W ×
ON: Retry occurs

682 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
OFF: No error
SM2613 Communication error R/W ×
ON: Communication error occurs
OFF: Normal communication
SM2614 Communication timeout R/W ×
ON: Communication timeout
SM2615 Reserved

List of Special devices related to Ethernet

Power-down
SM number Name Content R/W
save
Display the current network Refresh the current IP, subnet mask, default gateway
SM2681 R/W ×
information after ON, and then OFF after the refresh is complete
Refresh the current MAC, and then OFF after the
SM2682 Display the current MAC information R/W ×
refresh is complete
ON: changeable
IP, subnet mask, gateway modification OFF: unchangeable
SM2683 R/W √
flag (When is set to ON, modify when stop->run, and then
turn OFF after modification is complete)
ON: Network is connecting
SM2684 Network card connection status OFF: Network is not connecting, please check whether R √
the wire is connected
ON: changeable
OFF: unchangeable
SM2692 MAC address modification flag R/W √
(When is set to ON, modify when stop->run, and then
turn OFF after modification is complete)
ON: enable
SM2700 ModbusTCP keep alive mechanism R/W √
OFF: disable (default)
ON: enable
ModbusTCP server is forced to shut OFF: disable (default)
SM2701 R/W ×
down (After successfully close the enable, it automatically
changes to OFF)
ON: Ethernet error, please check SD2710 and SD2711
SM2710 Ethernet error flag R ×
OFF: No Ethernet error
ON: The client is connected
SM2740 ModbusTCP server connection status 1 R ×
OFF: The client is not connected
ON: The client is connected
SM2760 ModbusTCP server connection status 2 R ×
OFF: The client is not connected
ON: The client is connected
SM2780 ModbusTCP server connection status 3 R ×
OFF: The client is not connected
ON: The client is connected
SM2800 ModbusTCP server connection status 4 R ×
OFF: The client is not connected
ON: The client is connected
SM2820 ModbusTCP server connection status 5 R ×
OFF: The client is not connected

683 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
ON: The client is connected
SM2840 ModbusTCP server connection status 6 R ×
OFF: The client is not connected
ON: The client is connected
SM2860 ModbusTCP server connection status 7 R ×
OFF: The client is not connected
ON: The client is connected
SM2880 ModbusTCP server connection status 8 R ×
OFF: The client is not connected

Appendix 2 Special Register (SD)

Error message

Power-down
SD label Name Content R/W
data preservation
SD0 Latest error message Error code Latest self-diagnosed error code will be stored R X
SD1 Reserved
Default value: 26 (2.6V)
SD2 Set minimum battery voltage R/W X
Unit: 0.1 V
Default value: 26 (2.6V)
SD3 Current battery voltage R X
Unit: 0.1 V
Battery voltage value, in unit of 0.1V, when the battery
SD4 Battery voltage latch value R X
voltage is too low and the latching error occurs
Record the number of times the current power supply fails
SD5 AC/DC power down times R X
and restarts automatically
SD6 Error code of PLC hardware error Hardware error code will be stored R X
SD7 PLC communication Error code Communication error code will be stored R X
PLC communication error step Circuit program step numbers for communication error will
SD8 R X
number low word be stored, double - word
PLC communication error step
SD9 Parameter error codes will be stored R X
number high word
SD10 Parameter Error code Error codes for operation errors are stored R X
Circuit program step number of the operation error will be
SD11 Operation Error code R X
stored, double word
Operation error program step Error code for operation error is stored and cannot be
SD12 R X
number low word cleared by the error lifting function
Circuit program step number of the operation error will be
Operation error program step
SD13 stored, double word, cannot be cleared by error lifting R X
number high word
function, double word
SD14 Operation Error code latch An unexpected error occurred in the PLC R X
Operation error program step Recovered time after AC220V power failure will be stored,
SD15 R X
number latch low word unit: ms
Operation error program step
SD16 R X
number latch high word
SD17 Program error Error code The latest self-diagnosing error code will be stored R X
AC220V power down recovery
SD18 R X
time
SD19 to SD29 Reserved Default value: 26 (2.6V)

684 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
System message

Power-down
SD label Name Content R/W
data preservation
SD30 Model ID PLC model ID is stored and cannot be modified R X
Software version
SD31 PLC software version number is stored and cannot be modified R X
number
Hardware version
SD32 PLC hardware version number is stored and cannot be modified R X
number
SD33 Input points PLC input points are stored and cannot be modified R X
SD34 Output points Output points of PLC are stored and cannot be modified R X
Number of high-speed
SD35 Number of high speed input shafts is stored, cannot be modified R X
input shafts
Number of high-speed Number of PLC high speed output shafts is stored and cannot be
SD36 R X
output shafts modified
Identify how many output points are of relay type,Using mask method,
SD37、SD38 Relay identification R X
each bit identifies an output point, 1 code stands for relay type
Product unique ID (16
SD40 to SD47 Unique ID code of the product is stored and cannot be modified R X
bytes)
Compile the link
SD48 PLC compiler linked module version is stored, and cannot be modified R X
version
Production
SD49 Production information is stored, and ASCII code is saved X
information string
SD50 to SD99 Model ID PLC model ID is stored and cannot be modified R X

Clock information

Power-down
SD label Name Content R/W data preservatio
n
SD100 Real time clock seconds (0 to 59) R X
SD101 Real-time clock minutes (0 to 59) R X
SD102 Real-time clock hour (0 to 23) R X
SD103 Real-time clock day (1 to 31) PLC built-in RTC clock R X
SD104 Real-time clock month (1 to 12) R X
Real-time clock Gregorian calendar
SD105 R X
year (2000 to 2099)
SD106 Real time clock week R X
SD107 to SD113 Reserved
SD114 n value of nms oscillation clock Set SM114 clock oscillator n to 500ms by default R/W X
SD115 n value of ns oscillation clock Set SM115 clock oscillator n to 2s by default R/W X
SD116 to SD119 Reserved

685 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Scan information

Power-down
SM label Name Content R/W
data preservation
SD120 Constant scan cycle time setting (ms) Default: 10ms R/W X
SD122 Watchdog timer time setting value Unit ms, default 200 R/W X
• The current scan time will be stored in SD128 and SD129.
(Measured in 1μs)
Ms part of current scan cycle value SD128: store ms bits (storage range: 0 to 65535)
SD128 R X
(ms part) SD129: store μs bits (storage range: 0 to 999)
(Example) When the current scan time is 23.6ms, Store as
follows:
SD128=23
SD129 Scan period current value (us part) SD129=600 R X
• STOP→RUN zero clearing will be performed once
SD130 Ms part of the maximum scan period Maximum scan time excluding the scan time of the initial R X
execution program will be stored in SD130 and SD131.
(Measured in 1μs)
SD131 Maximum scan period us part SD130: Store ms bits (storage range: 0 to 65535) R X
SD131: Store μs bits (storage range: 0 to 999)
• STOP→RUN zero clearing will be performed once
SD132 Scan period minimum ms part The minimum scan time excluding the scan time of the R X
initial execution program will be stored in SD133 and
SD134. (Measured in 1μs)
SD133 Scan period minimum us part SD130: Store ms bits (storage range: 0 to 65535) R X
SD131: Store μs bits (storage range: 0 to 999)
• STOP→RUN zero clearing will be performed once
SD134 Ms part of initial scan time • The initial scan time will be stored in SD134 and SD135. R X
(Measured in 1μs)
SD134: store ms bits (storage range: 0 to 65535)
SD135 Initial scan time us part SD135: store μs bits (storage range: 0 to 999) R X
• STOP→RUN zero clearing will be performed once
SD136 END processing time ms part • After the scan, the time until the start of the next scan R X
will be stored in SD136 and SD137. (Measured in 1μs)
SD136: store ms bits (storage range: 0 to 65535)
SD137 END processing time us part R X
SD137: store μs bits (storage range: 0 to 999)
• STOP→RUN zero clearing will be performed once
SD138 Ms part of program execution time Constant scan wait time (in ms) R X
• Wait times for constant scan Settings are stored in SD138
and SD139. (measuring in units of 1μs)
SD139 Program execution time us part SD138: Store ms bits (storage range: 0 to 65535) R X
SD149: Store μs bits (storage range: 0 to 999)
• STOP→RUN zero clearing will be performed once
SD140 Constant scan cycle waiting time ms • Execution time of a scan is stored in SD140 and SD141. R X
(Measured in 1μs)
SD140: store ms bits (storage range: 0 to 65535)
SD141 Constant scan cycle waiting time us SD141: store μs bits (storage range: 0 to 999) R X
• STOP→RUN zero clearing will be performed once
During the execution of the interrupt program, the priority
of interrupts is stored.
SD150 Current interrupt priority R X
0 to 2: Priority of interrupt pointer for an executing
interrupt program
According to interrupt prohibition instruction (DI
instruction),interrupt prohibition instruction (DI
instruction), interrupt permit instruction (EI instruction)
below the specified priority, and the priority in interrupt
Priority of interrupts currently prohibition will be stored.
SD151 R X
prohibited 0: interrupt prohibition with all priority (default)
1: interrupt prohibition with priority level 1 and priority
level 2.
2: interrupt prohibition with priority level 2.
3: interrupt enable with all priority.

686 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Instruction related

Power-down
SD label Name Content R/W
data preservation
During the execution of the interrupt program, the priority of
the interrupt will be stored.
SD150 Current interrupt priority 1 to 3: The interrupt pointer priority of the interrupt program R X
being executed
0: No interrupt is executed (default)
According to the interrupt prohibition instruction (DI
instruction), the interrupt prohibition instruction (DI
instruction) below the designated priority, and the interrupt
Currently interrupt prohibition enable instruction (EI instruction), the priority of the
SD151 R X
priority interrupt prohibition will be stored. 0: All priority interrupts
are disabled (default) 1: Priority 1 and 2 interrupts are
disabled 2: Priority 2 interrupts are disabled 3: All priority
interrupts are enabled
SD240 For STL: ON status number 1 R X
SD241 For STL: ON status number 2 R X
SD242 For STL: ON status number 3 R X
SD243 For STL: ON status number 4 The S soft element number of the ON status in STL will be sav R X
ed, up to 8, exceeding the first 8 with smaller storage numbe
SD244 For STL: ON status number 5 rs. R X
SD245 For STL: ON status number 6 R X
SD246 For STL: ON status number 7 R X
SD247 For STL: ON status number 8 R X
Signal alarm ON state minimum
SD249 Store signal alarm ON state minimum number R/W X
number
Timing clock output 1 of DUTY instruction is counted by scan
SD340 DUTY timing clock count value 1 R/W X
numbers
Timing clock output 2 of DUTY instruction is counted by scan
SD341 DUTY timing clock count value 2 R/W X
numbers
Timing clock output 3 of DUTY instruction is counted by scan
SD342 DUTY timing clock count value 3 R/W X
numbers
Timing clock output 4 of DUTY instruction is counted by scan
SD343 DUTY timing clock count value 4 R/W X
numbers
Timing clock output 5 of DUTY instruction is counted by scan
SD344 DUTY timing clock count value 5 R/W X
numbers

Interrupt prohibited

Power-down
SD label Name Content R/W
data preservation
SIMASK instruction interrupt mask. Each bit represents an
SD350 to SD381 Timer interrupt disable mask R/W X
interrupt. For details, see SIMAK instruction
High-speed counter interrupt SIMASK instruction interrupt mask. Each bit represents an
SD382 to SD388 R/W X
disable mask interrupt. For details, see SIMAK instruction

687 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
High-speed input and output

Power-down
SD label Name Content R/W
data preservation
SD400 HSC0 current count value low Current value of the memory channel high-speed R/W √
counter, updated every 100 μ s
SD401 HSC0 current count value high R/W √

SD402 HSC0 current frequency low Current frequency of the memory channel R/W ×
high-speed counter, updated every 100 µ s
SD403 HSC0 current frequency high R/W ×

HSC0 mode (display)

0: ordinary IO
SD405 Default: General I/O R/W ×
1: Single phase counting
2: AB phase count

HSC0 frequency multiplication (display)

1: 1 times frequency
SD420 Default: 1x frequency R/W ×
2: 2 times frequency
4: 4 times frequency

Calculate the sampling time of channel high speed

SD421 HSC0 frequency sampling time (ms) R/W ×
counter frequency, default is 1000ms
The value ranges from 0 to 1700. The default value is
SD422 HSC0 input filter setting (0.01us) R/W ×
0
DHSCS, DHSCR, DHSZ instructions use The value ranges from 0 to 2. The highest priority is
SD423 R/W ×
the priority setting of the HSC0channel 0. The default value is 0
SD430 HSC1 current count value low R/W ×
Current value of the memory channel high-speed
SD431 HSC1 current count value high counter, updated every 100 μ s R/W ×

SD432 HSC1 current frequency low Current frequency of the memory channel R/W ×
SD433 HSC1 current frequency high high-speed counter, updated every 100 µ s R/W ×

HSC1 mode (display)

0: ordinary IO
SD435 Default: General I/O R/W ×
1: Single phase counting
2: AB phase count

HSC1 frequency multiplication

1: 1 times frequency
SD450 Default: 1x frequency R/W ×
2: 2 times frequency
4: 4 times frequency

Calculate the sampling time of channel high speed

SD451 HSC1 frequency sampling time (ms) R/W ×
counter frequency, default is 1000ms
The value ranges from 0 to 1700. The default value is
SD452 HSC1 input filter setting (0.01us) R/W ×
0
DHSCS, DHSCR, DHSZ instructions use The value ranges from 0 to 2. The highest priority is
SD453 R/W ×
the priority setting of the HSC1 channel 0. The default value is 0
Current value of the memory channel high-speed
SD460 HSC2 current count value low R/W ×
counter, updated every 100 μ s
Current frequency of the memory channel
SD461 HSC2 current count value high R/W ×
high-speed counter, updated every 100 µ s
SD462 HSC2 current frequency low Current frequency of the memory channel R/W ×
SD463 HSC2 current high frequency high-speed counter, updated every 100 µ s R/W ×
SD464 Reserved R/W ×

688 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)

HSC2 mode (display)

0: ordinary IO
SD465 Default: General I/O R/W ×
1: Single phase counting
2: AB phase count

HSC2 frequency multiplication

1: 1 times frequency
SD480 Default: 1x frequency R/W ×
2: 2 times frequency
4: 4 times frequency

Calculate the sampling time of channel high speed

R/W ×
counter frequency, default is 1000ms
The value ranges from 0 to 1700. The default value
SD481 HSC2 frequency sampling time (ms) R/W ×
is 0
The value ranges from 0 to 2. The highest priority is
SD482 HSC2 input filter setting (0.01us) R/W ×
0. The default value is 0
DHSCS, DHSCR, DHSZ instructions use The value ranges from 0 to 2. The highest priority is
SD483 R/W ×
the priority setting of the HSC2 channel 0. The default value is 0
SD490 HSC3 current count value low Current value of the memory channel high-speed R/W ×
SD491 HSC3 current count value high counter, updated every 100 μ s R/W ×
SD492 HSC3 current frequency low Current frequency of the memory channel R/W ×
SD493 HSC3 current high frequency high-speed counter, updated every 100 µ s R/W ×
SD494 Reserved R/W ×

HSC3 mode (display)

0: ordinary IO
SD495 Default: General I/O R/W ×
1: Single phase counting
2: AB phase count

HSC3 frequency multiplication

1: 1 times frequency
SD510 Default: 1x frequency R/W ×
2: 2 times frequency
4: 4 times frequency

Calculate the sampling time of channel high speed

SD511 HSC3 frequency sampling time (ms) R/W √
counter frequency, default is 1000ms
The value ranges from 0 to 1700. The default value is
SD512 HSC3 input filter setting (0.01us) R/W √
0
DHSCS, DHSCR, DHSZ instructions use The value ranges from 0 to 2. The highest priority is
SD513 R/W ×
the priority setting of the HSC3 channel 0. The default value is 0

SD521 HSC4 current count value high R/W ×

SD522 HSC4 current frequency low Current frequency of the memory channel R/W ×
SD523 HSC4 current high frequency high-speed counter, updated every 100 µ s R/W ×
SD524 Reserved R/W ×

HSC4 mode (display)

0: ordinary IO
SD525 Default: General I/O R/W ×
1: Single phase counting
2: AB phase count

HSC4 frequency multiplication

1: 1 times frequency
SD540 Default: 1x frequency R/W ×
2: 2 times frequency
4: 4 times frequency

Calculate the sampling time of channel high speed

SD541 HSC4 frequency sampling time (ms) R/W ×
counter frequency, default is 1000ms
689 WECON technology Co., Ltd.
 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
The value ranges from 0 to 1700. The default value is
SD542 HSC4 input filter setting (0.01us) R/W ×
0
DHSCS, DHSCR, DHSZ instructions use The value ranges from 0 to 2. The highest priority is
SD543 R/W ×
the priority setting of the HSC4 channel 0. The default value is 0
SD550 HSC5 current count value low R/W ×
Current value of the memory channel high-speed
SD551 HSC5 current count value high counter, updated every 100 μ s R/W ×

SD552 HSC5 current frequency low Current frequency of the memory channel R/W ×
SD553 HSC5 current frequency high high-speed counter, updated every 100 µ s R/W ×
SD554 Reserved R/W ×

HSC5 mode (display)

0: ordinary IO
SD555 Default: General I/O R/W ×
1: Single phase counting
2: AB phase count

HSC5 frequency multiplication

1: 1 times frequency
SD570 Default: 1x frequency R/W ×
2: 2 times frequency
4: 4 times frequency

Calculate the sampling time of channel high speed

SD571 HSC5 frequency sampling time (ms) R/W ×
counter frequency, default is 1000ms
The value ranges from 0 to 1700. The default value is
SD572 HSC5 input filter setting (0.01us) R/W ×
0
DHSCS, DHSCR, DHSZ instructions use The value ranges from 0 to 2. The highest priority is
SD573 R/W ×
the priority setting of the HSC5 channel 0. The default value is 0
SD580 HSC6 current count value low R/W ×
Current value of the memory channel high-speed
SD581 HSC6 current count value high counter, updated every 100 μ s R/W ×

SD582 HSC6 current frequency low Current frequency of the memory channel R/W ×
SD583 HSC6 current frequency high high-speed counter, updated every 100 µ s R/W ×
SD584 Reserved R/W ×

HSC6 mode (display)

0: ordinary IO
SD585 Default: General I/O R/W ×
1: Single phase counting
2: AB phase count

HSC6 frequency multiplication

1: 1 times frequency
SD586 Default: 1x frequency R/W ×
2: 2 times frequency
4: 4 times frequency

Calculate the sampling time of channel high speed

SD601 HSC6 frequency sampling time (ms) R/W ×
counter frequency, default is 1000ms
The value ranges from 0 to 1700. The default value
SD602 HSC6 input filter setting (0.01us) R/W ×
is 0

DHSCS, DHSCR, DHSZ instructions use The value ranges from 0 to 2. The highest priority is
SD603 R/W ×
the priority setting of the HSC6 channel 0. The default value is 0

SD610 HSC7 current count value low R/W ×

Current value of the memory channel high-speed
SD611 HSC7 current count value high counter, updated every 100 μ s R/W ×

SD612 HSC7 current frequency low Current frequency of the memory channel R/W ×
SD613 HSC7 current frequency high high-speed counter, updated every 100 µ s R/W ×

690 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
SD614 Reserved R/W ×

HSC7 mode (display)

0: ordinary IO
SD615 Default: General I/O R/W ×
1: Single phase counting
2: AB phase count

HSC7 frequency multiplication

1: 1 times frequency
SD630 Default: 1x frequency R/W ×
2: 2 times frequency
4: 4 times frequency

Calculate the sampling time of channel high speed

SD631 HSC7 frequency sampling time (ms) R/W ×
counter frequency, default is 1000ms

Value ranges from 0 to 1700. The default value

SD632 HSC7 input filter setting (0.01us) R/W ×
is 0

The value ranges from 0 to 2. The highest prio

SD633 Reserved R/W ×
rity is 0. The default value is 0

Pulse output (positioning axis)

Power-down data
SD label Name Content R/W
preservation
SD880 CH1 positioning axis output low bit R/W √
Count value of current high speed pulse output
SD881 CH1 positioning axis output upper bit R/W √
SD882 Reserved R/W ×
SD883 Reserved R/W ×
SD884 CH1 current speed lower bit R/W ×
Current high speed pulse output frequency
SD885 CH1 current speed upper bit R/W ×
SD886 Reserved R/W ×
SD887 Reserved R/W ×
SD888 Reserved R/W ×
SD889 Reserved R/W ×
SD890 Reserved R/W ×
SD891 Reserved R/W ×
SD892 Reserved R/W ×
SD893 Reserved R/W ×
SD894 Reserved R/W ×
SD895 Reserved R/W ×
SD896 Reserved R/W ×
SD897 Reserved R/W ×
SD898 CH1 maximum speed (32 bits) R/W ×
Default: 100000Hz
SD899 CH1 maximum speed (32 bits) R/W ×
SD900 CH1 offset speed (32 bits) R/W ×
Default: 1Hz
SD901 CH1 offset speed (32 bits) R/W ×
SD902 CH1acceleration time (16 bits) Default: 100ms R/W ×
SD903 CH1 deceleration time (16 bits) Default: 100ms R/W ×
0: slows down and stops
SD904 CH1 stop mode R/W ×
1: Stop immediately

691 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
SD905 CH1 direction delay time (ms) Default: 0ms R/W ×
After the external start signal is enabled, set the
SD906 CH1 external start signal (X register value) input register, for example, SET X10 to 10. Default R/W ×
value: 0
SD907 Reserved R/W ×
SD908 CH1 start speed (32 bits) R/W ×
Default: 0Hz
SD909 CH1 start speed (32 bits) R/W ×
SD910 Reserved R/W ×
SD911 Reserved R/W ×
SD912 Reserved R/W ×
SD913 Reserved R/W ×
SD914 Reserved R/W ×
SD915 Reserved R/W ×
SD940 CH2 positioning axis output low bit R/W √
Count value of current high speed pulse output
SD941 CH2 positioning axis output upper bit R/W √
SD942 Reserved R/W ×
SD943 Reserved R/W ×
SD944 CH2 current speed lower bit R/W ×
Current high speed pulse output frequency
SD945 CH2 current speed upper bit R/W ×
SD946 Reserved R/W ×
SD947 Reserved R/W ×
SD948 Reserved R/W ×
SD949 Reserved R/W ×
SD950 Reserved R/W ×
SD951 Reserved R/W ×
SD952 Reserved R/W ×
SD953 Reserved R/W ×
SD954 Reserved R/W ×
SD955 Reserved R/W ×
SD956 Reserved R/W ×
SD957 Reserved R/W ×
SD958 CH2 maximum speed (32 bits) R/W ×
Default: 100000Hz
SD959 CH2 maximum speed (32 bits) R/W ×
SD960 CH2 offset speed (32 bits) R/W ×
Default: 1Hz
SD961 CH2 offset speed (32 bits) R/W ×
SD962 CH2acceleration time (16 bits) Default: 100ms R/W ×
SD963 CH2 deceleration time (16 bits) Default: 100ms R/W ×
0: slows down and stops
SD964 CH2 stop mode R/W ×
1: Stop immediately
SD965 CH2 direction delay time (ms) Default: 0ms R/W ×
After the external start signal is enabled, set the
SD966 CH2 external start signal (X register value) input register, for example, set X10 to 10. R/W ×
Default: 0
SD967 Reserved R/W ×
SD968 CH2 start speed (32 bits) R/W ×
Default: 0Hz
SD969 CH2 start speed (32 bits) R/W ×

692 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
SD970 Reserved R/W ×
SD971 Reserved R/W ×
SD972 Reserved R/W ×
SD973 Reserved R/W ×
SD974 Reserved R/W ×
SD975 Reserved R/W ×
CH2 positioning axis output low bit
SD1000 R/W ×
(Configurable unit)
Count value of current high speed pulse output
CH2 positioning axis output upper bit
SD1001 R/W ×
(Configurable unit)
SD1002 Reserved R/W ×
SD1003 Reserved R/W ×
SD1004 CH3 current speed lower bit R/W ×
Current high speed pulse output frequency
SD1005 CH3 current speed upper bit R/W ×
SD1006 Reserved R/W ×
SD1007 Reserved R/W ×
SD1008 Reserved R/W ×
SD1009 Reserved R/W ×
SD1010 Reserved R/W ×
SD1011 Reserved R/W ×
SD1012 Reserved R/W ×
SD1013 Reserved R/W ×
SD1014 Reserved R/W ×
SD1015 Reserved R/W ×
SD1016 Reserved R/W ×
SD1017 Reserved R/W ×
SD1018 CH3 maximum speed (32 bits) R/W ×
Default: 100000Hz
SD1019 CH3 maximum speed (32 bits) R/W ×
SD1020 CH3 offset speed (32 bits) R/W ×
Default: 1Hz
SD1021 CH3 offset speed (32 bits) R/W ×
SD1022 CH3acceleration time (16 bits) Default: 100ms R/W ×
SD1023 CH3 deceleration time (16 bits) Default: 100ms R/W ×
0: slows down and stops
SD1024 CH3 stop mode R/W ×
1: Stop immediately
SD1025 CH3 direction delay time (ms) Default: 0ms R/W ×
After the external start signal is enabled, set the
SD1026 CH3 external start signal (X register value) input register, for example, SET X10 to 10. Default R/W ×
value: 0
SD1027 Reserved R/W ×
SD1028 CH3 start speed (32 bits) R/W ×
Default: 0Hz
SD1029 CH3 start speed (32 bits) R/W ×
SD1030 Reserved R/W ×
SD1031 Reserved R/W ×
SD1032 Reserved R/W ×
SD1033 Reserved R/W ×
SD1034 Reserved R/W ×
SD1035 Reserved R/W ×
693 WECON technology Co., Ltd.
 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
SD1060 CH5 positioning axis output low bit R/W √
Count value of current high speed pulse output
SD1061 CH5 positioning axis output upper bit R/W √
SD1062 Reserved R/W ×
SD1063 Reserved R/W ×
SD1064 CH4 current speed lower bit R/W ×
Current high speed pulse output frequency
SD1065 CH4 current speed upper bit R/W ×
SD1066 Reserved R/W ×
SD1067 Reserved R/W ×
SD1068 Reserved R/W ×
SD1069 Reserved R/W ×
SD1070 Reserved R/W ×
SD1071 Reserved R/W ×
SD1072 Reserved R/W ×
SD1073 Reserved R/W ×
SD1074 Reserved R/W ×
SD1075 Reserved R/W ×
SD1076 Reserved R/W ×
SD1077 Reserved R/W ×
SD1078 CH4 maximum speed (32 bits) R/W ×
Default: 100000Hz
SD1079 CH4 maximum speed (32 bits) R/W ×
SD1080 CH4 offset speed (32 bits) R/W ×
Default: 1Hz
SD1081 CH4 offset speed (32 bits) R/W ×
SD1082 CH4acceleration time (16 bits) Default: 100ms R/W ×
SD1083 CH4 deceleration time (16 bits) Default: 100ms R/W ×
0: slows down and stops
SD1084 CH4 stop mode R/W ×
1: Stop immediately
SD1085 CH4 direction delay time (ms) Default: 0ms R/W ×
After the external start signal is enabled, set the
SD1086 CH4 External start signal (X register value) input register, for example, SET X10 to 10. Default R/W ×
value: 0
SD1087 Reserved R/W ×
SD1088 CH4 start speed (32 bits) R/W ×
Default: 0Hz
SD1089 CH4 start speed (32 bits) R/W ×
SD1090 Reserved R/W ×

SD1091 Reserved R/W ×

SD1092 Reserved R/W ×

SD1093 Reserved R/W ×

SD1094 Reserved R/W ×

SD1095 Reserved R/W ×

SD1120 CH5 positioning axis output low bit R/W √
Count value of current high speed pulse output
SD1121 CH5 positioning axis output upper bit R/W √
SD1122 Reserved R/W ×
SD1123 Reserved R/W ×
SD1124 CH5 current speed lower bit Current high speed pulse output frequency R/W ×

694 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
SD1125 CH5 current speed upper bit R/W ×
SD1126 Reserved R/W ×
SD1127 Reserved R/W ×
SD1128 Reserved R/W ×
SD1129 Reserved R/W ×
SD1130 Reserved R/W ×
SD1131 Reserved R/W ×
SD1132 Reserved R/W ×
SD1133 Reserved R/W ×
SD1134 Reserved R/W ×
SD1135 Reserved R/W ×
SD1136 Reserved R/W ×
SD1137 Reserved R/W ×
SD1138 CH5 maximum speed (32 bits) R/W ×
Default: 100000Hz
SD1139 CH5 maximum speed (32 bits) R/W ×
SD1140 CH5 offset speed (32 bits) R/W ×
Default: 1Hz
SD1141 CH5 offset speed (32 bits) R/W ×
SD1142 CH5 acceleration time (16 bits) Default: 100ms R/W ×
SD1143 CH5 deceleration time (16 bits) Default: 100ms R/W ×
0: slows down and stops
SD1144 CH5 stop mode R/W ×
1: Stop immediately
SD1145 CH5 direction delay time (ms) Default: 0ms R/W ×
After the external start signal is enabled, set the
SD1146 CH5 external start signal (X register value) input register, for example, SET X10 to 10. Default R/W ×
value: 0
SD1147 Reserved R/W ×
SD1148 CH5 start speed (32 bits) R/W ×
Default: 0Hz
SD1149 CH5 start speed (32 bits) R/W ×
SD1150 Reserved R/W ×
SD1151 Reserved R/W ×
SD1152 Reserved R/W ×
SD1153 Reserved R/W ×
SD1154 Reserved R/W ×
SD1155 Reserved R/W ×
SD1180 CH6 positioning axis output low bit R/W √
Count value of current high speed pulse output
SD1181 CH6 positioning axis output upper bit R/W √
SD1182 Reserved R/W ×
SD1183 Reserved R/W ×
SD1184 CH6 current speed lower bit R/W ×
Current high speed pulse output frequency
SD1185 CH6 current speed upper bit R/W ×
SD1186 Reserved R/W ×
SD1187 Reserved R/W ×
SD1188 Reserved R/W ×
SD1189 Reserved R/W ×
SD1190 Reserved R/W ×
SD1191 Reserved R/W ×
695 WECON technology Co., Ltd.
 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
SD1192 Reserved R/W ×
SD1193 Reserved R/W ×
SD1194 Reserved R/W ×
SD1195 Reserved R/W ×
SD1196 Reserved R/W ×
SD1197 Reserved R/W ×
SD1198 CH6 maximum speed (32 bits) R/W ×
Default: 100000Hz
SD1199 CH6 maximum speed (32 bits) R/W ×
SD1200 CH6 offset speed (32 bits) R/W ×
Default: 1Hz
SD1201 CH6 offset speed (32 bits) R/W ×
SD1202 CH6acceleration time (16 bits) Default: 100ms R/W ×
SD1203 CH6 deceleration time (16 bits) Default: 100ms R/W ×
0: slows down and stops
SD1204 CH6 stop mode R/W ×
1: Stop immediately
SD1205 CH6 direction delay time (ms) Default: 0ms R/W ×
After the external start signal is enabled, set the
SD1206 CH6 external start signal (X register value) input register, for example, SET X10 to 10. Default R/W ×
value: 0
SD1207 Reserved R/W ×
SD1208 CH6 external start signal (X register value) R/W ×
Default: 0Hz
SD1209 CH6 start speed upper bit (32 bits) R/W ×
SD1210 Reserved R/W ×
SD1211 Reserved R/W ×
SD1212 Reserved R/W ×
SD1213 Reserved R/W ×
SD1214 Reserved R/W ×
SD1215 Reserved R/W ×
SD1240 CH7 positioning axis output low bit R/W √
Count value of current high speed pulse output
SD1241 CH7 positioning axis output upper bit R/W √
SD1242 Reserved R/W ×
SD1243 Reserved R/W ×
SD1244 CH7 current speed lower bit R/W ×
Current high speed pulse output frequency
SD1245 CH7 current speed upper bit R/W ×
SD1246 Reserved R/W ×
SD1247 Reserved R/W ×
SD1248 Reserved R/W ×
SD1249 Reserved R/W ×
SD1250 Reserved R/W ×
SD1251 Reserved R/W ×
SD1252 Reserved R/W ×
SD1253 Reserved R/W ×
SD1254 Reserved R/W ×
SD1255 Reserved R/W ×
SD1256 Reserved R/W ×
SD1257 Reserved R/W ×
SD1258 CH7 maximum speed (32 bits) Default: 100000Hz R/W ×
696 WECON technology Co., Ltd.
 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
SD1259 CH7 maximum speed (32 bits) R/W ×
SD1260 CH7 offset speed (32 bits) R/W ×
Default: 1Hz
SD1261 CH7 offset speed (32 bits) R/W ×
SD1262 CH7acceleration time (16 bits) Default: 100ms R/W ×
SD1263 CH7 deceleration time (16 bits) Default: 100ms R/W ×
0: slows down and stops
SD1264 CH7 stop mode R/W ×
1: Stop immediately
SD1265 CH7 direction delay time (ms) Default: 0ms R/W ×
After the external start signal is enabled, set the
SD1266 CH7 external start signal (X register value) input register, for example, SET X10 to 10. Default R/W ×
value: 0
SD1267 Reserved R/W ×
SD1268 CH7 start speed low bit (32 bits) R/W ×
Default: 0Hz
SD1269 CH7 start speed high bit(32 bits) R/W ×
SD1270 Reserved R/W ×
SD1271 Reserved R/W ×
SD1272 Reserved R/W ×
SD1273 Reserved R/W ×
SD1274 Reserved R/W ×
SD1275 Reserved R/W ×
SD1300 CH8 positioning axis output low bit R/W √
Count value of current high speed pulse output
SD1301 CH8 positioning axis output upper bit R/W √
SD1302 Reserved R/W ×
SD1303 Reserved R/W ×
SD1304 CH8 current speed lower bit R/W ×
Current high speed pulse output frequency
SD1305 CH8 current speed upper bit R/W ×
SD1306 Reserved R/W ×
SD1307 Reserved R/W ×
SD1308 Reserved R/W ×
SD1309 Reserved R/W ×
SD1310 Reserved R/W ×
SD1311 Reserved R/W ×
SD1312 Reserved R/W ×
SD1313 Reserved R/W ×
SD1314 Reserved R/W ×
SD1315 Reserved R/W ×
SD1316 Reserved R/W ×
SD1317 Reserved R/W ×
SD1318 CH8 maximum speed (32 bits) R/W ×
Default: 100000Hz
SD1319 CH8 maximum speed (32 bits) R/W ×
SD1320 CH8 offset speed (32 bits) R/W ×
Default: 1Hz
SD1321 CH8 offset speed (32 bits) R/W ×
SD1322 CH8acceleration time (16 bits) Default: 100ms R/W ×
SD1323 CH8 deceleration time (16 bits) Default: 100ms R/W ×
0: slows down and stops
SD1324 CH8 stop mode R/W ×
1: Stop immediately

697 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
SD1325 CH8 direction delay time (ms) Default: 0ms R/W ×
After the external start signal is enabled, set the
SD1326 CH8 external start signal (X register value) input register, for example, SET X10 to 10. Default R/W ×
value: 0
SD1327 Reserved R/W ×
SD1328 CH8 start speed low bit (32 bits) R/W ×
Default: 0Hz
SD1329 CH8 start speed high bit (32 bits) R/W ×
SD1330 Reserved R/W ×
SD1331 Reserved R/W ×
SD1332 Reserved R/W ×
SD1333 Reserved R/W ×
SD1334 Reserved R/W ×
SD1335 Reserved R/W ×

BD module

Power-down
SD label Name Content R/W
data preservation
BD module 1
SD2000 BD1 Type Stores the type of the BD module currently connected) R ×
Stores the version number of the BD module currently
SD2001 BD1 version R ×
connected
Stores the last time Error code of the the currently connected
SD2002 BD1 last error R ×
BD module
store the current error code of the BD module currently
SD2003 BD1 current error R ×
connected
Stores the number of errors recorded in BD module currently
SD2004 BD1 error times R ×
connected
SD2010 BD1 first value R ×
SD2011 BD1 second value Values stored on different BD modules have different meanings. R ×
SD2012 BD1 third value For details, see the corresponding BD module description R ×
SD2013 BD1 fourth value R ×
BD module 2
SD2020 BD2 type Stores the type of the BD module currently connected) R ×
Stores the version number of the BD module currently
SD2021 BD2 version R ×
connected
Last time Error code of the the currently connected BD
SD2022 BD2 last error R ×
module
store the current error code of the BD module currently
SD2023 BD2 current error R ×
connected
Stores the number of errors recorded in BD module currently
SD2024 BD2 error times R ×
connected
SD2030 BD2 first value R ×
SD2031 BD2 second value Values stored on different BD modules have different meanings. R ×
SD2032 BD2 third value For details, see the corresponding BD module description R ×
SD2033 BD2 fourth value R ×

698 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Right expansion module

Power-down
SD label Name Content R/W
data preservation
Total number of currently connected right expansion
SD2081 Total number of modules connected R ×
modules
SD2082 Number of IO modules Number of connected I/O expansion modules R ×
Number of special extension modules currently
SD2083 Number of special expansion modules R ×
connected
-1: No module is offline
SD2084 Which module started to go offline 0: The first module is offline R ×
1: The second module is offline, and so on

Input filtering

Power-down
SD label Name Content R/W
data preservation
SD2280 Input filter point setting, default 10ms Low byte X0 to X3, high byte X4 to X7 R/W ×
SD2281 Input filter point setting, default 10ms Low byte X10 to X13, high byte X14 to X17 R/W ×
SD2282 Input filter point setting, default 10ms Low byte X20 to X23, high byte X24 to X27 R/W ×
SD2283 Input filter point setting, default 10ms Low byte X30 to X33, high byte X34 to X37 R/W ×
SD2284 Input filter point setting, default 10ms Low byte X40 to X43, high byte X44 to X47 R/W ×
SD2285 Input filter point setting, default 10ms Low byte X50 to X53, high byte X54 to X57 R/W ×
SD2286 to SD2287 Input filter point setting, default 10ms ...... R/W ×

Communication

Power-down
SD label Name Content R/W
data preservation
Communication com1
Default: Baud rate 115200, Stop bit 1, data bit 8, setting
SD2540 COM1 Communication port settings method for parity bit is not specified, but you may refer R/W √
to the Description of the PROTPARA Instruction
If you need to modify serial port parameters in RUN, you
must operate the modification identifier and write a
COM1 Serial port parameter correct identifier to make the modification successful.
SD2541 R/W √
modification identifier After the modification is successful, the value is
automatically cleared. For details about the operation
method, see Description of the PROTPARA Instruction.
0H : Wecon Modbus slave station
2H : ModbusRTU slave station
3H : ModbusASCII slave station
SD2542 COM1 Protocol settings R/W √
10H : User-defined protocol
20H : ModbusRTU Master station
30H : ModbusASCII Master station
If the communication PROTOCOL needs to be modified in
RUN, it must calculate the modification identifier and
write the correct identifier to make the modification
SD2543 COM1 Protocol modification logo R/W √
successful. After the modification is successful, the value
is automatically cleared. For details, see the PROTOCOL
instruction.
SD2544 COM1 Station number setting Value range: 0~255 Default value: 0 R/W √
If the communication STATION number needs to be
modified in RUN, it must calculate the modification
SD2545 COM1 Station number modification logo identifier and write the correct identifier to make the R/W √
modification successful. After the modification is
successful, the value will be cleared automatically. For
699 WECON technology Co., Ltd.
 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
the specific calculation method, see the STATION
instruction.
SD2546 Sending interval 0.1ms R/W √
SD2547 Communication timeout setting 10ms R/W √
SD2548 COM1 Timeout retries R/W √
COM1 Character interval timeout setting
SD2549 R/W √
0.1ms
SD2550 COM1 STX value R/W √
SD2551 COM1 ETX value R/W √
In case of PLC upload and download
timeout, the upload and download will
SD2555 Unit: 100ms, default: 300 (30s) √
be interrupted if the transmission does
not continue after the timeout.
SD2560 The amount of data received by COM1 R √
SD2561 COM1 last error R √
SD2562 COM1 Current error R √
SD2563 COM1 Error steps R √
SD2564 COM1 Error station number R √
SD2565 COM1 Cumulative number of errors R √
SD2566 COM1 Number of error steps (double R √
SD2567 world) R √
SD2568 Reserved R √
SD2569 Reserved R √
SD2570 Reserved R √
SD2571 Reserved R √
Communication com2
Default: Baud rate 115200, Stop bit 1, data bit 8, parity
bit None
SD2590 COM2 Communication port settings R/W √
For details, see the description of the PROTPARA
instruction.
If you need to modify serial port parameters in RUN, you
must calculate the modification identifier and write a
COM2 Serial port parameter correct identifier to make the modification successful.
SD2591 R/W √
modification identifier After the modification is successful, the value is
automatically cleared. For details about the calculation
method, see the PROTPARA instruction description.
0H: Wecon Modbus slave station
2H: ModbusRTU slave station
3H: ModbusASCII slave station
SD2592 COM2 Protocol settings R/W √
10H: User-defined protocol
20H: ModbusRTU master station
30H: ModbusASCII master station
If the communication PROTOCOL needs to be modified in
RUN, it must calculate the modification identifier and
write the correct identifier to make the modification
SD2593 COM2 Protocol modification logo R/W √
successful. After the modification is successful, the value
is automatically cleared. For details, see the PROTOCOL
instruction.
SD2594 COM2 Station number setting Value range: 0 to 255 Default value: 0 R/W √
If the communication STATION number needs to be
modified in RUN, it must calculate the modification
identifier and write the correct identifier to make the
SD2595 Station number modification logo R/W √
modification successful. After the modification is
successful, the value will be cleared automatically. For
the specific calculation method, see the STATION

700 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
instruction.

SD2596 Sending interval Unit: 0.1ms, Default: 0 R/W √

SD2597 Communication timeout setting Unit: 10ms,Default: 100ms R/W √
SD2598 COM2 Timeout retries Default: 0 R/W √
COM2 Character interval timeout setting
SD2599 Unit: 0.1ms, Default: 10（1ms） R/W √
0.1ms
COM2 user-defined protocol starting
SD2600 Default: 0 R/W √
symbol
SD2601 COM2 user-defined protocol end symbol Default: 0 R/W √
SD2610 The amount of data received by COM2 Amount of data received by the storage serial port R ×
SD2611 COM2 last error Stores the last communication error code R ×
SD2612 COM2 Current error Stores the current communication error code R ×
Stores the number of steps in the ladder diagram for the
SD2613 COM2 Error steps R ×
current communication error
The station number that stores the current
SD2614 COM2 Error station number R ×
communication error
Stores the accumulative number of communication
SD2615 COM2 Cumulative number of errors R ×
errors

List of special devices related to Ethernet

Power-off
SD number Name Content R/W
save
SD2680 The 1st byte of IP address R/W √
SD2681 The 2nd byte of IP address R/W √
Local IP address
SD2682 The 3rd byte of IP address R/W √
SD2683 The 4th byte of IP address R/W √
SD2684 The 1st byte of subnet mask R/W √
SD2685 The 2nd byte of subnet mask R/W √
Local subnet mask
SD2686 The 3rd byte of subnet mask R/W √
SD2687 The 4th byte of subnet mask R/W √
SD2688 The 1st byte of default gateway R/W √
SD2689 The 2nd byte of default gateway R/W √
Local default gateway
SD2690 The 3rd byte of default gateway R/W √
SD2691 The 4th byte of default gateway R/W √
SD2692 The 1st byte of MAC address R/W √
SD2693 The 2nd byte of MAC address R/W √
SD2694 The 3rd byte of MAC address R/W √
Local MAC address
SD2695 The 4th byte of MAC address R/W √
SD2696 The 5th byte of MAC address R/W √
SD2697 The 6th byte of MAC address R/W √
0: 100Mbps/half-duplex
1: 100Mbps/full duplex
SD2700 Communication speed R ×
2: 10Mbps/half-duplex
3: 10Mbps/full duplex

701 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
The maximum connection number supported by The maximum client connection number
SD2702 R/W ×
ModbusTCP server supported by local ModbusTCP server
SD2703 Number of ModbusTCP connections Number of local ModbusTCP connections R ×
SD2710 Error code Ethernet error code R ×
-1: system default ModbusTCP server
SD2711 The socket ID of the error this time R ×
0 to 5: custom socket error
SD2720 Input the low bit of the number of ping requests R ×
Number of external input ping command
SD2721 Input the high bit of the number of ping requests R ×
SD2722 Input the low bit of the number of ping replies R ×
Number of replies to external ping commands
SD2723 Input the high bit of the number of ping replies R ×
SD2724 Output the low bit of the number of ping requests R ×
Number of ping commands sent
SD2725 Output the high bit of the number of ping requests R ×
SD2726 Output the low bit of the number of ping replies Number of replies after receiving the ping R ×
SD2727 OUtput the high bit of the number of ping replies command R ×
SD2728 The sending number of arp package Count the sending number of arp package R ×
SD2729 The receiving number of arp package Count the receiving number of arp package R ×
SD2730 The sending number of IP package Count the sending number of IP package R ×
SD2731 The receiving number of IP package Count the receiving number of IP package R ×
SD2732 The sending number of tcp package Count the sending number of tcp package R ×
SD2733 The receiving number of tcp package Count the receiving number of tcp package R ×
SD2734 The sending number of udp package Count the sending number of udp package R ×
SD2735 The receiving number of udp package Count the receiving number of udp package R ×
SD2740 Connection 1 Local port number R ×
SD2741 Connection 1 The 1st byte of IP address R ×
SD2742 Connection 1 The 2nd byte of IP address R ×
SD2743 Connection 1 The 3rd byte of IP address R ×
SD2744 Connection 1 The 4th byte of IP address R ×
SD2745 Connection 1 Peer port number The first of ModbusTCP client to connect to R ×
SD2746 Reserved this PLC connection information and errors R ×
SD2747 Reserved
SD2748 Connection 1 Error code R ×

SD2749 Connection 1 Error communication times low word R ×

SD2750 Connection 1 Error communication times high word R ×

SD2760 Connection 2 Local port number R ×
SD2761 Connection 2 The 1st byte of IP address R ×
SD2762 Connection 2 The 2nd byte of IP address The second of ModbusTCP client to connect R ×
SD2763 Connection 2 The 3rd byte of IP address to this PLC connection information and errors R ×
SD2764 Connection 2 The 4th byte of IP address R ×
SD2765 Connection 2 Port number R ×

702 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
SD2766 Reserved R ×
SD2767 Reserved
SD2768 Connection 2 Error code R ×
SD2769 Connection 2 Error communication times low word R ×
SD2770 Connection 2 Error communication times high word R ×
SD2780 Connection 3 Local port number R ×
SD2781 Connection 3 The 1st byte of IP address R ×
SD2782 Connection 3 The 2nd byte of IP address R ×
SD2783 Connection 3 The 3rd byte of IP address R ×
SD2784 Connection 3 The 4th byte of IP address R ×
The third of ModbusTCP client to connect to
SD2785 Connection 3 Peer port number R ×
this PLC connection information and errors
SD2786 Reserved R ×
SD2787 Reserved
SD2788 Connection 3 Error code R ×
SD2789 Connection 3 Error communication times low word R ×
SD2780 Connection 3 Error communication times high word R ×
Log information

Power-down
SD label Name Content R/W
data preservation
SD4000 Lower bit of ladder diagram writing number Total download times of storage ladder R √
SD4001 Higher bit of ladder diagram writing number diagram, power off preservation R √
SD4002 Lower bit of PLC parameter writing number Total download times of storage R √
SD4003 Higher bit of PLC parameter writing number parameters, power off preservation R √
SD4004 Lower bit of password writing number Store the total times of writing password, R √
SD4005 Higher bit of password writing number power off preservation R √
SD4006 Lower bit of comment writing number Store the total times of downloading R √
SD4007 Lower bit of comment writing number comment, power off preservation R √
SD4008 Lower bit of total startup times Store the total number of PLC startup times, R √
SD4009 Higher bit of total startup times power off preservation R √
SD4010 Lower bit of total startup time Store the total startup time of PLC, power R √
SD4011 Higher bit of total startup time off preservation, unit s R √
SD4012 Lower bit of total startup RUN time Store the total number of PLC startup times, R √
SD4013 Higher bit of total startup RUN time power off preservation R √
SD4014 Lower bit of this startup RUN time Store the total startup time of PLC, power R ×
SD4015 Lower bit of this startup RUN time off preservation, unit s R ×

703 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Appendix 3 Error code Sorting
PLC hardware error

Error code Instruction Action Treatment plan Detection time

PLC power supply voltage is Stop running Prompt that the power supply is abnormal,
1000 Always
abnormal PWR light is off please replace the power supply
The scan time of the program exceeds the
watchdog timeout time setting. Modify the
1100 Watchdog timeout Stop running Always
setting value of the timeout time (SD122)
or the program.
FLASH write times exceed limit
(information display of read times The number of FLASH writes exceeds When downloading
1200 Stop running
of upper computer, SD4000 double 20,000, and the PLC needs to be replaced the program
word)
Failed to read production FLASH is damaged, PLC needs to be
1201 Stop running When STOP→RUN
information replaced
It is detected that the battery
• Confirm the battery connection. When the END
1380 voltage is too low, which will affect keep running
• Replace the battery in time. instruction is executed
the power-down retention Devices
When the END
1382 User-defined exception keep running No need to deal with
instruction is executed
Circuit program execution error

Error code Instruction Action Treatment plan Detection time

1400 Program abnormality caused by STOP→RUN Stop running When STOP→RUN
Check whether the parameter
1401 Program exception caused by STOP Stop running STOP
configuration is incorrectly configured,
The execution of the Circuit program is When the Circuit
1402 Stop running and whether the Circuit program uses
caused by the program exception an unsupported instruction. program is running
1403 Program abnormality caused by RUN→STOP Stop running When RUN→STOP
Circuit program conversion is executed in the Detect OUT T instruction in Circuit When the END
1500 Stop running
END instruction OUT T label is wrong program instruction is executed
Check whether an undefined program
1501 Null pointer error Stop running When initializing
name is used

PLC parameter error

Error code Instruction Action Treatment plan Detection time

Number of I/O points allocated by
2000 program is different from the actual Stop running Check the configuration of I/O points When STOP→RUN
number of hardware I/O points
Set the parameters of the standard input
2001 and output module for the high-speed Stop running Check input point parameter configuration When STOP→RUN
pulse input and output module
The installed expansion module exceeds
2002 Stop running Reduce the installation of expansion modules When STOP→RUN
the maximum number
X point multiplexing, the same point is
2003 used as AB phase high-speed input, but Stop running Check input mode configuration When STOP→RUN
also as one-way input or interrupt input
Configure high-speed input IO error,
2004 Stop running Check the value of parameter 1 of CNTCFG Command runtime
CNTCFG instruction parameter write
2100 Memory capacity setting error Stop running Check the memory capacity setting When STOP→RUN
2101 Wrong setting of holding area Stop running Check the setting of the holding register When STOP→RUN
2102 Setting of the comment area is wrong Stop running Check the annotation settings When STOP→RUN
2103 File register area setting error Stop running Check file storage area settings When STOP→RUN
The upper and lower computer programs are
2200 Inconsistent program verification Stop running When STOP→RUN
inconsistent, please upload or download

704 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
again
The upper and lower computer parameters
Inconsistent check sums of special
2201 Stop running are inconsistent, please upload or download When STOP→RUN
parameters
again
2202 Special parameter setting error Stop running Check the settings of special parameters When STOP→RUN
Please check the correspondence table
PLC EDITOR2 and PLC firmware version
2203 Stop running between PLC EDITOR2 and firmware version, When STOP→RUN
are inconsistent
reinstall PLC EDITOR2 or upgrade firmware
When the END
The current scan period exceeds the
2380 keep running Modify the constant scan period setting instruction is
constant scan period setting value
executed
2400 Event exceeds maximum range Stop running Check whether the event setting exceeds 100 When STOP→RUN
Whether to establish the correct event
2401 Event executor is empty Stop running When STOP→RUN
procedure
Whether to establish the correct event
2402 Event clearer is empty Stop running When STOP→RUN
procedure
Timed interrupt exceeds the maximum Check whether the timer interrupt setting
2403 Stop running When STOP→RUN
range exceeds 100
Timed interrupt execution program is Whether to establish the correct timing
2404 Stop running When STOP→RUN
empty interrupt program
Check whether the timer interrupt priority is
2405 Timed interrupt priority setting error Stop running When STOP→RUN
set to 0 to 2
High-speed counting interrupt exceeds Check whether the high-speed counting
2406 Stop running When STOP→RUN
the maximum range interrupt setting exceeds 100
High-speed counting interrupt execution Whether to establish the correct high-speed
2407 Stop running When STOP→RUN
program is empty counting interrupt program
Check whether the high-speed counting
2408 High-speed counter priority setting error Stop running When STOP→RUN
interrupt priority is set to 0 to 2
Input interruption exceeds the Check whether the external interrupt setting
2409 Stop running When STOP→RUN
maximum range exceeds 16
Input interrupt execution program is Whether to establish the correct external
240A Stop running When STOP→RUN
empty interrupt program
Check whether the external interrupt priority
240B Input interrupt priority setting error Stop running When STOP→RUN
is set to 0 to 2
High-speed counter channel exceeds the
2500 Stop running Detect high-speed input configuration When STOP→RUN
maximum range*/
High-speed counter mode setting
2501 Stop running Detect high-speed input configuration When STOP→RUN
error*/
The multiplication setting of the
2502 Stop running Detect high-speed input configuration When STOP→RUN
high-speed counter is wrong*/
The counting direction of the high-speed
2503 Stop running Detect high-speed input configuration When STOP→RUN
counter is set incorrectly*/
High-speed counter interrupts were
used, but high-speed counters were not
Check to see if there are contacts to turn off 100us interrupt
2504 turned on using OUT HSC instructions, keep running
the OUT HSC instruction execution time
and values of HSC soft components were
modified
After the high-speed counter is turned View project When OUT HSC
2580 on, but the axis high-speed counter keep running management→parameters→high-speed instruction is
enable is not configured counting configuration executed
High-speed counter interrupts were
used, but high-speed counters were not
See if there are any contacts that have the 100us interrupt
2581 turned on using OUT HSC instructions, keep running
OUT HSC instruction turned off execution time
and values of HSC soft components were
modified
1. View project management → Parameters
The REF instruction was used to refresh
→ High-speed counting configuration → When the REF
the speedometer value, but no OUT HSC
2582 keep running Whether to use instruction is
instruction was used to turn on the
2. Check if there are any contacts with OUT executed
high-speed counter for the channel
HSC instruction turned off
High-speed counter conflicts with the Detect high-speed input or external interrupt
2600 Stop running When STOP→RUN
interrupted X point configuration
705 WECON technology Co., Ltd.
 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
PLC communication error

Error code Instruction Action Treatment plan Detection time

There may be interference on the
keep When the instruction
3080 COM1 data receiving error communication line, it is recommended to
running is executed
connect the ground wire.
Check the wiring, check whether the serial
port parameter settings correspond to
master and slave, and check whether there
keep When the instruction
3081 COM1 data receiving timeout is interference.
running is executed
Check whether the slave station is too late
to respond. For this reason, you can try to
increase the sending interval SD2546.
There may be interference on the
keep When the instruction
3082 COM1 CRC check error communication line, it is recommended to
running is executed
connect the ground wire.
There may be interference on the
keep When the instruction
3083 COM1 LRC check error communication line, it is recommended to
running is executed
connect the ground wire.
Check the slave station number setting.
keep And check whether there is any problem When the instruction
3084 COM1 station number configuration error
running with the receiving and sending mechanism is executed
from the station.
keep When the instruction
3085 COM1 send buffer overflow Contact a technician if this error occurs
running is executed
keep Check whether the set function code is a When the instruction
3086 COM1 function code error
running function code supported by PLC is executed
Check whether the slave station has this
keep When the instruction
3087 COM1 address error address (please refer to Modbus Abnormal
running is executed
02)
keep Check whether the communication length When the instruction
3088 COM1 length error
running exceeds the Modbus range is executed
Check the parameters of the instruction for
errors.
keep When the instruction
3089 COM1 data error Check whether the slave station supports
running is executed
the setting of this value. (Please refer to
Modbus exception 03)
Slave station returns information: Slave
Keep When the instruction
308A COM1 slave is busy station is busy (please refer to Modbus
running is executed
Abnormal 06)
Check whether the slave station supports
keep When the instruction
308B COM1 slave does not support function codes this function code (please refer to Modbus
running is executed
exception 01)
Slave station returns information: Slave
keep station is faulty, please check whether the When the instruction
308C COM1 slave failure
running slave station is faulty (please refer to is executed
Modbus Abnormal 04))
Slave station return information: slave
keep When the instruction
308D COM1 slave confirmation station confirmation (please refer to
running is executed
Modbus abnormal 05)
keep When the instruction
308E
running is executed
keep When the instruction
308F COM1 sending timeout Contact a technician if this error occurs
running is executed
keep Check if the other device is sending data all When the instruction
3090 Receive buffer overflow
running the time is executed
Returned information from the station:
keep When the instruction
30A0 COM1 unavailable gateway unavailable gateway (please refer to
running is executed
Modbus exception 0A)
COM1 indicates that no response was Slave station returns information: soft
keep When the instruction
30A1 obtained from the target device. Usually components is not in the network (please
running is executed
means that the device is not in the network refer to Modbus exception 0B)
706 WECON technology Co., Ltd.
 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
There may be interference on the
keep When the instruction
3180 COM2 data receiving error communication line, it is recommended to
running is executed
connect the ground wire.
Check the wiring, check whether the serial
port parameter settings correspond to
master and slave. Check whether there is
keep When the instruction
3181 COM2 data receiving timeout interference.
running is executed
Check whether the slave station is too late
to respond. For this reason, you can try to
increase the sending interval SD2546.
There may be interference on the
keep When the instruction
3182 COM2 CRC check error communication line, it is recommended to
running is executed
connect the ground wire.
There may be interference on the
keep When the instruction
3183 COM2 LRC check error communication line, it is recommended to
running is executed
connect the ground wire.
Check the slave station number setting.
keep And check whether there is any problem When the instruction
3184 COM2 station number configuration error
running with the receiving and sending mechanism is executed
from the station.
keep When the instruction
3185 COM2 send buffer overflow Contact a technician if this error occurs
running is executed
keep Check whether the set function code is a When the instruction
3186 COM2 function code error
running function code supported by PLC is executed
Check whether the slave station has this
keep When the instruction
3187 COM2 address error address (please refer to Modbus Abnormal
running is executed
02)
keep Check whether the communication length When the instruction
3188 COM2 length error
running exceeds the Modbus range is executed
Check the parameters of the instruction for
errors.
keep When the instruction
3189 COM2 data error Check whether the slave station supports
running is executed
the setting of this value. (Please refer to
Modbus exception 03)
Slave station returns information: Slave
keep When the instruction
318A COM2 slave is busy station is busy (please refer to Modbus
running is executed
Abnormal 06)
Check whether the slave station supports
keep When the instruction
318B COM2 slave does not support function codes this function code (please refer to Modbus
running is executed
exception 01)
Slave station returns information: Slave
keep station is faulty, please check whether the When the instruction
318C COM2 slave failure
running slave station is faulty (please refer to is executed
Modbus Abnormal 04))
Slave station return information: slave
keep When the instruction
318D COM2 slave confirmation station confirmation (please refer to
running is executed
Modbus abnormal 05)
keep When the instruction
318E
running is executed
keep When the instruction
318F COM2 sending timeout Contact a technician if this error occurs
running is executed
Returned information from the station:
keep When the instruction
31A0 COM2 unavailable gateway unavailable gateway (please refer to
running is executed
Modbus exception 0A)
COM2 indicates that no response was Slave station returns information: soft
keep When the instruction
31A1 obtained from the target device. Usually components is not in the network (please
running is executed
means that the device is not in the network refer to Modbus exception 0B)
keep When the instruction
31C0 PLCLINK meter header exception Download the program again
running or function is applied

The communication port does not support keep When the instruction
31C1 Upgrade firmware
PLCLINK for the function running or function is applied

707 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
keep When the instruction
31C2 PLCLINK table version is not compatible Download the program again
running or function is applied

The number of PLCLINK commands is out of keep When the instruction

31C3 Check the number of commands
range. The current limit is 1 to 255 articles. running or function is applied

The station number in the PLCLINK form is o keep When the instruction
31C4 Check the site number in the form
ut of range running or function is applied

The PLCLINK form is outside the scope of the keep Check the range of software components c When the instruction
31C5
software component running orresponding to the table or function is applied

The PLCLINK form command uses software c keep Check the software components used for e When the instruction
31C6
omponents that are out of range running ach command in the table or function is applied

PLC operation error

Error code Instruction Action Processing scheme Detection time

When the instruction
3680 Ethernet data reception error Keep running Check the environment for interference.
is executed
Check whether the network cable is loose.
Check whether the network opposite end is
faulty and cannot send data.
When the instruction
3681 Ethernet data reception timeout Keep running Check whether the network opposite end is not
is executed
responding in time and the data is too late.
For this reason, try increasing the receive
timeout in the socket configuration.
Check the setting of slave station number.
ModbusTCP station number Check whether there is a problem with the When the instruction
3684 Keep running
configuration error receiving and sending mechanism of the slave is executed
station.
When the instruction
3685 ModbusTCP send buffer overflow Keep running Contact the technician for the error
is executed
Check whether the function code set is When the instruction
3686 ModbusTCP function code error Keep running
supported by the PLC. is executed
Check whether the slave station has the
When the instruction
3687 ModbusTCP address error Keep running address.
is executed
(Please refer to Modbus abnormality 02)
Check whether the communication length When the instruction
3688 ModbusTCP length error Keep running
exceeds the range of Modbus. is executed
Check whether the parameter of instruction is
incorrect. When the instruction
3689 ModbusTCP data error Keep running
Check whether the value set is supported by is executed
slave. (Please refer to Modbus abnormality 03)
Slave returns message: Slave is busy. When the instruction
368A ModbusTCP slave station is busy Keep running
(Please refer to Modbus abnormality 06) is executed
Check whether the function code is supported
ModbusTCP slave station does When the instruction
368B Keep running by slave. (Please refer to Modbus abnormality
not support function code is executed
01)
Slave returns message: Slave is faulty. When the instruction
368C ModbusTCP slave station fault Keep running
(Please refer to Modbus abnormality 04) is executed
ModbusTCP slave station Slave returns message: Slave confirmation. When the instruction
368D Keep running
confirmation (Please refer to Modbus abnormality 05) is executed
RS instruction could not be used when set to
ModbusTCP protocol currently When the instruction
368E Keep running slave protocol. Please change protocol or close
does not support this instruction is executed
the contact before the RS instruction.
When the instruction
368F Network port sending timeout Keep running Contact the technician for the error.
is executed
Check whether the other device has been When the instruction
3690 Receiving cache overflow Keep running
sending data. is executed
Slave returns message: Unavailable gateway. When the instruction
36A0 ModbusTCP unavailable gateway Keep running
(Please refer to Modbus abnormality 0A) is executed

708 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
ModbusTCP No response was
Slave returns message: The device is not on the
received from the target device. When the instruction
36A1 Keep running network.
Generally it means that the is executed
(Please refer to Modbus abnormality 0B)
device is not on the network.
ModbusTCP transaction Check whether the network is congested and When the instruction
36C0 Keep running
identifier error data cannot be received. is executed
ModbusTCP The server is full of Check whether SD2702 and SD2703 have too When the instruction
36C1 Keep running
available links many clients to link. is executed
The Ethernet protocol stack is When the instruction
36C8 Keep running Contact the technician for the error.
running out of space is executed
The number of links exceeded Check whether the total number of links When the instruction
36C9 Keep running
the limit exceeds the limit. is executed
Use the send completion flag to judge the
When the instruction
36CA The last sending is not complete Keep running current send is complete before sending the
is executed
next one.
Use flag bit device to judge whether the
connection is normal. If not, not data is sent. When the instruction
36CB TCP abnormal write Keep running
For example, after the closing flag is set,no data is executed
is sent.
When the instruction
36CC TCP abnormal output Keep running Contact the technician for the error.
is executed
Check whether a connection using the same When the instruction
36CD The IP address has been used Keep running
address information exists. is executed
When the instruction
36CE The server receiving link error Keep running Contact the technician for the error.
is executed
When the instruction
36CF TCP receiving buffer overflow Keep running Contact the technician for the error.
is executed
The TCP client may be enabled when the When the instruction
36D0 TCP connection failed Keep running
network cable is not connected. is executed
Abnormal when closing the link When the instruction
36D1 Keep running Contact the technician for the error.
initiatively is executed
It may be closed because of no response for a
An abnormal shutdown occurred When the instruction
36D2 Keep running long time. Check whether the opposite end is
inside the protocol stack is executed
online, and whether it could be pinged.
Check whether the opposite end initiates an
abnormal shutdown.
Initiate an RST link o the opposite When the instruction
36D3 Keep running As a client, the number of links on the opposite
end is executed
end iis full or the port on the opposite end is
not opened.
A single-ended shutdown of the When the instruction
36D4 Keep running Contact the technician for the error.
protocol stack occurs is executed
There are the same IP devices in the LAN, please When the instruction
36D5 There is an IP address conflict Keep running
change the IP address. is executed
There are the same MAC devices in the LAN, When the instruction
36D6 There is an MAC address conflict Keep running
please change the MAC address. is executed
When the instruction
36D7 TCP sending buffer overflow Keep running Contact the technician for the error.
is executed
IP address and port number may have been When the instruction
36D8 UDP abnormal connection Keep running
used. is executed
When the instruction
36D9 UDP sending buffer overflow Keep running Contact the technician for the error.
is executed
UDP insufficient memory space When the instruction
36DA Keep running Contact the technician for the error.
when sending is executed
When the instruction
36DB UDP failed to send Keep running Contact the technician for the error.
is executed
When the instruction
36DC UDP memory release failure Keep running Contact the technician for the error.
is executed
The data length that UDP received exceeds the When the instruction
36DD UDP receiving buffer overflow Keep running
limit value 512. is executed
The divisor in the division When the application
4080 Keep running Modify application instruction parameters
instruction is 0 instruction is executed
4081 Application instruction Keep running Modify application instruction parameters When the application

709 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
calculation data overflow instruction is executed
A data type that cannot be
When the application
4082 converted is entered in the Keep running Modify application instruction parameters
instruction is executed
application instruction
Any data of -0, non-normalized
number, non-number, and ±∞ is When the application
4083 Keep running Modify application instruction parameters
input in the application instruction is executed
command
Data beyond the specified range
is entered in the application
When the application
4084 instruction (for example, Keep running Modify application instruction parameters
instruction is executed
parameter 1 is specified as 0 ~ 1,
setting 2)
The output result in the read
application instruction exceeds
When the application
4085 device range (for example, the Keep running Modify application instruction parameters
instruction is executed
maximum D7999 of the D device,
and D8000 is used)
The output result in the writing
application instruction exceeds
When the application
4086 device range (for example, the Keep running Modify application instruction parameters
instruction is executed
maximum D7999 of the D device,
and D8000 is used)
The application instruction
When the application
4087 parameter uses an unsupported Keep running Modify application instruction parameters
instruction is executed
device
Multiple application instructions
When the application
4088 use the same axis at the same Keep running Modify application instruction parameters
instruction is executed
time and all have been activated
The number of application Check whether a restricted instruction is used in When the application
4089 Keep running
instructions exceeds the limit the Circuit program and exceeds the limit instruction is executed
The read length of the string
exceeds, the continuous length
When the application
408A of the string exceeds the limit Keep running Modify the length of the read string
instruction is executed
(currently 400) or exceeds the
limit within the instruction
When the character string is
read, the maximum range of When the application
408B Keep running View string terminator
device is read, but 00H is not instruction is executed
found.
Multiple application instruction
parameters use the same device, Check whether the DUTY command uses the When the application
408E Keep running
but the instruction does not same SM for output instruction is executed
allow device multiplexing
The firmware used does not
Upgrade to firmware that contains the When the application
408F support this command, please Keep running
instruction instruction is executed
upgrade to the latest firmware
The number of FOR ~ NEXT
instructions used does not When NEXT and END
Modify the corresponding relationship of the
4100 correspond or FOR ~ NEXT Keep running instructions are
FOR ~ NEXT instruction of the Circuit program
exceeds the maximum nesting executed
level
There is no jump destination
address of CJ or CALL, the result
of index modification, the label is
not defined, and P63 is executed
When the application
4180 in the CALL instruction when it is Keep running Modify application instruction parameters
instruction is executed
other than P0 to P4095. Because
P63 is a label to jump to END, it
cannot be used in the CALL
instruction
CJ instruction exceeds the When the application
4181 Keep running Modify application instruction parameters
maximum nesting level instruction is executed
710 WECON technology Co., Ltd.
 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
CALL instruction exceeds the When the application
4102 Keep running Modify application instruction parameters
maximum nesting level instruction is executed
Break exceeds maximum nesting When the application
4183 Keep running Modify application instruction parameters
level instruction is executed
When the application
4185 EI instruction popping error Keep running Modify application instruction parameters
instruction is executed
BREAK is not in the FOR ~ NEXT When the application
4186 Keep running Modify application instruction parameters
command instruction is executed
MC ~ MCR exceeds the When the application
4187 Keep running View the nesting relationship of MC and MCR
maximum nesting range instruction is executed
When using N in the MC nesting
When the application
4188 structure, the order from small Keep running Modify the N nesting corresponding to MC
instruction is executed
to large is not followed
SIMASK instruction specifies an Modify the interrupt name specified by SIMASK When the application
4189 Keep running
unset interrupt or the interrupt configuration instruction is executed
The sampling time (Ts) exceeds When the application
4D80 Keep running Modify application instruction parameters
the target range (Ts≦0) instruction is executed
The input filter constant (α)
When the application
4D81 exceeds the target range (α<0 or Keep running Modify application instruction parameters
instruction is executed
1025 < α)
The maximum ascent rate
When the application
4D82 (deltaT) exceeds the target range Keep running Modify application instruction parameters
instruction is executed
(deltaT <0 or 32000 ≦ deltaT)
The proportional gain (Kp) When the application
4D83 Keep running Modify application instruction parameters
exceeds the target range (Kp＜0) instruction is executed
The integral gain (Ki) exceeds the When the application
4D84 Keep running Modify application instruction parameters
target range (Ki＜0) instruction is executed
Differential gain (Kd) exceeds the When the application
4D85 Keep running Modify application instruction parameters
target range (Kd<0) instruction is executed
Sampling time (Ts)<operation When the application
4D86 Keep running Modify application instruction parameters
period instruction is executed
The proportional gain (Kp)
When the application
4D87 exceeds the target range (Kp<1 Keep running Modify application instruction parameters
instruction is executed
or Kp>3000)
The integration time (Ti) exceeds
When the application
4D88 the target range (Ti<0 or Keep running Modify application instruction parameters
instruction is executed
Ti>3600)
Differential time (Td) exceeds the When the application
4D89 Keep running Modify application instruction parameters
target range (Td<0 or Td>1000) instruction is executed
PID output upper limit is less When the application
4D90 Keep running Modify application instruction parameters
than lower limit instruction is executed
When the instruction
4E80 E-cam table loading error Keep running Modify application instruction parameters
is executed
The currently numbered form When the instruction
4E81 Keep running Modify application instruction parameters
has a cam in use is executed
When the instruction
4E82 Form address error Keep running Modify application instruction parameters
is executed
When the instruction
4E83 Table exceeds device range Keep running Modify application instruction parameters
is executed
When the instruction
4EC0 Electronic gear ratio setting error Keep running Modify application instruction parameters
is executed
DHSZ instruction minimum range When the instruction
4F80 Keep running Modify application instruction parameters
>= maximum range is executed
1. View project management → Parameters →
DHSCS, DHSCR, DHSZ commands
High-speed counting configuration → Whether
are enabled but high-speed When the instruction
4F81 Keep running to use
counter counting is not enabled is executed
2. Check if there are any contacts with OUT HSC
with OUT HSC instruction
command turned off

711 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Right expansion module error (communication error reported)

Error code Instruction Action Treatment plan Detection time

Detect the connection between the
7080 Expansion module and check error keep running expansion module and the host or whether Command runtime
there is external interference
Detect the connection between the
Expansion module communication
7081 keep running expansion module and the host or whether Command runtime
message is abnormal
there is external interference
Check the link between the expansion
7082 FROM/TO instruction error keep running Command runtime
module and the host
Expansion module access Check the link between the expansion
7083 keep running Command runtime
exception module and the host

Appendix 4 ASCII code comparison table

ASCII code comparison table

Bin Oct Dec Hex

Abbreviation/character Explanation
(Binary) (Octal) (Decimal) (Hexadecimal)
0000 0000 0 0 0x00 NUL(null) Null character

0000 0001 1 1 0x01 SOH(start of headline) Start of headline

0000 0010 2 2 0x02 STX (start of text) Start of text

0000 0011 3 3 0x03 ETX (end of text) End of text

0000 0100 4 4 0x04 EOT (end of transmission) End of transmission

0000 0101 5 5 0x05 ENQ (enquiry) Enquiry

0000 0110 6 6 0x06 ACK (acknowledge) Acknowledge

0000 0111 7 7 0x07 BEL (bell) Bell

0000 1000 10 8 0x08 BS (backspace) Backspace

0000 1001 11 9 0x09 HT (horizontal tab) Horizontal tab

0000 1010 12 10 0x0A LF (NL line feed, new line) Line feed

0000 1011 13 11 0x0B VT (vertical tab) Vertical tab

0000 1100 14 12 0x0C FF (NP form feed, new page) Form feed

0000 1101 15 13 0x0D CR (carriage return) Enter key

0000 1110 16 14 0x0E SO (shift out) No need to switch

0000 1111 17 15 0x0F SI (shift in) Enable to switch

0001 0000 20 16 0x10 DLE (data link escape) data link escape

0001 0001 21 17 0x11 DC1 (device control 1) Device control 1

0001 0010 22 18 0x12 DC2 (device control 2) Device control 2

0001 0011 23 19 0x13 DC3 (device control 3) Device control 3

0001 0100 24 20 0x14 DC4 (device control 4) Device control 4

0001 0101 25 21 0x15 NAK (negative acknowledge) Decline to receive

0001 0110 26 22 0x16 SYN (synchronous idle) Synchronous idle

0001 0111 27 23 0x17 ETB (end of trans. block) Ends the transfer block

712 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
0001 1000 30 24 0x18 CAN (cancel) Cancel

0001 1001 31 25 0x19 EM (end of medium) End of medium

0001 1010 32 26 0x1A SUB (substitute) Substitute

0001 1011 33 27 0x1B ESC (escape) Escape

0001 1100 34 28 0x1C FS (file separator) File separator

0001 1101 35 29 0x1D GS (group separator) Group separator

0001 1110 36 30 0x1E RS (record separator) Record separator

0001 1111 37 31 0x1F US (unit separator) Unit separator

0010 0000 40 32 0x20 (space) Space

0010 0001 41 33 0x21 ! !

0010 0010 42 34 0x22 " "

0010 0011 43 35 0x23 # #

0010 0100 44 36 0x24 $ $

0010 0101 45 37 0x25 % %

0010 0110 46 38 0x26 & &

0010 0111 47 39 0x27 ' '

0010 1000 50 40 0x28 ( (

0010 1001 51 41 0x29 ) )

0010 1010 52 42 0x2A * *

0010 1011 53 43 0x2B + +

0010 1100 54 44 0x2C , ,

0010 1101 55 45 0x2D - -

0010 1110 56 46 0x2E . .

0010 1111 57 47 0x2F / /

0011 0000 60 48 0x30 0 0

0011 0001 61 49 0x31 1 1

0011 0010 62 50 0x32 2 2

0011 0011 63 51 0x33 3 3

0011 0100 64 52 0x34 4 4

0011 0101 65 53 0x35 5 5

0011 0110 66 54 0x36 6 6

0011 0111 67 55 0x37 7 7

0011 1000 70 56 0x38 8 8

0011 1001 71 57 0x39 9 9

0011 1010 72 58 0x3A : :

0011 1011 73 59 0x3B ; ;

0011 1100 74 60 0x3C < <

0011 1101 75 61 0x3D = =

0011 1110 76 62 0x3E > >

713 WECON technology Co., Ltd.
 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
0011 1111 77 63 0x3F ? ?

0100 0000 100 64 0x40 @ @

0100 0001 101 65 0x41 A A

0100 0010 102 66 0x42 B B

0100 0011 103 67 0x43 C C

0100 0100 104 68 0x44 D D

0100 0101 105 69 0x45 E E

0100 0110 106 70 0x46 F F

0100 0111 107 71 0x47 G G

0100 1000 110 72 0x48 H H

0100 1001 111 73 0x49 I I

1001010 112 74 0x4A J J

0100 1011 113 75 0x4B K K

0100 1100 114 76 0x4C L L

0100 1101 115 77 0x4D M M

0100 1110 116 78 0x4E N N

0100 1111 117 79 0x4F O O

0101 0000 120 80 0x50 P P

0101 0001 121 81 0x51 Q Q

0101 0010 122 82 0x52 R R

0101 0011 123 83 0x53 S S

0101 0100 124 84 0x54 T T

0101 0101 125 85 0x55 U U

0101 0110 126 86 0x56 V V

0101 0111 127 87 0x57 W W

0101 1000 130 88 0x58 X X

0101 1001 131 89 0x59 Y Y

0101 1010 132 90 0x5A Z Z

0101 1011 133 91 0x5B [ [

0101 1100 134 92 0x5C \ \

0101 1101 135 93 0x5D ] ]

0101 1110 136 94 0x5E ^ ^

0101 1111 137 95 0x5F _ _

0110 0000 140 96 0x60 ` `

0110 0001 141 97 0x61 a a

0110 0010 142 98 0x62 b b

0110 0011 143 99 0x63 c c

0110 0100 144 100 0x64 d d

0110 0101 145 101 0x65 e e

714 WECON technology Co., Ltd.
 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
0110 0110 146 102 0x66 f f

0110 0111 147 103 0x67 g g

0110 1000 150 104 0x68 h h

0110 1001 151 105 0x69 i i

0110 1010 152 106 0x6A j j

0110 1011 153 107 0x6B k k

0110 1100 154 108 0x6C l l

0110 1101 155 109 0x6D m m

0110 1110 156 110 0x6E n n

0110 1111 157 111 0x6F o o

0111 0000 160 112 0x70 p p

0111 0001 161 113 0x71 q q

0111 0010 162 114 0x72 r r

0111 0011 163 115 0x73 s s

0111 0100 164 116 0x74 t t

0111 0101 165 117 0x75 u u

0111 0110 166 118 0x76 v v

0111 0111 167 119 0x77 w w

0111 1000 170 120 0x78 x x

0111 1001 171 121 0x79 y y

0111 1010 172 122 0x7A z z

0111 1011 173 123 0x7B { {

0111 1100 174 124 0x7C | |

0111 1101 175 125 0x7D } }

0111 1110 176 126 0x7E ~ ~

0111 1111 177 127 0x7F DEL (delete) Delete

Appendix 5 Instruction list

Application instruction (by instruction type)

Reference
Classification Instruction Function LX5V
page
LD Normally open contact operation start instruction ○ 26
LDI Normally closed contact operation start instruction ○ 26
AND Normally open contact series connection instruction ○ 26
Program flow
ANI Normally closed contact series connection instruction ○ 26
instruction
OR one normally open contact parallel connection instruction ○ 26
ORI one normally closed contact parallel connection instruction ○ 26
LDP Rising edge pulse operation start instruction ○ 30

715 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
LDF Falling edge pulse operation start instruction ○ 30
ANDP Rising edge pulse series connection instruction ○ 30
ANDF Falling edge pulse series connection instruction ○ 30
ORP Rising edge pulse parallel connection instruction ○ 30
ORF Falling edge pulse parallel connection instruction ○ 30
ANB Ladder diagram block series connection instruction ○ 33
ORB Ladder diagram block parallel connection instruction ○ 33
MPS Operation result push, read, pop ○ 34
MRD Operation result push, read, pop ○ 34
MPP Operation result push, read, pop ○ 34
INV Invert the result of the operation ○ 35
MEP Pulse the result of the operation ○ 36
MEF Pulse the result of the operation ○ 36
OUT Output instruction ○ 37
SET Setting instruction ○ 38
RST Reset instruction ○ 40
PLF Falling edge output ○ 42
PLS Rising edge output ○ 43
END Program end instruction ○ 43
CJ Conditional jump ○ 44
CALL Subroutine call ○ 48
DI Interrupt prohibited ○ 50
EI Interrupt allowed ○ 50
SIMASK Interrupt mask ○ 54
错误！未定义
FOR~NEXT Cycle instruction ○
书签。

错误！未定义
BREAK Break cycle ○
书签。

MC Main control instruction ○ 58

MCR Main control instruction ○ 58
WDT Watchdog timer ○ 61
OUT T Timer output ○ 62
Timer, counter and
OUT C Counter output ○ 63
output instruction
OUT LC Long counter output ○ 64
OUT HSC High-speed counter switch ○ 69
错误！未定义
High-speed input DHSCS High-speed comparison set ○
书签。
counter
DHSCR High-speed comparison reset ○ 72
DHSZ High-speed zone comparison ○ 73
Transmit comparison MOV 16-bit transmission ○ 76

716 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
instructions DMOV 32-bit transmission ○ 77
错误！未定义
BMOV Batch transmission ○
书签。

FMOV 16-bit multicast ○ 79

DFMOV 32-bit multicast ○ 80
SMOV Bit shift ○ 81
CML 16-bit invert transmission ○ 83
DCML 32-bit invert transmission ○ 84
CMP 16-bit data comparison output ○ 85
DCMP 32-bit data comparison output ○ 86
XCH 16-bit data exchange ○ 87
DXCH 32-bit data exchange ○ 88
ZCP 16-bit data interval comparison ○ 89
DZCP 32-bit data interval comparison ○ 90
ROR 16-bit cycle shift right ○ 92
DROR 32-bit cycle shift right ○ 93
RCR 16-bit cycle shift right with carry ○ 94
DRCR 32-bit cycle shift right with carry ○ 96
97 错误！未
ROL 16-bit cycle shift left ○
定义书签。

DROL 32-bit cycle shift left ○ 98

RCL 16-bit cycle shift left with carry ○ 99
Cycle bit shift
DRCL 32-bit cycle shift left with carry ○ 100
instruction
SFTR n-bit shift right of the n-bit data ○ 101
SFTL n-bit shift left of the n-bit data ○ 102
WSFR n-word shift right of the n-word data ○ 103
WSFL n-word shift left of the n-word data ○ 104
SFR n-bit shift right of the 16-bit data ○ 107
DSFR one word shift right of the n-bit data ○ 106
SFL n-bit shift left of the 16-bit data ○ 107
DSFL one word shift left of the n-bit data ○ 108
ADD 16-bit addition operation ○ 109
DADD 32-bit addition operation ○ 110
SUB 16-bit subtraction operation ○ 112
DSUB 32-bit subtraction operation ○ 113
Arithmetic operation
MUL 16-bit multiplication operation ○ 115
instruction
DMUL 32-bit multiplication operation ○ 116
DIV 16-bit division operation ○ 117
DDIV 32-bit division operation ○ 118
INC 16-bit data increment ○ 119

717 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DINC 32-bit data increment ○ 120
DEC 16-bit data decrement ○ 121
DDEC 32-bit data decrement ○ 122
NEG 16-bit complement ○ 123
DNEG 32-bit complement ○ 124
WOR 16-bit data logic OR ○ 125
DOR 32-bit data logic OR ○ 126
Logic operation
WAND 16-bit data logic AND ○ 127
instruction
DAND 3-bit data logic AND ○ 128
WXOR 16-bit data logic exclusive OR ○ 129
DXOR 32-bit data logic exclusive OR ○ 130
PRUN Octal bit transmission (16-bit data) ○ 131
错误！未定义
ANS Alarm setting ○
书签。

ANR Alarm reset ○ 142

BON 16-bit data bit judgement ○ 143
DBON 32-bit data bit judgement ○ 144
ENCO Encode ○ 145
DECO Decode ○ 146
SUM The ON bits of 16-bit data ○ 147
DSUM The ON bits of 32-bit data ○ 148
MEAN 16-bit data mean value ○ 149
错误！未定义
DMEAN 32-bit data mean value ○
书签。

SQR 16-bit square root ○ 151

Data processing DSQR 32-bit square root ○ 152

instruction WSUM 16-bit data sum value ○ 153
错误！未定义
DWSUM 32-bit data sum value ○
书签。

SORT 16-bit data sorting ○ 155

SORT2 16-bit data sorting ○ 158
DSORT2 32-bit data sorting ○ 161
SWAP 16-bit high and low byte swap ○ 164
DSWAP 32-bit high and low byte swap ○ 165
BTOW Byte unit data merge ○ 166
WTOB Byte unit data separation ○ 168
DIS 4-bit separation of 16-bit data ○ 170
UNI 4-bit combination of 16-bit data ○ 171
ZRST Data batch reset ○ 172
ZSET Data batch set ○ 174

718 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
CRC cyclic redundancy check instruction ○ 175
错误！未定义
BCC BIN16 and BIN8 bit data addition, subtraction and exclusive check ○
书签。

错误！未定义
MAX BIN16 bit The maximum value of 16-bit data ○
书签。

错误！未定义
DMAX BIN32 bit The maximum value of 32-bit data ○
书签。

错误！未定义
MIN BIN16 bit The minimum value of 16-bit data ○
书签。

错误！未定义
DMIN BIN32 bit The minimum value of 32-bit data ○
书签。

Matrix input
MTR Matrix input ○ 186
instruction
ABSD BIN 16-bit data absolute method ○ 188
DABSD BIN 32-bit data absolute method ○ 190
SER 16-bit data search ○ 192
DSER 32-bit data search ○ 193
ALT Bit device output inversion ○ 195
Convenient
INCD BIN 16-bit data relative method ○ 197
instruction
RAMP Rotary table proximity control ○ 199
ROTC Rotary table proximity control ○ 201
STMR Special function timer ○ 204
TTMR Teaching timer ○ 206
TRH Conversion of wet and dry bulb temperature and humidity ○ 208
ARWS Arrow switch ○ 216
DSW Numeric key input ○ 219
错误！未定义
HKY Hexadecimal numeric key input ○
书签。

DHKY 32 digit key input ○ 224

External IO instruction
PR ASCII code printing ○ 226
SEGD numeric key input ○ 228
SEGL 7SEG code hour and minute display ○ 229
TKY Numeric key input ○ 232
DTKY Numeric key input ○ 234
BCD BIN → BCD ○ 236
BIN 4-bit BCD → BIN ○ 237
DBIN 8-bit BCD → BIN ○ 239
Data conversion FLT BIN integer → binary floating point number ○ 240
instruction DFLT BIN integer → binary floating point number ○ 242
VAL Character string → BIN 16-bit data conversion ○ 243
DVAL Character string → BIN 32-bit data conversion ○ 244
ASCI HEX code data → ASCII conversion ○ 246
719 WECON technology Co., Ltd.
 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
HEX ASCII → HEX code data conversion ○ 249
CCD Check code ○ 251
GBIN Gray code → BIN 16-bit data conversion ○ 254
DGBIN Gray code → BIN 32-bit data conversion ○ 254
GRY BIN 16-bit data → Gray code conversion ○ 256
DGRY BIN 32-bit data → Gray code conversion ○ 257
DPRUN Octal digit transmission (32-bit data) ○ 258
DACOS Single precision real number COS-1 operation ○ 259
DASIN Single precision real number SIN-1 operation ○ 263
DATAN Single precision real number TAN-1 operation ○ 264
DCOS Single precision real number COS operation ○ 265
DCOSH Single precision real number COSH operation ○ 266
DSIN Single precision real number SIN operation ○ 267
DSINH Single precision real number SINH operation ○ 268
DTAN Single precision real number TAN operation ○ 269
DTANH Single precision real number TANH operation ○ 270
DDEG Single precision real number radian → angle conversion ○ 271
DRAD Single precision real number conversion angle → radian conversion ○ 272
DEADD Single precision real number addition operation ○ 273
DESUB Single precision real number subtraction operation ○ 275
DEMUL Single precision real number multiplication operation ○ 277
DEDIV Single precision real number division operation ○ 279
Floating point
DEMOV Single precision real data transmission ○ 282
instruction
错误！未定义
DEBCD Binary floating point → decimal floating point conversion ○
书签。

DEBIN Decimal floating point → binary floating point conversion ○ 284

DENEG Single precision real number sign inversion ○ 285
DECMP Single precision real number comparison ○ 286
DEZCP Binary floating point bandwidth comparison ○ 287
DESQR Single precision real square root ○ 289
DESTR Single precision real number → string conversion ○ 290
DEVAL String → single precision real number conversion ○ 295
DEXP Single precision real number exponential operation ○ 299
INT Single precision real number → signed BIN 16-bit data ○ 300
DINT Single precision real number → signed BIN 32-bit data ○ 301
DLOG10 Single precision real number common logarithmic operation ○ 302
错误！未定义
DLOGE Single precision real number natural logarithm operation ○
书签。

LD= Number equal comparison ○ 304

Contact comparison LD> Number greater than comparison ○ 304
instruction LD< Number less than comparison ○ 304
LD>= Number greater than or equal to comparison ○ 304

720 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
LD<= Number less than or equal to comparison ○ 304
LD<> Number unequal comparison ○ 304
AND= Number equal comparison ○ 304
AND> Number greater than comparison ○ 304
AND< Number less than comparison ○ 304
AND>= Number greater than or equal to comparison ○ 304
AND<= Number less than or equal to comparison ○ 304
AND<> Number unequal comparison ○ 304
OR= Number equal comparison ○ 304
OR> Number greater than comparison ○ 304
OR< Number less than comparison ○ 304
OR>= Number greater than or equal to comparison ○ 304
OR<= Number less than or equal to comparison ○ 304
OR<> Number unequal comparison ○ 304
LDD= Number equal comparison ○ 306
LDD> Number greater than comparison ○ 306
LDD< Number less than comparison ○ 306
LDD>= Number greater than or equal to comparison ○ 306
LDD<= Number less than or equal to comparison ○ 306
LDD<> Number unequal comparison ○ 306
Floating number ANDD= Number equal comparison ○ 306
comparison ANDD> Number greater than comparison ○ 306
instruction ANDD< Number less than comparison ○ 306
ANDD>= Number greater than or equal to comparison ○ 306
ANDD<= Number less than or equal to comparison ○ 306
ANDD<> Number unequal comparison ○ 306
ORD= Number equal comparison ○ 306
ORD> Number greater than comparison ○ 306
ORD< Number less than comparison ○ 306
ORD>= Number greater than or equal to comparison ○ 306
ORD<= Number less than or equal to comparison ○ 306
ORD<> Number unequal comparison ○ 306
LDE= Floating number equal comparison ○ 308
LDE> Floating number greater than comparison ○ 308
LDE< Floating number less than comparison ○ 308
LDE>= Floating number greater than or equal to comparison ○ 308
LDE<= Floating number less than or equal to comparison ○ 308
LDE<> Floating number unequal comparison ○ 308
ANDE= Floating number equal comparison ○ 308
ANDE> Floating number greater than comparison ○ 308
ANDE< Floating number less than comparison ○ 308
ANDE>= Floating number greater than or equal to comparison ○ 308

721 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
ANDE<= Floating number less than or equal to comparison ○ 308
ANDE<> Floating number unequal comparison ○ 308
ORE= Floating number equal comparison ○ 308
ORD> Floating number greater than comparison ○ 308
ORE< Floating number less than comparison ○ 308
ORE>= Floating number greater than or equal to comparison ○ 308
ORE<= Floating number less than or equal to comparison ○ 308
ORE<> Floating number unequal comparison ○ 308
LDS= String number equal comparison ○ 310
LDS<> String number greater than comparison ○ 310
ANDS= String number less than comparison ○ 310
ANDS<> String number greater than or equal to comparison ○ 310
ORS= String number less than or equal to comparison ○ 310
ORS<> String number unequal comparison ○ 310
TADD The addition of clock data ○ 312
TSUB The subtraction of clock data ○ 314
TRD Clock data reading ○ 316
TWR Clock data writing ○ 317
HTOS 16-bit data conversion of time data (hour, minute, second → second) ○ 319
DHTOS 32-bit data conversion of time data (hour, minute, second → second) ○ 320
Clock operation
HOUR Hour measuring 16-bit ○ 321
instruction
DHOUR Hour measuring 32-bit ○ 323
错误！未定义
STOH 17-bit data conversion of time data (second → hour, minute, second) ○
书签。

DSTOH 33-bit data conversion of time data(second → hour, minute, second) ○ 326
TCMP Clock data comparison ○ 327
TZCP Clock data bandwidth comparison ○ 329
BAND BIN 16-bit data dead zone control ○ 339
DBAND BIN 32-bit data dead zone control ○ 340
BINDA BIN 16-bit data → Decimal ASCII conversion ○ 342
DBINDA BIN 32-bit data → Decimal ASCII conversion ○ 343
DABIN Decimal ASCII → BIN conversion ○ 344
DDABIN Decimal ASCII → BIN32-bit data conversion ○ 345
Data control
LIMIT BIN 16-bit data high and low limit control ○ 347
instruction
DLIMIT BIN 32-bit data high and low limit control ○ 348
SCL BIN 16-bit unit scale (coordinate data of each point) ○ 349
DSCL BIN 32-bit unit scale (coordinate data of each point) ○ 352
DSCL2 BIN 32-bit unit scale (X/Y coordinate data) ○ 358
ZONE BIN 16-bit data zone control ○ 361
DZONE BIN 32-bit data zone control ○ 362
BK+ BIN 16-bit block data addition operation ○ 363
Data block instruction
DBK+ BIN 32-bit block data addition operation ○ 365

722 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
错误！未定
BK- BIN 16-bit block data subtraction operation ○
义书签。
错误！未定
DBK- BIN 32-bit block data subtraction operation ○
义书签。
BKCMP= BIN 16-bit block data comparison ○ 371
DBKCMP= BIN 32-bit block data comparison ○ 372
BKCMP<> BIN 16-bit block data comparison ○ 373
DBKCMP<> BIN 32-bit block data comparison ○ 375
BKCMP> BIN 16-bit block data comparison ○ 376
DBKCMP> BIN 32-bit block data comparison ○ 377
错误！未定
BKCMP>= BIN 16-bit block data comparison ○
义书签。
错误！未定
DBKCMP>= BIN 32-bit block data comparison ○
义书签。
BKCMP< BIN 16-bit block data comparison ○ 381
DBKCMP< BIN 32-bit block data comparison ○ 383
BKCMP<= BIN 16-bit block data comparison ○ 384
DBKCMP<= BIN 32-bit block data comparison ○ 385
SFRD Shift read ○ 387
POP Read from the back of the data table ○ 389
Data table operation
SFWR Shift write ○ 391
instruction
FINS Data insertion of data sheet ○ 393
FDEL Data deletion of data sheet ○ 394
REF IO refresh ○ 396
IO refresh instruction
REFF Input refresh (with filter setting) ○ 398
Timing measure
DUTY Clock pulse generation instruction ○ 399
instruction
Random number
RND Random number instruction ○ 401
instruction
Preferred instruction DEXMN Preferred instruction ○ 402
错误！未定
ZRN Origin return ○
义书签。
错误！未定
DZRN Origin return ○
义书签。
错误！未定
DSZR Origin return ○
High-speed pulse 义书签。
output instruction 错误！未定
DDSZR Origin return ○
义书签。
错误！未定
DVIT 16-bit data relative positioning ○
义书签。
错误！未定
DDVIT 32-bit data relative positioning ○
义书签。

723 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DRVI Relative positioning ○ 413
DDRVI Relative positioning ○ 413
DRVA Absolute positioning ○ 415
SCL2 BIN16-bit unit scale (X/Y coordinate data) ○ 355
DDRVA Absolute positioning ○ 415
PLSR Pulse output with acceleration and deceleration ○ 417
DPLSR Pulse output with acceleration and deceleration ○ 417
PLSR2 Multi-speed positioning ○ 419
PLSV Variable speed operation ○ 425
DPLSV Variable speed operation ○ 425
PLSY Pulse output ○ 427
DPLSY Pulse output ○ 427
PWM BIN 16-bit pulse output ○ 429
PWM PWM perimeter mode ○ 430
G90G01 Absolute position line interpolation instruction ○ 432
G91G01 Relative position line interpolation instruction ○ 434
G90G02 Absolute position clockwise circular interpolation instruction ○ 436
G91G02 Relative position clockwise circular interpolation instruction ○ 439
G90G03 Absolute position counterclockwise circular interpolation instruction ○ 442
G91G03 Relative position counterclockwise circular interpolation instruction ○ 445
G90G02H Absolute position clockwise circular helical interpolation instruction ○ 448
G91G02H Relative position clockwise circular helical interpolation instruction ○ 451
G90G03H Absolute position counterclockwise circular helical interpolation instruction ○ 454
G91G03H Relative position counterclockwise circular helical interpolation instruction ○ 457
DEGEAR Electronic gear/32 bit hand wheel instruction ○ 470
错误！未定义
DECAM 32-bit electronic cam instruction ○
书签。
Electronic cam
ECAMCUT Electronic cam table switching instruction ○ 482
错误！未定义
ECAMTBX Electronic cam table generation instructions ○
书签。

PROTOCOL Communication port protocol setting ○ 525

错误！未定义
PORTPARA Modbus serial port parameter setting ○
书签。

STATION Modbus station number setting ○ 529

RS External communication instruction ○ 531
Communication 错误！未定义
RS2 External communication instruction ○
instruction 书签。

Single word data writing from TO/PLC to the module

TO ○ 540
(16-bit specification)
Double word data writing from TO/PLC to the module 错误！未定义
DTO ○
(16-bit specification) 书签。

FROM Read single word data from the module (16-bit specification) ○ 544

724 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
DFROM Read single word data from the module (32-bit specification) ○ 546
CCPID CCPID calculation ○ 583
错误！未定
CCPID_SHT CCPID_SHT calculation ○
PID control 义书签。
instruction PID PID calculation ○ 580
LAGCDL Large time-delay temperature control instruction ○ 601
FPID FPID calculation ○ 584
LEN String length detection ○ 604
LEFT Extract from the left side of the string ○ 605
RIGHT Extract from the right side of the string ○ 607
MIDR Any extraction from string ○ 609
$MOV String transfer ○ 611
String instruction MIDW Arbitrary replacement in string ○ 613
STR BIN 16-bit data → string conversion ○ 616
DSTR BIN 32-bit data → string conversion ○ 618
$+ Combination of strings ○ 621
INSTR String search ○ 623
ASC ASCII data input ○ 625
Step ladder diagram STL/RET Step ladder diagram instruction ○ 627
instruction IST Initialization state ○ 631
SOCOPEN Create socket link ○ 649
SOCCLOSE Close socket link ○ 651
Ethernet instruction SOCSEND Ethernet free-form communication sending ○ 652
SOCRECV Ethernet free-form communication receiving ○ 653
SOCMTCP Ethernet ModbusTCP communication ○ 654

Application instruction (by alphabetical order)

Reference
Classification Instruction Function LX5V
page
LD Normally open contact operation start instruction ○ 26
ABSD BIN 16-bit data absolute method ○ 188
ADD 16-bit addition operation ○ 26
ALT Bit device output inversion ○ 195
ANB Ladder diagram block series connection instruction ○ 33
A AND Normally open contact series connection instruction ○ 26
AND< Number less than comparison ○ 304
AND<= Number less than or equal to comparison ○ 304
AND<> Number unequal comparison ○ 304
AND= Number equal comparison ○ 304
AND> Number greater than comparison ○ 304

725 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Reference
Classification Instruction Function LX5V
page
AND>= Number greater than or equal to comparison ○ 304
ANDD< Number less than comparison ○ 306
ANDD<= Number less than or equal to comparison ○ 306
ANDD<> Number unequal comparison ○ 306
ANDD= Number equal comparison ○ 306
ANDD> Number greater than comparison ○ 306
ANDD>= Number greater than or equal to comparison ○ 306
ANDE< Floating number less than comparison ○ 308
ANDE<= Floating number less than or equal to comparison ○ 308
ANDE<> Floating number unequal comparison ○ 308
ANDE= Floating number equal comparison ○ 308
ANDE> Floating number greater than comparison ○ 308
ANDE>= Floating number greater than or equal to comparison ○ 308
ANDF Falling edge pulse series connection instruction ○ 30
ANDP Rising edge pulse series connection instruction ○ 30
ANDS<> String number greater than or equal to comparison ○ 310
ANDS= String number less than comparison ○ 310
ANI Normally closed contact series connection instruction ○ 26
ANR Alarm reset ○ 142
错误！未定
ANS Alarm setting ○
义书签。
ARWS Arrow switch ○ 216
ASC ASCII data input ○ 625
ASCI HEX code data → ASCII conversion ○ 246
BAND BIN 16-bit data dead zone control ○ 339
错误！未定义
BCC BIN16 and BIN8 bit data addition, subtraction and exclusive check ○
书签。

BCD BIN → BCD ○ 236

BIN 4-bit BCD → BIN ○ 237
BINDA BIN 16-bit data → Decimal ASCII conversion ○ 342
错误！未定
B BK- BIN 16-bit block data subtraction operation ○
义书签。
BK+ BIN 16-bit block data addition operation ○ 363
BKCMP< BIN 16-bit block data comparison ○ 373
BKCMP<= BIN 16-bit block data comparison ○ 384
BKCMP<> BIN 16-bit block data comparison ○ 373
BKCMP= BIN 16-bit block data comparison ○ 371
BKCMP> BIN 16-bit block data comparison ○ 376

726 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Reference
Classification Instruction Function LX5V
page
错误！未定
BKCMP>= BIN 16-bit block data comparison ○
义书签。
错误！未定
BMOV Batch transmission ○
义书签。
BON 16-bit data bit judgement ○ 143
错误！未定
BREAK Break cycle ○
义书签。
BTOW Byte unit data merge ○ 92
CALL Subroutine call ○ 48
CCD Check code ○ 251
CCPID CCPID calculation ○ 583
C CJ Conditional jump ○ 44
CML 16-bit invert transmission ○ 83
CMP 16-bit data comparison output ○ 85
CRC cyclic redundancy check instruction ○ 175
DABIN Decimal ASCII → BIN conversion ○ 344
DABSD BIN 32-bit data absolute method ○ 190
DACOS Single precision real number COS-1 operation ○ 259
DADD 32-bit addition operation ○ 110
DAND 3-bit data logic AND ○ 128
DASIN Single precision real number SIN-1 operation ○ 263
DATAN Single precision real number TAN-1 operation ○ 264
DBAND BIN 32-bit data dead zone control ○ 340
DBIN 8-bit BCD → BIN ○ 239
DBINDA BIN 32-bit data → Decimal ASCII conversion ○ 343
错误！未定
DBK- BIN 32-bit block data subtraction operation ○
义书签。
D
DBK+ BIN 32-bit block data addition operation ○ 365
DBKCMP< BIN 32-bit block data comparison ○ 383
DBKCMP<= BIN 32-bit block data comparison ○ 385
DBKCMP<> BIN 32-bit block data comparison ○ 375
DBKCMP= BIN 32-bit block data comparison ○ 372
DBKCMP> BIN 32-bit block data comparison ○ 377
错误！未定
DBKCMP>= BIN 32-bit block data comparison ○
义书签。
DBON 32-bit data bit judgement ○ 144
DCML 32-bit invert transmission ○ 84
DCMP 32-bit data comparison output ○ DCMP
DCOS Single precision real number COS operation ○ 265

727 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Reference
Classification Instruction Function LX5V
page
DCOSH Single precision real number COSH operation ○ 266
DDABIN Decimal ASCII → BIN32-bit data conversion ○ 345
DDEC 32-bit data decrement ○ 122
DDEG Single precision real number radian → angle conversion ○ 271
DDIV 32-bit division operation ○ 118
DDRVA Absolute positioning ○ 415
DDRVI Relative positioning ○ 413
错误！未定
DDSZR Origin return ○
义书签。
错误！未定
DDVIT 32-bit data relative positioning ○
义书签。
DEADD Single precision real number addition operation ○ 273
错误！未定
DEBCD Binary floating point → decimal floating point conversion ○
义书签。
DEBIN Decimal floating point → binary floating point conversion ○ 95
DEC 16-bit data decrement ○ 121
错误！未定
DECAM 32-bit electronic cam instruction ○
义书签。
DECMP Single precision real number comparison ○ 286
DECO Decode ○ 146
DEDIV Single precision real number division operation ○ 279
DEGEAR Electronic gear/32 bit hand wheel instruction ○ 470
DEMOV Single precision real data transmission ○ 282
DEMUL Single precision real number multiplication operation ○ 277
DENEG Single precision real number sign inversion ○ 285
DESQR Single precision real square root ○ 289
DESTR Single precision real number → string conversion ○ 290
DESUB Single precision real number subtraction operation ○ 275
DEVAL String → single precision real number conversion ○ 295
DEXMN Preferred instruction ○ 402
DEXP Single precision real number exponential operation ○ 299
DEZCP Binary floating point bandwidth comparison ○ 287
DFLT BIN integer → binary floating point number ○ 242
DFMOV 32-bit multicast ○ 80
DFROM Read single word data from the module (32-bit specification) ○ 546
DGBIN Gray code → BIN 32-bit data conversion ○ 254
DGRY BIN 32-bit data → Gray code conversion ○ 257
DHKY 32 digit key input ○ 224
DHOUR Hour measuring 32-bit ○ 323
DHSCR High-speed comparison reset ○ 72

728 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Reference
Classification Instruction Function LX5V
page
错误！未定义
DHSCS High-speed comparison set ○
书签。

DHSZ High-speed zone comparison ○ 73

DHTOS 32-bit data conversion of time data (hour, minute, second → second) ○ 320
DI Interrupt prohibited ○ 50
DINC 32-bit data increment ○ 120
DINT Single precision real number → signed BIN 32-bit data ○ 301
DIS 4-bit separation of 16-bit data ○ 170
DIV 16-bit division operation ○ 117
DLIMIT BIN 32-bit data high and low limit control ○ 348
DLOG10 Single precision real number common logarithmic operation ○ 302
错误！未定义
DLOGE Single precision real number natural logarithm operation ○
书签。

错误！未定
DMAX BIN32 bit The maximum value of 32-bit data ○
义书签。
错误！未定
DMEAN 32-bit data mean value ○
义书签。
错误！未定
DMIN BIN32 bit The minimum value of 32-bit data ○
义书签。
DMOV 32-bit transmission ○ 77
DMUL 32-bit multiplication operation ○ 116
DNEG 32-bit complement ○ 124
DOR 32-bit data logic OR ○ 126
DPLSR Pulse output with acceleration and deceleration ○ 417
DPLSV Variable speed operation ○ 425
DPLSY Pulse output ○ 427
DPRUN Octal digit transmission (32-bit data) ○ 258
DRAD Single precision real number conversion angle → radian conversion ○ 272
DRCL 32-bit cycle shift left with carry ○ 100
DRCR 32-bit cycle shift right with carry ○ 96
DROL 32-bit cycle shift left ○ 98
DROR 32-bit cycle shift right ○ 93
DRVA Absolute positioning ○ 415
DRVI Relative positioning ○ 413
DSCL BIN 32-bit unit scale (coordinate data of each point) ○ 352
DSCL2 BIN 32-bit unit scale (X/Y coordinate data) ○ 358
DSER 32-bit data search ○ 193
DSFL one word shift left of the n-bit data ○ 108
DSFR one word shift right of the n-bit data ○ 106
DSIN Single precision real number SIN operation ○ 267

729 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Reference
Classification Instruction Function LX5V
page
DSINH Single precision real number SINH operation ○ 268
DSORT2 32-bit data sorting ○ 161
DSQR 32-bit square root ○ 152
32-bit data conversion of time data
DSTOH ○ 326
(hour, minute, second → second)
DSTR BIN 32-bit data → string conversion ○ 618
DSUB 32-bit subtraction operation ○ 113
DSUM The ON bits of 32-bit data ○ 148
DSW Numeric key input ○ 219
DSWAP 32-bit high and low byte swap ○ 165
错误！未定
DSZR Origin return ○
义书签。
DTAN Single precision real number TAN operation ○ 269
DTANH Single precision real number TANH operation ○ 270
DTKY Numeric key input ○ 234
错误！未定
DTO Double word data writing from TO/PLC to the module (16-bit specification) ○
义书签。
DUTY Clock pulse generation instruction ○ 399
DVAL Character string → BIN 32-bit data conversion ○ 244
错误！未定
DVIT 16-bit data relative positioning ○
义书签。
错误！未定
DWSUM 32-bit data sum value ○
义书签。
DXCH 32-bit data exchange ○ 88
DXOR 32-bit data logic exclusive OR ○ 130
DZCP 32-bit data interval comparison ○ 90
DZONE BIN 32-bit data zone control ○ 362
错误！未定
DZRN Origin return ○
义书签。
ECAMCUT Electronic cam table switching instruction ○ 482
错误！未定义
ECAMTBX Electronic cam table generation instructions ○
书签。
E
ENCO Encode ○ 145
EI Interrupt allowed ○ 50
END Program end instruction ○ 43
FDEL Data deletion of data sheet ○ 394
FINS Data insertion of data sheet ○ 393
F FLT BIN integer → binary floating point number ○ 240
FMOV 16-bit multicast ○ 79
FOR~NEXT Cycle instruction ○ 错误！未定

730 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Reference
Classification Instruction Function LX5V
page
义书签。
FPID FPID calculation ○ 584
FROM Read single word data from the module (16-bit specification) ○ 544
G90G01 Absolute position line interpolation instruction ○ 432
G90G02 Absolute position clockwise circular interpolation instruction ○ 436
G90G02H Absolute position clockwise circular helical interpolation instruction ○ 448
G90G03 Absolute position counterclockwise circular interpolation instruction ○ 442
G90G03H Absolute position counterclockwise circular helical interpolation instruction ○ 454
G91G01 Relative position line interpolation instruction ○ 434
G
G91G02 Relative position clockwise circular interpolation instruction ○ 439
G91G02H Relative position clockwise circular helical interpolation instruction ○ 451
G91G03 Relative position counterclockwise circular interpolation instruction ○ 445
G91G03H Relative position counterclockwise circular helical interpolation instruction ○ 457
GBIN Gray code → BIN 16-bit data conversion ○ 254
GRY BIN 16-bit data → Gray code conversion ○ 256
HEX ASCII → HEX code data conversion ○ 249
错误！未定
HKY Hexadecimal numeric key input ○
H 义书签。
HOUR Hour measuring 16-bit ○ 321
HTOS 16-bit data conversion of time data (hour, minute, second → second) ○ 319
INC 16-bit data increment ○ 119
INCD BIN 16-bit data relative method ○ 197
I INSTR String search ○ 623
INT Single precision real number → signed BIN 16-bit data ○ 300
INV Invert the result of the operation ○ 34
IST Initialization state ○ 631
LD< Number less than comparison ○ 15
LD<= Number less than or equal to comparison ○ 15
LD<> Number unequal comparison ○ 15
LD= Number equal comparison ○ 26
LD> Number greater than comparison ○ 26
LD>= Number greater than or equal to comparison ○ 15
L LDD< Number less than comparison ○ 306
LDD<= Number less than or equal to comparison ○ 306
LDD<> Number unequal comparison ○ 306
LDD= Number equal comparison ○ 306
LDD> Number greater than comparison ○ 306
LDD>= Number greater than or equal to comparison ○ 306
LDE< Floating number less than comparison ○ 308
LDE<= Floating number less than or equal to comparison ○ 308

731 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Reference
Classification Instruction Function LX5V
page
LDE<> Floating number unequal comparison ○ 308
LDE= Floating number equal comparison ○ 308
LDE> Floating number greater than comparison ○ 308
LDE>= Floating number greater than or equal to comparison ○ 308
LDF Falling edge pulse operation start instruction ○ 30
LDI Normally closed contact operation start instruction ○ 26
LDP Rising edge pulse operation start instruction ○ 30
LDS<> String number greater than comparison ○ 310
LDS= String number equal comparison ○ 310
LEFT Extract from the left side of the string ○ 605
LEN String length detection ○ 604
LIMIT BIN 16-bit data high and low limit control ○ 347
错误！未定
MAX BIN16 bit The maximum value of 16-bit data ○
义书签。
MC Main control instruction ○ 58
MCR Main control instruction ○ 58
MEAN 16-bit data mean value ○ 149
MEF Pulse the result of the operation ○ 36
MEP Pulse the result of the operation ○ 36
MIDR Any extraction from string ○ 609
M MIDW Arbitrary replacement in string ○ 613
错误！未定
MIN BIN16 bit The minimum value of 16-bit data ○
义书签。
MOV 16-bit transmission ○ 76
MPP Operation result push, read, pop ○ 34
MPS Operation result push, read, pop ○ 34
MRD Operation result push, read, pop ○ 34
MTR Matrix input ○ 186
MUL 16-bit multiplication operation ○ 115
N NEG 16-bit complement ○ 123
OR One normally open contact parallel connection instruction ○ 26
OR< Number less than comparison ○ 304
OR<= Number less than or equal to comparison ○ 304
OR<> Number unequal comparison ○ 304
OR= Number equal comparison ○ 304
O
OR> Number greater than comparison ○ 304
OR>= Number greater than or equal to comparison ○ 304
ORB Ladder diagram block parallel connection instruction ○ 33
ORD< Number less than comparison ○ 306
ORD<= Number less than or equal to comparison ○ 306

732 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Reference
Classification Instruction Function LX5V
page
ORD<> Number unequal comparison ○ 306
ORD= Number equal comparison ○ 306
ORD> Number greater than comparison ○ 306
ORD> Floating number greater than comparison ○ 306
ORD>= Number greater than or equal to comparison ○ 306
ORE< Floating number less than comparison ○ 308
ORE<= Floating number less than or equal to comparison ○ 308
ORE<> Floating number unequal comparison ○ 308
ORE= Floating number equal comparison ○ 308
ORE>= Floating number greater than or equal to comparison ○ 308
ORF Falling edge pulse parallel connection instruction ○ 30
ORI one normally closed contact parallel connection instruction ○ 26
ORP Rising edge pulse parallel connection instruction ○ 30
ORS<> String number unequal comparison ○ 310
ORS= String number less than or equal to comparison ○ 310
OUT Output instruction ○ 37
OUT C Counter output ○ 63
OUT HSC High-speed counter switch ○ 69
OUT LC Long counter output ○ 64
OUT T Timer output ○ 63
PID PID calculation ○ 580
PLF Falling edge output ○ 42
PLS Rising edge output ○ 43
PLSR Pulse output with acceleration and deceleration ○ 417
PLSR2 Multi-speed positioning ○ 419
PLSV Variable speed operation ○ 425
PLSY Pulse output ○ 427
P
POP Read from the back of the data table ○ 389
PORTPARA Modbus serial port parameter setting ○ 529
PR ASCII code printing ○ 226
PROTOCOL Communication port protocol setting ○ 525
PRUN Octal bit transmission (16-bit data) ○ 131
PWM BIN 16-bit pulse output ○ 429
PWM PWM perimeter mode ○ 430
RAMP Rotary table proximity control ○ 199
RCL 16-bit cycle shift left with carry ○ 99
RCR 16-bit cycle shift right with carry ○ 94
R
REF IO refresh ○ 396
REFF Input refresh (with filter setting) ○ 398
RIGHT Extract from the right side of the string ○ 607

733 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Reference
Classification Instruction Function LX5V
page
RND Random number instruction ○ 401
ROL 16-bit cycle shift left ○ 97
ROR 16-bit cycle shift right ○ 92
ROTC Rotary table proximity control ○ 201
RS External communication instruction ○ 531
错误！未定义
RS2 External communication instruction ○
书签。

RST Reset instruction ○ 40

SCL BIN 16-bit unit scale (coordinate data of each point) ○ 349
SCL2 BIN16-bit unit scale (X/Y coordinate data) ○ 355
SEGD numeric key input ○ 228
SEGL 7SEG code hour and minute display ○ 229
SER 16-bit data search ○ 192
SET Setting instruction ○ 38
SFL n-bit shift left of the 16-bit data ○ 107
SFR n-bit shift right of the 16-bit data ○ 107
SFRD Shift read ○ 387
SFTL n-bit shift left of the n-bit data ○ 102
SFTR n-bit shift right of the n-bit data ○ 101
SFWR Shift write ○ 391
SIMASK Interrupt mask ○ 54
SMOV Bit shift ○ 81
SOCCLOSE Close socket link ○ 651
S SOCMTCP Ethernet ModbusTCP communication ○ 654
SOCOPEN Create socket link ○ 649
SOCRECV Ethernet free-form communication receiving ○ 653
SOCSEND Ethernet free-form communication sending ○ 652
SORT 16-bit data sorting ○ 155
SORT2 16-bit data sorting ○ 158
SQR 16-bit square root ○ 151
STATION Modbus station number setting ○ 529
STL/RET Step ladder diagram instruction ○ 627
STMR Special function timer ○ 204
错误！未定
STOH 16-bit data conversion of time data (hour, minute, second → second) ○
义书签。
STR BIN 16-bit data → string conversion ○ STR
SUB 16-bit subtraction operation ○ 112
SUM The ON bits of 16-bit data ○ 147
SWAP 16-bit high and low byte swap ○ 164
T TADD The addition of clock data ○ 312

734 WECON technology Co., Ltd.

 PLC LX5V Series Programming Manual (V2.3)
Reference
Classification Instruction Function LX5V
page
TCMP Clock data comparison ○ 327
TKY Numeric key input ○ 232
TO Single word data writing from TO/PLC to the module (16-bit specification) ○ 540
TRD Clock data reading ○ 316
TRH Conversion of wet and dry bulb temperature and humidity ○ 208
TSUB The subtraction of clock data ○ 314
TTMR Teaching timer ○ 206
TWR Clock data writing ○ 317
TZCP Clock data bandwidth comparison ○ 329
UNI 4-bit combination of 16-bit data ○ 171
V
VAL Character string → BIN 16-bit data conversion ○ 243
WAND 16-bit data logic AND ○ 127
WDT Watchdog timer ○ 61
WOR 16-bit data logic OR ○ 125
WSFL n-word shift left of the n-word data ○ 104
W
WSFR n-word shift right of the n-word data ○ 103
WSUM 16-bit data sum value ○ 153
WTOB Byte unit data separation ○ 168
WXOR 16-bit data logic exclusive OR ○ 129
X XCH 16-bit data exchange ○ 87
ZCP 16-bit data interval comparison ○ 89
ZONE BIN 16-bit data zone control ○ 361
错误！未定
Z ZRN Origin return ○
义书签。
ZRST Data batch reset ○ 172
ZSET Data batch set ○ 174
$+ Combination of strings ○ 621
$MOV String transfer ○ 611

735 WECON technology Co., Ltd.